Combined PNAP Ordiance PDF

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized
Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-1
Practice Note for Authorized Persons

Buildings Department 11
and Registered Structural Engineers
Landlord and Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance, Cap. 7

Demolished Buildings (Re-development of Sites) Ordinance, Cap. 337
Validity of Approved Plans
Approved plans forming the basis of an Exclusion Order under the Landlord &
Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance are normally excluded by Buildings Ordinance section 16(3A)
from the application of Buildings Ordinance section 16(3)(d). Consent applied for after more
than two years of approval will be given if it is still practical for the work to be completed within
the Re-development Order period.
Material Variation
2. For a project affected by an Exclusion Order, amendments as follows to the

approved plans would be deemed to be a "material variation" :
(a) a reduction in floor space of more than 10%; or
(b) a change in use of any part of the proposed building; or
(c) the involvement of other premises also subject to the Landlord and
Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance (e.g. by extension of the
project).
The authorized person (or his client's solicitors) must apply to the Lands Tribunal (Registrar,
Lands Tribunal, Wanchai Law Courts, Wanchai Tower, 12 Harbour Road, Hong Kong) for an
amending Exclusion Order.
3. Any approval given by the Building Authority under the Buildings Ordinance
does not imply that the plans will also be accepted under the Landlord and Tenant
(Consolidation) Ordinance.
Penalty-Free Extension
4. In case of delays to commencement of building works by the date laid down in an

Exclusion Order, penalty-free extension of one month may be granted by the Building Authority
upon request before expiry of the commencement period.
/5. Examples ....

- 2 -
5. Examples of circumstances which may justify penalty-free extensions are :
(a) inability to obtain vacant possession, subject to the applicant

having commenced legal proceedings and pursuing such
proceedings with due diligence;
(b) inability to obtain entry to adjacent property to construct adequate

shoring or other precautionary works required; and
(c) inability to obtain consent to commence demolition works for

other reasons beyond the control of the applicant.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/lO
First issued December 1974

This revision March 1994 (AD/D)
Index under : BO s16(3A) - Approved Plans

Demolished Buildings (Re-development of Sites) Ordinance, Cap. 337
Exclusion Orders
Landlord & Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance, Cap. 7
Material Variation
Re-development Orders

Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable Gross Floor Area

Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) and (b)
Calculation of Gross Floor Area

Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)R) 23(3)(a) stipulates that gross floor area
(GFA) is the area contained within the outer surface of external walls of a building
measured at each floor level. Any portions of this area not floored over must be included
in the plot ratio calculations.
2. However where large voids occur, a modification of B(P)R 23(3)(a) may be

granted on application in the following circumstances :
(a) in front of cinema and theatre balconies;
(b) in banking halls and shopping arcades;
(c) in single-staircase buildings in which cockloft floors are provided in

the ground storey;
(d) in auditoria, sporting halls (including squash courts), school halls and
religious institutions; and
(e) in main common entrance lobbies.
3. In the case of "split level" designs where the difference in level between
adjoining floors is less than 1 m, the floor may be regarded as being level for the purposes
of this regulation. For greater differences in level, the authorized person should clarify
with the Buildings Department before embarking on the project.
4. Subject to the special circumstances of each case, the Building Authority (BA) is
in general prepared to consider favourably application for modification in respect of :
(a) chimney shafts forming an integral part of a new building;
(b) fire refuge areas which observe the stated criteria (see Code of
Practice for Means of Escape);
(c) covered areas clearly intended for and designed as playgrounds (see
Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural
Engineers (PNAP) 116);
(d) swimming pool filtration plant rooms; and
(e) genuine and properly designed pipe-ducts with adequate access for
inspection and maintenance.
/5. Where ….
-2-
5. Where a curtain wall system forms the external face of a building, the BA is
prepared to accept the outer face of the structural elements, e.g. beams, columns and floor
slabs, as the external wall for the purpose of measurement of GFA and site coverage
where :
• The curtain wall system itself does not form part of the structural
system of the parent building;
• The system does not result in any additional floor area at a floor level;
and
• The projection of the system from the outer face of the structural
elements does not exceed 300 mm.
6. Cladding may take a variety of forms and as a general rule, should be

considered individually for the purpose of measuring GFA. In the case, however, of a
form of cladding which may be equated in its design to a curtain wall system, the method
of measure of GFA and site coverage given in paragraph 5 above may be adopted as
indicated in the sketches illustrating the above principle for the measurement of GFA and
site coverage at Appendix A.
7. External wall finishes may be disregarded for the purpose of measurement of

dimensions under B(P)R 23(3). However, no part of any wall finishes should project
beyond the site boundaries.
Non-accountable Gross Floor Area
8. Under B(P)R 23(3)(b), the BA may exclude from GFA calculation floor space
occupied solely by machinery or equipment for lift, air-conditioning, heating system or
any similar service. The phrase "any similar service" may generally be interpreted to
include water tanks, boiler rooms, electrical switch rooms, meter rooms, transformer
rooms, generator rooms, pump rooms, telephone equipment rooms, cable riser duct room,
CO2 rooms, hose reel closets, sewage treatment plant rooms and ducts for central
ventilation or smoke extraction system. In each case, both the premises for and the size
of any such feature should be justified. To guard against possible abuse, the BA will take
the following into consideration when considering exclusion of the above features from
GFA calculation for single-family residence or house type developments:
(a) There should not be any duplication in the provision of services when
GFA exclusions are also being separately applied for; and
(b) Only the minimum amount of GFA necessary for accommodating and
maintaining the services and commensurate with the development would
be allowed to be excluded. The authorized person may be required to
demonstrate why it is not possible to consolidate the provision of all
related services into multi-purposes or centralised rooms such that the
area which is excluded from GFA could be used for efficiently.
/9. For ….
-3-
9. For plant rooms and other features that are excluded from GFA calculation, the
enclosing walls/columns and the associated protected lobby, if any, solely serving the said
rooms or features and do not serve any other function in accordance with paragraph 11,
may also be excluded from GFA calculation.
10. Air-conditioning plant rooms to be excluded from GFA calculation should as a

rule be located outside the individual residential units. For an air-conditioning plant
room proposed with access within an individual residential unit, the authorized person
should justify why access to such room cannot be located outside the unit. In any event,
the provision and size of such rooms need to be justified before consideration for
exclusion from GFA will be given. In the event that such room is permitted to be
provided with access within the individual unit, such plant room should meet the following
criteria before it can be considered for exclusion from GFA calculation under B(P)R
23(3)(b) :-
(a) The floor of the plant room should have a level difference of a
minimum of 500 mm with the floor of the main accommodation;
(b) The plant room should have at least one side open, but railing, open
grille and lourve on the open side to parapet level are acceptable.
Enclosure above parapet level may be allowed where there is a need to
separate the intake air and exhaust air. Enclosure for the purpose of
compliance with paragraph 12.3 of the Code of Practice for Fire
Resisting Construction may also be allowed on the open side; and
(c) The open side should face into open air.
Where an air-conditioning plant room is not proposed, air-conditioning platforms,

complying with the requirements set out in PNAP 68, provided on the external elevations
of the building are not accountable for GFA calculation under regulation 23(3) of the
B(P)R.
11. The horizontal area of staircases and lift shafts should normally be measured for
GFA together with the floor through which they pass. However, where these features
pass through a floor accepted as not being accountable for GFA (by reason of the
captioned regulation), the area of the features may also be discounted, with one exception.
The exception is that entrance lobbies, lifts, staircases and exit corridors, other than those
solely serving the non-accountable floors, at the level(s) of main access to a building from
the street(s) should always be included in the measurement for GFA. In such locations,
these features have a local function and do not merely pass through a floor. For the
features passing through a floor that is partly accountable and partly non-accountable for
GFA, their exclusion from GFA either in its entirety or parts thereof will be considered on
a case-by-case basis taking into account their locations and functions. The principle is
that such features on a particular floor should be counted for GFA if the area they serve at
that floor is accountable for GFA calculation.
/Carparking ….
-4-
Carparking and Loading and Unloading Areas
12. Under B(P)R 23(3)(b), the BA has the discretionary power to disregard from
GFA calculations any floor space that he is satisfied constructed and intended to be used
solely for, inter alia, parking motor vehicles and loading and unloading of motor
vehicles. The BA generally accepts that public and private car-parks, and public
transport termini provided in buildings are space for parking or loading and unloading
of motor vehicles falling within the meaning of B(P)R 23(3)(b). In exercising his
discretionary power under B(P)R 23(3)(b) to disregard or not to disregard such area or
any part thereof from GFA calculation, the BA will determine each case on its merits
and take into account all relevant considerations including the design of the car-park
and the effect on public interest such as impact on infrastructure, density and building
bulk. In general, the BA will follow the following lines in his exercise of discretion :-
(a) Carparking spaces
(i) When a lot is subject to lease/grant conditions requiring the provision

or incorporation of a public carpark within a building or buildings, all
the required facilities and associated works, including service core
areas of such public carpark should be accountable for GFA
calculation.
(ii) For private carparking spaces which are intended for the use of the
occupants and their bona fide visitors of the parent building, the BA
may allow their exclusion from GFA calculation under B(P)R 23(3)(b).
In deciding on the number of car-parking spaces that could be excluded,
the BA will make reference to the standards set out in the Hong Kong
Planning Standards and Guidelines (HKPSG), the design and layout of
the car-park as well as the advice of the Commissioner for Transport.
For the avoidance of doubt, associated ramps and facilities passing
through floors accountable for GFA may be excluded from GFA
calculation if they are physically separated from and do not provide
access to the accommodation on the floors they pass through.
(iii) Where both private and public carparking spaces are proposed in the
same building and upon being satisfied with the design of the carpark,
the BA will assess the accountability of GFA on the following basis:
• Where private and public carparking spaces are provided on

separate floors, the floor space exclusively provided for private
carparking purposes on that floor will not be accountable for GFA
and the floor(s) provided exclusively for public carparking purposes
would be accountable for GFA under B(P)R 23(3)(a).
/y Where ….
-5-
• Where both private and public carparking spaces are provided on the
same floor, only the areas, including carparking spaces, driveways,
ramps, lift halls and staircases solely serving the private carpark
would be considered for exclusion from GFA calculation under
B(P)R 23(3)(b). Those public parking spaces, associated driveways,
lift halls, staircases, ramps which serve either the public carpark or
both the public and the private carparks will not be excluded from
GFA calculation. Moreover the areas used by the public carpark
and its associated facilities should be delineated on plans.
(iv) The area of driveways, ramps, staircases and lift halls at the level(s)
providing access to/ from a building for use by both private and
public carparks should be included in the GFA calculation.
(v) For the avoidance of doubt, any parking provision on open areas of a
site, or on an open podium roof, need not be measured for GFA.
(b) Public Transport Terminus (PTT)
The BA would take the advice of the Planning Department in determining the
effect of excluding PTT from GFA calculation on the infrastructure, density
and building bulk. As Planning Department has advised that the town
planning intention is that all PTT should count for GFA calculation unless
otherwise provided for in the relevant town plan, hence as a general rule,
unless otherwise specified in the relevant town plan or any specific planning
approval for the site, all PTT should be accountable for GFA.
(c) Loading and Unloading Areas
Areas for loading/unloading purposes would only qualify for exclusion from
measurement of GFA if they are directly associated with spaces specifically
earmarked for parking of motor vehicles for loading and unloading purposes
and in accordance with the minimum requirements as specified in lease
conditions or the HKPSG, whichever is the less. For instance, areas set aside
for loading/unloading detached container boxes in a container yard should be
measured for GFA.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
-6-
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/9 (VII)
First issue December 1974

Last revision July 2006
This revision April 2007 (AD/NB1) – (Paragraph 12 revised)
Index under : B(P)R 23(3) – Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable
Gross Floor Area
Cladding
Curtain wall system
Gross Floor Area Calculations
Gross Floor Area Exclusions
Non-accountable Gross Floor Area
APP-2
EXTERNAL WALL OF THE EXTERNAL WALL OF THE

BUILDING FOR THE PURPOSE BUILDING FOR THE PURPOSE
OF MEASUREMENT OF G..F.A./SITE OF MEASUREMENT OF G..F.A./SITE
COVERAGE COVERAGE
300 MM MIN.
FROM FLOOR
LEVEL 300 MM MIN.
FROM FLOOR
LEVEL
300 MM MIN.
FROM FLOOR
LEVEL
Practice Note for Authorised Persons

Nomination of an Authorized Person,

Registered Structural Engineer or Registered Geotechnical Engineer
to act in stead
When an authorized person (AP), registered structural engineer (RSE) or

registered geotechnical engineer (RGE), who has been appointed in respect of building or
street works, is incapacitated by illness or proposes to be temporarily absent from Hong
Kong, a temporary replacement should be nominated by submission of Form BA21
within 7 days. Buildings Ordinance section 4(2) and Building (Administration)
Regulation 23(2) refer.
2. While an AP, RSE or RGE may be appointed in respect of more than one
active project (i.e. with works in progress and/or applications currently or about to be
lodged with the Buildings Department (BD)), the AP, RSE or RGE nominating a
temporary replacement should -
(a) complete and submit one Form BA21 for all active projects as
defined above, a list of which is to be given in the Form to be
submitted in duplicate;
(b) in the case of a RSE or a RGE appointed in respect of more than

one project under different APs, submit one Form BA21 for all
active projects under each AP. A list of the respective projects is
to be given in the Form which should be signed by the AP
concerned;
(c) advise the nominee that if it is necessary for him to communicate

with BD in respect of any of the listed active projects he should
on every such occasion make brief reference to the fact that he
does so under the authority of an earlier submission of Form
BA21;
(d) advise the nominee that he cannot further nominate another

AP/RSE/RGE to act in his stead, and
(e) advise BD by letter within 7 days that the arrangements covered

by Form BA21 have ceased if he recovers from illness, or return
from overseas before the expiry date of the temporary
replacement given in the Form.
3. Under section 4(2) of the Buildings Ordinance, an AP/RSE/RGE may

nominate another AP/RSE/RGE to act in his stead ONLY under the following
circumstances :-
(i) the period must be temporary; AND
(ii) he is unable to act by reason of his illness or absence from

Hong Kong
/4…..
-2-
4. To avoid ambiguity and abuse of the Buildings Ordinance, Building

Authority (BA) considers that an acting period exceeding 3 months or at frequent
intervals is not temporary and such nomination may not be accepted by BA. Under
such circumstances, the owner may be advised to appoint another AP/RSE/RGE.
5. Upon receipt of an application, Buildings Department will formally

acknowledge the Form BA21 with a copy to the owner informing him the period and
reason of acting.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GR/CC/21
BD GP/BORD/75

Last revision August 2002
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (General amendments to include RGE)
Index under : AP, RSE or RGE - Nomination thereof to act instead

B(A)R 23(2) - Nomination of an AP, RSE or RGE to act instead
BOs 4(2) - Nomination of an AP, RSE or RGE to act instead
Nomination of AP, RSE or RGE to act instead
Water Supply and Wells
Where a development depends on a source of water supply other than

from the waterworks, the adequacy and probable effects of the supply should be closely
investigated before any design work is started. Application to the Water Authority for
the issue of a Certificate Regarding Water Supply Availability should be made early and
such certificate should be submitted together with the first submission of building plans.
2. Where the Water Authority certifies (on Form WWO 1004 or current
equivalent) under Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works
and Latrines) Regulation 10A(5) that a supply of water from the waterworks is not
available, permission may be considered upon application to obtain water from a well or
other sources.
Assessment of Demand
3. Demand for flushing and potable water should be assessed with regard to
Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines)
Regulation 10A(4). "Potable water" refers to a supply of water for the purposes of
Regulation 10A(2).
Flushing Supply
4. The quantity of flushing water required should be assessed in accordance
with the following standards :
User Unit Average

Demand
Domestic buildings per number of required soil 450 litres
fitment per day
Offices, factories, department stores, per number of required soil 450 litres
shops, public buildings and other non- fitment per day
domestic buildings of a like nature
Restaurants per seat per day 13.5 litres
Cinemas per seat per day 4.5 litres
Schools per head per day 18 litres
Hotels and boarding houses per room per day 90 litres
/Potable Supply ..
-2-
Potable Supply
5. In view of the diversity and degree of fluctuation in demand, potable

supply should be assessed on individual merits and should be satisfactory and sufficient in
all respects for the purposes for which potable water is supplied. Where in doubt, the
Water Authority should be consulted.
For Air-conditioning
6. The Water Authority has advised that neither a fresh nor a salt mains
water supply will be provided for evaporative type air-conditioning, except where
required in connection with a specific industrial process, and then only for the immediate
needs of that process.
Wells
7. Normally, wells may not be sunk on government land. Permission under

Building (Construction) Regulation 85 to sink a well in private land will be given only
where :
(a) the well yield is adequate; and
(b) the water abstraction will not adversely affect nearby

services, buildings, structures or land.
8. An application for permission to sink a well should be accompanied by the

following :
(a) a plan, including cross-sections, showing the proposed well

relative to any services, buildings, structures and land within
the area of groundwater drawdown likely to be caused by the
water extraction, existing ground conditions in the area and
any changes to such conditions to result from the
development for which this well is required;
(b) a plan showing details of the well design, including well

screen and electrode switching devices, if any, and a
statement of the proposed well development method;
(c) a statement of the proposed rate and duration of water

extraction per day; and
(d) a proposal for carrying out a well yield test.
9. If these cannot demonstrate that the nearby services, buildings, structures

or land will not be affected, the following additional particulars prepared by a Registered
Geotechnical Engineer shall be required :
/(a) a site…..
-3-
(a) a site investigation report specific to the proposed well

construction, with drillhole logs embracing the site area,
including measurement of groundwater/piezometric levels
and field permeability tests;
(b) a geotechnical assessment, supported by calculations, of the

effect of the proposed water extraction, in both the short and
long term, on affected services, buildings, structures or land.
The assessment should include groundwater changes, ground
movements and stability of adjacent buildings, structures and
land as appropriate; and
(c) if necessary, a detailed proposal for conducting field tests

either separately or in conjunction with the yield test, to
verify assumptions and predictions made in (b) above.
10. There are certain areas in the territory where, because of the geological
conditions, it is not advisable to sink wells to extract groundwater as this is likely to cause
excessive settlement. The Water Authority has agreed that flushing water will normally
be supplied whenever possible within these areas, which at present include Yuen Long
Town in Area Number 2 and Ma On Shan in Area Number 4 of the Scheduled Areas.
Well Yield Test
11. Where the period of pumping is to be less than 12 hours per day, the
manner and method of testing described in Appendix A are approved for the purposes of
Regulation 10A(7). Where the required quantity of water cannot be obtained with less
than 12 hours pumping per day or where there is concern over the long-term yield of a
well, a more sophisticated test may be required. For such cases, approval may be sought
for other methods, as recommended in BS 6316:1983, to be used.
12. Both the Buildings Department and the Geotechnical Engineering Office
should be notified in writing at least one week before the commencement of any well
yield test.
Certificates as to Supply of Water
13. The Certificates required to be made by authorized persons under Building

(Administration) Regulation 25A will be accepted in the model forms suggested at
Appendix B (for permanent connection) and Appendix C (in accordance with Building
(Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation
10A(7)). One extra copy of reports on well yield tests should be submitted for the
Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library via the Geotechnical
Engineering Office.
/The water…..
-4-
14. The water quality of potable water supply should be to the satisfaction of
the Building Authority. In this connection, a water sample examination report (obtainable
from the Water Authority on application), or other acceptable evidence, may be required.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/BL/P/3
GC 4/16/21
BD GP/BORD/75
First issue January 1975

Last revision March 1994
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras. 9 & 10 and Annex I to
Appendix A amended)
Index under : B(A)R 25A - Water Supply Certificate

B(SSF,P,DW&L)R - Water Supply
Flushing Water Demand, Assessment of
Water Supply, from Well or Other Sources
Well Yield Test
Appendix A
(PNAP 17)
(APP-4)
Well Yield Test Procedure
1. A yield test on a well shall be carried out only during the period from
1 December to 30 April.
2. The well yield test shall be carried out over a period of seven consecutive
days. The rate of pumping for the first to the sixth day shall be the proposed daily yield
averaged over the proposed daily pumping period for the well. This shall not be more
than 12 hours per day, to permit at least a 12 hour daily recovery period. (See paragraph
5 for the pumping rate on the seventh day).
3. The actual quantity of water pumped each day shall be measured by a

water meter. The quantity pumped shall not be calculated from the rated output of the
pump.
4. The water level in the well, measured from the ground surface, shall be
read at least 24 hours before the start of the test, immediately before the start and
immediately before the end of pumping each day. For the first and the sixth day of
pumping, the water level shall also be measured, with respect to the time when pumping
commences, at 1-minute intervals for the first 10 minutes, every 10 minutes from 10 to
120 minutes and every 1½ hours thereafter for the duration of pumping.
5. An examination for suspended soil particles in the pumped water shall be

made on the seventh day, at the full discharge rate of the installed pump and at the
maximum drawdown level.
6. The water pumped from the well shall be discharged into a proper drain or
water course and not into any position where it can percolate back into the well or the
aquifer.
Notes
(a) This test is used only to ascertain that the quantity of water required is available,
to test the recharge and recovery of groundwater and to test the adequacy of the
well screen and filter pack to prevent excessive soil loss.
(b) The duration of pumping per day should be long enough to provide the required
daily well yield. Under no circumstances should it be assumed that, because the
required flow can be met for part of a 24-hour period, it can continue to be met
for a 24-hour day for 7 days per week.
(c) The test results are acceptable if the quantity of water pumped each day is not less
than the required daily quantity and there is adequate recovery of groundwater
after the pumping is stopped each day, and the pumped water is clean when
examined as in paragraph 5 above.
(d) Well yield test results should be recorded in the form at Annex I.
Annex I to Appendix A
(PNAP 17)
(APP-4)
RECORDS OF WELL YIELD TEST
1. Quantity of flushing/potable* water required per day = litres.
2. Depth of well = m. (Depth to : top of screen = m.)

bottom of screen = m.)
3. Diameter of well = mm.
4. Type of pump : surface/submersible* (Make/Model No. ).
5. Groundwater level at 24 hours before test = m. (taken

on ).
6. For test carried out in accordance with the procedure described in Appendix A
to PNAP 17.
Quantity
Date of water Water level in
Time Hours abstracted well(s)
pumped (litres)
Start Stop Before After
Pumping Pumping
* Delete as appropriate.
(Rev. 12/2005)
Appendix B
(PNAP 17)
(APP-4)
(Model Certificate)
Certificate by an Authorized Person

Regarding Connection of Water Supply
Building (Administration) Regulations
Regulation 25A (1)(b)(i)/(1)(c)/(2(b)(i)/(2)(c)*
To : The Building Authority
BD Ref. : _______________________________ Date : ______________________
Address : _______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
Lot No. : _______________________________
Connection of (Flushing/Potable)* Water Supply from (Well/Source other than Well)*
I hereby certify that a permanent connection to the above building of a supply of

water from (a well/other source (state source)* has been made in accordance with
Regulation 10A(1)/(2)* of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,
Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations.
Signed __________________________________________
Authorized Person
Full Name in block letter __________________________________________
Certificate of Registration No. ________________ Expiry date _______________
* State as appropriate.
Appendix C
(PNAP 17)
(APP-4)
(Model Certificate)
Well Yield Test Certificate
Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works

and Latrines) Regulation 10A(7)(c)
To : The Building Authority
BD Ref. : _______________________________ Date : ____________________
Address : _______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
Lot No. : _______________________________
I hereby certify that a Well Yield Test has been carried out in accordance
with the approved well plan and the standard procedure described in Appendix A of
Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers No. 17 (or
state other approved alternative method)* and that the results shown in Annex I
attached are a true record.
Signed __________________________________________
Authorized Person
Full Name in block letter __________________________________________
Certificate of Registration No. ________________ Expiry date _______________
* State as appropriate.

Height of Storeys
Building (Planning) Regulations 3(3) & 24
This practice note clarifies the measurement of storey heights for the purposes
of Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R) 3(3) and 24.
2. It is the established practice of the Buildings Department to measure storey

heights, in terms of B(P)R 24, between structural members regardless of finishes such as false
ceilings, screeding, plastering and flooring. The same principle applies in measuring the clear
height of balconies in terms of B(P)R 3(3).
3. In the case of peripheral beams in walls, it may be difficult to adhere to the

required minimum height of 2.3 m to the underside. Accordingly, where beams project
internally from the face of external walls, a height of 2 m is permissible. Similarly, the
regulation should not inhibit provision of beams over doorways. These may be provided at the
required door height.
4. Although the minimum height applies generally to any part of building used as
an office or for habitation, it is recognized that the minimum clear height in staircases is 2 m
and that beams across narrow corridors (where a doorway could have been provided) need
only be at the appropriate door height. This is the "notional doorway" situation.
5. Please note that 2.5 m is the minimum height for environmental reasons. A
greater height would be preferable for occupants, especially in domestic buildings.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/14
First issued February 1976

This revision May 1994 (AD/D)
Index under : B(P)R 3 & 24 - Height of storeys

Height of storeys - B(P)R 3 & 24
PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS
BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 41
Shops and Department Stores

Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,
Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5
By virtue of sub-regulation (5)(a) of this regulation, the number of persons

employed or likely to be employed in a shop or department store shall be a matter for the
Building Authority to determine.
2. Accordingly, for the purposes of determining the number of persons for whom
sanitary fitments should be provided in shops and department stores the determination shall be
at the rate of 1 person for every 15 square metres of usable floor area.
3. The ratio of males to females for the purpose of sub-regulation (5)(c) should be
assumed to be 1:1 except that where a department store is designed for a particular company
or firm and it is known that the number of males to females which will be employed by them is
other than 1:1, this may be so stated in the schedule of sanitary fitments incorporated in the
plans and provision made accordingly.
4. For the purpose of assessing usable floor area any storage space over part of a
shop need not be included, where, however, there is a complete floor over a shop accessible
only from the shop the area of this should be included in the area of the shop for determining
the sanitary fitment facilities to be provided.
(A.G. Eason)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/SF/2
First issued July 1977

This update January 1990 (GBS/D)
Index under : B(SSFPDW&L)R 5(5)(a) - Shops and Department Stores

Shops and Department Stores - assessment of sanitary fitments

Application for Registration as Authorized Persons,

Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers
Under section 3 of the Buildings Ordinance (BO), the Building Authority

(BA) shall keep an authorized persons’ register, a structural engineers’ register and a
geotechnical engineers’ register. This practice note sets out the registration requirements
for authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered
geotechnical engineers (RGE).
Requirements for Registration as AP/RSE/RGE
2. Under section 3(7) of the BO, a person must not be included in the
AP/RSE/RGE register unless:
(a) he has obtained the prescribed qualifications; and
(b) he is recommended by the respective Registration

Committee for inclusion.
Qualifications for Registration as AP/RSE/RGE under Building (Administration)

Regulation 3
3. The prescribed qualifications for registration as AP, RSE or RGE are as

follows:
(a) A person shall not be included in the AP register unless

he is a registered architect, a registered professional
engineer (RPE) in the structural or civil engineering
discipline or a registered professional surveyor;
(b) A person shall not be included in the RSE register unless

he is an RPE in the structural or the civil engineering
discipline, and in the latter case unless he has such
practical experience in structural engineering as may be
approved by the Registration Committee; or
(c) Save for the transitional arrangements described in

paragraphs 8 and 11 below, a person shall not be included
in the RGE register unless he is an RPE in the
geotechnical engineering discipline; and
/(d) …..
-2-
(d) In addition the person should have, for a continuous

period of 1 year within the 3 years preceding the date of
his application, had such practical experience gained in
Hong Kong as the Registration Committee considers
appropriate.
Registration Committees
4. Under section 3(5) of the BO, the BA is to establish 3 panels with

sufficient members from whom he is to appoint committees to be known respectively
as Authorized Persons Registration Committees (APRC), Structural Engineers
Registration Committees (SERC) and Geotechnical Engineers Registration Committees
(GERC).
5. The function of the Registration Committee is to assist the BA in

considering applications for inclusion in the relevant register. The Registration
Committee will examine the qualifications and experience of the applicants and conduct
professional interviews with the applicants.
Professional Interviews
6. The scope of professional interviews for AP, RSE and RGE is detailed in
Appendix A.
Application for Registration as AP/RSE/RGE
7. Application for registration as AP, RSE and RGE should be submitted in

the specified form (Form BA 1) together with the prescribed application fee. In
preparing the application documents, applicants should make reference to the “Advisory
Notes for Completion of Form BA 1” which is distributed with the specified form.
Transitional Arrangement for RPE in the Structural or Civil Engineering Discipline

to Apply for Registration as RGE
8. The registration system for RGE is established under the Buildings

(Amendment) Ordinance 2004. Upon commencement of this new registration system for
RGE on 31 December 2004, an RPE in the structural or civil engineering discipline may,
within 12 months, i.e. on or before 30 December 2005, apply for registration as RGE
under section 53I of the BO, so long as the applicant complies with the following
conditions:
(a) He has such practical experience in geotechnical

engineering as may be approved by the GERC; and
/(b) …..
-3-
(b) For a continuous period of 1 year within the 3 years

immediately preceding the date of his application, he has
had such practical experience in geotechnical engineering
gained in Hong Kong as the GERC considers appropriate.
9. Applicants complying with paragraph 8 above shall be deemed to have

satisfied the prescribed qualifications for registration as RGE. The applicants are
required to attend a professional interview conducted by the GERC. The scope of the
professional interview is detailed in Appendix A.
10. Upon registration as RGE through the above transitional arrangement, the
registration shall be valid for 3 years provided that he remains as an RPE in the structural
or civil engineering discipline. However, RGE registered through this arrangement shall,
within 3 years from the date of registration as RGE, obtain the qualification of RPE in the
geotechnical engineering discipline in order to apply for renewal of his registration.
Transitional Arrangement for AP in the List of Engineers and RSE to Apply for
Registration as RGE
11. Upon commencement of the registration system for RGE on 31 December

2004, AP in the list of engineers and RSE may, within 12 months, i.e. on or before
30 December 2005, apply for registration as an RGE under section 53I of the BO. If the
applicant complies with the conditions specified in section 53I(2)(a) of the BO and the
detailed requirements as stipulated in PNAP 293 on “Registration of Authorized Persons
and Registered Structural Engineers as Registered Geotechnical Engineers”, the applicant
shall be deemed to have satisfied the prescribed qualifications for registration as RGE.
The BA will consider the applications without seeking the advice of the GERC.
Attendance of professional interview with the GERC is therefore not required. Upon
registration as RGE through this arrangement, the registration will be valid for 5 years
which is renewable as long as his name remains in the register of AP/RSE.
Retention and Restoration of Names in the Registers
12. Save for the RGE registered through the transitional arrangement
mentioned in paragraphs 8 to 10 above, the registration of AP, RSE or RGE shall be
valid for 5 years.
13. An application for retention of name in a register (i.e. renewal of

registration) should be submitted in the specified form (Form BA 1A) in accordance with
sections 3(9B) and 3(9C) of the BO. Retention applications received by the BA outside
the specified time limit (i.e. not earlier than 4 months and not later than 28 days prior to
the date of expiry of the relevant registration) under section 3(9C)(b) of the BO will not
be accepted.
/14. …..
-4-
14. A person whose name is removed from a register under section 3(11A),
3(11B) or 3(11C) of the BO may, within 2 years beginning on the date the relevant
registration expires, apply for restoration of his name to the relevant register. Application
for restoration should also be submitted in the specified form (Form BA 1B) in
accordance with sections 3(12) and 3(13) of the BO.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref: BD GR/AP/21
BD GR/CC/57
First issue: August 1977

Last revision: July 1994 (AD/SE, AD/LM)
This revision: effective from 31 December 2004 (AD/Sup)
– Registration of RGE added.
Overall content revised.
Index under: Registration of AP, RSE & RGE

AP, SE & GE Registration Committees
BOs3(5A)(c) – Professional Interview
Scope of Professional Interviews for Registration as AP, RSE & RGE
Transitional Arrangements for Registration as RGE
Retention and Restoration of AP, RSE & RGE
Appendix A
(PNAP 43)
(APP-7)
Scope of Professional Interviews for Registration as AP, RSE and RGE
An applicant must satisfy the Registration Committee on his suitability for

inclusion in the relevant register for which he applies. In this context, an applicant has to
demonstrate that he has adequate practical experience and general knowledge in his
profession to meet local requirements and to discharge his duties in Hong Kong. He will
also be expected to have acquired a working knowledge of the BO and allied matters: the
main criterion is a thorough understanding of general principles and fundamental
requirements.
2. The principal subjects upon which the Registration Committee is likely to

test an applicant's knowledge include:
(a) The objectives of the BO and Regulations and the mechanism of

control;
(b) The statutory role, functions and duties of an AP, RSE or RGE,
as the case may be, and those of the BA in respect of private
building development in Hong Kong;
(c) Sufficient general awareness of local conditions to practise

efficiently and effectively in Hong Kong without having to
make frequent enquiries on matters of common local
knowledge;
(d) For registration as AP:
A working knowledge of the BO and Regulations, relevant

codes of practice and such allied matters as the Town Planning
Ordinance and outline zoning plans, lease conditions and the
usual requirements of other authorities relevant to an AP in
Hong Kong; (An applicant should therefore be familiar with all
the processes from the evaluation of development potential of a
private lot through to the issue of an occupation permit.)
(e) For registration as RSE:
A working knowledge of the BO and in particular those

Regulations and relevant codes of practice pertinent to the
design and supervision of structural works;
/(f) …..
-1-
(f) For registration as RGE:
A working knowledge of the BO and in particular those

Regulations, relevant codes of practice, geotechnical standards
and technical guidance documents pertinent to the design and
supervision of geotechnical works;
(g) The procedures for an AP, RSE or RGE to follow in order to

meet local statutory requirements; and
(h) Practice notes, circular letters and other advisory information

published by government departments which are relevant to an
AP, RSE or RGE.
Reference Materials
3. A list of legislation and publications affecting the building industry can be

found in Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 115.
(Rev. 12/2004)
-2-

Chimneys and Flues
A chimney is a building as defined in the Buildings Ordinance. Chimneys and

flues should not only be structurally stable but also be protected from corrosion.
Structural Design
2. For the structural design of a chimney, special attention should be given to the
following points :
(a) Wind load
Provision for wind-excited oscillations should be given and

analyzed by aerodynamic methods. For circular chimneys the
---- simplified method in Appendix A may be adopted.
(b) Steel chimneys
(i) Design should be in accordance with the

appropriate provisions in the Code of Practice for
the Structural Use of Steel with the modifications
given in BS 4076:1989.
(ii) To control buckling, the allowable compressive

stress in the chimney structure should be taken as
115 MPa in the case of a chimney with effective
height to diameter ratio of less than 21 and
diameter to thickness ratio of less than 130; it
should be further reduced for higher aspect
ratios.
The 25% increase in allowable stresses due to

wind load should not be applied to the design of
the chimney.
(iii) Reduction coefficient should be applied to the

allowable stresses in steel where the temperature
is higher than 315°C.
(iv) Guys ropes provided as anchorage to a chimney

should be positioned at a minimum distance of
3 m below the outlet of the chimney to avoid the
corrosion action of the emergent combustion
products.
/In....
- 2 -
In view of the practical problems associated with

examination and maintenance, the guy ropes
should not be considered in strength and stability
calculations.
(v) Brackets constructed to provide resistance to

lateral displacement of the chimney and/or
supporting part or all of the weight of the
chimney should be positioned at distances not
exceeding 6 m apart. Materials, design and
construction of the brackets should comply with
the appropriate provisions of the Building
(Construction) Regulations.
Construction and Corrosion Protection
3. For construction and corrosion protection of chimneys and flues, the relevant
parts of BS 4076:1989, BS 4543:Part 2 and Part 3:1990 and BS 5854:1980 should be
followed. Attention should also be given to the following points :
(a) Height of chimney and flue
A chimney or flue should terminate in such a position that the

products of combustion cannot enter nearby windows or other
openings, fresh air inlets, mechanical ventilation inlets or
exhausts. The disposition is considered satisfactory if its height
is approved by the Director of Environmental Protection under
the Air Pollution Control Ordinance, Cap. 311, subject to a
minimum of 3 m above the highest point of its own roof or of
any adjoining structure, whichever is the higher.
(b) Heat transmission
A chimney or flue should be so placed and shielded as to be

accessible by maintenance personnel only. It should also be so
placed, shielded and as necessary insulated that the temperature
of the exposed faces would not cause danger to any person or
any part of any building.
The acceptable temperature is different in each case according to

the materials of the nearby parts of any building and the use of
the surrounding areas. The insulation required depends on the
acceptable temperature and the type and rate of fuel used. It is
impossible to specify common standards.
Calculations and justification should therefore be provided in

each case to verify compliance with the Building (Construction)
Regulations. In this connection, BS 5854:1980 provides some
guidelines.
/(c) Corrosion ....

- 3 -
(c) Corrosion protection
Both the exterior and interior surfaces of a steel chimney or flue

should have satisfactory protective treatment in accordance with
BS 4076:1989. Allowance for corrosion should be made in the
shell in addition to the thickness obtained from calculations for
structural stability. Normally, allowance of 3 mm would be
required for chimneys externally fitted with waterproof
insulation or cladding and internally lined and protected. For
unprotected chimneys, 4.5 mm should be provided for a design
life of ten years and 8 mm for 20 years. Unprotected oil-fired
steel chimneys are not recommended.
(d) Bimetallic action
Bimetallic action could adversely affect a chimney or flue, and

should be avoided. If it is essential in the design that two
dissimilar metals have to be connected, a suitable non-
conductive and water-impervious film or agent should be placed
between them.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/12/A
First issued September 1977

This revision July 1994 (AD/SE)
Index under : Chimneys

PNAP 45
Appendix A
APP-8
Wind-excited Oscillations of Circular Chimneys
Flexible slender structures are subject to oscillations due to wind action. It has
been found that chimneys of circular cross section oscillate more strongly across wind than
along wind. It is therefore reasonable to assume that the along wind oscillation will not cause
stresses greater than those calculated for the forces in the 1983 edition of the Code of Practice
on Wind Effects. For across wind oscillation, the following simplified approach adapted from
BS 4076:1989 may be applied :
(a) The Strouhal critical velocity V cr for the chimney is to be

determined by :-
Vcr = 5Dtƒ
where ƒ is the natural frequency of the chimney on its

foundations (in Hz), to be calculated analytically
or by the following approximate formula in case
of a regular cone :-
┌ ┐ ½
│ Ws │
500 (3Db-Dt) │ ─── │
│ W │
└ ┘
ƒ = ───────────────────────
h2
and h is the height of chimney (in m)
Dt is the diameter at top (in m)
Db is the diameter at bottom (in m)
W is the mass per meter height at top of structural

shell including lining or encasing, if any (in kg)
Ws is the mass per meter height at top of structural

shell excluding lining (in kg)
(b) If Vcr exceeds the design wind velocity given by equation (4) in
the 1983 edition of the Code of Practice on Wind Effects, severe
oscillation is unlikely and no further calculation is required.
/(c) If Vcr ....

- 2 -
(c) If V cr is less than the design wind velocity, the tendency to

oscillate C may be estimated by the following empirical
formula :-
┌ ┐
│ 10Dt2 1.5 Δ │
C = 0.6 + K │ ───── + ────── │
│ W Dt │
└ ┘
where Δ is the calculated deflection (in m) at the top of the

chimney for unit distributed load of 1 kPa
K is 3.5 for all welded construction, 3.0 for welded

with flanged and bolted joints and 2.5 for bolted
riveted or all riveted.
(d) If C is less than 1, severe oscillation is unlikely. If C is between

1 and 1.3 the design wind pressure for the chimney should be
increased by a factor C² If C is above 1.3 the fitting of
stabilizers or dampers should be provided to control oscillations.
Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208

Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(d)
Since the first publication of this practice note the Country Parks Authority has
considerably increased the number of designated or proposed country parks and special areas
to which section 10 (1) of the Ordinance applies.
2. Authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) are also
reminded that section 10(1) provides that :
"After the publication of a notice by the Authority under section 9(1), no new
development shall be carried out within the area of the proposed country park
shown in the draft map without the prior approval of the Authority."
3. Notwithstanding any action which the Country Parks Authority may take in
respect of proposals for new development of land that falls within a designated or proposed
country park or special area, Buildings Ordinance section 16 (1)(d) may be invoked to reject
any such proposals unless and until the prior approval of the Country Parks Authority has been
obtained. Failure to comply with any conditions attached to the Country Parks Authority's
approval may likewise result in the proposals being so rejected. It is therefore in the interest of
all concerned that, upon application in respect of the development of a site to which the
Country Parks Ordinance applies, that the Country Park Authority be consulted as soon as
possible.
4. APs and RSEs should therefore familiarize the locations of all country parks
and in this respect copies of plans, showing the locations and boundaries of such, may be
purchased from the Agriculture and Fisheries Department.
(A.G. Eason)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GP/LEG/23
First issued March 1978

Index under : BO s16(1)(d) - Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208

Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208

Oil Storage Installations

Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations
An oil storage installation is defined in section 2(1) of the Buildings

Ordinance as any tank having a capacity of not less than 110,000 litres or a group of
tanks (within the same cluster or bunded area) any one of which has a capacity of not less
than 110,000 litres, constructed above ground level for the purpose of storing petroleum
products.
2. The construction of an oil storage installation should not commence

without having first obtained approval and consent under section 14(1) of the Buildings
Ordinance.
3. An above-ground oil storage installation will be deemed to satisfy the

requirements of the Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations (the 'B(OSI)R') if it
meets the standards set out in the Code of Practice for Oil Storage Installations 1992.
4. An oil storage installation should not commence operation before a licence

to do so has been granted under the Regulations.
5. All existing oil storage installations and their associated works should have
been licensed under the Regulations. Any new installation and its associated works will
require a licence. Any alterations and additions (including a new tank) to an existing
installation or its associated works will require an endorsement in the licence for the
installation. As a prerequisite to the granting of a licence for a new installation, the
following documents in respect of the proposed operation instructions of the installation
and its associated works should be submitted for agreement :
(a) six copies of the proposed operation instructions in English

and one copy in Chinese (Although for licensing purposes
the operation instructions are written in English, it is
essential that they should also be written in Chinese to
ensure clear understanding of the operation by each grade of
personnel); and
(b) one set of the general arrangement plans.
In the case of an endorsement of alterations and additions in the licence of an existing

installation where operation changes are proposed, amended operation instructions and
general arrangement plans should also be submitted for agreement.
/6.It should……
-2-
6. It should be noted that an occupation permit and a certificate of general

inspection are required prior to the granting of a licence for new installations. For new
tanks in an existing licensed installation, the original licence should be returned with the
application for endorsement. The licence is renewed annually and the application must
be accompanied by the certificates of external inspection of the tanks as required under
Regulation 8(1)(b) of the B(OSI)R, in the form as attached at Appendix B, and certificate
of inspection of the associated works as required by Regulation 8(1)(c) of the B(OSI)R,
in the form as attached at Appendix C.
7. In addition, in accordance with Regulation 8(1)(a) of the B(OSI)R, a

general inspection must be carried out of all tanks internally not later than the tenth year
in the life of the tank. Thereafter, such inspection shall be carried out once in the fifth
year after the year in which the first inspection was carried out. Each certificate of
general inspection of a tank must be issued immediately after the inspection, in the form
as attached at Appendix A, to the licensee who shall then deliver it to the Building
Authority.
8. For the repair of or the alteration and addition to an existing installation,

two copies of the proposals, signed by a registered structural engineer, should be
submitted in order to obtain written authorization, as required under Regulation 10 of the
B(OSI)R. Where the repair works are considered to be extensive on the basis of the fact
and special circumstances of the particular case, or where the alteration and addition
involve non-exempted building works, approval under section 14(1) of the Buildings
Ordinance should also be sought. The normal requirements and procedures under the
Buildings Ordinance for carrying out building works apply.
9. There have been cases where partially constructed tanks are damaged
during a typhoon. Suitable precautionary measures should therefore be adopted during
the construction or repair of tanks in anticipation of unfavourable weather conditions.
10. Demolition of the whole or any part of an oil storage installation must be
carried out in such a manner as to minimize the risk of environmental pollution, fire or
explosion. A clear statement of the method of demolition to be employed should be
submitted for agreement and be to the satisfaction of the Building Authority before, or
with, the application for consent to commence work or the application for written
authorization, as the case may be. The guidelines and procedures as stipulated in the
attached Appendix D (Guidance Notes on Demolition Methods of Oil Storage
Installations) and Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural
Engineers 71 (Demolition Works - Measures for Public Safety) should be taken into
account in the design of the demolition methods.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/6/1 (II)
First issue May 1978

This revision August 2007 (AD/NB2) - Sections 1(a) and 12 in Appendix D revised
Index under : Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations

APP-10
APP-10
Appendix C
(PNAP 48)
(APP-10)
AUTHORITY OF HONG KONG
BUILDINGS ORDINANCE
(Chapter 123)
BUILDING (OIL STORAGE INSTALLATIONS) REGULATIONS
Regulation 8(1)(c)
Certificate of Inspection of Associated Works
To the Building Authority,
In accordance with the provisions of Regulation 8(1)(c) of the Building (Oil Storage Installations)
Regulations, I , Registered
Structural Engineer, hereby CERTIFY that I have inspected/supervised the inspection on
_____________________ of the associated works of the oil storage installation operated by
__________________________________________________________________________________
(company)
at ____________________________________________________________________________ (address)
on ______________________________________________________________________________ (lot no.)
and in my opinion the associated works are
fit for use for a further twelve months and the repairs listed in paragraph 2 below are required.
unfit for use until the repairs listed in paragraph 2 below are completed to my satisfaction.
2. The following repairs to the associated works are required :
Signature of Registered Structural Engineer
Date
Address of Registered Structural Engineer
c.c. Director of Fire Services

Appendix D
(PNAP 48)
(APP-10)
Guidance Notes on Demolition Methods of
Environmental Impacts
1. In order to minimize the environmental impacts arising from the

demolition of oil storage installations, the guidelines and procedures stipulated in the
following documents should be taken into account in the design of the demolition
methods :
(a) Environmental Protection Department Guidance Note for

Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation, Professional
Persons Environmental Consultative Committee Practice Note
1/93 and Practice Note 2/93 on Noise from Construction
Activities, obtainable from the Technical Secretary of the
Environmental Protection Department;
(b) Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural

Engineers 144 on Control of Environmental Nuisance from
Construction Sites; and
(c) The Air Pollution Control Ordinance on the submission of

Asbestos Investigation Report and Asbestos Management Plan, if
disposal of asbestos waste is involved.
Protection Hoarding
2. The work area is to be enclosed with a suitable hoarding to prevent

unauthorized access. Where only part of an oil storage installation is to be demolished,
or where the oil storage installation is to be demolished in stages, a fire screen should be
erected to separate the part being demolished from the remainder of the storage facility in
operation.
Gas Freeing
3. Full precautionary measures as recommended in the Institute of Petroleum

Marketing Safety Code should be carried out. A formal system of permit-to-work must
be exercised on site by the demolition contractor. Precautions should be taken to prevent
fire or explosion caused by gas and vapour particularly when removing tanks or pipes
which might have contained flammable liquid or gas.
4. All pipes and tanks should be certified gas-free by a competent person. A

competent person in this respect is a person who has successfully completed a training
program established and maintained in accordance with standard industry practices.
/This …..
-1-
This training program can be conducted by qualified industry personnel within a company
or by a qualified commercial firm. In either case, the company
contracting/hiring/utilizing the competent person will be responsible for the judgement of
the competency of an individual. The qualification course should include a specific
program of training skills to be developed; a regular course of instruction; a means to
evaluate the successful completion of the course; and a formal certification process to
confirm that the individual is competent to perform the gas-freeing of an oil storage tank
prior to demolition. The evaluation can consist of a written test; hands-on performance to
pre-determined skill standards; or a combination of the two. The Standing Advisory
Committee established by regulation 4 of the Building (Oil Storage Installations)
Regulations may review the adequacy of the training.
Sludge and Chemical Waste
5. The type of sludge and chemical waste that will arise from the demolition
work should be identified and arrangements made for its disposal. Disposal will have to
comply with the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulations.
Discharge of Waste Water
6. Where tanks or pipes are to be emptied or removed, precautionary

measures should be taken to avoid the spillage of any petroleum products which may
cause contamination to the ground. Any contaminated materials such as absorbent or
cleaning stuffs should be disposed of properly. The drainage system and the oil
interceptors should be kept intact and maintained in a serviceable condition until all the
tanks, pipes and sludge have been removed.
7. Except during discharge of effluent in accordance with the operating

procedures of the oil interceptors, the seaboard valves on the oil interceptors should
remain closed and locked at all times during demolition until all the tanks, pipes and
sludge have been removed. Discharges of effluent from oil interceptors must comply
with the conditions of any licence under the Water Pollution Control Ordinance
governing the standard and quantity of effluent discharged from that oil storage
installation.
Bunded Areas
8. As far as possible the demolition of floors and walls of the bunded area
should not commence before all tanks and pipes spills have been removed. Where this
is not possible adequate precautions must be taken to prevent the possibility of petroleum
products escaping to the environment.
Programme of Work
9. When part of the oil storage installation will be in operation during

demolition work, due safety consideration must be taken for the operating environment
and the demolition work should be programmed accordingly. The agreed operation
instructions should be complied with at all times.
/Drainage …..
-2-
Drainage
10. Precautions should be taken to avoid contaminated washing water or

other liquids from entering the storm drainage system, either accidentally during heavy
and violent rainstorms or deliberately as a result of washing down. A plan of the storm
drains should be available on site at all times.
Extreme Weather Conditions
11. Consideration should be given to the possibility of extreme weather

conditions occurring during demolition of the tanks, and suitable precautionary measures
should be adopted.
Contamination Assessment Report
12. A contamination assessment report is required before the work

commences. Guidelines on the preparation of a contamination assessment report are set
out in Environmental Protection Department Guidance Note for Contaminated Land
Assessment and Remediation. The report shall include the following :-
(a) information on activities carried out on site including those in the

past if there were changes;
(b) an inventory of chemical/hazardous substances stored/used on site

with the locations clearly shown on site diagrams and
composition of hazardous substances precisely given;
(c) details of manufacturing processes if there are any; and
(d) soil sampling plan and analytical method that will be adopted.
13. The contamination assessment helps to identify the specific lots of soil
which are contaminated and need treatment or special disposal, or which can be
disposed of in the normal manner. Relevant remedial work will be required wherever
necessary.
Soil Samples
14. After demolition of the above ground structures and facilities, tests on
soil samples for hydrocarbons and lead content should be carried out as specified in the
contamination assessment report.
(Rev. 8/2007)
-3-

Street Improvement Schemes

Submission of Building Plans in respect of Lots affected thereby
Notwithstanding the Roads (Works, Use and Compensation) Ordinance,

Cap 370, any street improvement scheme approved before its enactment in 1982 remains
valid. The following principles continue to apply to such schemes and lots affected thereby.
Street Improvement Plans
2. Street improvement plans are only an indication of desirable improvements.

They do not constitute any representation by Government that they will be implemented nor
are they indicative that Government will resume the whole or any part of any property to
implement any street improvement.
3. In this respect, the existence of an approved street improvement plan which

may affect a property cannot be regarded as providing a basis upon which a property owner
can claim for compensation or damages.
Building Plans
4. The approval under the Buildings Ordinance of building plans which conform
to an approved street improvement plan does not imply that the latter plan will be
implemented, or that compensation or damages will be paid.
5. The approval under the Buildings Ordinance of building plans which do not
conform to an approved street improvement plan must however be regarded as entirely without
prejudice to any action Government may take under any other enactment, including resumption
of the whole or any part of the affected property.
Generally
6. For development or re-development of a lot which appears to be affected by an
approved street improvement scheme, it may save time and obviate possible abortive work if
the authorized person makes an enquiry to the Highways Department to ascertain
Government's intention, before embarking upon formal submission of building plans for
approval.
(A.G. Eason)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GR/BL/TP/4
First issued May 1978

Index under : Street Improvement Schemes


Prestressed Ground Anchors in Building Works
The use of permanent prestressed ground anchors in a project imposes a

long-term monitoring commitment on the maintenance parties which usually involves
appreciable recurrent cost and, should deficiencies be revealed, remedial works may be
difficult and expensive. The past records show that compliance with this criterion by the
owners is not practically viable. For these reasons, Buildings Department takes the view
that the permanent ground anchors requiring long term monitoring are short-lived
temporary building works and the Building Authority has the power to refuse to accept
such temporary building works for incorporation into a permanent building under the
Buildings Ordinance.
2. In the exceptional circumstances where permanent prestressed ground

anchors are considered acceptable, their provision and installation in building works
should be in accordance with the requirements and procedures given in Appendix A.
( CHOI Yu-leuk )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/GEO/5
BD GP/BORD/A/19
First issue June 1978

Last revision October 1996
This revision January 1999 (AD/SE & GGE/I) - Para. 2 & Appendix A amended
Index under : Ground Anchors

Appendix A
PNAP 50
APP-12
In the exceptional circumstances where permanent prestressed ground

anchors are considered acceptable, their provision and installation in building works
should be in accordance with the requirements given in the Model Specification for
Prestressed Ground Anchors (GEOSPEC 1). In conjunction with the publication of
GEOSPEC 1, a Prior Approval System for Permanent Prestressed Ground Anchors
(PASA), operated by the Geotechnical Engineering Office came into effect. The PASA
confers a level of acceptance on proprietary ground anchor systems (Approved Anchor
Systems) and on different types of ground anchors (Approved Anchor Types) within each
Approved Anchor System. The object of the PASA is to ensure consistent and
satisfactory standards in the provision of ground anchors and to save time for designers,
contractors, suppliers and approving authorities in avoiding repetitive checking of the
design of components and assembly details. The PASA therefore simplifies the
processing of submissions for building works incorporating ground anchors. It must
however be pointed out that the PASA does not remove any of the responsibilities of the
authorized persons (AP) and registered structural engineers (RSE) under the Buildings
Ordinance. Submissions including anchor systems not under the PASA may still be made
in the usual way. Further details of the PASA, and definition of terms, are given in
GEOSPEC 1.
2. A list of the current Approved Anchor Systems and Approved Anchor

Types is available free from the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering
Library. Copies may also be obtained by writing to the Technical Secretary of the
Geotechnical Engineering Office, Civil Engineering Department.
3. Approved Anchor Types in the Prior Approval list when supplied and
installed in compliance with the relevant Prior Approval Documents are considered
technically acceptable to the Building Authority. Where permanent prestressed ground
anchors under the PASA are to be used in a private project, the RSE would normally be
required to provide the following information in relation to the anchors in the submission
for approval :
(a) a plan showing the location, inclination and length of the anchors
required;
(b) the Anchor Class (as defined in GEOSPEC 1), design working load
and design free anchor length of each anchor together with supporting
justification including geotechnical information and design
calculations;
(c) which anchors are to be subjected to Suitability Tests and Extended

Acceptance Tests;
(d) the compressive movement which must be allowed for between the
anchor pad and the fixed length during stressing;
(e) details of the anchor pad provision; and

/(f)....
-1-
(f) arrangements for long-term monitoring, including the schedule for
future monitoring, provision of access and the agreement of the
relevant maintenance party that it is willing to undertake the required
long-term monitoring and maintenance.
4. In addition, the RSE will be required to submit plans and sections of the
proposed anchored structure showing site boundaries and geotechnical information
together with his own anchor design calculations. The RSE will also be required to
furnish with the submission, plans of all adjacent buried and surface public utility services
and adjacent buried and surface structures and to demonstrate that anchors will not cause
damages. Plans and design calculations relating to other works not related to anchors
should be submitted in the usual manner.
5. Prior to consent application for works in relation to the anchors, the RSE
should submit additional plans for approval, giving the name of the Approved Anchor
System and the Approved Anchor Types adopted, the specification of any materials which
may need to be replaced, the schedule and procedures for future monitoring and
guidelines on the interpretation of future monitoring results; the name and experience of
the anchor installation contractor to be employed should also be submitted. The
installation contractor must be suitably experienced in the installation of the adopted
Approved Anchor System and should therefore be selected from the list of Nominated
Anchor Contractors as specified in the Prior Approval Documents for the Approved
Anchor System. Conditions and requirements under Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)
may be imposed for such standards of workmanship and qualified supervision as
appropriate, and consent to the anchoring works may be refused if any of the above
information is not provided to the satisfaction of the Building Authority or is in conflict
with the requirements of the PASA.
6. For the purpose of checking on site the adequacy of the ground anchors,
RSEs are advised to maintain a certified true copy of the full set of the Prior Approval
Documents on site prior to commencement of the approved anchor works. The RSE shall
ensure that the provision, installation, testing and monitoring of the anchors is in
accordance with the Prior Approval Documents.
7. After installation of any anchor system, the RSE should submit to the
Buildings Department (BD) an ‘as built’ location drawing showing the full length and
details of each anchor installed together with the following information, which may have
been shown in the approved plans or required as conditions to consent :
(a) the name of the Approved Anchor System and Approved Anchor
Type;
(b) the specification for any materials which may need to be replaced;
(c) the design load of each anchor;
(d) a summarized ‘as built’ record of total length, bond length, free
length, angle of inclination, descriptions of all strata encountered in
drilling, quantity of grout injected and pressures, used for each
anchor;
/(e)....
-2-
(e) the dates of all stages of installation, testings and monitoring;
(f) all anchor stressing records and test records including those for
trial anchors, Suitability Tests, Acceptance and/or Extended
Acceptance Tests;
(g) a record of the monitoring results taken to date;
(h) the schedule and procedures for future monitoring; and
(i) guidelines on the interpretation of future monitoring results.
8. Monitoring of prestressed ground anchors is essential throughout their

service life to ensure their continued satisfactory performance. The requirements for
monitoring are given in GEOSPEC 1. It is therefore essential that the parties responsible
for subsequent maintenance are consulted and their agreement obtained before prestressed
ground anchors are adopted and that they are provided with complete ‘as built’ details.
9. In accordance with GEOSPEC 1, testing of existing grease in the anchor

heads is to be undertaken during anchor monitoring, in addition to the normal anchor
inspections and residual load measurement. During the past few years, the Geotechnical
Engineering Office (GEO) has received some queries on the method of determination of
the chloride, nitrate and sulphide ion contents in the grease. The GEO has issued
Corrigendum 1/98 (May) and Corrigendum 2/98 (September) to clarify the method of
extraction of water-soluble ions and of the method of calculation of the soluble ion
contents. These corrigenda are attached to the Appendix and AP/RSEs are requested to
take these into account when undertaking work in the monitoring of prestressed ground
anchors.
10. In the past, submissions have sometimes proposed the provision of ground
anchors extending outside the site boundary into public or private streets, government
land or adjacent private land. Ground anchors can give rise to unacceptable consequences
such as the obstruction of new works or new public utility services, and, in addition, their
existence could inhibit the development of land. Furthermore, an undesirable situation
could result should damage to property or public utility services be caused during
installation. Therefore only in exceptional circumstances will approval be given to
submissions of any new development incorporating ground anchors outside the site
boundary.
11. If it is intended to extend the ground anchors outside the site boundary into
government land, application to the Land Authority (Lands Department) for permission
should be made at the early stages of design. Where it is intended to extend the anchors
into adjacent private land, the specified Form BA5 for the site formation works should
include the lot number of the adjacent private land, to indicate the acquiescence of the
adjoining owner.
This revision January 1999 (Para. 9 added & paras. 10 & 11 re-numbered)
-3-
Annex to Appendix A
PNAP 50
APP-12
MODEL SPECIFICATION
FOR PRESTRESSED GROUND ANCHORS (GEOSPEC 1)
1989 Edition (Hong Kong Government)
CORRIGENDUM No. 1/98 (May)
Table 1 Replace Note 3(a) with the following :

Properties of Grease “(a) Weigh, accurate to 0.001g, about 5g of grease into a
(Page 75) separating funnel, add 70ml of hexane and shake the
mixture until the grease is completely dissolved.”
Add Note 3(g) at the end of the table :

“(g) For the purpose of calculating the chloride, nitrate
and sulphide ion contents, the concentration should
be determined as parts per million by mass of the
final aqueous extract.”
Notes : (1) Note 3(a) is amended to specify the use of hexane as the organic
solvent. This revision is to enable more effective separation of the
organic solvent from the aqueous extract in the extraction process
during the grease testing.
(2) Note 3(g) is added to clarify for users the intended calculation
method for chloride, nitrate and sulphide ion contents.
-1-
MODEL SPECIFICATION
FOR PRESTRESSED GROUND ANCHORS (GEOSPEC 1)
1989 Edition (Hong Kong Government)
CORRIGENDUM No. 2/98 (September)
Table 1 Replace 3(a), 3(d) and 3(f) with the following :

Properties of Grease “(a) Weigh, accurate to 0.001g, 5g±0.05g of grease into a
(Page 75) separating funnel, add 70ml of hexane and shake the
mixture until the grease is completely dissolved.”
“(d) Add, to the second separating funnel containing the

combined water extract, about 20 - 30 ml of hexane,
gently swirl the mixture and again allow for
complete separation of the 2 layers.”
“(f) Carry out a blank determination, following the same

procedures, with the same amount of reagents, as the
sample determination. Subtract the corresponding
blank value, if any, from each of the water-soluble
ion determinations to obtain the corrected values of
these ion determinations.”
Notes : (1) Note 3(a) is amended to prescribe the acceptable tolerance in the
weighing of the grease sample.
(2) Note 3(d) is amended to using hexane as the organic solvent

consequent to revising Note 3(a) in Corrigendum No. 1/98 (May).
(3) Regarding Note 3(f), it is necessary and common practice to conduct

a corresponding blank determination to obtain a “real” value of the
target analysis determination.
(4) Regarding Note 3(g) in Corrigendum No. 1/98 (May), the term “mass
of the final aqueous extract” shall be interpreted as the mass of
deionized water used for the extraction of water-soluble ions in the
grease sample. The mass or the volume of organic solvent (hexane)
for dissolving the grease sample shall not be included in the
calculation of water-soluble ion contents.
-2-

Submission of Certificate of Completion of Building Works

Application for Occupation Permit (OP)
and Submission of Record Plans and Information
Submission of Certificate of Completion of Building Works
Upon the completion of buildings works, a certificate of completion of

building works not resulting in a new building, (Forms BA14/14A), or resulting in a new
building (Form 12/13) should be submitted in accordance with Building (Administration)
Regulation 25. While there is no statutory time limit under the Buildings Ordinance for
processing such certificates, the Buildings Department will generally provide a reply to
Form 14/14A within 28 days advising on the acceptance of the completed works or the
outstanding issues to be rectified. As a certificate of completion of new buildings and
application for OPs are usually submitted together in Form BA12 or 13, they will be
processed together within 14 days in accordance with section 21 of the Buildings
Ordinance.
2. If the same contractor is employed for both the foundation works and the
superstructure works for a new building or in the alteration and addition works to an
existing building, where spread footing foundation with excavation depth not exceeding
4.5m is adopted, the certification of completion of both the spread footing and
superstructure works in such cases may be made in the Form BA12/13 or a single Form
BA14, as the case may be, and a separate Form BA14 for completion of the spread
footing works is not required.
Simultaneous Submission of Amended Building Plans and Application for OP
3. A Form BA 12/13 is sometimes submitted at or about the same time as the

submission of amended plans for approval. This would complicate the processing
process. In line with the declaration on Form BA 12 or 13 that the new building has
been erected in accordance with the plans approved, the Building Authority (BA) takes
the view that authorized persons (AP)/registered structural engineers (RSE)/registered
geotechnical engineer (RGE) should submit and secure approval of amendment plans in
advance of an application for OP. The exception is that minor positional deviations
from the approved plans which do not contravene the Buildings Ordinance, Cap. 123 and
Regulations may be acceptable.
/Submission …..
-2-
Submission of Record Plans
4. Where several alterations have been made to the original design, the BA
may require, under Building (Administration) Regulation 46, the submission of "new
plans" showing the building as completed.
5. However, for those projects where amendments to the original building

plans have subsequently been approved, APs should submit a set of general building
plans with the application for occupation permit, amalgamating all the plans approved by
the BA and thereby representing the building as completed. Each of those plans should
bear either the signed and dated approval chop applied by the BA or a chop giving the
AP's personal certification of the plans being identical to those approved by the BA on
the date specified. To limit the volume of paper, the BA would accept plans
photographically reduced to not less than a ratio of 1:200.
6. Record plans should not contain any amendments which have not been
approved.
7. In addition, the Commissioner of Rating and Valuation (CRV) has

requested that, for all newly completed buildings, one set of record plans be supplied to
him for rating purposes. As record plans are now mostly produced from computer
softwares such as AutoCAD or Microstation, the CRV would welcome if AP could
also submit, on a voluntary basis, a CD-ROM containing the softcopy of the record plans
in AutoCAD or Microstation format. The CRV has committed that the CD-ROM and
the softcopy of the record plans will only be used for relevant rating purposes and will
not be released to other Departments or parties. If AP is willing to facilitate CRV in
discharging his duty, the additional set of plans, together with the CD-ROM (the frontage
is marked with “CD-ROM containing plans for the CRV”) if any, may be included in the
submission to the Buildings Department for transmission to the CRV.
Submission of Schedule of Building Materials and Products
8. Under the Buildings Ordinance, the AP, RSE, RGE and registered
contractor (RC) have responsibilities to supervise building works including the selection
and application of building materials and to certify compliance with relevant provisions of
the Buildings Ordinance upon completion of works. To expedite the processing of an
application for OP, the BA requires the submission of a schedule under Building
(Administration) Regulation 44, confirming the use of accepted building materials and
products in construction.
9. The schedule should be submitted with an application for OP. The AP

should confirm and certify in the schedule the application and performance of building
materials and products in compliance with the relevant provisions of the Buildings
Ordinance and Regulations; the RC should confirm the use of those building materials
/and …..
-3-
and products in construction. Except for regularly used building materials, the schedule
should cover all materials and products not specified on the approved plans, the
application of which would involve the structural integrity and fire safety of the building,
and the cast iron pipes and fittings as stipulated in Practice Note for Authorized Persons
and Registered Structural Engineers 282. A sample schedule is provided at
Appendix A.
10. Where appropriate, a schedule should also be submitted on completion of

building works not resulting in a new building, such as alteration and addition works to
an existing building.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/10 (IV)

BD GR/BORD/93 (II)
BD GR/OP/4/M
BD GR/OA/177
First issue July 1978

This revision November 2007 (AD/NB1) (new para 2 added)
Index under : Record Plans

Schedule of Building Materials and Products
Submission of Amended Building Plans and Application for an
Occupation Permit Simultaneous
Submission of Record Plans
Submission of Schedule of Building Materials and Products
Form BA 14
Form BA14A
Appendix A
(PNAP 53)
(APP-13)
Certificate of Accepted Building Materials and Products
BD Ref. : Date :
Re : __________________________________________________________
(Address of development site)
Part A (to be certified by AP)
I, (name in full) _______________________________, authorized person,

confirm that accepted building materials and products have been specified in the above
building construction. Pursuant to Building (Administration) Regulation 44, I duly
endorse the attached Schedule of Building Materials and Products (Annex A. 1 & A. 2).
2. I hereby certify that the building materials and products listed in the
attached Schedule are acceptable products under relevant building regulations and that I
am satisfied with the application and performance of these products.
Signature of authorized person

Certificate of Registration No.:
Date of expiry of registration:
Part B (to be certified by RC)
3. *I/We, (name in full) __________________________________________,

* registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the
**________________category, hereby confirm that the accepted building materials and
products listed in the attached Schedule have been used and properly applied in the above
building construction.
Name of the person appointed to

act for the registered contractor for
the above works
Signature
Certificate of Registration No.:
* Delete whichever is inapplicable
** Enter the name of the sub-register for the category of specialized work
(Rev. 12/2005)
Annex A. 1
Schedule of Building Materials and Products
Re : ____________________________________________________________________
(A) Fire Resisting Products
Building Product Name of Fire Resisting Compliance with Details of Test or Assessment Report Remarks/
Product Name Manufacturer Performance# Comments
Relevant Building
(minutes)
and Place of Regulations & Codes
Manufacture Integrity Insulation Name of Name of Report Date of test / Validity
of Practice
(City and laboratory laboratory / no. assessment date
Country) accreditation body assessing report
organization
a) Fire resisting *
doorset
b) Lift landing *
door
c) Fire resisting *
glazing
d) Fire-stop or sealing
system in
wall/floor/curtain
wall, etc
e) Others (e.g.
proprietary products,
fire shutter, etc)
# The performance on stability has to be demonstrated where applicable.

* Corresponding legend in approved plan should be specified where applicable
_________________________________
Signature of Authorized Person
___________________
Date
Annex A.2
Schedule of Building Materials and Products (cont’d)
(B) Other Building Materials and Products
Building Product Name of Compliance with Details of Test or Assessment Report Remarks/
Product Name Manufacturer and Relevant Building Comments
Place of Regulations & Codes
Name of laboratory Name of laboratory / Report no. Date of test / Validity date
Manufacture (City of Practice
accreditation body assessing organization assessment
and Country)
report
a) Glazing barrier
b) Cast iron pipes and

fittings
c) Others
I confirm that the above mentioned building products have been tested or assessed as stated and hereby certify that the application and
performance of these products comply with the relevant Building Regulations.
__________________________________
___________________
Date
(Rev. 12/2005)
Practice Note for Authorized Persons,
Buildings Department Registered Structural Engineers and APP-14
Registered Geotechnical Engineers
Cinemas and Other Places of Public Entertainment

in Non-domestic Buildings or Composite Buildings
Cinemas
Under regulation 49B of the Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R), a

cinema or cinemas accommodating not more than 2,000 people in aggregate may be
situated in any storey or storeys of a non-domestic building or the non-domestic part of a
composite building. A pair or group of such cinemas may share exits, foyers, waiting
spaces, vestibules and projection rooms. Apart from the relevant provisions of the
Buildings Ordinance and the requirements in the Code of Practice for the Provision of
Means of Escape in Case of Fire (the ‘MOE Code’), the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting
Construction (the ‘FRC Code’) and the Code of Practice for Means of Access for
Firefighting and Rescue (the ‘MOA Code’), the requirements stipulated in this practice
note shall also apply to such cinemas.
Shared Exits
General Requirements
2. Notwithstanding paragraph 23.2 of the MOE Code, cinemas in a non-

domestic building or non-domestic part of a composite building may share the exit routes
with other accommodations of non-domestic use in the same building, subject to
compliance with the following requirements:
(a) all cinema boxes should be provided with a dedicated smoke

extraction system and other fire services installations to the
satisfaction of the Director of Fire Services;
(b) all cinema boxes should be separated from other accommodations

with fire resisting walls and floors having adequate fire resistance
period (FRP) as specified in the FRC Code. Every door to a cinema
box should have an FRP of not less than that required for the walls
of the cinema box. Door openings at cinema boxes giving access to
the cinema foyer(s) or the adjoining non-domestic accommodations
are not required to be provided with a protected lobby under this
situation;
(c) Fire separation should be provided between the cinema boxes and
the cinema foyers in accordance with the requirements in (b) above.
Such fire separation is not required if the smoke extraction system is
also provided to the cinema foyer(s) to the satisfaction of the
Director of Fire Services and, in such case, adequate fire separation
/should …..
-2-
should be provided between the foyers and other accommodations

of the building. Any opening made in the separating walls between
the cinema foyers and the adjoining non-domestic accommodations
for communication should be protected by a door or a fire shutter
with the same FRP as the wall;
(d) The exits that serve both the cinema and the adjoining
accommodations should be accessible from the common circulation
area of the building without having to pass through other private
premises;
(e) If a staircase is directly connected to a cinema or a group of cinemas

at any one storey where occupants of the cinemas do not need to
pass through the adjoining non-domestic accommodations to reach
the staircase, the entire staircase should be constructed in
compliance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 17.2 (b) and
26.2 of the MOE Code;
(f) The shared exits should have adequate widths and sizes, based on
the total capacity of the cinemas and the adjoining non-domestic
accommodations in accordance with the requirements set out in
paragraphs 4 to 7 below;
(g) In a composite building, the exit routes of the cinemas must be

separated from the exit routes of the domestic parts of the
building;
(h) The exit routes of the cinemas including those shared exits should
discharge to streets of not less than 4.5m wide. Two of the exit
routes from each floor should discharge into different
thoroughfares; and
(i) The cinemas are not situated at basement.
Entrance to a Cinema
3. The entrance to a cinema or to the cinema foyer may be provided through

the circulation areas of the adjoining non-domestic accommodations, such as shopping
arcade, subject to compliance with the requirements mentioned above.
Width of Exit Routes
4. The width of each exit route and the total width of all the exit routes from
the cinemas should be not less than the width shown in Table 2 of the MOE Code. In the
case of any cinemas or portion thereof which are 12m or more above pavement level, the
width of each exit route and the total width of all the exit routes should be not less than that
required in paragraph 25.1, 25.3 and 25.4 of the MOE Code.
/5. …..
-3-
5. Where a cinema or a group of cinemas share the exit routes with any part of
the adjoining non-domestic accommodations at the same storey of the building, the total
numbers and minimum width of the exit routes required for the cinemas and that part of the
adjoining accommodations designated to share the exit routes with the cinemas should be
determined in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 4 above, based on
the total number of persons of both the cinemas and the relevant part of the adjoining
accommodations.
6. If the required width of a shared exit route on a particular floor is greater

than that required for the floors below, the exit staircase from that particular floor
downward to the ground level should be of the width not less than that required for that
particular floor.
Horizontal Exits
7. Subject to the following requirements, some of the exits from the cinemas
may discharge through the adjoining non-domestic accommodations (e.g. shopping arcade)
to the protected staircases or routes on the same floor provided that:
(a) the width of such exits from a cinema should be not more than
half of the total width of exits required for that cinema; and
(b) the common circulation areas of the adjoining non-domestic

accommodations, including the cinema foyer through which exits
from the cinemas will discharge, should have a floor area of not
less than 0.5m2 per person based on the sum of:
(i) the total number of persons in the cinemas which is

allowed in the design for evacuation through such exits to
the adjoining non-domestic accommodations, calculated
on a pro-rata basis by reference to the width of such exits
and the total width of the exits required for the cinemas;
(ii) the number of persons in the cinema foyer calculated at a

ratio of one person per 0.5m2 of the floor area of the foyer;
and
(iii) the number of persons in the circulation areas of the

adjoining non-domestic accommodation calculated in
accordance with Table 1 of the MOE Code.
Gangways and Seatways
8. The seating layout of the cinemas should comply with the following
requirements:
(a) The maximum length of a row of seats in a cinema box should not
exceed 12m for a seatway with gangway on one side only, and
24m for a seatway with gangways on two sides; and
/(b) …..
-4-
(b) The number of seats in a row should not be more than that set out
in Table A in accordance with the width of seatway.
Table A – Maximum number of seats in a row
Width of Seatway Maximum number of seats in a row

(mm) Gangway on one side Gangway on two sides
300 to 324 7 14
325 to 349 8 15
350 to 374 9 18
375 to 399 10 20
400 to 424 11 22
425 to 449 12 24
450 to 474 12 26
475 to 499 12 28
500 or more Limited by the maximum Limited by the maximum
length of seatway of 12m length of seatway of 24m
The width of seatway is the minimum clear horizontal distance between

the back of one seat unit and the nearest projection of the seat unit in the
row behind. Where seats tip up automatically, the width of seatway
should be measured between the back of one seat unit and the maximum
projection of the seat unit behind when the seat is in the tipped-up
position.
9. Gangways of not less than the width shown in Table B should be provided.
Table B – Minimum width of gangways
No. of persons served Minimum width of gangways

Less than 500 1 100 mm each
501 – 1000 1 200 mm each
1001 – 1500 1 350 mm each
over 1500 1 500 mm each
Projection Rooms
10. All projectors and the associated equipment shall be placed within a
projection room or projection rooms which are separated from the cinemas and other
accommodations by walls and floors having an FRP of not less than 1 hour. Every door to
a projection room shall have a leakage rate of not exceeding 3m3/hour/m(head and jambs
only) when tested at 25 Pa under BS 476: Section 31.1 and with FRP of not less than 1
hour. The above requirements shall not apply to cinemas where no film projector, or
electric arc, xenon, or other light source projection equipment which generates
hazardous gases, dust or radiation, is used.
/11. …..
-5-
11. The exit routes from the projection rooms should comply with
requirements in the MOE Code. However, an elevated projection room associated to
one cinema box only may be provided with only one exit if the sum of its direct distance
and travel distance complies with paragraph 14(3)(b) of the MOE Code. The exit or
one of the exits from such projection room may discharge through the seating area of
the cinema box it serves to the exit staircase.
12. A projection room suite, if not provided with natural ventilation, must be
mechanically ventilated to the open air by an independent system.
Cinema Foyers
13. Accommodation for persons awaiting admission required under regulation

49E of the B(P)R shall be provided on the basis of 0.5m² per person at a ratio of one in six
persons for whom seating accommodation is provided.
Cinemas in Basements
14. Cinemas in basements should comply with the requirements in paragraph

23.3 of the MOE Code. In addition, the following requirements apply:
(a) Foyers
The foyers shall be located on the ground floor. The minimum size
of the foyer shall be based on 0.5m² per person at a ratio of one in
three persons for whom seating accommodation is provided.
(b) Lifts
All lifts serving other floors may open into the cinema or cinemas
through a protected lobby.
The fireman's lift shall open into the ventilated lobby in the fire-
fighting and rescue stairway and such lobby shall give access to the
cinema boxes.
(c) Separation
All parts of a cinema or cinemas must be separated from other parts

of the buildings by walls, floors or other elements of construction
having a FRP of not less than 4 hours. Reference should also be
made to paragraph 6.2 and 15 of the FRC Code.
Installation of Cinema Seats
15. It is acknowledged that extensive renovation and fitting out works will
usually be carried out by the cinema operators after the issue of the occupation permit (OP)
for the building in which the cinema is situated or after completion of A&A works to
/the …..
-6-
the cinema premises. In order to minimize unnecessary waste in the replacement of seats,
the Building Authority will not require the installation of cinema seats prior to the issue of
OP, or the submission of Form BA14 certifying completion of A&A works, as the case
may be, provided that the overall layout of gangways and seatways are properly
demarcated on site and an undertaking from the developer/Authorized Person is submitted
confirming that the seats would be installed before an application for the cinema licence is
made.
Other Places of Public Entertainment
16. The requirements set out in the preceding paragraphs may also be
applicable to and shall be acceptable for other places of public entertainments (PPE) as if it
is a cinema provided that the conditions set out in the preceding paragraphs for cinemas are
complied with.
17. Where the aggregate population of all other PPE (i.e. there is no cinema or
theatre) in the building is not more than 500 persons in a non-domestic building not having
polluting industrial undertakings or the non-domestic part of a composite building, the site
of such PPE premises may be permitted to abut on one thoroughfare if the said
thoroughfare is an acceptable Emergency Vehicular Access and Director of Fire Services
does not have any adverse comment on the arrangement. Similarly, modification of the
requirement of the Building (Planning) Regulation 49A may be considered for such PPE
premises with a total capacity in aggregate not more than 500 persons in such buildings.
Cinema and other Places of Public Entertainment with Capacity of Less Than 50
persons
18. A PPE including cinema with a capacity not exceeding 50 persons may
share the exit routes with other non-domestic accommodations in the same building and the
requirements stipulated in this PNAP and in Part III of the MOE Code on means of escape
for places of public entertainment do not apply to such a premises, provided that:
(a) the total capacity in aggregate for all such premises, each having a
capacity not exceeding 50 persons, in the same building is not
more than 150 persons;
(b) such premises is not situated in basement;
(c) any projection room, if provided, shall comply with the

requirements specified in paragraphs 10 to 12 above; and
(d) a cinema foyer, where applicable, is provided in accordance with

paragraph 13 above.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
-7-
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/2 (V)
This PNAP is previously known as PNAP 54

Last revision September 2005
This revision April 2010 (AD/NB1) - Paras. 16 & 17 added, paras. 15 & 18 amended.

Site Formation
Temporary or Permanent Filling Work
Authorized persons (APs), registered structural engineers (RSEs) and

registered geotechnical engineers (RGEs) should be aware of the potentially disastrous
consequences of flowslides of loosely placed, unretained earth fill. Regrettably, examples
of inadequate compaction are still found on or adjacent to construction sites.
2. Where in the opinion of the Building Authority (BA) the failure of a fill
slope arising from private building works could endanger the public, the BA will require
the AP/RGE to submit for approval suitable drawings of the filling work. These
drawings should specify the standards laid down in Appendix A attached. The RGE
appointed shall give periodic supervision and make such inspections as may be necessary
to ensure that the filling works are being carried out in general accordance with the
provisions of the Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved by the BA, and
the supervision plan prepared in compliance with the technical memorandum issued under
section 39A of BO, and qualified supervision imposed under BO s.17(1)(6)(e) as set out
in PNAP 83.
3. Prior to filling work, the AP/RGE should give notice to the BA of the date
of commencement of the work.
4. During construction, the AP/RGE should submit monthly reports to BD

giving records of tests on compaction of fill slopes together with a covering assessment
on the adequacy of compaction. The RGE should ensure that the soil at test location of
the in-situ density test shall be of the same type and source to the material used for
maximum dry density determination. The reports should be signed by the RGE. The
contents of the covering assessment should include :
(a) a summary of the results of in situ density tests, laboratory

compaction tests and relative compaction of the fill,
highlighting areas of non-compliance with the specified
compaction standards; and
(b) details of any corrective measures taken to rectify areas of

inadequate compaction.
Records of compaction tests in accordance with Appendix A should also be kept on site
for inspection by the officers of the Buildings Department (BD) and Geotechnical
Engineering Office (GEO).
/5. Where….
-2-
5. Where there is reason to believe that the placed fill may be loose, the BA
will arrange for field checks to be carried out, initially by GCO probes, and
supplemented by observations of fill materials in trial pits if an appreciable cobble and
boulder content in the fill is suspected. The AP/RGE will be required to arrange for
labourers to carry out the GCO probes and trial pit excavation.
6. If loose fill is detected, the AP/RGE must arrange for the in situ density
tests of the loose layer to be carried out in the presence of officers of BD and GEO.
Where extensive loose fill is found which could pose a significant threat if not rectified,
the BA will issue a Cease Works Order under Buildings Ordinance section 23 or 24A.
7. Upon completion of the filling work and prior to submitting certificate of

completion of site formation works and seeking an occupation permit, the AP/RGE
should submit to the BD:
(a) "as-built" plans and sections of the work showing its

relationship to existing and proposed buildings; and
(b) complete records of in situ density tests and laboratory

compaction tests and relative compaction of the fill, all to
be in accordance with Appendix A.
8. If structural works are involved, the RSE is to sign the structural

calculations and structural assessment reports. The RSE is also to certify completion of
the structural works.
9. The issue of an occupation permit will normally be refused under

Buildings Ordinance section 21(6)(a) if temporary fills have not been removed from site
or if permanent fills, the failure of which would endanger the public, have not been
formed in compliance with Appendix A.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/GEO/3
BD GP/BORD/75

Last revision June 1994
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras.1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 and
Appendix A amended,
para. 8 added)
Index under : Filling work
Site formation
Appendix A
(PNAP 55)
(APP-15)
Standards for Filling Work
(1) The in situ field dry densities of compacted materials forming the peripheral
portion of an earth fill slope shall be not less than 95% of the maximum dry
density described in item (2) below.
(2) The maximum dry density and optimum moisture contents shall be determined in
accordance with the standard given in Geospec 3 – Model Specification for Soil
Testing. Each soil type shall be tested when first used and thereafter at the same
time as every set of field density tests are obtained. Records shall be kept,
identifying on drawings the soil type, plan location and elevation reference to
Principal Datum of each test together with the maximum dry density and optimum
moisture contents. Graphs of dry density vs moisture contents, laboratory test
record sheets and a complete soil description are to be kept in a companion folder.
(3) The in situ field density and moisture contents shall be determined in accordance
with the standard given in Geospec 3 in determination of the relative compaction
achieved. The number of determinations for each batch of fill material shall be as
stated in Table 1 below. Records shall be kept, identifying on drawings the soil
type, plan location and elevation reference to Principal Datum of each test
together with dry density of soil tested, moisture contents and relative compaction
achieved (%). The field sheets, calculation sheets and a complete soil description
are to be kept in a companion folder. When only a small amount of fill (depth
less than 1 m and total volume less than 300 m3) is proposed, the frequency of in
situ density testing may be reduced if the in situ density tests are supplemented by
the results of penetration tests.
(4) The relative compaction of fill material shall be determined in accordance with the
standard given in Geospec 3. As a general principle, it is essential that the
maximum dry density determination was carried out on same batch of soil type
and source corresponding to the test location of the in-situ density test.
(5) When the tests in (2) and (3) above are to be carried out, only laboratories
accredited under the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS)
for the relevant tests shall be employed.
/Table 1
-1-
Table 1
Number of Determinations for Moisture Content and Relative Compaction Achieved
Size of area of No. of determinations

Description
fill in batch * per batch *
Area of fill in 0 - 100 m² 3
excavations for
structures, pits and
trenches and
on formations
100 – 500 m² 2 for each 100 m² or part thereof
Exceeding 500 m² 1 for each 100 m² or part thereof
Other areas of fill 0 - 1 ha 4 for each 1000 m² or part thereof
1 - 10 ha 3 for each 1000 m² or part thereof
Exceeding 10 ha 2 for each 1000 m² or part thereof
* A batch of fill material is any quantity of fill material

of the same type and has similar properties
throughout.
(Rev. 12/2005)
-2-
Cladding Works
This practice note amalgamates Practice Notes for Authorized Persons

and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 59 and 256 in respect of cladding works.
PNAP 256 is withdrawn with immediate effect.
2. Cladding means a facing or architectural decoration additional to the

external walls of building: e.g. aluminium or metal cladding, polished granite slabs or
limestone cladding, marble facing and the like. Cladding should comply with the
performance requirements stipulated in the Building (Construction) Regulation 39 in
respect of material type, fixings, strength and durability.
3. Cladding shall be provided with sufficient permanently flexible joints

horizontally and vertically to cater for differential movement in the cladding and in the
structure to which it is attached. All external anchors, dowels and fixings should be
of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant materials. Any metal dowels and fixings
securing the cladding panels should be suitable, permanent and adequately protected
from corrosion. For testing of anchors and cladding panels, see paragraphs 9 to 15
below.
Submission of Cladding Plans
4. Where cladding is to be affixed to any part of the exterior of a building,

details such as the location and material should be shown in the general building plan
for approval by the Building Authority. When the cladding to be installed is above 6
metres from the adjoining ground level, in addition to the building plans, details such
as the thickness, strength, durability, and type of the cladding, material of fixings and
sequence of support should also be shown in the structural plans. Failure to do so
may result in delay or refusal to give approval to the cladding submission. As regards
the fixings of stone cladding, sand/cement bedding and/or epoxy bonding alone is not
considered a suitable and permanent fixing.
5. The following details are required to be included in the structural plans

for cladding for submission to the Building Authority for approval:
(a) structural framing and details of structural elements
excluding any unnecessary shop fabrication details;
(b) elevations including location of expansion joints;
(c) anchors and support details;
(d) design standards and codes of practice;
/(e) …..
-2-
(e) material specifications for structural steel, aluminium

alloy, granite/marble and anchors;
(f) workmanship specifications for welding, galvanization

and measures to overcome bi-metallic effects; and
(g) structural calculations comprising design check on the

parent structure, analysis on the structural adequacy
and stability of the proposed cladding system, element
design for granite/marble, aluminium or metal cladding
and deflection check on major load carrying members,
if applicable.
Separate Registered Structural Engineer
6. In view of the speciality of cladding works, a separate Registered

Structural Engineer (RSE) may be appointed to prepare the design and to supervise
the carrying out of such works. Under such circumstances, the specified Forms BA4
and BA5 indicating the appointment of the separate RSE and the scope of works for
which he/she is responsible are required to be submitted together with the plans
submitted for approval. Upon completion of the works, the separate RSE so
appointed is required to certify satisfactory completion of the works in accordance
with Building (Administration) Regulation 25(3).
7. When structural details for cladding works are submitted by the separate
RSE, the submission should be accompanied by an assessment report prepared by
him/her giving an account of the effect of the proposed works to the parent structure.
The assessment report should be appended with a statement signed by the project RSE
to confirm that he/she is fully aware of the connection details and the effect of the
works on the parent structure.
8. The separate RSE who is appointed for the cladding works shall be
responsible for the supervision of the construction of such works, including the
installation of any cast-in anchorage e.g. anchor plates, cast-in embeds and through
bolts, etc., in the parent structure except in the event where the cast-in anchorage has
been pre-installed in the parent structure prior to his/her appointment. For such
cases, the structural details and layout of the pre-installed parts should be given in the
superstructural plans to be submitted for approval by the project RSE who shall then
be responsible for the supervision of the installation of such parts. The separate RSE
should refer to the pre-installed connection details when designing the cladding works
and should co-ordinate with the project RSE for necessary amendment if different
connection details are to be used.
/Tests …..
-3-
Tests on Anchors
9. On-site strength tests should be carried out on a representative number of

each type and size of drilled-in anchors for those parts of the cladding above 6 metres
from the adjoining ground level. Such tests are necessary to verify the performance
and workmanship of the anchors installed and should be carried out under the
direction of the RSE or Authorized Person (AP).
10. Each representative anchor should be tested by pull-out test to

demonstrate that its pull-out capacity is not less than 1.5 times the recommended
tensile load as specified by the anchor manufacturer. The tested anchor should be
considered satisfactory if it does not show any signs of separation, plastic deformation
or deleterious effect during the test.
Tests on Stone Cladding Panels
11. Stone cladding is a natural material. The mechanical properties, physical

properties and chemical properties can vary considerably between different types and
grades of stones. Tests on stone cladding panels are required to be carried out to
verify the characteristic strengths adopted in the design and to form part of the quality
assurance during construction. The characteristic strengths shall be not less than three
times that of the designed strengths used.
12. When stone cladding is to be used, the following tests are required to be
carried out for each type of stone:
(a) flexural strength test of dimension stone to ASTM C880 –

Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension
Stone or to BS EN12372 – Natural Stone Test Methods,
Determination of Flexural Strength under Concentrated
Load or to other appropriate equivalent standards; and
(b) strength test of individual stone anchorage to ASTM

C1354 – Standard Test Method for Strength of Individual
Stone Anchorages in Dimension Stone or to other
appropriate equivalent standards.
13. As limestone is highly susceptible to acid rain and may deteriorate

quickly when being used as exterior cladding material, in addition to paragraph 12
above, aged strength testing to simulate weathering due to extreme temperature
change and extreme moisture content change should be carried out for limestone
cladding to demonstrate that the residual flexural and anchorage capacities are not less
than 80% of those obtained in the standard tests specified in paragraph 12 above. The
aim of aged strength testing is to simulate the conditions in which limestone panels are
fully saturated and return to their driest conditions and to simulate the critical
temperature changes during their intended life.
/14. …..
-4-
14. At least 5 test specimens are selected at random from batches of stone
delivered to site for each of the test specified in paragraphs 12 and 13 above.
15. The test should be carried out by or under the direction and supervision
of a testing agency independent of the supplier of the stone cladding. The test results
should be certified by the testing agency, and endorsed by the AP/RSE to confirm that
the test results have reached the required characteristic strengths adopted in the
design. No consent for the commencement of the stone cladding works will be given
until the test reports specified in paragraphs 12(a), 12(b) and 13 above for each type
and grade of stone, selected randomly from the first batch of stone delivered to site,
have been submitted and found to be satisfactory by the Building Authority.
However, if there are difficulties in arranging test specimens to be delivered to site,
specimens may be selected from the blocks of stones at the quarry that are to be used
on the proposed project.
Design and Construction Standards
16. Standards commonly used for the design and construction of cladding
works, which are acceptable to the Building Authority, are given in Appendix A.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/6(IV)

This revision June 2006 (AD/NB2) (amalgamating PNAP 256; paragraphs
rearranged)
Index under : Cladding

Stone Cladding
Structural Plans for Cladding
Appendix A
(PNAP 59)
(APP-16)
Standards Commonly Used for the

Design & Construction of Cladding Works
Acceptable to the Building Authority
Reference Standards
The standards listed in this appendix are intended to provide reference

information only for the purpose of design and construction of cladding works. It
should be noted that:
(a) the standards listed are not meant to be exhaustive;
(b) national standards and codes of practice of various

countries, though similar in major aspects, do not have
exact equivalence to one another;
(c) should a certain design standard be adopted, it should

be applied to the design consistently; and
(d) Building Regulations shall always take precedence over

other design standards should there be a conflict
between them.
A. Material & Workmanship
Material &
Workmanship Standard Title
Steel Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice for the Structural Use of
Practice Steel 2005
Aluminium BS 1161:1977(1991) Specification for aluminium alloy sections

for structural purposes
BS 1470:1987 Specification for wrought aluminium and

aluminium alloys for general engineering
purposes: plate, sheet and strip
BS 1473:1972(2002) Specification for wrought aluminium and

purposes – rivet, bolt and screw stock
-1-
BS 1474:1987 Specification for wrought aluminium and
purposes: bars, extruded round tubes and
sections
BS 3571:Part 1:1985 Specification for MIG welding of

aluminium and aluminium alloys
Stainless Steel BS 8118-2:1991 Structural use of aluminium –

Specification for materials, workmanship
and protection
BS 1449:Part 2:1983 Specification for stainless and heat-

resisting steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 6105:1981 Specification for corrosion-resistant

stainless steel fasteners
Sealant BS 7475:1991 Specification for fusion welding of

austenitic stainless steels
BS 6213:2000 Selection of construction sealants. Guide
B. Design
Design Standard Title
Practice Steel 2005
Aluminium CP 118:1969 The structural use of aluminium
BS 8118-1:1991 Structural use of aluminium – Code of

practice for design
Natural Stone BS 8298:1994 Code of practice for design and

installation of natural stone cladding &
lining
/C. Testing …..
-2-
C. Testing
Testing Standard Title
Sealant BS 3712: Building and construction sealants:

Part 1:1991(1996) Methods of test for homogeneity, relative
density and penetration
Part 2:1973(2000) Methods of test for seepage, staining,
shrinkage, shelf life and paintability
Part 3:1974(2000) Methods of test for application life,
skinning properties and tack-free time
Part 4:1991(1996) Method of test for adhesion in peel
Anchors BS 5080: Structural fixings in concrete and

masonry:
Part 1:1993 Method of test for tensile loading
Part 2:1986(1993) Method for determination of resistance to
loading in shear
(6/2006)
-3-

Rock Faces
Building (Planning) Regulations 27 and 47
For the purposes of Building (Planning) Regulation 47, only a widely-jointed

(spacing over 600mm) rock face having no unfavourably oriented joints or other discontinuities or
other defects will be regarded as a “massive rock face”. For slopes other than “massive rock
face”, the provisions of Building (Planning) Regulation 27 will apply.
2. The Appendix of this PNAP elaborates on the requirements on submission of site

formation plans involving rock faces and the standard of good practice to enable safety of rock
faces. The importance of engaging qualified geotechnical engineers in the rock face survey is
stressed and the lessons learnt from past rock face failures including the Fei Tsui Road fatal
landslide are incorporated.
3. Adequate measures should be taken to prevent uncontrolled rockfalls during

construction. This is particularly important for works on existing rock faces that affect public
safety.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
First issued June 1979

Last update May 1994
This update December 1996 (AD/SE,GGE/I)
Index under : Blasting

B(P)R 27 & 47 Rock Faces
Rock Faces - B(P)R 27 & 47
Appendix to PNAP 61
Appendix to APP-17
Requirements on Submission of Site Formation Plans Involving Rock Faces
The purpose of this Appendix is to lay down the requirements on submission of

site formation plans involving rock faces and to elaborate on the standard of good practice to
enable safety of rock faces both during construction and in the long term. The importance of
engaging qualified geotechnical engineers in the rock face survey is stressed and the lessons
learned from past rock face failures including the Fei Tsui Road Fatal Landslide are
incorporated.
2. As for design of other types of slopes, design of rock faces starts with site
investigation which may include site reconnaissance, aerial photograph interpretation,
engineering geological field mapping and drillhole investigation. Rock mass condition
including information on discontinuities could be obtained by appropriate field and laboratory
testing such as packer (water absorption) tests, impression packers and close circuit television
surveying, etc. Useful information on this aspect is contained in the Geotechnical Manual for
Slopes, Geoguide 2 - Guide to Site Investigation and Geoguide 4 - Guide to Cavern
Engineering. Some guidelines on shear strength of rock mass and rock joints can be found in
Geoguide 1 - Guide to Retaining Wall Design.
3. Methods of stability analysis and principle stabilisation measures for rock slopes
are summarised in Tables 5.6 and 5.7 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes.
4. Persons responsible for the formation of rock faces will rarely be able to assess
the full extent of the stability problem until excavation is nearly completed. Only then will the
spacing, persistence, orientation and other characteristics (such as nature of constituent infill
materials, roughness and aperture size) of discontinuities and other planes of weakness in the
rock be revealed. It is, therefore, frequently necessary to make assumptions about the jointing
pattern an other characteristics in order to evaluate the overall stability of the rock slope and to
make provision for local support of the final face and, as appropriate, general support of the
rock slope. These assumptions and the basis for them must be clearly and fully stated on the
site formation plans submitted for approval.
5. Such plans should also contain notes on observance of the following standard of
good practice :
a) any blasting to be carried out shall be controlled to avoid damage

to the final face. Pre-split or smooth-face methods shall be used
to form the final face in suitable geological conditions;
b) if expanding agents are to be used for rock splitting, the method

to prevent the uncontrolled flow of the expanding agents shall be
stated, and any adverse effect on the stability of rock faces shall
be assessed;
-2-
c) immediately after excavation, the intended final face shall be

scaled by removing loose material and shall be surveyed by a
qualified geotechnical engineer or engineering geologist, e.g.
Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) with adequate
experience in the design and construction of rock faces. The
survey shall include the identification of any water seepages and
weak or relatively impermeable geological zones or structures
which may have adverse effect on the stability of the slope (for
example, unfavourably oriented persistent layers of kaolinitic clay
in altered or weathered rocks). Results of the survey shall be
used in the design and detailing of support measures, rockfall
control measures and drainage measures; and
d) large-scale engineering geological drawings (marked-up

transparent overlays to photographs or otherwise), showing all
salient rock features including any weak or relatively
impermeable geological zones or structures together with
appropriate descriptions in accordance with Geoguide 3, the
dimensioned location, dimensioned extent and details of all
support and drainage measures, shall be submitted for the
approval of the Building Authority. Documentation will also be
required on :
i) calculations and supporting data to justify the design of all

support measures and to confirm overall stability;
ii) photographs of the scaled rock faces, where physically

possible.
6. With regard to para 5(c), your attention is drawn to the Geotechnical

Engineering Office Investigation Report on the Fei Tsui Road Fatal Landslide of 13 August
1995. The existence of an unfavourably oriented persistent layer of weak and relatively
impermeable material in the ground is a principal cause of failure. A copy of the report is
available for inspection in the Civil Engineering Library of the Civil Engineering Building at
101 Princess Margaret Road, Homantin, Kowloon.
Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-18
Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Pile Foundations
To facilitate the processing of pile foundation submissions and to ensure

proper design and construction of pile foundation works, the following guidelines should
be observed.
Recognized Types of Pile Foundation
2. A recognized type of pile foundation is regarded as the piling system

recognized by the Building Authority (BA) prior to the approval of piling plans through
the submission of relevant technical details for assessment, normally by the registered
structural engineer (RSE) in conjunction with the registered specialist contractor
experienced in such system. A list of recognized types of pile foundation is available
from the Buildings Department (BD).
3. Where it is proposed to use a piling system, which is not a recognized type,

the RSE is advised to prove its acceptability to the BA before detailed piling plans are
submitted for approval. To enable the BA to fully consider the system, all relevant
technical details on materials, manufacturing process, structural design, method of
installation, method of assessing foundation capacity and applicability relating to ground
conditions and selected examples of the use of the system elsewhere, if applicable,
should be submitted following which a demonstration of the system may be called for.
Piling Plans Submission
4. The following particulars are required, under Building (Administration)

Regulations 8 and 10, to be included in the pile foundation submission for approval:
Particulars to be shown on the piling plan
(a) a block plan showing the location of the site;

(b) details showing the characteristic features of the site and
environments, including locations of ground investigation
boreholes, slopes, existing foundations, nullahs, retaining walls
and the like;
(c) layout arrangement, identification, expected depths and cut-off
levels of the piles;
(d) layout arrangement of the pile caps;
(e) size, shape and structural details of the pile element, including
details of the shoe, head, splices and cap/pile connection;
(f) pile bearing capacity and method of verification on site;
/(g) …..
-2-
(g) specification of structural materials;

(h) magnitude of characteristic dead, imposed and wind loads and their
critical combinations acting on each pile or each group of piles;
(i) installation specifications, such as founding criteria, method of
installation, method of overcoming underground obstruction;
(j) method of controlling and monitoring the verticality, inclination
and alignment of piles during installation;
(k) details of monitoring requirements for adjacent and nearby
buildings, structures, land, streets and services; and
(l) Where dynamic pile driving formula is used, the parameters for
the assessment of the ultimate pile capacity, such as the effective
energy per blow, efficiency of blow and penetration of pile for a
hammer blow.
Particulars to be given in separate documents
(m) site investigation report including results of ground investigation,

necessary field and laboratory tests and photographs of all the soil
samples and rock cores taken;
(n) design calculations based on recognized foundation engineering
principles; and
(o) appraisal report on the effects of the piling works on adjacent and
nearby buildings; structures, land, streets and services, including
any proposal of precautionary and protective measures.
5. The RSE’s attention is drawn to Practice Note for Authorized Persons and
Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 289 in preparing the piling plan submission,
in particular for items (k) and (o) of paragraph 4 above. In addition, the geotechnical
reports and supporting documents if required should be prepared and signed by the
registered geotechnical engineer.
Design of Pile Foundations
6. In the design of pile foundations, the general guidelines provided in the

Code of Practice for Foundations should be followed.
Pre-design Ground Investigations
7. Prior to the design of the pile foundation, sufficient ground investigations

should be carried out so that adequate information on the geology of the site can be
obtained and hence the general founding levels of the piles can be estimated. For
further guidelines on ground investigation works, please refer to PNAP 132.
/Pre-drilling …..
-3-
Pre-drilling
8. For piles founded on rock, sufficient pre-drilling should be carried out

prior to the installation works, such that the quality of the founding rock can be
identified and the appropriate founding levels can be determined. The pre-drilling
should be sunk to at least 5 m below the rock head of the specified grade.
9. Pre-drilling should be carried out for each of the large diameter bored
piles, barrettes and the like, and the records of the pre-drilling should be submitted to
BD at suitable intervals during the construction of the piles.
10. For minipiles, socketted steel H-piles and similar small diameter bored
piles founding on rock, pre-drilling at location in close proximity of the piles should
be made. The number of pre-drilled boreholes required should be such that the pile
tip of every such pile should be within 5 metres from a pre-drilled hole. The pre-
drilling should be sunk into the rock mass for at least 5 m below the rock head of the
specified grade or the designed length of the rock socket of the nearest pile, whichever
is the deeper.
Post Construction Proof Drilling
11. When large diameter bored piles, barrettes and the like are completed,
core-drilling should be carried out at the concrete/rock interface for each of these
piles. To facilitate successful core-drilling at the interface, a pipe of not less than 150
mm diameter may be left in at about 1 m above the interface. The core-drilling
should be carried down to at least 1 m below the interface.
12. It is always expected that the concrete should be in good contact with rock
at the interface and the rock is consistently of the required grade beneath the pile base.
However, minor imperfection observed during the interface core-drilling, such as a
thin layer of sediment, segregated concrete or weathered seam in the rock beneath the
pile base, may be considered acceptable provided that the RSE can demonstrate his
acceptance with justifications. As an alternative, the RSE may include in the
foundation plans, proposals of remedial works for rectifying any such imperfections at
the interface if found. The proposals should provide details of the method statement
and the supervision required by the RSE.
13. For minipiles, socketted steel H-piles and the like, there would be
practical problem for core-drilling at the concrete/rock interface. To verify the
rockhead profile and hence assess the adequacy of the socketted length for these types
of piles, some additional proof drill holes should be sunk into the rock mass and down
to at least 5 m below the as-built top level of the rock socket of the nearest pile or to
the as-built bottom level of the rock socket of the nearest pile, whichever is the
deeper. The number of post-installation boreholes should be at least 2 for sites with
/100 …..
-4-
100 piles or less; or 1% of the number of piles for sites with more than 100 piles (any
fraction of a borehole so calculated should be construed as one additional borehole).
The RSE should determine the location of the boreholes. When submitting the
certificate on completion of the piling works (Form BA 14), the RSE should submit an
assessment report with a rockhead contour plan based on the ground investigation, the
pre-drilling and the post-installation drilling, together with the piling record plan.
Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ground Investigation Field Work

Category
14. All ground investigation works, pre-drilling, interface core-drilling, post-

installation drilling and proof test core-drilling must be carried out by a Registered
Specialist Contractor in the Ground Investigation Field Works category. The
contractor who is appointed to carry out proof test core-drilling required under
Building (Construction) Regulation 30 should make declaration on its connection with
the foundation contractor, including whether or not it is a holding/subsidiary/an
associated company of the foundation contractor, or has financial relationship with it
(e.g. cross-directorship), or has financial interest in the foundation works.
Quality Supervision for Piles Foundations
15. Adequate supervision should be provided for the pre-drilling, construction

and proof test of pile foundations to ensure built quality. Requirements for quality
supervision to be provided for pile foundation works are stipulated in the Code of
Practice for Site Supervision. PNAP 242 stipulating the quality supervision
requirements for foundation works is hereby withdrawn.
Ground-borne Vibrations Arising from Pile Driving and Similar Operations
16. Adequate control of ground-borne vibrations should be provided for the

pile driving and similar operations. In this connection, requirements are stipulated in
PNAP 289.
Pile Foundations in the Scheduled Areas
17. Some special requirements for pile foundations in the Scheduled Areas are
given in PNAPs 77, 85, 161, 165 and 279.
Form BA 14
18. Upon completion of the piling works, a specified Form BA14 certifying the
completion should be submitted in the manner prescribed in Building (Administration)
Regulation 25. For exceptionally large sites, foundation works may be suitably phased
and separately considered for proof testing. BD should be consulted as early as possible
on such special arrangement. To expedite the selection of piles for proof tests, piling
record plans and reports may be separately submitted prior to the submission of the
specified Form BA14.
/Piling …..
-5-
Piling Record Plan and Reports
19. Upon completion of the piling work two sets of piling record plan and
reports should be submitted as may be required under Building (Administration)
Regulation 10 to certify the satisfactory completion of the piling works. These should
include:
(a) a plan showing characteristic features of the site and the

identification, location, depth and size of each pile as constructed;
(b) a report listing the date of construction, the quality and quantity of
materials used and driving performance or excavation record of
each pile;
(c) reports on any tests as required for the particular piling system; and
(d) an assessment report with rock head contour plans, as appropriate.
Within 14 days of the receipt of these documents, BD would inform the AP/RSE of the
representative piles identified for proof tests. To avoid unnecessary delay, the AP/RSE
should ensure that full information on the completed piles is included in the piling record
plan and reports.
Proof Tests
20. Proof tests on foundation units are required under Building (Construction)
Regulation 30. Except in special circumstances where the standard of acceptance is to be
determined according to the design and factor of safety, the BA will normally be satisfied
if the procedures and criteria described in the Code of Practice for Foundations are
followed. Alternative procedures and acceptance criteria, supported by justification
based on recognized foundation engineering principles and relevant to a particular site
and building may also be adopted.
21. Alternative procedures and acceptance criteria, or methods other than test
loading or core-drilling, which can demonstrate the performance of the foundation under
loads or verify the integrity and the load-response interaction between the foundation unit
and the bearing stratum may also be adopted. In this connection, the following should be
submitted well in advance of the completion of the foundation works so that the BA may
fully consider the suitability of the proposed method of testing:
(a) relevant recognized engineering principles and theories for the

proposed method of testing;
(b) detailed procedures of testing;
(c) acceptance criteria;
/(d) …..
-6-
(d) interpretation of the test results; and

(e) any verification tests performed to justify the parameters to be used
in the proof test.
Further On Site Tests
22. Whenever doubt exists as to the design assumption or load carrying capacity
of any pile foundation, further on site tests may be required under Building
(Construction) Regulation 29.
Amendments to Approved Plans
23. For submission of amendment plans and their related consent applications,
the fast track procedures for securing consent for amendments outlined in PNAP 215
shall apply.
24. Consent to the commencement of the pile cap and superstructure works will
not be given until:
(a) satisfactory piling records have been submitted;

(b) specified Form BA14 has been submitted;
(c) the required proof tests have been satisfactorily carried out; and
(d) all relevant imposed conditions including materials testing
requirement have been complied with.
Concurrent Processing of Applications
25. Procedures are in place in BD for concurrent processing of applications

for approval and consent in respect of new foundation works. Except in cases where
any imposed condition should require to be first met, e.g. shoring to adjoining
buildings to be completed before piling works may commence, BD will consider
giving approval of plans for foundation works and consent for such works at the same
time. If an AP or RSE wishes to take advantage of these procedures, he should
co-operate with the department by ensuring that an application for consent is not
submitted before the 32nd day of the submission of plans for approval, to avoid
unnecessary complications in administrative work.
26. To minimize the idling time on construction sites, applications may also
be made for consent to commence excavation works for substructures prior to the final
completion of foundation works, provided that the supervision plan for the excavation
works is submitted and any earth-retaining elements (such as sheet piles) have been
satisfactorily installed. These procedures mean that earth-retaining elements may be
/installed …..
-7-
installed concurrently with the foundation works, thereby allowing excavation works
for substructures to be carried out while foundation record plans are being examined
and proof tests arranged. Consent for the construction of substructure elements (pile
caps, for example) will be given only after satisfactory completion of the required
proof tests.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/BREG/C/11
First issue February 1980

Last revision December 2005
This revision February 2006 (AD/NB2) (Para 15 and 17 amended)
Index under: Pile Foundations

Pre-drilling
Core-drilling Test
Quality Sueprvision

Projections in relation to site coverage and plot ratio

Building (Planning) Regulations 20 & 21
In accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 2, site coverage means the

area of a site that is covered by the building(s) erected thereon. In simple terms, the site
coverage is the shadow cast on a site with the sun directly overhead. Hence all
components of a building, including all projections, should be accountable for site
coverage. However, site coverage is also a measure to control the building bulk.
2. In the case of plot ratio, the definition of gross floor area uses the term
‘external wall’. Clearly ‘wall’ does not just mean concrete or brick material, and
windows and parapet railings should obviously also be included. For projections from a
building, it is accepted that if the projections are not at a floor level, or potential floor
level, and do not dominate the face of a building, measurement as accountable gross
floor area is not required.
3. It follows from the above that the following projections from the face of a
building, having no significant impact on building bulk, need not be counted for site
coverage and plot ratio:
(a) pitched roof eaves and flat roof overhangs complying with B(P)R 7(1)
(provided these are not contained within parapet walls as part of an
accessible flat roof);
(b) individual air-conditioner boxes and platforms of reasonable size which
have a built-in system for condensate disposal;
(c) individual canopies, window hoods complying with B(P)R 7(1) and
porches having projection no exceeding 1.5m;
(d) window cills and window surrounds projecting not more than 100 mm;
(e) string courses, fins and architectural mouldings complying with B(P)R
7(1) (but not structural beams and columns);
(f) window flower boxes not exceeding 500mm in width;
(g) external drainage pipes and gutters complying with B(P)R 7(1); and
(h) sunshades solely used for the purpose of energy conservation projecting
not more than 1.5m from the external wall.
4. It is emphasized that, notwithstanding paragraph 3 above, if any of the listed

features is so exaggerated, excessive in scale, or defeats the provisions of the Ordinance
(for example, a structural beam doubling as a flower box) or is provided or designed in
an unusual way, that feature will be counted for site coverage and, if appropriate, also
for plot ratio.
/5. …..
-2-
5. It follows from the above that all other projections must be included in site
coverage and plot ratio calculations. However projecting windows may be accepted as
not counting for plot ratio provided they satisfy all the following criteria within the
storey from which they project :
(a) the projecting window is from domestic accommodation only;

(b) only one such projecting window is located on one external wall and
situated in any one room;
(c) the total areas of the projecting windows together with the louvres/open
grilles, if any, for the purpose of shielding of air-conditioning plants
placed underneath or above the projecting windows, do not exceed 50%
of the total areas of the façade of the said floor on the same elevation;
(d) the extent of the projection is not more than 500 mm from the face of
the main external wall;
(e) the base is not less than 500 mm above finished floor level;
(f) the top is not less than 500 mm from the underside of the finish ceiling;
and
(g) the window complies fully with Building (Planning) Regulation 3A.
For the purposes of this requirement, the height of 1100 mm protective
barrier will be measured from floor level and any part of the window
within this dimension should be fixed or otherwise suitably protected in
line with clause (2) of the Regulation.
6. Except those complying with Part II of the Building (Planning) Regulations, no

projections will normally be allowed over streets unless they can be justified in the public
interest. In this context the projection of individual air-conditioning boxes/platforms
and window hoods may be allowed, provided they do not project more than 500 mm
over a street and are at a height of not less than 2.5 m above ground (please also see
PNAP 116).
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/2 (III)
First issue March 1980

This revision May 2004 (AD/NB1) (General revision)
Index under : B(P)R 20 & 21 - Projections in relation to site coverage and plot ratio
Bay Windows
Projecting Windows
Projections
Building Proposals affected by Street Widening

Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2)
When part of a lot is to be acquired by Government for the purpose of

street widening, the owner may be given one or a combination of the following forms of
compensation :
(a) Bonus plot ratio and/or site coverage under Building

(Planning) Regulation 22(2).
(b) Cash settlement (negotiated by the Lands Department).
(c) An exchange of Land (negotiated by the Lands

Department).
2. In the event of (a) being adopted, the interpretation of Building (Planning)

Regulation 22(2) will be of concern to land owners and authorized persons (APs) and its
implications will require to be ascertained on other related Building (Planning)
Regulations. It is for the purpose of avoiding doubt that this practice note is issued so
that APs may acquaint themselves and the owners with the method by which
compensation in terms of development potential may be quantified.
3. In considering whether or not to permit the bonus under Building

(Planning) Regulation 22(2), the Building Authority will be prepared, subject to
paragraph 4 below and the provisions of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(2)(a), to
accept the part or parts of a lot required for street widening to count also as ‘site area’, in
respect only of the first building subsequently erected on the reduced site area, for the
purposes of arriving at the permitted plot ratio and site coverage for the building.
4. The statement in paragraph 3 above is made with the proviso that :
(a) all claims for bonus under the Regulation will be dealt
with individually according to the special circumstances
of each case;
(b) the additional plot ratio referred to in Building

(Planning) Regulation 22(2)(b) may only be given
where the Building Authority is satisfied that the
density of the development or redevelopment is not
excessive;
/(c) …..
-2-
(c) a separate block plan (in quadruplicate) indicating the

area to be surrendered accompanies the building plan
submission claiming bonus under Building (Planning)
Regulation 22(2);
(d) the building plans are suitably endorsed to indicate the

areas to be surrendered; and
(e) a formal Agreement to Surrender to the satisfaction of

Lands Department is executed and registered in the
Land Registry.
5. With regard to Building (Planning) Regulation 25, a similar principle may

be used, i.e. the setback area may count as open space where it is at the side or rear of a
building.
6. Having established, at the time of submitting building plans for approval,

that the lot concerned is affected by street widening proposals, APs are advised at the
same time to submit a set of those plans to the Chief Estate Surveyor/Acquisition, Lands
Department. The purpose of this procedure is to provide the earliest opportunity to
consider the proposed method adopted for achieving compensation in terms of
development potential.
Agreement to Surrender
7. A temporary occupation permit or an occupation permit will not be issued

before the execution of an Agreement to Surrender incorporating all the relevant terms
and conditions. AP should remind the owners for early preparation and execution of the
required Agreement.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/P/4

BLD(B) GP/BL/P/5
First issue April 1980

Last revision January 1990
This revision December 2008 (AD/NB1) (General amendment and para. 7 added)
Index under : B(P)R 22(2) - Building Proposals affected by Street Widening

Street Widening - B(P)R 22(2)

Demolition Works
Measures for Public Safety
Introduction
To ensure public safety, the control of demolition works is governed by

the Buildings Ordinance, Building (Administration) Regulations and Building
(Demolition Works) Regulations, which impose requirements for:
(a) application for approval of plans for demolition works;
(b) application for consent to commence the works;
(c) site safety supervision;
(d) appointment of Technically Competent Person to supervise

demolition works and operator of powered mechanical plant
or equipment; and
(e) certification of completion of works.
2. This practice note sets out the procedures to be followed by authorized

persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered geotechnical
engineers (RGE) in meeting these requirements. Some points for practical application
are also clarified.
Demolition Proposals
3. All demolition proposals should be submitted for formal approval as

prescribed under Regulation 8(3) and (4) of the Building (Administration) Regulations.
When preparing plans for demolition works, reference should be made to the Code of
Practice for Demolition of Buildings 2004 (the Code) issued by the Buildings Department
(BD) for guidance for complying with the Buildings Ordinance and its related
regulations. The Building Authority (BA) may refuse to approve under section 16(1)(a)
and (e) of the Buildings Ordinance any demolition proposal which does not contain all the
plans and documents prescribed in the regulations.
4. The BA will exercise his discretion to refuse an application for consent to

the commencement of demolition works under section 16(3)(a) and (b) of the Buildings
Ordinance where his approval to the demolition plans for the works has not been given.
/ Precautionary ....
-2-
Precautionary and Protective Measures
5. Notwithstanding the need to include the precautionary and protective

measures for the demolition works on the plans submitted for approval, the following
measures, which at the time of their erection do not affect the structure of any building,
may be erected without the consent of the BA :
a) protective wire nettings;
b) dust screens of plastic or tarpaulin sheets;
c) scaffolds and intermediate catchfans;
d) hoarding, covered walkway, gantry and catch platforms;
e) shoring & propping for stabilizing buildings under demolition

or adjoining buildings.
Site Safety Supervision Plan
6. A supervision plan as defined under section 2(1) of the Buildings

Ordinance is required to be lodged with the BA by an AP prior to or at the time of
application for consent to commence demolition works except for works which satisfy all
of the criteria set out in paragraph 11 of the Technical Memorandum for Supervision
Plans. The supervision plan should be prepared in accordance with the recommendations
in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision issued by BD. Under section 16(3)(bc) of the
Building Ordinance, the BA may refuse to give his consent to the commencement of
demolition works where an AP has not lodged a supervision plan for the works.
Execution and Supervision of Demolition Works
7. AP, RSE, RGE and Registered Specialist Contractor (RSC) are required
to observe the requirements on the provision of a full time site engineer for demolition of
complex structures, debris management system, and other execution and supervision
particulars as stipulated in the Code.
8. Where a site engineer is required to be appointed, he/she shall be directly

responsible to the RSC. Any subsequent change of the site engineer shall be reported to
the AP/RSE/RGE and the BA by the RSC.
Video…………..
-3-
Video Record of Demolition Works
9. Video camera to record the entire demolition process shall be provided by

the RSC for all types of demolition sites. The video camera(s) should be installed at
strategic location(s) agreed by the AP/RSE/RGE and be securely protected from being
tampered with so that the entire demolition process including the movement of debris and
the overall sequence of demolition can be recorded for reference and review purposes.
While the exact number of cameras is to be determined by the AP/RSE/RGE, there
should be at least one video camera for each site. The location of the video camera(s)
should be shown in the demolition plan.
10. The video records should be kept by the RSC for at least 14 days.
Appointment of Operator of Powered Mechanical Plant or Equipment
11. The use of powered mechanical plant or equipment for demolition works
carries risks and particular care should be taken. In certain circumstances, it may even
be unsafe and should not be allowed, for example, the use of a crane and hammer in a
densely populated area. To ensure public safety, the operator of powered mechanical
plant or equipment used in demolition work shall meet the requirements as specified in
Regulation 9(3) of the Building (Demolition Works) Regulations.
12. For the purpose of Building (Demolition Works) Regulation 9(3)(b), an

operator should have completed a training course in “Demolition of Building Course for
Plant Operators” organised by the Construction Industry Training Authority (CITA) and
obtained the relevant certificate. Equivalent training and certificate issued by a
recognised examining body may also be favourably considered by the BA for meeting the
requirement.
13. An application for consent to the commencement of demolition works

must be accompanied by the personal particulars, qualifications and experience of the
operators of any powered mechanical plant or equipment proposed to be used in the
demolition works in accordance with Regulation 31 of the Building (Administration)
Regulations. The information to be submitted should include the operators’ names in
Chinese and English, Hong Kong identity card numbers, dates of birth, addresses and
telephone numbers. The BA may refuse the consent application under section 16(3)(b)
of the Buildings Ordinance where such particulars have not been submitted.
14. The BA will vet the particulars of the plant operators and advise the AP on
the suitability of the operators as soon as possible, having regard to their qualifications,
experience and training.
15. Where there is a change in the appointment of the operator, the BA should
also be notified within 7 days of the change and provided with the personal particulars,
qualifications and experience of the new operator.
Danger……………….
-4-
Danger from Fire or Explosion
16. Dangerous and hazardous materials left by the previous occupants may
cause risk of fire or explosion through the leakage or accumulation of gas or vapour due
to demolition operations. RSCs for demolition works should be asked to ensure all
flammable goods are removed from site and any remaining flammable goods are stored
in proper storage facilities. All parties are drawn to the attention of the provisions of
Building (Demolition Works) Regulation 6.
Demolition of Dangerous Buildings
17. In addition to the normal procedures under the Building (Demolition

Works) Regulations, some special arrangements specifically apply to the demolition of
dangerous buildings under the BA’s order. The following notes are given for guidance
and are not intended to be exhaustive :
(a) Closure
Immediately after a closure order has been issued and the building
vacated, the premises should be secured against unauthorized
entry. Otherwise, the BA has the authority to secure the building
and charge the costs to the owner. An AP, the owner or anyone
affected by the closure who wishes to gain entry to the building
subsequently, should apply to the Existing Buildings Division
(EBD), BD for a permit.
(b) Shoring
All shores are preferably in structural steel of Grade 250 or above

and to comply with the current edition of Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel or equivalent. The position of dead shores
should first be discussed with EBD. Raking shores or more
permanent forms of support for party walls and any common
structures should also be suitably designed and constructed. Plans
should be submitted for agreement prior to their erection.
In the construction of shores, attention must particularly be given

to the connection details between the steel shoring and the party
wall.
Temporary shoring should be removed after the demolition works

have been completed but, where necessary, should be replaced by
a more permanent form of support.
(c) Pedestrian Passageways
Matters relating to pedestrian passageways associated with

demolition works are dealt with in PNAP 75.
/(d)………..
-5-
(d) Joint Demolition
Where several adjacent buildings are to be demolished, an AP

appointed in respect of one should not arrange to commence
demolition works until the demolition of all buildings can proceed
simultaneously. Any consequential delays should be notified to
EPD early, so that co-ordination by the parties concerned may be
put in hand.
(e) Party Walls
In most cases, exposed party walls which remain to enclose

existing buildings will require raking or flying shores (Appendix
A) from the site of the demolished building. In many cases, an
order requiring such works may be issued by the BA. Where a
party wall is next to a framed building, any such order served may
require demolition of the party wall and provision of new
enclosure to the framed building.
Where conditions permit, the BA may be prepared to consider

alternative permanent measures, to be proposed by the AP in
charge. Early discussion will avoid delays.
Party walls that will remain should be regularly inspected as

demolition proceeds and repairs (including rendering, facing up
cut brickwork and removing old wood joist ends) should be
carried out concurrently with the demolition works or in special
circumstances, as soon as possible.
(f) Default
Where works have not commenced or have not been carried out
within the period specified in the order, the BA may cause the
works to be carried out and then recover the costs together with
plus supervision charges from the owner. The AP appointed
should advise his client accordingly and attend to all matters
without delay.
(g) Liaison
It is the duty of the AP to advise the BA of any unexpected

weaknesses in adjacent buildings, structures and ground revealed
by demolition works. He should immediately discuss with EBD
any such problems encountered.
Street Name Signs on Buildings
18. To ensure efficient replacement of street name plates, AP are requested to

inform the Director of Highways of any case where street name plates are affixed to
buildings to be demolished : Buildings Ordinance section 32 refers. Public………
-6-
Public Drainage System
19. To ensure proper updating of drainage records and better control of

drainage connections, AP are requested to inform the Drainage Services Department
(Hong Kong and Islands Division/Mainland South Division/Mainland North Division,
as appropriate) once the Registered General Building Contractor (RGBC) or RSC has
completed the sealing of drains : Building (Demolition Works) Regulation 3(2)(b)
refers.
Demolition affecting slopes and retaining walls
20. If demolition works affect slopes and retaining walls, the RSE should
ensure that all the relevant recommendations by the RGE are incorporated in the
demolition plans. Any difference in opinion should be resolved between the RSE and
RGE before submission to the BD. The Geotechnical Reports and supporting documents
are to be prepared and signed by the RGE.
Safety and Convenience of Third Parties
21. Proper protection and safe passage for the public must be provided at all
times by the erection and maintenance of suitable hoardings, covered walkways and
gantry, and catch platform.
22. Every effort must be made to minimize any nuisance to the public arising
from dust, noise and vibration.
Design of hoarding, covered walkway and gantry, and catch platform
23. Reference could be made to Chapter 3 of Code of Practice for Demolition

of Buildings 2004 for the general design requirements of hoarding, covered walkway and
gantry, and catch platform. The deck of the catch platform shall be designed to support
a uniformly distributed load of 5.0 kPa or a point load of 20 KN acting on an effective
area of 300mm x 300mm. Being a temporary structure, a wind load of 0.67 kPa (i.e 37
% of the design wind pressure of 1.82 kPa as given in the Code of Practice on Wind
Effects in Hong Kong 2004) could be adopted for checking the stability of these
structures.
24. A design example of a gantry with single bay hoarding on each side is
given in Appendix B for reference. If the catch platform which shall have a minimum
2000mm distance from the existing building line encroaches into the 500mm (minimum)
recess from the carriageway, the catch platform shall be raised to allow 5500mm
headroom over the carriageway. For narrow service lane (width 3.5 m or less) which are
generally shielded from wind, a single deck design with the deck functioning as a catch
platform fully capable of resisting the superimposed design loads is considered
acceptable because of the relatively lower risks associated with these areas. A single
deck design for narrow service lanes is also given in Appendix B for reference.
Structural justification may not be required if the parameters as adopted in the design
examples are strictly followed.
/25……………
-7-
25. Site constraints such as the presence of congested underground utilities

and narrow pedestrian walkways may sometime prohibit the construction of footings and
counterweight, or render the sole reliance on counterweight for maintaining stability
uneconomical. Under such circumstances, AP/RSE are encouraged to consider more
economical designs with recyclable materials as alternatives to the examples given in
Appendix B. Such alternatives may include the adoption of a rigorous analysis and/or the
provision of tie forces at upper levels in securing the stability of the structure, thus
reducing counterweight and/or some structural members’ sizes.
Certification on Completion of Demolition Works
26. Within 14 days of the completion of any demolition works, the AP and the
RSE shall certify the completion of works in the specified form BA 14A for demolition
works. The specified form can be downloaded from BD’s website.
Withdrawal of PNAP 268
27. With the incorporation of the content of PNAP 268 in the Code of Practice
for Demolition of Buildings 2004, PNAP 268 is hereby withdrawn.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/DW/1 (III)

BD GP/BORD/27
GC/4/16/1 (GEO file)

Last revision July 2005 (AD/NB2)
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (Paras. 2, 7, 8 & 9 amended to include RGE
and para.20 added)
Index under : BO s32 - Names of Streets

Dangerous Buildings - Demolition of
Debris Management
Buildings Supporting Ground – Demolition of
Demolition Works
Drainage System, Public, Protection of During Demolition
Mechanical Plant - Use of In Demolition Works
Party Walls
Public Drainage System, Protection of During Demolition
Resident Supervision
Shoring
Street Name Signs
Video Recording
APP-21
(APP-21)
(APP-21)
(APP-21)
(APP-21)
(APP-21)
(APP-21)

Dewatering in Foundation
and Basement Excavation Works
Dewatering may result from works or may be part of the method for
constructing foundations and basement excavations. The procedures for dewatering activities
and precautionary measures against impairing the stability and causing undue settlement of any
adjoining buildings, streets and land should be to the satisfaction of the Building Authority
(BA).
2. The following information should be included on the plans for submission to

the Building Authority :
(a) the foundation details of adjoining buildings and details of

nearby underground utilities (e.g. fresh water pipe, gas main,
sewer and the like);
(b) details of the dewatering proposals including ground treatment,

if any (e.g. grouting and recharging);
(c) the method and sequence of construction; and
(d) the location and details of instrumentation for monitoring the

effects of the works on adjoining buildings, streets and land
(including the change in ground water conditions in the
adjoining ground) during construction, together with
information on --
(i) criteria for limiting movements and groundwater

pressures and action to be taken if these limiting
values are reached;
(ii) intervals between readings; and
(iii) availability of monitoring records.
3. The following information should be submitted with the plans :
(a) A site investigation report
This report should include adequate information on groundwater

and geological conditions including permeability,
compressibility and consolidation characteristics of the various
soil strata, particle size analyses and other test results relevant
to consideration of the dewatering activities and preventive
measures against settlement;
/(b) A report ....
- 2 -
(b) A report on the conditions of adjoining buildings
This report should give information on the structure and

conditions of all adjoining buildings that may be adversely
affected by the proposed works;
(c) Shoring/Underpinning details
These details are to be submitted if any adjoining building need

shoring/underpinning precautions; and
(d) Assessment of excavation and dewatering effects
This assessment on the adjoining buildings, streets and land

should include the criteria for limiting movements and the like,
as mentioned in paragraph 2(d)(i) above.
4. During the foundation and basement construction works, the authorized

person/registered structural engineer appointed for the works should supervise and inspect as
necessary:
(a) to ensure that such works are being carried out in accordance
with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations
and with the approved plans; and
(b) to verify the design assumptions throughout the process of

construction. A suitably experienced full-time supervisor should
be employed where necessary.
5. Piezometric and settlement monitoring records should be made available at all

times and copies submitted to the BA periodically.
6. These requirements are not exhaustive. Please also refer to the relevant
sections on groundwater and drawdown control in the General Specification for Civil
Engineering Works published by the Civil Engineering Department and to BS 8004:1986
British Standard Code of Practice for Foundations.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/14

This revision May 1994 (AD/SE)
Index under : Basement - Dewatering in Excavation Works

Dewatering in Foundation and Basement Excavation Works
Excavation Works - Dewatering
Hoardings, Covered Walkways and Gantries

(including Temporary Access for Construction Traffic)
Building (Planning) Regulations Part IX
Applications under Building (Planning) Regulation 64 for

hoarding/covered walkway permits should be accompanied by six sets of plans
showing the hoarding/covered walkway, including details of any proposed temporary
vehicular access and post holes, existing traffic signs or traffic provisions (e.g. bus
lanes, taxi ranks, bus stops and pedestrian crossings) and existing trees, as well as
other relevant information. Any traffic sign or street light likely to be obscured or
required to be resited must be declared. If public transport facilities or pedestrian
crossings are affected or carriageway width is reduced, this must also be declared.
Failure to declare may delay the issue of a permit.
2. Subject to the agreement of the Transport Department (TD) and the
Highways Department (HyD), the resiting and subsequent reinstatement of any
affected traffic signs and street furniture, and repair of damaged public pavements
may be carried out by the building owner at his own cost to the satisfaction of HyD.
Any resiting and subsequent reinstatement of street lights shall be carried out by HyD
at the building owner’s expense.
3. No trees, either within the lot or on government land, may be felled,

pruned or interfered with without the prior approval of the District Lands Officer and
the government department responsible for maintenance of the tree concerned.
4. HyD’s and TD’s standard requirements for hoardings/covered

walkways are set out at Appendix A.
5. In cases where hoardings/covered walkways have to encroach on the

carriageway, TD will have no objection provided that the affected traffic lane is
maintained with a minimum width of 2.8m while the carriageway is maintained with a
minimum width of 5.5m. Where these minimum width requirements cannot be met,
the authorized person (AP) should establish early contact with TD to clarify on the
need for temporary traffic management measures or traffic impact assessment (TIA).
Normally, TIA will only be required for hoardings/covered walkways sited on the
carriageway of a traffic sensitive road, that is either a red route, a pink route or bus
corridor, or on any other carriageway which is within 70 metres of a signalised
junction with a traffic sensitive road that cannot meet the minimum width requirement.
For the list of traffic sensitive roads, the Senior Engineer/Survey of the Traffic &
Transport Survey Division, Survey Section of TD may be consulted by telephone no.
3150 8230. A TIA report should be submitted at least two months in advance of the
application for a hoarding permit so as to enable TD and the Police to assess the need
for any temporary traffic management measures. Guidelines and requirements of TIA
for hoardings/covered walkways occupying part of the carriageway are set out in
Appendix B.
/6. …..
-2-
6. In all cases of deviation from normal practice, details should be

included on the plans submitted and reasons provided in the accompanying letter so as
to enable TD to note that there are specific circumstances or constraints affecting the
site.
Construction of Hoardings/Covered Walkways
7. Hoardings/covered walkways for demolition works should be provided

in accordance with the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings and Practice Note
for Authorized Persons and Registered Structure Engineers (PNAP) 71 where typical
details of a covered walkway with catch platform are given. For general building
works, reference should be made to PNAP 224. It should be stressed that these are
for reference only and that in certain instances variations in the design may be
accepted to meet special site conditions.
8. Hoardings/covered walkways for demolition works, or in certain

special cases, e.g. on narrow pavements, may have to be sited on a carriageway and a
raised floor will then be required. Hoardings/covered walkways for general building
works will normally be required to be sited entirely on the footpaths with no floor.
Proposals which include prefabricated units of non-traditional construction requiring
little maintenance are preferred.
9. A minimum clear width of 1.1 m is required for hoardings/covered

walkways sited on a carriageway. As regards hoardings/covered walkways on a
footpath, the clear width should be related to the existing pavement width as follows:-
Existing Pavement Width Clear Width in Walkway

2.5 m or less Normally 1.5 m minimum. Exemption
may be considered if the pavement is
of insufficient width
over 2.5 m to 3 m Width of the pavement minus 0.8 m
subject to a maximum of 2m
over 3 m 2m
The required clear width must not be obstructed in any manner e.g. by traffic signs,
scaffold poles, supports for formwork or the like. The vertical clearance inside the
covered walkway should be 2.3 m minimum.
10. In case the clear width of the pedestrian walkways is affected or not in
compliance with the required width specified in the table above, during the erection
period of hoarding/covered walkways and the construction of building works, an
appropriate temporary pedestrian diversion scheme and protective measures should be
submitted to enable TD and the Police to assess the need for any temporary pedestrian
management measures.
/11. …..
-3-
11. Should there be any utility pit cover located within the hoarding area,
the relevant utility undertaking should be informed prior to the construction of the
hoarding. The hoarding, including its foundation, must not obstruct the access to such
pits and opening of the pit cover at all times.
Lighting Standard for Covered Walkways
12. A temporary lighting system should be provided for all covered

walkways of building sites and be maintained in good order by the building owners.
The average illuminance on the floor level of the covered walkway should be within
the range of 35 lux to 50 lux.
13. A recommended lighting layout for a typical walkway (2 m wide and

2.5m high) is the installation of luminaires complete with 18 W or 20 W 600 mm long
tubular fluorescent lamps at 3 m spacing.
Excavation Permit
14. An Excavation Permit from the Director of Highways is required for

excavation works involved in the erection/demolition of hoardings, covered walkways
and gantries to be carried out on public roads maintained by HyD, under section 10 of
the Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance (Chapter 28). Failure to obtain the
necessary permit would constitute an offence under that Ordinance. In this
connection, reference should be made to PNAP 197 and HyD's Excavation Permit
Processing Manual - Chapter 5, Section 1 which may be accessed/downloaded at
HyD's website http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/publications/xppm/index.htm.
Temporary Access for Construction Traffic
15. The position of any temporary access, including location of gantries

shall be agreed by TD. Temporary access should be constructed basically in
accordance with the typical details of run-in in HyD Standard Drawings (PNAP 300 is
relevant) for proper protection of the utilities under the pavement and to safeguard the
safety of the road users. It should be formed and reinstated to its original state on
completion of the work by and entirely at the expense of the building owner.
Permanent reinstatement, if required and subject to Government’s agreement, could be
carried out by the building owner at his own expense and under the supervision of the
AP to the satisfaction of the Director of Highways.
16. The maximum width of the gantries should normally be not more than
6m. For a proposed gantry wider than 6m, the proposal should be accompanied by
justifications for such width viz. demonstration by a swept path analysis of the
vehicles using the gantry. In addition, information on the frequency of the vehicles
that would enter into the site and the measures to safeguard the safety of pedestrians
crossing the ingress/egress points should also be submitted for consideration.
/Temporary …..
-4-
Temporary Suspension of On-Street Public Parking Spaces
17. Where suspension of on-street parking spaces is necessary, application

should be made to the Commissioner for Transport in accordance with the Notes for
Guidance attached at Appendix C.
Streamlined Processing of Hoarding Permit Application
18. To promote self-discipline and to facilitate the development progress,

the Building Authority (BA) will complete the processing of an application for a
permit to erect hoardings, covered walkways or gantries within 30 days of receipt of
such application provided that the following criteria are met:
(a) A TIA report is not required;
(b) HyD’s and TD’s requirements in Appendix A are complied with;
(c) the AP/registered structural engineer (RSE) certifies that the

standard designs mentioned in paragraph 7 above are adopted
and are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings
Ordinance;
(d) no contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered

walkways;
(e) the registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) certifies that the

stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, if applicable, is
not adversely affected (supporting documentation may be
required if significant signs of distress or failure of the
slope/wall in question have been noted);
(f) the hoardings/covered walkways are structurally safe; and
(g) no felling, pruning or interference with trees is required.
19. Under the streamlined processing, the AP/RSE/RGE, as the case may
be, are required to submit hoarding plans, Form BA 19 together with the certificate at
Appendix D to the Buildings Department (BD) for centralized processing. In cases
where the criteria for streamlined (fast-track) processing are not met, the application
will be processed within 60 days.
20. AP/RSE should note that consent for general building works will be
refused if the required hoardings/covered walkways proposals have not been received
by the BA.
/Validity …..
-5-
Validity Period of Hoarding Permit
21. In the case of hoardings/covered walkways for demolition works,

permits will normally be issued for six months only. Permits for hoardings/covered
walkways for general building works will be issued for three years maximum
conditional upon the submission of annual safety certificate (Appendix E) certifying
that the hoardings/covered walkways are structurally safe. The safety certificate
should be submitted not less than 7 days before each anniversary of the date of issue
of the hoarding permit.
22. If evidence shows that the site has been idle for a prolonged period or
an annual safety certificate has not been submitted, the hoarding permit may be
cancelled and the hoarding should be removed immediately in accordance with the
relevant conditions of the permit.
Renewal of Hoarding Permit
23. Renewal of hoarding permit will be considered upon application. The

renewal will only be granted if the applicant can demonstrate the need for the period
requested and only the minimum period will be granted. An application for renewal
of the permit should be made to the BA in writing at least 30 days before its expiry
with the following supporting documents:
(a) The original permit Form BD 109; and
(b) A safety certificate (Appendix E) from the AP/RSE/RGE, as

the case may be, that the hoardings/covered walkways are still
structurally safe and the stability of any nearby slope or
retaining wall, if applicable, is not adversely affected.
Minor Amendments to Hoardings/Covered Walkways
24. Minor amendments to the permitted hoardings/covered walkways may

be carried out without prior agreement of the BA if the following criteria are met:
(a) HyD’s and the TD’s requirements in Appendix A are complied

with;
(b) the original TIA, if any, is still valid;
(c) the position of the gantry and run-in/out is not changed;
(d) the hoardings/covered walkways are certified by the AP/RSE to

be structurally safe;
(e) no contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered

walkways;
/(f) …..
-6-
(f) the RGE certifies that the stability of any nearby slope or
retaining wall, if applicable, is not adversely affected; and
(g) no trees are affected.
However, the AP should deposit with BD a set of the amended hoarding plans and the
safety certificate (Appendix E) within 7 days of the completion of amendment works
on site.
25. While the BA will carry out audit checks, the AP/RSE should ensure
that the hoardings/covered walkways are constructed in accordance with the self-
certified hoarding plans and that they are structurally safe.
Proper Use and Maintenance of Hoardings/Covered Walkways
26. Hoardings/covered walkways should not be used for any other purposes
such as for displaying advertisements or for storage of building materials and
equipment inside or above the covered walkways.
27. Proper maintenance of hoardings/covered walkways is required under

Building (Planning) Regulation 66. The primary consideration must be public safety
and convenience. If a hoarding/covered walkway is in disrepair and if request for
repair or renewal is not complied with, the BA may cause the necessary work to be
carried out at the building owner’s expense in accordance with Building (Planning)
Regulation 67.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/16 (Pt V)

BD GP/BREG/C/31

Last revision February 2004
This revision February 2009 (AD/NB1) (General revamp, including Appendix A, B,
C, D & E)
Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation Part IX

Hoardings, Covered Walkways & Gantries
Excavation works on public road
Public road - excavation works
Excavation permit
Appendix A
(PNAP 75)
(APP-23)
Highways Department and Transport Department
Standard Requirements for Hoardings/Covered Walkways
A. Highways Department
(1) The internal layout of the site shall be so arranged that no backing in/out
movement of construction traffic is required except in cases where small or
narrow sites are involved in which case reversing into the site will be
permitted.
(2) The hoarding shall be properly lit at night.
(3) The promoter (i.e. the one who finances the proposed excavation works)
should apply for an Excavation Permit from the Regional Office of Highways
Department (HyD) prior to the commencement of excavation works on a
public road maintained by HyD. One copy of the approved plan should
accompany his application, together with a copy of the Hoarding Permit
issued by the Buildings Department.
(4) A clear width of not less than 500 mm shall be maintained between the edges
of the hoarding and the carriageway.
(5) Where the hoarding and covered walkway are erected on the carriageway, no
obstruction to the drainage channels and gullies of the road shall be
permitted. The authorized person (AP) shall be responsible for the removal
of all obstructions to the flows in the drainage channels and gullies. Lighting
and guarding in accordance with the Road Traffic (Traffic Control)
Regulations shall be provided by the AP. Relevant requirements stipulated in
the Code of Practice for the Lighting, Signing and Guarding of Road Works
should also be followed.
(6) The maximum insertion of footing into public pedestrian pavement shall be
limited to 450mm. Any concrete plinth sitting on pavement shall not be more
than 250mm in thickness and not more than 1000mm in height, and the
minimum clear spacing between two concrete plinths shall not be less than
1100mm. The exposed faces of the concrete plinth shall be of smooth surface
and any exposed edges and corners shall be chamfered.
(7) The hoarding/covered walkways shall be erected at no more than 300mm

away from the lot boundary.
(8) The hoarding/covered walkway shall not obscure any street lights. Where
any street light will likely be affected by the hoarding/covered walkway, the
proposal should be sent to the Chief Engineer/Lighting of HyD for comment.
/Where …..
-1-
Where temporary removal or resiting of existing street light is required, the
AP should request HyD for such removal/resiting, at the lot owner's cost,
with sufficient advance notice. In case the floor of a hoarding/covered
walkway obstructs access to the street light draw-pit, the relevant section of
the floor should be portable and removable.
(9) The AP is required to notify HyD and, if necessary, submit photographic

record of original condition of footpath before commencement of hoarding
erection, in particular for those hoardings with concrete bases for which
application for Excavation Permit is not required.
B. Transport Department
(1) No reversing movement of construction vehicles from/to the construction site

will be permitted except in cases where small or narrow sites are involved in
which case reversing into the site will be permitted.
(2) No construction vehicles will be permitted to queue and wait outside the
construction site.
(3) All loading/unloading activities of construction vehicles will be confined

within the construction site.
(4) The hoarding should be properly lit at night.
(5) The hoarding shall not obscure any traffic signs or traffic signals, traffic
counting detectors or similar traffic equipment. Where resiting/removal of
any traffic aids (such as traffic signs, traffic signals, guardrail and the like) or
where temporary suspensions of parking spaces is necessary, the AP should
submit his application to the Transport Department (TD) for approval of such
resiting/removal, with advance notice of 3 weeks. Upon obtaining TD's
approval, the AP should carry out the resiting/removal/reinstatement works at
the building owner's cost, with sufficient advance notice of 10 days. In case
the floor of a hoarding obstructs the access to the draw-pit marked with
“ATC”, the relevant section of the floor should be portable and removable.
(6) When temporary suspension/removal/relocation of public transport facilities

(such as bus/tram stops and shelters, tram posts and wires, on-streets bus
termini, PLB/taxi stands, queue rails, regulators’ kiosks) are required, please
contact the appropriate Chief Transport Officer (Transport Operations) (Hong
Kong, Kowloon or New Territories Division) direct for all necessary
arrangements. The building owner shall bear the cost thus incurred.
(7) Where the hoarding is erected at or close to a road bend or a non-traffic

signal-controlled road junction, the AP should ensure that a desirable
minimum visibility distance pertaining to the general traffic speed is
maintained. In case of doubt, the AP should contact the appropriate Chief
Traffic Engineer of TD to clarify the detailed arrangement.
/(8) …..
-2-
(8) The hoarding shall not cause sightline problem to the road users, e.g. the use
of high concrete plinth of more than 800mm in height at or near run-ins,
junctions and crossings etc, should be avoided. The appropriate Chief Traffic
Engineer of TD should be consulted, if necessary.
(Rev. 2/2009)
-3-
Appendix B
(PNAP 75)
(APP-23)
Guidelines and Requirements of Traffic Impact Assessment
for hoardings/covered walkways occupying part of the carriageway
1. Requirements for Traffic Impact Assessment
1.1 Hoardings/covered walkways occupying part of the carriageway is considered

as a type of road opening works in terms of traffic impact and the Traffic
Impact Assessment (TIA) requirement for road works on traffic sensitive roads
shall apply. Similar work on non-traffic sensitive roads but within 70m of a
road junction of a traffic sensitive road shall also be governed by this TIA
requirement.
Note : - A TIA will not be required if a minimum inner lane width of 2.8
metres, after encroachment, can be maintained.
1.2 For guidelines on TIA and day-time ban requirements for road works on
traffic sensitive routes, please refer to HyD's Guidance Notes RD/GN/021
which may be accessed/downloaded at HyD's web site
http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/publications/guidance_notes/index.htm.
2. Objectives of Traffic Impact Assessment
2.1 The main objectives of TIA are :
a) to assess the traffic impacts of occupying part of the carriageway;

and
b) to devise appropriate temporary traffic management measures to

ameliorate the traffic impacts.
3. Contents of the Traffic Impact Assessment Report
3.1 The TIA report should contain at least the following information :
a) the name of the Agency to which the hoardings/covered walkways

belong;
b) the address of the site concerned;
c) date of submission;
d) the name of works agency, i.e. the contractor;
e) the name and telephone number of the contact person for the TIA;
/f) ....
-1-
f) description of the works including the proposed programme and
phasing of works; if any
g) existing street inventory within the Study Area;
The Study Area should be large enough to include all significant

impacts of the proposal. At minimum, the area should include the
adjacent signal controlled intersections or the area of influence that
the proposed works may have an impact on the existing road
network.
The existing street inventory within the Study Area should be

recorded in detail. This usually includes street names, number of
lanes and lane widths, direction of traffic flows, road markings
and traffic aids, geometric and characteristics at critical
intersections, existing site access points, right of way and
pedestrian facilities.
h) existing traffic conditions;
Traffic counts should be carried out to obtain traffic flow figures

for the TIA. The count should be carried out at the critical peak
periods. The signal phasing and timing at signalized intersections
and the public transport services affected should be included.
Pedestrian counts should also be required if existing pedestrian are
severed.
i) forecast traffic conditions (if necessary);
The existing traffic conditions can be used for the traffic analysis
for carriageway occupation not exceeding six months from the
submission date of the TIA report. For works beyond such
period, the future traffic conditions should be estimated by using
growth factor method based on historic volume information and
existing counts. The Annual Traffic Census reports published by
TD can be used for such purpose. The forecast future traffic
conditions can then be applied to the implementation of the
temporary traffic management measures.
j) proposed traffic management measures;
Appropriate temporary traffic management schemes should be

devised for implementation together with closure of the part of
carriageway required for the hoardings/covered walkway erection
work. The various aspects in Annex 1 should be followed in
proposing traffic management measures. In addition, swept path
analysis should be conducted for all affected turning movements.
/k) ....
-2-
k) traffic analysis;
The traffic analysis should be carried out for the most critical peak
period. The following items need to be assessed :
• volume/capacity ratios (v/c ratios) of the roads;

• reserved capacities (RC) of the road junctions;
• design flow/capacity ratio (DFC) of priority junctions and
roundabouts.
The calculation of the v/c ratios, RC and DFC should be carried

out in accordance with the Transport Planning and Design Manual
(TPDM) Volumes 2 and 4.
l) consultation (optional)
The parties which have been consulted on the proposal should be

included here. Examples are the Area Traffic Control (ATC)
Division and/or Traffic Engineering (TE) Division of TD, the
Police, the public transport operators, etc.
m) recommendations
Summary findings and recommendations of the TIA should be

given. It should include a recommended traffic scheme and
detailed plans showing the proposed hoardings/walkways
occupying part of the carriageway and the traffic management
measures.
4. Procedures
4.1 One copy of the TIA report should be submitted to the TE Division (Hong
Kong, Kowloon, NT West or NT East) of TD with copy sent to the
Commissioner of Police, the ATC Division of TD if ATC signal junctions are
affected. The TE Division will co-ordinate the comments from the ATC
Division.
4.2 The TE Division of TD can reject the TIA or approve it with or without
conditions. A copy of such notice will be sent to the applicant within a
reasonable period, normally three weeks from the date of receiving the TIA
report. However, for complicated cases, the Division may need to liaise with
the applicant or other parties and the process will take longer, but in any case
within six weeks.
(Rev. 2/2009)
-3-
Annex 1
Appendix B
(PNAP 75)
(APP-23)
Issues to be taken into account in preparing traffic management measures
1. Lighting signing and guarding of Road Works
The Code of Practice for the Lighting, Signing and Guarding of Road Works
should be followed.
2. Pedestrian arrangement
Adequate and safe pedestrian crossing facilities and temporary diversions should be
provided.
3. Access arrangement
Existing ingress/egress and other vehicular rights of way which may be affected by
the project may need to be maintained. Recommended temporary access designs
may be required.
4. Parking
Extent of on-street parking spaces or other off-street parking facilities affected by

the works should be identified and consideration should be given as to whether it is
necessary to provide alternative parking spaces under the project to supplement the
loss of existing provisions.
5. Public transport arrangements
Adequate public transport services should be maintained. Schemes of temporary

routing and stops should be agreed with the concerned transport operators and TD in
advance.
6. Servicing arrangement
Extent of existing loading/unloading provisions affected by the works should be

identified and consideration should be given as to whether alternative provisions is
required.
7. Special event arrangement
If there is any special event, such as Race Days, or concerts etc., then the adequacy
or otherwise the deficiencies of the road networks affected by the road opening
works should be analysed and checked and taken into account.
8. Safety consideration
Due consideration should be given to the safety aspect of all the proposed
temporary schemes and measures towards all road users and pedestrians.
(Rev. 2/2009)
-1-
Appendix C
(PNAP 75)
(APP-23)
Application for Temporary Suspension of Public On-street Parking Spaces

(Metered or Non-metered)
Notes for Guidance
A. General Conditions
(1) An application for the suspension of parking spaces should be submitted to

the Commissioner for Transport (C for T), marked for the attention of the
Chief Transport Officer for the appropriate region (Hong Kong, Kowloon or
the New Territories). The application should specify the intended suspension
period, and when and where the suspension is intended to take place. The
application should be supported with reason for the proposed action, and
should be copied to the Commissioner of Police (C of P), marked for the
attention of the Senior Staff Officer/Traffic (SSO/T) responsible for the
region in question. If other Government departments are involved in the
activity requiring the suspension of spaces, the application should also be
copied to that department or departments as appropriate. Alternatively, for
projects which involve other special arrangements, the application can be
discussed together with other details in a meeting amongst parties concerned.
(2) The number of parking spaces to be suspended should be kept to a minimum

at any one time. Applicants should plan to carry out their work by stages if
too many spaces would be affected.
(3) No work shall commence at the parking spaces prior to their suspension.
(4) No person shall remove any parking sign, meter head, meter post, studs or
carriageway markings without the authorization of the C for T.
(5) When works are completed before the approved suspension period, the
applicant must notify the District Senior Transport Officer/Transport Officer
(DSTO/TO) of the Transport Department (TD) by telephone for the early
reinstatement of the parking spaces for public use. The applicant should
subsequently confirm such notification in writing.
(6) When it becomes apparent that works will extend beyond the approved
suspension period, the applicant should notify the DSTO/TO of TD by
telephone as soon as possible and subsequently confirm this in writing.
(7) When observation shows that the works requiring the parking spaces to be
suspended have been completed, the C for T, in liaison with the C of P, may
arrange for such spaces to be reinstated, even if the period of suspension
requested has not fully elapsed.
/(8) …..
-1-
(8) The C for T, in liaison with the C of P and departments concerned, may
arrange for parking spaces to be reinstated when the affected area is
observed to be no longer in use for works.
(9) Notwithstanding the requirement for advance notice described in sections B

and C below, the applicant may, for emergency cases, contact the DSTO/TO
of TD and the appropriate SSO/T of the Hong Kong Police Force (HKPF)
for special consideration to arrange for the suspension of parking spaces at
short notice. For cases where advance notice is not practicable, the applicant
should notify the appropriate SSO/T of the HKPF immediately and the
DSTO/TO of TD as soon as possible.
B. Suspension of Parking Spaces for a Period less than Three Months
(1) Applications must be submitted in writing together with sketches showing the
parking spaces to be suspended, so as to reach the DSTO/TO of TD at least
seven working days before the commencement of the proposed suspension.
(2) Notwithstanding paragraph (1) above, for the suspension of not more than
two parking spaces for no more than one day for road works, an application
can be submitted by telephone three working days in advance to the
DSTO/TO of TD and the appropriate SSO/T of the HKPF and followed by
confirmation in writing on the same day.
(3) Care should be exercised in undertaking works on the footway or road

carriageway to ensure that parking signs, meter posts and studs or
carriageway markings are not damaged. However, should these traffic aids
be damaged accidentally, the applicant must inform the Highways
Department (HyD), TD and HKPF immediately. In such cases, the
applicant shall be responsible for the cost of the damage incurred and/or the
replacement or reinstatement of the equipment or traffic aids affected.
C. Suspension of Parking Spaces for a Period more than Three Months
(1) Applications must be submitted in writing, together with sketches showing

the proposed parking spaces to be suspended, so as to reach the DSTO/TO
of TD at least 30 days prior to the commencement of the proposed
suspension.
(2) The maximum period of suspension that may be approved is one year. In
case suspension of the parking spaces for a longer period is required, the
applicant must submit a fresh application prior to expiry of the approved
suspension period.
(3) The applicant must bear the costs of removal and subsequent reinstatement of
the affected parking spaces. The costs should be paid in advance to the
HyD, that is before the suspension is effected.
/(4) …..
-2-
(4) The applicant must inform the DSTO/TO of TD and HyD at least one week
before the completion of the project so that arrangements can be made to
reinstate the suspended parking spaces.
(Rev. 2/2009)
-3-
Appendix D
(PNAP 75)
(APP-23)
Self-certification by Authorized Person,

Registered Structural Engineer and Registered Geotechnical Engineer
for the Streamlined Processing of Hoardings, Covered Walkways or Gantries Application
To the Building Authority
In accordance with Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural
Engineers (PNAP) 75, I hereby certify the following for the application for permit to erect
hoardings, covered walkways or gantries with plans (drwg no.
______________________________ to ____________________________) to be erected at
____________________________________________________________________________:
Requirements of the Transport Department and the Highways Department as

specified in Appendix A to PNAP 75 are complied with.
Submission of traffic impact assessment report is not required.
No contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered walkways.
Standard details of hoardings/covered walkways in the Code of Practice for
Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* are adopted and are in compliance with the
provisions of the Buildings Ordinance.
The hoardings/covered walkways are structurally safe.
No felling, pruning or interference with trees is required.
Date_________________
(Name in full)
Certificate of Registration No. :
Date of expiry of registration :
-1-
Part B (to be certified by RSE)
2. I certify that the design of the hoardings, covered walkways or gantries is structurally
safe.
3. I also certify that the structural details of the hoardings, covered walkways or
gantries:
are in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of Practice
for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and are in compliance with the
are not in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of
Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and the corresponding
structural calculations for the revised design are prepared and submitted
which are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance.
Date_________________
Signature of registered
structural engineer
(Name in full)
Part C (to be certified by RGE if applicable)
4. I certify that the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, if applicable, is not
adversely affected.
Date_________________
geotechnical engineer
(Name in full)
Tick box as appropriate

* Delete where inapplicable
(Rev. 2/2009)
-2-
Appendix E
(PNAP 75)
(APP-23)
Safety Certificate for Hoardings/Covered Walkways or Gantries
Part A (to be certified by AP/RSE)
In accordance with the condition of hoarding permit no. ____________,

In support of the application for renewal of hoarding permit no. ______________,
In connection with minor amendments to the hoardings/covered walkways,
I (name in full) _____________________ (Chinese) ________________________,*authorized

person/registered structural engineer, hereby certify that I have inspected the hoardings,
covered walkways and gantries erected at (address of the site)
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________on (Lot No.)_____________________ and in my
opinion they are structurally safe and capable of lasting another ___________ months.
Date_________________
Signature of *authorized person/
registered structural engineer
Part B (to be certified by AP for minor amendment)
2. I certify the following:

(a) Highways Department’s and Transport Department’s requirements in Appendix
A are still complied with;
(b) the original traffic impact assessment, if any, is still valid;
(c) the position of the gantry and run-in/out is not changed;
-1-
(d) no contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered walkways; and
(e) no trees are affected.
Date_________________
(Name in full)
Part C (to be certified by RSE for minor amendment)
3. I certify that the design of the hoardings, covered walkways or gantries is

structurally safe.
4. I also certify that the structural details of the hoardings, covered walkways
or gantries:
are in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of Practice
for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and are in compliance with the
are not in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of
Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and the corresponding
structural calculations for the revised design are prepared and submitted
which are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance.
Date_________________
Signature of registered structural engineer
(Name in full)
-2-
Part D (to be certified by RGE if applicable)
5. I certify that the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, is not adversely
affected.
Date_________________
geotechnical engineer
(Name in full)

(Rev. 2/2009)
-3-
Railway Protection
Railways Ordinance
Mass Transit Railway (Land Resumption and Related Provisions) Ordinance
Buildings Ordinance Scheduled Area No. 3
As a result of the merger of the Mass Transit Railway Corporation and

Kowloon-Canton Railway Corporation (KCRC) on 2 December 2007, the MTR
Corporation Limited (MTRCL) becomes the operator of all the railway lines in the
territory. The existing railways in operation comprise the following lines –
Tsuen Wan Line, Kwun Tong Line, Island Line, Tseung Kwan O
Line, Tung Chung Line, Airport Express, Disneyland Resort Line,
East Rail Line, West Rail Line, Ma On Shan Line and Light Rail.
2. To safeguard the safety and stability of the railway structures, railway

protection areas have been delineated and shown on relevant plans and a set of
building/engineering guidelines produced. Copies of the plans showing the railway
protection areas are available for inspection in the MTRCL. They can also be viewed and
downloaded from the web site of MTRCL
(http://www.mtr.com.hk./engtxt/railway/protection_boundary_map.html).
3. As a general guide, the boundary of the railway protection areas is about 30 m

outside the outer surface of the railway structures or the railway fence/wall, or from the
nearest rail if there is no railway fence/wall, but it encompasses the whole of any lot where
any part thereof lies within the 30 m distance. At the railway stations, the area enclosed by
the boundary is more extensive.
4. The railway protection areas of some of the railway lines are designated as
Scheduled Area No. 3 in the Fifth Schedule to the Buildings Ordinance. The railway
protection areas in Schedule Area No. 3 are: -
(a) Tsuen Wan Line, Kwun Tong Line, Island Line, Tseung Kwan O
Line, Tung Chung Line and Airport Express
(i) the areas delineated on the plans numbered MTR/G/1 to 3,

MTR/RP/1 to 22, MTR/RP/25 to 27, MTR/RP/30 to 46,
MTR/RP/50 to 55, MTR/RP/60 to 66 and MTR/RP/101 to
170 dated 29 June 1998 signed by the Secretary for Planning,
Environment and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry;
and
/(ii) …..
-2-
(ii) the areas delineated on the plans numbered MTR/G/4,

MTR/RP/23 Rev. A, MTR/RP/24 Rev. A, MTR/RP/28 Rev.
A, MTR/RP/29 Rev. A, MTR/RP/56 Rev. A, MTR/RP/57
Rev. A, MTR/RP/58 Rev. A, MTR/RP/59 Rev. A and
MTR/RP/202 to 223 dated 29 May 2002 signed by the
Secretary for Planning and Lands and deposited in the Land
Registry.
(b) West Rail Line
(i) the areas delineated on the plans numbered KCR/WR/RP/100

to 120 (Rev. 1), KCR/WR/RP/121 (Rev. 2) and
KCR/WR/RP/122 to 145 (Rev. 1) dated 6 June 2003 signed
by the Secretary for Housing, Planning and Lands and
deposited in the Land Registry; and
(ii) the areas delineated on the plans numbered

KCR/ERE/TSTE/RP/100, KCR/ERE/TSTE/RP/101 and
KCR/ERE/TSTE/RP/111 dated 1 June 2004 signed by the
Secretary for Housing, Planning and Lands and deposited in
the Land Registry.
Copies of these plans are available for inspection in the Buildings Department (BD).
------ 5. The guidelines at Appendix A apply to all building works (including ground
investigation works and underground drainage works) to be carried out in the railway
protection areas. Ground investigation works and underground drainage works in
Scheduled Area No. 3 are subject to additional control as stated in paragraph 11 below.
Building Works
6. Plans submitted to BD for proposed building works within the railway

protection areas are circulated to the MTRCL for their comment under the centralized
processing arrangements. Section 27 of the Railways Ordinance, Cap 519 or section 15 of
the Mass Transit Railway (Land Resumption and Related Provisions) Ordinance, Cap 276
will be invoked to require the incorporation of any necessary measures to protect the
railway lines.
7. Authorized persons (APs), registered structural engineers (RSEs) and

registered geotechnical engineers (RGEs) are required to monitor any movement and
vibration on the railway structures when required by the MTRCL. Upon request by the
MTRCL, APs, RSEs and RGEs should submit a monitoring proposal to the MTRCL for
agreement and forward a copy of the monitoring records to them. APs, RSEs and RGEs
are required to inform the MTRCL direct of the commencement of any building works
within the railway protection areas to enable them to plan an appropriate monitoring
programme. If any adverse situation becomes apparent, the MTRCL will alert the
interested parties.
/8. …..
-3-
8. Any other necessary monitoring within the building site (e.g. monitoring of
piezometric change) will be carried out by the AP/RSE/RGE of the site, who should
maintain regular contact with the MTRCL and keep each other informed of the monitoring
records as necessary.
9. The Director of Buildings may in writing, under the provisions of section 12 of

the Mass Transit Railway (Land Resumption and Related Provisions) Ordinance, Cap 276,
authorize an employee of the MTRCL to enter any building site within the railway
protection areas for the purpose of monitoring construction. Alternatively, the Secretary
for Transport and Housing may issue such notice under the provisions of section 24 of the
Railways Ordinance, Cap 519.
Building Opening adjacent to a Railway Vent Shaft
10. There are certain restraints on the design of and making alteration to properties
in close proximity to a railway vent shaft to minimise the possibility of contamination by
fire or smoke. In this connection, APs and RSEs are advised that any opening such as an
openable or fixed window, doorway, building ventilation system intake or exhaust and the
like in any building shall be located not closer than 5 m to the opening of any railway vent
shaft, irrespective of whether such vent shaft is free-standing or is accommodated in a
building. This distance may be reduced to 2.5 m, if the exhaust air from the railway vent
shaft is directed away from and is not likely to affect the opening by natural convection.
Ground Investigation Works and Underground Drainage Works

11. Ground investigation works within Scheduled Area No. 3 require prior
approval and consent from the Building Authority. Plans prescribed under Building
(Administration) Regulation 8(1)(l) should be submitted and the proposals should follow
---- the guidelines at Appendix A. Application for concurrent processing of approval and
consent in respect of ground investigation works should follow Practice Note for
Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical
Engineers (PNAP) ADM-16. Underground drainage works in or for any existing buildings
to be carried out in Scheduled Area No. 3 are not exempted from application for approval
and consent to commence works and are subject to the full provisions of the Buildings
Ordinance.
12. Proposals for ground investigation works or underground drainage works in or

for any existing buildings to be carried out within railway protection areas other than those
designated as Scheduled Area No. 3 should be forwarded to the MTRCL for comment prior
to commencement of the proposed works.
Practice Note Repealed
13. PNAP APP-131 is repealed.
/Guidelines …..
-4-
Guidelines for Registered Contractors
14. A similar practice note is issued to Registered Contractors.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/67
BD R&L/29/78

This revision November 2009 (AD/NB1) (generally revised, Appendix A amended)
PNAP APP-24
Appendix A
Technical Notes for Guidance in Assessing

the Effects of Civil Engineering Construction/Building Development
on Railway Structures and Operations
A. General
All proposals for new building and engineering works including utilities works
within the limits of the railway protection areas shall be subject to special scrutiny
of the Government prior to giving approval to any plans and/or consent for
commencing construction works. Every proposal shall be assessed individually
on its impact on existing railway and related structures/installations including all
plants and fixtures necessary for the safe operation of the railway and subject to
satisfactory compliance with the following technical requirements.
B. Underground Railway Structures
1. Site Formation/Foundation Works
Where site formation or foundation works or excavation works etc. are proposed
above, beneath or adjacent to railway underground structures/installations
including cooling water mains system, the effects of such works shall not exceed
the following limits: -
(a) The vertical or horizontal pressure change on any underground

structures/installations due to the works, including filling, ground
improvement, dewatering, field testing (such as plate loading test,
pressure-meter test and packer test) etc. and due to addition or
reduction of loads transmitted from foundations (including any
loads arising during construction), shall not exceed 20 kPa.
(b) Differential movement resulting from the works shall not produce
distortion in any railway structures/installations including the plinth
or track in excess of 1 in 1 000 in any plane or a total movement in
any railway structures/installations including the plinth or track
exceeding 20 mm in any plane.
(c) The induced level difference between rails of a track in

perpendicular plane resulting from the works shall not exceed 5 mm.
(d) The peak particle velocities induced to any railway structures

resulting from blasting (where permitted) and from driving or
withdrawing of piles or any similar operation which can induce
prolonged vibration shall not exceed 25 mm/sec and 15 mm/sec
respectively, when measured with a vibrograph.
-1-
(e) No pile, foundation, borehole/drillhole, well, soil nail, horizontal
drain, rock bolt/dowel or other geotechnical installation shall be
driven, constructed or installed within a distance of 3 m from any
point of the underground railway structures.
(f) Any part of an anchor, if allowed, shall be more than 3 m away from
any part of a railway structure/installation, and the centroid of the
fixed length of the anchor shall be more than twice the fixed length
away from any railway structure/installation.
2. Ground Investigation Works
Ground investigation proposals should include the followings: -
(a) Details of the exploration and locations of the proposed exploration

holes, trial pits, trenches, field testing or instrumentations relative to
any railway structures whether inside or outside the lot;
(b) Proposed depth of boreholes/drillholes, pits or trenches;
(c) A method statement for sinking boreholes/drillholes, excavating

trial pits and trenches including back-filling, conducting field testing
or installing instrumentation;
(d) A method statement for checking verticality of boreholes/drillholes

located within a distance of 10 m on plan of any point of the
underground railway structure, should boreholes/drillholes be sunk
to a depth of 3 m from the highest point of the railway structures;
and
(e) A method statement for controlling depth of boreholes/drillholes

sinking within a distance of 3 m on plan of any point of the
underground railway structures.
Each proposal will also be judged against the technical guidelines as specified in
paragraph B.1 above.
3. Utility Works
Utility trenches/pits which require excavation within the railway protection areas
shall not be carried out without the approval of the Government in consultation
with the MTRCL.
4. Marine Works
Any reclamation, dredging, laying of pipes, dropping of anchors, or other

engineering works to be carried out within the railway protection areas shall be
submitted to the Government for approval in consultation with the MTRCL.
5. Sinking of Wells
-2-
Sinking of wells within railway protection areas is building works subject to the
control of the Buildings Ordinance including section 14(1) thereof. Before the
carrying out of the works, the approval of plans and consent for the
commencement of such works should be obtained from the Building Authority.
C. Overhead Railway Structures
1. Scaffolding, Advertising Signs, Projections
Erection of scaffolding, working platforms, advertising signs or any projections at

a level above the railway tracks shall not be allowed within a distance of 6 m on
plan of any point of the railway tracks, without the consent of the Government.
When such works are permitted to be carried out within the 6 m limit, effective
measures to protect the railway structures shall be provided. According to
individual circumstances it may be necessary for such works to be conducted
outside the railway operation hours. All protective works shall be subject to the
special approval of Government.
2. Overhead Structures
The requirements of paragraph B.1(b) to B.1(f) should also apply to overhead

structures.
3. Utility Works
When cables, ducts and pipes, etc are to cross above or below railway overhead
structures, the Utility Undertaking shall submit to the Government details of the
cables, ducts, pipes and the method of construction and seek special approval
before work can commence. When cables, ducts and pipes, etc are to pass over
the railway, the provisions of paragraphs B.1, C.1 and D. shall apply.
D. At-grade Railway Structures
1. When utility works are to be carried out across the at-grade railway tracks,
agreement from the MTRCL has to be sought.
2. Unless prior special agreement has been obtained, piling works will not be
permitted within 3 m on plan from the railway fence or wall along the
railway premises, or 7 m on plan from the centreline of the nearest track
when there is no railway fence or wall.
3. Vibration measured on the overhead power line mast, or signalling and

telecommunication furniture of railway shall not exceed the peak particle
velocity of 10 mm/sec and the vibration amplitudes shall not exceed 80
µm.
4. The requirements of paragraphs B.1, B.2, B.3 and C.1 shall also apply to
the at-grade railway structures and tracks.
-3-
E. Operation of Stationary Lifting Appliance
(tower crane, hoist, piling/drilling rigs)
1. When such an appliance is erected adjacent to railway tracks and/or above

ground structures/installations, effective measures to protect the railway
structures shall be provided. According to individual circumstances it may
be necessary for such works to be conducted outside the railway operation
hours. All protective works shall be subject to special Government
approval. The Government may impose conditions on the operation and
positioning of the appliance if in its opinion such operation and
positioning may endanger the safe operation of the railway.
2. The arc in which the jib of lifting appliance swings shall not encroach
within 6 m of the railway tracks and above ground structures/installations
on plan except with special Government approval.
F. Mobile Lifting Appliance
Where a mobile lifting appliance (e.g. crane, excavator) operates within 6 m on

plan of railway structures and any part of the appliance is higher than the railway
track level, the provisions of paragraph E. shall apply.
G. Maintenance of Road Lamp Standards
When road lighting tower maintenance vehicles are to be used to service road
lamp standards adjacent to railway tracks, the working equipment shall not be
positioned closer to the railway tracks than the nearest part of the road lamp
standard where the height of the lamp standard is greater than the height of the
tracks. If the working equipment is to be operated at a level higher than 1 m
above railway tracks and closer than 6 m from the railway tracks, provisions as in
paragraph C.1, E. and F. shall also apply.
H. Fire Services Department/Police Force Vehicles
The operation of Fire Services/Police vehicles adjacent to the railway tracks or

vent shafts under emergency situations shall be in accordance with the emergency
procedure agreed between MTRCL and the respective organization.
I. Storage of Materials
1. No materials, containers, huts etc. shall be stored within 6 m on plan of the

railway structures/tracks and vent shaft openings except with the special
Government approval.
-4-
2. No dangerous goods or other inflammable materials shall be stored within
6 m on plan of railway structures/tracks except with the special
Government approval.
J. Demolition Works
Where demolition and removal works for any structure which includes
scaffolding, advertising signs, container offices and buildings are proposed
above or adjacent to above-ground railway structures, such as entrances, vent
shafts, power distribution substations, traction substations, plant rooms,
overhead railway structures and at-grade railway tracks, effective measures to
protect the railway structures shall be provided. Demolition works proposal
with the protective measures shall be submitted to BD for approval and consent
prior to commencing work.
Ref. : PNAP APP-24

PNRC 14
(Rev. 11/2009)
-5-

Requirements for a Geotechnical Assessment

at General Building Plan Stage
Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(ba)
Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(ba) empowers the Building

Authority to require a geotechnical assessment of the adequacy of a site for proposed
building works at `general building plans' stage. This provision will assist authorized
persons to identify at an early stage any fundamental geotechnical constraints that could
arise on certain sites or for certain types of development. It should ensure that the
geotechnical feasibility of the proposed building works is adequately assessed and reflected
in the general building plans.
Criteria for Submission of Geotechnical Assessment
2. Plans as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(a), (b), (c)

or (h) should be accompanied by a geotechnical assessment when any of the following
apply :
(a) where the maximum gradient across a site from boundary to boundary or,
for a large site, across any 50 m long strip, is greater than 15°,
(b) where a slope inclined at more than 30° and greater than 7.5 m high
(including the height of any retaining wall at its toe or crest) exists on the
site or within 7.5 m of the site,
(c) where there is to be an excavation with a face longer than 10 m and either :
(i) the excavation is to be deeper than 7.5 m at any point at any stage; or
(ii) the excavation will be below a plane projecting down at 45° from the
toe of any retaining wall; or
(iii) the excavation is to be made below HKPD minus 1 m on reclaimed

coastal land,
(d) where a retaining wall greater than 6 m high (retained height) exists on the
site or a 6 m or longer portion of such a wall exists within 6 m of the site,
(e) where special geological conditions exist, such as previous landslides, debris
flows, threatening boulders and potential rockfalls.
cont'd/.....
-2-
Contents of Geotechnical Assessment
3. The essential contents of a geotechnical assessment are :
(a) an outline of the topography, geology and presumed groundwater conditions

of the site,
(b) a general description of the proposed works and discussion of how the
existing geotechnical features (such as slopes, retaining walls and adjacent
foundations) will affect or be affected by such works,
(c) a discussion to demonstrate the feasibility of the proposed development,

including descriptions of construction methods and sequence of works,
(d) schematic plans and sections of the proposed site formation works and
foundation works, taking the above discussion into account,
(e) a plan showing the scope and extent of the proposed ground investigation
specifying, by reference to section 15.3 of GEOGUIDE 2 : Guide to Site
Investigation, the level of independent site supervision of the works to be
undertaken, and
(f) descriptions of intended investigations of the stability of existing slopes and

retaining walls and any preventive or remedial works that may be needed.
Rejection of Building Plan
4. Any general building plan to which the criteria at para. 2 apply, received by
the Buildings Ordinance Office not accompanied by a geotechnical assessment is liable to
be rejected under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(a).
(A.G. Eason)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GR/BOP/14
First issued April 1981

This Amendment October 1991 (GGE) (para. 2 amended, para. 3 added)
Index under : B(A)R 8(1)(ba) - Geotechnical Assessment

Building Plans - Requirements for a Geotechnical Assessment
Geotechnical Assessment

Pouring of Concrete
against Walls of Adjoining Buildings
The use of walls of adjoining buildings as permanent shuttering during concrete

pouring operations has resulted in the failure of portions of such walls, causing damage to
property and injury to persons.
2. This practice is not acceptable unless a physical check has been made to
confirm the safety of the wall to be so used. Such check should include confirmation of its
thickness, conditions and structural capability to withstand any load imposed on it by the wet
concrete and tamping process.
3. Where the stability of the wall is in question or cannot be verified, independent

shuttering should be provided to prevent any load being imposed on the wall. Alternatively,
precautionary measures must be taken to provide adequate support and to minimize the load.
4. Unless evidence clearly indicates otherwise, total or partial failure of a wall in

these circumstances will be taken to indicate negligence in carrying out checks or in taking
satisfactory precautionary measures and will be considered as an offence under Buildings
Ordinance section 40.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BOP/3

This revision May 1994 (AD/SE)
Index under : Adjoining Buildings - pouring of Concrete against Walls of

Concrete - pouring against Walls of Adjoining Buildings
Walls - pouring of Concrete against Walls of Adjoining Buildings

Gas Water Heaters

Building (Planning) Regulation 35A
Building (Planning) Regulation 35A requires suitable provision for the

installation of a room-sealed gas water heater in every bathroom in a building. This
note specifies the arrangements considered generally to be acceptable.
2. In some instances (e.g. with special ducted flue systems), other

arrangements may be accepted. Each case will be carefully considered on its merits
and in the light of any special circumstances presented for consideration.
Size of the Aperture
3. A standard aperture should be :
(a) 380 mm by 380 mm normally; or
(b) 240 mm by 240 mm when the bathroom is of such a size that only a
shower could be fitted.
4. Non-standard apertures may be constructed provided that :
(a) the size is to suit a specific water heater flue installed before completion
of building; and
(b) if necessary, the aperture may be enlarged later to the appropriate

standard size (the provision for which can be clearly discernible)
without cutting reinforcing bars, re-positioning services or the like.
Location
5. The general requirements are as follows:
(a) An aperture should be located in the clear face of an external wall,

except that in buildings served by a permanently open and well
ventilated balcony approach, apertures may be placed so as to vent into
such balconies;
(b) As for the internal face of the wall, there should be an unobstructed
area around the aperture. The minimum dimensions are as follows :-
50 mm above
100 mm to each side
150 mm below
/(c)....
-2-
(c) The base of the aperture should be not less than 200 mm and not more
than 2 400 mm above floor level.
(d) The aperture should be not less than 300 mm from any corner or from
any other opening into the building (e.g. an openable window, a vent,
an air-conditioner opening or another aperture);
(e) The aperture should be in a wall which has a clear space of not less
than 1 500 mm between it and any facing wall or other part of a
building, or site boundary. However, if the boundary abuts a street, an
aperture may be provided in any wall abutting that street;
(f) An aperture should not be positioned directly below any fixed clothes
drying racks installed during the construction of the building. Flue
terminal guards (supplied/designed by the appliance manufacturers)
should be fitted at aperture locations if selected water heating
appliances do not incorporate an overheating protector.
(g) The water heater, when fitted, should not cause obstruction or
inconvenience to the normal use of the room in which it is installed,
and should be readily accessible for use; and
(h) The length of the hot water pipes from the water heater should comply
with the requirements of Waterworks Regulation 19 (Cap 102).
6. For apertures facing into an enclosed space (such as a light well) :
(a) The entire enclosed space should contain no obstruction to restrict a

vertical flow of air;
(b) The enclosed space should be ventilated to the external air below the
lowest aperture so as to maintain the air flow. The area of the vents
providing this ventilation should be not less than 0.05 m2 for each
aperture which faces into the enclosed space. No vent may have any
internal dimension less than 200 mm; and
(c) The minimum plan dimension of the enclosed space in relation to its
height should be -
not less than 3 m - not more than 10 storeys high

not less than 4 m - between 11 - 19 storeys high
not less than 5 m - 20 or more storeys high
7. For apertures facing into a re-entrant :
(a) The minimum plan width of the re-entrant should be not less than 1.5
m;
/(b)....
-3-
(b) At each storey, any obstruction (e.g. tie beam) at the open end of a re-
entrant may not reduce the vertical open area by more than 20%; and
(c) The entire re-entrant should contain no obstruction to restrict a vertical

flow of air.
8. With respect to the location of the standard aperture for water heaters,
please refer to the drawing at Appendix A.
Sealing
9. When a gas water heater is not fitted at the time of construction, a

standard aperture must still be provided. There is no objection to it being sealed.
However, any such sealing should be of easily removable brickwork or blockwork.
Moreover, any aperture so sealed should be clearly discernible (e.g. by means of
recessing) from the inside of the building.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/PU/1

This revision December 1998 (AD/D) - para. 3 amended
Index under : Apertures for Gas Water Heaters

B(P)R 35A - Gas Water Heaters
Gas Water Heaters - B(P)R 35A
Appendix A
PNAP 82
APP-27
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION OF
ROOM-SEALED WATER HEATER TERMINAL
INTERNAL VIEW
Ceiling
M
Dimension Minimum
K Unobstructed 100 mm
Q N Area 150 mm
Q 50 mm
L K K P Height Above 200 mm
floor (2400 max.)
LxM Standard size 380 x 380 mm
or
240 x 240 mm
N Non standard to suit
P
* Unobstructed area shaded
Floor
This revision December 1998


Requirements for Qualified Supervision of Site Formation Works,

Excavation Works, Foundation Works on Sloping Ground, and
Ground Investigation Works in the Scheduled Areas
Buildings Ordinance Section 17
Buildings Ordinance Section 17 explicitly empowers the Building Authority

to require ‘qualified supervision’ of certain building works when giving his approval of
plans or consent to the commencement of the works.
2. The principles used by the Building Authority in assessing the need for
qualified supervision of building works with significant geotechnical content, including site
formation works, excavation works, foundation works on sloping ground and ground
investigation works in the Scheduled Areas, are as follows :
Category (I) periodic inspections by a qualified geotechnical engineer

who was involved in the preparation of the geotechnical
content of the submission
This category of qualified supervision applies to sites

where the results of stability analyses or ground movement
calculations are sensitive to variations in the geotechnical
design assumptions. According to B(A)R 8(1)(bb), (bc)
etc, the geotechnical design assumptions must be checked
on site as works proceed. This is the first duty of the
geotechnical engineer providing the site supervision.
Having checked the geotechnical design assumptions, the
need for modifications to the design has then to be judged
by the geotechnical engineer.
Some types of design assumptions which may be critical

for stability, and which are often found by expert
inspection on site to be in error, are :
(a) the geological model (eg variation in weathering

may affect the penetration depth of steel sheet
piles); and
(b) the groundwater regime (eg occurrence of a

perched water table may impair stability).
/Category (II) ....

- 2 -
Category (II) periodic inspections by a senior qualified geotechnical

engineer who was responsible for the preparation of the
geotechnical content of the submission
This category of qualified supervision is to be imposed for

sites of high sensitivity (eg excavation sites adjoining old
buildings with shallow foundations). The personal
attention of the qualified supervisor is needed to recognise,
evaluate and communicate concerns to the authorized
person and the client at a senior level.
Category (III) full time supervision by a suitably experienced person
This category of qualified supervision applies to sites

where day-to-day checks on compliance with specifications
or working procedures are necessary. It is used for works
which depend for their success and safety on a high
standard of workmanship and materials.
Some examples are works involving ground anchors,

compaction of fill slopes, and excavation and lateral
support works involving complicated working procedures.
3. A qualified supervision package may be provided using a combination of

Categories (I), (II) and (III) above. In any case, details of the individuals who are to carry
out the supervision are to be submitted to the Building Authority for agreement.
4. The following provides guidance on the suitability of persons nominated for

compliance with qualified supervision requirements :
Category (I) - Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) or

equivalent from the firm which prepared the
geotechnical content of the submission.
Category (II) - Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical)

who is a partner/director or equivalent of the firm
which prepared the geotechnical content of the
submission.
Category (III) - Suitably experienced qualified or graduate

engineer/geologist or technical inspector/works
supervisor, depending on the type of works.
/5. Registration ....

- 3 -
5. Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) is not a pre-requisite for

acceptance of persons nominated for Category (I) and Category (II) qualified supervision.
Each case should be considered on its own merits. For sites where geotechnical problems
are of a minor nature and the consequences of failure would be insignificant, the Building
Authority will normally not impose the requirement for qualified geotechnical supervision.
6. For certain sites, geotechnical supervisory requirements have been included

in the lease or land title document, and on application the sectional Chief Building Surveyor
will advise whether this is the case for a specific site.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
First issued March 1982

This update December 1997 (GGE, AD/SE) - Supervision levels renamed
Index under : BO s17 - Requirement for Qualified Supervision of Building

Works with Geotechnical Content
Supervision - Building Works with Geotechnical Content

Lift and Escalator Installations
Building Works Requirements
The design and construction of buildings and building works

accommodating lift and escalator installations are governed by Building (Construction)
Regulation 9A, which specifies performance requirements in broad terms. Detailed
technical standards are promulgated in the “Code of Practice on the Design and
Construction of Buildings and Building Works for the Installation and Safe Use of Lifts
and Escalators 1993” (the “Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators”)
issued by the Building Authority (“BA”). Compliance with this Code will be considered
as satisfying the requirements of Building (Construction) Regulation 9A.
2. Other standards may also be accepted if it is proved to the satisfaction of the BA

that they are capable of achieving equivalent performance. If other standards are to be
applied, it will speed up the processing of plans if the full background to such standards
and their suitability for local conditions are clearly explained.
Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators
3. The Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators is kept
under review and amendments from time to time to cater for changes in circumstances,
advancement in technology and latest development in building standards.
4. Since its publication in 1993, various amendments have been made to the
Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators. These amendments are set out
at Appendix A. The Code should therefore be read in conjunction with the amendments at
Appendix A, which will be incorporated in the next reprint of the Code.
/Adequacy …..
- 2 -
Adequacy of Fixing Details
5. Buildings with lift and escalator installations shall be designed and

constructed so as to provide adequate structural strength for the safe operation, maintenance
and inspection of the lifts and escalators. In this regard, Authorized Persons and Registered
Structural Engineers are reminded to pay particular attention to the following fixing details,
including layout arrangement, specification of structural materials, anchor and load
distribution, so as to ensure that the machine and pulley rooms as well as liftwells shall be so
constructed to withstand the loads and forces to which they will normally be subjected:
(a) fixing details between the guide rail mounting bracket and the supporting
building structure;
(b) fixing details between the lift machine and the supporting building structure;
and
(c) fixing details between the deflector sheave (pulley) bracket and the
supporting building structure.
Electrical, Mechanical and Operational Requirements
6. Requirements for the electrical, mechanical and operational aspects of lifts

and escalators are laid down in the “Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of
Lifts and Escalators” and the “Code of Practice for Lift Works and Escalator Works” issued
by the Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services (“DEMS”) under the Lifts and
Escalators (Safety) Ordinance, Cap. 327 (“LE(S)O”).
Works Required by the DEMS in Connection with an Application for Permission to

Put Lifts or Escalators into Service
7. Authorized Persons are reminded to ensure that all essential building and
lift/escalators works as well as works associated with the lift and escalator installation (“the
associated works”) should be completed before submitting application to the DEMS under
/the …..
- 3 -
the LE(S)O for permission to put the lifts and escalators into service. The DEMS has
advised that in the past most of such applications were submitted while the associated works
had not yet been completed. A list of the associated works often found incomplete for a
lift installation is attached at Appendix B and that for an escalator installation is at Appendix
C for reference.
Practice Note Repealed
8. PNAP 276 is repealed.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Appendix A : Amendments to Code of Practice on Building Works for

Lifts and Escalators
B : Associated works often found incomplete for Lift
Installations
C : Associated works often found incomplete for Escalator
Installations
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/41
BD GP/BREG/L/4
BD GP/LEG/15 (IX)

This revision March 2007 (AD/Sup) - Overall revision
Index under : Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators
Escalator Installation
Lift Installation
Appendix A
(PNAP 84)
Addendum to the Code of Practice (APP-29)
On the Design and Construction of Buildings and Building Works
for the Installation and Safe Use of Lifts and Escalators 1993
Paragraph
in the Amendments
Code
1.1 Replace “the Code of Practice for the Design, Construction,
Maintenance, Examination and Testing of Lifts and Escalators” by “the
Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and
Escalators and the Code of Practice for Lift Works and Escalator
Works.
2. Renumbered as “2.1”.
2.2 New paragraph added:-
“If there are justifications to deviate from, or practical difficulties to
comply with, the minimum dimensions given in Table 1, then the
requirements may be modified provided that a registered lift engineer
or a person authorized by a registered lift contractor confirms in
writing that:-
(i) the installations can be accommodated in the proposed lift

wells and machine rooms;
(ii) any future maintenance, repair, major alteration, replacement,
examination and testing of the lifts can be carried out in the
proposed liftwells and machine rooms safely and without
difficulty; and
(iii) the lift installations are in full compliance with the Code of
Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and
Escalators issued under the Lifts and Escalators (Safety)
Ordinance.
For machine-room-less lift installations, modifications of the above

minimum dimensions and non-provision of machine rooms would be
acceptable provided that exemptions from relevant requirements of
the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and
Escalators have also been obtained to allow installation of such
machine-room-less lifts.”
/2. Table 1….

-1-
Table 1 Replace item 2 of “Notes on Table 1” by “The dimensions specified
in this table are also applicable to rated speeds lower or higher than
those stated (i.e. lower than 1.0 m/s for all rated loads; higher than
1.75 m/s for 630 kg, 3.5 m/s for 1,600 kg, etc.). For intermediate
loads and rated speeds, the dimensions are determined by linear
interpolation from relevant dimensions in Table 1.
3.8.4 Add the following after “……equipment.”:
“The position of at least one hand hold in the lift well should be
approximately 1.3 m above the sill and not more than 0.9 m from the
landing entrance opening.”
3.10.3 The original wording of the notice “WHEN THERE IS A FIRE DO
NOT USE THE LIFT 火警時切勿使用升降機” specified in this
paragraph is deleted and substituted by the following: -
IN CASE OF FIRE
DO NOT USE THE LIFT
如遇火警切勿使用升降機
4.6.2 Replace “the Code of Practice for the Design, Construction,
Maintenance, Examination and Testing of Lifts and Escalators” by “the
Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and
Escalators”.
5.3.1 Replace “imperforate Triangular” by “obstruction” and “the Code of
Practice for the Design, Construction, Maintenance, Examination and
Testing of Lifts and Escalators” by “the Code of Practice on the Design
and Construction of Lifts and Escalators”.
(3/2007)
-2-
Appendix B
(PNAP 84)
A list of associated works often found incomplete by DEMS (APP-29)
for a lift installation
when an application for permission to put the lift into service was submitted
(the list is not exhaustive)
1. Permanent doors to machine and pulley room opening outwards, fitted with self-closing
devices and proper locking devices. Permanent warning notices on the outside face of the
door.
2. Clear and safe access to machine and pulley rooms.
3. Adequate railings of suitable height to machine platforms. Appropriate steps or stairways

where there was a level difference.
4. Liftwells, machine and pulley rooms completely enclosed and all unnecessary holes sealed up.
5. Permanent and adequate lighting for liftwells, machine and/or pulley rooms and/or machine
platforms.
6. Protective guards to ventilating fans. Cross-ventilation through the machine room. Wind
guards to ventilation louvers.
7. Provision of adequate electricity supply by permanent cables.
8. Proper isolation switch with permanent identification label for each lift, easily accessible from
an entrance of the machine room.
9. MCB and proper isolation switches with permanent identification labels for lighting and/or
socket outlets of lift cars, wells or pits, machine and/or pulley rooms.
10. Unnecessary holes in lift wells, machine and pulley rooms filled up.
11. Surplus/protruded iron bars inside liftwells all removed.
12. Inspection doors, emergency doors and inspection traps, where required, with proper locking
devices and clear and safe access.
13. Required partition between lift ways in common liftwells.
14. Lift pits completely enclosed and waterproofed.
15. Cat ladders with suitable hand holds for access to pits.
/16. ….
-1-
16. Supporting frames and reinforced wire mesh provided to the liftwell top vents
17. Permanent and adequate lighting installations in lift lobbies. (If decoration, false ceilings, etc
are to be installed in the lift lobby after permission to use the lift has been granted, such
decoration/false ceiling shall not affect or obstruct the permanent illumination of the lift
lobby.)
18. Ventilation of liftwells directed to open air either directly or via ducting/the machine/pulley
room.
19. Permanent and adequate lighting in liftwells and lift pits.
20. Debris and unrelated materials in liftwells, machine and pulley rooms cleared.
21. Earth bonding for metallic parts in machine rooms.
22. Associated works (except those purely for decoration purposes) surrounding the landing
entrances.
23. All necessary instructions and notices in both Chinese and English in the lift cars and on the
landings.
24. The maximum permissible load in both Chinese and English indicated on the lifting beams or
hooks.
(3/2007)
-2-
Appendix C
(PNAP 84)
(APP-29)
A list of associated works often found incomplete by DEMS
for an escalator installation
when an application for permission to put the escalator into service was submitted
(the list is not exhaustive)
1. Permanent machine room doors fitted with self-closing devices, with permanent
warning notices and proper locking devices.
2. Clear and safe access to machine rooms.
3. Unnecessary holes in machine rooms filled up.
4. Provision of adequate electricity supply by permanent cables.
5. MCB and proper isolation switches with permanent identification labels for lighting
and socket outlets for each escalator.
6. Proper protective guards where the clearance between the balustrade exterior paneling
and any adjacent guard rail/wall at each landing exceeds 100 mm.
7. Permanent obstruction guards properly installed at floor intersections, building
obstacles and on criss-cross escalators.
8. Adequate clearance between the outer edges of the handrails and the adjacent walls,
criss-cross escalators or other building obstacles.
9. Clear height above the steps and the required unrestricted area of not less than 2.3 m.
10. The required unrestricted area for accommodating passengers at both landings.
11. Permanent and adequate lighting around the escalator including both landings. (If
decoration, false ceilings, etc are to be installed around the escalator after permission
to use the escalator has been granted, such decoration/false ceiling shall not affect or
obstruct the permanent illumination around the escalator including both landings.)
12. The part of wellway, building obstacles or external wall of adjacent criss-cross
escalator facing handrail forming a smooth continuous vertical surface.
13. The underside of false ceiling at floor intersections or bottom deck of adjacent
criss-cross escalator forming a smooth continuous flat surface.
(3/2007)

Development in Mid-levels Scheduled Area

Buildings Ordinance section 2(1)
Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(vii) and 8(1)(l)
Building works in the Mid-levels Scheduled Area, which is designated

as Area Number 1 of the Scheduled Areas in the Fifth Schedule of the Buildings
Ordinance (Scheduled Area No.1), are subject to additional geotechnical controls
under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations.
2. As Scheduled Area No.1 is located in the region of sloping ground, all

geotechnical aspects of works require input from a Registered Geotechnical Engineer
(RGE), in particular at the early planning stage of the building works. RGE should be
appointed under the Buildings Ordinance to undertake the following tasks involving
geotechnical elements.
Ground Investigation
3. By virtue of Buildings Ordinance section 41(3), ground investigation in

the Scheduled Area No.1 require approval from the Building Authority (BA). As
such, ground investigation plans including laboratory testing as prescribed in Building
(Administration) Regulation 8(1)(l) must be submitted to the BA for approval and
consent before the works are commenced.
4. Ground investigations should conform to standards laid down in

GEOGUIDE 2 - Guide to Site Investigation, and GEOGUIDE 3 - Guide to Rock and
Soil Descriptions. These documents are prepared by the Geotechnical Engineering
Office (GEO) and are available for sale at the Government Bookstore. As a general
rule, a requirement will be made under Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)(6)(e) that
ground investigation is adequately supervised on site by a suitably experienced
engineer or engineering geologist, and the cores recovered are carefully examined and
properly logged. Reference should also be made to PNAP 132 - Site Investigation.
Demolition
5. Demolition plans as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation

8(3) and (4) must be submitted for approval.
Bulk Excavation
6. Bulk excavation at any site in Scheduled Area No.1shall not be carried

out below levels to be determined by the Building Authority as required in Building
(Construction) Regulation 21. This control measure is necessary to minimize
cumulative adverse effects of bulk excavation on the stability of the hillside generally.
/7. ……
-2-
7. To assist the early planning of a building scheme, authorized persons

(APs) and RGEs are strongly advised to request a provisional determination of bulk
excavation level constraints as soon as they are commissioned for any building works
in Scheduled Area No.1. The Buildings Department (BD) will normally be able to
issue a tentative plan showing the approximate bulk excavation limits within 10
working days of receipt by GEO of such a request. The final determination of bulk
excavation limits will generally be issued by BD within one month from the date of
receipt by GEO of the following documents :
(a) ground investigation report; and
(b) topographic survey plan and cross-sections in terms of

Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(vii) and
8(1)(c).
The specifications for the survey will be provided by GEO on request.
8. The envelope of all bulk excavation must be shown on the site

formation plans in accordance with Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(vii).
Foundation Plans
9. Building (Administration) Regulation 11A requires that for sites in

Scheduled Area No.1, the foundation plan is to be submitted with the site formation
plan. This is to enable the Building Authority to give due consideration to effects on
the stability of the hillside resulting from factors such as changes in groundwater
levels or surcharge loading which can be caused by the foundation system itself.
Submissions not in compliance with this requirement may be refused under Buildings
Ordinance sections 16(1)(a), (e) or (i).
Performance Review
10. The requirement for a performance review as defined in Buildings

Ordinance section 2(1) may be imposed as a condition on giving of approval or
consent to the commencement of building works in Scheduled Area No.1. However,
it is not intended to impose the requirement for every development/redevelopment site
within the area. Where a performance review is required, it should demonstrate that
the building works have been adequately inspected and monitored in the course of
construction and that the geotechnical design assumptions upon which the building
works have been based are valid. Otherwise, an application for an occupation permit
or a temporary occupation permit may be refused under Buildings Ordinance
section 21(6)(f).
Other Geotechnical Controls
11. There are additional geotechnical controls which may be applied on

sites in Scheduled Area No.1 covering landslip debris resistance, sequence of works
and groundwater drainage works under Buildings Ordinance sections 16(1)(q),
17(1)(6)(f) and 28A to D.
/Extra……
-3-
Extra Set of Plans
12. In order to facilitate processing of building development proposals in

Scheduled Area No.1, one extra set of the following plans should be submitted :
(a) general building plans;
(b) site formation plans together with relevant reports and

calculations;
(c) foundation plans including pilecap details, relevant reports

and calculations; and
(d) excavation and lateral support plans.
Geotechnical Information
13. The Mid-levels Consultants’ Study was summarized in a report entitled

“Mid-levels Study : Report on Geology, Hydrology and Soil Properties (1982)”. The
report is available for sale at the Government Bookstore.
14. In addition, all factual data on geology, hydrology and soil properties
collected in the course of the Mid-levels Study between 1979 and 1981 are available
from the Geotechnical Information Unit as per PNAP 104. These data may assist in
the geotechnical appraisal of the site.
Boundary of Scheduled Area No.1
15. A plan showing the boundary of Scheduled Area No.1 is on display in

BD and in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/BOP/28
GC 4/16/9
Last revision April 1998
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras. 1,3, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11,
12, 13 & 15 amended,
para. 2 added)
Index under : Bulk Excavation Limits
Mid-levels Scheduled Area
Performance Review
Scheduled Area No. 1

Permanent Water Supply to Fire Service Installations

Buildings Ordinance section 21(6)(d)
Where a permanent supply of water for a fire service installation in a building

is required under the provisions of the Code of Practice (Minimum Fire Service Installations
and Equipment), it is essential that a permanent connection is made prior to occupation of the
building.
2. For the issue of an occupation permit, the following arrangements will apply :
(a) Where water supply to a fire service installation is either not

required at all or has already been permanently connected, the
Fire Service certificate required under Buildings Ordinance
section 21(6)(d) will be issued in the normal way;
(b) Where a fire service installation is considered by the Director of

Fire Services to be satisfactory but a permanent water supply
connection has not been made, the Fire Service certificate will
be issued with a rider that it shall be valid only when the
permanent water supply has been connected; and
(c) In the case above, an occupation permit will not be issued until
the terms of any such rider have been fulfilled.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BOP/6
BD GP/BORD/l0 II
BD GP/BREG/SF/4

This revision May 1994 (AD/D)
Index under : BO s21(6)(d) - Permanent Water Supply to Fire Service Installations

Fire Service Installations - Permanent Water Supply
Occupation Permits - Permanent Water Supply
Water Supply - Fire Service Installations

Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap 301
Temporary Exemption from the Operation of a Height Restrictions Order
Under section 3(4) of the Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions)

Ordinance, the Director of Civil Aviation (DCA) may grant an exemption from the
operation of an order made pursuant to subsection (1AA) for a period not exceeding
two months which may be extended for a further two months.
2. If any projects are being or to be carried out in an area which is subject

to height limitations under this Ordinance, authorized persons and registered structural
engineers are requested to ensure that the responsible registered contractor obtains the
prior approval of DCA to any item of temporary plant or equipment likely to project
beyond the prescribed height at any time during construction.
----- 3. A copy of Practice Note No. 7 for registered contractors on this subject
is attached as Appendix A for information.
Height Restrictions for Kai Tak Airport
4. The Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Order 1997 which

prescribed the height restrictions of buildings in respect of Kai Tak Airport was
repealed on 10.7.98. In other words, these height restrictions have been lifted.
However, authorized persons and registered structural engineers are reminded that the
height restrictions in respect of the new airport at Chek Lap Kok remain in force.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/33
BD GP/BL/TP/20 (VI)
First issue August 1982

This revision July 1998 (AD/D) - para. 4 amended and paras. 5 & 6 deleted
Index under : Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap. 301

Pulverised Fuel Ash in Concrete
The technical and environmental benefits of using Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) as a partial
replacement for Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) in concrete are well established. However, it is
necessary to ensure effective curing; in cold weather, in particular, very early strengths may be
lower than equivalent OPC mixes.
2. The use of PFA as a partial cement replacement in concrete is permitted on the

following conditions :
(a) PFA as a separate constituent may be used only with OPC and should comply with
BS 3892: Part 1:1982, except that the criterion for maximum water requirement
may not apply;
(b) Blended cement containing PFA should comply with BS 6588:1985 and have a
nominal PFA content not exceeding 25%. PFA should not be used as a partial
cement replacement in concrete in addition to blended cement;
(c) The PFA content should not exceed 35% by mass of the cementitious content
(OPC plus PFA) of the concrete. It should, however, be noted that 25% PFA
replacement is usually only used in normal construction whereas PFA replacement
exceeding 25% is for special applications such as marine construction and massive
pours which will require expert advice and stringent site control;
(d) The AP/RSE should specify the PFA content and extent of its use in the structural
submissions. He should satisfy himself and the registered contractor should make
sure that the concrete supplier has adequate quality control measures to ensure that
the finished concrete complies with the specifications and statutory requirements in
all respects. The AP/RSE shall be informed if deviations have been found; and
(e) When the PFA replacement exceeds 25%, the AP/RSE should also satisfy himself
that there will not be any adverse effect on the structure due to removal of
formwork, creep and long-term deflection etc.
(C M LEUNG)
Building Authority
First issued : December 1982

Last revision : May 1994
This revision : September 2001 – paragraph 2 amended (AD/NB2)
Index under : PFA

Pulverised Fuel Ash

Structural Design of Bridges

and Associated Highway Structures
Occasionally, a bridge or associated highway structure is required to be

constructed in connection with a private development, say, under the terms of the lease
conditions. The bridge or associated highway structure may be located within the private lot,
outside the lot boundary or partly outside the lot boundary.
2. The design and construction of such structures should be carried out in

accordance with the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways, issued by the
Highways Department. The plans should always be examined by the Advisory Committee on
the Appearance of Bridges and Associated Structures (ACABAS). As part of the centralized
plans processing system, the Building Authority will arrange for the relevant plans to be
examined by ACABAS: see PNAP 107.
Wholly or Partly within a Private Lot
3. When a bridge or associated highway structure is built wholly or partly within a

private lot or gains support from or is connected to a building resting on a private lot, the plans
should be processed under the Buildings Ordinance. This includes :
(a) any bridge erected between two private buildings, if the bridge
gains support from either or both of the buildings; or
(b) a bridge which gains support from a private building at one end
and rests on government land at the other, whether or not
separate access is available from the public street.
4. Notwithstanding the standards of the Structures Design Manual for Highways

and Railways, structural design and construction of this type of building works should also
satisfy the requirements of the Building (Construction) Regulations with due observation of the
recommendations of the relevant Codes of Practice and Practice Notes for Authorized Persons
and Registered Structural Engineers, issued by the Building Authority.
Wholly Outside a Private Lot
5. A bridge or associated highway structure of the free-standing type, built

entirely on government land or over public highways, may have to be constructed outside a
private lot. These are exempted from the Buildings Ordinance.
6. The Director of Highways is the competent authority for the control of such
structures. The Highways Department will be responsible for vetting plans, permitting works
to be carried out, imposing requirements for the testing of foundations, examining material
quality control data and liaising and corresponding with the appointed Authorized Person or
Registered Structural Engineer.
/7. In....
- 2 -
7. In addition to the requirements of the Structures Design Manual for Highways

and Railways, the Highways Department will also require the following design standards to be
satisfied :
(a) Geometric Design and Layout
The geometric layout and dimensions of the structures should

comply with the Transport Planning & Design Manual Volume
2, issued by the Transport Department;
(b) Materials and Workmanship
All materials for the works and workmanship should also

comply with the General Specification for Civil Engineering
Works, 1992 Edition (Hong Kong Government);
(c) Retaining Walls
Retaining walls should be designed and constructed in

accordance with GEOGUIDE 1 (Guide to Retaining Wall
Design, Second Edition), issued by the Geotechnical
Engineering Office of the Civil Engineering Department;
(d) Lighting
The lighting of the structures should comply with the

requirements of the Lighting Division of the Highways
Department and the Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department;
(e) Geotechnical Requirements
The geotechnical aspects should comply with the requirements

of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, issued by the
Geotechnical Engineering Office; and
(f) Landscape Improvement
The adverse impact of the structures on their surroundings or

landscape should be minimized by introducing appropriate
treatment and/or landscape planting. Such proposals should
form part of the design.
Consultation with the Landscape Unit of the Highways

Department prior to submission is welcomed.
/8. Structural....
- 3 -
8. Structural details of bridges and highway structures to be built wholly outside a

private lot, including resubmissions, should initially be submitted to the Buildings Department.
They should comprise 3 sets of plans, 2 sets of calculations and 2 sets of site investigation
documents, for transmission to the Highways Department. When the works are completed to
satisfaction, the Highways Department will so certify in writing, thus concluding its technical
and administrative involvement in the works.
Concluding Observation
9. The manuals and guides mentioned above are available from the Government
Publications Sales Centre.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/OP/9

This revision May 1995 (AD/SE) (minor revision to para 9)
Index under : Bridges

Highway Structures
Structural Design of Highway Structures

Refuse Storage and Collection

Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers
and Refuse Chutes) Regulations
Access for Refuse Collection Vehicle
When planning the location of refuse storage and material recovery

chambers (RS&MRC), and making arrangements for ready access thereto, the limiting
specifications of refuse collection vehicles currently in use by the Food and
Environmental Hygiene Department, taking the ‘worst case’ for planning purposes, are
as follows:
(a) Length 10.00 m;
(b) Width (including mirrors) 3.00 m;
(c) Height 3.80 m;
(d) Headroom required for bin-lifting operation 4.50 m;
(e) Ground clearance 0.22 m;
(f) Angle of departure (angle of rear projection, including

bin-lifting device, above ground in relation to ground contact
of rear wheels) 8 degrees;
(g) Turning circle 20.00 m;
(h) Gross vehicular weight 25 tonnes;
(i) Maximum gradient for access 1:10;
(j) Minimum width of access road 3.50 m; and
(k) Parking space for refuse collection operation 5.00 m x 12.00 m.
2. Unless refuse collection vehicles can leave the area of a RS&MRC in a

continuing forward direction, it may be necessary to provide basic ‘hammer-head’
turning facilities of 27.00 m x 9.50 m with an approach 10.90 m wide. Alternative
measures may be designed based upon the limiting vehicle specifications provided
above. Appendix A illustrates two alternative designs for general reference.
/3. …..
-2-
3. The planned refuse collection vehicle access and exit routes from a
public street to the RS&MRC should be indicated on the building plans. RS&MRCs
which are intended to be visited by refuse collection vehicles should be located on the
ground floor or podium floor with direct vehicular access from the street without
passing through intervening floors.
Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers

and Refuse Chutes) Regulations
4. The Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and

Refuse Chutes) Regulations cover, inter alia, the provision of material recovery
chambers (MRC), RS&MRC and refuse storage and material recovery rooms
(RS&MRR) as well as the requirement on mechanical ventilation and air-purifying
facilities for MRC, RS&MRC and RS&MRR.
5. The Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and

Refuse Chutes) (Amendment) Regulation 2008 (the ‘Amendment Regulation’)
introduced a new regulation 3A on the mandatory requirement for the provision of a
RS&MRR on every floor of new domestic buildings or the domestic part of new
composite buildings, except in the circumstances as provided for in regulations 3A(2),
(3), (4), (5) and (6). The Amendment Regulation will come into operation on
1 December 2008, and its application will be governed by the provisions of
section 39(2) of the Buildings Ordinance.
Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers, Material Recovery Chambers

and Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Rooms
6. When submitting plans for buildings of the type referred to in the Schedule to
Regulation 3 of the Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and
Refuse Chutes) Regulations, calculation showing the usable floor space or aggregate
usable floor space, the minimum floor space for any chamber required, and the actual
size of any proposed chamber should be provided.
7. Every RS&MRR should have adequate provisions for fire prevention

and fire fighting such as fire alarm and sprinkler. The room should be separated from
the remainder of the building by walls having a FRP of 2 hours and the access door
thereto should have a FRP of 1 hour. The self-closing mechanism to the door should
not permit the door to be held in the open position. Appendix B provides details of
typical layouts and minimum dimensions for RS&MRR.
8. Subject to satisfactory planning, the area of RS&MRC, MRC,

RS&MRR, refuse chutes and hopper rooms (where provided) may, under Building
(Planning) Regulation 23(3)(b), be excluded from measurement in gross floor area
calculations.
/Mechanical…..
-3-
Mechanical Ventilation and Air Purifying Facilities for Material Recovery

Chambers, Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Rooms
9. Where a centralised ventilation system is adopted, a single air purifier

may be installed before final discharge into the atmosphere. Alternatively where there
is no particular odour problem a mechanical fan coupled with a particulate filter at each
RS&MRR/MRC may be considered.
10. The main exhaust outlet for a centralised ventilation system should be
located at upper roof level away from other buildings. However in the case where the
building is surrounded by taller buildings, the discharge may be located at the main
RS&MRC.
11. The noise level of the system should conform with the Technical
Memorandum published under the Noise Control Ordinance (Cap 400). Fire dampers
should be provided if the system has exhaust grilles and ducting at each floor.
12. Air purifying devices such as chemical air scrubber, bio-oxygen

generator, photo-oxidation generator or other appropriate devices should be provided
within a RS&MRC.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/RC/1 (II)
First issue November 1983

This revision August 2008 (AD/NB1) – Para. 5 added and paras. 4 & 6 amended
Index under : Access for Refuse Collection Vehicles - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 5
B(RS&MRC and RC)R 3 - Refuse Storage and Material Recovery
Chambers and Chutes
B(RS&MRC and RC)R 5 - Access for Refuse Collection Vehicles
Refuse Collection Vehicles - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 5
Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Chutes -
B(RS&MRC and RC)R 3
Material Recovery Chambers - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 4A
Material Recovery Rooms - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 4B
Ventilation and Air Purifying - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 12A
B(RS&MRC and RC)R 12A - Ventilation and Air Purifying of Refuse
Storage and Material Recovery Chambers/Material Recovery Rooms
APP-35
APP-35
APP-35

Industrial Buildings - Occupancy and Related Matters

Determinations by the Commissioner for Labour
and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)
Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and

Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) provides that the occupancy of an industrial undertaking shall
be determined by the Commissioner for Labour. This occupancy figure is useful as a data
base for assessing the adequacy of the provision of sanitary fitments and also for planning
exit route arrangements in accordance with the Code of Practice on Means of Escape where
an industrial building has a single user.
2. The Commissioner for Labour has advised as follows:
(a) for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,

Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) and (c) the occupancy in
flatted factories may be calculated on the basis of 4.5 m² of usable floor
space per person and the ratio of male to female workers shall be taken as
1:1, and
(b) for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,

Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) and the Code of Practice
on Means of Escape in relation to the occupancy in single user specialized
industrial workplaces he will make a determination of occupancy according
to the specialized trade process proposed.
3. Since by virtue of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Amendment)

Ordinance 1990, kitchens to restaurants, fast food shops, cafes and the like are classified as
industrial undertakings, the Commissioner for Labour has also advised that for the purposes
of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines)
Regulation 5(5)(b) and (c) the occupancy in such kitchens may be calculated on the basis of
4.5 m² of usable floor space per person and the ratio of male to female workers shall be
taken as 2:1.
4. The above advice of the Commissioner for Labour is supported by the

Building Authority. Submission of plans containing a departure from this advice without
acceptable justification will be rejected under relevant provisions of the Buildings
Ordinance and the Regulations made thereunder
(Darwin Chen)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BOP/6
BLD(B) GR/BC/IC/17

This amendment February 1993 (GBS/D) - para 3 added
Index under : Industrial Buildings - Occupancy & Related Matters

Curtain Wall, Window and Window Wall Systems
Submission of Curtain Wall Plans
Curtain walls shall be designed to meet the specific requirements set out
in Regulation 43 of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B). In
addition, attention should be paid to the requirements for wind loads, horizontal
impact loads on the curtain wall when there is no protective barrier provided,
protection of openings, protection against corrosion and the quality of materials.
2. The following details are required to be included in the curtain wall plans
for submission to the Building Authority for approval:
(a) structural framing and key structural details and the

installation procedures excluding any unnecessary shop
fabrication details;
(b) structural calculations comprising design check on the

parent structure, analysis on the structural adequacy and
stability of the proposed curtain wall system, element
design for aluminium alloy, fixing components, glazing,
and deflection check on major load carrying members;
(c) workmanship specifications for welding, galvanization

measures to overcome bi-metallic effects, and corrosion
prevention;
(d) elevations including panel arrangements;
(e) typical and non-typical sections showing structural

members and supports;
(f) typical and non-typical connections;
(g) specifications on allowable tolerance of the positioning

of curtain wall supports and any remedial arrangements
in cases where such tolerance is exceeded;
/(h) …..
-2-
(h) the mode of support from and connection to the load-

bearing structure of the building (anchorages in
structural concrete members or welded connections to
structural steel members) and any justification and
application for modification of Regulation 43 of the
Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg.
B) for using other mode of support, e.g. drilled or
bolted fixings;
(i) the projection of the curtain wall system from the outer
face of the structural elements, e.g. beams, columns and
floor slabs, for consideration of exemption from gross
floor area and site coverage calculations;
(j) standard specifications or codes of practice on structural

glazing;
(k) material specifications for structural steel, aluminium

alloy, cast-in anchors, fixing screws, structural sealant,
and glazing; and
(l) sections showing compliance with Regulation 90 of the

Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg.
B) and the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting
Construction on such relevant aspects as the protection
against spread of fire and smoke between floors,
between different compartments on the same floor, and
between the accommodation of a storey and the required
staircase or its intercepting lobby.
Submission of Plans of Window or Window Wall above Ground Floor
3. In general, window and window wall systems should satisfy the

performance requirements stipulated in the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap
123 sub. leg. B) and the requirements on lighting and ventilation stipulated in the
Building (Planning) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. F).
4. If a window or window wall system is at a location where the design

wind pressure, qz, is 2.86 kPa or above, and it meets conditions (i) and (ii) below:
(i) the window or window wall system is to form wholly or

partly the external wall above ground floor of a building;
and
(ii) the least dimension of the structural opening for such

window or window wall exceeds 1.8m and the area of
structural opening exceeds 6m2,
/structural …..
-3-
structural framing and key structural details, excluding any unnecessary shop
fabrication details, containing the following information to demonstrate that the
window or window wall system is of adequate strength and stability should be
submitted for approval:
(a) information described in sub-paragraphs 2(b), (c),

(d), (e), (f), (g), (j), (k) and (l) above;
(b) structural adequacy in resisting horizontal imposed

loads specified in Table 3 of Regulation 17(3) of
the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123
sub. leg. B) for window or window wall system
that functions as a protective barrier; and
(c) deflection checks to ensure that the maximum

deflection of the structural elements does not
exceed span/180 and, where deflection value is
adopted from manufacturers, proposal on
substantiation test.
5. Where the structural details of a window and window wall system are not
required to be submitted for approval, the Authorized Person (AP) and Registered
Structural Engineer (RSE) should ensure that the design, fabrication and installation
of such system would achieve the required safety standard. Attention should be given
to the requirements on horizontal imposed loads, protection of openings, function of
protective barriers, corrosion protection, quality control of materials and protection
against the spread of fire and smoke between floors.
Submission of Plans of Window or Window Wall Plans at Ground Floor
6. Structural details of a window or window wall (including glass shop

front) at ground floor with the design span of its structural elements (i.e. mullion,
glass fins, etc) exceeding 6m should be submitted for approval. The structural
information mentioned in sub-paragraphs 4(a) to (c) above should be included in the
submission.
7. In view of the speciality of curtain wall, window and window wall works,
a separate RSE may be appointed to prepare the design and to supervise the carrying
out of such works. Under such circumstances, the specified Forms BA4 and BA5
indicating the appointment of the separate RSE and the scope of works for which
he/she is responsible are required to be submitted together with the plans submitted
for approval. Upon completion of the works, the separate RSE so appointed is
required to certify satisfactory completion of the works in accordance with Regulation
25(3) of the Building (Administration) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. A).
/8. …..
-4-
8. Where structural details for a proposed curtain wall, window or window

wall system are submitted by the separate RSE, the submission should be
accompanied by an assessment report prepared by him/her giving an account of the
effect of the proposed works to the parent structure. The assessment report should be
appended with a statement signed by the project RSE to confirm that he/she is fully
aware of the connection details and the effect of the works on the parent structure.
9. The separate RSE who is appointed for the curtain wall, window or
window wall works shall be responsible for the supervision of the construction of
such works, including the installation of any cast-in anchorage, e.g. anchor plates,
cast-in embeds and through bolts, etc., in the parent structure except in the event
where the cast-in anchorage has been pre-installed in the parent structure prior to his
appointment. For such cases, the structural details and layout of the pre-installed
parts should be given in the superstructure plans to be submitted for approval by the
project RSE who shall then be responsible for the supervision of the installation of
such parts. The separate RSE should refer to the pre-installed connection details
when designing the curtain wall, window or window wall works and should co-
ordinate with the project RSE for any necessary amendment if different connection
details are to be used.
Tempered Glass
10. Because of its high strength, tempered glass may be used in curtain wall,
large window and window wall systems to resist high wind pressure. However, due
to the possibility of spontaneous breakage in tempered glass, it is recommended and
encouraged to minimize the use of this product in curtain wall, window and window
wall systems above ground floor in buildings. Alternative products to accomplish this
are the use of thicker glass, heat-strengthened glass, laminated glass, or various
combinations of these products. Glass of suitable type, thickness and size should be
selected to provide an appropriate degree of safety, taking into account the intended
use and the possibility of catastrophic consequences in the event of breakage.
11. Where tempered glass is chosen, the AP/RSE should ensure that an
acceptable method of quality control (such as heat soaking, infrared photography or
laser photography) has been adopted by the glass manufacturer/fabricator to minimize
the risk of spontaneous breakage of tempered glass. Compliance certificates or test
reports on the method of quality control confirming that the glass conforms to the
relevant standards should be submitted prior to the application of an occupation
permit.
/Heat …..
-5-
Heat Soak Process
12. It is widely recognized that heat soaking1 accelerates the expulsion of the
nickel sulphide inclusions in tempered glass and that heat soak process is the most
effective means of eliminating tempered glass with nickel sulphide. It is therefore
recommended that, in the absence of other recognized quality control methods
acceptable to the AP/RSE, heat soaking conforming to BS EN 14179-1:2005 or other
equivalent international standards should be carried out as it is part of the quality
control measures for tempered glass used in curtain wall, window and window wall
works.
13. When heat soaking is adopted as the method of quality control to

minimize the risk of spontaneous breakage of tempered glass, the heat soaking process
shall be applied to all tempered glass panes to be used. The compliance certificate
should include the following information:
(i) identification of the batch;
(ii) quantity and configuration of thermocouples used to

measure the glass surface temperatures in the oven;
(iii) graphs of the heat soak process cycle associated with

each of the thermocouples indicating the glass surface
temperatures at representative glass locations and time
duration of the heating phase, holding phase and cooling
phase of the process;
(iv) name of the tempered glass manufacturer;
(v) location of the oven;
(vi) calibration report of the oven;
(vii) date of carrying out the heat soaking process;
(viii) quantity and size of the tempered glass subject to the

heat soaking process and records of breakages of panels
in the tests; and
/(ix) …..
1
Note
Heat soak process that significantly reduces the risk of damaging nickel sulphide usually
includes, inter alia, an oven of taking the glass panes through three phases of the process. The
heating phase commences with all the glass panes at ambient temperature and concludes when
the surface temperature of the last glass pane reaches 280oC. The holding phase commences
when the surface temperature of all the glass panes has reached a temperature of 280oC. The
duration of the holding phase is 2 hours minimum. The surface temperature of the glass panes
shall be maintained in the range of 290oC±10oC during the holding phase. The cooling phase
commences when the last glass pane to reach 280oC has completed its holding phase. The glass
temperature shall be brought down to ambient temperature during this phase.
-6-
(ix) minimum dimension of glass separation in the oven.
Other Methods of Quality Control
14. Unlike heat soak process which eliminates defective glass panes in the
oven by early breakage, the infrared photography or laser photography tests conducted
by the glass fabricator aim at detecting the existence of nickel sulphide in the glass
panes on site. If infrared photography or laser photography tests are adopted, the test
reports should be appended with a statement signed by the RSE to confirm that all
glass panes have been thoroughly imaged, and that the tests have been conducted by a
laboratory accredited under the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
(HOKLAS) or equivalent.
15. Technology is constantly changing. In order not to preclude new quality

control methods that are innovative and economical, APs and RSEs are encouraged to
review from time to time new quality control methods that may be proposed by the
glass manufacturers/fabricators in future. In this respect, if any quality control
method other than heat soak process is proposed by the AP/RSE, full details of the
proposed method including the principle, method statement and limitations should be
submitted to demonstrate suitability of the proposed method.
Structural Sealant
16. Because of better aesthetic appearance, structural sealant may be used in

the construction of curtain wall, window or window wall systems. The proposed
structural sealant should be compatible with the glazing system and the structural
frame with which it is in contact, which should develop an adequate strength with its
substrates and has a safety factor suitable for the application. Compliance certificates
comprising the Sealant Compatibility Report, Sealant Adhesion Report and the Print
Review Report issued by the manufacturers/suppliers and endorsed by the RSE are
required to be submitted prior to the application of an occupation permit.
17. The establishment of a suitable safety factor for a structural sealant

depends on a number of factors such as risks to building occupants and pedestrians, its
long-term durability, degree of redundancy, nature of applied loads, quality control
during fabrication and erection. In addition to a suitable safety factor, other measures
to ensure durability may include an effective quality control program during
fabrication, regular inspection and timely execution of repair work. Guidelines on the
maintenance, repair and inspection requirements are given in paragraphs 21 to 24
below.
18. Standards commonly used for the design and construction of curtain wall,
window and window wall systems, which are acceptable to the Building Authority, are
given in Appendix A.
/Safety …..
-7-
Safety Test
19. Under Regulation 43(6) of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap

123 sub. leg. B), all curtain wall systems are required to undergo a safety test. The
test should be carried out by an independent laboratory accredited within its scope of
accreditation by the HOKLAS or by other laboratory accreditation bodies which have
reached mutual recognition agreements/arrangements with HOKLAS. The test carried
out by an accredited laboratory should be within its scope of accreditation. The test
reports should be made on a HOKLAS Endorsed Certificate or equivalent
Certificate/Report and be also appended with a statement signed by the RSE who has
prepared the plans to confirm the acceptance criteria appropriate to the test have been
complied with. They should be submitted prior to the application of an occupation
permit.
20. As a curtain wall system may comprise various panel sizes subject to a
wide range of design wind pressure, the test panels should be selected based on
engineering judgement and with justification of mathematical computation models
where appropriate. It is desirable to specify the representative test panel(s) in the
curtain wall plans. Detailed requirements of the safety test are given in Appendix B.
Maintenance, Repair and Inspection
21. In view of the special requirements for the design and construction of
curtain wall, window and window wall systems, it is important that owners of the
buildings installed with such systems are given all relevant information including in
particular the names and addresses of the specialist suppliers and manufacturers, both
local and overseas. Copies of approved plans and working drawings will also be
useful to them.
22. Curtain wall, window and window wall systems are required to be
regularly inspected after they have been installed in buildings. Proper maintenance
and repair are essential in keeping them in a safe condition. All owners of buildings
where curtain wall, window or window wall systems have been constructed should
make arrangements for the systems to be inspected visually, at least twice a year and
before and after typhoons. Full inspection of the curtain wall, window or window
wall systems should be carried out by AP, RSE or other suitably qualified and
experienced persons under the direct supervision of AP/RSE, not more than two years
after handing over and thereafter at an appropriate interval. When making such
inspection, AP, RSE, other responsible personnel and building management personnel
should watch out for signs of distress or deterioration. Some examples of these are
listed below:
• cracked, loose, broken or missing glass panels;
• bulging, bowing, separation, delamination, rotation,

displacement of panels;
• staining – rust, chemical, water;

/• fixings …..
-8-
• fixings – damaged and missing parts, corrosion, looseness,

other defects;
• sealant – extrusion between joints and panels, wrinkle, split,

missing, change in colour and other signs of deterioration;
• hardening, cracking gaskets;
• malfunctioning of locking devices and bar hinges of

openable windows; and
• water seepage or moisture behind curtain wall, window or

window wall.
23. A maintenance manual is a useful tool for building management. It helps

formulate a planned inspection and maintenance programme for a curtain wall,
window or window wall system. The manual should record the service history of a
curtain wall, window or window wall system. Details of previous maintenance,
repairs, modifications, findings of inspections, actions proposed subsequent to
inspections and inspection records should be included in the manual. The AP/RSE
should advise his/her client of the need for providing a maintenance manual for the
reference of the persons responsible for full inspection of the curtain wall, window or
window wall system.
24. The Building Authority recommends all APs and RSEs to adopt the
guidelines given in this practice note. They are also requested to offer help and
advice as appropriate to their clients who have a curtain wall, window or window wall
system in their buildings.
Aluminium Windows
25. Reference may be made to PNAP 248 in respect of the design and
installation guidelines on aluminium windows.
Concurrent Processing of Approval and Consent Applications
26. For curtain wall works, the application for approval of plans and consent
to the commencement of works may be made concurrently as provided for in PNAP
272.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
-9-
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/6(IV)
First issue September 1984

Last revision June 2006
This revision January 2009 (AD/NB2) (Paras. 4b, 11, 12, 13, 16, 19 and
Appendix A revised; paras. 14, 20 and 26
added para. 1 deleted)
Index under : Curtain Wall Systems

Heat Soak Test
Regular Inspections of Curtain Walls
Structural Plans for Curtain Walls and Window Walls
Testing of Curtain Wall Systems
Tempered Glass
Window/Window Wall Systems
Structural Sealants
Appendix A
(PNAP 106)
(APP-37)
Standards Commonly Used for the

Design & Construction of
Curtain Wall, Window and Window Wall Systems
Acceptable to the Building Authority
Reference Standards
The standards listed in this appendix are intended to provide reference

information only for the purpose of design and construction of curtain wall, window
and window wall systems. It should be noted that:
(a) the standards listed are not meant to be exhaustive;
(b) national standards and codes of practice of various countries, though

similar in major aspects, do not have exact equivalence to one another;
(c) should a certain design standard be adopted, it should be applied to the

design consistently; and
(d) Building Regulations shall always take precedence over other design
standards should there be a conflict between them.
A. Design, Material & Workmanship
Design,
Material & Standard Title/Description
Workmanship
Wind Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong
Practice Kong 2004
Practice Steel 2005
Aluminium BS 1161:1977(1991) Specification for aluminium alloy sections

for structural purposes
BS EN 485-2:2004 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet,

strip and plate. Mechanical properties
BS EN 485-3:2003 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet,

strip and plate. Tolerances on dimensions
and form for hot-rolled products
BS EN 515:1993 Aluminium and aluminium alloys.
1
Wrought products. Temper designations
BS EN 573-2: 1995 Aluminium and aluminium alloys,

chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Chemical symbol
based designation system.
BS EN 573-4:1995 Aluminium and aluminium alloys.

Chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Forms of products
BS 1473:1972(2002) Specification for wrought aluminium and


Chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Chemical composition

Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
Mechanical properties

Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form

Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form

Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions
and form

Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions
and form

Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions
and form

2
Profiles, tolerances on dimensions and
form

Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN
AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Tolerances
on dimensions and form
BS EN 1011-4:2000 Welding. Recommendations for welding

of metallic materials. Arc welding of
aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS 8118-2:1991 Structural use of aluminium -

Specification for materials, workmanship
and protection
Glass BS 952: Glass for glazing

Part 1:1995 Classification
Part 2:1980 Terminology for work on glass
BS EN14179-1:2005 Glass in building – Heat Soak thermally

toughened soda lime silicate safety glass –
Part 1 : Definition and description
BS EN 572-1:2004 Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate

glass products. Definitions and general
physical and mechanical properties

glass products. Float glass

glass products. Polished wire glass

glass products. Drawn sheet glass

glass products. Patterned glass

glass products. Wired patterned glass

glass products. Wired or unwired channel
shaped glass

glass products. Supplied and final cut
sizes
3
glass products. Evaluation of
conformity/Product standard
DIN 1249 This DIN standard covers glass in

building, sheet glass, plate glass, cast
glass, glass edge, chemical and physical
properties of glass, glass edges and
thermally toughened glass.
JIS R 3202-1996 Japanese Industrial Standard for Float

Glass and Polished Plate Glass
JIS R 3205-1998 Japanese Industrial Standard for

Laminated Glass
JIS R3206-1997 Japanese Industrial Standard for

Tempered Glass
JIS R 3222-1990 Japanese Industrial Standard for Heat

Strengthen Glass
ASTM C162-05 Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass

Products
ASTM C1036-06 Standard Specification for Flat Glass
ASTM C1048-04 Standard Specification for Heat Treated

Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass
ASTM C1172-03 Standard Specification for Laminated

Architectural Flat Glass
ASTM C1422- Standard Specification for Chemically

99(2005)e1 Strengthened Flat Glass
ASTM E2190-02 Standard Specification for Insulating

Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation
ANSI Z97.1 American National Standards Institute:

Performance Specifications and Methods
of Test for Safety Materials used in
Buildings
Stainless BS EN 10029:1991 Specification for tolerances on

Steel dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled
steel plates 3 mm thick or above
4
BS EN ISO 9445:2006 Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel
narrow strip, wide strip, plate/sheet and
cut lengths. Tolerances on dimensions and
form
BS EN 10048:1997 Hot rolled narrow steel strip. Tolerances

on dimensions and shape
BS EN Continuously hot-rolled uncoated plate,

10051:1991+A1:1997 sheet and strip of non-alloy and alloy
steels. Tolerances on dimensions and
shape
BS EN 10095:1999 Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys
BS EN ISO 3506- Mechanical properties of corrosion-

1:1998 resistant stainless-steel fasteners. Bolts,
screws and studs
BS EN ISO 3506- Mechanical properties of corrosion-

2:1998 resistant stainless-steel fasteners. Nuts
BS EN 1011-3:2000 Welding. Recommendations for welding

of metallic materials. Arc welding of
stainless steels
Sealant BS 6213:2000 Selection of construction sealants. Guide
ASTM C1369-07 Standard Specification for Secondary

Edge Sealants for Structurally Glazed
Insulating Glass Units
B. Design
Design Standard Title/Description

Practice Steel 2005
Aluminium CP 118:1969 The structural use of aluminium
BS 8118-1:1991 Structural use of aluminium. Code of

practice for design
BS 8118-2:1991 Structural use of aluminium. Specification

for materials, workmanship and
protection
Glass BS 6262:1982 Code of practice for glazing for buildings
5
BS 6262-1:2005 Glazing for buildings. General
methodology for the selection of glazing
BS 6262-2:2005 Glazing for buildings. Code of practice

for energy, light and sound

for fire, security and wind loading

for safety related to human impact

for special applications

for the provision of information
AS 1288-2006 Australian Standard: Glass in Buildings –

Selection and Installation
AS/NS 2208-1996 Safety Glazing Materials in Buildings
CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89 Structural Design of Glass for Buildings
Construction Ministry Covering the design for external

Notice No. 109 (Japan) claddings/roofing against wind pressure
Safety Design Guideline Issued under the Construction Housing

on Glass Opening Guidance Notice 116 dated 315.86
(Japan). This guideline concerns with
safety design against human impact.
Japanese Architectural
Standard Specification
17 for Glazing Work
(JASS 17)
BS 5357:2007 Code of practice for installation and

application of security glazing
BS 5516-1:2004 Patent glazing and sloping glazing for

buildings. Code of practice for design and
installation of sloping and vertical patent
glazing
BS 5516-2:2004 Patent glazing and sloping glazing for

buildings. Code of practice for sloping
glazing
6
BS 5544:1978(2006) Specification for anti-bandit glazing
(glazing resistant to manual attack)
BS 6206:1981(2007) Specification for impact performance

requirements for flat safety glass and
safety plastics for use in buildings
BS 8213-1:2004 Windows doors and rooflights. Design for

safety in use and during cleaning of
windows, including door-height windows
and roof windows. Code of practice
Structural Use of Glass Published by the Institution of Structural

in Buildings Engineers, UK
ASTM E1300 - 07e1 Standard Practice for Determining Load

Resistance of Glass in Buildings
Federal Standard 16 Consumer Product Safety Commission

CFR 1201 (CPSC) “Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials” as
published in Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR), USA
AAMA Glass Design for Sloped Glazing, USA
General AAMA Structural Design Guidelines for

References Aluminium Framed Skylights, USA
AAMA Structural Sealant Glazing Systems (A

Design Guide), USA
BS 8200: 1985 Code of practice for design of non-

loadbearing external vertical enclosures of
buildings
ASTM E2270-03 Standard practice for periodic inspection

of building facades for unsafe conditions
C. Testing
Testing Standard Title/Description

Curtain Wall, AS/NZS 4284: 2008 Testing of Building Facades
Window,
Window wall ASTM E283-04 Standard Test Method for Determining
the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
Under Specified Pressure Differences
7
Across the Specimen
ASTM E330-02 Standard Test Method for Structural

Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E331-00 Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E547-00 Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by
Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E997-01 Standard Test Method for Structural

Performance of Glass in Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors under
the Influence of Uniform Static Loads by
Destructive Method
AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for
Water Penetration using Dynamic
Pressure
AAMA 501.2 Specification for Field Check of Metal

Shop Fronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped
Glazing Systems for Water Leakage
AAMA 501.3 Specifications for Field Check of Water

and Air Leakage through Installed
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Uniform Air Pressure
Difference
Glass BS 6206:1981(1994) Specification for impact performance

requirements for flat safety glass and
safety plastics for use in buildings
Sealant BS 3712: Building and construction sealants:

Part 1:1991(2006) Methods of test for homogeneity, relative
density and penetration
Part 2:1973(2006) Methods of test for seepage, staining,
shrinkage, shelf life and paintability
Part 3:1974(2006) Methods of test for application life,
skinning properties and tack-free time
Part 4:1991(2006) Method of test for adhesion in peel
8
Anchors BS 5080: Structural fixings in concrete and
Part 1:1993 masonry:
Part 2:1986(1993) Method of test for tensile loading
Method for determination of resistance to
loading in shear
(Rev. 1/2009)
9
Appendix B
(PNAP 106)
(APP-37)
Safety Test
Curtain wall systems without a history of previously accepted test will be

required to undergo a safety test to confirm that they will perform satisfactorily. The
test shall be carried out on a specimen of at least one floor height and shall include the
different features of the curtain wall system being used. The test may either be a
cyclic test or static load test as described below.
2. The requirements and procedures for the two tests are:
Cyclic test
(a) The test is described in BS 5368: Part 3;
(b) Table 1 shows the sequence and duration of the operation;
(c) For the test preparation, p1 should be 0.5 p2;
(d) For the repeated positive and negative pressure test, p2 should
be the pressure obtained from the product of the total pressure
coefficient Cp and the design wind pressure qz appropriate to
that part of the building, determined in accordance with the
Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong. The number
of pressure pulses should not be less than 5;
(e) For the safety test, the maximum required pressure p3 should
be 1.25 p2;
(f) The deformation test described in clause 9.1 of BS 5368: Part

3 may be omitted but the deflection limits of members
specified in (g) below should be measured during the repeated
positive and negative pressure tests;
(g) The glass should not break and the deflection of any structural
element of the specimen should not exceed 1/180 of the span
or 20mm, whichever is the less, during the repeated positive
and negative pressure tests; and
(h) The extent of recovery of deformation 15 minutes after the

removal of the test load should be at least 95% and the
specimen should not show any signs of separation, plastic
deformation or deleterious effect.
1
Table 1 : Sequence and Duration of Tests for both Positive and
Negative Pressures
Test Test Preparation Repeated Test Test

Safety
Pressure 0-p1-0-p1-0-p1-0 0-p2-0-p2-0-p2-0-p2-0-p2-0 0-p3-0
Duration The period of transition from one pressure value to another

should be not less than 1 second. The pressures are to be
held at maximum or minimum values for at least 3 seconds.
Static load test
(a) The test load is to be 1.25 times the design wind pressure of the
system and should be maintained for at least 15 minutes. The
design wind pressure should not be less than the value obtained
from the product of the total pressure coefficient Cp and the
design wind pressure qz appropriate to that part of the building,
determined in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind
Effects in Hong Kong;
(b) During the load test, the glass should not break and the
deflection of any structural element of the specimen should not
exceed 1/180 of the span or 20mm, whichever is the less; and
(c) The extent of recovery of deformation 15 minutes after the

removal of the test load should be at least 95% and the
specimen should not show any signs of separation, plastic
deformation or deleterious effect.
(6/2006)
2

Bridges over Streets

There are occasions when bridges may have to be constructed over streets. A
bridge may link buildings which have integrated functions and/or associated interests, or may
be required by the Director of Lands under the terms of the lease.
2. Where a bridge or associated highway structure is to be constructed wholly or

partly within a private lot or gains support from or is connected to a building resting on a
private lot, exemption under Buildings Ordinance section 31(1) may be given provided that :
(a) the Building Authority is satisfied that the bridge --
(i) is functionally necessary;
(ii) is constructed in a suitable location and at an

appropriate height; and
(iii) is in the public interest.
In this respect, the Building Authority will take into account any
advice given by the Director of Lands and the Director of
Highways; and
(b) the design of the bridge and any associated highway structures is
acceptable to the Advisory Committee on the Appearance of
Bridges and Associated Structures (ACABAS).
3. As part of the centralized processing system, the Building Authority will

arrange for the relevant plans to be referred to ACABAS for examination via the relevant
authority. In this connection, the building plans should include :
(a) drawings showing the general arrangement of the bridge;
(b) the elevations of all parts to be exposed to view together with

either a perspective or axonometric view and sufficient
information to illustrate the form, texture and colour treatment
of the proposed bridge and associated structure;
(c) comprehensive photographs of the site (to be affixed to the

plans); and
(d) in the case of footbridges, details of anticipated pedestrian flows

(to be indicated on the plans) to justify the proposed width,
design and location.
Eight sets of building plans should be submitted for reference by each individual ACABAS
member.
/4.If…………….
- 2 -
4. If general building proposals are extensive, it would be more convenient to

show all aspects of a proposed bridge (except structural calculations) on a separate drawing, or
a separate set of drawings, to which cross-reference to the main building plans should be
clearly made. This could then be treated as a separate submission and avoid delays in the
building development.
5. In some cases, ACABAS may require the attendance of authorized persons

(APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) at a meeting to facilitate comprehensive
---- consideration of the proposals. The terms of reference of ACABAS is at Appendix A. If
ACABAS does not find a design acceptable, the Building Authority may not allow the
exemption requested. Any suggestions for improving a design, to be considered when
re-submitting plans, will be passed on to APs and RSEs.
6. Where a bridge or associated highway structure of a free-standing type is to be

constructed entirely on government land or over a public highway, ie outside a private lot,
the structure is exempted from the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance. The Director of
Highways is the competent authority for such structures. However, for administrative
convenience, it has been agreed that BD should also co-ordinate. Plans should therefore be
submitted to BD for referral to the Highways Department.
7. PNAP 92 on the subject of "Structural Design of Bridges and Associated

Highway Structures" should be read in conjunction with this practice note.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/CC/112
First issued November 1984

This revision September 1994 (AD/D)
Index under : ACABAS

Bridges
Highway Structures
PNAP 107
Appendix A
APP-38
Terms of Reference of
Advisory Committee on the Appearance of Bridges
and Associated Structures (ACABAS)
The terms of reference of ACABAS are :
(a) to enquire into the visual merits, general amenity value and related
environmental factors of all proposals for bridges and associated
structures over, under, on or adjacent to public roads in the Territory;
(b) to advise the Director of Highways on standards to be applied and

procedures to be adopted to encourage an appropriately high level of
aesthetic quality in the design of bridges and associated structures and to
promulgate general guidance on such matters;
(c) to receive and scrutinize individual proposals at the preliminary design

stage, to advise designers of their acceptability or otherwise and to make
recommendations as deemed necessary; and
(d) to refer proposals to the Director of Highways where, after

consideration by ACABAS, disagreement is found to be irreconcilable
either --
(i) in principle, because for instance a design is

likely to result in disproportionate damage to
sensitive historic, scenic, ecological or other
environmental features; or
(ii) in detail, because for instance the proposed

layout, style or surface finishes are considered to
be inappropriate,
provided that, should the Director of Highways feel unable to arbitrate, or

should the Department or other body responsible for the proposals so request,
such disagreement may be referred to Policy Branch for a decision.

Inspection and Copying of Plans and Documents

Plans and other documents submitted to the Building Authority (BA) for the
purposes of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) are public records. Provided that the
copyright owners do not specifically deny access to the plans and documents and subject
to paragraphs 2 to 13 below, the BA may, under section 36G of the BO, upon request
and payment of the prescribed fee, permit the public to inspect and issue to the public
copies of such building records.
Criteria for permitting inspection and/or issue of copy of building records
2. Applications for inspection and issue of certified true copies and/or non-
certified copies of approved plans, related documents and Buildings Department (BD)
Forms should be made in accordance with paragraphs 6 to 13 below. In considering
these applications, the BA is obliged to take into account the provisions of the Personal
Data (Privacy) Ordinance (Cap 486), the Copyright Ordinance (Cap 528) (CO), the Code
on Access to Information and the obligation to confidence.
3. Under the obligation to confidence, the BA will not permit inspection or

issue copies of any plans or documents of building projects, which are submitted to him
for the purpose of the BO, until the subject works have been completed. The building
records that may be inspected by or issued with copies to the public are therefore
confined to the latest approved plans, structural calculations and related documents of
completed building projects.
4. The BA may only permit inspection or issue of copies of the plans and
documents for the purpose of facilitating the ascertaining by the applicant of the following
matters:
(a) matters relating to the construction of any building or the
carrying of any building works or street works;
(b) whether a building, building works or street works have

been completed or carried out in compliance with the
provisions of the BO or any other enactment; and
(c) matters other than those stipulated in items (a) & (b) above
that the BA considers appropriate for the building records
concerned to be made available for inspection and issue of
copies in the interest of the public.
The applicant should make a declaration confirming the aforesaid matter(s).
/5. ..…
-2-
5. Applications for inspection or issue of copies of building records for

matter(s) stipulated in paragraph 4(c) above may only be considered if justified with
relevant special circumstances, or if it is accompanied by an authorization from the
copyright owner of the plans or documents with a positive statement that he is the
owner of the copyright.
Building Information Centre (BIC)
6. The BIC of BD provides services for the inspection and copying of the
building records. Applicants can obtain such services through either attending the BIC
in person or gaining access to BD’s “Building Records Access and Viewing On-line”
(BRAVO) system via the internet.
Attending the BIC in person
7. Applicants may attend the BIC in person to inspect and obtain copies of
building records. Applications for mere inspection of approved plans and other
documents should be made in the standard form, Form BIC-1. When the plans or
documents are retrieved, inspection will be arranged in the BIC during office hours by
appointment. BD pledges to produce the electronic records available for viewing within
3 working days upon receipt of the application. If electronic records are not available,
paper or microfilm records, if available as the case may be, will be made available for
viewing. Care should be exercised in handling these paper and microfilm records so as
to avoid damage or disturbance to their order in the file bundles. An applicant, who
wishes to obtain hard copies of plans or documents, should immediately after he has
inspected and identified the plans or documents to be copied, apply for the issue of copies
using the standard form, Form BIC-2.
8. An applicant may also opt for the ‘One-Stop Service’ and use the standard
form, Form BIC-3, in which case BD staff would identify the plans or documents in the
subject files for copying on behalf of the applicant and prepare the requested hard copies.
9. Applications for hard copies of occupation permits (OP) should be made in

the standard form, Form BD 25. In completing the form, an applicant should ensure that
detailed particulars of the subject building such as the lot number and address are accurate
for the identification of the OP being requested.
Access to BRAVO system via the Internet
10. An applicant can inspect and/or make request for issue of hard copies of
the building records via the BRAVO system, but the applicant should register as a User
before he is allowed to do so. Application for registration as a User can be made in the
standard form, Form BIC-BRAVO 1. Upon successful registration, the User account
login name and assigned password would be sent to the applicant by registered mail.
/11. …..
-3-
11. Upon payment of the prescribed fee, the applicant can inspect and/or
make request for the issue of hard copies of plans and documents through the Internet.
The requested copies are to be collected at the BIC.
Fees and Forms
12. Fees as prescribed in Regulation 42 of the Building (Administration)

Regulations will be charged for the inspection and/or copying services.
13. The standard application forms, Form BIC-1, Form BIC-2, Form BIC-3,
Form BIC-BRAVO 1 and Form BD25 can be downloaded from BD’s website
(www.bd.gov.hk). Applicants may submit these standard forms either by mail, email
(enquiry@bd.gov.hk), fax or in person. Enquiries on applications for inspection and/or
copying services may be made to the BIC at telephone no. 2626 1207 or through fax (for
matters related to BRAVO: fax no. 2625 0351, for other matters: fax no. 2625 4367).
Copyright issues arising from Change of Authorized Person/Registered Structural

Engineer/Registered Geotechnical Engineer (AP/RSE/RGE)
14. Plans of buildings are protected as copyright artistic works under the CO.
The concern about copyright may arise when there is a change of AP/RSE/RGE during
the course of works, and the new AP/RSE/RGE wishes to use the approved plans of the
resigned AP/RSE/RGE to build and/or to make amendments. In such cases, the onus is
on the new AP/RSE/RGE to ensure that he/she has properly obtained the consent of the
copyright owner(s) to use the approved plans of the resigned AP/RSE/RGE; otherwise,
the new AP/RSE/RGE may infringe the copyright. Please note that the aforementioned
copyright issues are by no means exhaustive in covering different aspects of copyright
issues comprehensively. There are other aspects of copyright which need to be observed
under the CO in order to relieve liability for copyright infringement. You should enlist
the expertise of your legal advisor as necessary.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/6-5/1
First issue : February 1985

Last revision : January 2005
This revision : January 2009 (AD/Sup) (Generally revamped and all appendices
deleted)
Index under : BD Records – Access to and Copying of

Inspection of Plans and Documents
Copying of Plans and Documents
Building Records Access and Viewing On-line (BRAVO)

Hotel Development
Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)Reg) 23A, which came into

operation on 1 November 2000, provides the Building Authority (BA) with a
discretionary power to treat a hotel building or the hotel part of a building as a
non-domestic building for site coverage as well as plot ratio purposes and to disregard
certain supporting facilities together with the setting down and picking up areas for hotel
users from gross floor area calculations.
2. This practice note sets out the factors that the BA will take into
consideration, for the purposes of B(P)Reg 23A(2) & (3), in deciding whether a hotel
proposal will be accorded with the treatment detailed in the identified regulation.
3. For hotels to qualify for the treatment under B(P)Reg 23A, the BA will
consider the following :
(a) whether the site itself or the site relative to its neighbourhood is
suitable for hotel development;
(b) whether basic facilities such as reception counter, storerooms for

linen, administration office, staff toilets for the operation of the
hotel and facilities ancillary to the functions of a hotel (eg dining,
entertainment and, commensurate with hotel patronage,
shopping facilities) are provided;
(c) whether the whole building or the portion of the building

intended for use as a hotel is provided with a central
air-conditioning system and a centralized hot water supply
system; and
(d) whether there is evidence indicating that the hotel building or the
hotel part of the building when completed will be operated as a
licensed hotel under the Hotel and Guesthouse Accommodation
Ordinance (Cap. 349).
4. For the purpose of para 3(a), when considering whether a site is suitable
for hotel development, the BA will take into account, inter alia, the following aspects:
(a) the predominant nature and character of the surrounding land

uses. In general, a site will be taken as suitable if it is permitted
to be developed as a hotel under an outline zoning plan (OZP),
either permitted under Column 1 of the Notes for the OZP or has
obtained permission from the Town Planning Board through an
application under section 16 of the Town Planning Ordinance
(Cap 131);
/ (b) whether …
-2-
(b) whether the scale of a hotel development is compatible with the

surrounding developments. In this respect, the BA will take into
account the development intensity of the proposed hotel and
compare it with the permitted development intensity of
surrounding developments (under the OZP, the lease conditions
or the Building (Planning) Regulations);
(c) whether an adequate number and width of streets are available to

serve the proposed hotel and to cope with the additional vehicular
and pedestrian traffic generated; and
(d) whether any necessary transport, parking, loading and

unloading facilities for hotel use would be provided.
5. Confirmation by a hotel operator that he has been appointed to operate the

proposed hotel building upon completion may be accepted as evidence for the purpose of
para. 3(d).
6. The BA acknowledges that requirements for the basic and ancillary

facilities described in paragraph 3(b) above as well as transport facilities mentioned in
paragraph 4(d) above may vary according to the types of hotels in terms of their size and
the number of rooms. The BA will take into consideration the special circumstances of
each case in evaluating the requirements on a case-by-case basis.
7. For necessary transport, parking, loading and unloading facilities for

hotel use in paragraph 4(d) above, the BA will take into account Transport Department's
assessment on the traffic impact, vehicle loading, unloading and parking requirements
having regard to the size, location and traffic conditions of each site. For hotels having
100 or more guestrooms, provisions in accordance with the Hong Kong Planning
Standards & Guidelines should normally be provided in respect of parking and
loading/unloading facilities.
8. Change of use of existing buildings into hotel use will also be assessed
based on the above factors for consideration under B(P)Reg 23A.
9. For the purpose of disregarding any floor space used for provision of
supporting facilities that are unique and integral to the normal operation of the hotel
under B(P)Reg 23A(3)(b), the BA must be satisfied that the facilities comply with the
following criteria :
(a) their size is reasonable, their location practical and their design
genuine to serve the intended purpose;
(b) they are accessible to hotel staff only; and
(c) abuse of use is unlikely.
/ Unless …
-3-
Unless there are strong justifications, the BA would not expect the gross floor area of
such facilities to exceed 5% of the total gross floor area for the hotel in normal
circumstances. For the avoidance of doubt, offices for the administration and
management of the hotel are not considered as unique supporting facilities for the
purpose of B(P)Reg23A(3)(b)(iv).
10. Attention is drawn to the sanctions set out in B(P)Reg 23A(8) and (9). In
this regard, Buildings Department, with advice from the Licensing Authority, has put in
place a monitoring system and will take action under the aforesaid provisions if any
unauthorized change of use is identified.
11. The provisions of B(P)Reg 23A apply to bona fide hotels only, and do not
apply to “service apartments”.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/CC/278
BD GP/BL/P/22 (VII)

Last revision November 2002
This revision August 2004 (AD/NB1) (Para. 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9 & 10 amended, para. 6 &
7 added and previous para. 10 deleted)
Index under : Hotel concessions

Hotel development

Buildings to be Planned for Use by Persons with a Disability

Building (Planning) Regulation 72
Pursuant to section 84 of the Disability Discrimination Ordinance (Cap
487), the Building Authority (BA), as a public authority which has the power to approve
building works, shall not approve plans for a new building or for the alterations or additions
to an existing building unless the person seeking approval satisfies the BA that such access
as is reasonable in the circumstance to the building or premises will be provided for persons
with a disability. The Building (Planning) Regulations also require certain categories of
buildings to be planned for use by persons with a disability. All authorized persons and
registered structural engineers shall make the necessary provisions and incorporate the
facilities for persons with a disability in a building, at the design stage of the project, to
comply with the legislation.
Relevant Building Regulations
2. The regulations stipulating requirements for buildings to be planned for use

by persons with a disability include :
Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(m)

Building (Planning) Regulation 2(1) : ‘disability’
Building (Planning) Regulation 39(3)(e)
Building (Planning) Regulation 72 and the THIRD SCHEDULE
and Latrines) Regulation 61(3)
Further guidance is given in the Design Manual: Barrier Free Access 2008.
Application of Building (Planning) Regulation 72
3. The Building (Planning) (Amendment) Regulation 2008 (the “Amendment

Regulation”) introduced, inter alia, a new THIRD SCHEDULE setting out the revised
requirements for the provision of facilities in certain categories of buildings to provide for
better access to and use of such buildings and their facilities by persons with a disability.
The Amendment Regulation will come into operation on 1 December 2008, and its
application will be governed by the provision of section 39(2) of the Buildings Ordinance.
4. Part 4 of the THIRD SCHEDULE to the Building (Planning) Regulations

identifies those categories of buildings (including domestic, non-domestic and composite
buildings) where limited facilities for persons with a disability are to be provided under
Building (Planning) Regulation 72. Save for those buildings which are exempted under
Building (Planning) Regulation 72(4), all other buildings not included in Part 4 of the
THIRD SCHEDULE are required to comply fully with the regulations mentioned in
paragraph 2.
Exemption …..
-2-
Exemption or Deviation from Building (Planning) Regulation 72

5. In an application for approval of plans for a new building or for the
alterations/additions to an existing building, access and facilities for persons with a disability
should be clearly shown on the submitted plans.
6. There are occasions where proposals for building development cannot meet
the full requirements for access and facilities for persons with a disability stipulated in the
Building Regulations. Exemption or deviation from the regulations will be considered by
the BA on individual merits of each case. The BA is prepared to consider applications to
vary the requirements provided that the BA is satisfied that special circumstances exist.
Examples of special circumstances include the physical location and immediate environs of
a development site render compliance with the legislation impracticable or where such
provisions would impose unjustifiable hardship on the applicant or any other person. The
circumstances under which the BA may consider such applications are outlined in
AppendixA.
Alteration and Addition Submissions

7. Where alteration and addition works are proposed to an existing building
without initial access for persons with a disability, all practical measures should be taken to
provide suitable access and facilities for persons with a disability. Applications for
exemption citing the prevailing special circumstances would be considered on a case by case
basis.
Advisory Committee on Barrier Free Access (ACBFA)

8. In considering applications for exemption or deviation from the regulations,
the BA has established an advisory committee namely Advisory Committee on Barrier Free
Access (ACBFA) to provide a forum for the deliberation and discussion of the proposals.
The BA will take into account the advice given by ACBFA in making decisions on the
applications. The terms of reference and membership of ACBFA are at Appendix B.
Withdrawal of PNAP 247
9. PNAP 247 on Design Manual : Barrier Free Access 1997 is withdrawn
with effect from 1 December 2008.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/25(IX)
This revision November 2008 (AD/NB1) – generally revised, Appendices A & B amended
and paras. 3 & 9 added
Index under : B(P)R 72 - Buildings for Persons with a Disability
Persons with a disability - Buildings to be Planned for Use by
Appendix A
(PNAP 112)
(APP-41)
Special Circumstances that may be Acceptable to the Building Authority

for Applications to Vary Provisions
1. Deviation from the requirements may be considered in the circumstances

where the provision of a passenger lift to the top floor cannot be provided due to a height
restriction imposed by the Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap
301. In such cases, the Building Authority (BA) will be satisfied with the design of the
building in respect of the non-provision within the top floor of facilities for persons with a
disability. The exception being cases where the top floor has communal facilities such as
canteens and recreation rooms.
2. For alterations and additions works to existing buildings where initial access
for persons with a disability is not provided, the BA would be satisfied with the design of the
building in respect of the non-provision of facilities for persons with locomotory disabilities
in cases where the provision of a ramp access would involve alteration works to the
common parts of a building and where the applicant can demonstrate that :
• the applicant has no control over the area;
• consent from co-owners or owners' corporation to permit the

carrying out of the alteration works to the common parts of the
building is declined or cannot be obtained; and
• where ground beam is involved, there is spatial or structural

constraint.
(Rev.11/2008)
Appendix B
(PNAP 112)
(APP-41)
Advisory Committee on Barrier Free Access (ACBFA)
Terms of Reference
The terms of reference of ACBFA are to offer advice to the Building

Authority in relation to plans submitted for a new building or for alteration and addition
to an existing building as to whether reasonable access and facilities will be provided in
the building for persons with a disability. In arriving at such an advice, the Committee
should consider the following :
• the standards and requirements contained in Building (Planning)

Regulation 72, the Design Manual - Barrier Free Access 2008 and any
other relevant statutory provisions;
• whether it is practicable to provide such access within the curtilage of the

building, bearing in mind the physical location and immediate environs of
the building; and
• whether providing such access would impose unjustifiable hardship on the

person seeking approval or any other person.
Membership
The membership of ACBFA is as follows :
Chairman : Assistant Director/New Buildings 1, Buildings Department
Members : A representative of the Commissioner for Rehabilitation

A representative of the Director of Architectural Services
A representative (authorized person) appointed by the

Director of Buildings
A lay member appointed by the Director of Buildings
Three representatives nominated by the Commissioner for

Rehabilitation representing the physically handicapped,
visually impaired and hearing impaired respectively
Technical Secretary/Building, Buildings Department
Secretary : Building Surveyor/Technical Services 1, Buildings Department
In attendance : The Senior Building Surveyor or Building Surveyor of the case
(Rev.11/2008)
Buildings Department Practice Note for Authorized Persons 116

Amenity Features
Amenity features are loosely defined as those elements of design that

whilst not statutory requirements are desirable to improve the standard and quality of a
building or a development project. Provision of such features enhances the sense of care
and pride for buildings, thereby inducing proper maintenance and repair. To encourage
these features, the Building Authority is prepared to consider modification and exemption,
under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations, for the provision of new amenities in
both new developments and existing buildings.
2. To justify favourable consideration for modification or exemption, such

proposals should meet one or a combination of the following objectives :
(a) encouraging efficient and effective building management;
(b) enhancing the quality of life for residents and users;
(c) obviating the desire or temptation for unauthorized building works;

and
(d) improving environmental compatibility with the neighbourhood.
3. It is not possible to lay down hard and fast rules. Applications would be
considered on their individual merits and relevance to a particular building and its users.
4. For large schemes or innovative designs, it is advisable prior to formal

submission to hold a preliminary discussion with the Buildings Department. If necessary,
a proposal will be the subject of consultation with the Lands and the Planning
Departments. The intention is that Buildings, Lands and Planning Departments would
consider a proposal on similar grounds and in its entirety : factors such as the
preservation of trees, landscape and antiquities would be regarded as positive
contributions.
5. Some examples of amenity features are given below.
Air-conditioning
6. For residential buildings, wall boxes or platforms in reinforced concrete

or other suitable material may be constructed as a permanent feature, even over streets,
and as such may be excluded from site coverage considerations (see PNAP 68). For
commercial and industrial buildings, a centralized air-conditioning system should be
provided or suitable internal areas should be set aside for this purpose at the design stage.
Allowance should be made for adequate ducting and trunking, recesses, set-backs, open
yards or other suitable spaces at or above floor levels where air-conditioning package
units (or other plant and accessories) can be accommodated without the need to project
over streets.
/7. ….
-2-
7. In accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(b), any floor

space genuinely intended for air-conditioning may be excluded from gross floor area
calculations. The following provisions would be considered reasonable in the absence
of the detailed design layout of the plants :
(a) air-conditioning plant rooms not exceeding 1% of the total gross

floor area of a building; or
(b) air handling units, not exceeding 4% of the total gross floor area
of each floor on which they are situated.
If it is intended to exceed these percentages or where an air-conditioning room is

provided in each domestic unit, full justification must be submitted. In such cases, the
advice of the Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services would be sought during
processing.
8. If an unusually extensive system is proposed for exclusion from gross

floor area calculations, then it should be shown in detail on the approved plans and be
operational before an application for occupation permit is made.
9. In all cases where buildings will be or are likely to be air-conditioned,

careful consideration should be given to the location of the exhaust of the plant and the
need to provide a disposal system for the condensation from the plant to prevent causing
nuisance to adjoining occupants and the public.
Security Gates
10. As long as they do not obstruct the means of escape from a building and
have locks openable from the inside without keys, security gates may be installed prior to
the issue of an occupation permit or may be indicated on floor plans in suitable positions
for future installation. Suitable positions are considered to be :
(a) entrances to individual units;
(b) main staircase exits from buildings; and
(c) in a composite building, between the domestic part and the

commercial part.
(In this case, the gate would be across an exit route, preferably in
a lobby, and should be designed to prevent the entry of
non-residents into the domestic part of the building.)
Counters, Kiosks, Offices, Stores, Guard Rooms, and Lavatories for Watchmen and
Management Staff
11. Such provision enhances standards of control and maintenance of

buildings. The Building Authority will consider favourably on application for exemption
from gross floor area calculations where such provision meets the following criteria :
/(a)….
-3-
(a) it should not be excessive in size; and
(b) it should be located in a common area or designated as a common

area in a Deed of Mutual Covenant to prevent abuse.
Miniature Logistic Service Room
12. Small logistic service room in a multi-storey residential building allows

the temporary storage of delivered goods under the custody of the management staff
while the occupants are out. Such facility not only improves security but also alleviates
fire hazard as otherwise the goods would be left unattended in the common lobby or
staircase. Where such provision is provided in accordance with the following criteria,
the Building Authority (BA) will favourably consider application for exemption of such
rooms from GFA calculation :
(a) The room is not excessive in size. As a general guide, a room

size of 8 m2 may be allowed for a block size of 240 flats.
(b) The room should be located in the common area adjacent to the
management office or guard post.
Mail Room
13. Mail rooms for large commercial and industrial buildings are facilities
which enhance the serviceability of the buildings. The BA will consider favourably
an application for exemption from gross floor area calculations where the provision of
a mail room meets the following criteria :
(a) it should not be excessive in size;
(b) it should be endorsed by Postmaster General (in this connection

an additional set of plans should be submitted for consideration
by Postmaster General);
(c) it should be located in a common area or designated as a

common area in a Deed of Mutual Covenant to prevent abuse;
and
(d) the building is centrally managed.
14. For a typical mail room,
(a) there should be a small public area for tenants to enter and
collect their items from the lockable boxes;
(b) there should be a small counter for postmen to sort mail into
lockable mail boxes;
/(c) …..
-4-
(c) a stamp vending machine and a posting box are usually provided
in the mail room for the convenience of the tenants; and
(d) it is preferably provided at ground floor or basement level.
----- A typical mail room detail is at Appendix A for attention.
Building Service Facilities
15. These are generally covered in PNAP 13.
Projections
16. These are generally covered in PNAP 68 and canopies are specifically
dealt with in PNAP 173.
17. For individual domestic units, clothes-drying racks, anti-burglar bars and
small window hoods designed to provide protection from the elements and falling objects
would not have any site coverage or plot ratio implications. Similarly, any projections
that improve the energy efficiency of a building, including enhanced wall thicknesses
would also be disregarded for the purposes of site coverage and plot ratio.
Horizontal Screens
18. In open areas frequently used by occupants at ground floors or podium

floors; or roof gardens/play areas at podium floor around the perimeter of a domestic
tower, horizontal screens may be permitted to provide protection against inclement
weather and falling objects subject to the following conditions:
(a) the horizontal screens will not materially affect the lighting and
ventilation of the areas or nearby buildings;
(b) the areas are designated as common area in the Deed of Mutual
Covenant; and
(c) the areas do not form part of any commercial premises.
19. In assessing the acceptability of the width of the horizontal screens, the
BA will take into consideration the population using the facility, the size of the
development and the design of the screens.
Prestige Entrances
20. These are generally covered in PNAP 13. The BA aims to adopt a
liberal attitude towards provision of such features. However, care must be taken in the
design to ensure that future occupants would maintain the integrity of protected lobbies
and corridors related to means of escape and fireman's lifts.
/Recreational …..
-5-
Recreational Facilities
21. The provision of podium roof gardens and play areas is encouraged.
Where these amenities occur under and within the perimeter of a domestic tower, a
modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) would be granted, provided
the area is open in design and not encumbered with structural elements. For the
avoidance of doubt, it is clarified that staircases or lift shafts that pass through such floors
may be discounted from gross floor area considerations, provided they are not connected
with an entrance to the building from outside the podium level or do not serve other
accountable accommodation at that level.
22. Certain other recreational facilities such as squash courts, gymnasiums,

indoor swimming pools, sauna facilities, function rooms (for either active or passive
recreational activities) are often clearly identifiable with a particular development and aim
to benefit the residents and occupiers generally. These can be considered for exclusion
from gross floor area calculations by modification of Building (Planning) Regulation
23(3)(a) on a case-by-case basis.
23. This concession does not apply to substantial luxury clubs with restaurants
and other facilities obviously meant for an exclusive membership and commercial takings,
rather than for the general benefit of residents and occupiers.
Satellite Dishes
24. These are becoming quite common nowadays being installed in response
to public demand. It would seem appropriate therefore to make provision at the design
stage of a building to accommodate such a feature.
25. Such a provision could be by way of cast-in-situ mounting blocks and/or

built-in-fixing bolts together with an appropriate increase of the design load of the
structural elements to accommodate the weight of the dish.
Concluding Observations
26. The BA is open to suggestions for consideration as amenities in the

context of this practice note.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
-6-
BD GP/BREG/P/9 (IV)
First issue October 1985

This revision February 2003 (AD/NB1) - paras. 1, 7 and 9 amended
Index under : Air Conditioning

Amenity Features
(APP-42)

Licensing of Child Care Centres, Kindergartens and Restaurants
When applications are made to the licensing authorities in respect of child

care centres, kindergartens and restaurants, the plans are referred to the Buildings
Department (BD) for comments on structural safety and means of escape. The
guidelines within BD may be of interest to authorized persons (APs) advising clients.
Child Care Centres and Kindergartens

2. Child care centres and kindergartens may not be located above G/F level
in a non-purpose built building unless certain conditions are fulfilled. Where the
premises is located above G/F, the following guidelines apply:
Location Conditions
Acceptable (a) in composite buildings with (1) Premises shall conform to
with not more than two commercial general standards of the Code
conditions floors above G/F of Practice for Means of
Escape.
(b) in composite buildings with
three or more commercial (2) Child care centre is subject to
floors where the child care the 12m and 24m maximum
centre or kindergarten itself height rule under Child Care
occupies one or more entire Centre Regulation 19.
commercial floors and not
more than two floors above (3) Kindergarten is subject to the
G/F remain commercial 24m maximum height rule
under Education Regulation 7.
(c) in institutional buildings
(d) in high-rise domestic buildings
(e) in wholly commercial (4) In addition to conditions (1),

buildings (2) & (3), two independent
means of escape are provided
(f) in composite buildings with for the exclusive use of the
three or more commercial occupants of the centre or
floors above G/F other than kindergarten.
(b)
(g) in single staircase buildings (5) In addition to conditions (1),
other than (h) and (i) (2), & (3), two extra staircases
must be provided to the
premises to be licensed and the
single staircase serving the
whole building must be sealed
off therefrom.
/Acceptable ....
- 2 -
Location Conditions
Acceptable (h) in single-family domestic Unconditional
without buildings not exceeding three
conditions main storeys
(i) in New Territories "exempted"

buildings
Unless applications comply with these guidelines, intended “change in use” under
Buildings Ordinance section 25 will be prohibited.
3. Child Care Centres or kindergartens should not be located in an

industrial building. They are considered incompatible uses both from a fire-fighting
and town planning point of view.
Restaurants
(a) Certification
4. When commissioned for projects involving restaurant licence

applications, authorized persons (APs) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSEs) may
be required to certify direct to the licensing authority that certain categories of building
safety requirements imposed by the Buildings Department have been fully complied
with. Under such circumstances, APs and RSEs have an important role to play in
supervising the works and ensuring the safety of restaurant patrons and employees.
Certificates and structural justifications submitted direct to the licensing authorities are
audited by BD and appropriate action will be taken in cases involving negligence and/or
misconduct.
(b) Unauthorized Building Works
5. BD also advises the licensing authorities of the existence of any

unauthorized building works (UBW) which constitute a risk to the safety of restaurant
patrons and employees. In such cases, the licensing authorities are advised to reject the
licence applications until the UBWs are removed or rectified. If building works which
are not exempted under section 41 of the Buildings Ordinance are proposed, the
attention of the building owners should be drawn to the contents of PNAP 125
regarding the consequences of carrying out such works without having first obtained the
approval and consent of the Building Authority.
/(c) Discharge ....

- 3 -
(c) Discharge Value
6. Commercial buildings are often designed as shops or offices and later

changed to restaurant use. In these cases, any surplus discharge capacity of the
staircases in a building may have been utilised by other existing restaurants established
after the issue of the occupation permit. These circumstances can render a proposed
additional restaurant unacceptable in terms of the permitted discharge value. In
preparing plans for alteration and addition, it should be noted therefore that existing
restaurants should be taken into consideration when calculating discharge values of the
staircases and exit routes.
(d) Structural Assessment
7. Floors proposed for restaurant use should be checked to demonstrate

adequate structural capacity to safely sustain the loads caused by the floor slab self-
weight, finishes, permanent partitions, any other permanent construction, any
equipment/plant proposed and the minimum imposed load in accordance with the
Building (Construction) Regulations. Supporting structural calculations should contain
relevant particulars of all proposed equipment/plant and permanent construction as
----- listed in Appendix A.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LIC/3

This revision August 1996 (AD/S)
Index under : Child Care Centres - licensing of

Kindergartens - licensing of
Licensing - Child Care Centres, Kindergartens and Restaurants
Means of Escape in relation to Uses on Upper Floors
Restaurants - licensing of
Uses on Upper Floors - B(P)R 41(1)
PNAP 117
Appendix A
APP-43
Required Particulars of Equipment/Plant and Permanent Construction
Equipment/plant and permanent construction commonly proposed for

restaurants are :
(a) raised screeds in kitchens, stages and lavatories etc.
(b) new brickwalls or solid partitions
(c) fish tanks
(d) large kitchen equipment, walk-in freezers etc.
(e) large centralized air-conditioning units.
2. With reference to raised screeds in item (a) above, the authorized person
or registered structural engineer should either confirm that the screed was laid under his
supervision or he should carry out a core test in respect of the material, type, density
and thickness to ensure compatibility with any supporting calculation.
3. With regard to the items (b) to (e) above, the type, size, thickness and
density of the constructional materials and the manufacturer’s catalogue and
specification of the plant and equipment should be clearly given, in order to
demonstrate the correct specific/operating weight used in the checking calculation.

Streets in relation to Site Area

Building (Planning) Regulation 23(2)(a)
When developing large areas of land it is often necessary to provide new

streets, and in some circumstances it is realized that this can have an inhibiting effect upon
planning considerations. This particularly applies when the new streets will enclose or
otherwise isolate areas of land so that the original site is divided into several separate sites.
2. In most such cases each new site is usually developed separately to its
maximum potential, and if any open space amenity areas or parks are provided these tend to be
fragmented throughout the whole development project. If a developer did wish to provide one
large open park, on an island site, the plot ratio potential would thereby be `lost', and this
important factor can sometimes be a deterrent to what might be better planning.
3. There are, in the Buildings Ordinance, at present no explicit provisions which

permit a `transfer' of plot ratio potential, such as in the park situation referred to above, and if
such an arrangement was permitted there could often be inherent problems related to the
inability under the Buildings Ordinance to prevent the park being subsequently developed with
buildings, causing an excess of building mass in the neighbourhood and an overloading of the
infrastructure.
4. In some cases, however, sites may be subject to effective planning controls in

addition to the Buildings Ordinance, particularly in relation to enforceable lease control
drawings, Master Layout Plans, and conditional permissions under Town Planning Ordinance
section 16. Where these controls do exist, and a park is proposed on one site, consideration
may be given to the special circumstances of generally improved planning in respect of any
application submitted on Form 29 and possibly a higher plot ratio allowed on another site
within a large development project, and consequential adjustments of other regulations,
provided this does not significantly impair specific planning requirements.
5. Where such a higher plot ratio is allowed, with or without consequential

adjustments, any subsequent change in the control drawings, Master Layout Plans, or Town
Planning permission would naturally be opposed if this would negate the benefits of any
permission granted on Form 30.
(A.G. Eason)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/P/11

Index under : B(P)R 23(2)(a) - Streets in relation to Site Area

Site Area
Streets in relation to Site Area

Testing of Reinforcement for Concrete
Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)6 empowers Building Authority to impose

requirements for testing reinforcement when approving structural plans or consenting to the
commencement of building works.
2. The purpose of such testing is to verify the specified properties of steel bars
delivered to site. These verification tests are additional to the routine testing carried out by the
manufacturer at the rolling mill. Authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers
(RSEs) should ensure that specimens are selected at random from batches of steel reinforcement
delivered to site.
Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Bars
3. With effect from 15 April 1996, the new Construction Standard CS2:1995 (CS2)
on carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete will be adopted by the Buildings
Department as an acceptable standard for compliance with the requirements in the Building
(Construction) Regulations. This Standard incorporates the full product standard for such steel
bars and the requirements for classification and certification of reinforcement by Quality
Assured Stockists (QA Stockists) and the requirements for the testing of reinforcement by the
end purchaser. The Standard is available for sale at the Government Publication Centre. The
----- main features of CS2 are given in Appendix A.
4. The verification tests imposed under Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)6 shall
be the purchaser’s tests referred to in CS2:1995 and shall be performed by a Hong Kong
Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) accredited laboratory.
5. The test report should include the following information :
(a) Classification and Certification by QA Stockists for Class 1, Class 2 and

Class 3 reinforcement;
(b) Full description of test specimens including name of steel manufacturer,

country of origin, grade and size as stated by the person submitting them
for testing;
(c) Sketch of pattern of deformation and mill marks;
(d) Identification of the batch and date of delivery to the site to which the
test specimens relate;
(e) Measured mass and calculated effective cross-sectional area of test

specimens; and
/(f) Results ....
- 2 -
(f) Results of yield stress, tensile strength, elongation, bend and rebend tests
if required.
Other Steel
6. For steel reinforcement other than carbon steel bars, every batch of steel
delivered to the site should be tested to verify the mass, bend and tensile properties in
accordance with the purchaser's tests specified in :
(a) BS 4482:1985 for hard drawn steel wire; and
(b) BS 4483:1985 for steel fabric.
7. Furthermore, APs and RSEs should ensure that sufficient routine inspection and
testing have been carried out by the manufacturer and that a mill certificate is included with the
test reports.
HOKLAS Endorsed Certificates
8. All verification tests shall be carried out by testing laboratories accredited by

HOKLAS. To allow time for the laboratories and HOKLAS to process the applications for
CS2 accreditation, a six months transitional period is provided, i.e. up to 15 October 1996,
certificates issued by the laboratories with HOKLAS accreditation on BS 4449 will still be
accepted by the Buildings Department for the purpose of performing purchaser’s tests in
accordance with CS2. As from 16 October 1996, only the certificates issued by the laboratories
with HOKLAS accreditation on CS2 will be accepted by this Department.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority

This revision March 1996 (AD/SE) - CS2 incorporated
Index under : Construction Standard CS2

Reinforcement Testing
Testing of Reinforcement for Concrete
PNAP 122
Appendix A
APP-45
The Main Features of Construction Standard CS2:1995
1. Under this Standard the QA Stockist is to receive the bulk shipments of reinforcement,
to check the manufacturer’s documentation against the reinforcement supplied, and
eventually dispatch the reinforcement to site clearly classified Class 1, Class 2 or Class
3 as appropriate;
2. Reinforcement produced by Quality Assured Manufacturers and handled by a QA

Stockist will be classified either Class 1 - fully lot traceable, or Class 2 - not lot
traceable. Reinforcement produced by non Quality Assured manufacturers will be
classified Class 3. Reinforcement not handled through a QA Stockist will also be
classified Class 3 irrespective of whether it is quality assured material or not;
3. A series of purchaser’s tests is required to be carried out on all reinforcement delivered

to site before it is used in the construction work. The frequency of testing will depend
on the classification of the reinforcement. For details of purchaser’s testing, please see
Section 5 of CS2;
4. The long term objective is to rely on the third party certification of product conformity
based on testing and continuous product surveillance and on the quality assurance of the
stockists. The purchaser would know the quality of the reinforcement being received
and would not need to carry out further testing for quality assured reinforcement.
However, in the initial stage of introducing this scheme, the end purchaser testing of
quality assured reinforcement should continue; and
5. The Public Works Central Laboratory (PWCL) will monitor the results of the end
purchaser’s tests over a period of two years, after which a review of the purchaser
testing requirements will be undertaken. In order to make the monitoring reviews
meaningful, PWCL would only accept rebars for testing provided the bar patterns have
been registered at PWCL.
Ref.: PNAP 122
First issued March 1996 (AD/SE)

Pollution from Industrial Buildings

Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,
Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90
Buildings Ordinance sections 24 and 28 and Building (Standards of Sanitary

Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90 contain provisions which
may be invoked by the Building Authority to tackle the problem of water pollution caused by
the discharge of effluent from industrial buildings.
2. Following the issue of the first practice note on this subject in May 1987, more
stringent measures have been taken in order to minimize the effects of untreated noxious
effluent getting into drainage systems and causing pollution to water-courses and the sea. Such
effluent can also seriously impair sewage treatment facilities or damage private or public drains
and sewers. There is also the possibility of Government's drains and sewers being overloaded
by industrial discharge or of workers being injured while repairing or maintaining drainage
systems.
3. In addition to consulting the Environmental Protection Department in cases

involving a single occupancy specialized industrial building where the industrial processes to
be pursued are known and specific facilities can therefore be allowed for beforehand, the
Building Authority will also pay particular attention to plans for 'flatted factory' development
regarding general effluent treatment provisions.
4. It is therefore desirable for all authorized persons and registered structural

engineers to seek from their clients information on the proposed industrial processes which the
intended building occupants will pursue, and ensure that at drainage plan submission stage
building uses are clearly stated and adequate provisions are made to treat any noxious effluent.
Failure to provide this information may result in rejection of the drainage proposals under
Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(i).
5. In the case of 'flatted factory' development where multi-occupancy is to be

expected, the assumption will be made that the industrial undertakings and places of work will
normally discharge effluent of such volume or chemical composition as to call for the
provision of drainage facilities other than those required under Building (Standards of Sanitary
Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(1). Failure to make
provision for future effluent discharge may lead to disapproval of the plans under Building
(Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90.
6. For 'flatted factory' development, unless specific facilities are provided, each
industrial unit should have an individual drainage outlet, adequately trapped, to receive treated
trade effluent from that unit. This outlet must be connected to the foul water system and be of
a size indicated below:
Factory usable floor area Size of outlet
less than 1,000 m2 100 mm diameter

more than 1,000 m2 150 mm diameter minimum
Cont’d/………..
-2-
The size of the vertical foul water down pipe will depend upon the number of floors served
and should generally be within the range of 150 - 300 mm diameter. These outlets must not be
connected to any storm-water drainage system. The outlets can be temporarily sealed at floor
level until required by occupants of the unit for the purpose of discharging treated effluent, the
assumption being that any effluent identified in Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments,
Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90 will be treated by the occupants of the
unit prior to being discharged into the outlet.
7. The need to provide a petrol interceptor in areas used for the servicing and
----- parking of vehicles is well known. Standard details of the petrol interceptor are attached for
general information. The preferred contemporary practice regarding other types of industrial
effluent and appropriate methods of treatment is not so standardized or so clear. In case of
doubt it may be necessary to obtain the advice of consultants.
8. In addition to tackling the pollution problem at plans submission stage, it is also

worth mentioning that more attention will be focused on illegal, insanitary and polluting drains
and sewers in future. To this end a unit has already been set up in the Buildings Ordinance
Office with specific responsibility for seeking out and dealing with polluting factories. It is in
the interest of all concerned that timely steps are taken to protect our environment.
(A.W. Samson)
Building Authority
Ref: BLD(B) GR/BREG/SF/2

This update March 1992 (GBS/D) (para. 7 amended and grease trap details deleted)
Index under : B(SSFPDW&L)R 90 - Pollution from Industrial Buildings

Effluent - noxious
Pollution from Industrial Buildings

Unauthorized Alterations and Additions

Buildings Ordinance Section 14
There may be occasions when clients approach authorized persons or

registered structural engineers to submit plans for building works already completed. This
advises you on the action that the Building Authority (BA) would take if such plans were
submitted.
No Retrospective Approval
2. The BA has no powers to give retrospective approval or consent for building

works already commenced, carried out or completed. Buildings Ordinance (BO) section
14(1) provides that no person shall commence or carry out any building works without
having first obtained the approval and consent of the BA. BO section 42(5) further
provides that the powers of exemption are not applicable to section 14.
Powers of Disapproval
3. For plans of building works already completed, the BA's position under
the BO is as follows :
(a) The submission will be rejected under section 16(1)(a) as it is not a

proposal for approval and consent prior to the commencement of
works.
(b) The same will also be rejected under section 16(1)(c) because of the
nature of the application in the Form BA 5 or BA 17, which relates
to an application for building works “to be carried out” or for
permission “to erect” respectively. It is not an application for
approval and consent to structures already erected.
(c) Furthermore, if the submission is the subject of an effective

demolition order, it will be rejected under section 16(1)(d) for
contravening the said order.
/Advice ....
- 2 -
Advice to Clients
4. Should a client contemplate pursuing building works without first obtaining

approval and consent, you should draw his attention to the need for prior approval of plans
and consent for commencement. The client should be firmly advised that commencing or
carrying out any building works without prior approval and consent may result in the BA :
(a) serving an order under the BO requiring inter alia the demolition of such
building works; and
(b) prosecuting under the BO Part IV. On conviction, the offender could face a
heavy fine and even a custodial sentence.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/BORD/18
BD GP/BOP/23

This revision January 1996 (AD/LM)
Index under : BO s14 - Unauthorized Alterations & Additions

Unauthorized Alterations & Additions - BO s14

Requirements for Qualified Supervision

of Structural Works, Foundation Works and Excavation Works
Buildings Ordinance section 17
As the design and construction of buildings become more complex, it is

necessary to exercise closer supervision during construction. Buildings Ordinance section
17 provides that conditions may be imposed when approval of plans or consent to
commence building works is given, to require qualified supervision to be provided at
certain stages of construction or for some particular operations. Examples are :
(a) major excavation and foundation construction;
(b) concreting;
(c) carrying out of compliance testing;
(d) prestressing operations including pre-tensioning, post-

tensioning, grouting and lock-off;
(e) fabrication, erection and examination of key structural

steelwork elements on site; and
(f) carrying out of specialist building works.
2. The personnel assigned to supervise the works should possess adequate

technical knowledge and experience relevant to the works and should be fully conversant
also with the engineering basis upon which the works are designed. The authorized
person, registered structural engineer, registered geotechnical engineer and registered
contractor are required, under their respective duties stipulated in Buildings Ordinance
section 4(3) and 9(3) and Building (Administration) Regulations 37 and 41, to ensure that
qualified supervision is carried out properly.
3. The requirements for qualified supervision of geotechnical works are

covered by PNAP 83.
( H W CHEUNG )
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/65 Building Authority
First issue June 1990
Last revision May 1994 (AD/SE)
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (Para 2 is amended to include RGE)
Index under : BO s17 - Requirement for Qualified Supervision of Structural Works,

Foundation Works and Excavation Works
Supervision - Structural Works, Foundation Works and Excavation
Works

Site Investigation and Ground Investigation

Introduction
"Site investigation" ( 地盤勘測 ) is defined in s.2 of Building

(Construction) Regulation as “investigation of the physical characteristics of the site
and includes documentary studies, site surveys and ground investigation”. These
works are carried out to obtain adequate geotechnical and other relevant data for the
design and construction of building works such as foundation and site formation works.
This practice note sets out the acceptable standards of site investigation in general and
ground investigation, which constitutes a major part of site investigation, in particular.
2. In this practice note, the term "site investigation" covers a broad scope of
investigation including the topography and history of the site. "Ground investigation"
refers to actual surface or subsurface investigation by such methods as boreholes and test
pits, including on-site and laboratory tests.
Technical Guidance Documents
3. The Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) Technical Guidance Note

No.1 provides a list of technical guidance documents including GEOGUIDE 2 (Guide to
Site Investigation) and GEOGUIDE 3 (Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions), and other
relevant documents currently used by the GEO as de facto geotechnical standards in
Hong Kong. Site investigation carried out in accordance with the recommendations of
these technical guidance documents will be deemed to meet the minimum acceptable
standards. For the standards of carrying out ground investigation field works and the
acceptance criteria of ground investigation works, reference should be made to the Code
of Practice for Site Supervision.
Registered Specialist Contractor (Ground Investigation Field Works Category)
4. Ground investigation field works include all site operations in ground

investigation and exclude laboratory testing of samples and field density tests. Ground
investigation field works have been designated, by notice in the gazette, as a category of
specialized works. A sub-register of registered specialist contractors (ground
investigation field works category)(the ‘RSC(GIFW)’) has been established in the register
of specialist contractors, and all ground investigation field works are required to be
carried out by the RSC(GIFW). Detailed scope of work and registration requirements of
the RSC(GIFW) can be found in PNAP 214. Laboratory testing of samples obtained
from site operations in ground investigation is beyond the jurisdiction of RSC(GIFW).
Field density tests and all laboratory testing of samples obtained from the investigation
are required to be carried out by laboratories which are accredited for carrying out the
tests concerned, as outlined in PNAP 167.
5. The RSC(GIFW) are responsible for the carrying out of ground

investigation field works mainly for the following purposes:
-2-
(a) compiling a ground investigation report for submission to the
Building Authority in support of a plan for approval under the
Buildings Ordinance, including but not limited to, foundation
plans, site formation plans, excavation and lateral support plans
as prescribed under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)
and 9;
(b) compiling the geotechnical assessment for submission under

Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(ba) with a general
building plan. The assessment should include a suitable plan
showing the scope and extent of the proposed ground
investigation.
6. It is the duty of the RSC(GIFW) to ensure all information in the ground

investigation reports submitted to the Building Authority are correct even though some of
the actual operations e.g. geophysical surveys, might have been carried out by others.
All drillhole cores and samples obtained during ground investigation (other than those
samples selected for testing) are to be kept in good conditions for inspection by staff of
the Buildings Department, and if necessary the Geotechnical Engineering Office, until
acknowledgement of the satisfactory completion of the site formation, foundation, or
other related works has been given.
Quality Supervision Requirements for Ground Investigation Field Works
7. The details of the quality supervision requirements for ground

investigation field works and the related administrative procedures are provided in the
Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans and the Code of Practice for Site
Supervision.
8. A practice note similar to this one has also been issued to all registered
contractors.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-150/10

Last revision January 2004
This revision February 2006 [AD/NB2 and Deputy Head of GEO (Island)]
(Paragraph 3 amended, original paragraphs 4 to 6 and 10
to 22 and Appendices A to D deleted, paragraph 7 added.)
Index under : Ground Investigation

Ground Investigation Field Works
Registered Specialist Contractor (Ground Investigation Field Works
Category)
Scheduled Areas
Site Investigation

Temporary Buildings - Building (Planning) Regulations 50-52
Within the provisions of Building (Planning) Regulations 50(1)(a)(i) and

50(1)(a)(ii), temporary buildings fall within one or both of the following categories :
(a) buildings required for a temporary purpose only; and
(b) buildings constructed of short-lived materials.
ALL provisions of the Buildings Ordinance (Cap. 123) and subsidiary legislation apply to
them. Thus, as far as procedures are concerned, they are subject to approval and consent,
supervision by an authorized person (AP) and/or a registered structural engineer (RSE),
construction by a registered contractor, certification of completion and the issue of a temporary
occupation permit.
2. However, the following two aspects covered in the Building (Planning)

Regulations for temporary buildings take precedence over similar provisions in the Ordinance
or Building Regulations :
(a) Plans shall be submitted with --
(i) a Form BA17, which replaces Form BA5 (for

application for approval) and Form BA8;
(ii) a Form BA5 for the certificate of preparation of

plans by the AP and RSE; and
(iii) a Form BA4 for the notice of appointment of the

AP and RSE.
(b) Upon approval of the plans, a Form BD107 is issued if the

consent to commence works may also be granted. This Form
replaces the approval letter S.L. 9 and Form BD103 and states
the duration for which the temporary building may remain.
3. The commencement of erection of a temporary building is subject to Buildings

Ordinance section 20. The works must be commenced within three months of the issue of a
Form BD107, otherwise an application on Form BA9 for renewal of consent has to be made.
Once erected, a temporary building may normally remain until the Form BD107 expires.
/4. As the ....

- 2 -
4. As the application on Form BA17 encompasses both an application for approval

of plans and an application for consent to commence works, the statutory time limits for
processing both applications are regarded as running concurrently. In other words, the time
limit for processing a Form BA17 application is either 60 days or 30 days, depending on
whether it is a first submission or a resubmission.
5. Upon completion, a temporary building requires a temporary occupation permit

(i.e. Form BD105) before it may be occupied. Application should be made on Form BA12.
The conditions in the Form BD107 as to the maximum number of persons to be
accommodated, the removal of the temporary building upon expiry or cancellation of the
permit and the expiry date of the permit will become conditions in the temporary occupation
permit.
6. Upon expiry or cancellation of the permit, the temporary building should be

removed forthwith, otherwise an order under Buildings Ordinance section 24(1) may be served
to require its removal. If the building remains occupied after the expiry or revocation of the
temporary occupation permit, prosecution under Buildings Ordinance section 40(1) may be
instigated.
7. If it is required to extend the existence of the temporary building, an application

in writing should be submitted to the Building Authority with the following documents :
(a) the original Form BD107 and Form BD105 (previously known as
Form 32 and Form 24 respectively); and
(b) a certificate from an AP and/or RSE that the building is capable of

lasting the extended term (maximum five years) in safe and (if
applicable) sanitary conditions for the purposes specified in the
application.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
First issued June 1990

This revision March 1994 (AD/D)
Index under : B(P)R 50-52

Temporary buildings
Monitoring and Maintenance of Horizontal Drains
---- This Practice Note encloses a guidance note (Appendix A) on the monitoring
and maintenance of horizontal drains installed in connection with any building works. It
amplifies the relevant parts of Chapters 4 and 11 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes
(Second Edition).
Drainage Works in Scheduled Area No. 1
2. Maintenance of horizontal drains installed in the Mid-levels area (specified as

Scheduled Area No. 1 in the Fifth Schedule of the Buildings Ordinance) is subject to
additional control under Buildings Ordinance section 28A to 28D.
Other Drainage Works
3. In areas outside the Scheduled Area No. 1, the use of horizontal drains which
require specific long-term maintenance in situations where there is a significant risk to life
will only be approved where a positive undertaking is received that the necessary
maintenance will be carried out to ensure their continued effectiveness.
4. Since private developments are normally subject to change of ownership, it is

envisaged that an acceptable undertaking could only be given in rare cases such as where a
major private body undertakes a development for its own specific purposes and it can be
accepted that the ownership will not change.
(A.G. Eason)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GR/GEO/7
Issued November 1990 (GGE)
Index under : Horizontal Drains

Appendix A
Guidance Note
on
Monitoring and Maintenance of Horizontal Drains
Introduction
1. Horizontal drains are installed in both rock and soil slopes in Hong Kong.
The drains installed in rock slopes are typically short and are used mainly to drain
individual rock joints or local areas of groundwater seepage. Longer drains tend to be
installed in soil and mixed rock/soil slopes, usually with the aim of achieving an overall
reduction in groundwater pressures within the slope. This guidance note is mainly
concerned with the latter type of drains.
2. A horizontal drain system can be an effective slope stabilization measure

provided that due care is given to design requirements and construction methods. Even
where such care has been exercised, it is important to ensure that the system will perform
satisfactorily in the long term by carrying out appropriate monitoring and maintenance
schemes. The cost of monitoring and a commitment to long-term maintenance should be
considered at the preliminary design stage in comparison with other stabilization measures
before deciding whether to adopt a horizontal drain system.
3. The procedures described here are intended to cover horizontal drain systems
that are designed to lower groundwater pressures so that the required factor of safety of a
slope can be achieved (Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, Second Edition. Tables 5.1 &
5.4). These procedures need not be followed for other drain systems, but regular inspection
and maintenance should still be carried out.
4. To ensure satisfactory performance of a horizontal drain system, the designer

of the system should be closely involved with the monitoring and should prepare a suitable
programme of maintenance. The maintenance authority should appoint a
suitably-experienced maintenance officer to be responsible for compiling the maintenance
inspection records. If the maintenance authority has any reason to believe that the system is
not performing effectively, this should be brought to the attention of the designer without
delay. This approach is consistent with the more general guidance on slope maintenance
given in Chapter 11 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes
Monitoring Requirements
5. As part of the initial design stage, the designer should devise an

instrumentation scheme which is suitable for the project, including the type, number and
location of piezometers for groundwater monitoring and the techniques to be used for drain
flow measurement. Allowance should be made for the maintenance and replacement of
defective instruments within the contract and for any subsequent period when instrument
monitoring is likely to be required. The piezometers should be installed at an early stage.
preferably at the same time as the ground investigation for the design of the horizontal drain
system is carried out. Open hydraulic piezometers are commonly used for long-term
observation (GEOGUIDE 2 : Guide to Site Investigation, Section 20.2.3). `Halcrow
buckets' are often installed in the piezometer tubing to detect the highest piezometric level
that has occurred in the period since the last reading. For a large drain installation, the
water from individual drains may he conducted to a single point through a system of pipes
and channels to facilitate drain flow measurement.
Cont’d/………….
-2-
6. The monitoring of piezometric levels and drain flow rates should be carried
out at least once every two months during the dry season and weekly during the wet season.
The latter should be carried out within two days of any heavy rainstorm (for example,
rainfall >100 mm in 24 hours). All drains and piezometers on the site should monitored.
The need for frequent site visits and manual monitoring can be avoided by using
computerized automatic recording systems, but before adopting such a system the designer
should consider carefully his requirements in relation to the cost and necessary support
services.
7. The monitoring of piezometric levels should start at the earliest stage and
should preferably cover two wet seasons before the design is finalized. If this is not
possible, then the results from continuing monitoring during the period of design and
preparation of tender documents should be used to make a final review of the design. The
data should be used to establish the `base groundwater levels' in the wet and dry seasons
prior to drain installation. The monitoring of both piezometric levels and drain (low rates
should be carried out both during and after the installation of the system. Monitoring
should be terminated in accordance with the procedures described in paragraph 13. The
data obtained during construction may be used in an `observational approach' to design,
whereby the design parameters, such as the spacing of the drains, are modified during
construction in accordance with the monitoring results. This approach is particularly
helpful for horizontal drain installation because the performance of individual drains is
sensitive to the heterogeneous nature of the ground conditions commonly encountered in
Hong Kong.
8. Particular attention should be given in monitoring programmes to cases

where the existing groundwater regime may be modified significantly by adjacent
development or pumping works.
Evaluation of Drain Performance
9. The effectiveness of a horizontal drain system should be gauged by

considering, in descending order of significance, the following aspects of overall
groundwater response at the site:
(a) the piezometric levels after drain installation should not rise above
the design level in heavy rainstorms,
(b) the `base groundwater level' after drain installation should be

lower than the pre-installation value,
(c) the range of groundwater fluctuations (storm response) should be

lower than the pre-installation values, and
(d) the rate of drop of piezometric level after a rainstorm should be

faster than the pre-installation rate, with the level returning to
normal within & few days after the rainstorm.
10. In addition to the above, drain flow rates due to similar rainfalls measured
shortly after installation and subsequently after a long period of tine should also provide an
indication of the long-term performance of the drains.
Cont’d/………..
-3-
11. Other factors which the designer should consider in the evaluation of drain
performance include the adequacy of the acquired data, reliability of the design data
(including the assumed groundwater conditions), the number of heavy rainstorms during the
monitoring period, and the degree of contribution of the drains to the calculated factor of
safety.
Termination of Monitoring
12. The designer should plan groundwater monitoring with the object of
assessing the effectiveness of a horizontal drain system before the end of the Contract
Maintenance period. However, monitoring should be continued beyond this period if the
designer considers it necessary on the basis of the criteria given above. Once the
effectiveness of the system has been fully assessed, the designer should then decide either to
terminate the monitoring if he is satisfied with the performance, or to recommend remedial
measures if he considers that the system is not performing effectively. If remedial works
are to be carried out, monitoring of piezometers and drain flows should continue in order to
gauge the effectiveness of the improved new system. Further remedial works may be
necessary. This process should be continued until the designer is satisfied that the system is
performing effectively.
13. Subsequently, if there is observational evidence of possible substantial

changes in existing groundwater conditions (for example, large variation in drain flows,
signs of new surface seepage), this should be brought to the attention of the designer by the
maintenance authority. The designer can then assess whether the monitoring should be
reactivated.
Maintenance Requirements
14. Regular maintenance of horizontal drains is required to ensure that they

function properly and do not become clogged. Materials likely to close drains are organic
elements (plant roots, fungi or algae), fines washed out of the surrounding soils, and
precipitates of calcium, magnesium, iron and other compounds. In most cases, flushing
with a clean water jet under controlled pressure should be adequate to restore the drain
function. If soil deposits have dried up in the drain, then it is necessary to brush the drain
during the flushing. Cleaning of the drain should commence from the deep end and proceed
toward its outlet. This process should be repeated until the water flowing out of the drain
appears clean.
15. The programme of maintenance and the `as built' details of the drain system
should he prepared by the designer and handed over to the maintenance authority.
Maintenance of the drains should be carried out at least once during the Contract
Maintenance period and then once annually. The maintenance work should include
inspection of the drains and surroundings, removal of weeds, clearing of outlets and
flushing the drains with a water jet (as described above). In addition, if the drains contain
removable inner liners, these should be replaced where considered necessary on the basis of
the site inspection, the flushing operations and previous observations (for example, where
the drains are found to be blocked or where drain flows are substantially reduced). All the
drains at the site should be examined and maintained. A record of the observations made in
the maintenance inspections and details of the work done should be kept tor future reference
in the maintenance inspection record. A note should also be made in the maintenance
Cont’d/………
-4-
inspection record if any significant changes in drain flows or new areas of surface seepage
are observed (see paragraph 14). If large increases in flow are recorded the discharge
should be tested and the surrounding area inspected to assess whether the water originates
from leaking services. If this appears to be the case, the appropriate authority should be
notified and requested to trace and repair the leak.
16. In some special cases (for example, an extensive drain system in a natural
hillslope where access to the outlet locations is difficult), a more cost-effective maintenance
plan may consist of monitoring the effectiveness of the system using permanently-installed
piezometers, and carrying out the cleaning and flushing of drains only if shown to be
necessary by the monitoring. Routine inspections and clearing of the drain outlets should
still be carried out regularly.
17. In all cases, it is necessary for a suitably-experienced maintenance officer to

examine the system when the annual maintenance is being carried out. This will enable
problems to be identified and corrected at an early stage.
Ref. : PNAP:137
Issued November 1990 (GGE)


Supply of Plans to
Registered General Building Contractors and Registered Specialist Contractors
Building (Administration) Regulation 36
Under Building (Administration) Regulation 36, it is the duty of the authorized

person (AP) appointed for any building works or street works to supply to the registered
general building contractor (RGBC) and the registered specialist contractor
(RSC): -
(a) a copy of plans approved by the Building Authority in
accordance with Regulation 30;
(b) a copy of structural details prepared by the registered
structural engineer and approved by the Building Authority;
and
(c) a copy of any supervision plan.
2. Legal advice has confirmed that only a copy need be supplied to the RGBC
and RSC. However, the copy of approved plans should be an exact reproduction of the
plans as approved, stamped, signed and dated by the Building Authority.
3. While the regulation does not specify the time within which a copy of the
plans should be supplied, it is imperative that APs supply copies of the latest plans promptly
in order that the RGBC and RSC can carry out continuous supervision of the works properly.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/17

Last revision May 1994
This revision August 2001 (AD/Sup) – revamped generally
Index under : B(A)R 36

Supply of Plans to Registered General Building Contractors and
Registered Specialist Contractors

Building (Construction) Regulations
The Building (Construction) Regulations set out the performance requirements

for the design and construction of building, street, building works and street works. However,
they do not contain reference to any specific prescriptive standard.
2. Appendix A lists those standards or technical criteria accepted by the Building

Authority as complying with the performance requirements in the Regulations. Plans based on
other standards or technical criteria may be approved if they can be shown to achieve the
performance requirements. It will facilitate the processing of such plans if full background to
other standards or technical criteria, and their compatibility with local conditions, is detailed in
the submission.
3. In this connection, please approach the Buildings Department at an early stage

for agreement in principle to any alternative standard being considered.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority

This revision February 2007 (AD/NB2) - Appendix A revamped
Index under : Acceptable Standards - B(C)R

Building (Construction) Regulations
Appendix A
(PNAP 140)
Standards Acceptable to the (APP-53)
Building Authority
Design and Construction
Category Standard Title

Concrete Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete
Practice 2004
Fire Resisting Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction
Construction Practice 1996
Foundation Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice for Foundations
Practice
Precast Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction
Concrete Practice 2003
Steel Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
Practice 2005
Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
1987 #1
BS 4076: 1989 Specification for steel chimneys
Wind Effect Hong Kong Code of Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong
Practice 2004
Aluminium BS 8118: Part 1: 1991 Structural use of aluminium. Code of practice for
design
Glass BS 6262 Glazing for buildings
Part 1-4, 6 & 7: 2005
BS 6262: 1982 #2 Code of practice for glazing for buildings
BS 5516 Patent glazing and sloping glazing for buildings
Part 1 & 2: 2004
Miscellaneous BS 5628: Part 1: 2005 Code of practice for the use of masonry. Structural
use of unreinforced masonry
BS 6031: 1981 Code of practice for earthworks
BS 8298: 1994 Code of practice for design and installation of
natural stone cladding and lining
#1 This code will be phased out on 31 August 2007.
#2 BS 6262: 1982 has been partially replaced by various parts of BS 6262: 2005. It will be withdrawn upon
publication of all seven parts of the revised BS 6262.
-1-
Concrete Materials, Workmanship and Testing

Materials BS 12: 1996 Specification for Portland cement
BS 882: 1983 Specification for aggregates from
natural sources for concrete
BS 1014: 1975 Specification for pigments for Portland cement and
Portland cement products
BS 3892: Part 1: 1982 Pulverized-fuel ash. Specification for pulverized-
fuel ash for use as a cementitious component in
structural concrete
(The criterion for water requirement may not
apply)
BS 4027: 1980 Specification for sulphate-resisting Portland
cement
BS 5075 Concrete admixtures
Part 1: 1982
Part 3: 1985
BS 6588: 1985 Specification for Portland pulverized-fuel ash
cement
BS 8500 Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS
Part 1 & 2: 2002 EN 206-1
BS EN 197: Part 1: 2000 Cement. Composition, specifications and
conformity criteria for common cements
BS EN 206: Part 1: 2000 Concrete. Specification, performance, production
and conformity
BS EN 446: 1997 Grout for prestressing tendons. Grouting
procedures
BS EN 447: 1997 Grout for prestressing tendons. Specification for
common grout
BS EN 12620: 2002 Aggregates for concrete
Reinforcement Hong Kong Construction Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of
Standard CS2: 1995 Concrete
BS 4447: 1973 Specification for the performance of prestressing
anchorages for post-tensioned construction
BS 4449: 1997 Specification for carbon steel bars for the
reinforcement of concrete
BS 4482: 1985 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the
reinforcement of concrete
BS 4483: 1998 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4486: 1980 Specification for hot rolled and hot rolled and
processed high tensile alloy steel bars for the
prestressing of concrete
BS 5896: 1980 Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand
for the prestressing of concrete
-2-
Reinforcement BS 7123: 1989 Specification for metal arc welding of steel for
concrete reinforcement
BS 7973 Spacers and chairs for steel reinforcement and their
Part 1 & 2: 2001 specification
BS 8666: 2000 Specification for scheduling, dimensioning,
bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for
concrete
EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
EN 10138 Prestressing steels
EN ISO 17660 Permitted welding process for reinforcement
Testing Hong Kong Construction Testing Concrete (Volume 1 & 2)
Standard CS1: 1990
Hong Kong Construction Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of
Standard CS2: 1995 Concrete
BS EN 445: 1997 Grout for prestressing tendons. Test methods
Steel Materials, Workmanship and Testing

Material BS 4360: 1986 #3 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 5950: Part 7: 1992 Structural use of steelwork in building.
Specification for materials and workmanship: cold
formed sections
BS 7668: 1994 #3 Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot
finished structural hollow sections in weather
resistant steels
BS 7668: 2004 Weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural
hollow sections in weather resistant steels.
Specification
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of structural steels
Part 1-6: 2004
BS EN 10113 #3 Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain
Part 2 & 3: 1993 structural steels
BS EN 10137 #3 Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength
Part 2: 1996 structural steels in the quenched and tempered or
precipitation hardened conditions. Delivery
conditions for quenched and tempered steels
BS EN 10155: 1993 #3 Structural steels with improved atmospheric
corrosion resistance. Technical delivery conditions
#3 To be phased out on 31 August 2007
-3-
Material BS EN 10164: 1993 #3 Steel products with improved deformation
properties perpendicular to the surface of the
product. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10164: 2004 Steel products with improved deformation
properties perpendicular to the surface of the
product. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10210 #3 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy
Part 1: 1994 and fine grain structural steels. Technical delivery
requirements
BS EN 10210 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy
Part 1: 2006 and fine grain steels. Technical delivery
requirements
BS EN 10219 #3 Cold formed welded structural sections of non-
Part 1: 1997 alloy and fine grain steels. Technical delivery
requirements
BS EN 10219 Cold formed welded structural hollow sections of
Part 1: 2006 non-alloy and fine grain steels. Technical delivery
requirements
Bolt BS 3692: 1967 #3 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon
bolts, screws and nuts. Metric units
BS 3692: 2001 ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and
nuts. Specification
BS 4190: 1967 #3 Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts,
screws and nuts
BS 4190: 2001 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
Specification
BS 4320: 1968 Specification for metal washers for general
engineering purposes. Metric series
BS 4395 #3 Specification for high strength friction grip bolts
Part 1 & 2: 1969 and associated nuts and washers for structural
engineering
BS 4604 Specification for the use of high strength friction
Part 1 & 2: 1970 grip bolts in structural steelwork. Metric series
BS 4933: 1973 Specification for ISO metric black cup and
countersunk head bolts and screws with hexagon
nuts
BS 7419: 1991 Specification for holding down bolts
BS EN 14399 High strength structural bolting assemblies for
Part 1-6: 2005 preloading
BS EN ISO 4014: 2001 Hexagon head bolts. Product grades A and B
BS EN ISO 4016: 2001 Hexagon head bolts. Product grade C
BS EN ISO 4017: 2001 Hexagon head screws. Product grades A and B
BS EN ISO 4018: 2001 Hexagon head screws. Product grade C
BS EN ISO 4032: 2001 Hexagon nuts, style 1. Product grades A and B
BS EN ISO 4033: 2001 Hexagon nuts, style 2. Product grades A and B
BS EN ISO 4034: 2001 Hexagon nuts. Product grade C
BS EN ISO 7091: 2000 Plain washers. Normal series. Product grade C
-4-
Welding BS 639: 1986 #3 Specification for covered carbon and carbon
consumables manganese steel electrodes for manual metal-arc
welding
BS EN 440: 1995 Welding consumables. Wire electrodes and
deposits for gas shielded metal arc welding of non-
alloy and fine grain steels. Classification
BS EN 499: 1995 #3 Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for
manual metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine
grain steels. Classification
BS EN 756: 2004 Welding consumables. Solid wires, solid wire-flux
and tubular cored electrode-flux combinations for
submerged arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain
steels. Classification
BS EN ISO 2560: 2005 Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for
manual metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine
grain steels. Classification
Welding standard BS 5135: 1984 #3 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels
BS EN 1011 Welding. Recommendations for welding of
Part 1: 1998 metallic materials
Part 2: 2001
BS EN 22553: 1995 Welded, brazed and soldered joints. Symbolic
representation on drawings
Welding procedure BS 4870 Specification for approval testing of welding
specification Part 1: 1981 #3 procedures
Part 3: 1985 #3
Part 4: 1988 #3
BS EN 288: 1992 #3 Specification and approval of welding procedures
for metallic materials. Welding procedures
specification for arc welding
BS EN 1418: 1998 Welding personnel. Approval testing of welding
operators for fusion welding and resistance weld
setters for fully mechanized and automatic welding
of metallic materials
BS EN ISO 15614 Specification and qualification of welding
Part 1: 2004 procedures for metallic materials. Welding
Part 8: 2002 procedure test
-5-
Welder BS 4871 Specification for approval testing of welders
qualification tests Part 1: 1982 #3 working to approved welding procedures
Part 3: 1985
BS 4872 Specification for approval testing of welders when
Part 1: 1982 welding procedure approval is not required. Fusion
welding of steel
BS EN 287 #3 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding.
Part 1: 1992 Steels
BS EN 287 Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding.
Part 1: 2004 Steels
Protective BS 729: 1971 #3 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on
treatment iron and steel articles
BS 4652: 1995 Specification for zinc-rich priming paint (Organic
media)
BS 4921: 1988 Specification for sherardized coatings on iron or
steel
BS EN 22063: 1994 #3 Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Thermal
spraying. Zinc, aluminium and their alloys
BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles. Specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 2063: 2005 Thermal spraying. Metallic and other inorganic
coatings. Zinc, aluminium and their alloys
BS EN ISO 11124 Preparation of steel substrates before application of
Part 1-4: 1997 paints and related products
Destructive test of BS 18: 1987 #3 Method for tensile testing of metals (including
material aerospace materials)
BS EN 10002 Tensile testing of metallic materials. Method of test
Part 1: 2001 at ambient temperature
BS EN 10045 Charpy impact test on metallic materials. Test
Part 1: 1990 method (V- and U-notches)
BS EN ISO 6506 Metallic materials. Brinell hardness test
Part 1-3: 2005
BS EN ISO 6507 Metallic materials. Vickers hardness test
Part 1-3: 2005
Non-destructive BS 2600 #3 Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt
test methods Part 1: 1983 joints in steel
Part 2: 1973
BS 3923 #3 Methods for ultrasonic examination of welds
Part 1: 1986
Part 2: 1972
-6-
Non-destructive BS 5289: 1976 #3 Code of practice. Visual inspection of fusion
test methods welded joints
BS 6072: 1981 #3 Method for magnetic particle flaw detection
BS 6443: 1984 #3 Method for penetrant flaw detection
BS EN 571 Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing. General
Part 1: 1997 principles
BS EN 970: 1997 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds.
Visual examination
BS EN 1290: 1998 Non-destructive examination of welds. Magnetic
particle examination of welds
BS EN 1435: 1997 Non-destructive examination of welds.
Radiographic examination of welded joints
BS EN 1714: 1998 Non-destructive testing of welded joints.
Ultrasonic testing of welded joints
BS EN ISO 9934 Non-destructive testing. Magnetic particle testing.
Part 1: 2001 General principles
Aluminium Materials, Workmanship and Testing

Material BS 1161: 1977 Specification for aluminium alloy sections for
structural purposes
BS EN 485 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and
Part 1: 1994 plate
Part 2: 2004
Part 3: 2003
Part 4: 1994
BS EN 515: 1993 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Wrought
products. Temper designations
BS EN 573 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical
Part 1: 2004 composition and form of wrought products
Part 2: 1995
Part 3: 2003
Part 4: 2004
BS EN 755 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded
Part 1-2: 1997 rod/bar, tube and profiles
Part 3-6: 1996
Part 7-8: 1998
Part 9: 2001
BS EN 12020 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded
Part 1 & 2: 2001 precision profiles in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN
AW-6063
-7-
Connection BS 1473: 1972 Specification for wrought aluminium and
BS 1494 Specification for fixing accessories for building
Part 1: 1964 purposes. Fixings for sheet, roof and wall
coverings
Welding BS 4872 Specification for approval testing of welders when
Part 2: 1976 welding procedure approval is not required. TIG or
MIG welding of aluminium and its alloys
Part 4: 2000 metallic materials. Arc welding of aluminium and
aluminium alloys
BS EN ISO 4063: 2000 Welding and allied processes. Nomenclature of
processes and reference numbers
BS EN ISO 9606 Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding.
Part 2: 2004 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN ISO 15614 Specification and qualification of welding
Part 2: 2005 procedures for metallic materials. Welding
procedure test. Arc welding of aluminium and its
alloys
Testing BS 5080 Structural fixings in concrete and masonry
Part 1: 1993
Part 2: 1986
BS EN 970: 1997 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds.
Visual examination
BS EN 10002 Tensile testing of metallic materials. Method of test
Part 1: 2001 at ambient temperature
BS EN ISO 6506 Metallic materials. Brinell hardness test. Test
Part 1: 2005 method
BS EN ISO 6507 Metallic materials. Vickers hardness test. Test
Part 1: 2005 method
BS EN ISO 7438: 2005 Metallic materials. Bend test
Glass Materials, Workmanship and Testing

Material BS 952 Glass for glazing
Part 1: 1995
Part 2: 1980
BS 6206: 1981 Specification for impact performance requirements
for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in
buildings
BS EN 572 Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass
Part 1-9: 2004 products
-8-
Material BS EN 1863 Glass in building. Heat strengthened soda lime
Part 1: 2000 silicate glass
Part 2: 2004
BS EN 12150 Glass in building. Thermally toughened soda lime
Part 1: 2000 silicate safety glass
Part 2: 2004
BS EN 14179 Glass in building. Heat soaked thermally
Part 1 & 2: 2005 toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
BS EN ISO 12543 Glass in building. Laminated glass and laminated
Part 1, 3-6: 1998 safety glass
Testing BS 6206: 1981 Specification for impact performance requirements
for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in
buildings
BS EN 12600: 2002 Glass in building. Pendulum test. Impact test
method and classification for flat glass
Miscellaneous Materials, Workmanship and Testing

Stainless Steel BS EN 10088 Stainless steels
Part 1-3: 2005
BS EN ISO 3506 Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant
Part 1 & 2: 1998 stainless-steel fasteners
Part 3: 2000 metallic materials. Arc welding of stainless steels
Sealant BS 6213: 2000 Selection of construction sealants. Guide
BS 3712 Building and construction sealants
Part 1: 1991
Part 2: 1973
Part 3: 1974
Part 4: 1991
Gypsum plaster BS 1191 Specification for gypsum building plasters
Part 1 & 2: 1973
Gypsum plaster BS 1230: Part 1: 1985 Gypsum plasterboard. Specification for
board plasterboard excluding materials submitted to
secondary operations
Wood wool slab BS 1105: 1981 Specification for wood wool cement slabs up to
125mm thick
Natural Stone BS EN 12372: 1999 Natural stone test methods. Determination of
flexural strength under concentrated load
Masonry BS 3921: 1985 Specification for clay bricks
-9-
Fire - testing BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
Part 4 : 1970
Part 20: 1987
Part 21: 1987
Part 22: 1987
Part 23: 1987
Part 24: 1987
Anchors BS 5080 Structural fixings in concrete and masonry
Part 1: 1993
Part 2: 1986
Note : The editions referred to in the list and in the Codes of Practice should include any
amendments current in January 2007. Such editions are the most suitable for Hong Kong
and may not be the latest version of a Standard.
(Rev. 2/2007)
- 10 -

Retaining Walls
Building (Construction) Regulations 1992 - Part XIII
This aims to clarify the administration by the Building Authority of the above
Regulations.
Anchor Plates
2. Anchor plates supporting rock or earth faces will not be treated as retaining
walls.
Minor Retaining Walls
3. A minor retaining wall is regarded as a wall where :
(a) the difference in ground levels between the upper and the lower
sides of the wall does not exceed 1.5 m;
(b) the average inclination of the ground above the top of the wall
does not exceed 15° to the horizontal; and
(c) external surcharges from foundations or other structures do not

impose any loading on the wall.
Drainage and Filter Material
4. Drainage material and filter material used in conjunction with the retaining
walls should consist of clean, sound, durable material free from clay, organic materials and
other impurities. Where site conditions are non-aggressive, geotextile filters composed of
resistant synthetic polymers are suitable alternatives to granular filters in permanent works.
5. Section 8.5 of the GEOGUIDE 1 (second edition), gives some guidance on the
design criteria for granular and geotextile filters. Further guidance on this can be obtained
from GEO Publication No. 1/93 "Review of Granular and Geotextile Filters".
Backfill Material behind Retaining Walls
6. Backfill material behind retaining walls should have in situ properties that meet
---- design requirements. It should also meet the requirements in Table 1 at Appendix A attached.
7. Material selected for use as backfill generally must not contain :
(a) peat, vegetation, timber, organic or other degradable materials;
(b) dangerous or toxic material;
(c) material susceptible to combustion;

/(d) metal ....
- 2 -
(d) metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material;
(e) material susceptible to significant volume change -- eg marine

mud, swelling clays and collapsible soils; or
(f) soluble material.
8. In addition, the backfill should not be chemically aggressive : eg the presence

of excessive sulphate in soils can cause accelerated deterioration of concrete and steel.
Rock Faces
9. Rock faces are not considered as "earth" for purposes of earth pressure
calculation.
Retaining Wall Design and Stability
10. Please refer to PNAP 166, on GEOGUIDE 1 (second edition), for the design of
new permanent earth retaining wall on land.
Remedial or Preventive Work to an Existing Retaining Wall
11. Where remedial or preventive works to an existing wall are proposed, the past
performance of the wall during its service life is of considerable assistance to the designer.
Guidance on this is given in the "Geotechnical Manual for Slopes". Designs carried out in
accordance with the recommendations therein will be acceptable to Building Authority.
Monitoring during Construction of Retaining Walls
12. Monitoring should be carried out so as to measure accurately the behaviour of

the retaining wall and the effects of construction on groundwater conditions, the site and any
building, structure, land, street or services.
Demolition of Existing Retaining Walls
13. Where it is intended to carry out demolition works to existing retaining walls,
demolition plans and supporting documents as prescribed in Building (Administration)
Regulation 8(3) and (4) shall be submitted for approval.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/8 Building Authority

This revision April 1998 (AD/LM - para 13 amended)
Index under : B(C)R Part XIII - Retaining Walls

Retaining Walls - B(C)R Part XIII
PNAP 142
Appendix A
APP-54
Table 1
Grading and Plasticity Requirements for Retaining Wall Backfill
Backfill Type
Requirement
Crushed Rock Products Soil
Maximum Size (mm) 200 75(2)
% Passing 63 microns 0 0 - 45
BS Sieve Size
Coefficient of Uniformity ≥5 ≥ 50(4)
Liquid Limit (%) Not applicable ≤ 45(5)
Plasticity Index (%) Not applicable ≤ 20(5)
Notes :
(1) Relevant test methods for grading and plasticity of fill materials are specified
in Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 of Geospec 2, Model Specification for Reinforced Fill
Structure, prepared by the Geotechnical Engineering Office.
(2) The backfill may contain up to 5% of rock fragments not exceeding 200 mm
in size, provided that these do not interfere with the compaction requirements
or cause any damage to the retaining wall.
(3) In addition to the above requirements, the maximum particle size should not
exceed two-thirds of the thickness of the compacted layer of backfill in order
to ensure good compaction.
(4) This applies to soils derived from in situ rock weathering only. For sands and
gravels of alluvial origin, the coefficient of uniformity should be not less than
5 and the material should not be gap-graded (i.e. having two or more distinct
sections of the grading curve separated by sub-horizontal portions).
(5) There is no need to check the liquid limit and plasticity index of the soil if the
backfill contains less than 30% by weight of particles less than 63 μm.
(6) The determination of the particle size distribution of the backfill should be
carried out without using dispersants.

Procedure for Payment of Fees on Submission of Plans

Building (Administration) Regulation 42
The Building (Administration)(Amendment) Regulations 1991 provide that

fees are payable on the submission of plans under the Buildings Ordinance on and after
28 March 1991. The fees are revised with effect from 1 September 1994 in accordance
with the Building (Administration)(Amendment)(No. 2) Regulation 1994 and all
resubmissions of plans are free of charge.
2. For new buildings, which include both permanent and temporary

buildings, fees payable for first submissions of building plans (including major revisions)
cover also the submission of all associated plans, such as site formation, structural and
drainage plans. Such fees are charged on the basis of the gross floor area (GFA) of the
new building. For new buildings without accountable GFA and for alteration and
addition and other works which will not result in a new building, fees for first
submissions (including major revisions) are charged according to the total number of
submitted plans of Al or smaller size, irrespective of whether they are for site formation,
building, structural, drainage or other works. Buildings without accountable GFA
include transformer stations, petrol filling stations, oil storage installations, jetties and
similar structures, and for the purpose of this type of buildings, minor ancillary
accommodation (which is otherwise accountable for GFA) may be ignored.
3. Fees are chargeable upon application for approval. When plans are
submitted, a crossed cheque for the appropriate amount payable to ‘Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region Government’ should be enclosed. Payment by cash or post-dated
cheques will not be accepted. The authorized person (AP) is responsible for calculating
----- the fee chargeable in accordance with the payment form (Appendix A), which should
accompany every first submission (including major revision). Fees paid are not
refundable even though the submission is subsequently withdrawn. Copies of the standard
form are available from the Buildings Department (BD).
4. If discrepancies are subsequently found in the calculation of fees, a

supplementary fee will be levied or a refund of any over-payment will be made, as the
case may be. The payment of supplementary fees should similarly be made by crossed
cheques, each being accompanied by a payment form.
5. Where any fee payable is not enclosed with a submission of plans, or

where a submitted cheque is subsequently dishonoured, the plans will be disapproved
under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(f). For any necessary supplementary fees,
payment should be made within 14 days of notification, failing which, the plans will be
similarly disapproved under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(f).
/6. For ....

-2-
6. For certain development proposals such as non-profit making schools,

hospitals, and similar community buildings, exemption from payment of fees would
generally be considered. A Form BA16 should be submitted to apply for exemption,
stating the special circumstances surrounding the proposal together with documentary
support as necessary. In such cases, it is not necessary for a cheque to be submitted
when making a submission of plans.
7. When a submission is delivered at the BD receiving counter, a receipt for

the payment will be issued immediately to the person delivering it. For submissions by
post or delivery service, the receipt will be sent to the AP. The receipt should be kept in
safe custody by the payer as evidence of payment as this will be needed in case of refund.
Major Revision
8. A major revision, for the purposes of payment of fees under paragraph

7A of Building (Administration) Regulations 42 (and for avoidance of doubt the
processing period in Building (Administration) Regulations 30(3)(b)), is a submission that
has been so extensively revised that it must be fundamentally reassessed and a repeat of
the centralized processing system necessitated (PNAP 30 refers). Examples of
resubmissions that would constitute a major revision are listed below (the list can be used
as a guide but is not exhaustive) :
(a) changes in disposition and/or number of blocks within a

development;
(b) change in the number of storeys, in particular, within the

podium and number of basements;
(c) major changes in configuration of floor plans which would

result in a fundamental reassessment of plot ratio, site
coverage, lighting and ventilation and means of escape;
(d) change in the principal use of a building that would

substantially affect the construction or lead to a reassessment of
planning factors and/or means of escape, e.g. office to
residential or hotel to office;
(e) substantial change in site area and configuration which would

result in a fundamental reassessment of site coverage and plot
ratio;
(f) changes that would seriously affect access to buildings;
(g) requests for substantial modifications, exemptions or bonuses

that require a fundamental review of the original proposal;
/(h) ground ....

-3-
(h) ground conditions assumed in the design found to be incorrect

during initial excavation necessitating reassessment of the site
formation works (for site formation works not resulting in a
new building); and
(i) major changes which would require to be examined under new

or amended legislation or a new draft or approved Outline
Zoning Plan.
9. In cases of doubt, please consult the relevant Chief Building Surveyor of

the New Buildings Division 1 who would undertake to provide an answer within seven
days. It should also be noted that a new Form BA5 is legally required to be included
with every submission of a major revision.
"Localized" Major Revision
10. Where the major revision is "localized", the fee charges may be based on
the "localized" GFA ie per podium, or per affected floors of the podium, on the premise
that part of a building is also a building. There would inevitably be other variations
giving rise to complications in the implementation of the charging system and this could
be considered on a case by case basis under Buildings Ordinance Section 42.
Submission of Plans pursuant to Statutory Orders
11. The requirement for payment of fees is not applicable to "proposals for
work" in response to a statutory order under the Buildings Ordinance or an advisory
letter on building safety, fire safety and slope safety issues which requires the submission
of plans.
(H W CHEUNG)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BOP/31
BD GP/BREG/A/8

This revision August 2002 (AD/NB1) (para 5 amended)
Index under : Fees, Procedure for Payment

Major Revision
Payment of Fees, Procedure
Procedure for Payment of Fees
Appendix A
(PNAP 143)
Payment of Fees on Submission of Plans (APP-55)
Building (Administration) Regulation 42 (effective 1 September 1995)
(To be completed by the authorized person and must accompany all payments)
PART 1 - PARTICULARS OF SUBMISSION

BD File No.(if known) :
Site Address :
Name & Address of Applicant :
Name of Authorized Person :
PART 2 - CALCULATION FOR CHARGES (tick in appropriate box)

A. First submissions or major revision plans of new buildings with accountable GFA
(charged on building plans submission only)
[A] [B] [C]
GFA [A] ÷ 100m² Rate of Charge ($) Tick [B] x [C] Tick Minimum Tick
(rounded UP Box Box Charge ($) Box
if not a
whole number)
GFA ≤ 2,160 8,230
Industrial
20,000m²
buildings GFA > 1,740 432,400
20,000m²
GFA ≤ 3,430 8,230
Non-industrial
10,000m²
buildings GFA > 2,750 343,400
10,000m²
B. First submissions or major revision plans for new buildings without GFA, A&A and building works
not resulting in a new building (charged on all categories of plans)
Number of plans not larger than A1 size * Rate of Charge ($) Charge ($)
x 11,200
PART 3 - STATEMENT OF AUTHORIZED PERSON

To the Building Authority :
The cheque no. Charge as per A/B ** $
for HK$ as per the above
calculations, being the charge/supplementary charge ** for less Payment made $
this submission made on , is Supplementary Charge $
attached.
Date Signature of Authorized Person
* Plans larger than A1 size in either dimension are regarded as multiples of A1 size.
** Delete whichever is inapplicable.
PART 4 - CONFIRMATION OF RECEIPT OF PAYMENT (for office use only)
Receipt no. has been issued for the payment of the amount stated in PART 3 above.
Date Name & Signature of Collecting Officer

BD 24 (revised Dec 2000)

Exemption Criteria for Site Formation Works

associated with Exempted Building Works in the New Territories
General
1. The Buildings Ordinance (Application to the New Territories) Ordinance,

Cap. 121, makes provisions for the issue of a certificate of exemption from sections 4, 9,
14, 21 and 30 of the Buildings Ordinance and the Building Regulations for certain building
works in the New Territories.
2. Where such exemption is granted, provision is also made in section 6(a) for
the issue of a certificate of exemption in respect of site formation works. This practice note
describes the criteria for the issue of a certificate of exemption by Director of Lands for
these site formation works.
Certificate of Exemption for Site Formation Works
3. The issue of certificate of exemption for site formation works will only be
considered by the relevant District Lands Officer when all the criteria listed below have
been met:
(a) The maximum gradient across the lot from boundary to boundary
is not more than 15 degrees.
(b) The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the
lot boundary in any direction is less than 15 degrees.
(c) There is no slope within the area 10m outside the lot boundary
steeper than 30 degrees or higher than 1.5m.
(d) There is no retaining wall or terrace wall either within the lot or within the
area 10m outside the lot which is higher than 1.5m.
Conditions of Exemption
4. A certificate of exemption for site formation works would be issued with the
following conditions:
/(a) No ....
- 2 -
(a) No retaining walls or terrace walls higher than 1.5m shall be

constructed. The combined height of retaining wall and slope
constructed shall also not exceed 1.5m.
(b) The retaining height to breadth ratio of retaining walls constructed

shall not be greater than two. The retaining walls shall be
constructed of masonry or concrete.
(c) No slopes steeper than 30 degrees nor higher than 1.5m shall be
constructed.
Requirement for Site Formation Submissions
5. In the event that the above exemption criteria or the associated conditions
cannot be met, the prescribed plans for site formation works shall be submitted to the
Buildings Department in the normal way.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/1
First issued August 1991 (GGE)

Last issued August 1991
This revision February 1997 (AD/S, GGE/I) (paras 2, 3 and 4 revised)
Index under : Buildings Ordinance (Application to the New Territories) Ordinance

Certificate of Exemption for Site Formation Works
Exemption Criteria for Site Formation Works
Site Formation Works, Exemption Criteria for
Appendix A
Criteria for Granting Exemption of Site Formation Works
(a) The maximum gradient across the lot from boundary to boundary is not more than
15 degrees.
(b) The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the lot boundary in
any direction is less than 15 degrees.
(c) There is no slope within the area 10m outside the lot boundary steeper than 30
degrees or higher than 1.5m.
(d) There is no retaining wall or terrace wall either within the lot or within the area 10m
outside the lot which is higher than 1.5m.
Conditions to be Included in the Certificate of Exemption for Site Formation Works
(a) No retaining walls or terrace walls higher than 1.5m shall be constructed. The
combined height of retaining wall and slope constructed shall also not exceed 1.5m.
(b) The retaining height to breadth ratio of retaining walls constructed shall not be
greater than two. The retaining walls shall be constructed of masonry or concrete.
(c) No slopes steeper than 30 degrees nor higher than 1.5m shall be constructed.
Conditions to be Included in the Certificate of Exemption for Building Works
(a) All retaining walls are excluded from this exemption and are classified as site
formation works.
(b) Any structure retaining earth or fill is considered to be a retaining wall.
(c)* An investigation of the stability of the existing slopes/retaining walls* is required.
* Delete as appropriate.
Ref. : INST:6.4

This revision June 1996 (AD/D, GGE/I)
Appendix B
Flow Chart Showing Procedures for Handling
Site Formation Works Associated with NTEHs Development
Application for DLO in consultation with

NTEH development GEO (including joint site
visit if required) to
determine whether
investigation is required
Are the criteria for

Yes exemption of site
formation works met? Is investigation
No
No required?
No Yes
Owner to appoint AP/

Engineer to carry out the
Are site formation works investigation (Note 2)
intended?
Yes
(1)
Submission of proposed Will the proposed building works
works to BD for approval adversely affect the existing slopes or
Yes
(engagement of AP is retaining walls?
required) OR (2) Are landslip preventive or
remedial works required?
No
Is the investigation report Submission to DLO and

Yes
acceptable to GEO? copy to GEO for comment
AP/Engineer to provide
No further information/to carry
out further investigation
Issue C of E for site

formation works with
conditions (Note 1)
Notes : 1. See Appendix A for the conditions to be included. These requirements

should be included in the C of E for Building Works as the third
condition.
2. DLO to prepare ground features report to determine whether criteria for
exemption of site formation works are met and for subsequent referral
to GEO for advice.

Requirements for an Excavation and Lateral Support Plan

Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc)
Bulk excavation, even if shallow, can be dangerous if not properly

designed. Authorized persons, registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered
geotechnical engineers (RGE) are reminded to take adequate precautions to ensure public
safety whenever excavation is found necessary as part of the work.
2. In general terms, excavation and lateral support (ELS) plans are required
under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc) to be submitted for approval where
excavations of substantial depth are to be carried out, the collapse of which would cause
serious consequences.
3. For guidance, an ELS plan will be required to be submitted for approval

where the excavation to be carried out are :
(a) deeper than 4.5 m, and greater than 5 m in length; and
(b) liable to affect any road, building, structure, slope steeper than
30° or water main 75 mm in diameter or greater, the affected
area being defined as within the 45° line up from the base of
the excavation to the ground surface.
4. Where the above conditions apply, applications for consent to commence

works would not be given if an ELS plan, as prescribed in Building (Administration)
Regulation 8(1)(bc), has not been submitted and approved.
5. Where ELS plans are required to be submitted for approval as stipulated

above, an RSE would be required to prepare and sign the plans and structural design as
well as the structural assessment report of the effects of the excavation and dewatering on
adjoining structures. An RGE would be required to prepare and sign the supporting
documentations, such as geotechnical assessment, geotechnical details and calculations,
geotechnical reports, site investigation reports or ground investigation reports, which
should accompany the ELS plans submission.
6. It is permissible to have the ELS plans submitted in two stages, provided

that the first stage submission demonstrates the feasibility of the entire scheme. Plans
submitted at the first stage should show the lateral support system, for example sheet piles
or a diaphragm wall, together with a strutting layout and the construction sequence. The
supporting geotechnical documentation should also be provided. Calculations submitted
at the first stage should include realistic ground movement estimates for the entire works.
The second stage submission normally would include the structural details of the lateral
support system, including detailing of the struts for each stage of excavation according to
the approved first stage submission.
-2-
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority

Last revision November 1993
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Para. 1 amended and para. 5
added)
Index under : Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc)

Excavation and Lateral Support Plan
Requirements for an Excavation and Lateral Support Plan

Testing of Drainage Works

Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments,
Plumbing, Drainage Works & Latrines) Regulation 73
For years, the Building Authority has been testing drains in private
development pursuant to the provisions in Part VII of the Building (Standards of Sanitary
Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations. Such practice has come to
be misunderstood by some authorized persons as having a diminishing effect on their
responsibility for ensuring compliance with the prescribed standards for drainage works. In
testing drains, the Building Authority assumes a monitoring role, whereas, the ultimate
responsibility for maintaining the prescribed standards must rest with the registered contractor
and the authorized person.
2. In a recent review of the situation, the following areas of concern were

identified :
(i) There have been instances where it was found at O.P. stage that
drainage works had not been duly tested;
(ii) At the time of drain testing, it is not uncommon to find that the
approved pipe runs, alignment and invert levels have been modified to
suit unforeseen site conditions. Sometimes, such deviations which the
authorized person may not have been made aware of are so extensive
as to warrant an amended plan submission; and
(iii) Very often, drains have to be laid in sections to phase in with the
construction programme. For a large scale development, involving a
correspondingly complex drainage system, fragmented drain testing
can be a very onerous exercise. Nowadays, development projects
requiring more than 100 drain tests are not uncommon. With its
limited staff resources, the Buildings Ordinance Office is finding it
increasingly difficult to cope with the growing numbers of applications
for drain tests.
3. It is felt that the above areas of concern and the attendant problems could be
relieved if the authorized person was to take a more explicit role in drain testing. With this in
mind, the following procedures have been formulated :
(i) All applications for drain testing, submitted pursuant to Building

(Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and
Latrines) Regulation 73(1), must be copied to the authorized person at
the same time;
(ii) Upon receipt of the copied application, the authorized person or his
representative should arrange to attend the drain test, and, subsequently
endorse the records/results of the test;
Cont’d/…………..
-2-
(iii) Testing of drains must proceed as scheduled, duly recorded and

endorsed, even if the Building Authority or his representative is not
present at the drain test; and
(iv) Within 7 days from attending the drain test, the authorized person shall
submit to the Building Authority a `certificate on completion of drain
test', format as in Annex I, together with the endorsed drain test
results.
4. Kindly arrange for the above procedures to take immediate effect. Concurrent
with this PNAP, a revised PNRC 11 has been issued to all registered contractors.
(Darwin Chen)
Building Authority
Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/SF/2
First issued April 1993 (GBS/D)
Index under : B(SSFPDW&L)R 73 - Testing of Drainage Works

Drainage Works - Testing of
Testing of Drainage Works
PNAP 157
APP-58
Annex I
Certificate on Completion of Drain Test
B.O.O. Ref. : Date : __________________
Re : _________________________________________________________
To Building Authority,
I confirm that I/my representative ( )

had witnessed the drain test which was carried out at the captioned site on .
Pursuant to PNAP 157 and Building (Administration) Regulation 44, test results and record
plan(s), duly endorsed by me, are submitted herewith for your reference.
2. I hereby certify that the above drain test have been carried out in compliance
with BS 8301:1985, and, that I am satisfied with the results of the drain test.
__________________________
c.c. Registered Contractor


BAN
on Hand-dug Caissons
Hand-dug caissons have been used for many years and have had a disturbing
history of high accident rate and health hazards to workers.
2. Government has enacted the Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 1995 on

19 January 1995 to ban the use of hand-dug caissons.
3. "Hand-dug caisson" is defined in Section 2(1) of the Buildings Ordinance as

any foundation or earth-retaining structure, or part thereof, the construction of which includes
the excavation of a shaft in the ground by means of digging carried out by any person inside
the shaft with or without the aid of machine tools. A new section 16(1A) empowers the
Building Authority (BA) to refuse to give approval to any plans of building works where they
include the construction of a hand-dug caisson. Exemption may be granted only if it can be
demonstrated to the satisfaction of the BA personally that the following circumstances exist :
(a) the depth of the hand-dug caisson does not exceed 3 metres and
the diameter of the inscribed circle of the hand-dug caisson is
not less than 1.5 metres; or
(b) for the site concerned --
(i) the use of a hand-dug caisson is the only practical

construction method; or
(ii) there is no other safe engineering alternative.
Examples would be narrow or steeply-sloping sites where difficult access or insufficient

working space makes it not possible or not safe to use machine tools.
4. In these exceptional circumstances, the authorized person/registered structural

engineer must specify stringent safety requirements in the method statement for the building
works and ensure that the registered contractor is fully aware of and complies with all safety
requirements. In this respect, the provisions of the Construction Site (Safety) Regulations
administered by the Commissioner for Labour should be observed.
5. The booklet "Guidance Notes on Hand-dug Caissons", published by the Hong

Kong Institution of Engineers, offers advice on good practice. Reference should also be made
to the "Code of Safe Working Practices for Hand-dug Caissons", published by the
Occupational Safety & Health Council.
/6. I ....
- 2 -
6. A grace period of 12 months is given for adjustment to the new legislation.

With effect from 1st February 1996, the BA will not give approval to plans involving hand-
dug caissons unless there were exceptional circumstances as specified in section 16(1A) of the
Buildings Ordinance.
7. Meanwhile, authorized persons and registered structural engineers are strongly

urged to avoid using hand-dug caissons in the interest of safety for workers. Loss of life or
limb is too high a price to pay.
8. A similar practice note has been issued to registered contractors.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority

This revision February 1995 (AD/SE)
Index under : Caissons

Hand-dug Caissons
Ban on Hand-dug Caissons

Buildings Ordinance, Cap 123

Specified Forms
In exercise of the powers under section 22(4) of the Buildings Ordinance,

------ I have specified the forms listed at Appendix A.
2. Where a section of the Buildings Ordinance or a Regulation requires an

application, a notice or a certificate to be submitted in a specified form, the form listed in
Appendix A for the relevant purpose should be used and should not be altered or
amended in any way. Failure to use the specified form may invalidate the application,
notice or certificate.
3. The specified forms will be kept under regular review and revised as
necessary. Their most updated versions as well as the list at Appendix A can be obtained
by downloading from the website of the Buildings Department (www.info.gov.hk/bd) or
from the reception counter on 12/F of Buildings Department’s headquarters at Pioneer
Centre, 750 Nathan Road, Kowloon during office hours.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/1

This revision November 2002 (AD/Support) - Appendix A revamped
Index under : Specified forms

Appendix A
(PNAP 159)
Buildings Ordinance, Cap 123 (APP-60)
Specified Forms
Relevant
Form Purpose section of Revision Date
No. Cap 123 or
Regulation
Application for registration as authorized
person (AP) / registered structural
engineer (RSE) / registered geotechnical
engineer (RGE)
BA1 • for inclusion BOs 3(6) 12/2005
BA1A • for retention of name BOs 3(9B) 12/2004
BA1B • for restoration of name BOs 3(12) 12/2004
Application for registration as registered
general building contractor (RGBC) /
registered specialist contractor (RSC)
BA2 • for inclusion BOs 8B 12/2004
BA2A • for renewal of registration BOs 8C(2) 12/2004
BA2B • for restoration of name BOs 8D(2) 12/2004
BA2C • for approval of technical director/ other BOs 8B 12/2004
officer / person appointed to act for the
purposes of the Buildings Ordinance
BA4 Notice of appointment of AP and/or RSE B(A)R 23(1A) 12/2005
and/or RGE
BA5 Application for approval of plans of B(A)R 29(1), 12/2005
building works and/or street works, and B(A)R 18A
certificate of preparation of plans
BA6 Stability certificate of AP and/or RSE B(A)R 18 11/1994
BA7 Notice of urgent works required as a BOs 19(1), 12/2005
result of accident or emergency B(A)R 28
BA8 Application for consent to the B(A)R 31 1/1996
commencement & carrying out of
building works or street works
BA9 Application for renewal of consent to BOs 20(2) 1/1996
the carrying out of building works or
street works
BA10 Notice of appointment of RGBC/RSC, B(A)R 20 5/2004
notice of commencement of building
works or street works and undertaking
by RGBC/RSC
BA 11 Notice from RGBC/RSC on ceasing to B(A)R 24 5/2004
be appointed in respect of building
works or street works and certificate in
respect of that part of the building
works or street works carried out by the
RGBC/RSC
-1-
Relevant
Form Purpose section of Revision Date
No. Cap 123 or
Regulation
BA12 Certificate on completion of building B(A)R 25, 12/2005
works resulting in a new temporary BOs 21(2)
building, a new building or part of a
new building and application for
temporary occupation permit in respect
of such building or part
BA13 Certificate on completion of building B(A)R 25, 12/2005
works resulting in a new building and BOs 21(2)
application for permit to occupy such
building
BA14 Certificate on completion of building B(A)R 25 & 12/2005
works not resulting in a new building or 26
of street works
BA14A Certificate on completion of demolition B(A)R 25 12/2005
works
BA15 Notice of intended material change in BOs 25(1) 1/1996
the use of a building
BA16 Application for modification of and/or BOs 42(2) 9/2000
exemption from the provisions of the
Buildings Ordinance and/or Regulations
made thereunder
BA17 Application for permit to erect a B(P)R 51 1/1996
temporary building
BA18 Application for permit to erect a B(P)R 53(1) 5/2004
contractor's shed
BA19 Application for permit to erect B(P)R 64 1/1996
hoardings, covered walkways or
gantries
BA20 Notice of technically competent person B(DW)R 8(3) 5/2004
or persons appointed to supervise
demolition works
BA21 Notice of nomination by AP/RSE/RGE B(A)R 23(2) 12/2005
of another AP/RSE/RGE to act in his
stead during temporary inability to act
BA22 Application for authorization to carry BOs 28B(1) 1/1996
out and/or maintain groundwater
drainage works
BA23 Application for grant/renewal of licence B(OSI)R 6(1) 1/1996
for an oil storage installation & 7(3)
BA24 Notification to the BA of change of B(A)R 45 2/2005
business address of
AP/RSE/RGE/RGBC/RSC
(Rev. 12/2005)
-2-

Development in Area Numbers 2 & 4 of the Scheduled Areas
The Scheduled Areas No. 2 (North-western New Territories) and No. 4 (Ma
On Shan) are defined in the Fifth Schedule of the Buildings Ordinance. The plans
illustrating the exact extent of the areas are on display in the Buildings Department and in
the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library. Location maps of the
areas are shown in Figures 1 and 2 respectively.
2. This practice note describes geotechnical control measures in respect of

building works in Area Numbers 2 & 4 of the Scheduled Areas (these Areas). It applies to
submissions relating to ground investigation, foundation design and construction in these
Areas, and to any groundwater pumping proposed in the Area Number 2 of the Scheduled
Areas. It is complementary to PNAP 66 : Pile Foundations. The recommendations are
based on practice developed since the discovery of the cavity problems and have been
accepted by the profession.
3. The geology of these Areas comprises superficial deposits overlying

metamorphosed sedimentary strata (siltstones, sandstones and marble) as well as igneous
rocks. The marble usually has a karstic upper surface with solution features. Large cavities
occur within the marble in some locations. The planning, design and construction of works
which involve ground investigations, excavations, foundations or groundwater pumping may
encounter significant difficulties as a result of these ground conditions.
4. As the ground conditions are complex, early involvement of Registered

Geotechnical Engineers (RGEs), who are familiar with the geological conditions of the
Scheduled Areas, is essential, in particular in reviewing the geological information and in
ensuring that all relevant geotechnical controls under the Buildings Ordinance and
Regulations are observed.
5. By virtue of Buildings Ordinance Section 41(3), ground investigation in these

Areas require approval of the Building Authority (BA). Plans of any proposed ground
investigation in these Areas prescribed under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(1)
must therefore be submitted to the BA for approval and consent before the works are
commenced.
6. Authorized Persons (APs), Registered Structural Engineers (RSEs) and RGEs

are advised to ensure that ground investigation works are carried out to a high standard and
are properly supervised. Guidance on ground investigation may be obtained from
GEOGUIDE 2 : Guide to Site Investigation. It is advisable to employ competent contractors
with a proven reputation who are capable of producing high quality work.
7. The site supervision requirements and the minimum qualifications and

experience of the supervision personnel and the Competent Person (Logging) for ground
investigation field works are given in Code of Practice for Site Supervision. The cores
recovered should be examined and properly logged by a Competent Person (Logging).
Guidance on this aspect can be found in GEOGUIDE 3: Guide to Rock and Soil
Description.
/Attention………
-2-
Attention should be given to logging the location and size of the cavities, the nature of the
cavity wall and the infill, together with rock discontinuities. Fracture indices including Total
Core Recovery, Solid Core Recovery, Rock Quality Designation and Fracture Index should
also be shown on the drill logs.
8. In these ground conditions, a ground investigation is best carried out in

stages. It must be adequate to ascertain whether marble with cavities exists beneath the site,
and allow an assessment of whether the cavities will affect the proposed development. Some
deep drillholes will be required for this purpose. Cavities in marble, and related geological
structures, may follow certain trends, and inclined boreholes may provide useful information
if the dominant trend is vertical or near vertical. Geophysical survey may also provide
additional information between drillholes. All drillholes should be grouted on completion.
9. It is advisable to carry out the initial stages of the ground investigation prior
to the finalization of general building plans for the site because, in certain circumstances,
adjustments to the locations of certain structures may be the most economical means of
dealing with serious problems posed by cavities.
10. The depths of drillholes should relate to the depth of marble bedrock and the
magnitude of the load to be applied by the structure. If marble is encountered, a minimum
penetration of 20 m into sound marble rock is recommended in order to reduce the risk of
existing cavities not being identified. Where cavities are encountered in the hole being
drilled or in adjacent drillholes, increased penetration is necessary. The use of water as a
flushing medium should be carefully controlled as there have been cases where sinkholes
were induced by excessive use of flushing water. High quality core samples of the cavity
infill can be obtained by using triple-tube core-barrels with air foam as the flushing medium.
The intensity and depth of drillholes for each site will be governed by the nature of the
structures proposed, the foundation loading and the ground conditions encountered.
11. Further investigation will normally be required once the layout of the
development and the locations of piles have been decided. Some drillholes at the edges of
the main piled foundation area may be required, since cavities at the edges are likely to be
more detrimental than cavities at the inner part of the foundation area itself.
12. Discussion with the relevant district Chief Geotechnical Engineer of the
Geotechnical Engineering Office before a ground investigation proposal is finalized may
allow the optimum drillhole layout to be adopted and could expedite approvals of foundation
plans. With regard to the requirements of Building (Administration) Regulation 20, at least
two weeks prior notification of the intention to commence ground investigation work in
these Areas should be given to the relevant district Chief Geotechnical Engineer.
13. Pending substantial completion of the building works, all cores and samples
should be retained on site in good condition for inspection by the staff of the Buildings
Department and the Geotechnical Engineering Office.
Foundation Design
14. Driven or machine-bored piles will usually provide the most suitable
foundation for heavy structures on sites underlain by marble. Hand-dug
caissons require dewatering, which might be difficult and could induce the
formation of sinkholes. PNAP 158 also restricts the use of hand-dug
caissons.
/15…………..
-3-
15. When driven piles are to be used, these should be of a suitably heavy section
to withstand hard driving and with modified or strengthened tips. The modified section
should be such as to allow the piles to be driven through and beyond any cover or rock
bridging over shallow cavities or thin overhangs, and to prevent the piles deflecting where
the marble surface is inclined. Pre-drilling may be necessary when very deep rock surfaces
are expected or when piles have to penetrate thick karst zones. As it is not possible to
determine the exact extent and configuration of subsurface cavities/overhang under each
pile, the pile layout cannot be adjusted to suit all these features. It is, therefore, necessary to
increase the number of piles used above the minimum so that, where cavities lead to local
lack of support, the spare piles can then carry the redistributed load without being
overstressed. It is necessary to consider this in the pile cap design.
16. When high capacity bored piles or barrettes are proposed, the effect of
cavities below both the plan position of each pile or barrette and the surrounding area should
be considered in the choice of founding level and allowable bearing capacity. Adequate
drillholes should be sunk and, where appropriate, probing should be carried out to detect the
presence of cavities, if any, within the zone significantly stressed by the piles.
Supporting Documentation to Accompany Foundation Plans
17. The supporting documentation prescribed under Building (Administration)

Regulation 8(1)(d)(ii) should accompany foundation plans for building works in these Areas
to be submitted to the BA for approval, and submissions not in compliance with this
requirement will be liable to be refused under Buildings Ordinance Sections 16(1)(a) and
16(1)(i).
Foundation Construction
18. Where driven piles are used as foundations, the piling reports submitted to
the Buildings Department shall include the complete blow count records throughout pile
driving. These should be presented in the form of blows per 500 mm where driving is easy,
reducing to blows per 100 mm where driving is hard. The blow count should also be
plotted against depth of penetration for each pile, in terms of blows per 100 mm. It is
suggested that the dividing point between ‘easy’ and ‘hard’ driving should be at 10 blows
per 100 mm.
19. The deviation of each driven pile from its initial position should also be
surveyed.
20. In karst areas, there is always the risk despite conservative design, that
foundation problems might arise, e.g. buckling of piles during driving, and reactivation of
sinkholes or collapse of cavities during piling or foundation construction. The RSE and
RGE should therefore review the ground conditions experienced during foundation
construction. Pile driving and other foundation construction records should be assessed at
close intervals and the necessity or otherwise of modifying the design should be considered.
21. Trial piling and instrumentation of piles may be necessary in karst areas.
General guidance on proof tests on piles is given in PNAP 66. Other non-destructive tests
may have to be carried out on piles which are suspected to have deflected/defects or have
anomalies in pile driving records.
/Requirement…………
-4-
Requirement for Submission of a Performance Review
22. In respect of foundation works in these Areas, a condition may be imposed

under Buildings Ordinance Section 17(1)(6) to require a performance review of foundation
construction to be submitted and found acceptable prior to consent to commencement of
superstructure works. However, it is not intended to impose this condition on every site
within the Area.
23. Where a performance review is required it should include a review of the

ground conditions experienced during pile driving, pile installation or foundation
construction, and an assessment of pile driving or construction records. The review should
also contain the results and an assessment of the pile load tests and evidence to demonstrate
that any consequential changes in the design have been undertaken and plans suitably
amended and approved.
24. Consent to commence superstructure works may be refused under Buildings

Ordinance Section 16(3)(ba) if any required performance review fails to demonstrate that the
foundation works have been adequately inspected and the construction records adequately
assessed in the course of construction, or that any necessary changes in the design have been
undertaken and plans suitably amended and approved.
Monitoring
25. The RSE or RGE should arrange for monitoring of the settlement of any
building founded on cavernous marble using precise levelling or other approved methods.
Details of the proposed monitoring should be submitted to GEO for comments via BD
prior to installation of the monitoring stations. Such monitoring should commence as soon
as possible after the completion of foundation works, and this should be continued until issue
of occupation permit. Readings should be taken at intervals sufficiently close to minimize
scatter, with a frequency not less than monthly. The results, together with an assessment of
these should be submitted to the Buildings Department monthly. Any unusual or significant
settlement or impact should be brought to the attention of the Buildings Department
immediately.
26. It should be noted that, where appropriate, the Geotechnical Engineering

Office will take over and continue the monitoring for a period following the granting of an
occupation permit.
27. APs, RSEs or RGEs should note that buildings founded in weathered
siltstones and sandstones above marble may also encounter difficulties. They are
encouraged to monitor the settlements and impacts during the construction of these buildings
and to bring any unusual settlements to the attention of the Buildings Department
immediately.
Water Wells
28. Where water wells are proposed within these Areas, application to the
Building Authority for approval shall be accompanied by a submission prepared by a RGE
demonstrating that groundwater extraction will not adversely affect the site and the
surrounding areas.
/29……….
-5-
29. As mentioned in paragraph 10 of PNAP 17, it has been agreed with the
Water Authority that, within Yuen Long town in Area Number 2 of the Scheduled Areas,
piped flushing water will normally be supplied. Within Ma On Shan in Area Number 4 of
the Scheduled Area, facilities for piped flushing water have been provided.
Additional Information Available
30. A considerable amount of information exists on the geology of these Areas.

For Area Number 2 of the Scheduled Areas, twenty 1:5000 Geological Map sheets are
available, together with an account of the geology as Hong Kong Geological Survey Sheet
Report No. 1 - Geology of Yuen Long. For Area Number 4 of the Scheduled Areas, a
1:5000 Geological Map sheet is available, together with an account of the geology as Hong
Kong Geological Survey Sheet Report No. 5 - Geology of Ma On Shan. Copies of the
Sheet Reports can be obtained (free of charge) from the Planning Division of the
Geotechnical Engineering Office. Copies of the 1:5000 Geological Map sheets can be
purchased from Map Publications Centre, Survey and Mapping Office of the Lands
Department.
31. The updated sources of information on site investigation are given in

Geotechnical Engineering Office Technical Guidance No.5.
( H W CHEUNG)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/A/15 (II)

BD GP/BORD/75

This issue December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras.1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 12, 17, 20,
25, 27, 28 & 30 amended, para. 4 & 31 added and location maps updated)
Index under: Scheduled Areas No. 2 & 4

Foundation Works in the Scheduled Areas
Ground Investigation in the Scheduled Areas
Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 1990 & 1993
Performance Review
Marble
(PNAP 161)
(APP-61)
Figure 1
THE SCHEDULED AREA OF THE NORTHWEST NEW TERRITORIES

(THE AREA IS TERMED AREA NUMBER 2 OF THE
SCHEDULED AREAS IN THE BUILDINGS ORDINANCE)
(Rev. 12/2005)
(PNAP 161)
(APP-61)
Figure 2
THE SCHEDULED AREA OF MA ON SHAN

(THE AREA IS TERMED AREA NUMBER 4 OF THE
SCHEDULED AREAS IN THE BUILDINGS ORDINANCE)
(Rev. 12/2005)

Sewage Tunnel Works

Sewage Tunnels (Statutory Easements) Ordinance
Section 17A and Scheduled Area Number 5,
Buildings Ordinance, Cap 123
The Sewage Tunnels (Statutory Easements) Ordinance [ST(SE)O] gazetted on

5 November 1993 provides inter alia for the creation of statutory easements and other rights
over land in connection with sewage tunnels. For building works, the consequential
amendment, viz. the new section 17A of the Buildings Ordinance, is relevant.
2. Under section 4 of the ST(SE)O, the Secretary for Planning, Environment and
Lands may cause to be published in the Gazette plans showing the route of sewage tunnels and
the land situated on the route over which easements and rights may be created. Such plans are
deposited in the Land Registry. Copies of these plans are also available for inspection in the
Buildings Department and the Drainage Services Department (DSD).
3. The recently enacted Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 1995 has added to the
Fifth Schedule of the Ordinance the sewage tunnel protection areas as Scheduled Area No. 5.
These areas are the areas delineated and shown edged black on the seven plans numbered
KCE/S/G/765A to 771A, dated 11 November 1994, signed by the Secretary for Planning,
Environment and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry.
4. With effect from 1 March 1995, all ground investigations in these areas will
become building works as defined under section 2 of the Buildings Ordinance and be subject to
the control under Part II of the Ordinance.
5. Proposals for building works on land situated on and in the vicinity of a route
of a sewage tunnel are subject to section 17A of the Buildings Ordinance. This empowers the
Building Authority to refuse approval of, or impose conditions on, proposals found to be
incompatible with sewage tunnel works gazetted under section 4 of the ST(SE)O.
6. Sewage tunnels are constructed at great depths so as to minimize adverse effect

on building development on the land above : a minimum cover of 30 m of bedrock will
normally be allowed. In the interest of public safety, however, it is still necessary for relevant
technical requirements to be met to avoid incompatibility between any building works
---- (especially foundation works) and sewage tunnel works. For this purpose, the technical notes
appended have been prepared by DSD.
/7. Plans ....

- 2 -
7. Plans submitted to the Buildings Department for proposed building works

within 100 meters from the centreline of the gazetted route of sewage tunnels or for ground
investigation works within Scheduled Area No. 5 will be circulated to DSD under the system
for centralised processing of building plans. The procedures of the system will be followed.
8. The ST(SE)O also contains provisions for compensation. Please direct

enquiries on this and related matters to the Director of Lands.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/SEW/12
First issued April 1994 (AD/LM)

This revision May 1995 (AD/LM)
Index under : Sewage tunnel works

Sewage tunnels
PNAP 165
Appendix
APP-62
Technical Notes for Guidance in Assessing
the Effects of Civil Engineering Works/Building Development
on Sewage Tunnels Works
These technical notes apply to building works on lands situated on or adjacent

to the alignment of sewage tunnels.
A. General
2. "Sewage tunnel" means an underground tunnel and associated underground

structures for the transfer of sewage. A shaft connecting to a sewage tunnel is part of the
sewage tunnel. For the application of these guidelines, the extent of sewage tunnels is defined
by the route and minimum depth as shown on the gazetted sewage tunnel plan. The extent of a
shaft is the external diameter in soil and the internal diameter plus 5 metres in rock. The
Director of Drainage Services should be consulted if there is any query concerning the route
and extent of sewage tunnels.
3. Shafts of sewage tunnels are located within Drainage Services Department sites.
Tunnels to be constructed between these shafts are generally deep with at least 30 metres of
rock cover. Most of the construction works on ground surface will not have any significant
effect on sewage tunnels and no restrictions on these works will be necessary.
4. The main risks of damage to sewage tunnels arise from either site formation or
foundation works constructed immediately adjacent to shaft sites or from boreholes, wells,
shafts, tunnels, grouting or other deep works constructed close to sewage tunnels. There is
also a risk from ground investigation works for a project requiring deep boreholes to be drilled
into the rock.
5. For the purposes of these notes the term "rock" is defined as Grades I, II and
III according to Table 4 - Classification of rock Material Decomposition Grades - in Geoguide
3 (Guide to rock and soil descriptions) published by the Geotechnical Engineering Office. The
term "soil" is defined as Grades IV, V and VI, also defined in Geoguide 3, reclamation
materials, and marine and alluvial deposits.
6. Leakage of sewage and the migration of gas from sewage tunnels poses health
and safety risks. These risks must be evaluated when considering any proposed works near
sewage tunnels, especially in respect of any dewatering works where there is the potential for
the migration of methane in solution in the groundwater.
7. All proposals for new building works within 100 metres from the centreline of
the gazetted route of sewage tunnels shall be subject to special scrutiny by Government. Each
proposal shall be treated on its individual technical merits and subject to the requirements of
the following technical guidelines.
/B. Site ....

- 2 -
B. Site Formation or Foundation Works
8. Where site formation, foundation works or excavation for basements, shafts,

tunnels and such like are proposed above or adjacent to sewage tunnels, the effects of such
works shall be within the following limits :
(a) The vertical or horizontal pressure on any sewage tunnel structure

in soil due to the above operations (including filling and dewatering)
and due to additional loads transmitted from foundations (including
loads arising during construction) shall not be varied by more than
20kPa. or by 5% of the total overburden pressure for structures at
depths greater than 20m. For sewage tunnel structures in rock,
where it is not possible to assess the change in ground pressure due
to the above operations, the hydrostatic pressure shall not be
increased or decreased by more than 50kPa.
(b) Differential movement resulting from the works shall not produce a
calculated final diametric distoration exceeding 0.1% of the shaft or
sewage tunnel internal diameter and the calculated total movement
in any plane shall not exceed 20mm.
(c) The peak particle velocities at any sewage tunnel structures resulting
from blasting (where permitted) or from driving or withdrawing of
piles or any operation which can induce prolonged vibration shall
not exceed 25mm/sec for blasting and 15mm/sec for other
operations.
(d) No holes or excavations shall be sunk or excavated within a distance

of 3m from any point of any sewage tunnel structure without prior
approval by the Building Authority for the works and the method to
be employed.
(e) No pile, foundation or well shall be driven or constructed within a

distance of 3m in any plane of any point of any sewage tunnel
structure.
(f) Any part of a ground anchor shall be more than 3m from any part
of any sewage tunnel structure.
9. Proposals for monitoring the effects on sewage tunnels shall be submitted to the
Building Authority before works commence and subsequent data shall be submitted to the
Building Authority for the duration of the works.
/C. Ground ....

- 3 -
C. Ground Investigation Works
10. Where ground investigations are proposed within Scheduled Area No. 5, it is
necessary for the following to be submitted to the Building Authority :
(a) details of the exploration and locations of the proposed exploration

holes, field testing or instrumentations relative to sewage tunnels;
(b) proposed depth of holes, field testing or instrumentation;
(c) a method statement for sinking holes, conducting field testings or

installing instrumentation; and
(d) a method statement for checking the alignment of holes when the
minimum distance from a hole to any point of a sewage tunnel is
less than 50m should holes be sunk to a depth within 3m from the
highest point of the sewage tunnels.
11. Any proposal will also be judged against the following technical guidelines :
(a) The vertical and horizontal pressure on any sewage tunnel structure
in soil due to site investigation works including field testing such as
plate load test, pressuremeter test, packer test or any operation
should not be increased or decreased by more than 20kPa or by 5%
of the total overburden pressure for structures at depths greater than
20m.
(b) The peak particle velocities at any sewage tunnel structure resulting
from --
(i) artificial shocks generated either by the detonation of

explosives or a mechanical blow at ground surface
or at depth within a hole should not exceed
25mm/sec; and
(ii) percussion drilling, hammer drilling or any

operation which can induce prolonged vibration,
should not exceed 15mm/sec.
(c) No holes should be sunk or excavated within a distance of 3m from

any point of any sewage tunnel.
D. Dewatering Works and Wells
12. Assessment shall be made regarding the leakage of sewage and the migration of gas
in respect of all dewatering and well proposals within 100 metres of sewage tunnels. Monitoring
proposals shall be submitted to the Building Authority with an agreed programme for the duration
of the dewatering or extraction.
May 1995

GEOGUIDE 1 (Second Edition)

Guide to Retaining Wall Design
The second edition of GEOGUIDE 1 (Guide to Retaining Wall Design),

prepared by the Geotechnical Engineering Office, is now available for purchase from the
Government Publications Sales Centre. It supersedes the first edition published in July 1982
and is the result of extensive consultation, locally and overseas, with consulting engineers,
contractors, academics, professional bodies and Government departments.
2. The GEOGUIDE recommends a standard of good practice for the design of

permanent retaining walls in Hong Kong. It covers common retaining walls and includes
conventional reinforced concrete walls, gravity walls (such as crib walls, gabion walls and
mass concrete walls) and cantilevered retaining walls.
3. The second edition of GEOGUIDE 1 represents a major change in the approach

to the design of retaining walls. The first edition advocated limit state analysis with global
factors of safety. This second edition recommends limit state analysis with partial factors of
safety. This approach is more rational and permits uncertainties in major parameters to be
allowed for individually. In addition, the new GEOGUIDE gives detailed treatment to the
selection of geotechnical parameters and groundwater pressures for design and to the
interrelation between design and construction. In general, there will be cost savings in the
construction of some types of retaining wall by designing to the new GEOGUIDE.
4. Permanent retaining walls designed in their entirety in accordance with the

standards and provisions of the first edition or the second edition of GEOGUIDE 1 will be
acceptable to the Building Authority. Designs based on a mixture of the guidance given in the
two editions are not acceptable. Design submissions must clearly state which edition of the
GEOGUIDE has been used. It is strongly recommended that designs be based on the second
edition rather than on the first edition. In this regard it is relevant to note that after July 1995,
only designs based on the second edition will be acceptable for public works.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
First issued August 1994 (AD/SE, GGE)

This revision June 1995 (AD/SE, GGE)
Index under : GEOGUIDE 1 - Guide to Retaining Wall Design

Retaining Wall Design - GEOGUIDE 1
Practice Note for Authorized Persons and

Registered Structural Engineers
Methods for Testing Hong Kong Soils

(GEOSPEC 3 - Model Specification for Soil Testing)
Introduction
This Practice Note announces the adoption of a Hong Kong soil testing
standard – Geospec 3 to suit Hong Kong conditions. The standard is prepared to cater
for the need of the profession for a comprehensive Hong Kong soil testing standard. It
covers soil classification and compaction tests as listed in Appendix A (Expanded Phase I
soil tests – 32 nos.) and soil shear strength and compressibility tests as listed in Appendix
B (Phase II soil tests – 7 nos.). Geospec 3 – Model Specification for Soil Testing is
published by the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) of the Civil Engineering and
Development Department and can be purchased online at the website of the
Government Bookstore: http//bookstore.esdlife.com.
Background
2. In 1992, with an aim to produce a series of standards for the testing of soils in
Hong Kong, the GEO initiated a review of standards for the testing of soils, which is
based on amendment of British Standard BS 1377: 1990 – “Methods of Test for Soils for
Civil Engineering Purposes”. The first phase of the review covered soil classification
and compaction tests. The result of the review was the recommendation of a new
standard contained in GEO Report No. 36 – “Methods of Test for Soils in Hong Kong
for Civil Engineering Purposes (Phase I Tests)”. PNAP 167 was first issued in
September 1994 to promulgate the new standards contained in GEO Report No. 36.
The second phase of the review included the soil shear strength and compressibility tests
(Phase II soil tests), as well as Phase I tests and additional tests of the same nature
(Expanded Phase I soil tests). The Geospec 3 now available contains 32 standard
procedures for Expanded Phase I soil tests and 7 standard procedures for Phase II soil
tests.
Approval of plans or consent application
3. It is recommended that Authorized Persons (AP), Registered Structural

Engineers (RSE) and Registered Geotechnical Engineers (RGE) should adopt
Geospec 3 as the
/ standard…..
standard when specifying relevant soil testing for the investigation, design and
construction of building development projects. Whenever a test report involving soil
tests is submitted in support of a plan for approval or in compliance with a condition
of approval/consent under the Buildings Ordinance section 17(1) sub-section 6(b), the
Building Authority (BA) may refuse approval of plans or consent for commencement
of building works if the soil tests have not been carried out in accordance with
Geospec 3. The BA may also refuse approval of ground investigation plans in the
Scheduled Areas, site formation plans or any other plans with geotechnical content if
the soil tests are carried out at variance with the standards in Geospec 3. Likewise,
if the in-situ density tests and laboratory compaction tests on fill material have not
been carried out in accordance with Geospec 3, the Certificate of Completion for the
filling works may not be accepted (PNAP 55 refers).
Selection of laboratories
4. Where soil tests are to be carried out, only laboratories accredited under the
Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) for the relevant tests shall
be employed. The BA will only accept results issued on HOKLAS-endorsed test
certificates or reports. It is therefore important that the AP/RSE/RGE should ensure
that the laboratory appointed has been accredited by Hong Kong Accreditation Service
(HKAS) to carry out the tests ordered and is authorised to issue HOKLAS-endorsed
test certificates or reports for these tests. The HKAS publishes a Directory of
Accredited Laboratories (HOKLAS 009) every year listing all the laboratories
accredited under HOKLAS for various tests. Information on the most updated list of
laboratories and their accredited tests may be obtained from HKAS through the
Quality Services Division of the Innovation and Technology Commission at telephone
2829 4840 or the HKAS website http://www.info.gov.hk/itc/hkas. Guidance on
selection of laboratories is given in clause 2.3 of Geospec 3.
Credibility of soil testing data
5. The BA attaches great importance to the representativeness and accuracy of

soil testing data which are used to support the proposed investigation, design or
construction for building development projects. In this regard, the BA takes a
serious view of the credibility of such data and will give them due consideration in the
context of both the disapproval of plans and the administration of sanctions for
knowingly misrepresenting material facts in submissions to the BA. To assist APs,
RSEs and RGEs , the following practical guidelines are given:
/ care …..
2
- care should be taken in preparing the test schedule according
to the geology of the site and relevant information should be
provided for each test in accordance with Geospec 3,
including information on soil type;
- sampling, storage and transportation of samples and

preparation of test samples should be properly supervised to
prevent sample disturbance and to ensure sample security;
- tests should be carried out with due care and test results are
properly documented, and where appropriate, analysed and
vetted; and
- any HOKLAS-endorsed test reports should not be reproduced

except in full and any doubts on such reports should be
clarified with HKAS for submission to the BA.
Laboratory Accreditation to Geospec 3 Standards
6. For any soil tests carried out on or after 1 July 2004, the BA will only
accept HOKLAS-endorsed soil test certificates or reports from laboratories which
have been accredited by HKAS for the relevant tests in accordance with Geospec 3.
Phase I soil tests in GEO Report 36
7. For soil tests carried out before 1 July 2004, the BA will continue to accept
HOKLAS-endorsed certificates or reports for Phase I soil tests listed in Appendix C
conducted in accordance with GEO Report No. 36. The BA will also accept
HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates or reports for the relevant Phase I soil tests
conducted in accordance with Geospec 3 as equivalent.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/GEO/10
First Issue September 1994

Last revision May 2004 (AD/NB2, AD(G)/HKI)
This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (Paras. 1,3, 4 & 5 amended)
Index under: Soil testing
3
Appendix A
(PNAP 167)
(APP-64)
Testing Standard for Expanded Phase I Soil Tests in Geospec 3
Standard methods Specific tests

Geospec 3 – Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying at 45 ± 5°C
Test Method 5.1
Geospec 3 – Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying at 105 ± 5°C
Test Method 5.2
Geospec 3 – Comparative Test for the Determination of Moisture Content by
Test Method 5.3 Oven-drying
Geospec 3 – Determination of Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index
Test Method 6.1
Geospec 3 – Determination of Liquidity Index
Test Method 6.2
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Density by Gas Jar Method
Test Method 7.1
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Density by Small Pyknometer Method
Test Method 7.2
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Size Distribution by Wet Sieving
Test Method 8.1 (with Dispersant)
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Size Distribution by Wet Sieving
Test Method 8.2 (without Dispersant)
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Pipette Method
Test Method 8.3 (with Dispersant)
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Pipette Method
Test Method 8.4 (without Dispersant)
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Hydrometer
Test Method 8.5 Method (with Dispersant)
Geospec 3 – Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Hydrometer
Test Method 8.6 Method (without Dispersant)
Geospec 3 – Construction of a Continuous Particle Size Distribution Curve
Test Method 8.7 from the Results of Wet Sieving and Sedimentation Tests
Geospec 3 – Determination of Organic Matter Content
Test Method 9.1
Geospec 3 – Determination of the Mass Loss on Ignition
Test Method 9.2
Geospec 3 – Determination of Total Sulphate Content of Soils and Sulphate
Test Method 9.3 Content of Groundwater and of Aqueous Soil Extracts by
Gravimetric Method
Geospec 3 – Determination of Water-soluble Chloride Content
Test Method 9.4
Geospec 3 – Determination of the pH Value
Test Method 9.5
1
Testing Standard for Expanded Phase I Soil Tests in Geospec 3 (Cont’d)

Geospec 3 – Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of
Test Method 10.1 Soils Containing Particles Which are Not Susceptible to Crushing
(Using 1000 cc Mould and 2.5 kg Rammer)
Test Method 10.2 Soils Containing Particles Which are Susceptible to Crushing
(Using CBR Mould and 2.5 kg Rammer)
Geospec 3 – Determination of In-situ Bulk Density and In-situ Dry Density of
Test Method 11.1 Soils by Sand Replacement Method Suitable for Fine- and
Medium-grained Soils (With Small pouring Cylinder)
Test Method 11.2 Soils by Sand Replacement Method Suitable for Fine-, Medium-
and Coarse-grained Soils (With Large Pouring Cylinder)
Test Method 11.3 Soils by Nuclear Densometer Method Suitable for Fine- and
Medium-grained Soils
Geospec 3 – Determination of Relative Compaction of Fill Material
Test Method 11.4
Geospec 3 – Determination of the California Bearing Ratio (CBR)
Test Method 12.1
(Rev. 5/2004)
2
Appendix B
(PNAP 167)
(APP-64)
Testing Standard for Phase II Soil Tests in Geospec 3

Geospec 3 – The One-dimensional Consolidation Test
Test Method 14.1
Geospec 3 – The Isotropic Compression Test in a Triaxial Cell
Test Method 14.2
Geospec 3 – The Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression Test
Test Method 15.1 Without Pore Pressure Measurement
Geospec 3 – The Isotropically Consolidated Undrained Triaxial
Test Method 15.2 Compression Test With Pore Pressure Measurement
Geospec 3 – The Isotropically Consolidated Drained Triaxial Compression
Test Method 15.3 Test With Measurement of Volume Change
Geospec 3 – The Direct Shear Test (Small Shear Box Apparatus)
Test Method 16.1
Geospec 3 – The Direct Shear Test (Large Shear Box Apparatus)
Test Method 16.2
(5/2004)
Appendix C
(PNAP 167)
(APP-64)
Phase I Soil Tests in accordance with GEO Report No. 36
Equivalent Test
Test Method Test Description
Method in Geospec 3
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of moisture content by Geospec 3 –
Test 2.3.2A oven-drying at 105°C±5°C Test Method 5.2
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of moisture content by Geospec 3 –
Test 2.3.2B oven-drying at 45°C±5°C Test Method 5.1
GEO Report No. 36 Comparative test for the determination of Geospec 3 –
Test 2.3.2C moisture content by oven-drying Test Method 5.3
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of liquid limit by the cone
Test 2.4.3 penetrometer method Geospec 3 –
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of plastic limit, plasticity Test Method 6.1 & 6.2
Test 2.5.3 index and liquidity index
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of particle size distribution Geospec 3 –
Test 2.9.2A by wet sieving (with dispersant) Test Method 8.1
Test 2.9.2B by wet sieving (without dispersant) Test Method 8.2
Test 2.9.4A by the pipette method (with dispersant) Test Method 8.3
Test 2.9.4B by the pipette method (without dispersant) Test Method 8.4
Test 2.9.5A by the hydrometer method (with Test Method 8.5
dispersant)
Test 2.9.5B by the hydrometer method (without Test Method 8.6
dispersant)
GEO Report No. 36 Construction of a continuous particle size Geospec 3 –
Test 2.9.6 distribution curve from the results of wet Test Method 8.7
sieving and sedimentation tests
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the dry density/moisture Geospec 3 –
Test 4.3.3A content relationship of soils containing Test Method 10.1
particles which are not susceptible to
crushing (with 1000cc mould and 2.5kg
rammer)
Test 4.3.3B content relationship of soils containing Test Method 10.2
particles which are susceptible to crushing
(with 1000cc mould and 2.5kg rammer)
1
Phase I Soil Tests in accordance with GEO Report No. 36 (Cont’d)
Equivalent Test
Test Method Test Description
Method in Geospec 3
Test 4.3.4A content relationship of soils containing Test Method 10.3
particles which are not susceptible to
crushing (with CBR mould and 2.5kg
rammer)
Test 4.3.4B content relationship of soils containing Test Method 10.4
particles which are susceptible to crushing
(with CBR mould and 2.5kg rammer)
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the insitu bulk density and Geospec 3 –
Test 9.2.1 insitu dry density of soil by the sand Test Method 11.1
replacement method suitable for fine- and
medium-grained soils (with small pouring
cylinder)
GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the insitu bulk density and Geospec 3 –
Test 9.2.2 insitu dry density of soil by the sand Test Method 11.2
replacement method suitable for fine-,
medium- and coarse-grained soils (with
large pouring cylinder)
Notes : (1) The Guidelines for Laboratory General Requirements and Sample
Preparation given in Appendix A of GEO Report No. 36 shall be
adopted.
(2) Information on soil type and oven-drying temperature shall be provided to
the laboratory for all tests that involve the determination of moisture
content.
(5/2004)
2

Buildings Department and Registered Structural Engineers 169
Natural Lighting to Staircases

Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)R) 40 stipulates, inter alia, that a

staircase in any building intended for common use by more than two tenants shall be
provided with adequate natural lighting.
2. The adequacy of natural lighting for staircases depends on a number of

factors including the size, number and location of windows, type of glass and design
of the staircase. The following guidelines aim to assist in the design of staircases as
satisfying the natural lighting requirement under B(P)R 40 :
a. Clear glass should be used;
b. The staircase window(s) for each storey should have an

aggregate glass area of not less than one-tenth of the plan area
within the staircase enclosure;
c. For buildings not exceeding 12 storeys, staircase windows

should face into an uncovered space complying with the "open
air" requirement as defined under B(P)R 2(1);
d. For buildings exceeding 12 storeys, staircase windows should

face into an uncovered and unenclosed space with a base
width of not less than 2.3m and a length at right angles to the
base of not less than 4.5m (the full width of any adjoining
service lane can be included); and
e. Scissor staircases should be designed to ensure adequate and

even distribution of natural lighting to each flight. The
following arrangements would be acceptable but alternatives
would be considered:
i. windows in the end wall of a landing being

centrally positioned and having a minimum width
of 1.3m; and
ii. windows in the side wall of a landing or of any

flight having a minimum width of 650mm, not less
than two windows being provided for each storey
and the separating wall between flights being
reduced to ensure that the back flight has adequate
light.
/3. …..
-2-
3. It is accepted that adequate artificial lighting with a backup emergency

system is a viable alternative option for replacement of natural lighting. To allow
greater flexibility in design without compromising safety, the Building Authority is
prepared to waive the requirement for the provision of natural lighting under B(P)R 40
if he is satisfied with the following:
(i) The staircase is provided with permanent artificial lighting
having 30 lux minimum lighting level at floor level;
(ii) The artificial lighting is backed up by an automatically
activated emergency lighting system. Such emergency
lighting system complies with the requirements set out in the
Code of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations and
Equipment and would provide a horizontal illuminance at
floor level of not less than 2 lux in event of emergency; and
(iii) Proper management is in place to ensure that the artificial
lighting and backup emergency systems are well maintained
and in effective working order.
4. For the purpose of paragraph 3(iii), the BA would normally accept that a
building would have proper management if the maintenance of the artificial lighting
and backup emergency system is to be managed by a management company upon the
occupation of the building, and that the requirement for the regular maintenance of the
system is incorporated in the Deed of Mutual Covenant of the building.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/20 (II)

This revision March 2003 (AD/NB1) (General revision)
Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation 40

Natural lighting to staircases
Artificial lighting to staircase

Metal Refuse Chutes at Construction Sites
Temporary refuse chutes, assembled from old metal barrels, have been in
common use at building construction sites.
2. Such installations at the external parts of buildings under construction are not
satisfactory. The chutes can be a noise nuisance to residents in the neighbourhood. In
particular, they are not safe. They are subject to the effects of weather and the constant
impact of building debris. These conditions could affect the stability of the installations.
3. In the event of collapse, these metal chutes pose a hazard not only to the
workers on site, but also to any passers-by.
4. You are requested to adopt other safer means of lowering and removing
building debris at construction sites. Where refuse chutes are used, you should ensure that
they are properly assembled, secured and installed. You should consider using chutes made of
other materials of sufficient strength and installing them in internal areas of the site, so as to
reduce the noise level.
5. Authorized persons and registered structural engineers have an important role

in supervising building works and in ensuring construction site safety. Please ensure that
proper safety measures are in place in the sites under your control. Please also help to bring
home to contractors and developers the message about safety and environmental consideration.
6. A similar practice note has been issued to registered contractors.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/ACT/13
First issued August 1994 (AD/D)
Index under : Metal refuse chutes at construction sites


Energy Efficiency of Buildings

Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation
Introduction
Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation, which came into effect on 21 July

1995, imposes energy efficient requirements. It aims at reducing heat transfer through
building envelope thus saving the electricity consumption for air-conditioning by
requiring the external walls and roofs of a commercial or hotel building to be designed
and constructed to have a suitable Overall Thermal Transfer Value (OTTV). The
Regulation applies to building works in accordance with section 39 of the Buildings
Ordinance.
Review of OTTV Control
2. Recently, Buildings Department has completed a review of the OTTV control.

This practice note has accordingly been revised to incorporate the recommendations made
in the review. This revision will take effect on 17 July 2000 and is applicable to all new
building projects for which building plans are submitted for the first time for approval.
3. As a result of the review, the amendments made to the Code of Practice for
Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995 are :
(a) in the case of a building tower, the OTTV should not exceed 30 W/m2
(previously 35 W/m2); and
(b) in the case of a podium, the OTTV should not exceed 70 W/m2
(previously 80 W/m2).
4. The associated administrative arrangements have also been reviewed and

revised. Details of these revised arrangements are given below.
Procedure
5. It is possible that the design of the facade of a building may not have been
finalised when building plans are first submitted. Accordingly, the Building Authority
would accept that the first submission of building plans needs not be accompanied by the
information and calculations as required by Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation 5.
However, after the approval of building plans and prior to the application for consent to
commence building works, submission of detailed OTTV calculations and information on
the standard forms (Form OTTV 1 to 4) set out in the schedule to the OTTV Code is
required under Regulation 10 of the Building (Administration) Regulations.
6. At the time of building plan submission or upon application for occupation

permit as the case may be, the OTTVs of the external walls and roofs of the building
and the shading coefficient of glass should be indicated on the building plans or record
plans as relevant.
/7….
-2-
7. Upon application for Occupation Permit, the following OTTV documents

together with the record plans are required to be submitted :
(a) the finalised version of the OTTV report, including OTTV

calculations;
(b) test certificates or other published specifications for the building
materials used, such as glass used for fenestration and facade; and
(c) the OTTV Summary Sheet on a standard form in Appendix A.
Acceptance of Building Materials
8. If building materials other than those listed in the OTTV Code are used, their
OTTV or equivalent should be obtained from reliable sources. It would facilitate
processing of building plans if full background to the source of information and suitability
for local conditions is detailed in the submission.
Sunshading and Innovative Designs
9. Genuine sunshades used to assist in the reduction of the OTTV will not be
counted for plot ratio and site coverage calculations or be regarded as obstructions to
prescribed windows if they project 1.5m or less from external walls. Sunshades will not
normally be allowed to project over streets under section 31(1) of the Buildings
Ordinance, but exemptions may be considered in individual cases if special circumstances
so justify.
10. The Building Authority can accept designs other than those stipulated in the
Code of Practice for OTTV in Buildings provided that these designs are comparable or
better in terms of energy efficiency. Innovative designs which aim at reducing OTTV
would not be penalised in terms of plot ratio and site coverage if they could be
demonstrated to be effective.
11. Authorized persons are encouraged to consult a Registered Professional

Engineer in building services or mechanical discipline in assessing the design assumptions
adopted in the evaluation of energy efficiency in buildings, particularly for innovative
designs other than the method stipulated in the Code of Practice. A comprehensive
approach to energy conservation produces better results. The services of a Registered
Professional Engineer in these disciplines will contribute to this.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/22
This revision June 2000 (AD/SE) – paras. 1 to 7 and Appendix A amended
Index under : Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation

Code of Practice for OTTV in Buildings
Energy Efficiency, OTTV, Sunshading
Appendix A
PNAP 172
OTTV Summary Sheet APP-67
Address : BD Ref. No.
Building Type 1. Hotel

2. Office (including industrial/office)
3. Shops
4. Others*, please specify :
OTTV calculated by 1. Registered Professional Engineers
(Building Services/Mechanical)
2. Architect
3. Others, please specify :
Classification Podium Tower
Designated Use 1. Shops 4. Cinema 1. Office

2. Offices 5. Plant Rooms 2. Hotel Rooms
3. Restaurants 6. Others 3. Others
No. of Storeys (excluding ground floor)
Gross Floor Area m² m²
Usable Floor Area m² m²
Total External Wall Area (including m² window to wall ratio m² window to wall ratio
windows)
Total Window Area m² = : m² = :
Total Skylight Area m² m²
*Weighted Opaque Wall W/m² K W/m² K
Average Window W/m² K W/m² K
U-value Opaque Roof W/m² K W/m² K
(W/m² K) Skylight W/m² K W/m² K
Reflective, Area = m², SC = VLT = Reflective, Area = m², SC = VLT =
Glass Type Tinted, Area = m², SC= VLT = Tinted Area = m², SC= VLT =
Window Clear, Area = m², SC= VLT = Clear, Area = m², SC= VLT =
Double Glazing Yes No Yes No
External Shading Overhang Yes No Overhang Yes No
Sidefin Yes No Sidefin Yes No
Reflective, Area = m², SC = VLT = Reflective, Area = m², SC = VLT =
Glass Type Tinted, Area = m², SC= VLT = Tinted, Area = m², SC= VLT =
Skylight Clear, Area = m², SC= VLT = Clear, Area = m², SC= VLT =
Doubling Glazing Yes No Yes No
External Shading Yes No Yes No
**Weighted Average Wall
Absorpitivity Roof
**Weighted Average Wall kg/m² kg/m²
Density Roof kg/m² kg/m²
Wall W/m² W/m²
OTTV Roof W/m² W/m²
Overall average W/m² W/m²
Additional information/views on energy efficiency control :
SC = Shading Coefficient VLT = Visible Light Transmittance
*Other commercial buildings may include : department stores, places of public entertainment, places
of public assembly, restaurants etc.
**Weighted by area
Note :
1. Please tick in the box as appropriate
2. Window and skylight data should represent the major proportion of its use in the development.

Design and Construction of

Cantilevered Reinforced Concrete Structures
The structural stability of cantilevered reinforced concrete structures in

particular those of pure slab type relies on their proper design, construction and
maintenance. Furthermore, the fact that weathering may lead to the early degradation
of material strength should be borne in mind when carrying out the design and
construction of cantilevered members exposed to weathering[1]. Common examples of
this type of structural elements are projecting structures located on the exteriors of
buildings like canopies, balconies, bay windows, A/C hoods, A/C platforms,
flowerbeds etc. Their collapse would have serious consequences.
2. This Practice Note gives guidance to Authorized Persons and

Registered Structural Engineers on the safe design and construction of cantilevered
reinforced concrete structures. Appendix A gives guidelines on structural design,
construction, drainage provision and site supervision for achieving the necessary
safety standards. Appendix B and Appendix C provide recommended details for the
arrangement of reinforcements for cantilevered slabs and beams respectively.
Structural submissions conforming to these recommendations will be considered as
complying with the performance requirements set out in Building (Construction)
Regulation 4. The requirements on supervision, standards of workmanship and
submission of construction reports will be the Building Authority’s conditions for
approval of plans and consent to commence works.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority

Last revision May 2003
This revision November 2005 (AD/NB2) – Generally revised and Appendix C added
Index under : Cantilevered Structures

[1]
For the purpose of this practice note, cantilevered structures under permanent solid cover located at not
greater than one storey height and of at least the same plan area as the structure may be considered as not
exposed to weathering.
Appendix A
(PNAP 173)
(APP-68)
Guidance Notes on Design and Construction of
1. The structural design of cantilevered structures should satisfy the following

requirements:-
(a) For cantilever span more than 1000 mm, a beam-and-slab type of
arrangement should be used instead of pure slab cantilever where
practicable.
(b) The span to overall depth of cantilevered beams or slabs should not be
greater than 7 and the members should be of adequate size to satisfy both
the structural strength and durability requirements.
(c) Superimposed loads due to finishes, parapets and waterproofing
materials, and loads due to maintenance work and possible ponding
resulting from malfunctioning of the drainage system should be
accurately assessed and allowed for in the design.
(d) Cantilevered structures, especially those projecting over streets, should
be detailed in such a manner that they may be demolished or replaced
without affecting the safety and integrity of the main structure of the
building.
2. The construction of cantilevered structures should satisfy the following

requirements:-
(a) All cantilevered structures should be cast monolithically with and at the
same time as the directly supporting members. Construction joints
should not be located along the external edge of the supporting members.
In case this is unavoidable, any alternative construction method must be
submitted for prior approval. Such method should ensure that the
finished product would be able to attain a structural strength no less than
that provided by monolithic construction, and that it would not invite
ingress of water through the joint.
(b) Adequate bar spacers should be provided to maintain the position and
alignment of the steel reinforcement.
(c) During concreting, adequate compaction should be given to ensure good
quality concrete. Every endeavour should also be made to avoid steel
reinforcement from being displaced or depressed.
(d) All props to the soffit of formwork for cantilevered structures should be
maintained for at least 14 days after concreting.
3. The AP/RSE should provide the appropriate level of supervision and inspection
on the construction of cantilevered structures so as to ensure compliance with
1
the approved plans.
4. Means to prevent accumulation of water should be provided to cantilevered

structures exposed to weathering.[1] In this connection the following are to be
observed:-
(a) Effective waterproofing should be provided.
(b) A fall of not less than 1:75 should be laid. Wherever practicable,
adequate drainage should be provided to drain the water away from the
cantilevered structure. If for any reason, the water is designed to just
cascade down from the edge of the cantilevered structure, the AP/RSE
should first make sure that by so doing it will not create any nuisance to
anyone in accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 4(b). A
continuous drip or groove should always be provided at the bottom edge
of the cantilevered structure to keep the dripping water away.
(c) Where the cantilevered structure is not accessible for
cleaning/maintenance, the maximum distance between the drainage
outlets, if provided, should be not more than 5 m.
(d) Every endeavour should be made to avoid penetration or embedment of
pipes in cantilevered structures, especially slab elements. If
unavoidable, consideration must be given to any local reduction in
structural strength affected by the surface drainage system or embedded
service pipes and ducts. In this regard, you are reminded to make
reference to PNAP 230 on the requirements and guidelines of
embedment of water-borne pipes inside reinforced concrete beams and
slabs.
Cantilevered Beams
5. The structural design of cantilevered beams should satisfy the following

requirements:-
(a) The overall depth at support should be at least 300mm.
(b) Top and bottom reinforcement should be securely held in position by
stirrups with the top bars extended a minimum length of 45 times the bar
diameter of the steel bar into the supporting columns, walls or the
penultimate span of continuous beams or slabs if practical. Where
support by cross beam cannot be avoided, the supporting beam and the
adjacent internal slabs should be adequately designed and properly
detailed for any internal moment, torsion, shear and axial force so
induced.
(c) For cantilevered beams exposed to weathering [1] , the minimum cover to
all reinforcement should not be less than 40mm.
[1]
For the purpose of this practice note, cantilevered structures under permanent solid cover located at not
greater than one storey height and of at least the same plan area as the structure may be considered as not
exposed to weathering.
2
Cantilevered Slabs
6. The structural design of cantilevered slabs should satisfy the following

requirements:-
(a) The minimum overall thickness should be--
(i) 100 mm for span not greater than 500 mm;
(ii) 125 mm for span greater than 500 mm but not greater than 750
mm;
(iii) 150 mm for span greater than 750 mm.
(b) Any wall supporting the cantilever slab, except that for very small span
slabs like air-conditioner hoods, should be of sufficient thickness to
provide the necessary rigidity. This is in addition to any other design
consideration that is required for the wall itself.
(c) Cantilevered slabs should be reinforced with high yield steel bars in both
faces and in both directions. Main reinforcement bars should be at least
10mm diameter and spacing should not be greater than 150 mm, and the
steel area should not be less than 0.25% of the cross-sectional area of the
structural concrete.
(d) The main reinforcement of cantilevered slabs should have a minimum
anchorage length of 45 times the bar diameter of the steel bar and should
be rigidly fixed to the reinforcement of the supporting members. For
cantilevered slabs with drop at the supporting end, top main
reinforcement bars of not greater than 16 mm in diameter should be used
in order that an effective and proper anchorage into the supporting beams
and internal slab can be developed. Reinforcement details should be
drawn in a sufficiently large scale to indicate clearly the connections.
(e) Consideration and specific details should be provided for--
(i) cantilevered slabs continuing around corners of buildings due to
increase in slab area and a change in direction of the main bars;
(ii) the side edge of cantilevered slabs where there is an additional
load from return parapets running parallel to the cantilever span
direction.
7. The requirements set out in paragraph 6 above do not apply to in-fill slabs
enclosed by edge beams, or slabs supported in such a way that they do not
behave similar to cantilevered slabs.
8. Cantilevered slabs exposed to weathering[1] should satisfy the following

additional requirements:-
(a) The maximum crack width at the tension face should be limited to 0.1
mm when carrying out design check under the serviceability limit state
or the stress of deformed high yield steel reinforcement used should not
exceed 100 N/mm2 when checking the flexural tension under the
3
working load condition. The minimum cover to all reinforcement at the
exposed surface side of the slab should not be less than 40mm.
(b) In addition, for cantilevered slabs with a span exceeding 750 mm, the
AP/RSE, in conjunction with the registered general building contractor
where appropriate, is required to submit a construction report upon
completion of the works. A Form BA 14 confirming that the works
have been carried out in accordance with the approved plans and are
structurally safe should also be submitted.
9. The construction report required under paragraph 8(b) should include the
following: -
(a) an as-built plan showing --
(i) the location and dimensions of the members of the
cantilevered slab;
(ii) the direction and gradient of the fall, where applicable;
(iii) the location of the drainage outlets, where applicable;
(iv) the thickness of screeding and finishes;
(v) the location and details of any construction joints;
(vi) the grade of concrete and steel reinforcement;
(vii) the diameter and spacing of steel reinforcement in the
cantilevered slab;
(viii) the date on which the concrete was cast; and
(ix) the concrete cover of the steel reinforcement at critical
positions, as measured by covermeter.
(b) record photographs of the cantilevered slab and its supporting members
showing --
(i) the condition and arrangement of the in-position steel
reinforcement prior to concreting; and
(ii) the condition after concreting but before laying of the
finishes and waterproofing materials.
(Rev. 11/2005)
4
Appendix B
(PNAP 173)
(APP-68)
(Rev. 11/2005)
Appendix C
(PNAP 173)
(APP-68)
-1-
Appendix C
(PNAP 173)
(APP-68)
(11/2005)
-2-

Conservation of Historic Buildings
When commissioned for demolition, redevelopment, alteration and

addition and change of use proposals, you may encounter situations involving historic
buildings, artefacts and relics. This practice note aims to advise you on the legislative
requirements, help you understand your duty and seek your cooperation in the
conservation of historic buildings.
Building or Site Declared as Monument or Proposed Monument
2. Monuments and Proposed Monuments are declared under the Antiquities

and Monuments Ordinance, Cap.53 by the Secretary for Development (SDEV) by notice
in the Gazette. Section 6 of the Ordinance prohibits any work being carried out on such
site without a permit issued by SDEV.
3. Accordingly, unless you have already obtained a permit under section 6 of

Cap.53 and can produce a copy of such to the Buildings Department, plans for building
works affecting a building or a site which has been declared a Monument or a Proposed
Monument may be disapproved under section 16(1)(d) of the Buildings Ordinance (BO).
4. The updated list of declared Monuments and Proposed Monuments can be

found on the website (http://www.amo.gov.hk/) of the Antiquities and Monuments Office
(AMO) of the Leisure and Cultural Services Department.
Building Listed as a Graded Building
5. The Antiquities Advisory Board will grade historic buildings from time to
time on their historical and architectural merit to facilitate their preservation. These
buildings are accorded Graded Buildings (Grade I, II or III) by the Board. The updated
list of Graded Buildings can also be found on the website of the AMO
(http://www.amo.gov.hk/en/built3.php).
6. While Graded Buildings do not enjoy statutory protection, the AMO

would be notified of and invited to comment on building proposals or demolition
applications affecting such buildings. The AMO may request you, as authorized person
for the building works, to submit both cartographic and photographic records of the
building and to salvage useful building materials before demolition. Please assist the
AMO in this respect.
Conservation of Historic Buildings and their Materials
7. The AMO is interested in obtaining historic building materials and

construction information which could be used for the repair and restoration of other
historic buildings. Property Services Branch of the Architectural Services Department
also collects and stores such materials for their restoration works.
/8. ....
- 2 -
8. To assist the AMO in such conservation efforts, all building plan

submissions under the BO and notices for material change in the use of buildings under
section 25 of the BO affecting buildings built before 1960 will also be referred to the
AMO for their information.
9. When you are commissioned for a project involving building works in

buildings of historical interest, you are invited to make early contact with the AMO to
identify the heritage and historical values of the buildings and artefacts. Your
co-operation would be much appreciated.
Submissions and Enquiries
10. In support of the Government’s heritage conservation work and to

facilitate private sector’s participation in heritage conservation, a dedicated Heritage Unit
has been set up in the Buildings Department to process all building and structural plan
submissions, involving alteration and addition works in and adaptive re-use of historic
buildings, for approval under the BO. Submissions to be handled by the Heritage Unit
include development projects involving declared Monuments or Proposed Monuments,
Graded Buildings, historic buildings selected in the Revitalising Historic Buildings
through Partnership Scheme launched by the Development Bureau, as well as
redevelopment and revitalisation projects involving conservation and adaptive reuse of
historic buildings. Enquiries on issues relating to heritage conservation and compliance
with the requirements of the building regulations could also be referred to the Heritage
Unit for advice through the pre-submission enquiry system as provided for in the PNAP
272.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/17 (XI)

This revision May 2009 (AD/NB1) (General revision)
Index under : Antiquities and Monuments Ordinance

Graded Buildings
Historic Building Materials
Monuments
Proposed Monuments
Conservation

Use of Plastic Sheet

to cover scaffolding outside buildings
It is obligatory to provide screens, fans, catch platforms or similar protective

measures to prevent objects from falling outside the building boundary and to alleviate dust
pollution under the law, viz :
(a) Regulation 49(1) of the Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations,

Cap 59;
(b) Regulation 3(2)(a) of the Building (Demolition Works)

Regulations, Cap 123; and
(c) Section 4B(2) of the Summary Offences Ordinance, Cap 228.
2. Contractors often cover entirely the scaffolding erected around the walls of a
vacant building under demolition or construction with polyvinyl (PVC) sheets. This practice is
sometimes extended to occupied or partly occupied buildings under repair or renovation. The
Director of Fire Services has expressed concern that the use of PVC sheets in these
circumstances aggravates the spread of fire.
3. The Commissioner for Labour has advised that if not properly fixed, the use of
sheeting can affect the stability of bamboo scaffolding during strong winds. Furthermore,
there have been instances when PVC sheeting has obstructed the natural ventilation and
lighting of occupied buildings under renovation.
4. You are advised therefore to take the following precautionary measures when
plastic sheeting is used to cover scaffolding erected around the walls of buildings :
(a) flame-retardant sheeting should be used;
(b) scaffolding should be reinforced to withstand strong winds; and
(c) obstruction to natural ventilation and lighting of occupied

buildings under renovation by sheeting should be avoided as far
as practicable.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref : L/M 18-92 BD GR/ACT/11
Index under : Plastic Sheet

Scaffolding

Underground Cavern Development
In 1988, Government commissioned a study on a number of potential uses of

underground space (SPUN) : container port back-up facilities in the form of a container freight
station and tractor and trailer park, oil and gas storage, sewage treatment works, refuse
transfer station, warehousing, commercial, government, institution and community space. The
study confirmed that the use of underground caverns is a viable alternative to construction
above ground and could confer significant environmental benefit.
2. With the experience from the study and from local construction of deep
basements, tunnels and caverns, we have developed some initial guidance on cavern
construction :
(a) Geoguide 4, "Guide to Cavern Engineering", published in

March 1992, offers a recommended standard of good practice
for the civil engineering aspects of rock cavern applications in
Hong Kong.
(b) Chapter 11 of the Hong Kong Planning Standards and

Guidelines provides planning standards and guidelines for
underground rock cavern development.
(c) "Guide to Fire Safety Design for Caverns 1994", published in

late 1994, gives design guidelines on fire safety in underground
caverns.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/CC/172
First issued April 1995 (AD/SE, GGE)
Index under : Underground caverns

Underground construction
Control of Blasting
Blasting in private building works is subject to control under the Buildings

Ordinance (Cap 123) and Dangerous Goods Ordinance (Cap 295).
Buildings Ordinance
2. Authorized persons/registered structural engineers/registered geotechnical

engineers (APs/RSEs/RGEs) responsible for any building works or street works
involving blasting should ensure that any blasting carried out will not adversely affect
services, slopes, retaining walls, buildings and structures through ground vibrations or
other effects. In the design and execution of blasting works, the APs/RSEs/RGEs should
also ensure that adequate and necessary preventive, protective and precautionary
measures are provided to prevent the works from causing injury to workers and the
public, significant disruption to traffic, undue vibration and movement to existing
structures and services, or undue nuisance to the public.
3. The geotechnical assessment submitted at the general building plan stage

should identify if there is a need to carry out blasting for rock excavation and discuss its
feasibility. If blasting is to be carried out as part of the site formation, excavation or
foundation works, a blasting assessment prepared by a competent person and signed by
the responsible RGE and/or RSE as appropriate should be submitted together with the
relevant site formation, excavation and lateral support, or foundation plans. Such
competent person should have at least 4 years of relevant experience in design and
supervision of blasting works. The required contents of a blasting assessment are
specified in Appendix A and the following should be indicated on the plans :
(a) proposed areas of blasting;
(b) geology, ground and groundwater conditions;
(c) locations of sensitive receivers [see item (a) of Appendix A];
(d) details of control criteria;
(e) instrumentation and monitoring details;
(f) specific precautionary measures such as road closure, evacuation

plan, restricted hours of blasting, etc;
(g) requirements for submission of regular reports and other related

documents; and
(h) a note stating that the plan should be read in conjunction with the
blasting assessment.
/If …..
- 2 -
If the need for blasting is identified after the general building plan stage, the same
requirements as aforesaid for the preparation of a blasting assessment and its submission,
together with any relevant revised plans, are applicable.
4. The curricula vitae of the competent person who prepared the blasting
assessment should be included in the submission. Generally, supervision by such
competent person will be required to verify the assumptions in the blasting assessment
during construction relating to blasting.
Supervision Requirements for Blasting Works
5. The paragraphs below set out the supervision requirements that may be
imposed under section 17 of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) as conditions for qualified
supervision of blasting works. This is in addition to the site supervision required under
the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans 2005 and relevant provisions of the
BO.
6. For the supervision of the blasting works, a competent supervisor

independent of the registered contractor should be appointed to assist the technically
competent person grade T5 (TCP T5) in the RGE/RSE’s stream in the supervision of the
blasting works. This competent supervisor should have at least 4 years of relevant
experience in design and supervision of blasting works. Where necessary, the Building
Authority (BA) may impose a higher qualification/experience requirement taking into
account the scale and complexity of the proposed blasting works and the risk involved.
The competent person described in para. 3 above who meets the above necessary
qualification/experience requirement can also be the competent supervisor for assisting
the TCP 5 in the supervision of the blasting works. As an alternative to having a
competent supervisor, if a person holds the qualification and experience of both the TCP
T5 and the competent supervisor , he can take up the overall supervision of blasting
works by himself. The curricula vitae of the proposed supervision personnel should be
submitted to the BA for acceptance prior to commencement of the blasting works.
7. The RGE/RSE should include particular items related to the blasting works in
the check lists of Specific Tasks for the TCPs, as required in the Code of Practice for Site
Supervision 2005. Typical items related to blasting works are listed in Appendix B.
Demolition Works
8. Blasting normally would not be adopted in the demolition of private building

works due to its wide implications on the surroundings which, in general, are of high
density developments. In the exceptional circumstances where explosives are to be used
in demolition works, a blasting assessment, prepared by a competent person who should
have at least 4 years of relevant experience in the design and supervision of blasting
works and signed by the responsible RSE and RGE as appropriate, should be submitted
with the relevant demolition plans. The requirements given in the Code of Practice for
/Demolition …..
- 3 -
Demolition of Buildings issued by the Buildings Department should be followed. In the

consideration for the protection of properties and the inhabitants that may be affected by
the proposed blasting, and in conducting the blasting assessment to examine the effects on
structures to be demolished and its surroundings as mentioned in the Code, the relevant
items specified in Appendix A should be covered.
Dangerous Goods Ordinance
9. Dangerous Goods (General) Regulation 46 stipulates that no person shall

carry out any blasting without the permission of the Authority, i.e. the Commissioner of
Mines who is the Director of Civil Engineering and Development. Where blasting is
required, the registered contractor has to apply for a blasting permit from the
Commissioner of Mines, who may impose conditions requiring the registered contractor
to take effective preventive, protective and precautionary measures against the adverse
effects of blasting, e.g. flyrock, vibrations and air-overpressure, to adopt suitable blasting
designs and techniques, to comply with the control criteria, and to undertake the
monitoring shown in the approved plans.
Railway Structures and Operations
10. Guidelines for assessing the effects of blasting on the structures and
operations of the Mass Transit Railway Corporation Limited and the Kowloon-Canton
Railway Corporation are given in Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered
Structural Engineers 77 and 279 respectively. The "General Specification for Civil
Engineering Works (Hong Kong Government)" also specifies technical standards on
blasting. This document is available for purchase from either the Publications Sales
Section of the Information Services Department or the online Government Bookstore at
http://bookstore.esdlife.com.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/29 II
First issue June 1995 (AD/LM and GGE/I)

This revision April 2007 (AD/Support and DH(I)GEO/CEDD) –
(General revision to include RGE and site supervision
requirement and Appendix B added)
Index under : Blasting

Control of Blasting
Appendix A
(PNAP 178)
(APP-72)
Contents of a Blasting Assessment
(a) Site plans clearly indicating the proposed areas of blasting and locations of all sensitive
receivers including streets, structures, foundations, railways, public utilities, water
mains, drains, sewers, gas mains and other services, geotechnical features such as
slopes, retaining walls, boulders, tunnels, caverns, etc. that may be damaged or
destabilized by the proposed blasting works.
(b) A report containing the results of a study, including on the topography, geology,
ground, groundwater and surface water conditions, and the physical site constraints,
sensitive receivers and site history.
(c) A report containing examination of the conditions of the sensitive receivers on and
adjacent to the site.
(d) A report containing an assessment of the effects of blasting works to demonstrate that
the proposed blasting would not cause any injury to persons or damage to property and
sensitive receivers.
(e) Proposals of preventive measures to be carried out on sensitive receivers, if considered

necessary.
(f) A list of the action limits to be specified for the implementation of blasting works,
including blasting vibration limits and air-overpressure limits, etc. to ensure that the
blasting works to be carried out would not cause any injury to persons, damage to
sensitive receivers, significant disruption to traffic or undue nuisance to the public.
The limits proposed should take into account the existing conditions of all sensitive
receivers. The source of the limits and documentary evidence of consultation and
agreement, where appropriate, with the key stakeholders (e.g. owners or maintenance
agents) of the sensitive receivers should be provided.
(g) An outline of the blast design to demonstrate that the blasting works could be safely
carried out and the proposed limits and any other constraints could be satisfied.
(h) A document setting out the safety management system to be employed, and the
working procedures and sequences, where appropriate, for all blasting works.
(i) Particulars of site inspections, surveys and monitoring to be carried out to check and
measure the effects of blasting, including plans showing the locations of the monitoring
stations, the performance criteria and the action limits.
(j) Proposals of protective and precautionary measures to be taken, including any

evacuation and closure of public areas (such as roads and other facilities) and warnings
needed to protect sensitive receivers and safety of the public and workers.
-1-
(k) Proposals of the arrangement for delivery of explosives to the site to demonstrate the
practicability of completing the blasting works and the rock excavation needed within
the construction period.
(l) If an on-site explosive store is considered necessary, a report containing an assessment

of its feasibility and proposed arrangement.
(Rev. 4/2007)
-2-
Appendix B
(PNAP 178)
(APP-72)
Typical Items Related to Blasting Works for
the Check List of Specific Tasks for the RSE/RGE’s TCPs
Specific Tasks for TCP T5 (with the support of the competent supervisor)
(a) Carry out checking of the registered contractor’s blasting method statement.
(b) Check (including both document and site checks) and satisfy, for each blast, that the
registered contractor’s blast design and precautionary measures comply with the plans
approved by the Building Authority and the blasting permit requirements.
(c) Verify on site that the ground conditions and geology are as stated or assumed in the
blasting assessment, and that the provisions in the method statement and the preventive,
protective and precautionary measures are adequate for the conditions as encountered
on site.
(d) Ensure that the preventive measures, if required, have been properly carried out prior
to commencement of the blasting works.
(e) Ensure that protective and precautionary measures have been properly executed prior to
each blast.
(f) Regularly monitor the conditions of all sensitive receivers and carry out reviews before
and after each blast.
(g) Prepare regular reports with records of the condition of the site, sensitive receivers,
adjacent grounds, structures and services etc. after each phase of blasting operation and
completion of related works.
Specific Tasks for TCP T3
(a) Inspect the construction of preventive works, if required, for the sensitive receivers.
(b) Inspect the provision and installation of all necessary protective and precautionary
measures prior to each blast, in accordance with the blast design.
(c) Monitor the site operations and working methods to ensure that they meet the safety
requirements set out in the blasting permit.
(d) Inspect the conditions of all sensitive receivers before and after each blast.
(e) Carry out and ensure the quality of monitoring for the sensitive receivers before and
during blasting.
(4/2007)

Service Lanes
Service lanes, formally known as scavenging lanes, are an essential component of

the urban fabric. Historically, they provided the means of removing waste from dwellings but in
effect also acted as essential fire-breaks. Today, these lanes are commonly incorporated into
building designs to provide sources of lighting and ventilation and routes for access and escape.
Additionally, established lanes often provide a convenient neighbourhood pattern of footpaths.
2. This practice note advises on general issues concerning private service lanes.
Rights-of-way
3. Before a private or partly private service lane can be used for a particular scheme
to meet Buildings Ordinance requirements (such as lighting and ventilation, means of escape and
means of access), the authorized person must demonstrate that either permanent or pertinent
rights-of-way over the lane exist. The integrity of the lane must be ensured for all users of the
proposed building.
Means of Escape and Access
4. Where exit routes are required, they would not be acceptable if they discharge
into a private or partly private service lane unless it can be demonstrated that the users of the
proposed building would have unfettered rights-of-way over the lane.
5. A service lane, public or private, would not be acceptable as a means of escape

and access if it is obstructed, incapable of improvement or obviously in a decaying state.
Site Coverage and Plot Ratio
6. Where an abutting private lane is in the ownership of the developer but is not
specifically required for any purpose under the Buildings Ordinance for the proposed scheme,
the Building Authority will give favourable consideration to including the relevant area of such
lane in site coverage and plot ratio calculations. Where the legal status of a lane has been clearly
established by the existence of rights-of-way, it would be necessary to apply formally for a
modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(2)(a).
7. When an area designated as a private lane has been included in site coverage and
plot ratio calculations, it must on completion of the building works be free of any structures. The
only exception is where such structures have been approved and taken into account in the
calculations.
8. It is often in the interest of a developer as well as good urban planning to

amalgamate sites. This can result in the extinguishment and diversion of existing lanes.
Generally speaking, if a diverted lane is required only for a useful neighbourhood pattern and
not specifically for a proposed development, then the Building Authority will give favourable
consideration to including the relevant area of such lane in site coverage and plot ratio
calculations.
/9. Save
-2-
Open Space
9. Save as provided for in Building (Planning) Regulation 28(3), the area of service
lanes should be excluded from the open space requirements under Building (Planning)
Regulation 25. This applies whether or not the area of lane is included in the site coverage and
plot ratio calculations.
Improvement and Surrender
10. Every opportunity should be taken to improve a substandard service lane. The
long-term objective is that upon full development of abutting sites, a lane would be direct and
have an unobstructed width of not less than 3 m.
11. Except in the circumstances prescribed, Building (Planning) Regulation 28

requires that every domestic building shall be provided with a suitable service lane at the rear or
to its side.
12. Where improvement to a lane is desirable but the lane is not specifically required
under the Buildings Ordinance for a proposed scheme, the Building Authority will consider
granting appropriate plot ratio and site coverage concessions in return for the free surrender of
such lane to Government.
13. When land is surrendered for lane widening, the owner must submit a plan and a
written undertaking to surrender to Government free of all cost the area shown coloured on the
plan and to pay for paving, channelling, sewering, drainage and (where appropriate) lighting.
The area for surrender must be free of structures.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BREG/P/17

This revision November 1995 (AD/D)
Index under : B(P)R 23(2)(a)

B(P)R 28
Means of Escape (Lanes)
Plot Ratio
Service Lanes
Site Coverage

Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Reinforced Concrete Structures
Reinforced concrete structures can suffer from alkali-aggregate reaction (AAR).
2. AAR is a chemical process in which alkalis, mainly from the cement, combine
with certain types of minerals in the aggregate, when moisture is present. This reaction
produces a gel that can absorb water and expand to cause cracking and disruption of the
concrete. The cracks accelerate the corrosion of the reinforcement in the concrete. Moreover,
reduction in the compressive strength of the concrete reduces the strength of the concrete
members.
3. The following factors are essential for AAR to occur in concrete:
(a) There must be reactive minerals present in the aggregate.
(b) There must be sufficient alkali in the concrete to react with the
aggregates.
(c) There must be sufficient moisture available to enable the chemical

reaction.
4. A range of minerals, including opal, tridymite, cristobalite, volcanic glasses,

cryptocrystalline to microcrystalline quartz and poorly-crystalline quartz, have been reported
by overseas researchers as capable of causing AAR. The occurrence of AAR depends on both
the type and percentage by mass of reactive minerals present.
5. The alkalis in the concrete come mainly from the cement. An effective means
of reducing the risk of AAR includes proper control on the amount of cement used in the
concrete mix, use of a low alkali cement, and appropriate use of cement replacement such as
pulverised fuel ash (PFA).
6. In 1992, a programme of studies on AAR was started by the Public Works

Laboratories of the Hong Kong Government. These included tests on concrete cores obtained
from suspected structures, as well as investigations on the AAR potential of aggregates from a
number of local quarries. The investigations are still on-going and the long-term tests may take
a few years to complete. However, in view of the potential risks in the event of AAR
occurring in structures and the long duration required for the experimental work, specification
items (Appendix A) have been introduced on all future Works Branch contracts.
/cont'd....
- 2 -
7. To avoid the risk of AAR occurring, authorized persons / registered structural

engineers should consider incorporating the specification clauses for the control of AAR in
concrete into contracts for private development projects. In such cases, plans for approval
should clearly indicate that the reactive alkali of concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium
oxide per cubic metre of concrete should not exceed 3.0 kg when determined in accordance
with the specification items given in Appendix A.
8. The authorized person or registered structural engineer should ensure that the
concrete mix complies with the limit on reactive alkali by requiring the specification clauses to
be complied with, unless he is in the opinion that the concrete element will not be subject to
ingress of moisture throughout its design life.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
BD GR/CC/132
First issued April 1995 (AD/SE)
Index under : Concrete

Alkali-Aggregate Reaction
Aggregate
PNAP 180
Appendix A
APP-74
Model Specification Clauses for
for the Control of Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete
Control Measures
1. Measures to control the occurrence of alkali-aggregate reaction (AAR) in

concrete shall be submitted to the authorized persons / registered structural engineers
(AP/RSE) for approval. In the absence of alternative proposals, such control shall be achieved
by limiting the reactive alkali content of the concrete as described in clauses 2 to 4 below
unless in the opinion of the AP/RSE the concrete element will not be subjected to moisture
ingress throughout its design life.
Limit on Reactive Alkali
2. The reactive alkali of concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide per
cubic metre of concrete shall not exceed 3.0 kg.
Equivalent Sodium Oxide (Na2O) Content
3. The equivalent sodium oxide (Na 2 O) content of the concrete shall be

determined in accordance with the following steps:
(1) The equivalent Na2O shall be calculated by the expression
Equivalent Na2O = A + B + C
where A is the sum of the acid-soluble alkalis (expressed as

equivalent Na2O) of cement, admixtures and water;
B is equal to 1/6 the total alkalis of pulverised fuel ash

(PFA) (expressed as equivalent Na2O); and
C is equal to 0.76 times the chloride ion (Cl - ) of the

aggregate.
(2) The acid-soluble alkali content of the cement shall be determined in

accordance with BS 4550:Part 2:1970 (excluding amendment AMD
7285, July 1992) and shall be taken as the average of the latest 25 daily
determinations of equivalent sodium oxide plus twice the standard
deviation of the results.
(3) The acid-soluble alkali content of admixtures shall be determined in

accordance with BS 1881:Part 124:1988.
/cont'd....
- 2 -
(4) The acid-soluble alkali content of water shall be determined in

accordance with American Public Health Association (APHA) (17ed.
1989) Sections 3500-K and 3500-Na.
(5) The total alkali content of the PFA shall be determined in accordance
with BS 4550:Part 2:1970 (excluding amendment AMD 7285, July
1992) and shall be taken as the average of 25 weekly determinations
plus twice the standard deviation of the results.
(6) The equivalent sodium oxide content of the coarse and fine aggregates
shall be calculated from the quantity of chloride ion present which shall
be measured in accordance with BS 812:Part 4:1976.
Test Certificates and Calculations
4. The following particulars of the concrete mix should be submitted by the

concrete supplier to the AP/RSE:
(1) HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates not older than six months giving the
results of tests required in clauses 3 (2) to (6);
(2) Calculation of the reactive alkali of the proposed mix; and
(3) New HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates giving the results of tests

required in clauses 3 (2) to (6) to be submitted at quarterly intervals
together with any necessary further calculations to demonstrate that the
mix continues to comply with the limit on reactive alkali.
Ref: PNAP 180


Building (Planning) Regulations 41A, 41B and 41C

Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue in Buildings
Building (Planning)(Amendment) Regulation 1995 amends the requirements on

means of access for firefighting and rescue in buildings.
Revised Requirements
2. Regulation 41B is revised to ensure that fireman's lifts shall be so designed and
located that, in the event of a fire, firemen can have safe and unobstructed access to lifts and to
the floors served by the lifts.
3. Regulation 41C is also revised to allow firemen to make better use of all
facilities in a Firefighting and Rescue Stairway (FRS) in case of fire. In future, only fireman's
lifts are to be installed in a FRS and the access stairway in a FRS shall serve all floors of a
building.
Application
4. The Amendment Regulation applies to building works in accordance with

Buildings Ordinance section 39. By virtue of section 39(2), the Regulation does not apply to
building works which are being carried out or have been consented to commence on or before
22 May 1995.
Code of Practice
5. The Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue has been
revised in the light of the Amendment Regulation. The revised Code is available for sale at the
Government Publications Sales Centre.
(Helen C P Lai YU)

Building Authority
First issued : May 1995 (AD/LM)
Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation 41A, 41B & 41C

Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue in Buildings

Keeping Buried Services out of Slopes
This gives guidelines on keeping buried services out of slopes and on dealing
with cases where it is not possible to do so. These guidelines are not exhaustive and
professional judgement must be exercised in all cases.
Importance of keeping Buried Services out of Slopes
2. Persistent leakage of water from buried services not only causes nuisance,
but can also be a serious risk to the stability of slopes and retaining walls. Water-carrying
services including stormwater drains, sewers, water mains, catchwater channels and water
tunnels are prone to leak. Other conduits such as telephone ducts, electric cable ducts or
disused pipes can also transmit a significant amount of water into the ground : their
potential effect on the stability of a slope or retaining wall should therefore not be
disregarded.
3. As a long-term preventive measure, authorized persons/registered structural

engineers (APs/RSEs) should keep buried services out of slopes in their designs as
practicable. Otherwise, adequate provision should be made to cater for the case where it is
impractical to do so.
Routing of Buried Services away from Slopes
4. It is a poor engineering practice to route buried services close to the crest of

a slope. As a general rule, buried services should not be placed in a slope nearer to the
crest than a distance equal to its vertical height. Reference should be made to Section 9.7,
Geotechnical Manual for Slopes in this regard.
Resiting of Existing Buried Services in Slopes
5. Applying the same rule, consideration should be given to re-routing all

existing buried services in existing slopes. Opportunities to re-route existing services may
arise when existing slopes within or adjacent to a lot are being upgraded or when existing
services are being relaid or repaired.
Siting of Buried Services in the Crest Area
6. In cases where the siting of buried services outside the crest area is
impractical, the slope should be designed to the factors of safety as given in Chapter 5 of
Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, taking into account the effects of possible water leakage.
Alternatively, other measures as detailed below should be considered in the design to
minimize the effects of possible water leakage :
/(a) laying ....

- 2 -
(a) laying the services on or above the ground surface -- Additional

provisions as a result of their exposure should be made to ensure
aesthetic acceptability as well as suitable protection against
corrosion or damage.
(b) housing the services within a ducting system, sealed trench or

sleeve drained to a suitable discharge point at a surface water
drainage system or natural stream -- The discharge from the
ducting system should be monitored regularly. Measures such as
inspection chambers should be provided to allow access for
monitoring.
(c) for water mains which have to be routed within the crest area,
installing stop valves at each side of the slope -- This will enable
any leakage to be easily controlled when spotted.
7. When the laying of services inside the crest area of a fill slope is
unavoidable, the design should allow for differential settlement of the buried services and
their ancillary facilities, especially after any leakage.
8. For those sewers and stormwater drains in fill slopes where differential
settlement may be large, any breakage of the pipe itself or widening of pipe-joints will
cause leakage. Rigid pipelines should, therefore, be avoided and flexible jointings with
short pipe pieces should be provided to enhance the degree of flexibility along the pipeline.
Non-brittle pipe materials should be considered to avoid shearing of the pipe if settlement
occurs.
Accurate as-built Record of Buried Services
9. To facilitate future maintenance and inspection of all newly constructed

buried services, APs/RSEs should compile an accurate as-built record of the buried
services. This should include updating of those building plans, drainage plans, site
formation plans and water services plans submitted to government departments. Such
information should be incorporated in the slope and retaining wall record plans referred to
in PNAP 168. Copies should be distributed to the developers as well as the property
owners or building managers who would take over the future maintenance of the buried
services.
( Helen C P Lai YU )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GR/CC/228 (II)
First issued June 1995 (AD/S)
Index under : Buried Services - keeping out of slopes


Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete 1987
Although the working stress method is recommended in the Code of

Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete 1987, registered structural engineers may use
the limit state method recommended in the following standards, as appropriate to the type
of concrete structure, as an alternative to the working stress method. In such cases, the
requirements specified in paragraphs 3 to 10 below should apply.
BS 8110: Part 1: 1985 including: Amendment (AMD 5917, May 1989)

Amendment (AMD 6276, December 1989)
Amendment (AMD 7583, March 1993)
Amendment (AMD 7973, September 1993)
BS 5400: Part 4: 1990
BS 8007: 1987
2. It is not recommended to use BS 8110: Part 1: 1997 as this British

Standard is considered at present not entirely appropriate for the design of concrete
structures in Hong Kong in view of that some of the changes introduced therein are not
compatible with the Hong Kong Construction Standard CS1: 1990 and local practices in
the quality control of steel reinforcement.
General Considerations
3. The recommendations given in the British Standards should be adopted
only without prejudice to the requirements of the Building (Construction) Regulations and
recommendations of any other Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered
Structural Engineers.
4. For the design of concrete bridges, some provisions of BS5400 are not
relevant to Hong Kong conditions and should be substituted by the recommendations
given in the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways prepared by the
Highways Department.
Design
5. The characteristic dead load, imposed load and wind load should be the
dead load, imposed load and wind load calculated in accordance with the provisions of
the Building (Construction) Regulations.
/6. …..
-2-
6. The characteristic strength of concrete should be the specified grade

strength given in the Building (Construction) Regulations. Design should be based on the
28 day characteristic strength without adjustment in respect of the age of the concrete.
Where it is proposed to use concrete of specified grade strength greater than 45MPa, a
quality assurance proposal should be submitted together with preliminary test results to
confirm that reliable and consistent concrete can be produced.
7. The short-term modulus of elasticity, creep, shrinkage and other

properties of concrete should follow the specifications in the Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Concrete 1987, instead of the British Standards.
Additional Tests
8. In addition to the regular compressive tests on concrete cubes, concrete

core samples should be taken from the finished structure and tested to verify that the
specified grade strength of the concrete has been achieved. The coring and testing should
be carried out in the following manner:
(a) Frequency and location of coring. The authorized

person/registered structural engineer should propose a coring
scheme indicating the structural elements selected for coring, as
well as the number, size and location of the concrete cores, taking
into consideration the strength adequacy of the structural elements
after coring. At least one set of representative samples should be
taken on each of every three floors. The number of cores taken
from each type of structural element proposed for coring should
be determined from the volume of concrete cast and should not be
less than three on the same floor.
(b) Size of the concrete cores. The diameter of the concrete cores
should preferably be 150 mm for 40 mm aggregate and 100 mm
for 20 mm aggregate or less, and must not be less than 75mm.
The ratio of diameter to the maximum aggregate size should be
not less than 3. The length of the test sample cut from the concrete
core should be at least 95% of the diameter.
(c) Identification of the concrete cores. The supervisory personnel

should mark and sign on the concrete cores to enable the testing
laboratory to identify them clearly. He should also ensure that the
delivery of the cores to the laboratory and the tests are properly
carried out.
(d) Tests for compressive strength of concrete cores. Tests for

compressive strength of concrete cores should be carried out in
accordance with the method specified in CS1:1990, by a Hong
Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) accredited
laboratory.
/(e) …..
-3-
(e) Criteria for acceptance. The criteria for acceptance of the test are:
(i) Concrete cores should not show evidence of

segregation of individual materials.
(ii) Concrete cores should not exhibit honeycombing

which means interconnected voids arising from, for
example, inadequate compaction or lack of mortar.
(iii) For any set of cores representing a test location, the

estimated in-situ cube strength of each core specimen
should be at least 75% of the specified grade strength
and the average estimated in-situ cube strength of the
set should be at least 85% of the specified grade
strength. In this respect, the estimated in-situ cube
strength of each core specimen should be calculated
in accordance with CS1:1990.
Qualified Supervision
9. The authorized person/registered structural engineer should provide

adequate supervision and inspection on the construction of the concrete works to ensure
compliance with the approved plans. The sampling, making and curing of concrete test
cubes and the drilling of core samples should be supervised by a technically competent
person. The person supervising the drilling of core samples should be independent from
the contractor.
10. The names and qualifications of the supervisory personnel representing the
authorized person/registered structural engineer and the registered contractor respectively
should be entered into an inspection log book. All inspections should be clearly
recorded, with date and time of inspections and details of site activities. The log book
should be kept at the site office and, when required, produced to the Building Authority
for inspection.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/CC/213
First issue October 1995 (AD/SE)

This revision May 2003 (AD/NB2) – Paragraph 1 re-written, new paragraph 2 added
and paragraphs 4, 6 and 8(e)(ii) amended
Index under : Concrete
Limit State Design
Criteria for acceptance for concrete coring test

Occupation of New Buildings

Buildings Ordinance section 21
This PNAP summarizes how the Building Authority (BA) processes an

application for an occupation permit (OP).
2. By law the BA must process an application for an OP within 14 days. As time is

of the essence, it is essential that the authorized person (AP) co-operates fully. Apart from
ensuring that all building works are satisfactorily completed in accordance with the approved
plans and in full compliance with the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations, the AP should
ensure that the requisite certificates, record plans and schedules are submitted with the formal
application (BA 13). Applications without the requisite certificates will be processed as far as
practicable but if at all possible this should be avoided.
3. On receipt of an application, the Development Division building surveyor will

arrange with the AP an early appointment for inspection. It is expected that in turn the AP will
make the necessary arrangements with the registered general building contractor.
4. During an inspection all parts of the building works must be available for
examination. If the inspection reveals that building works controlled under the Buildings
Ordinance are blatantly incomplete, e.g. sanitary fitments or fire doors have not been installed,
the application will be summarily refused. In such cases, a fresh application (BA 13) would
have to be made. In serious cases, consideration would be given to instigating disciplinary
proceedings under the Buildings Ordinance for prematurely certifying the building completed.
5. Plant and machinery, such as an extensive air conditioning installation, that has
been required under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations to be operational on completion
of the building should be made available for inspection. Generally speaking, provided it is
structurally safe to do so, there is no objection to plant and fixtures required by the users of the
building being installed before an OP is issued. Such installations should not, however, unduly
hamper inspection of the completed building works.
6. If the inspection reveals only minor matters to be rectified, the BA will accept the
AP’s written confirmation and, when appropriate, photograhic proof that rectification has been
made prior to the expiry of the 14-day period. This should, however, be submitted in good
time to allow for preparation of the OP.
7. Refusals of applications will in the first instance be notified by fax; a formal letter
will follow by post. In addition to the statutory grounds for refusal, other comments and
observations may be included in additional paragraphs for information and any action deemed
appropriate.
/8. Following
-2-
8. Following a refusal, except in the case of a premature application, a formal

resubmission of an application (BA 13) is not required. On receipt of written notification
from the AP that the refusal items have been rectified to his satisfaction, the BA will within 14
days carry out a reinspection (if required) and either issue the OP or again formally refuse the
application.
9. Section 21 of the Buildings Ordinance details the statutory procedures required

for the occupation of a new building. PNAP 53 and PNRC 25 provide information on the
submission of amendment plans, record plans and schedules.
( CHOI Yu-leuk )
Building Authority
Index under : BO s21

Occupation Permits

GEOGUIDE 5
Guide to Slope Maintenance
This announces the publication of the second edition of GEOGUIDE 5

(Guide to Slope Maintenance) by the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) in 1998
which is available from the Government Publications Sales Centre.
2. Regular inspections and maintenance are essential to the continued stability

of slopes and retaining walls. The GEOGUIDE 5 recommends standards of good practice
for the maintenance of man-made slopes and retaining walls, also man-made features (eg
surface cover and drains) provided to natural hillsides. The standards recommended should
be adopted when specifying maintenance requirements in site formation submissions in
pursuance of Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(E).
3. The GEOGUIDE 5 recommends that the designer of a slope or retaining

wall should prepare a Maintenance Manual, to assist the owner(s) or parties required to
maintain the land in understanding the maintenance requirements. It should include the
information listed in Chapter 2 of GEOGUIDE 5. The requirement for submitting the
Maintenance Manual at the certificate for completion (Form BA 14) stage should be
specified in the site formation submission.
4. The Maintenance Manual should be submitted in duplicate together with the

Form BA 14. Upon acknowledgement by the Building Authority, a copy of the
Maintenance Manual will be returned to the authorized persons/registered structural
engineers for onward transmission to the owner(s) or the parties for future maintenance of
the development.
5. The second edition of GEOGUIDE 5 clarifies that the scope of the Engineer
Inspections for Maintenance should include a review of previous Stability Assessment.
6. An abridged version of the GEOGUIDE 5 (Layman's Guide to Slope

Maintenance - Second Edition) may be obtained free from District Offices or by writing to
Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Slope Safety of the GEO.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/GEO/11 (III)

This revision April 1999 (AD/LM, GGE)
Index under : GEOGUIDE 5
Slopes - maintenance manual
Maintenance manual - slopes
Buildings Department Practice Note for Authorised Persons 192
Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996
Requirements for fire resisting construction for buildings are laid down in
Part XV of the Building (Construction) Regulations. The Building Authority announced
guidance on compliance with these requirements by publishing, in 1990, a Code of
Practice for Fire Resisting Construction (FRC Code). This Code has recently been
revised in the light of experience in implementation of the Code since 1990. The revised
Code (Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996) is available for sale at the
Government Publication Centre.
2. The revised Code has clarified a number of anomalies and grey areas in the
existing Code, upgraded standards on the design of some building components and
streamlined duplications in the FRC Code and the Code of Practice for the Provision of
Means of Escape in Case of Fire.
Application
3. The revised FRC Code shall be effective on 1 August 1996. The

requirements therein do not apply to the buildings or building works which are being
carried out or have been consented to commence on or before 1 August 1996.
Suggestions
4. This Code will be reviewed regularly. Any suggestion for improving it is

welcome.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VI)

BD GP/LEG/6
PNAP 163
First issued (April 1996) (AD/LM)
Index under : Fire Resisting Construction, Code of Practice for
[SBS LEG\PRA-NOTE]

Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment) Regulation 1996

and Associated Legislative Amendments
The Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment) Regulation 1996, which

came into operation on 28.6.96, revises the principal Regulation by removing most of the
safety requirements to other Ordinances/Regulations. The amended Regulation now
focusses on licensing procedures.
2. Matters concerning the design, planning and construction of places of public

entertainment in the principal Regulation have been transferred to the following:-
(a) Building (Construction) (Amendment) Regulation 1996
This Regulation introduces a definition of “cinema” as

well as provisions to regulate the construction of
protective barriers provided at the outer edge of any
upper tier in a place of public entertainment.
(b) Building (Planning) (Amendment) Regulation 1996
This Regulation adds a new Part VIA to regulate the

situation, planning, design and other matters relevant to a
place of public entertainment.
(c) Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape

in Case of Fire 1996 (MOE Code)
Part III of the Code contains requirements on means of

escape for places of public entertainment. These
requirements are transferred from the repealed Places of
Public Entertainment Regulations. Part of the content of
Practice Note for Authorized Persons 54 has also been
incorporated in the Code.
3. The Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment) Regulation 1996 and

associated legislative amendments as mentioned in paragraphs 2(a) and (b) above and Part
III of the MOE Code apply to building works in accordance with Buildings Ordinance
section 39(2). By virtue of section 39(2), these Regulations and Part III of MOE Code do
not apply to building works which are being carried out or have been consented to
commence on or before 28.6.96.
/4. A PNAP.....
-2-
4. A practice note for the revised MOE Code will be issued separately.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. BD GP/LEG/2/L(V)
PNAP 54
First issued (June 1996) (AD/LM)
Index under: Cinemas

Places of Public Entertainment Regulations

Code of Practice for the Provision of

Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996
Requirements for means of escape for buildings are laid down in

section 41(1) of the Building (Planning) Regulations. The Code of Practice for the
Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire (MOE Code) provides guidance on
the compliance with these requirements.
2. The MOE Code has been reviewed recently. The revised Code
(Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in case of Fire 1996) has
been published and is available for sale at the Government Publication Centre. The
purpose of this Practice Note is to explain the revised requirements and the
application of the revised Code.
3. The revised Code has clarified a number of anomalies and grey areas
in the existing Code, upgraded standards on the design of some building components
and streamlined duplications in the MOE Code and the Code of Practice for Fire
Resisting Construction. A new Part III is also added to deal with means of escape
requirements for places of public entertainment.
Application
4. The revised MOE Code shall come into operation on 1.12.96 except
for the following :-
(a) Part III of the new MOE Code has been effective on 28.6.96 (PNAP
194 refers).
(b) For buildings or building works which are being carried out or for
which consent to commence has been given on or before 1.12.96, the
earlier edition of the MOE Code may be used as the basis for
providing the facilities.
5. The Building Authority acknowledges that there may be difficulties in

the adoption of the Fire Engineering Approach and in the application of the new
code to existing buildings in certain situations. Further guidelines may be issued.
/Suggestions ......
-2-
Suggestions
6. This Code will be reviewed regularly. Any suggestion for improving it is

welcome.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. BD GP/LEG/6/A(VI)
PNAP 163, 192 & 194
First issued (June 1996) (AD/LM)

Index under: Means of Escape, Code of Practice for

Amendments and clarification to Code of Practice

for Fire Resisting Construction 1996
I refer to the issue of the revised Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction
1996 which has become effective on 1 August 1996. The following corrigenda therein are
required:-
(i) On page 9, in the fourth line of paragraph 7.2, "but in no case less than 2
“hours” should be deleted.
(ii) On page 18, at the end of paragraph 17.2, the following diagram should be
added :
FIRE DOOR
TO BE KEPT CLOSED
防火門
應常關
(iii) In Table C on page 24, the concrete cover to all reinforcement required to
provide 2 hrs. FRP to continuous floors and landings of solid reinforced
concrete construction should read "25 mm" instead of "40 mm".
(iv) On page 14 in the fourth line, add “with an FRP as described in (iii) above”
after the word “located”.
(v) On page 32 in the fifth line from the bottom, replace “fixed light;” with
“fixed light with FRP ≥ ½ FRPe;”.
2. The corrigenda and clarification announced in this practice note will be incorporated
in future editions of the Code of Practice.
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VII)

PNAP 163 (CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Last issue August 1996 (AD/LM)
This issue August 1999 (para. 1(iv) & (v) added) (AD/D)
Index under : Fire resisting Construction, Code of Practice for


Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services
Introduction
The world is undergoing a technological revolution and entering the

Information Age. Hong Kong is well placed to reap the benefits and maintain our
competitive edge in this new era. It is the Government's policy objective to develop
Hong Kong into a telecommunications, broadcasting and Internet hub in the Asia
Pacific region.
2. To enable occupiers of a building to gain access to the full range of quality

broadcasting, telecommunications and Internet services, the Telecommunications
Authority has, under section 14 of the Telecommunications Ordinance, granted
authorization to fixed telecommunications network services operators and fixed carrier
licensees (hereafter referred to as the “Network Operators”) to place and maintain
telecommunications and broadcasting facilities and cables in the common parts of
buildings in private ownership. New Network Operators may be licensed from time
to time to provide new telecommunications and broadcasting services.
3. In order to accommodate the telecommunications and broadcasting facilities

and cables in buildings, Regulation 28A of the Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R)
requires the provision of access facilities for telecommunications and broadcasting
services in every commercial building, industrial building, residential building (other
than a building for residence of a single family) and hotel building in accordance with
the design requirements specified by the Building Authority.
4. As there are a number of Network Operators who will provide

telecommunications and broadcasting services, it is advisable to consolidate the
requirements of access facilities for telecommunications and broadcasting from all the
Network Operators during the building planning stage and appoint more than one
Network Operator to install block wiring cables in new buildings. The list of
Network Operators is given in the Annex to the “Code of Practice for the Provision of
Access Facilities in Buildings for the Supply of Telecommunications and Broadcasting
Services” (CoP) issued by the Office of the Telecommunications Authority (OFTA),
which can be downloaded from OFTA’s web site at http://www.ofta.gov.hk.
Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services
5. Pursuant to B(P)R 28A, the design requirements for access facilities for
telecommunications and broadcasting services to be provided in buildings are specified
in paragraphs 6 to 9 below.
6. The number and size of lead-in ducts, Telecommunications and

Broadcasting (TBE) Rooms and vertical riser slots shall be provided in accordance
with the requirements specified in Appendix A.
/7. …..
-2-
7. The lead-in ducts shall be properly sealed up to guard against the ingress of
water and gases and the sealing materials should be of a type that can be easily
removed by the Network Operators.
8. The TBE Room should be placed at a location not susceptible to flooding.

For development comprising of separate tower blocks on top of a commercial podium,
separate TBE Rooms to serve each tower block and the commercial podium
respectively should be provided.
9. In addition, the TBE Room should also comply with the following
requirements :-
(i) the room should be linked up with the vertical block

wiring system of the buildings;
(ii) no water pipes, sewage pipes, water drainage, water

sprinklers, high voltage power supply (exceeding 600V
between phase and earth for three-phase, or 1,000V for
single-phase, or 1,500V dc) cables, power transformers
should be installed inside the TBE Rooms;
(iii) sufficient lighting, electricity supply and ventilation

should be provided;
(iv) separate telecommunications earth electrode should be

provided; and
(v) minimum clear height as stipulated in Appendix A should

be provided.
10. A schematic diagram of the arrangement of the access facilities is attached

at Appendix B for general reference.
11. All the new requirements set out in this practice note shall apply to new or
major revision general building plans approved on or after 1 November 2006. For
the avoidance of doubt, new or major revision general building plans approved before
1 November 2006 may continue to adopt the requirements set out in the practice note
issued in September 2000.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
This revision June 2006 (AD/NB1) – Generally revamped
Index under : Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services
Appendix A
(PNAP 201)
Requirements of Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services (APP-84)
OFFICE/COMMERCIAL, INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS AND SHOPPING ARCADES
Usable floor space1, Æ (× 1000 m2) Æ≤2 2 <Æ ≤ 4 4 < Æ ≤ 12 12 < Æ ≤ 24 24 < Æ ≤ 48 48 < Æ ≤ 72 72 < Æ ≤ 96 96 < Æ ≤ 120 120 < Æ ≤ 144
No. of lead-in duct 2 3 3 4 4 8 8 8 8
Inside diameter of lead-in duct (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Minimum Area of TBE Room (m2) 0 22 42 51 61 79 88 107 113
required under B(P)R 28A
Maximum Area of TBE Room (m2) 10 28 53 64 77 99 111 134 142
that may be exempted under
B(P)R 23(3)(b)
Clear Height of TBE Room (m) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Vertical riser (mm) 100 × 100 300 × 200 300 × 200 400 × 200 400 × 200 600 × 250 650 × 250 750 × 250 900 × 250
No. of vertical riser slot 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
No. of flats in a block, N N≤5 5 < N ≤ 50 50 < N ≤ 100 100 < N ≤ 250 250 < N ≤ 500 500 < N ≤ 750 750 < N ≤ 1000 1000 < N ≤ 1500
No. of lead-in duct 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
Inside diameter of lead-in duct (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Minimum Area of TBE Room (m2) 0 7 21 24 29 39 43 48
Maximum Area of TBE Room (m2) 4 9 27 31 37 49 54 60
B(P)R 23(3)(b)
Clear Height of TBE Room (m) 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 3 3
Vertical riser (mm) 75 × 75 200 × 100 200 × 100 200 × 200 300 × 200 300 × 200 300 × 200 400 × 200
No. of vertical riser slot 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
HOTELS
No. of rooms, N N ≤ 200 200 < N ≤ 400 400 < N ≤ 600 600 < N ≤ 800 800 < N ≤ 1000 1000 < N ≤ 1200
No. of lead-in duct 3 3 3 3 3 3
Inside diameter of lead-in duct (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Minimum Area of TBE Room (m2) 24 24 26 28 35 37
Maximum Area of TBE Room (m2) 30 30 33 36 44 47
B(P)R 23(3)(b)
Clear Height of TBE Room (m) 3 3 3 3 3 3
Vertical riser (mm) 200 × 200 300 × 200 300 × 200 300 × 200 400 × 200 400 × 200
No. of vertical riser slot 1 1 2 2 2 2
Note 1 : “Usable floor space” has the same meaning assigned to it in section 2(1) of the Building (Planning) Regulations
(Rev. 6/2006)
Appendix B
(PNAP 201)
(APP-84)
General Schematic Arrangement of Access Facilities
Telecom
closet
Telecom.
closet
TV TV
2/F
T
T
TV TV
1/F
T
T
G/F
TBE Room (TBE Room may be
(Headroom: 2.8m or located on other
3m min)
floors so long as it is
in an area not
susceptible to
flooding)
LEAD-IN
DUCTS
Concealed conduit (Not to Scale)

Legend : Telephone socket 25mm dia typical for telephone
T 32mm dia typical for TV
Vertical riser/ horizontal trunking

TV TV socket
Distribution case
Notes :
1. The size of TBE Room should conform to Table in Appendix A
2. The construction of TBE Room should comply with the Building (Construction) Regulations
3. The Network Operators should seal all the lead-in ducts after laying the underground cables.
(Rev. 6/2006)

Application of the Revised Fire Safety Codes
The Building Authority has updated and revised the three codes of practices
relating to fire safety in buildings. These codes are :
• Code of Practice for Means of Access for Fire fighting and Rescue 1995
• Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996
• Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire

1996
Application of the revised Codes
2. This practice note provides guidance on the application of the revised codes in
situations not explicitly stated in the relevant Ordinances or Regulations :-
(i) Alterations and additions in existing buildings
Generally only the areas affected by the proposed alteration and

addition works (including shared exits) will need to comply with the
requirements of the revised codes. The remaining parts of the building
unaffected by the proposed works need not follow the revised codes.
(ii) Licencing of restaurants
Similar to (i) above only the areas in a building subject to a new licence
application will need to comply with the requirements of the revised
codes.
(iii) Consent for works shown on plans approved prior to effective date
of the revised Codes
There is generally no objection to issue consent to commence building

works shown on plans approved prior to the respective effective dates
of the revised codes, provided that a consent application is made
within two years of the date of approval and the application is in order
in all other aspects.
/(iv) .....
1
(iv) Occupancy factor
Buildings Department will have no objection in principle to the

assessment of population in a submission of plans by using “head
counts” in the premises where alteration works are proposed or in
comparable premises, provided that the authorized person could
demonstrate that the comparables are suitable for use in the
circumstances of the submission. In this regard, the following
considerations should be noted :
(a) Every building is unique. There must be sufficient

demonstration that the location, management, patronage, class,
type and age of buildings etc. are similar; and
(b) For the design of a new building, it may be in the developer’s

interest to use prescriptive value to assess population such that
there will be sufficient margin to cater for future alterations and
changes.
Fire Engineering Approach
2. The three codes of practice recently revised by the Building Authority contain
provisions for the adoption of Fire Engineering Approach as an alternative to complying with
the prescriptive provisions. Guidelines on the administrative procedures for making
submissions to the Building Authority based on Fire Engineering Approach will be issued
separately.
( CHOI Yu-leuk )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/PREG/P/36
First issued : October 1996 (AD/LM)
Index under : MOA
FRC
MOE
Fire engineering approach
2

Non-loadbearing Partition Walls
The construction and demolition of non-loadbearing partition walls are

operations frequently involved in construction process, in particular for alterations and
additions works. Although these walls are not structural elements, it is necessary for
authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) to ensure that the
design and construction of the works achieve the required performance standard.
2. In the light of the observation in a study of an accident involving collapse of

non-loadbearing partition wall, this practice note intends to give guidance to enhance public
safety in respect of works involving non-loadbearing partition walls.
Design and Construction of Non-loadbearing Partition Walls
3. In the design and construction of non-loadbearing partition walls, APs and

RSEs should ensure that all factors which may affect the stiffness and stability of these
walls such as slenderness, supports and restraints, are taken into account. Their design and
construction should be carried out in accordance with relevant standards and codes of
practice. In this respect, PNAP 140 should be referred to.
Demolition of Non-loadbearing Partition Walls
4. When non-loadbearing partition walls are to be demolished, APs and RSEs

should ensure that :
• appropriate precautionary measures are provided as site situation demands;
• the works are carried out by experienced workers;
• adequate supervision is provided throughout the demolition period.
In this connection, attention should also be drawn to PNAP 71.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BOP/33
First issued October 1996 (AD/D, AD/SE)
Index under : Non-loadbearing Partition Wall

Partition Wall

Guide to Fire Engineering Approach
This practice note provides guidance on fire engineering approach for the design of new
buildings or alteration and addition works in existing buildings to meet the fire safety objectives
and performance requirements of Building (Construction) Regulation 90, Building (Planning)
Regulations 41, 41A, 41B & 41C and as an alternative to the prescriptive requirements set out in
the three Codes of Practice for Means of Escape, Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue
and Fire Resisting Construction, covering fire safety in buildings.
Objectives
2. Fire engineering design offers a flexible alternative where it is impracticable to

comply with prescriptive provisions in the Codes, especially when designing for special or large
and complex buildings or alteration and addition works in existing buildings. The aim is to
provide for an overall level of safety that is equivalent to that which would result if fire safety
was achieved through full compliance with the prescriptive provisions of the relevant codes of
practice. The acceptability of fire engineering approach is recognised in paragraph 3 of the
Codes. Fire engineering design provides a framework for practitioners to demonstrate that the
performance requirements of legislation are met, or in some cases bettered, even though some of
the design solutions adopted fall outside or short of the prescriptive provisions in the Codes when
additional fire safety measures are proposed to compensate for the deviation or shortfall.
3. To achieve this objective it is important to understand the performance

requirements and the prescriptive provisions that are required as a minimum to comply with the
legislation. If the design being considered is not substantially different from the prescriptive
provisions or can be readily accommodated by adopting conservative assumptions, it may simply
be a case of demonstrating like-for-like substitution or “equivalence” with prescriptive
provisions and fire safety objectives without having to embark on a full fire safety strategy.
However, practical test may be required where necessary to demonstrate the equivalence by
practitioners.
4. The performance requirements of the legislation that have to be addressed in the

fire engineering design, and re-expressed in terms of objectives, are as follows :
(a) Given the function and purpose of the building or installation, the design should
not present an unacceptable risk of a fire developing and spreading.
(b) Occupants should have time to reach a place of (temporary and/or permanent)
safety without being dangerously affected by heat or smoke from a fire.
(c) A fire should not spread to adjacent property.

/(d) A fire ....
-2-
(d) A fire (and smoke) should not spread beyond the compartment from which the fire
originates.
(e) Firefighting personnel should be able to gain access and mount firefighting and
rescue operations without undue risk to their health and safety.
(f) The stability, insulation and structural integrity of the building should be ensured
in a fire of specified intensity and duration.
Design Methodology
5. One prevailing method of fire engineering design is based on making predictions

of likely outcomes in the event of a fire and selecting appropriate fire safety system components
to achieve the required objectives. This is a deterministic method of fire-safety engineering
which combines assessment of both risk and hazard. It has been applied to special or unique
buildings such as airport terminals, railway stations, convention and exhibition centres, aircraft
hangars, stadiums, etc. where the prescriptive requirements of the building regulations are often
not appropriate. Application of this method is designed to provide a level of fire safety
equivalent to that expected in the legislation. Demonstrating equivalence to the prescriptive
provisions is paramount to the acceptance of this method.
6. Risk assessment is introduced in expectation of a fire development, and system

performance is based on various fire scenarios. Fire engineering is not sufficiently developed, at
least for the time being, to provide simple methods of quantifying the overall fire safety of a
building. Hong Kong, moreover, currently lacks local statistical information to support the
establishment of appropriate risk factors to cover the range of indigenous building types.
Quantitative risk assessment and large-scale fire tests, on the other hand, can only be undertaken
for special buildings and installations.
7. Hazard analysis follows the traditional engineering approach based on defined fire
loads and demonstrating the ability to resist such loads. It is often assisted by fire models and
computational methods which are already established overseas and can offer a more certain
indication of achieved safety. Provided the hazards are identified it is usually possible to devise
strategies for their management or design solutions which will ensure reasonable safety of the
occupants, and the protection of essential emergency plant and equipment.
8. Equivalence can also be readily demonstrated by deterministic means - equal

performance between the designed system and what is expected under full compliance with the
regulations i.e. the outcome under a given fire scenario should be similar for either the
complying system or the alternative being proposed.
/9. Design Procedures .....

-3-
Design Procedures
9. The flow chart shown in the Appendix outlines the major steps to be followed in
the fire engineering design of a building. The design procedure is essentially a process to
analyse the likely effects of a fire given the worst likely location and time of ignition.
Knowledge of the fire loads, the number and location of occupants and the fire protection
features is essential for assessing whether the performance criteria are met. The first two steps
are to determine the geometry, construction and use of the building and to establish performance
requirements. The third step is to identify deviations from the prescriptive provisions and to
propose alternatives to address the deficiency.
10. The following steps revolve around scenario analysis, considering all possible
scenarios. Some parts of the analysis can possibly be quantified with numbers, but much of the
analysis requires subjective judgement as to the likely movement and consequences of a fire and
the likely location and movement of people. If the performance criteria are not met, then either
the building geometry or the fire protection features must be modified until satisfactory
performance is achieved. This process must be repeated for all possible fire scenarios.
Fire Safety Strategy Report
11. The compilation of a fire safety strategy report is the most effective way of
identifying and setting out the tactics for the fire safety design of a building. Contents of the
report may be set out as follows with some sections assuming a greater or lesser degree of
importance depending on the particular project :
(a) Introduction : sets out the overall objectives of the fire strategy and the parameters
of the report. Nature of the problems should be stated.
(b) Description of the development : describes the intended function of the building or
project; outlining special features and inter-relationship with other properties.
(c) Sources of Information : lists the codes, legislation and guidance documents used
in the compilation of the report and the features which are based on fire
engineering principles.
(d) Means of Escape : establishes the objectives of the means of escape philosophy
and, if necessary, refers to escape times and extended travel distances, behaviour,
reaction and way finding pattern of the occupants.
(e) Design fires : in complex buildings, where necessary, establishes the design fire
size by calculation of fire load and type so that the effect of fire and smoke can be
assessed. This is particularly important when considering smoke extract
calculations and the effect of heat on the building structure.
/(f) Smoke .....

-4-
(f) Smoke control : describes the purpose of smoke control system where required to
maintain clear layer height and to limit temperatures to keep escape routes safe
and clear, and to provide indication on the toxicity of gases.
(g) Fire spread control : states the combustibility of wall and ceiling linings,
furnishings, the integrity rating of structure and compartment walls, the control of
the rate of spread of fire, the resistance of the effect of a fire and the capacity of
fire containing. This section would also contain details of compartment size and
external fire spread with due regard to the insulation, stability and integrity of the
building.
(h) Structural Performance : predicts the thermal response and structural response of
fire resisting elements at elevated temperatures and determines their equivalent
fire resistance ratings; attention should also be given to the structural safety of
adjacent buildings due to heat radiation near the site boundary.
(i) Sprinkler system : where sprinklers are proposed, states the hazard classification,
water supplies, extent of coverage and system standard; identifies special features
such as fast response sprinklers used in areas of smoke control.
(j) Alarm system : describes the type and extent of the alarm system; for example
type and coverage of fire detectors, manual call points, communication of alarm,
technical features of the system, position of panels. Where the alarm system is
also used to activate dampers, pressurise stairs, or send a signal to the Fire
Services Communication Centre, suitable references will be made.
(k) First-aid firefighting : describes the provisions of first-aid firefighting equipment

e.g. hosereels and portable fire extinguishers available to the occupants of the
building.
(l) Facilities for firefighting personnel : describes the facilities which should be made
available to the firefighting appliance and personnel including access, and
sometimes water supplies for firefighting, firefighting and rescue staircases,
fireman’s lift, fire control centre/panel, smoke clearance and point of assembly.
(m) Emergency lighting and signs : outlines the standards and operating principles.
/(n) Role .....

-5-
(n) Role of management : defines clearly the management role and states clearly the
arrangements that could ensure the continued maintenance of any fire protection
system. This is an important element of the fire safety strategy which should be
clearly defined. Management may play an active part in minimizing the outbreak
of fire by restricting smoking, ensuring good housekeeping and security.
Management will also be responsible for ensuring that maintenance and testing
procedures are in place to ensure that the fire systems within the building will
respond to a fire.
The report should contain calculations, sketches and diagrams to support the conclusions
and aims of the report. Detailed information should include smoke filling, design fire
and egress calculations where these are appropriate.
Consultation
12. It is important that practitioners consider the implications of fire safety on the
building design at an early stage and establish a consultative procedure with the Buildings
Department and Fire Services Department so that the fire safety objectives can be agreed
between the parties at the outset. In this connection, the Buildings Department and Fire Services
Department should be approached prior to submission of building plans for agreement in
principle to any fire engineering design being considered.
13. As yet there is no accreditation of fire engineers, authorized persons (APs)

meanwhile must assume the pivotal role in the consultative procedures when the fire strategy and
fire engineering design is being developed. Practitioners from other disciplines are expected,
however, to provide their specialist input as well.
References
14. The range of overseas codes and standards applicable to fire safety is constantly
increasing and individual publications are frequently amended or revised. Although practitioners
may not have all relevant information readily to hand, they should be aware of these
publications. Product data and articles in fire safety journals, also help keep practitioners up-to-
date with new developments in fire safety matters. Various standard documents are available
describing fire engineering approaches to design such as the draft British Standard, the
Australian Code, NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) and SFPE (Society of Fire
Protection Engineer) Handbooks. These documents provide specific guidance on fire load,
smoke control, egress from buildings for specialised occupancies, equations and relationships,
calculation methods along with valuable data for use in the development of the case to
demonstrate adequacy.
15. This .....

-6-
15. This practice note cannot possibly outline all the fire engineering design
technology required for use on every specific building. Rather, it simply outlines one
recommended framework for fire engineering design activities. As fire engineering approach is
new to both the practitioners and the authorities, this practice note would serve as an initial
guideline. In the longer run, we need to develop fire safety standards (e.g. safe evacuation time,
tenability level of exit routes, etc.) and develop control over tools (e.g. computer modules) for
predicting risks or demonstrating compliance and over the service of professionals (e.g. fire
engineers). This guideline will be reviewed regularly. Any suggestion for improvement is
welcome.
( CHOI Yu-leuk )
Building Authority
First issued : (March 1998) (AD/LM)
Index under : Fire Engineering Approach

PNAP 204
-7-
Appendix
APP-87
Determine geometry, construction Establish minimun
and use of building prescriptive performance
requirements to comply
Design
complies with Codes ? YES
(MOE, MOA & FRC)
NO
Identify non-compliance;
Propose alternative/substitutes
and demonstrate equivalence
Design YES
Agreed
NO
Determine fire scenario
Establish maximum likely number

of occupants, their locations and
behavioural reaction
Identify certain fire protection features
Carry out fire engineering

analysis rationale
Modify fire
safety features
Acceptable
performance
NO YES
Accept design
Appendix : Overview of Fire Engineering Design


Code of Practice on
Inspection and Maintenance of Water
Carrying Services Affecting Slopes
This Practice Note announces the publication of the 'Code of Practice on

Inspection and Maintenance of Water Carrying Services Affecting Slopes' by the Works
Branch. It is now available for sale from the Government Publications Centre.
2. The Code of Practice gives guidance on the inspection and maintenance of

buried water-carrying services affecting slopes. It puts together relevant notes and
guidelines to form a comprehensive document for the use of Government Departments,
professionals, contractors and building managers. The Code of Practice focuses its
guidelines on the following aspects :
(a) Planning for an effective inspection and maintenance programme;
(b) Examining available options for detecting, inspecting and

repairing buried services affecting slope; and
(c) Recommendations for permanent measures to minimize impacts

of leakage from buried services on slope safety.
3. Under Buildings Ordinance section 27C, the Building Authority may require
a building owner to carry out investigation and any repair work to buried water-carrying
services laid in or near a slope. Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and
Registered Contractors should make reference to this Code of Practice when appointed in
respect of the design, construction and/or maintenance of buried services so to assure safety
of slopes in their vicinity.
4. This Practice Note is to be read in conjunction with PNAP 168. A similar

practice note has been issued to Registered Contractors.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/CC/234
First issue November 1996 (AD/S)
Index under : Code of Practice on Inspection & Maintenance of water carrying services
affecting slopes.
Water carrying services affecting slopes.

Provision of Better Lift Service
Introduction
The lift service in a building has been the subject of complaints from
time to time. The Building Authority (BA) accepts that occupants of the building
may have legitimate cause for concern in some cases. This practice note introduces
guidelines on the provision of lifts in buildings for domestic and office use with a
view to enhancing standards of lift services, thereby improving the quality of life for
the occupants of domestic and office buildings.
Background
2. Areas of lifts and the lift shafts in a building are measured as gross floor
areas (GFA) under Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a).
3. Except for fireman’s lifts and those required to be provided for people
with a disability, no requirements and dimensions are spelt out in the Buildings
Ordinance and regulations to enable an assessment to be made as to the adequacy of a
lift service. To maximize on the usable floor area of a building, the practice has
been quite common that only the minimum area is allowed for the provision of lifts,
occasionally at the expense of comfort and convenience of occupants of the building.
The BA considers that there is room for improvement in this area.
Quality of Lift Service
4. In general, the quality of lift service depends on a number of factors

including the number and size of the lifts provided, their handling capacity, travelling
time and waiting time.
Criteria for Exemption
5. The BA acknowledges that improvement in lift provisions in private

developments should be encouraged. Having regard to the effects of increasing
building density, the BA will allow the GFA of lift shafts provided over and above
the average standard of those currently provided in buildings to be excluded from
GFA calculations.
6. Taking into account the average areas of lift shaft in domestic/

composite and office buildings, the BA will, upon application and on the merits of
each case, exempt the following from gross floor area calculation subject to the
criteria specified in paragraph 7:
/ Lifts …..
-2-
Lifts serving domestic accommodation in domestic/composite

buildings including hotels
(a) For domestic and composite buildings including hotel buildings,

the area of lift shaft over and above 2.5% of the total GFA may
be exempted provided that the total lift shaft area exempted
should in no case be in excess of 3.5% of the total GFA of the
proposed building, i.e. if the lift shaft area is more than 6% of
the total GFA, then the maximum exempted area will be 3.5% of
the total GFA.
Lifts serving office accommodation in office or

office/commercial buildings with GFA of the office floors less
than 10,000 m2
(b) For office and office/commercial buildings, the area of lift shaft
over and above 5% of the total GFA for office use 1 may be
exempted provided that the total lift shaft area exempted should in
no case be in excess of 3% of the total GFA for office use, i.e. if
the lift shaft area is more than 8% of the total GFA for office use,
then the maximum exempted area will be 3% of the total GFA for
office use.
Lifts serving office accommodation in office or

office/commercial buildings with GFA of the office floors
equal to or more than 10,000 m2
(c) Subject to (d) below, the area of lift shaft over and above 3.5% of
the total GFA for office use may be exempted provided that the
total lift shaft area exempted should in no case be in excess of
2.5% of the total GFA for office use, i.e. if the lift shaft area is
more than 6% of the total GFA for office use, then the maximum
exempted area will be 2.5% of the total GFA for office use.
(d) For buildings with GFA between 10,000 m2 and 12,000 m2 for
office use, a maximum concession area of 300 m2 may be allowed.
7. Modification for exclusion of lift shaft area from GFA calculation will
only be considered if the following criteria are met:
(a) the internal area of each lift car and lift shaft for domestic or
composite building is not less than 1.82m2 and 4.12m2
respectively;
/(b) the …..
1
includes use and facilities ancillary to office accommodation but excludes other commercial use in the
case of office/ commercial building
-3-
(b) the internal area of each lift car and lift shaft serving the office
accommodation is not less than 2.1m2 and 4.4 m2 respectively;
(c) the application is accompanied by an assessment from a

registered lift engineer (means a person whose name is included
in the register under section 5 of the Lifts and Escalators (Safety)
Ordinance (Cap. 327)) or a registered professional engineer
(means a person whose name is included in the register under
section 7 of the Engineers Registration Ordinance (Cap. 409)) in
the building services discipline certifying that, according to
international codes, the lift service to be provided is above the
acceptance level of service in terms of handling capacity and
waiting time and that there is adequate maneuvering space for the
carrying out of maintenance works.
Application
8. The exemption in para. 5 to 7 are applicable to building plans for new

projects, and major revisions of building plans. Buildings already issued with
occupation permits will not be considered for concessions.
9. For approved projects not under construction, there is no objection to

amendment plans to be submitted to make improvement to the lift service and apply
for the exemption.
10. For new projects on which building works are in progress, an

application for concession may also be considered if it can be established that an
enhanced standard of lift service has been incorporated in the building under
construction.
11. The rules on concessions in this practice note are also applicable to
projects under development in phases. For the avoidance of doubt, completed phases
will not be considered and there should not be transfer of GFA between any
completed phases and other phases yet to be completed. An example illustrating the
concessions in phased development is at Appendix A.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
-4-
Ref. : GP/BREG/P/35 (II)

This revision May 2006 (AD/Support)
Index under : Lift car and shaft

Exclusion from GFA calculations
Appendix A
(PNAP 207)
(APP-89)
An Example Illustrating Concessions
for a Phased Development
I. The Site
(a) Site area : 10,000m²

PR :5
Total domestic gross floor areas (GFA) : 50,000 m²
(b) For development in 3 phases :
• Phase I already completed with an occupation permit issued;

• Phase II is now under construction; and
• Phase III has general building plans approved but no building
works have commenced.
II. Position on plot ratio and GFA
(a) Phase I
• GFA shown on approved plans and completed : 10,000m²

• Lift shaft areas shown on approved plans and included as GFA:
7% of the GFA or 700m². The lift shaft areas are to remain as
accountable GFA for plot ratio calculation ie no concession is
allowable under this PNAP
• Plot ratio and accountable GFA left for Phase II & Phase III are 4
and 40,000m²respectively.
(b) Phase II
• GFA shown on approved plans : 25,000m²

6% of the GFA of Phase II or 1,500m²
• Conditions in para. 10 of this PNAP are satisfied
• Phase II exemption area = 1,500m² - 25,000 x 2.5%
= 875m²* (not exceeding 3.5% of the
total GFA of Phase II)
• GFA used and accountable for Phase II = 25,000m² - 875m²
= 24,125m²
• Plot ratio and accountable GFA left for Phase III are 1.5875 and
15,875m² respectively.
/(c) …..
-1-
(c) Phase III
• GFA shown on approved plans : 15,000m²

5.5% of the GFA of Phase III or 825m²
• Phase III exemption area = 825m²-15,000 x 2.5%
= 450m²*(not exceeding 3.5% of the
total GFA of Phase III)
• GFA accountable for plot ratio calculation = 15,000m²- 450m²
= 14,550m²
• Concessions available for Phase III = 875m²(from Phase II) +
450m² or 1,325m²
• Overall GFA = 10,000m² (Phase I) + 24,125m² (Phase II) +
14,550m² (Phase III) + 1,325m² (concessions) = 50,000m²
(plot ratio = 5 - not exceeding permissible)
* The concession will only be considered if the criteria in paragraphs 7 & 10

of the PNAP are met. The concessions given in Phase II may be transferred
to Phase III.
-2-


Authority to Enter Buildings
General
Section 18(1) of the Buildings Ordinance authorizes the erection of shoring

which is necessary for specified purposes and section 18(6) of the Buildings Ordinance
empowers the Building Authority to authorize entry to buildings in connection with such
shoring.
2. This practice note describes the application and authorization procedures and
emphasizes the rights of those affected by the shoring.
Application
3. Before making an application to the Building Authority for an authorisation

under section 18 of the Buildings Ordinance Authorised Person/Registered Structural
Engineer should ensure that there is no other way of providing precautionary measures than
to erect shoring inside the adjacent buildings, and also that he has failed in obtaining the
consent from the owners and occupants of the adjacent buildings for such shoring work
despite having taken all reasonable steps.
4. Applications for authorization should be made in writing to the Building

Authority and should contain the following information :
(a) Name of applicant;
(b) HKID/Passport/Business Registration Certificate Number of

applicant;
(c) Full address and lot number of the building to be entered;
(d) Purpose(s) for which the authorization is required;
(e) Justification to demonstrate that the erection of shoring inside

the adjacent building(s) is the only possible means of
precautionary measures;
(f) Name of any agent to be authorized under section 18(6)(b) of

the Buildings Ordinance; and
(g) Registration certificate number if applicant or agent is a

registered contractor.
/ Authorization ....
-2-
Authorization
5. Having been satisfied that there is no alternative way of providing support to

the adjacent buildings the Building Authority will issue the written authorisation, normally
within 2 weeks of receipt of an application containing all the necessary information. A
copy of the authorisation shall be posted in a conspicuous position on the building to which
it relates.
Damage and Claims for Compensation
6. It should be noted that sections 18(4) and 18(5) of the Buildings Ordinance
contain provisions for the repair of any damage caused by or resulting from the erection,
maintenance or dismantling of the shoring and for the occupier or any other person to be
compensated for any loss or damage. Section 18A of the Buildings Ordinance allows any
occupier or other person who has suffered such loss or damage to apply to the Lands
Tribunal to hear and determine any dispute relating to compensation. I expect that all these
statutory provisions are followed where appropriate and the rights of all persons affected
are respected.
7. PNAP 71 contains information relating to shoring for demolition works.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
First issued June 1997 (AD/D)
Index under : Authority to Enter Buildings

Shoring

Maintenance and Replacement Works of Lift Installations
According to paragraph 11.2 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting

Construction 1996, a door provided at a lift landing to give access to the car of a lift should
have a fire resistance period (FRP) of not less than 1 hour with regard to integrity. In
order to provide adequate resistance to the spread of fire, a landing door should normally
remain in a closed position unless a lift car stops at the floor of the landing door.
2. For maintenance or replacement works of lift installations, it is

understandable that some landing doors would need to be kept open or taken down before
reinstatement. However, in the course of such works, it is necessary to observe the fire
safety requirements for protecting the integrity of lift shafts in order to inhibit the spread of
fire between floor compartments through the lift shafts and openings. These requirements
are set out in the Appendix.
3. Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers are requested to

observe these requirements and to bring them to the attention of all concerned in carrying
out maintenance or replacement works of the lift installations under their supervision. The
requirements will be incorporated into the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction
issued by the Building Authority in due course.
4. A similar practice note has been issued to Registered Contractors.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/ACT/19/L
First issued : July 1997 (AD/LM)
Index under : FRC Code

Lift Installations - Maintenance/Replacement Works
Appendix
Fire resisting construction requirements for

maintenance and replacement works of lift installations
(a) Subject to para. (b) below, all landing doors should remain in a closed position in the
course of maintenance or replacement works of lift installations.
(b) Where landing doors need to be kept open for the works, normally no more than one
such door in a lift shaft should be in an opened position at any one time. The door
opening, other than the one at which the lift car is levelled with the floor landing, is to
be attended by lift workers. If the works necessitate more than one door in a lift shaft
to be opened at the same time, the following additional conditions should be
observed :
(i) the maximum number of landing doors to be kept open at the same time is
three; and
(ii) no hot works or welding operations will be carried out.
(c) Where landing doors are to be taken down, removal of more than one landing doors
in a lift shaft at any one time should be avoided.
(d) If more than one landing doors are to be removed at any one time, the door openings
should be protected by temporary hoarding having an FRP of not less than one hour.
(e) Openings in the hoarding are not allowed except small openings for ventilation of the
lift shaft and access doors to the lift shaft.
(f) Each ventilation opening should not exceed 5,500mm2 in area and should be located
at the upper portion of the hoarding. The number of such openings should be limited
to two per liftway, subject to a maximum of four in the hoarding.
(g) Access door in the hoarding should have the same FRP as the hoarding. Such door
should be self-closing and provided with locking device to prevent unauthorized
access. The locking device should be so arranged that it can be readily opened from
the inside without the use of a key.
(h) Temporary hoarding to enclose a lift shaft should not be erected to cause, as far as
reasonably practicable, any obstruction or reduction in width of any escape route.
(i) Any temporary works including scaffoldings, formworks, plankings and struttings
etc. erected inside a lift shaft during maintenance or replacement works should be
constructed of non-combustible materials.
(j) Arrangements should be made to ensure that all temporary openings during
maintenance or replacement works are protected by either having all opened lift
landing doors returned to the closed position or enclosing such openings properly
with fire resisting hoarding before leaving unattended any unfinished works during
lunch breaks or at the end of a day’s work.

Amendments and Clarification to

Code of Practice for the Provision of
Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996
This practice note is to announce the following amendments to paragraph

14(3)(b) of the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996
in order to clarify the interpretation relating to travel distance involving ‘dead-end’
situation :
The original paragraph 14(3)(b) should be deleted and substituted by -
“Where the direction of travel from an exit door of a room to a staircase or a

point of discharge to a street or to an open area at ground level complying
with paragraph 8.2, as the case may be, is possible in one direction only
(i.e. dead-end), no point of a room should be more than 18m (i.e. the sum
of direct distance and travel distance) from an exit or from a point, from
which travel in different directions to 2 or more exits is available. In the
latter case, the maximum distance to one of the exits should not exceed the
limitations on direct distance and travel distance stipulated in paragraph
14.”
2. The above amendments would be incorporated in the next reprint of the

Code.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/6/A (VII)
First issued : August 1997 (AD/LM)
Index under : Code of Practice for, Means of Escape


Planning and Design of Drainage Works
This practice note sets out the Building Authority’s requirements as

regards the planning and design of common drains for new buildings.
Introduction
2. In the course of carrying out drainage repair and maintenance, difficulties

have often been encountered in obtaining access to both the underground drains and
above ground drainage pipes which run under/inside private premises such as shops
(in particular restaurants and restaurant kitchens) and domestic flats. Both
investigation and repair works, which may necessitate entry into private premises,
opening up of floor slabs, and trench excavations, will cause much inconvenience to
occupants. In the worst cases, the premises may have to be closed to effect the
repair works.
Improvement
3. In order to obviate such access difficulties and to facilitate the future

maintenance of common drains, I shall require under section 28(1) of the Buildings
Ordinance that the following be complied with: -
(a) Except drains in car-parking floors, all common underground drains for
all new developments shall run in a space or land which is ‘sterilized’ or
otherwise designated as common area of the development;
(b) Where internal common soil and waste stacks are proposed in residential
buildings not intended for single ownership, such stacks shall be located
in the common area of the development. Where pipe-ducts or pipe
wells are proposed to house common soil and waste stacks, they shall
satisfy the following criteria respectively.
(I) Pipe Ducts
(i) These pipe-ducts shall be accessible from a common area;
(ii) An unobstructed working space, of not less than 700 mm in

front of the pipes, shall be provided for maintenance and
repair of the pipeworks.
(iii) The size of doors or panels providing access to the pipe-ducts

shall not be less than 600 mm by 2000 mm.
/(II) …..
-2-
(II) Pipe Wells
(i) The size of pipe well shall not be less than 1200 mm x 1500
mm.
(ii) No opening will be allowed in a pipe well other than access

points for inspection and maintenance, which shall be from
common areas. Access points shall be provided to the pipe
well at not more than 21 storeys apart.
(iii) Cat ladder with proper guard rings shall be installed in the full
height of the pipe well for inspection and maintenance purposes.
(iv) Grating platforms shall be provided at intervals of not more

than 4 floors.
(v) The size of opening at every intermediate access point shall not
be less than 600 mm wide by 2000 mm high. Such opening
shall be protected by a door having a FRP not less than half of
the enclosure wall.
(vi) A ventilation opening having a minimum net area of 1/10th of

the horizontal area of the pipe well shall be provided at both the
top and bottom of the pipe well.
The area of pipe ducts and pipe wells could be exempted from plot
ratio/gross floor area calculations. Open pipe wells may also be
exempted from site coverage calculations. A sample illustration of the
design of a pipe well is attached at Appendix A for general reference.
(c) The lowest level of re-entrants and light wells housing external soil and
waste stacks shall be designated as common areas and such areas shall be
provided with adequate access which could be in the form of cat-ladder
where necessary, for carrying out maintenance work and cleansing;
(d) For residential premises other than single family residence, no pipeworks
shall protrude into the private premises of the floor below;
(e) Except for buildings not more than three storeys high, a separate stack,
connected direct to a manhole, shall be provided to serve for the sanitary
fitments at the floor, which is at the same level as the bottom of the
waste/foul water stack;
(f) The nominal diameter of every soil pipe from water closet fitments or
slop sinks shall be not less than the diameter of the outlet of any of the
fitments it serves; and
/(g) …..
-3-
(g) Soil and wastewater pipes shall only have bends when a change in
direction is unavoidable. The radius of the bends at the bottom of
stacks shall under no circumstances be less than four times the radius of
the stack measured from the centerline whenever practicably possible,
but under no circumstances be less than 200 mm measured from the
centerline.
4. With immediate effect, all newly submitted drainage plans which do not
comply with the requirement of paragraph 3(a) may be disapproved under section
16(1)(d) and 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance. All new drainage plans after
1 September 2004 shall comply with all the requirements set out in paragraphs 3(a) to
(g).
5. To provide flexibility in the design of pipeworks to satisfy the

requirement set out in paragraph 3(d) above, the Building Authority is prepared to
consider an application for modification of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments,
Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 25(1) to permit the total length
of pipeworks from a bathtub or shower tray to a trap up to 750 mm at a minimum
gradient of 1:40.
6. Reference shall also be made to PNAP 218 on the facilities for the
maintenance of external building drainage pipes. Consideration for separate pipes in
zones for high rise buildings shall also be made in the design stage for future
maintenance and repair.
7. While the requirement set out in paragraph 3(d) does not apply to
non-domestic premises, authorized persons are encouraged to adopt the same
arrangement, wherever possible, for drainage pipes in such premises.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/21 (III)

Last revision June 1999 (AD/D)
This revision May 2004 (AD/NB1) (general revision)
Index under : Drainage works

(APP-93)

Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance, Cap. 502
Introduction
The Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance (the ”FS(CP)O”)

and its amendment Ordinance came into operation on 2 May 1997 and 1 June 1998
respectively. The purpose of the FS(CP)O is to provide better protection from the
risk of fire for occupants and users of, and visitors to, prescribed commercial
premises and specified commercial buildings, by upgrading the premises or buildings
to current fire safety standards. Owners/occupiers of such premises or buildings are
required to improve the fire safety measures including the fire service installations and
equipment as well as the fire safety construction of the premises/buildings.
Application
Prescribed Commercial Premises (PCP)
2. A building or part of a building is PCP under the scope of the FS(CP)O

if:
(a) the building or part is used, or is proposed to be used, for carrying on

any of the following commercial activities:
(i) banking (other than merchant banking);

(ii) conduct of off-course betting;
(iii) conduct of a jewelry or goldsmith’s business on
premises that have a security area;
(iv) use as a supermarket, hypermarket or department store;
(v) use as a shopping arcade;
AND
(b) the total floor area of the building or part exceeds 230m2.
3. For the purpose of calculating the floor area of the PCP in paragraph
2(b) above, reference should be made to Sections 3(3) to 3(6) of the FS(CP)O.
Appendix A illustrates some examples on demarcation of total floor area of shopping
arcades. If difficulty is encountered in ascertaining whether certain commercial
premises falls within the purview of the FS(CP)O, AP/RSE may approach the Fire
Safety Section of the Buildings Department for clarification.
/Specified …..
-2-
Specified Commercial Buildings (SCB)
4. A building is a SCB under the scope of the FS(CP)O if:
(a) the building was constructed to be used or is being used for the
purposes of office, business, trade or any entertainment;
AND
(b) with plans of its building works first submitted to the Building
Authority for his approval on or before 1 March 1987; or
(c) constructed on or before 1 March 1987 where no plans of its

building works were submitted on or before that date to the
Building Authority for approval.
Fire Safety Measures
5. All or any of the following fire safety measures for a SCB or PCP may
need to be complied with to the current standards:
(a) Construction requirements for the provision of:
(i) adequate means of escape from the premises or

building in the event of fire;
(ii) adequate means of access to the premises or building
to facilitate access for firefighting and rescue;
(iii) measures to inhibit the spread of fire and to ensure the
integrity of the structure of the building or part of the
building where the premises are located.
(b) Fire service installations and equipment requirements for the

provision of:
(i) automatic sprinkler system;

(ii) automatic cut-off devices for a mechanical ventilation
system;
(iii) emergency lighting;
(iv) manual fire alarms;
(v) portable fire extinguishers;
(vi) fire hydrant and hose reel system;
(vii) the requirements specified in the Code of Practice for
Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment
1994.
/Construction …..
-3-
Construction Requirements
6. In relation to the construction requirements mentioned in paragraph 5(a)

above, the scope of requirements is listed in Schedule 2 and Schedule 5 of the
FS(CP)O for PCP and SCB respectively. The corresponding detailed requirements
are set out in the following codes of practice:
• Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in

Case of Fire 1996;
• Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996;
and
• Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting and
Rescue 1995.
Enforcement Authority
7. For the purpose of the FS(CP)O:
(a) The Director of Buildings is the enforcement authority for the

provision of fire safety measures in the planning, design and
construction of the premises/buildings; and
(b) The Director of Fire Services is the enforcement authority for

the provision of fire service installations or equipment in the
premises/buildings.
Fire Safety Section
8. The Fire Safety Section headed by the Chief Building Surveyor/Fire

Safety is set up in the Buildings Department to administer the FS(CP)O in respect of
the construction requirements.
Directions and Orders
9. Under sections 5(1) or 5(1)(A) of the FS(CP)O, the Director of

Buildings may serve on the owner of PCP a fire safety direction (FSDn) or the owner
of a SCB a fire safety improvement direction (FSIDn) directing the owner to comply
with all or any of the requirements specified in Schedule 2 or 5 of the Ordinance.
10. Upon conviction of the offence of failure to comply with a FSDn or

FSIDn, the Director of Buildings may, under section 6(1) of the FS(CP)O, apply to a
magistrate to make a fire safety compliance order or a fire safety improvement
compliance order for PCP or a SCB respectively directing the owner to comply with
all or any of the requirements specified in the FSDn or FSIDn to which the offence is
related.
/Difficulties …..
-4-
Difficulties in Complying with Construction Requirements
11. Whilst it is important to provide better fire safety standards to PCP or a

SCB, the Director of Buildings recognizes that in some situations there may be
practical difficulties in providing the construction items as specified in paragraph 6
above. In cases of genuine difficulties, the Director of Buildings is prepared to
consider owners’ alternative improvement measures based on fire safety engineering
principles, which will equally achieve the primary objectives of the FS(CP)O.
Submission of Plans for Approval
12. Where non-exempted building works are proposed either to voluntarily

comply with the FS(CP)O or to satisfy the requirements of a FSDn or a FSIDn, an
application for approval under the Buildings Ordinance should be made in the usual
manner. However, for such applications, three instead of two sets of plans showing
fire service installations and equipment are required by the Fire Services Department
for processing.
13. No fee will be charged under Building (Administration) Regulation 42

if the proposals are entirely for improving the fire safety measures of the existing
premises or building pursuant to the requirements of the FSDn or FSIDn.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD/FS/OA/165

This revision October 2007 (AD/EB2) – general revision to include SCB
Index under : Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance

Specified Commercial Buildings
Prescribed Commercial Premises
Prescribed Commercial Activities
Fire Safety Direction
Fire Safety Improvement Direction
APP-94

Sale Offices and Show Flats on Construction Sites
There is an increasing tendency that developers wish to operate sale offices and
exhibit show flats on construction sites well before the new buildings are completed and
certified for occupation. Since sale offices and show flats, which are open to the general
public, are incompatible with construction works, for the sake of public safety, the
following principles must be observed:
(a) No part of any new building, whether still under construction or

substantially completed, should be occupied and used as a sale office
or a show flat without a temporary occupation permit.
(b) No temporary building within a construction site should be occupied

and used as a sale office or a show flat without a temporary building
permit and a temporary occupation permit for that purpose.
2. In considering applications for such temporary occupation and usage, the

Building Authority has to be satisfied that -
(a) the premises intended to be occupied and used as a sale office or a

show flat is structurally suitable for the purpose;
(b) the premises is adequately segregated from the rest of the construction
works in terms of fire resisting construction;
(c) there is available adequate independent and protected means of access

and escape to and from the premises with direct connection with a
street; and
(d) the premises is provided with adequate fire service installations to the
satisfaction of the Director of Fire Services;
3. In permitting such temporary occupation and usage, the Building Authority may,
depending on the circumstances, impose suitable conditions-
(a) to limit the period within which the premises may be so occupied and
used;
(b) to restrict the number of persons to be accommodated at any one time;

and
(c) if necessary, to require the partial or total suspension of building

works on the construction site during the period of such occupation
and use.
/ 4. Any ...
-2-
4. Any violation of the above requirements or conditions may be liable to

revocation of the temporary occupation permit and prosecution under section 40(1) and (5)
of the Buildings Ordinance.
5. Authorised persons should take note of the above principles and when
making an application for such occupation and usage they should submit sufficient
information to justify viability in terms of paragraph 2 above and specify the period
therefor and the expected number of persons to be accommodated.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Index under : Sale offices

Show flats
TOP

Contractors Registration
Sections 8, 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 8E and 8F of the Buildings Ordinance (BO)
govern the current contractors registration system. The prime objective of the system
is to ensure that only contractors who are able to perform their duties and
responsibilities in a competent manner as well as fully conversant with the relevant
statutory requirements and the current building control system are registered and
allowed to carry out building works and street works.
Registers of General Building Contractors and Specialist Contractors
2. Under section 8A of the BO, there are two contractors’ registers, namely
the general building contractors’ register and the specialist contractors’ register, being
kept by the Building Authority (BA). In respect of the specialist contractors’ register,
sub-registers of different categories of specialized works are maintained.
3. The names of the contractors in the registers are published annually in the
Gazette. Relevant registration particulars of the contractors, including the name of the
contractor, the name of its Authorized Signatory as referred to in paragraph 9(a)
below, its registration number and the expiry date of its registration are also posted on
the Buildings Department website.
Categories of Specialized Works
4. Section 8A(2) of the BO empowers the BA to designate by notice in the

Gazette categories of building works as specialised works that are required to be
carried out by registered specialist contractors (RSC). Currently, there are five
categories of works designated as specialized works. They are:
(a) Demolition works;

(b) Foundation works;
(c) Ground investigation field works;
(d) Site formation works; and
(e) Ventilation works.
Scope of Works
5. Registered general building contractors (RGBC) may carry out general

building works and street works which do not include any specialized works in the
designated categories while RSC may only carry out specialized works in their
corresponding categories in the sub-registers in which they have been entered.
/6. …...
-2-
6. A building owner is required to appoint contractors from the appropriate

register corresponding to the category of building works to be carried out. The scope
of works of RGBC and that of RSC in the demolition, foundation, ground
investigation field works, site formation and ventilation categories are detailed at
Appendix A.
7. To facilitate the operation of the construction industry, certain building

works are permitted to be carried out by more than one category of contractors.
Detailed guidelines are also provided at Appendix A.
Requirements for Registration
8. Under Section 8B(2) of the BO, an applicant for registration as an RGBC

or RSC must satisfy the BA on the following aspects:
(a) if it is a corporation, the adequacy of its management structure;
(b) the appropriate experience and qualifications of its personnel;
(c) its ability to have access to plant and resources; and
(d) the ability of the person appointed to act for the applicant for the
purposes of the BO to understand building works and street
works through relevant experience and a general knowledge of
the basic statutory requirements.
Authorized Signatory, Technical Director and Other Officer
9. In considering each application, the BA is to have regard to the

qualifications, competence and experience of the following key personnel of the
applicant:
(a) a minimum of one person appointed by the applicant to act for

the applicant for the purposes of the BO, hereinafter referred to
as an ‘Authorized Signatory’ (AS);
(b) for a corporation – a minimum of one director from the board of

directors of the applicant, hereinafter referred to as a ‘Technical
Director’ (TD) who is authorized by the board to:
(i) have access to plant and resources;
(ii) provide technical and financial support for the execution

of building works and street works; and
(iii) make decisions for the company and supervise the AS

and other personnel
/for …..
-3-
for the purpose of ensuring that the works are carried out in
accordance with the BO; and
(c) for a corporation which appoints a director who does not possess
the required qualification or experience as TD to manage the
carrying out of building works and street works - an ‘Other
Officer’ (OO) or an AS authorized by the board of directors to
assist the TD.
10. In addition to the above key personnel, the applicant is also required to
demonstrate that it has employed appropriate qualified staff to assist the applicant and
the above key personnel to execute, manage and supervise the building works and
street works.
Persons Eligible to be the AS, TD or OO
11. The following persons are eligible to become the AS and TD of the
applicant:
(a) If the applicant is an individual, the applicant is the only person

eligible to act as the AS.
(b) If the applicant is a partnership, any partner appointed by all the

other partners is eligible to act as the AS.
(c) If the applicant is a corporation, a suitable person appointed by

the board of directors is eligible to act as the AS, whereas the
TD must be a director appointed under the Companies Ordinance
and appointed by the board of directors to perform the role as
TD.
12. A person is permitted to take up the roles of the AS as well as the TD of

a corporation at the same time provided that he meets the requirements of both the AS
and TD.
13. If an OO is required, he is permitted to assist one TD only. In such case,

the AS is not permitted to take up the role of an OO.
Appointment of AS/TD/OO for Registered Contractors
14. To ensure that adequate supervision and proper management are provided
for carrying out of building works and street works and to avoid possible situations of
conflict of interest, persons who have been accepted by the BA as the AS/TD/OO for
a registered contractor will not be accepted as the AS/TD/OO for another contractor
simultaneously for its registration, except under the special sharing arrangement for
holding and subsidiary companies.
/Contractors …..
-4-
Contractors Registration Committee
15. Contractors Registration Committees (CRC) are independent bodies

appointed by the BA under Section 8 of the BO. The function of a CRC is to assist
the BA in considering applications for inclusion in the contractors’ registers by:
(a) examining the qualifications of applicants;
(b) inquiring as the CRC considers necessary to ascertain whether an

applicant has the relevant experience;
(c) conducting interviews with the applicants and their key

personnel; and
(d) advising the BA to accept, defer or reject applications for

inclusion in the relevant register.
16. Under section 8B(10) of the BO, the BA must not include the name of an
applicant in the register of general building contractors or specialist contractors unless
the relevant CRC so recommends. Besides, the BA may seek advice from the relevant
CRC in respect of applications for addition of AS/TD/OO to a registered contractor.
17. In processing applications for renewal and restoration of names to the

registers, the BA may also seek advice from the relevant CRC under section 8C(4)
and section 8D(3) respectively of the BO.
Composition of a CRC
18. Under Section 8(3) of the BO, a CRC appointed to assist the BA in
considering applications for inclusion in the register of general building contractors
shall consist of:
(a) the BA’s representative;
(b) 3 persons, 1 of whom is nominated by each of the Architects

Registration Board (ARB), the Engineers Registration Board
(ERB) and the Surveyors Registration Board (SRB) from the lists
of authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE)
and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE);
(c) 3 persons nominated by The Hong Kong Construction

Association Ltd.;
(d) 1 person nominated by The Hong Kong E & M Contractors’

Association Limited; and
(e) 1 person selected by the BA from among persons nominated by

such bodies as the BA may think fit.
/19. …..
-5-
19. Under Section 8(3A) of the BO, a CRC appointed to assist the BA in
considering applications for inclusion in the register of specialist contractors shall
consist of:
(a) the BA’s representative;
(b) 3 persons, 1 of whom is nominated by each of the ARB, the ERB

and the SRB from the lists of AP, RSE and RGE;
(c) 3 persons nominated by The Hong Kong Construction Association

Ltd.; and
(d) 2 persons selected by the BA from among persons nominated by

such bodies as the BA may think fit.
20. Under section 8(6) of the BO, the members of the committee will elect the
Chairman from the members of the committee other than the BA’s representative.
Application Procedures and Requirements
21. Details of the application procedures and requirements for inclusion of

names in the contractor registers, renewal and restoration of registration are provided
in Practice Note for Registered Contractors 38.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : REG/RC/13/3
First issue November 1997 (AD/LM)

Last revision December 2004 (AD/Support)
This revision June 2007 (AD/Support) - Paragraphs 8(c), 9(c) and 14 amended.
Index under : BO s8
Contractors Registration
Contractors Registration Committee
Scope of Works for Contractors
Appendix A
(PNAP 214)
(APP-96)
Scope of Works
of Registered General Building Contractors and Registered Specialist Contractors
Registered General Building Contractor (RGBC)
The RGBC is qualified under the BO to carry out any building works
and street works which are not designated by the BA as a category of specialized
works.
Registered Specialist Contractor in the Demolition Works Category (RSC(D))
2. All demolition works to which the Building (Demolition Works)

Regulations apply are specialized works of the demolition works category unless all
the following circumstances exist:
(a) The building to be demolished is not in Scheduled Area

Number 1.
(b) No part of the building to be demolished exceeds 10m above

adjacent ground.
(c) No structural element to be demolished has a clear span

exceeding 6m or a cantilever span exceeding 1m.
(d) No part of the building to be demolished is in pre-stressed

concrete construction.
(e) No part of the building to be demolished is an earth-retaining

structure with retaining height exceeding 1.5m.
(f) There are no other buildings within 5m from the building to

be demolished.
Registered Specialist Contractor in the Foundation Works Category (RSC(F))
3. All foundation works, except where the penetration depth of the

foundation element does not exceed 3 m, are specialized works of the foundation
works category.
Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ground Investigation Field Works

Category (RSC(GIFW))
4. The scope of works for RSC(GIFW) is as follows:
(a) all exploratory drilling, boring, excavation and probing of land

for obtaining information on ground conditions, and includes
/the …..
-1-
Appendix A
(PNAP 214)
(APP-96)
the installation of instrument, sampling, field testing in
boreholes, and any other associated site operations;
(b) pre-drilling for foundation works;
(c) proof-drilling for cast-in-place concrete foundation, mini-piles

and socketed H-piles; and
(d) field testing of ground, the loading capacity of which has been
improved by ground treatment.
5. The following list of works, not exhaustive, are examples of works

which are required to be undertaken by RSC (GIFW):
Types of Works Details of Works

Excavation Trial pits, trial trenches, slope surface stripping.
Boreholes Hand auger boring, corehole drilling, light cable
percussion boring, rotary open hole drilling, rotary core
drilling.
Sampling Disturbed samples, U76 samples, U100 samples, split
barrel standard penetration test samples, thin-walled
piston samples, continuous soil and rock samples, rotary
core samples, Mazier samples, block samples,
groundwater samples and vibro-coring.
Instrumentation Installation of instruments e.g. piezometers, standpipes,
tensiometers, piezometer buckets, inclinometers,
extensometers.
Field Testing in Standard penetration test, vane shear test, permeability
Boreholes tests, packer (water absorption) test, plate test,
pressuremeter test, borehole discontinuity survey
(impression packer survey) and cone penetration test.
Cast-in-Place Concrete Pre-drilling to determine rockhead level, core-drilling to
Foundation verify quality of founding stratum.
Ground Treatment Field testing to verify load carrying capacity of treated
ground.
Registered Specialist Contractor in the Site Formation Works Category

(RSC(SF))
6. All site formation works are specialized works of the site formation
category, unless all the following circumstances exist:
(a) The maximum gradient across the lot from boundary to

boundary is not more than 15 degrees.
/(b) …..
-2-
Appendix A
(PNAP 214)
(APP-96)
(b) The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside
the lot boundary in any direction is less than 15 degrees.
(c) There is no slope within the area 10m outside the lot boundary
steeper than 30 degrees or higher than 1.5m.
(d) There is no retaining wall or terrace wall, either within the lot
or within the area 10m outside the lot, which is higher than
1.5m.
(e) No retaining walls or terrace walls higher than 1.5m are to be

constructed.
(f) No slopes steeper than 30 degrees nor higher than 1.5m are to
be constructed.
(g) The combined height of retaining wall and slope to be

constructed does not exceed 1.5m.
Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ventilation Works Category (RSC(V))
7. All ventilating system works to which the Building (Ventilating

Systems) Regulations apply are specialized works under the ventilation category.
Works Which May be Carried out by More Than One Category of Contractors
8. It is difficult to give an exhaustive or absolute demarcation among the

scope of works of different categories of contractors. Whether the contractors in a
category possess the recognized competence, experience, expertise, plant and
resources in carrying out the proposed works should be the primary consideration of
the AP/RSE/RGE. Additional guidelines in paragraph 10 below are provided for
reference.
9. In situations not covered by any of the published guidelines and when

unique site characteristics call for special consideration, the AP/RSE/RGE of the
proposed works are expected to make professional judgment according to the
aforesaid principles on the selection of the appropriate category of contractors.
Should such circumstances arise, the BA will consider proposals from the
AP/RSE/RGE on a case by case basis.
10. Additional guidelines on the demarcation of different scope of works

among categories of contractors are as follows:
(a) Temporary Works
RGBC, RSC(F), RSC(SF) and RSC(D) may generally carry

out temporary works which are associated with the execution
/of …..
-3-
Appendix A
(PNAP 214)
(APP-96)
of the respective types of general building works and specialist
works. These temporary works include hoarding, covered
walkways, sheet piling, soldier piling, pipe piling, shoring,
rock filled slopes for demolition, protective and precautionary
measures.
(b) Pile Cap Works
Pile cap works may be carried out either by RGBC or

RSC(F). These contractors may also carry out the associated
temporary works, such as excavation and lateral support
works, which are necessary for the construction of the pile
caps.
(c) Basement Works
Excavation for basements, construction of basement walls,

slabs and drains, which do not form part of pile caps fall
within the scope of works of the RGBC.
(d) Foundation Works
Diaphragm walls should be carried out by RSC(F) when the

penetration depth exceeds 3m. The penetration depths of
foundation elements are generally measured from the ground
level which may be existing or newly formed. Spread footing
and raft foundation works may be carried out by either
RSC(F) or RGBC.
(e) Landscape and Street Works
On grade roads, streets, landscape features, etc., should

generally be carried out by RGBC. Such works which do not
involve the construction of a roof or foundation, and drains
associated with landscape works in the periphery of buildings
not forming part of the permanent drains of buildings may also
be carried out by RSC(SF).
(f) Retaining Structures
Retaining structures involving diaphragm walls, bore-piles,

caissons or other foundation works, excluding those
mentioned in paragraph 10(a) above should be carried out by
RSC(F).
Appendix B of PNAP 66 stipulates that mini piles are not to

take lateral loads and therefore not commonly used in site
formation works. Its construction could be up to 400mm
/diameter …..
-4-
Appendix A
(PNAP 214)
(APP-96)
diameter and should therefore be carried out by RSC(F) or if
less than 3m deep, by RGBC but not RSC(SF).
(g) Dredging Works
The general meaning of dredging in construction involves

taking up of mud from sea or riverbeds that should generally
be classified as site formation works. If the said works fall

within the scope of works as set out in paragraph 6 above, it
should be carried out by RSC(SF), otherwise, it should be
carried out by RGBC.
(h) Reclamation Works
Reclamation works usually involves the forming of land,

construction of seawalls or retaining structures and should be
considered as site formation works to be carried out by
RSC(SF).
(i) Trial Pit Works
Trial pit works should normally be carried out by

RSC(GIFW). Other registered contractors except RSC(V)
may also carry out such works if the trial pits are excavated
solely for the following purposes:
(i) exposing existing shallow foundations;
(ii) locating utilities, underground structures and

installations;
(iii) verifying the density of the backfill soil behind

retaining structures (Note: insitu-density test has to be
carried out by a laboratory which is accredited by the
Hong Kong Accreditation Service for performing such
test); and
(iv) other studies not involving the investigation of ground

conditions or soil/rock descriptions, e.g.
archaeological studies.
(Rev. 12/2004)
-5-

Consent Procedures for Building Works and Street Works
Introduction
This practice note provides guidelines on consent application.
Fast Track Application
2. BD has put in place a system for fast-track processing of application for

consent to commence works from the Building Authority (BA) for certain building
works and street works. The procedures aim to facilitate building development by
reducing the number of times authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers
(RSE) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE) are required to submit consent
applications.
3. The procedures for securing the BA’s consent to the commencement of

building works and street works are laid down in the Buildings Ordinance (BO) and the
Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R). With the implementation of the
fast-track processing of consent application, there are now two sets of procedures :
• The normal procedure – This is applicable to all building

works and street works. It should be followed for all Type I
works and if so opted by an AP or RSE, for Type II works;
and
• The fast-track procedure – This is only applicable to Type II

works.
Classification of works
4. For the purposes of this practice note and the administration of section
14(1)(b) of the BO and regulation 31 and 33 of the B(A)R, building works and street
works are classified into two types:
(a) “Type I works” refers to all the works, which have not been issued
with a first consent of the BA. In this context, a first consent
means the BA’s consent granted for the first time for the works. It
does not include the BA’s consent required for the works shown on
amendment plans, but include major revisions or amendment plans
containing material deviations, approved subsequently; and
(b) “Type II works” refers to the works for which the BA has given
approval and a first consent, in respect of which an amendment to
plans already approved is proposed. It excludes major revisions or
amendment plans containing material deviations to the plans
previously approved.
/5. ….
-2–
5. An AP, RSE or RGE wishing to take advantage of the fast-track procedures

should mark clearly on the lower right-hand corner of his plans the following
statement :
“The works shown on these plans are Type II works

(curtain wall works, for example) in respect of which
consent is applied for the purpose of Fast Track
consent application under regulation 33 of the
Building (Administration) Regulations.”
6. It is the responsibility of an AP, an RSE and an RGE to consider thoroughly

and ensure whether the works are Type I or Type II. Where the BA does not accept
the classification indicated on a plan, he may, by invoking section 16(3)(a) or (b) of the
BO, refuse to grant consent under the new procedures.
7. The new procedures have the obvious advantage of allowing for technical
and minor adjustments to be made to the works without suspending the works on site.
For any works to qualify as Type II works, it is essential that consent should have
already been obtained earlier for the works.
8. To facilitate the operation of the consent application system, APs, RSEs and
RGEs are requested to adopt the following terminology for differentiating the different
types of building works or street works:
• Demolition works
• Ground investigation works
• Site formation works
• Slope/retaining wall works
• Excavation and lateral support works
• Foundation works
• Cap/footing/basement works
• Superstructure works
• Curtain wall works/cladding works
• Alteration and addition works
• Street or access road works
/• Drainage …..
-3–
• Drainage works
• Tunnel works
• General building works (i.e., works shown on general

building plans, often synonymous with superstructure works)
Note : More detailed description may be added in brackets after the above terms as
necessary, e.g. Excavation and Lateral Support Works (Sheet Piles) and Site
Formation Works (Phase I).
Normal procedures
9. The normal procedures require separate applications to be made for the

BA’s approval of plans and consent for commencement of the approved works. These
procedures should be followed in respect of all Type I works and where an AP, RSE or
RGE so chooses, in respect of any Type II works.
Fast-track procedures
10. The fast-track procedures operate on the principle that approval and consent
are given at the same time in respect of Type II works. It follows, therefore, that the
consent given is limited to what is shown on the plans approved. If approval of other
types of plans are required, e.g., corresponding structural amendment plans, the works,
for which approval and consent have been given, should not be executed on site until
approval of the structural amendment plans have been obtained together with the
consent for the structural amendment works.
11. The procedures to be followed are as follows :
Step 1 : Statement in accordance with paragraph 5 above is

made by an AP, RSE or RGE on the plans for Type II
works submitted in the application for approval and
consent at the same time.
Step 2 : If the plans cannot be approved, the disapproval of the

plans and the refusal to give consent are issued to the
AP, RSE or RGE at the same time.
Step 3 : If the plans can be approved, approval and consent will

be given at the same time with the required consent
notice in respect of the works so approved and
consented to. The BA expects the AP, the RSE and
the RGE to ensure that the works so approved and
consented to are compatible with all previously
approved plans and that all conditions imposed are
complied with.
/Step 4 …..
-4–
Step 4 : If the plans can be approved but consent cannot be

given, the plans will be approved and a notification of
refusal of consent issued. In the circumstances the AP,
RSE or RGE should follow the normal procedures for
securing consent for the approved amendment works.
Step 5 : For any subsequent submission of amendment plans,

Step 3 or Step 4 as appropriate will be taken.
Specified Forms
12. In lieu of the specified form BA8, a statement in accordance with paragraph
5 above will be accepted for the purpose of application for consent for Type II works.
Sanctions
13. APs, RSEs and RGEs wishing to take advantage of the fast track procedures
for the Type II works should ensure that all necessary consents are obtained and all
requirements are met prior to the commencement of the works. In this regard, APs,
RSEs and RGEs are reminded of the sanctions contained in sections 7 and 40 of the BO.
Validity of Plans
14. While the BO does not prescribe a validity period of approved plans, section
16(3)(d) of the BO does provide the BA with the opportunity to review any plans that
are approved more than 2 years ago upon the application for consent to commence
works. The BA will invoke section 16(3)(d) of the BO to refuse consent if the building
works or street works shown on the approved plans do not comply with the current
standards specified in the BO and allied regulations. However, section 16(3)(d) of the
BO will not be invoked to enforce approved or draft outline zoning plans introduced
under the Town Planning Ordinance after the approval of the building plans.
Application of New Regulations
15. Section 39(2) of the BO provides that if any building works or street works
are being carried out or consent to their commencement has been given before the
coming into operation of any new regulation, the provisions of the law prior to the new
regulation shall apply to such works. In this connection, if the building works or
street works required under a new regulation are not shown on any plans that have been
approved within a period of 2 years at the time of application for first consent to
commence works, the BA may invoke section 16(3)(a) of the BO to refuse the consent
application on the ground that the BA has not received and given his approval to all the
plans prescribed by regulations. In cases where section 16(3)(a) of the BO is not
invoked to refuse the application for first consent, such as in the case where plans
incorporating the required building works or street works have been approved but not
conforming to the standards specified in the new regulations, the AP, RSE or RGE is
responsible to ensure that the building works or street works to be carried out comply
with the standards set out in the new regulations pursuant to the provisions of section
/39(2) of…
-5–
39(2) of the BO. In such cases, the AP/RSE/RGE should submit amended plans for
approval as necessary, before application for an occupation permit. If the building
works or street works carried out do not comply with the new regulation, the
application for occupation permit may be refused under section 21(6) of the BO.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/OM/5/3
BD GR/1-50/43/0

This revision December 2005 (AD/NB1) (General revision)
Index under : Consent

Consent procedures
Type I works
Type II works
Validity of plans
Application of new regulations
BO s.39(2)
Lighting and Ventilation for Bathrooms

and Lavatories in Domestic Buildings
To promote the cause of environmental protection, the argument has often

been made that flexibility should be allowed in administering Building (Planning)
Regulation 36 in relation to windows for bathrooms and lavatories in domestic buildings.
The Building Authority takes a sympathetic view on this argument having regard to
advances in ventilation technology and the need for greater freedom in the design of
buildings.
2. The Building Authority will give favourable consideration to an

application for modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 36 in respect of
bathrooms and lavatories where the following criteria are met :
• The room is part of a unit of accommodation for domestic use;
• The room is of a reasonable size; and
• The modification to be granted is unlikely to result in standards of

public health and safety being compromised.
3. Upon the grant of a modification of the Regulation, the Building Authority

will impose the following conditions :
a) a system of artificial lighting and mechanical ventilation

producing 5 air changes per hour is in operation at any time when
the room is in use. The change of air shall be with the outside of
the building and to achieve this, the use of ventilation ducting
provided with access for cleaning is acceptable;
b) there is permanent ventilation to the ‘open air’, the ‘external air’

or with another room which is provided with a window meeting
the area requirement for the combined windows. The permanent
ventilation may be in the form of a vent duct with access for
cleaning, an aperture in a wall or a door suitably located and
permanently open or protected with lourves having a minimum
size of 1/20 of the floor area of the room;
c) unless demountable or replaceable vent duct is used, at least one

access door or panel of minimum size 150 x 225mm (for vent
duct of size 150 x 150 mm or above), or 100 x 225 mm (for vent
/duct
…
- 2 -
duct of size under 150 x 150 mm) shall be provided for every 4
metres of the vent duct at easily accessible location and at the
change of direction, adjacent to turning vanes or adjacent to
dampers; and
d) the requirements of Building (Planning) Regulation 35A and

Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural
Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-27 on
water heating are compiled with, where applicable.
In order to maintain the vent duct in hygienic condition, the vent duct should preferably
be inspected and cleaned annually.
Application
4. For the avoidance of doubt, this practice note is applicable to bathrooms

and lavatories in the domestic part of new buildings only, ie buildings or part thereof in
other uses and all existing buildings may not rely on this practice note for exemption from
complying with the statutory requirements.
Further review
5. The arrangements announced in this practice note will be kept under

review and, if necessary or appropriate, revisions may be introduced.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : GP/BREG/P/18 (IV)
This PNAP is previous known as PNAP 219

Last revision : March 2000
This revision : February 2010 (AD/NB1) (para. 3 amended)

Flushing Volume for Flushing Cisterns
Current Requirements
Regulation 19 of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,

Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations (Drainage Regulations) requires flushing cisterns of
watercloset fitments to have a discharge between 9 and 14 litres. Under the current Waterworks
Regulations, flushing cisterns shall be of the valveless syphonic type and the flushing volume
shall be within the range of 7.5 and 15 litres.
Relaxation
2. With the application of modern technology in the design of water closet flushing
system, the effectiveness of flushing can be maintained with a reduced discharge. Therefore, to
conserve our valuable water resources, both the Building Authority (BA) and Water Authority
would have no objection to relaxing the use of syphonic flushing cisterns with discharge less
than that required by the current regulations provided that the associated toilet bowls are
compatible with the cisterns and the syphonic action is sufficient for the wastes in the toilet
bowls to be cleared effectively by a single flush.
3. On your confirmation that the effectiveness of the flushing would not be affected,
the BA is prepared to modify regulation 19 of the Drainage Regulations on minimum discharge
for individual water closet flushing system.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/SF/1(II)
First issue May 2000 (AD/D)
Index under : B(SSFPBWL)R 19 – Flushing volume

Flushing cistern

___________________________________________________________________________
Structural Plans of Glass Reinforced Polyester (GRP) Water Tanks
Water tanks constructed in glass reinforced polyester (abbreviated as GRP) are

building works subject to control under the Buildings Ordinance. This practice note gives
guidelines on the preparation of plans showing structural details of these GRP water tanks
and the related test requirements.
Special Aspects of GRP
2. Compared with a traditional structural material such as mild steel, the high
strength and low stiffness of GRP laminates means that structural design will be influenced
more strongly by stiffness than strength. Furthermore, in service conditions, the long-term
performance of a load-bearing GRP component can be adversely affected by several factors
including the creep properties and the environment. Appropriate allowance for these factors
should therefore be made in design to avoid premature failure.
Plans Submission
3. Except for small GRP water tanks where separate guidelines are given in
paragraph 7, the following particulars are required to be included in the structural plans
submitted for approval :
(a) reference to design standards;

(b) material specifications (e.g. material types, relevant compliance standards and
mechanical properties etc);
(c) general arrangement showing the maximum designed capacity, the principal
dimensions and thicknesses;
(d) fabrication details of the major structural components;
(e) fixing arrangements and details of the tank supports.
Design calculations are also required to be submitted to substantiate the structural adequacy
and integrity of the water tank and the base support.
/Cont’d.....
- 2 -
Quality Control
4. The following documents are required to be submitted prior to consent

application for the commencement of GRP water tank installation works :
(a) test reports issued by a recognised laboratory/organization to substantiate the

mechanical properties of the fibre glass panel and its ability to withstand 6
times the design hydrostatic pressure; and
(b) manufacturer’s quality control details of the production of fibre glass panels
and fabrication of the GRP tank.
Performance Tests
5. Performance tests are required to be carried out upon completion of the GRP
water tank to satisfy the following requirements. The water tank shall be filled with water up
to the overflow level at ambient temperature for the testings:
(a) Leakage tests - The assembled water tank should be tested to demonstrate that
there will be no visible sign of leakage after standing for at least 48 hours.
(b) Deflection test - The assembled water tank should be tested to satisfy that the
deflection of the sides and bottom of the tank shall not exceed 1.0% of the
depth of the tank and 10mm respectively after maintaining the full water load
for at least 2 hours.
6. Upon satisfactory completion of the tests, the test reports should be submitted
to the Building Authority appended with a statement signed by the Authorized
Person/Registered Structural Engineer who prepared the plans to confirm that the water tank
works have been carried out to satisfy the above-mentioned performance requirements.
Small GRP Water Tank
7. For GRP water tanks with a volume capacity and height dimension not
3
exceeding 8m and 2m respectively, requirements described in paragraphs 3 to 5 above
would normally not be required. However, the following particulars should be included in
the structural plans submitted for approval :
(a) Location, principal dimensions, capacity and weight of the water tank;
(b) Reference to design standards and material specification of the tank; and
(c) Fixing arrangements and details, with calculations substantiating the structural
adequacy of the tank supports.
/Cont’d.....
- 3 -
8. For indoor GRP water tanks with a volume capacity and water head not
3
exceeding 4m and 1.2m respectively, only item (a) in paragraph 7 above needs to be
included in the structural plans submitted for approval together with calculations
substantiating the structural adequacy of the floor structure supporting the water tank.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BREG/C/32
First issue March 1998 (AD/SE)
Index under : Glass reinforced polyester water tank

Water tanks - glass reinforced polyester

Podium Height Restriction under

Building (Planning) Regulation 20(3)
Building (Planning) Regulation 20(3) restricts the full site coverage of non-
domestic podium to a height of 15 meters. The Building Authority (BA) has been requested,
from time to time, to consider applications for relaxation of the height restriction under the
Regulation. This practice note provides advice as to how the BA may deal with such
applications.
Criteria and Examples
2. The BA will take into account the functional requirements, site constraints,
the impact on the environment, public interest and the likelihood of abuse in considering
applications for relaxation of the height restriction on podiums.
3. The following are examples of which favourable consideration may be given

by the BA :
• buildings in which a public transport terminus or facility of a similar

nature is provided;
• the increase in podium height of the proposed building would give a
better aesthetic or environmental effect;
• buildings of special design or use;
• buildings subjected to special requirements as to floor height under
lease conditions.
4. Where modification of the Regulation is given, the following general rules

will apply :
• not more than 4 storeys are accommodated in a podium; and

• the podium height is not more than 20 meters from the ground level.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref : GP/BREG/P/2
First issued : April, 1998 (AD/D)
Index under : B(P)R 23(3)

Podium height

Superstructure Works
Measures for Public Safety
Introduction
Although the general site safety situation has been improved after the
setting up of the Site Monitoring Section, the number of incidents of falling objects from
buildings under construction remains high. Such incidents have highlighted the need to
enhance precautionary measures at construction sites where superstructure works are
being carried out, to better protect the public from falling objects.
2. A properly built and maintained hoarding/covered walkway is always

required to protect the public near building sites. General guidance on the provision of
such structure can be found in PNAP 75.
3. Additional protection for the public near building sites undergoing

superstructure works, except where the condition in paragraph 4(a) or (b) applies, should
include the following precautionary measures : -
During Erection of the Structural Frame of a Building
(a) Proper protection and safe passage for the public must be
provided at all times by the erection and maintenance of suitable
hoardings, covered walkways and gantry, and catch platform.
----- Reference could be made to paragraph 22 to 24 of PNAP 71 for
their general design requirements. An example of hoarding,
covered walkways and gantry, and catch platform is also given
in Appendix B of the same PNAP.
Protective Screen on the Facade of a Building

(b) The building under construction should be provided on its
facade with a screen consisting of two layers (with overlaps, and
fixed to scaffold at regular intervals): an inner net of heavy duty
nylon netting with thread diameter of not less than 3.5 mm and a
maximum centre to centre spacing of 50 mm, and an outer net
of fine nylon netting. However, in order not to impede the
smooth operation of the construction programme, the double
layer netting may be removed locally during the installation of
external cladding/curtain wall.
4. The above additional preventive measures are not required if a building
under construction is:
(a) under 30 metres in height, or
(b) set back from the site boundary such that an inclined projection
plane from the top outer edge of the building at 10 degree from
the vertical does not go beyond the site boundary at ground
level.
Alteration and Addition Works and Concrete Repair Works
5. Where any alteration and addition works or concrete repair works are
carried out at the external walls of an existing building, adequate protection and
precautionary measures should be provided to ensure site and public safety, In this
respect, reference could be made to “Guidelines for the Removal of Typical Unauthorized
Building Works and General Maintenance of External Walls” on general safety
requirements published by the Buildings Department. Additional precautionary measures
and suitable working procedures specific to individual Alteration and Addition Works
should also be provided as and when necessary.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority

February 2003 (AD/NB2)
This revision July 2005 (AD/NB2) (Paragraph 3(a) and 5 amended, Appendix A deleted)
Index under : Superstructure Works
2

Structures On Grade on Newly Reclaimed Land
Structures on grade such as floor slabs, partitions, fence walls,

ancillary structures, underground utilities and drainage laid on newly reclaimed land
are liable to significant subsidence due to long-term consolidation of underlying
compressible material. For the purpose of this practice note, any land of which the
reclamation is completed within 7 years counting back from the first day of
submission of the foundation plan is considered as newly reclaimed land.
Plans Submission
2. The following design rules are recommended for the design of different
types of structures on grade on newly reclaimed land:-
(a) The lowest floor slabs within the building envelope, except for the
circumstances stated below, should be designed as suspended slabs so
as to eliminate the need for costly repair due to settlement. The
problem with partitions could also be resolved once they are rested on
suspended slabs. Under the following circumstances, floor slabs may
be designed as on-grade:
(i) The floor slab is used for car parking, loading and unloading,
vehicular ramp or pedestrian pavement; or
(ii) The floor slab is directly above a raft pile cap.
(b) Owing to the relative ease of reconstructing fence walls, landscaping

structures, lightweight covered walkway that have been damaged by
the effects of settlements, they may be designed as on-grade
structures instead of being supported on structural members provided
the effect of settlement will not cause the said structures to pose a
hazard to life or property.
(c) The foundations of the ancillary structures detached from main

building such as transformer rooms, pump house etc. should be
carried down through the reclaimed materials to firm stratum and the
lowest floor slabs should be designed as suspended.
(d) Underground utilities and drainage underneath a building should be

designed to be either supported from the suspended floors or directly
supported on pile caps. The pipe connection at the interface between
the structurally supported portion and on-grade portion of pipes
should be designed to accommodate differential settlement due to the
subsidence of the latter.
/(e) Where ….
-2-
(e) Where open-cut method of excavation is proposed for raft pile cap
construction and where space allows, a rockfill plug around the pile
cap shall be provided to mitigate the migration of soil into the void
that may be formed underneath the cap due to long term ground
consolidation. The suggested details for the rockfill plug are enclosed
in Appendix A. Where unusually excessive settlement is anticipated,
appropriate measures to minimize the migration of soil into the void
should be duly considered and provided for.
3. Where it is intended not to follow the above design recommendations,

the problem of differential and total settlement affecting structures on grade should be
fully taken into consideration in their designs. In this connection, a detailed
assessment of the time-related total and differential settlement (including predicted
time-settlement curves) and a proposal for necessary measures to overcome or
accommodate the problem are required to be included in your site formation,
superstructure and drainage plans as necessary where structures on grade are proposed
on newly reclaimed land.
Settlement Records and Previous Settlement Assessments
4. If a detailed assessment of settlements of site on newly reclaimed land

is to be conducted, reference could be made to settlement measurements collected
during the reclamation period. Such data should only serve as reference to the
historical settlement characteristics of the site and building professionals should make
their site-specific ground investigation, assessment and design works to overcome
their anticipated settlement problems. The settlement assessment by the consultant
engaged for the reclamation project could also be made available to building
professionals. They should be regarded as supplementary information for site specific
assessment and design works. The historical settlement record and settlement
assessment for government reclamation, if available, can be obtained from the
Territory Development Department (TDD) or the Civil Engineering Department
(CED) or other departments, depending on which department undertook the
reclamation projects for the site.
5. The provision of the historical settlement records and settlement

assessment by TDD, CED or other departments does not and cannot absolve an
authorized person and his appointed consultant from the responsibilities which they
must assume for their site investigation, monitoring, assessment and design works.
The user of the reference material should accept and understand that no warranty is
expressed or implied by the parties who supplied or prepared such information on the
accuracy or the reliability of the historical data and assessments by the government
departments and consultants.
Settlement Monitoring
6. When the alternative approach outlined in paragraph 3 above is

adopted, the Building Authority may invoke Section 17(1)(6)(ca) of the Buildings
Ordinance requiring continuous settlement monitoring (through instrumentation)
throughout the construction period and the submission of a report reviewing the
assessment of settlement. This is to ensure the reliability of the time-settlement
relationship estimated at the design stage.
/Maintenance ….
-3-
Maintenance Implication
7. Where long-term settlement is allowed for in the design of structures on

grade, i.e. for structures in paragraphs 2(a)(i), 2(b), 2(d) and 3 above, the authorized
person should alert the developer of the long-term consequential maintenance
implications resulting from such a design and advise him to inform any prospective
buyers who may have to bear such maintenance costs for their properties in the long-
term future.
Application
8. For the purpose of plan submissions, this practice note will take
immediate effect except for those building developments for which the application of
consent for the foundation works has been submitted on or before 15 May 1999.
However, the requirement in paragraph 7 regarding alerting the developer of the long-
term consequential maintenance implications and advising him to inform prospective
buyers will apply to all building developments for which occupation permit has not
been issued.
9. For the avoidance of doubt, the main structure of a building and its
foundations should be properly designed and constructed to take care of the effects of
long-term consolidation of any underlying compressible material. In general, all such
foundations should comply with the requirements of Part VI of the Building
(Construction) Regulations on foundations.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
First issue April 1999 (AD/D & AD/SE)
Index under: Newly Reclaimed Land

Guidelines for Processing Submission Involving Structures on grade
Settlement of Newly Reclaimed Land
-4-
APP-103

Exclusion of Floor Areas for Recreational Use
Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural

Engineers 116 advises in its para. 21 that certain recreational facilities aimed to benefit
the residents and occupants generally may be considered for exclusion from gross floor
area (GFA) calculations by modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) on a
case-by-case basis. Reference may be made to Appendix A for those active recreational
facilities which are commonly accepted for exclusion from GFA calculations. The
passive and ancillary facilities in the said Appendix may also be accepted provided their
sizes are commensurate with the use appropriate to the development.
2. This practice note gives guidance on the requirements and conditions for
considering and granting of modification under Section 42 of the Buildings Ordinance.
Application
3. All applications for exclusion of floor areas for recreational use from
GFA calculations must be accompanied by information substantiating the need for the
areas with justification on overall size of the facilities, the headroom requirements and
the mix of the various facilities as well as how the recreational facilities will be operated
and controlled to ensure their exclusive use by the owners and residents including their
bona fide visitors. The substantiation should include a proposal on how the facilities
would be supported and sustained financially. The Building Authority would not,
however, expect that the gross floor area of such facilities to exceed 5% of the domestic
gross floor area in normal circumstances. However, some active recreational facilities
(e.g. indoor swimming pool and multi-purpose ball court) are very space consuming
when these facilities are provided a more relaxed percentage may be allowed depending
on the special circumstances of the case. For avoidance of doubt, while a kitchen of
reasonable size ancillary to the recreational activities at development sites without any
commercial floor space, in relatively remote areas may be considered upon application,
commercial undertakings are not qualified for exclusion from gross floor area
calculation. Open-sided covered landscaped areas/children play areas provided under
the footprint of the domestic tower would not be subject to the 5% limitation.
4. As a pre-requisite for giving approval of plans, the developer of a

proposed development is required to submit a letter of undertaking designating the
recreational facilities as a common area in a Deed of Mutual Covenant with details of the
use and location clearly indicated and binding and enforceable terms and conditions
included for the control, operation, financial support and maintenance of the facilities.
Any subsequent amendments affecting the recreational facilities must be accompanied
with a revised undertaking and layout plan.
/Exemption …..
-2-
Exemption
5. Exemption from GFA calculations will be effected by way of a

modification of the relevant Building (Planning) Regulations. As a condition of the
modification, the Building Authority will require the developer’s undertaking to be
registered in the Land Registry before the submission of application for occupation
permit. A further condition will be imposed to the effect that the recreational area should
be for the exclusive use of the owners and residents and their bona fide visitors only as
indicated on the approved plans and such area shall not be used for any purpose or by any
other persons without the prior consent of the Building Authority.
6. It is important for authorized persons to note that an occupation permit

will not be issued unless there is evidence indicating that the relevant undertaking and
layout plan are registered in the Land Registry. Developers should also remind
purchasers that the Building Authority will prosecute for contravention of the conditions
of exemption.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/48 (II)

This revision September 2000 (AD/NB1) (paras. 1, 3, 5, 6 & Appendix A amended)
Index under: Gross Floor Area Calculation

Gross Floor Area Exclusion
Appendix A
PNAP 229
APP-104
Recreational Facilities Commonly Accepted

for Exclusion from GFA Calculations
Ancillary Facilities which may be

accepted, depending on the size and
Facilities which are commonly accepted relationship with main functions
Active facilities :
Swimming pool Club house management office

Multi-purpose ball court/Squash court Club house staff room
Basketball court/Football court Snack bar and pantry
Tennis court/Badminton court First-aid room
Children play area Pantry and mini-bar (not exceeding 10m2)
Games room Kitchen (not exceeding 15 m2) for sites
Indoor golf room without any commercial floor space.
Table-tennis room
Fitness room
Gymnasium
Weight training/Aerobic/Exercise room
Bowling alley
Skating rink
Volleyball court
Passive facilities :
Sitting area/lounge
Billiard room
Sauna/Spa facilities
Reading room/Study room/Library
Function room
Computer/video game room
Music room/Karaoke room
This revision September 2000


Water Seepage
Water seepage has been a cause for concern to a number of Government

departments including the Buildings Department (BD). Causes of seepage are many and
varied but one of the common sources of seepage relates to water-borne piping embedded
in the concrete members of a building.
2. The problems associated with water seepage caused by embedded

water-borne piping are complex and difficult to resolve for the following reasons :
(i) The party affected (lower floor) is normally not the one who
created the problem (upper floor), therefore co-operation is
usually not forthcoming. If common areas are involved, multiple
ownership status of such areas further complicates the problem;
(ii) It is difficult to locate the defective sections of water-borne piping

for repair, as water leaks and finds its path of least resistance
through cracks and ducts; and
(iii) Even if such defective sections are accurately identified, the

breaking up of structural elements for repair is costly and
disruptive to the occupiers, which would discourage them from
co-operating.
3. Regulation 3 of the Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)Rs)

stipulates that all materials used in any building works shall be of a suitable nature and
quality for the purposes for which they are used; adequately mixed or prepared; and
applied, used or fixed so as to perform adequately the functions for which they are
designed. Regulations 34, 38, 41 and 48 of the B(C)Rs also require external walls, roofs,
kitchen and bathroom walls and floors to be protected against penetration of moisture or
water. Authorized Persons (AP), Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) and Registered
General Building Contractors (RGBC) are therefore reminded to ensure that the design
and construction of their buildings meet the above performance requirements and are
structurally safe.
4. Water seepage arising from embedded piping causes not only nuisance but
also deterioration to the structural member of a building if unattended for a prolonged
period. To cure the problem at source, you are strongly advised to design the routing of
all water-borne piping off structural elements to facilitate the indispensable need for
repair and replacement of such piping during the design life of the building, which would
normally outlast the design life of the piping. The huge benefit to the consumers and the
public that this will bring about in terms of easy maintenance of the building for its entire
design life will certainly outweigh the efforts you, as AP and RSE, have to make at the
design stage of a building project.
/5. …..
-2-
5. To ensure the long-term integrity of all structural elements and also to

avoid sanitary nuisance arising from water seepage, you are required to state explicitly in
the drainage plans that no water-borne piping, other than that specified in paragraph 2 of
the guidelines at Appendix A, will be embedded in structural elements. If despite my
advice you still decide to embed any section of such piping in any structural elements,
you will be required to submit for my consideration details showing the routing of all
water-borne pipes when you apply for approval of drainage plans and to justify to my
entire satisfaction how you would achieve the above objective of ensuring the long-term
integrity of such structural elements and preventing water seepage arising from the
embedded pipes. Omission of such routing details, or the justification of such omission
as the case may be, would result in disapproval of plans under Section 16(1)(i) of the
Buildings Ordinance. This is applicable to all new building projects for which building
plans are submitted for the first time for approval.
6. To assist designers to route water-borne pipes off structural elements, the

Building Authority is prepared to grant modification to permit genuine pipe ducts
designed in accordance with Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered
Structural Engineers 211 in new buildings to be excluded from gross floor area
calculation.
Prevention of Water Seepage in New Buildings
7. Your attention is also drawn to the importance of preventing water

seepage from other sources. To ensure the building quality and compliance with the
performance requirements stipulated in the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations, AP
and RSE should pay special attention to the choice of material, design and specification,
workmanship and supervision.
8. According to the past records, roof, external wall, window, bathroom,

kitchen, plumbing and drainage pipes, car park floor and basement are areas which are
susceptible to water seepage if not carefully designed and well attended to during the
course of construction. AP and RSE are therefore advised to take steps to prevent water
seepage in these areas and to specify appropriate waterproofing measures to these areas
in their design.
9. You may wish to note that BD has issued Guidelines on Prevention of

Water Seepage in New Buildings for general reference.
General
10. A practice note on the same subject has been issued to registered
contractors.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
-3-
Ref. : BD GR/1-55/173
BD GP/BORD/92
BD GP/BREG/P/9 (III)

This revision March 2005 (AD/NB1) – Paras 4, 5, 6 & Appendix A amended and
paras 3, 7 to 10 added
Index under : Water seepage

Water-borne piping embedded in structural elements
Appendix A
(PNAP 230)
(APP-105)
Guidelines on Embedment of Water-borne Pipes
1. In general, embedment of water-borne pipes in structural members, other than

those specified in paragraph 2, would not be permitted within columns, slabs,
structural walls, beams, transfer plates, pile caps and footings.
2. Water-borne pipes piercing through the following structural members may be

permitted where it is demonstrated that no adverse effect will be caused to the
performance of the structural members and, where the pipes are easily accessible
for maintenance :
(a) Vertical pipes piercing through structural slabs, transfer plates; and
(b) Horizontal pipes piercing through beams, columns or structural

walls.
In this regard, for the sake of easy replacement, pipe sleeves should preferably be
cast into the structural elements for the pipes to pass through.
3. In the context of para. 2, no adverse effect may be assumed in the following

circumstances :
(a) Vertical pipes piercing through r.c. floor slabs, transfer plates :-
(i) The size of a hole formed is not greater than 150mm in

diameter or the minimum bar spacing of the slab in either
direction, whichever is the less and no main reinforcement is
severed to make way for the hole; and
(ii) Trimming bars not less than the size of the main
reinforcement of the slab are provided around the hole.
(b) Horizontal pipes piercing through r.c. beams :-

diameter or 1/3 the depth of the beam, whichever is the less;
(ii) The hole is formed at the neutral axis of the beam section;
(iii) Vertical and horizontal trimming bars not less than 16mm in
diameter are provided around the hole and at each side of the
beam; and
(iv) No shear reinforcement is severed to make way for the hole.
-1-
(c) Horizontal pipes piercing through structural walls :-

diameter or the minimum bar spacing of the vertical
reinforcement of the wall, whichever is the less; and
(ii) Vertical and horizontal trimming bars of size of not less than
the vertical reinforcement bars of the wall are provided
around the hole and at both side of the wall.
(Rev. 3/2005)
-2-

Fire Resisting Construction

Kitchens in Restaurants
A kitchen in a restaurant may be regarded as ancillary accommodation to

the restaurant for the purpose of assessing the fire resisting construction requirements.
Such kitchen, for the purpose of Part XV of the Building (Construction) Regulations,
should comply with the following requirements :
(a) The kitchen should be enclosed by walls having an FRP of not less
than 1 hour and any opening in the enclosure should be defended
by a door having an FRP of not less than 1/2 hour; and
(b) A protected lobby should be provided between each door of the

kitchen and
• any escape route from the main building; and/or

• the dining area of the restaurant where the kitchen has a usable
floor area exceeding 45 m2 and the door opens onto an exit
route of the dining area.
2. Subject to compliance of para. 17.1 of the Code of Practice for Fire

Resisting Construction (FRC Code), hold-open device for the doors of the kitchen may be
installed.
3. The requirements in para. 1 will be incorporated in the next edition of the

FRC Code. In the meantime, para. 6 of the Code may be taken with the benefit of the
clarification given in this practice note.
( CHOI Yu-leuk )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VII)
First issue October 1998 (AD/D)
Index under : Kitchen attached to restaurant

FRC - kitchen
Buildings Department Practice Note for Authorized Persons

232
Precautionary Measures for Construction Sites
From time to time, construction activities cause damage to adjoining

properties and nuisance to the public.
2. This practice note serves as a reminder of the need to provide necessary

protective and precautionary measures to minimize adverse effect on adjoining
buildings and nuisance to general public.
3. While the precautionary measures required for a particular site depend

on its special circumstances, attention should be paid to the following types of works :
a) Demolition works;
b) Dewatering in foundation and basement excavation;
c) Lateral support for excavation;
d) Pouring of concrete against walls of adjoining buildings;
e) Structural works.
4. General advice on the above works can be found in Practice Notes for
Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 71, 74, 81, 148 and 224 as well
as the Draft Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings.
5. In addition, your attention is also drawn to PNAP 144 on the control of

environmental nuisance.
( CHOI Yu-leuk )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/ACT/20
First issue December 1998 (AD/D)
Index under : Precautionary measures for construction works

Protective measures

Dedication of Land/Area for Use as Public Passage

Purpose
This practice note sets out the general guidelines on proposals to dedicate
land or area within a building for use as public passage and the concessions which the
Building Authority (BA) may grant upon acceptance of such dedication.
Dedications
2. The BA has the discretionary power to grant concessions in the form of

exemption of certain floor areas from the gross floor area (GFA) calculations and in the
form of additional plot ratio and site coverage in exchange for dedication of land or area
for use as public passage. Proposals for dedication usually fall into one of the following
two categories:-
(i) Dedication of set back area at street level for the purpose of
public passage
The permitted site coverage and plot ratio for the building may
be exceeded to an extent calculated in accordance with Building
(Planning) Regulations (B(P)R). The maximum additional plot
ratio thus approvable is five times the area so dedicated or 20%
of the permissible plot ratio, whichever is the less. In addition,
the BA may exempt areas accepted as dedicated for use as public
passage from GFA calculations.
(ii) Dedication of an area within or through a building at ground

level or other floor levels for public passage
The BA may in return for this type of dedication allow the

concessions by way of granting modifications of the relevant
B(P)R provisions. The extent of the concessions, which may be
granted by the BA according to individual merits, ranges from
exempting the dedicated area from GFA calculations to allowing
bonus plot ratio and site coverage for the development.
Normally the bonus site coverage, if allowed, will be equivalent
to the extent calculated in accordance with B(P)R 22(1). The
maximum bonus plot ratio, in terms of additional GFA,
generally will be at multiples of the dedicated area (five times for
dedicated area at ground level and two times for areas at other
floor levels) subject to the total bonus in return for the dedication
not to exceed 20% of the permissible plot ratio with the dedicated
area being exempted from accountable GFA.
/ General …
-2-
General Guidelines
3. To provide a greater degree of certainty to authorized persons and

developers when they submit applications for concessions in return for dedication of land
or area within a building for use as public passage, the following guidelines on the
provision of public passages are provided for general reference.
4. B(P)R 22(2) provides for additional plot ratio and site coverage in return
for surrender for the purpose of street widening. Hence public passages intended for
street widening shown on town plans or other street improvement plans would be
considered in the context of B(P)R 22.
5. Where bonus plot ratio and site coverage are given in return for dedication
of land for public passage, the resultant development intensity shall not exceed the
restrictions, if any, stipulated in the statutory town plan unless otherwise provided in the
said plan.
6. The Building Authority may accept dedication of land or area within a

building for public passage if such dedication will lead to:
(a) alleviation of congestion problems of vehicular or pedestrian

traffic on public roads or walkways;
(b) linkage with a footbridge/subway or proposed footbridge/

subway which is or will be readily accessible to and used by the
general public, and such linkage would significantly enhance
public safety or convenience;
(c) improvement of road safety or significant enhancement of public

convenience; or
(d) provision of suitable greenery compatible with the use of the

proposed public passageway.
7. All applications for dedication should be accompanied by suitable

justification to demonstrate that there is a genuine need by the public for such dedication
and the dedicated areas are reasonable in the circumstances to cater for the need. In
general, upon acceptance of a proposed dedication of land or area within a building for
public passage as desirable, the BA may exempt such land or area from GFA
calculations. However, bonus plot ratio and site coverage for the development will only
be allowed if such dedication is considered to be essential by government, taking into
account alternative public passages available in the vicinity.
8. Where the dedicated area within a building serves both the public and the
users of the building, the amount of exempted GFA and/or bonus GFA will be assessed
by taking into account the proportion of traffic generated by the public and the users of
the building.
/ Display …
-3-
Display of Notices
9. In all cases, the responsibility for the provision, maintenance and repair of
the dedication areas will rest with the building owners. For greater transparency, notices
advising the public of the dedication of the area for use as public passage, the opening
hours of such a public passage and the party responsible for the management of the area
should be displayed in conspicuous locations of the area to the satisfaction of the BA.
Such responsibility for the display of notices, maintenance and repair will be made a
condition of dedication.
Deed of Dedication
10. A temporary occupation permit or an occupation permit will not be issued

before the execution of a Deed of Dedication incorporating all the relevant terms and
conditions and until all these terms and conditions have been fullfilled. APs should
remind their clients for early preparation and execution of the required Deed.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref: BD GP/BREG/P/3(III)

This revision June 2003 (AD/NB1) (General revision)
Index under: Dedication

B(P)Reg 22

Geotechnical Manual for Slopes

Guidance on Interpretation and Updating
Government publications of interest to the building industry are promulgated

in the list of publications in PNAP 115, among which is the Geotechnical Manual for
Slopes.
2. The Geotechnical Manual for Slopes provides guidance on the standards of

good practice that should be adopted for the investigation, design, construction and
maintenance of slopes and site formation works in Hong Kong. The first edition of
the Manual was published in draft form in November 1979 and the second edition was
published in May 1984.
3. Over the years since its publication, the second edition of the Manual has
become the consensus guidance document in the areas of investigation, design,
construction and maintenance of slopes and site formation works. However, there
have also been advances in local practice, and separate guidance documents have been
prepared to supplement the Manual. These have made some parts of the Manual
obsolete and more guidance is needed on the interpretation of the Manual. It is the
purpose of this practice note to provide such guidance, which is given in Appendix A
of this practice note.
(CHOI Yu-leuk)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/GEO/11(III)
First issue June 1999 (AD/SE, AD(G)/HKI)
Index under : Geotechnical Manual for Slopes

Appendix A
(PNAP 234)
(APP-109)
GUIDANCE ON INTERPRETATION OF
GEOTECHNICAL MANUAL FOR SLOPES
1. This Appendix provides guidance on, and clarification of, the interpretation
of some aspects of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (2nd Edition).
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1. The use of the term “risk” in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (Manual)
to mean “consequence in the event of failure” has led to some
misunderstanding. For this reason, the term “risk” shall be replaced by
“consequence”. This is consistent with international usage. The two types
of consequence classification of slope failure given in Tables 5.2 and 5.3 of
the Manual shall be referred to as “consequence-to-life” and “economic
consequence” respectively.
2.2. The descriptive terms “high”, “low” and “negligible” are intended to
reflect the likely relative severity of the failure consequence, but these have
also resulted in misconceptions. To avoid possible confusion, the three
categories of consequence-to-life shall be denoted as Categories 1, 2 and 3
respectively instead of “high”, “low” and “negligible”. For the same
reason, a new system is also adopted to denote the different categories of
economic consequence. The three categories of economic consequence
shall be denoted as Categories “A”, “B” and “C” respectively instead of
“high”, “low” and “negligible”.
2.3. A combined notation shall now be used to indicate both the consequence-
to-life and the economic consequence of a feature. For example, a
Category 2A feature refers to one having the second highest consequence-
to-life and the highest economic consequence in the new three-tier
classification system.
3. CONSEQUENCE-TO-LIFE CATEGORIES
3.1. The recommended minimum safety factors for slopes given in Tables 5.1
and 5.4 of the Manual are related to assessed consequence-to-life
categories. Because of the change in terminologies (see section 2), these
Tables shall be replaced by Tables 1 and 2 in this Appendix respectively.
The consequence-to-life category reflects the severity in terms of loss of
life in the event of failure. Table 5.2 of the Manual, which gives typical
examples of each consequence-to-life category, shall be replaced by Table
3 in this Appendix.
-1-
3.2. In determining the consequence-to-life category of a slope, the designer
should use his own professional judgement in assessing the “severity in
terms of loss of life in the event of failure” in each particular case, giving
due consideration to the types of buildings and facilities that may be
threatened, and how the buildings and facilities would be affected in the
event of slope failure. In assessing the effects of a slope failure on
buildings and facilities, account should be taken of such factors as possible
mechanisms and scale of failure, site conditions, proximity of the buildings
and facilities to the slope and their likely density of occupation and
frequency of usage in the event of failure, travel distance of the landslip
debris, resistance of the buildings and facilities to debris impact and
vulnerability of occupants and users.
3.3. Examples (1) and (2) of Table 3 refer to situations where the buildings or
facilities lie within the expected travel distance of the landslip debris, and
hence the severity in terms of loss of life is high, and the consequence-to-
life category is “1”. No examples are given in the Table on situations
where the buildings or facilities are located further away from the slopes.
Following the consequence-to-life definition given in the Manual, where
the buildings or facilities lie beyond the expected travel distance of the
debris and the severity in terms of loss of life in the event of failure is less,
the consequence-to-life category may be downgraded to “2”. Where the
buildings or facilities lie beyond the possible extreme limit of landslip
debris, the consequence-to-life category may be taken as “3”. Similar
considerations apply to buildings and facilities located behind the slope
crest with respect to the expected and the possible extreme limits of the
area affected by the landslip.
3.4. In consequence-to-life classification for the purposes of slope design and

stability assessment, bus shelters or similar sheltered public waiting areas
shall be regarded as occupied buildings (example 1 in Table 3).
4. ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCE CATEGORIES
4.1. Table 5.3 of the Manual, which gives typical examples of each economic
consequence category, shall be replaced by Table 4 in this Appendix.
4.2. Although Table 1 recommends the minimum safety factors for slopes for
different economic consequences, the choice of safety factors against
economic loss is a decision which must be made by the owner upon the
advice of the designer. In advising the owners, the designer should decide
for himself the degree of economic consequence and should balance the
potential economic consequence in the event of a failure against the
increased construction costs required to achieve a higher factor of safety.
-2-
5. SAFETY FACTORS FOR EXISTING SLOPES
5.1. The minimum safety factors recommended in Table 2 may be used for the
stability assessment of and design of modifications to any existing slope
which is associated with new works, as long as rigorous geological and
geotechnical investigations are conducted (which should include a thorough
examination of slope maintenance history, groundwater records, rainfall
records and any slope monitoring records) and there is sufficient
knowledge of the geology, groundwater and performance history of the
slope. Under these conditions, Table 2 can be used for stability assessment
for known changes in imposed loadings, and for the design of remedial or
preventive works, including slope flattening, improvements to surface and
subsurface drainage, and the installation of support measures.
5.2. As Section 5.2.2 of the Manual indicates, the designer is able to adopt with
confidence a lower factor of safety for an existing slope because he has the
benefit of the performance history and other information that is not
available for the design of a new slope. This does not imply that the
standards of safety deemed to be acceptable for existing slopes are lower
than those recommended for new slopes. Reference should be made to the
attached note (see Annex 1 of this Appendix) on discussion of the
philosophy of this approach by Malone (1985). There will often be
instances, however, where particular circumstances (such as lack of
adequate groundwater and rainfall records) will lead the designer to adopt,
for remedial and preventive works, the standards specified for new slopes.
6. SAFETY FACTORS FOR TEMPORARY WORKS
6.1. Section 5.2.4 of the Manual shall be replaced by the following.
6.2. The safety factors required for the design of temporary works (i.e. works
undertaken during construction which are not part of the permanent works)
shall be the same as those for permanent new works (Table 1), but with
due regard for the conditions which are likely to exist during the life of the
temporary works. In some cases, for example, the consequence-to-life
category during construction may be classified as “2” or “3”, compared
with consequence-to-life category “1” once the buildings are completed and
occupied.
7. RELIABILITY OF SLOPE DESIGN
7.1. The reliability of slope design is discussed in Section 5.3.6 of the Manual
and should be considered in deciding on the minimum safety factor to be
adopted.
-3-
7.2. Different design solutions, e.g. open-cuttings and cuttings with structural
support, have different levels of uncertainties associated with the various
components of investigation, design and construction. They will have
different reliability indices (hence different levels of safety) even if the
assessed factor of safety is the same. In order to have a meaningful
comparison of options, a higher minimum safety factor needs to be adopted
for the solution with a lower reliability index than the solution with a
higher index.
8. COMPACTION OF NEW FILL SLOPES
8.1. The design and construction of new fill slopes are governed by sections
5.5.1 and 9.5 of the Manual respectively. It should be noted that in some
exceptional cases, such as fill forming a large platform that will not support
structures, the requirement for a compacted density of 95% of maximum
dry density (GEO, 1996b) can be relaxed to 90% for the interior of the
platform. This may be done provided that the fill at formation level and
the fill forming the peripheral slopes is compacted to 95% of maximum dry
density for a vertical thickness of at least 1.5 metres and 3 metres
respectively. Please note that Figure 9.1 of the Manual illustrates only one
of many configurations which can be adopted. In any case, it is good
engineering practice to provide adequate subsurface drainage to avoid
build-up of groundwater pressure at the rear of the less permeable
peripheral slopes.
8.2. Fill in reclamations, or behind retaining structures and in other small areas
of flat land, does not generally need to meet compaction requirements for
slope stability reasons. It is therefore for the designer to determine the
compaction requirements based on other criteria.
9. TREATMENT OF EXISTING FILL SLOPES
9.1. Section 5.5.2 of the Manual defines the standard treatment of existing loose
fill slopes by recompaction of the surface fill to a vertical depth of 3
metres. This treatment does not need to be prescribed, however, if :
(a) a fill slope is of consequence-to-life category “3”,
(b) the fill slope is judged to be too small to pose a significant hazard, or
(Note. The size of a fill slope which may be regarded as “too small to
pose a significant hazard” would depend on the distance to and the
type of the facilities being affected, the topography of the ground
below the slope, the liquefaction potential of the fill body, etc.
Professional judgement should be exercised in individual cases in
determining the size of a fill slope which could be considered as
such.)
-4-
(c) the fill slope has a cover of mature vegetation which is beneficial to
the stability of the slope, and where there is a reasonable alternative
engineering solution.
9.2. Reference should be made to the Report on the Slope Failures at Sau Mau
Ping (Government of Hong Kong, 1977) for background on the standard
treatment of existing fill slopes as recommended in the Manual.
10. SUPERSEDED CHAPTERS/SECTIONS
10.1. The following Chapters/Sections of the Manual are no longer applicable,

having been superseded by later publications :
(a) Chapter 1 and Section 2.3.3 are superseded by the Geological Survey
Maps and Memoirs and Geoguide 3 (GCO, 1988).
(b) Chapter 2 (except Section 2.3.3), Section 3.5 and 10.2 are superseded
by Geoguide 2 (GCO, 1987).
(c) Section 4.6 is superseded by GEO Publication No. 1/93 (GEO,

1993a).
(d) Chapter 7 (except the parts relevant to the design of remedial or

preventive works to existing gravity retaining walls as given in Section
7.3.3) is superseded by Geoguide 1 (GEO, 1993b), GCO Publication
No. 1/90 (GCO, 1990) and GEO Circular No. 6/96 (GEO, 1996a).
(e) Chapter 11 is superseded by Geoguide 5 (GEO, 1998).
(f) References to BS 1377:1975 concerning Phase 1 tests described in

Works Branch Technical Circular 6/94 are replaced by GEO Report
No. 36 (GEO, 1996b).
(g) “The Hong Kong Bibliography” referred to in the Manual is the

Bibliography on Geology and Geotechnical Engineering of Hong Kong
(Brand, 1984). This has been superseded by GEO Report No. 50
(GEO, 1996c).
11. LIST OF RELATED DOCUMENTS
(a) Geotechnical Control Office (1984). Geotechnical Manual for Slopes.

(Second Edition). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 295 p.
(b) Geotechnical Control Office (1987). Guide to Site Investigation

(Geoguide 2). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 359 p.
(c) Geotechnical Control Office (1988). Guide to Rock and Soil

Descriptions (Geoguide 3). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong,
186 p.
-5-
(d) Geotechnical Control Office (1990). Review of Design Methods for
Excavations (GCO Publication No. 1/90). Geotechnical Control
Office, Hong Kong, 192 p.
(e) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1993a). Review of Granular and

Geotextile Filters (GEO Publication No. 1/93). Geotechnical
Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 131 p.
(f) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1993b). Guide to Retaining Wall

Design (Geoguide 1). (Second Edition). Geotechnical Engineering
Office, Hong Kong, 258 p.
(g) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1995b). Recommendations Arising

from the Review of the Risk-to-life Categorisation System of the GCO
(1984). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, GCC Paper
No. 295.
(h) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1996a). Guidelines for Assessment

of Old Masonry Retaining Walls in Detailed Studies and for Action to
be Taken on Private Walls. Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong
Kong, GEO Circular No. 6/96.
(i) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1996b). Methods of Test for Soils in

Hong Kong for Civil Engineering Purpose (Phase 1 Tests) (GEO
Report No. 36). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 90 p.
(j) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1996c). Bibliography on the

Geology and Geotechnical Engineering of Hong Kong to March 1996
(GEO Report No. 50). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong,
111 p.
(k) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1997). Control of Compaction of

New Fill Slopes. Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, GEO
Circular No. 5.
(l) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1998). Guide to Slope Maintenance

(Geoguide 5). (Second Edition). Geotechnical Engineering Office,
Hong Kong, 91 p.
(m) Government of Hong Kong (1977). Report on the Slope Failures at

Sau Mau Ping, August 1976. Hong Kong Government Printer, 104 p.
plus 8 drgs.
(n) Malone, A.W. (1985). Factor of Safety and Reliability of Design of

Cuttings in Hong Kong (Oral Discussion). Proceedings of the
Eleventh International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, San Francisco, vol. 5, pp 2647.
(o) Works Branch (1994). Soil Testing Standard (Phase 1 Tests). Works
Branch Technical Circular No. 6/94.
-6-
Table 1 - Recommended Minimum Factors of Safety for New Slopes for a Ten-year Return
Period Rainfall
CONSEQUENCE-TO-LIFE
Category 1 Category 2 Category 3
ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCE
Category A 1.4 1.4 1.4
Category B 1.4 1.2 1.2
Category C 1.4 1.2 >1.0
Notes : (1) In addition to a minimum factor of safety of 1.4 for a ten-year return period
rainfall, a slope in the consequence-to-life category 1 should have a factor
of safety of at least 1.1 for the predicted worst groundwater conditions.
(2) The factors of safety given in this Table are recommended minimum values.
Higher factors of safety might be warranted in particular situations in
respect of loss of life and economic loss.
-7-
Table 2 - Recommended Minimum Factors of Safety for the Stability Assessment of
Existing Slopes and for Design of Remedial or Preventive Works to Slopes for a
Ten-year Return Period Rainfall
Consequence-to-life Category 1 Category 2 Category 3
Recommended Minimum Factor of

Safety Against Loss of Life for a 1.2 1.1 >1.0
Ten-year Return Period Rainfall
Notes: (1) These factors of safety are appropriate only where rigorous geological and
geotechnical studies have been carried out, where the slope has been
standing for a considerable time, and where the loading conditions, the
groundwater regime and the basic form of the modified slope remain
substantially the same as those of the existing slope.
(2) The factors of safety given in this Table are recommended minimum
values. Higher factors of safety might be warranted in particular situations
in respect of loss of life and economic loss.
(3) Should the back-analysis approach be adopted for the design of remedial or
preventive works, it may be assumed that the existing slope had a minimum
factor of safety of 1.0 for the worst known loading and groundwater
conditions.
(4) For a failed or distressed slope, the causes of the failure or distress must be
specifically identified and taken into account in the design of the remedial
works.
-8-
Table 3 - Typical Examples of Slope Failures in Each Consequence-to-life Category
CONSEQUENCE-TO-LIFE+
EXAMPLES
Category 1* Category 2* Category 3*
(1) Failures affecting occupied buildings

(e.g. residential, educational,
9
commercial or industrial buildings, bus
shelters×#, railway platforms).
(2) Failures affecting buildings storing
dangerous goods. 9
(3) Failures affecting heavily used open

spaces and recreational facilities (e.g. 9
sitting-out areas, playgrounds, car
parks).
(4) Failures affecting roads with high
vehicular or pedestrian traffic density. 9
(5) Failures affecting public waiting areas

(e.g. bus stops#, petrol stations). 9
(6) Failures affecting country parks and

lightly used open-air recreation areas. 9
(7) Failures affecting roads with low traffic

density. 9
(8) Failures affecting storage compounds

(non-dangerous goods). 9
× Item added in 1995 to clarify the intention of the consequence categories.

+ Prior to March 1996, "Consequence-to-life" was referred to as "Risk-to-life".
* Prior to March 1996, "Category 1", "Category 2" and "Category 3" were referred to as
"High", "Low" and "Negligible" respectively.
# In the context of this Table, bus shelters are those with a cover that shelters people
waiting there from direct sunlight or rainfall, while bus stops are those without such a
cover.
-9-
Table 4 - Typical Examples of Slope Failures in Each Economic Consequence Category
ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCE+
EXAMPLES
Category A* Category B* Category C*
(1) Failures affecting buildings, which could

cause excessive structural damage. 9
(2) Failures affecting essential services#

which could cause loss of that service for 9
an extended period.
(3) Failures affecting rural or urban trunk
roads or roads of strategic importance. 9
(4) Failures affecting essential services#

which could cause loss of that service for
9
a short period.
(5) Failures affecting rural (A) or primary
distributor roads which are not sole 9
accesses.
(6) Failures affecting open-air car parks. 9
(7) Failures affecting rural (B), feeder,
district distributor and local distributor 9
roads which are not sole accesses.
(8) Failures affecting country parks. 9
+ Prior to March 1996, "Economic Consequence" was referred to as "Economic Risk".

* Prior to March 1996, "Category A", "Category B" and "Category C" were referred to
as "High", "Low" and "Negligible" respectively.
# Essential services are those that serve a district and are with no or very inferior
alternatives. Examples are mass transit facilities and trunk utility services.
- 10 -
ANNEX 1
FACTOR OF SAFETY AND RELIABILITY OF

DESIGN OF CUTTINGS IN HONG KONG
(ORAL DISCUSSION) BY MALONE (1985)
This contribution is about the stability factors of safety which are used in
Hong Kong in the design calculations for cuttings in the weathered mantle of slopes.
Most landslides in cuttings occur during intense rainstorms, hence

groundwater conditions assumed in stability calculations correspond to an extreme
rainfall condition. Lower factors of safety are used when rarer rainfall conditions are
assumed. Factor of safety is also tied to consequences of failure, the following
minimum values being stipulated in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes for the 10-
year return period rainfall case (Geotechnical Control Office, 1984):
1.4 high risk to life

1.2 low risk to life
> 1.0 negligible risk to life
It is understood that the value 1.4 was chosen as this value is often used for
the slopes of large earthfill dams.
The Geotechnical Manual for Slopes also makes some recommendations on

the stability calculation model to be employed and the method of measurement of the
input parameters for the calculation. However, this falls short of the complete
specification that would be needed to guarantee a consistent standard of safety between
cases with equal calculated values of factor of safety. Alternatively, standard of safety
can be expressed as probability of failure, and this can, in principle, be calculated by
regarding the parameters as random variables. In considering the application of
probabilistic approaches to cutting design in Hong Kong conditions, it is helpful to
examine the three principal sources of uncertainty in the design calculation: the
selection of trial slip surfaces, groundwater conditions and shear strength.
Selection of Trial Slip Surfaces
Under Humid Subtropical climatic conditions igneous rock masses adjacent

to the surface of slopes can weather to give a complex pattern of fresh corestones and
matrix material in various states of decomposition. The simplification of such
geological complexity into a 2-D layered model, one surface of which represents a
sloping “rockhead”, often results in trial slip surfaces being positioned unrealistically.
Selection of Groundwater Conditions
The phreatic surface corresponding to a design rainstorm is usually

modelled at a fixed head above this imaginary sloping “rockhead” surface, or above
the dry season phreatic surface if higher, without benefit of piezometric observations
of storm response.
In reality a more complex hydrogeological system exists, better modelled

as 2 or more interacting inclined aquifers (Geotechnical Control Office, 1982). Local
- 11 -
geological effects like flow in natural pipes in steep slopes, or partial occlusion by
dykes, can be important, as can local leakage from water services in steeply sloping
urban areas. Hence design data ought to be obtained by extrapolation of measured
seasonal and storm piezometric response within the aquifer of interest at the site of the
proposed cutting.
Selection of Shear Strength Parameters
The mass shear strength will depend on the disposition of core-stones, but
it is conventional to rely in design on laboratory measurements of matrix shear
strength. The shear strength of decomposed granite in particular will vary markedly
with the state of decomposition, which ought therefore to be quantitatively defined,
but rarely is. The consolidated undrained compression test with pore water pressure
measurement is conventional, but this does not reproduce the stress path followed in
an element of soil adjacent to a slip plane as failure is approached.
Existing Slopes and More Reliable Design
It is in the analysis of existing slopes that practice in Hong Kong has come
under most scrutiny, because preventive works are often very costly and very
inconvenient. It has been generally agreed that lower factors of safety may be adopted
for existing slopes, whilst maintaining the same adequately low probability of failure.
This can be achieved at the cost of greater reliability, as is well illustrated by the case
history presented by Lambe in the First Terzaghi Oration (Lambe, 1985 fig. 21). The
opportunity to adopt lower factors of safety in Hong Kong has recently been
introduced for the analysis of existing cuttings which have withstood extreme
rainstorms, in cases where values of the parameters in the calculation model are
known more reliably. Thus, for assessment of the stability of existing slopes, seasonal
and storm piezometric response can be measured in the prototype, and storm seepage
and runoff observed. The actual geology can be determined in inspection trenches.
Foundations of adjacent structures can be examined, input geometry can be based on
topographic survey and soil densities can be measured in situ.
For design calculations which utilize this more reliable data a minimum
factor of safety of 1.2 is stipulated in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes for the high
risk to life case.
References
Geotechnical Control Office (1982). Mid-levels Study: Report on Geology,

Hydrology and Soil Properties. Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 265 p. plus
54 drgs.
Geotechnical Control Office (1984). Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (second

edition). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 295 p.
Lambe, T.W. (1985). The First Terzaghi Oration: Amuay landslides. Proceedings of
the 11th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, San
Francisco, Golden Jubilee Volume, pp 137-158.
(6/99)
- 12 -
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Protective Barriers
The prime function of a protective barrier is to prevent persons or

objects from passing through or toppling over onto an adjacent lower level. Building
(Construction) Regulation 8 and Building (Planning) Regulation 3A prescribe the
layout of protective barriers. In all circumstances, a protective barrier should have a
height not less than 1.1m and the lowest 150mm of the barrier should be built solid.
Any gap or opening in the barrier should be so constructed as to inhibit the passage of
particles more than 100mm in its smallest dimension.
Structural Design Requirements
2. Structural details of protective barriers should be submitted to the

Building Authority for approval. Protective barriers should be designed to resist the
imposed loads as prescribed in Table 3 of Building (Construction) Regulation 17.
The minimum design imposed loads for protective barriers to restrict or control the
movement of persons and for vehicle barriers are stipulated in Building (Construction)
Regulation 17(3) and 17(4) respectively. Protective barriers subjected to wind loads,
shall be designed to resist the more stringent of either the required imposed load or the
design wind loads as prescribed in the Code of Practice for Wind Effects, Hong Kong
1983. The structural design should comply with the laws of mechanics, recognised
engineering principles and recognised codes of practice such as BS 6180 – Barriers in
and about buildings.
Glass Protective Barriers
3. Recommendations on the salient aspects of the design and construction

of protective barriers involving the use of glass are given in Appendix A. Typical
clamping detail for free-standing glass protective barriers are shown in Appendix B.
Site Supervision
4. The construction of protective barriers should be supervised by a

suitably qualified person to ensure that the works are carried out in accordance with
the plans approved and the required standards are complied with.
(C M LEUNG)
Building Authority
Ref : BD GR/CC/121/2
First issue : September 2000
Index under : Protective Barriers
Appendix A
PNAP 235
APP-110
Recommendations on the Salient Aspects of the Design and Construction of

Glass Protective Barriers
Types of Glass for Protective Barriers
1. Glass types considered suitable for use in protective barriers are as follows :
(a) Laminated glass is a safety glass suitable for protective barriers where the
glass is fully framed. It is subject to measures being taken to ensure the
glass edges are protected from direct exposure to moisture and compressive
forces that can cause delamination.
(b) Tempered glass is a safety glass suitable for protective barriers where the
glass is fully or partially framed or is free-standing. The configuration of
any opening in this type of glass should be agreed with the manufacturer and
the fabricator. Due to the possibility of spontaneous breakage in tempered
glass, AP/RSE should ensure that an acceptable method of quality control
(such as infrared photography, laser photography or heat soaking) has been
adopted in order to prevent the debris of glass formed due to the spontaneous
breakage of tempered glass from falling to the lower levels.
Fixing of Glass
2. Contact between glass and any other hard substance with a hardness equivalent to or
greater than the hardness of glass should be prevented. Neoprene gaskets or other
glazing materials should be used with frame systems. Where bolted connections
are used, it is essential to ensure that the glass does not come into direct contact
with bolt or the clamping plates. Proper bushing material shall be used in which its
hardness shall be less than that of the glass material. The use of setting blocks and
distance piece to support and locate glass panels may be in accordance with BS
6262 – Code of Practice for glazing for buildings. Other standards may also be
accepted if the equivalent performance can be demonstrated.
Protective Barrier with Glass Infill Panels
3. The main frame of the barrier (viz. handrail and baluster) is designed to withstand
all loads applied to the handrail and the glass is used to form the infill panels. The
glass in no way provides any support to the main frame and to the handrail.
/4. …..
-2-
4. Recommended dimensions for glass infill panels are given below :
(a) For fully framed or two-edged framed infill panels, the frame section should
give a minimum of 15 mm edge cover to the glass. The frame section and
its connections to the main frame should be capable of withstanding the
design load transferred through the glass.
(b) For clipped infill panel, the clips should be positioned around the periphery
of infill panel, at a maximum spacing of 600 mm. Each clip should be not
less than 50 mm in length and give a minimum depth of cover to the glass of
25 mm. The clips and their connections to the main frame should be
capable of withstanding the design load transferred through the glass.
(c) For point bolted supports, tempered glass should be used and the position of
the connectors should not allow the glass to undergo reverse curvature
effects, as these could lead to enormous stress concentration at bolted
connections. There should be clamping plates and gaskets on both sides of
the glass that provide a minimum of 50 mm diameter cover to the glass.
Where the length of a glass panel is greater than the span between the bolted
connectors, giving rise to a cantilevered portion of the panel, the length of
the cantilevered portion should be less than one-quarter of the span between
the bolted connectors. The fixing of the bolted connectors to the main
frame should be capable of withstanding the design load transferred through
the glass. Under the design loads, the barrier should be designed such that
the relative in-plane movement of the bolted connections in the same panel is
not greater than 2 mm.
Free-standing Glass Protective Barrier
5. The glass is designed to withstand all design loads. When the barrier is subjected
to a loading derived from the most unfavourable combination of wind load and
imposed loads for places of assembly and panic barriers, the maximum horizontal
displacement at the handrail level of the barrier should not exceed 50 mm.
6. In case the free-standing glass barrier has a continuous run of 2 panels of glass or
more and is designed as a panic barrier, the top rail should be attached to the glass
in such a manner, that, should a glass panel fracture, the top rail would bridge over
the failed glass, remained stable under yield stress conditions and capable of
resisting the designed imposed loads for panic barriers applied across the resulting
gap without causing structural failure or yielding of the protective barrier system.
7. Continuous fixing is recommendation for fixing the handrail to the glass, since
individual fixing points may introduce unacceptable stress concentrations at the glass
panel.
/8. …..
-3-
8. It is preferable to use continuous bottom fixing clamps for free-standing glass

protective barrier. Such clamps on each side of the glass should have a minimum
of 100 mm wide and be made of metal of minimum thickness of 12 mm. The
clamps should be continuous for the entire length of the glass panel and have a
maximum bolt spacing of 500 mm. Other clamping methods may also be used
provided that such clamping methods may provide effective clamping over the
length of the glass panel. Where a clamping system that does not rely on bolts is
used, the depth over which the clamping force operates should not be less than 75
mm, unless specific tests have been carried out to prove the integrity of the system
in resisting its design loads. Appendix B illustrates the typical clamping detail for
free-standing glass protective barriers.
Impact Resistance of Glass for Protective Barriers
9. Glass to be used for protective barriers should comply with the impact test
requirements for safety glazing materials given in recognised testing standards such
as ANSI Z 97.1 “Safety performance specifications and methods of testing for
safety glazing material used in buildings” or BS 6206 “Impact performance
requirements for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings”. The
type of glass for protective barriers should achieve impact resistance not inferior to
the impact grade class A to BS 6206 when the free path (or the unhindered distance
a body can travel in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the protective barrier)
is greater than 1500 mm. In this connection, test certificates on the glass material
to prove its impact resistance should be submitted to the Building Authority for
consideration. The designer should select materials that will not break when the
protective barrier is subjected to the normal design loads that may be applied and
will not be penetrated when subjected to the appropriate impact test loads.
Workmanship Control
10. Every glass panel should be visually inspected to ensure that it is free from visual
defects before installation. Supervision of the installation of all fixings used to
connect the glass to handrails, balustrades or frames should be provided to ensure
that they have been constructed in accordance with the approved plans. Apart from
glass and fixings, the sealant and handrail should also be inspected. Special
attention should be paid to the installation of free-standing glass protective barriers
to ensure that the recommended installation procedures are strictly followed.
Ref : BD GR/CC/121/2
First issue : September 2000

APP-110

Design of Car Parks and Loading/Unloading Facilities
Facilities for the parking of cars are often shown on plans submitted for
approval under the Buildings Ordinance. These plans may also be required for
submission to other authorities, eg Director of Lands and Commissioner for Transport
to ascertain if their requirements are met.
2. The Building Authority (BA) takes the view that car parks and all
ancillary works and facilities should be properly designed to provide an acceptable
standard of convenience and safety to users of the car parks. The BA also makes the
point that all building plans prepared by authorized persons (APs) and approved by
him are such that the plans -
y should reflect a general duty of care in preparing and approving

the plans;
y should be correct in matters of fact;
y should conform generally to standards commonly known and

accepted; and
y should not be misleading or causing confusion as to compliance

with standards, whether or not governed by the Buildings
Ordinance.
3. To assist APs in meeting the above objective, a set of general

guidelines is given at Appendix A. In case where full compliance with the desirable
standard is difficult due to physical constraints or other relevant considerations, the
APs may use the minimum standard shown in Appendix A or may propose alternative
acceptable standards. In such circumstances, APs are advised to demonstrate with
swept paths and other design data that safety of and convenience to users of the car
parks will not be compromised. Absolute minimum standard will only be accepted
under exceptional circumstances and with full justifications.
4. When building plans showing car-parking facilities are received, the

BA may check the following essential aspects of the plans :-
(a) the dimensions of spaces for the parking of cars and lorries, the
loading and unloading bays and the run-ins and run-outs;
/(b) .....
-2-
(b) the gradients, curve radius of ramps, swept paths and the
turning circles at critical locations; and
(c) any general notes shown on the plans as to whether and what
guidelines or standards have been observed.
In cases where compliance with the requirements is difficult due to physical

constraints or other relevant considerations, the BA may take a flexible approach
provided that traffic safety is not compromised. In this connection, APs are advised
to highlight deviations and provide justification for such deviations.
5. Where a claim is made under Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(b)

for exclusion from gross floor area calculation , the BA would need to be satisfied as
to the design of the car parks before the exclusion is considered. In case the car
parks are already included in the gross floor area, the BA will not take any item of
deviations from the standards shown in Appendix A as a ground for disapproval of
plans. The BA will advise on such deviations separately and APs are expected to
rectify the deviations in subsequent plan submissions.
6. For the avoidance of doubt, the Commissioner for Transport (C for T)

will continue to provide advice on carparking proposals from the point of view of road
safety, traffic management, planning of transport infrastructure, public transport
operation and regulatory functions of public roads. The C for T will pay particular
attention to run-ins and run-outs and the adjacent layout design in private building
projects. The BA will assume the general responsibility of ascertaining compliance
with standards of car parks and ancillary works and facilities.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BOP/6 (IX)

This revision February 2009 (AD/NB1) – (Para.2, 3,5, 6 and Appendix A revised)
Index under : Car parks

Layout of car parks
Ramp and gradient of car parks
Car park aisles
Appendix A
(PNAP 236)
(APP-111)
Guidelines on Layout of Car Parks and Loading and Unloading Spaces

and Geometry of Access Roads, Ramps and Driveways
Layout of Car Parks and Loading/Unloading Spaces
The dimensions produced below incorporate current guidelines on

parking and loading/unloading areas as stipulated in Table 11, Chapter 8 of the Hong
Kong Planning Standard Guidelines (HKPSG) and Transport Department’s latest
requirements. Reference can be made to the latest edition of stall dimensions of car
parks and loading/unloading spaces of the HKPSG posted on the Planning
Department's website :
http://www.pland.gov.hk/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch8/ch8_table11.htm
Table 1 – Car Parks and Loading/Unloading Spaces
Stall Dimensions for Car Length (m) Width (m) Min. Clear
Parks & Loading/Unloading Headroom (m)
Bays
Motorcycles 2.4 (min. 2 m) 1 2.4
Private Cars and Taxis 5 2.5 2.4
Coaches and Buses 12 3.5 3.8
Light Goods Vehicles 7 3.5 3.6
Medium/Heavy Goods Vehicles 11 3.5 4.7
Container Vehicles 16 3.5 4.7
Light Buses 8 3 3.3
Car-parks for Persons with a 5 3.5 2.4
Disability
Car Park Aisles Parking Angle Aisle Width (m)
Desirable Minimum
(a) Private Cars, and Taxis 0o 3 -
(one-way) 30 o 3 -
45 o 3.6 -
60o 4.2 -
70 o 4.7 -
80 o 5.3 -
90 o 6 5.5
(absolute min.5.0 m)
90 o 7.5 6.0
(two-way aisle) (absolute min.5.5 m)
(b) Light Goods Vehicles 45 o 7 -
(one-way) 90 o 10 -
-1-
(c) Medium/Heavy Goods 45 o 8 -
Vehicles (one-way) 90 o 12 10
90 o 16 10
(two-way aisle)
(d) Container Vehicles 45 o 11 -
(one-way) 90 o 16 -
General guidelines on the design of car-parks and loading/unloading bays are as

follows :
(i) Run-ins for cycle and motor vehicle should be separated whenever possible.
Cycle parking areas should be located at ground floor near the entrance,
segregated from other vehicles parking spaces and grouped together.
(ii) Ground floor shops/workshops/offices should be readily accessible to loading

and unloading areas. It is desirable that the loading and unloading activities
will not affect pedestrian or vehicular traffic outside or inside the developments.
(iii) Parking layout should be designed with adequate clear visibility such that the
conflict of a vehicle emerging from a ramp and another vehicle reversing into
or leaving a parking lot is minimized.
(iv) Goods vehicles are loaded and unloaded from the rear and perpendicular
loading bays are most commonly arranged. A space of approximately one
goods vehicle length should be reserved in front of the loading bay for reverse
manoeuvring. The hammerhead design is recommended for loading/unloading
bays. The swept path of the manoeuvre of the goods vehicles into and out of
the bay should be indicated on the plans. Where there is severe constraint, a
turn-table should be provided.
(v) Parking layout should be designed such that a vehicle may be parked in one
distinct manoeuvre without reversals of the steering lock.
(vi) Appropriate traffic signs and road markings should be provided.
(vii) Swept path analysis should be conducted to check the circulation and adequacy
of turning areas whenever necessary.
(viii) Parking spaces for motor cycles should be grouped together and at a location
away from the run-in.
(ix) Where space for bicycles is provided in buildings where there is no

commercial element, the cycle parks should preferably be located near the
residential entrance lobby, and there should be total segregation of the bicycle
from other vehicles.
-2-
(x) Car-parks for persons with a disability should be designed to the standards set
out in the latest Design Manual, Barrier Free Access, which is posted on the
Buildings Department’s website:-
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/code/e_bfa.htm
Access Roads/Driveways
2. For private access roads and streets within the development, the
requirements specified in the Building (Private Streets and Access Roads) Regulations
should be followed. Table 2 gives general guidelines on access roads and driveways:
Table 2 - Access Roads/Driveways
Driveways
Width for Straight Sections Desirable Width Minimum Width Absolute Min.
(m) (m) Width (m)
Residential Area One-way 5.5 4.0 3.0 (private cars
only)
Two-way 7.3 5.5 5.0 (private cars
only)
Industrial Area One-way 6.0 5.5 3.5
& Area of Mixed Two-way 10.5 7.3 6.0
Usage
Gradient Desirable Maximum Absolute
Maximum
Straight Ramp For Private 1:10 1:7 1:6
Cars
For Goods 1:10 1:8 -
Vehicles
Helical For Private 1:12.5 1:8 -
Cars
For Goods 1:12.5 1:10 -
Vehicles
Vertical All Vertical clearances for structures over driveway and
Clearance Vehicles that part of pavement within 600mm of its outer edge
should be 5.1 m (min.)
Horizontal All Horizontal clearance should be 500 mm. If
Clearance Vehicles impracticable, clearance from railing and posts for
signs should not be less than 200 mm.
Widening of Access Roads/Driveways on Bends
Width of Access Roads/ Permitted Radius of Curve at Min. Widening
Driveways Centre Line Required. (m)
6 m or less Less than 18 m 1.2
18 m to 24 m inclusive 1.0
Over 24 m 0.6
-3-
More than 6 m Less than 18 m 1.0
18 m to 24 m inclusive 0.6
Over 24 m 0.3
General guidelines on the design of access roads/driveways are as follows:
(i) The minimum vertical clearance of 5.1m is applicable to access roads/driveways

intended for all types of vehicles. In case access roads/driveways are limited for
certain type of vehicles, a lowered minimum vertical clearance could be
considered.
Ramps in Multi-Storey Car Park (for Cars, Taxis and Light Goods Vehicles)
3. Ramps in multi-storey car park should be designed with reference to the

following requirements in Table 3 :
Table 3 - Ramps in Multi-Storey Car Park

(for Private cars and Taxis)
Ramps in Multi-storey Car Parks (for Private cars and Taxis)

Min. Width (between Straight Ramps Helical Ramps
kerbs) One-way 3.0 m 3.65 m
Two-way 6.0 m -
(with no central kerb) (min. 5.5 m)
Max. Gradient See “Gradient” in “Access Roads/Driveways”
Horizontal Clearance For Straight Ramps 300 mm
from structures For Helical Ramps 600 mm
Minimum Curve For Straight Ramps 5.5 m (min. inner radius at bends)
Radius For Helical Ramps 9.0 m (min. outer radius)
(one-way)
General guidelines on the design of ramps are as follows :
(i) The use of two-way ramps in a multi-storey car park is not recommended.
(ii) Ramps should be designed without conflict points at both ends, e.g. no
pedestrian crossings and junctions at both ends of a ramp.
(iii) At the upper end of ramps, adequate clear visibility should be provided to
minimize conflicts of movements of vehicles at the upper floor and the approach
ramp.
(iv) The design standards for straight and helical ramps are applicable to carparks for
private cars and taxis and should be modified to suit other vehicle types.
(Rev. 2/2009)
-4-

Disposal of Condensation from Air-Conditioning Units
Provision of Air-conditioning
With the improvement of living standard, air-conditioning (AC) has

become one of the basic necessities in both domestic and commercial premises.
Authorized persons are encouraged to take into account the modern day expectation and
make suitable provisions for accommodating AC systems when designing new
buildings.
2. An AC system may take the form of either a central plant, or a split or

room type unit. The former type is usually housed in a plant room whereas the latter
two types are mounted on the peripheral of a building envelope.
Problem
3. In recent years, numerous complaints concerning nuisance caused by the

dripping of condensation from AC units mounted on the peripheral of buildings have
been made by public. The problem lies in the lack of a proper system for the disposal of
condensation.
Improvement
4. The Building Authority takes the view that proper disposal system for the
drainage of the condensation should be provided as part of the drainage system of a
building. You are, therefore, requested to indicate the same in your drainage
submission for any AC hoods or platforms proposed in a development, failing which the
plans will be disapproved under section 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BREG/VS/2(II)
BD GP/BORD/92
Index Under : Condensation from air-conditioner

Drainage disposal for air-conditioner

Lighting and Ventilation

of rooms used for habitation or as an office or kitchen
Under Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)Reg) 31 no prescribed

window required under B(P)Reg 30 shall be deemed to face external air unless:
(a) it faces into a street; or
(b) it faces into a rectangular horizontal plane (RHP) which is

uncovered, unobstructed and of minimum dimensions stipulated in
B(P)Reg 31(2); and
(c) it is so placed such that inclined planes protruding from the RHP at
a position where the RHP intersects with the window sill or the lot
boundary, as the case may be, are not obstructed by any building.
2. In recent years there is a tendency for developers to build tall residential

buildings and consequently the authorized persons for such proposals often find it
difficult to comply with all the requirements. To allow flexibility in the planning and
design of buildings without compromising the safety and health of the occupants, the
Building Authority is prepared to modify the requirements on horizontal and vertical
planes if the following criteria are met:-
(a) Prescribed windows for office or habitation
(i) The room is provided with a window facing a RHP

complying with the minimum dimensions stipulated in
B(P)Reg 31(2);
(ii) The RHP has a longitudinal dimension of not less than 30m;
and
(iii) There is ample open space for free flow of air with a
minimum clear distance between buildings not less than
4.5m wide.
(b) Windows for kitchen
(i) Mechanical ventilation such as exhaust fan is provided; and
(ii) The required windows face directly into the open air, which
is defined in Regulation 2 of the Building (Planning)
Regulations.
/ 3. A window …..
-2-
3. A window not meeting the full requirement of prescribed windows under

B(P)Reg 31(2) would be acceptable if the window when angled at not more than 15o from
the external wall, meets the prescriptive requirements.
4. Windows for office and rooms for habitation, which do not comply with
the requirements in B(P)Reg 31(2) or the criteria set out in para. 2(a) above, are also
acceptable if it can be proved that the performance of such windows is not inferior to
those meeting the prescriptive requirements of the regulation.
5. The Buildings Department is currently conducting a consultancy study on

the provision of lighting and ventilation in buildings. Therefore, the above flexible
application of the B(P)Reg 31 should only be taken as an interim measure. We would
need to review this practice note upon the completion of the consultancy study.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
BD GP/BREG/P/18 (IV)

This revision September 2001 (AD/NB1) - paras 2 amended and paras 3 and 4 rewritten
Index under : Lighting and ventilation

Prescribed window
Buildings Department Practice Note for Authorized Persons

245
Waste Minimization
Provision of Fitments and Fittings in New Buildings
It has been suggested, arising from reports of sanitary fitments and

other fixtures/fittings in new buildings being discarded upon occupation, that
requirements for the provision of such fitments and fittings prior to completion of new
buildings should not be insisted upon to reduce waste.
2. A working group (WG) comprising government officials and

representatives of the building industry has studied the issue. A survey has indicated
that the problem of carting away of sanitary fitments/fittings required under the
building regulations in newly completed private buildings is not significant. The WG
has also identified the following concerns if the requisite fitments/fittings are not
provided at the time of completion of a new building :
(a) construction waste generated from fitting out works carried out
by individual contractors while a new building is under
occupation;
(b) chaotic condition arising from individual owners engaging their

own contractor for the fitting out works; and
(c) the practicality of testing plumbing and drainage system without

fitments for compliance with regulation.
3. The WG is of the view that the basic sanitary fitments required under
the building regulations should be installed prior to the issue of an occupation permit.
The WG, however, has also recommended that modification of the relevant building
regulation be considered to permit certain sanitary fitments be not installed at the time
of issuing an occupation permit on merits of individual case. The Building Authority
has accepted the recommendation and will favourably consider giving a modification
of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines)
Regulations in the following circumstances :
(a) premises such as restaurants and hotels for which extensive

renovation and fitting out of the required sanitary fitting by a
restaurant or hotel operator will only be carried out after the
issue of the occupation permit and in the process any sanitary
fitting installed prior to the issue of an occupation permit would
be dismantled in the course of such renovation work;
(b) a developer has offered to provide fittings to individual

purchaser’s choices.
/4…..
-2-
4. AP wishing to take advantage of the circumstances set out in para 3

should provide details on the extent of the sanitary fitments and fittings to be installed
after the issue of the occupation permit in the application for modification together
with an undertaking to the effect that :-
(a) the outstanding fitments and fittings will be installed prior to the
actual occupation of the relevant part of the premises;
(b) the outstanding fitments and fittings will be installed in

accordance with the provisions of the Building (Standards of
Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines)
Regulations and the requirements of the Water Authority;
(c) the outstanding fitments and fittings will be installed under his
supervision by the registered general building contractor who will
employ a licenced plumber for the carrying out of the plumbing
works; and
(d) Water Authority will be notified via the submission of standard

form WW046 available in the office of Water Authority for the
installation of the outstanding plumbing fittings.
5. The survey also shows that some doors, floor finishes and partitions are
taken out and are replaced by owners of new flats. You may therefore wish to offer
more choices of colour schemes, door types and floor finish patterns for potential
purchasers of buildings.
(C M LEUNG)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/RC/2
BD GP/BREG/SF/1 (II)

This revision December 2000 (AD/NB1) (para 4 amended)
Index under : Sanitary Fitments

Fittings and Fixtures

Performance Review -
Item 6(g)(ii) in Column B, Section 17(1) of the Buildings Ordinance
Background
There is an inherent difficulty in forecasting the precise subsurface

conditions from site investigation conducted before the carrying out of geotechnical
works. Regular review and verification of the design assumptions are generally
required for geotechnical works. In certain areas where the geology and the
subsurface conditions are complex, it will be necessary to further require the
submission of a properly documented performance review to ensure that the conditions
encountered during and after works are not materially different from those assumed in
the design. Also, in recent years, unconventional engineering schemes have become
more common in private developments. These unprecedented designs need to be
closely supervised and monitored during construction. Therefore, there is a need for
a review to be carried out during the course of the construction to verify the
geotechnical design assumption and to monitor the performance of the completed
works for certain cases. Against this background, item 6(g) in Column B of Section
17(1) of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) requires a performance review in respect of
certain works outside the scheduled areas.
Implementation
2. The BA may impose, as a condition of giving approval or consent to

the commencement of building works, for specific sites the requirement for a
performance review. Examples of sites where the requirement may be imposed are
given in paragraph 3 below. Where a performance review is required, there should
be sufficient demonstration that the building works have been adequately inspected and
monitored in the course of construction and that the geotechnical design assumptions
upon which the building works have been based are valid. It should also include a
review of the ground conditions revealed during the course of construction, and
contain evidence to demonstrate that any consequential changes in the design have
been undertaken and plans suitably amended and approved. The performance review
should be submitted to the satisfaction of the BA prior to application for an occupation
permit or a temporary occupation permit, otherwise the application may be refused
under section 21(6) (f) of the BO.
/3……….
-2-
3. Sites where requirements for performance review will likely be

imposed, in addition to sites in Area Numbers 1, 2, and 4 of the Scheduled Areas, are
grouped in the following three categories:
(i) Geological conditions need to be verified during construction
This applies to developments on or adjacent to slopes

which have a history of significant continuous ground
movements either prior to or during the site formation
stage. This also applies to sites where abnormal
geological weakness (such as unfavourably oriented
persistent layer of weak and relatively impermeable
kaolinitic clay in altered or weathered rocks) has been
identified.
(ii) Groundwater regime will be adversely affected
This applies to developments on sloping ground in which

the groundwater regime is susceptible to damming effects
of congested foundations below the groundwater level or
cutoff by bored pile walls or diaphragm walls. Examples
are developments downslope of Scheduled Area No.1 (the
Mid-levels scheduled area), and developments in the hilly
terrain of Hong Kong Island and the foothills of Kowloon.
(iii) Unconventional design
Examples include:
z Sites with retaining walls of retained height

exceeding 15m or excavations in reclaimed land.
z Sites which rely on horizontal drains to achieve large

drawdown of groundwater table in order to improve
hillside stability or sites which rely on the installation
of a permanent underground drainage system to
effect groundwater drawdown to prevent buoyancy of
a deep basement.
z Sites involving works the design of which has

adopted technologies that have been developed
locally or overseas and not tried in Hong Kong
before. These works need to be carefully assessed
and monitored to check if the performance is
acceptable under local conditions.
-3-
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/A/41
BD GP/BORD/75
First issue September 2000

This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras.1, 2 & 3 amended,
para.4 deleted)
Index under : Performance Review


Aluminium Windows
Introduction
Aluminium windows have become popular in new developments and as

replacement of steel windows in existing buildings. Recent incidents of failure of
aluminium windows, however, have aroused safety concern as falling of a dislodged
casement from a height can be catastrophic in densely populated areas.
2. Building (Construction) Regulation 3 stipulates that materials used in

any building works or street works shall be of a suitable nature and quality for the
purposes for which they are used; adequately mixed or prepared; and applied, used or
fixed so as to perform adequately the functions for which they are designed.
Obviously such requirement is applicable to aluminium windows to be installed in any
buildings. This practice note specifies requirements on the design and installation of
aluminium windows and on the prevention of water seepage. Compliance with the
design and installation requirements of aluminium windows described in para. 3 to 7
of this PNAP will be accepted by the Building Authority (BA) as meeting the
provisions of Building (Construction) Regulation 3. Any deviations from these
requirements have to be separately substantiated for acceptance.
Design and Installation Requirements
3. For large windows falling within the criteria stipulated in Practice Note
for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 239, their
structural design should be submitted to the BA for approval in accordance with the
requirements laid down therein. For other windows, Authorized Persons (AP) and
Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) should ensure that they are properly designed
and installed to meet the performance requirements and the safety standards in the
Building (Construction) Regulations whilst Registered Contractors should have
experienced and skilled supervisors and workers as well as suitable quality assurance
procedures in place to ensure the proper installation of the windows. Some relevant
standards, specifications and codes of practice on materials, design and installation of
aluminium windows are given in Appendix A for reference and information. AP and
RSE could also make reference to other national or international standards.
4. Window members, transoms and mullions together with the glass panes
should be of adequate size and strength taking into consideration the location, height
and orientation of the windows. Window frames should be securely and rigidly fixed
in place to window openings in walls. Where fixing lugs are adopted, they shall be of
stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel having a minimum material thickness of
1.5mm and be placed at 300mm centres maximum. Where a spacing greater than
300mm is proposed, the AP/RSE should satisfy that the performance of the windows
including structural stability and waterproofing would not be compromised. Adequate
site supervision should be provided to check that all the fixing lugs are properly fixed.
/5. …..
-2-
5. All structural members of a window section shall have a minimum

aluminium thickness of 2mm and the depth of the mullion section shall not be less
than 38mm. Particular attention shall be paid to the fixing details of the hinges. All
hinges and fastening mechanisms adopted in the installation shall be able to withstand
the positive and negative pressures due to the designed wind conditions when the
window is closed and shall be of adequate size and strength commensurate with the
size of the window.
6. To ensure the strength and rigidity of side hung casement windows as

well as the safety of the occupants operating the casements, the maximum width of the
sash should be 700mm.
7. Where 4-bar hinges are adopted, reference should be made to the

Guidelines on Fixing of 4-bar Hinges at Appendix B.
Cleaning
8. Corrosive agent should not be used for the cleaning of external walls
and windows of buildings upon the completion of building works unless it is
thoroughly washed with clean water immediately after application.
Window Stay
9. Suitably designed window stay can minimize the effect of strong wind
on the durability of hinges and casements.
Water Seepage
10. Besides safety consideration, water leakage from windows poses undue
nuisance to the occupants. AP and RSE are reminded to bear this in mind when
detailing window design and contractors are reminded that poor workmanship is a
major cause of the problem. Reference may be made to the Guidelines on Prevention
of Water Seepage in New Buildings issued by the Buildings Department in March
2005.
11. In order to ensure the durability of windows, it is recommended that

the top member of a window frame should have a built-in projecting fin with a drip
nose to prevent water ingress into the window frame/casement so as to minimize the
possibility of corrosion due to accumulation of water. A typical section of the
projecting fin is at Appendix C.
Water Tightness Test
12. It is advisable to perform field water test on the installed aluminium

window to ensure water tightness and quality of the completed window unit. Some
national standard testing methods are given in Appendix D for reference.
/General …..
-3-
General
13. A similar practice note has been issued to Registered Contractors.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/105 (II)

BD GP/BREG/P/38 (II)

This revision March 2006 (AD/NB1) – paras 2, 3, 5, 12 and Appendix B amended,
paras 6, 8, 9, 11 and Appendix C & D
added
Index under : Aluminium Windows

Windows
Water Seepage
Appendix A
(PNAP 248)
(APP-116)
Standards and Codes of Practice
On Aluminium Window in Building Works
The various standards and codes of practice on aluminium window in

building works as listed below are intended to provide reference information for the
purpose of specifying materials and design for aluminium windows and the lists are
not exhaustive.
BS EN ISO 1461 : Hot dip galvanizing

BS 952: Part 1 : Glass for glazing
BS 1161 : Aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes
BS 1449: Part 2 : Stainless and heat resisting steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1470 : Aluminium plate, sheet and strip
BS 1471 : Aluminium drawn tube
BS 1474 : Aluminium bars and extrusions
BS 1615 : Anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium and its alloys
BS 3111 : Stainless steel fasteners
BS 3987 : Anodic oxidation coatings on wrought aluminium
BS 4479 : Recommendations for the design of metal articles that are to
be coated
BS 4873 : Aluminium alloy windows
BS 5889 : Sealants
BS 6105 : Corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners
BS 6262 : Code of Practice for glazing for buildings
BS 6375: Part 1 and : Performance of windows
Part 2
BS 8118 : Structural use of aluminium
CP 3012 : Cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces
PD 6484 : Commentary on corrosion at bimetallic contacts and its
alleviation
2. AP and RSE may also make reference to other national or international

standards and specifications.
(3/2005)
Appendix B
(PNAP 248)
(APP-116)
Guidelines on Fixing of 4-bar Hinges
4-bar hinges shall be manufactured from stainless steel with adjustable

friction shoe, and all stainless steel bars of the hinge shall have a minimum thickness of
2.5mm. For better corrosion resistance, stainless steel rivets/screws shall be used for
the fixing of hinges and aluminium rivets shall not be used as they tend to corrode. At
least 3 Nos. of 4.8mm diameter stainless steel rivets or 5mm diameter stainless steel
screws shall be used to fix each bottom and top bars of the hinge to the window frame
and the openable sash.
2. As stainless steel hinges and rivets/screws are used in aluminium

window installation, due consideration and measures should be taken to prevent contact
between dissimilar metals.
3. To provide sufficient anchorage for the stainless steel rivet or screw to

fasten the hinge to the window frame and the openable sash, a positive mechanical
fixing, for example by inserting a stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel plate or
bar/angle of not less than 3mm thick inside the section to provide sufficient threads for
the screw(s) shall be adopted. A typical example of this arrangement is at Annex I.
As an alternative, the window sections for fixing the hinge may be thickened locally to
not less than 5mm. A typical example is at Annex II. When insertion of an extra
piece of stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel bar/angle inside the section or local
thickening to 5mm is not adopted, the thickness of aluminium sections for fixing the
4-bar hinge shall be substantiated by calculations that it could provide sufficient
anchorage for the stainless steel rivet or screw.
4. The length of the 4-bar hinge should be at least 60% of the width of the
side hung casement window.
(Rev. 3/2006)
Annex I to Appendix B
(PNAP 248)
(APP-116)
WIDTH OF WINDOW SASH

≦700mm
S.S. PLATE/BAR
(AT LOCATIONS A, B, C)
ELEVATION SECTION X-X

SIDE HUNG WINDOW WITH S.S. PLATE/BAR AND
ALUMINIUM ANGLE INSERTED FOR FIXING SCREWS
LENGTH ≧ 60% OF WIDTH OF WINDOW SASH
A, B, C, E, F – LOCATION FOR SCREW TO WINDOW FRAME/SASH

(LOCAL THICKENING BY S.S. PLATE/BAR)
D – LOCATION FOR SCREW TO WINDOW SASH

(LOCAL THICKENING BY ANGLE)
(Rev. 3/2006)
Annex II to Appendix B
(PNAP 248)
(APP-116)
5 mm
5 mm
(3/2005)
Appendix C
(PNAP 248)
(APP-116)
ELEVATION
S.S. 4-BAR HINGE
PROJECTING FIN WITH DRIP NOSE
WINDOW FRAME
WINDOW SASH
SECTION Y-Y
TOP MEMBER OF WINDOW FRAME
WITH BUILT-IN PROJECTING FIN
(3/2006)
Appendix D
(PNAP 248)
(APP-116)
Standard Description
ASTM E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E547 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Differential
AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors for Water Penetration using Dynamic Pressure
AAMA 501.2 Specification for Field Check of Metal Shop Fronts, Curtain
Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage
AAMA 501.3 Specifications for Field Check of Water and Air Leakage
Through Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Uniform Air Pressure Difference.
(3/2006)

Structural Requirements for

Alteration and Addition Works in Existing Buildings
Alteration and Addition (A&A) works to existing buildings involve,

among others, the design of new structural works and/or the checking of structural
adequacy of the existing construction. This practice note gives guidance on the structural
aspects of A&A submissions.
Condition of Existing Structural Elements
2. All submissions of structural plans for A&A works should be

accompanied by an assessment on the structural viability of the proposal. To satisfy
himself/herself that a proposal is viable in the context of structural stability, the
appointed authorized person (AP) or, if appropriate, the registered structural engineer
(RSE) should inspect the condition of the existing structural elements affected by the
works. Wherever possible, site photographs clearly showing all affected structural
elements should be submitted for reference and record purposes.
Design of New Works
3. All new structural elements in the A&A works should be designed in

accordance with the current Building Regulations and relevant codes of practice. In
submitting the structural plans for the A&A proposal, you should include, if appropriate,
results of any tests that you have carried out for ascertaining the structural condition of
existing elements likely to be affected by the works and any planned remedial works, if
required.
Structural Adequacy of Existing Works
4. The structural adequacy of an existing building or part thereof, as may be

affected by proposed A&A works may, subject to the following requirements, be
checked according to the then prevailing Building Regulations and codes of practice to
which they were designed:
(a) Wind Calculations

In the case of A&A works involving:
i. partial or total removal of existing major wind resisting walls or
frames, which would result in a reduction in their stiffness by 5% or
more, or
ii. the extension of building dimensions which would result in an
increase of 10% or more of the wind exposure areas of a building,
the structural adequacy of the building due to wind should be checked
based on the current wind code.
/(b) .....
-2-
(b) Imposed Loads in Storage Areas

When existing floors used for storage purposes are affected, their
structural adequacy should be checked using the minimum imposed loads
stipulated in the current Building (Construction) Regulations.
(c) Shear in Flat Slabs

When flat slabs, which were originally designed based on working stress
method, are structurally altered or subject to any additional load, the
shearing stresses in the slabs should be checked using the Code of Practice
for the Structural Use of Concrete - 1987.
Details of Existing Structural Elements
5. For the purpose of paragraph 4 above, AP/RSE should have knowledge of

the structural details of existing members. These details are available from the original
approved plans. In a case where the original approved plans are not available,
justifications on your design by means of a comparison of the effects of new and original
loading, bending moments and shear forces of the structural members may be accepted.
If necessary, opening up of the affected structural elements to ascertain the amount of
reinforcement and concrete strength should be performed. According to paragraph 6 of
PNAP 121, reinforcement details of the structural members in the existing building
affected by the A&A works, when available, should be shown on drawings.
Fire Resistance
6. PNAPs 202 and 231 provide guidance on the application of the codes of
practice relating to fire safety.
(C M LEUNG)
Building Authority
Ref.: BD SED/T/48
First issue December 2000 (AD/NB2)
Index under: Structural A&A Works

Structural requirements
Alteration and Addition Works in Existing Buildings
Testing of Building Materials
Authorized Persons (APs) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSEs)

may be approached from time to time for advice on the acceptability of building
materials and proprietary fire resisting products. This practice note sets out the
Building Authority’s position which may be of assistance to APs and RSEs in
preparing advice to manufacturers, suppliers, registered general building contractors,
registered specialist contractors and building owners.
2. Under the Buildings Ordinance (BO), APs, RSEs and registered

contractors (RC) have responsibilities to supervise building works including the
selection and application of building materials/products and to certify compliance with
relevant provisions of the BO upon completion of works. In this connection, it
should be noted that the BO contains no provision whereby the Building Authority
may issue a certificate, a test or assessment report with respect to these
materials/products. The Building Authority takes the position, therefore, of relying
on APs, RSEs and independent laboratories for testing for compliance with standards
and for certification. For certification of the building materials/products used and
their compliance with standards, upon completion of works, please refer to PNAP 53.
3. The Building Authority will recognize those laboratories accredited by

the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or by other laboratory
accreditation bodies which have reached mutual recognition agreements/arrangements
with HOKLAS. You may find such laboratory accreditation bodies at the web site of
the Hong Kong Accreditation Service –
http://www.info.gov.hk/itc/eng/quality/hkas/hkas.shtml. You should ensure that the
tests conducted by an accredited laboratory are within its scope of accreditation.
4. The following list of materials/products, which is not exhaustive, would

normally be required to be tested by accredited laboratories as mentioned in
paragraph 3: -
(a) Concrete cube and core;
(b) Steel reinforcement
(c) Reinforcement splices/couplers;
(d) Curtain wall systems; and
(e) Fire resisting products.
/Proprietary …..
-2-
Proprietary Fire Resisting Products
5. In establishing the acceptability of proprietary fire resisting products,

reference should be made to the performance standards as laid down in Building
(Construction) Regulation 90 and the current Code of Practice for Fire Resisting
Construction issued by the Building Authority. This is of particular relevance to
compartment walls, protective cover to structural steel, fire resisting doors and other
building materials for use in fire resisting construction.
6. As to compliance with the above requirements, reliance can also be

placed on a test or assessment report prepared by an accredited laboratory as
mentioned in paragraph 3 above. The Building Authority will rely on APs or RSEs
to ensure that the test or assessment reports are prepared by accredited laboratories
and that the reports are still within their validity period.
Assessing Organizations
7. At present there are 3 assessing organizations, which are not accredited

laboratories but are recognized for assessment, on the list of recognized
laboratories/assessing organizations compiled by the Building Authority and
promulgated in the letter dated 25 July 1994 to all APs, RSEs and RCs. They are: -
(a) Building Research Establishment (UK),

(b) International Fire Consultants Ltd. (UK) {limited to assessment
reports endorsed by Mr Peter E Jackman} and
(c) Warrington Fire Research Consultants (UK).
8. With the issue of this practice note, the list described in paragraph 7
above will cease to have effect. However the assessment reports on fire resisting
products prepared by the 3 organizations above will continue to be acceptable until
further notice.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/BM/5(2)(II)
First issue October 2001 (AD/Support)
Index under : HOKLAS

List of testing laboratories
Material testing

Stair-well and Open Wells

In School and Other Buildings Used by Youngsters
A student fell six floors to death through the stairwell in a school building.
The Coroner, when recording a death by accident at the death enquiry, recommended
that staircases with open well should be avoided in new school buildings.
2. Authorized Persons (APs) are advised to take into consideration as far as

practicable the Coroner’s recommendation when designing new school buildings and
other premises for use by children and youngsters. Where open wells or stair-wells are
accessible to students or youngsters, APs should evaluate if undue hazard would be
created through either proper or improper usage and provide additional safety measures,
such as safety nets or higher railing, where appropriate.
Compliance with Regulations
3. APs are reminded that buildings with open stairwell should be provided
with adequate protective measures. In addition to the provision of handrail satisfying
paragraph 17.6 of the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of
Fire 1996 and paragraph 8 of the Third Schedule of the Building (Planning) Regulations,
APs should ensure that the height of the balustrade is not less than 1100mm as required
by Building (Construction) Regulation 8.
4. Suitable protective barriers should also be provided to other locations

where there is a difference in levels greater than 600 mm.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/LEG/26 (III)
First issue May 2001 (AD/NB1)
Index under : protective barrier

stairwell
open well

Concrete Batching Plant
Background
Concrete Batching Plants (CBP) were originally located within

construction sites for supply of concrete for on-site construction activities. Such CBP
were commonly considered to be machinery and equipment and did not in the
circumstances fall into the definition of 'building' under the Buildings Ordinance
(BO). Over time, some CBP have evolved to become bigger, and others sited in urban
areas, near buildings and public thoroughfares.
2. From time to time, Authorized Persons (AP) and Registered Structural

Engineers (RSE) exercise their professional judgment in determining whether to
submit plans of CBPs to the Building Authority (BA) for approval. Buildings
Department (BD) also advises, in response to specific enquiries, on the need for
submission of plans for approval.
Building Works
3. What constitutes a building and therefore becomes subject to the

application of the BO is a question of degree and circumstances, including any risk
they may pose to public safety. The BA is of the view that CBP fixed to and founded
on the ground, connected to a utility supply and with a control room, are buildings
under the BO. Hence approval and consent are required prior to their erection.
Requirements
4. Taking into account the growing concern on the public safety posed by
contemporary CBP 1 , the BA takes the following position on CBP: -
New CBP
(a) For new CBP including associated structures such as cement,

sand and aggregate handling facilities, building plans prepared
by AP and RSE should be submitted to the BA for approval in
accordance with the BO and regulations (including
compliance with the town plan) before they are erected. For
the common type of CBP shown on Appendix A, BA is
prepared to process applications for approval and consent
simultaneously upon request and such applications will be
dealt with as outlined in Appendix B;
/(b) …..
1
Contemporary CBP may comprise, inter alia, washing-out pits, elevators, conveyor belts, ground hoppers,
mixing drums, workspaces and offices, silos, water-tanks, storage areas/tanks, structural supports including
foundations
-2-
(b) An occupation permit or a temporary occupation permit shall

be applied for, depending on the requirements of the operator
or nature of the site, upon satisfactory completion of works in
accordance with the provisions of the BO and regulations; and
(c) Enforcement action under the BO in accordance with the

prevailing policy for the control of unauthorized building
works will be taken against new CBP and associated structures
erected after 31 March 2002 without prior approval and
consent.
Existing CBP
(d) Action against existing CBP erected prior to 1 May 2002 will
not be taken if their structural safety can be demonstrated
through submission of satisfactory appraisal reports by a RSE
by 30 October 2002 and such plant is properly maintained.
This notwithstanding, other government departments may still
initiate enforcement actions against individual CBP which fails
to comply with the relevant provisions under applicable
Ordinances, or respective land use requirements.
5. In the longer term, we will explore the feasibility of setting up a

statutory system for self-certification of CBP with a total silo capacity less than 50
tonnes and having an overall height less than 15 m.
(C M Leung)
Building Authority
Ref.: GP/BORD/73 (II)
First Issue March 2002 (AD/NB1, AD/NB2)
Index under: Concrete Batching Plant

Appendix A
(PNAP 255)
(APP-120)
(3/2002)
Appendix B
(PNAP 255)
(APP-120)
In respect of those type of CBP's as shown in Appendix A (the number of production

lines may vary) the following arrangements under the BO will be accepted: -
New CBP
z Requirements for Fire Resisting Construction (FRC) will be waived provided

no part of the CBP is within 1800mm of the site boundary other than a sea wall
and the gross floor area (GFA) of the control room does not exceed 30m² per
production line. Water storage tanks and settlement pits will normally be
allowed up to the site boundary without FRC requirements.
z Means of escape (MOE) requirements will be waived provided that the GFA of
the control room does not exceed 30m² per production line and the number of
personnel in it does not exceed 5 per production line. The clear width of any
staircase access to the control room should be not less than 750mm clear with a
handrail each side and with a going not exceeding 45º. Requirements under
Building (Planning) Regulation 72 in respect of the identified control room will
be waived if the above criteria are met.
z The above waiver on FRC, MOE and Building (Planning) Regulation 72

requirements are subject to the following conditions -
(i) the number of production lines does not exceed 4 and
(ii) the total GFA of all control rooms does not exceed 100 m2.
z If drainage connections or discharges off-site are made any requirements of

Drainage Services Department and Environmental Protection Department must
be met. Drainage details may be included on the general building plan
submission.
z Plot ratio and site coverage calculations may exclude conveyor belts, but not
their supporting structures. Plot ratio calculations based on the site coverage
area may be accepted subject to extra office floors and the like at other levels
being included.
Rearrangement of layout of CBP
z Submissions in respect of minor alteration to the plant layout, after issue of an

Occupation Permit or Temporary Occupation Permit involving a conveyor belt
support and associated hopper, will be processed within 30 days.
/Relocation …..
-1-
Relocation of an approved CBP
z Relocation of an approved CBP to a new site will be subject to a new 60-day

submission, however the original structural calculations may be used subject to
reassessment for wind load and ground conditions by a RSE. The structural
submission will be processed within 30 days provided the site is similar in all
respects to the existing site and satisfies all the requirements as stipulated in
Appendix C.
z The general building plan submission will also be processed within 30 days
provided referral to other departments (except FSD) is not required. (Practice
Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineer No 99 is
relevant.)
Existing unapproved CBPs
z In respect of existing unapproved CBP's the structural justification required for

its stability and integrity will be restricted to basic details of the main structural
components and by at least one trial pit in respect of the existing foundations
together with an appraisal and inspection report on the existing conditions of all
the structural elements and member connections and certification by a RSE for
their fitness for use.
Relocation of existing unapproved CBP
z Relocation of an existing unapproved CBP to a new site will be dealt with as a

new 60-day submission. In respect of the above ground structural elements
justification should be by way of laboratory tests etc together with an appraisal
and inspection report on the existing conditions of all the structural elements
and certification by a RSE for their fitness for re-use.
Non Typical CBP
z If the plant contains features or accommodation which are not in a typical

batching plant, or cannot meet the waiver requirements, the proposal for the
whole plant will be processed in the same manner as for an ordinary building.
(3/2002)
-2-
Appendix C
(PNAP 255)
(APP-120)
Requirements for 30-day processing of structural submissions in respect of

'Relocation of an approved CBP'
(A) Superstructure
RSE is to certify the following during the plan submission :-
(i) the structural framing plans, members and connection details are the
same as the approved plans dated _______________ under the reference
of BD ______________.
(ii) the structural calculations, including the method of analysis, wind load,
dead load, live load and material design stresses and the relevant
standards submitted for the approved plans mentioned above have been
reviewed and found to be equally applicable to the new CBP now
proposed.
(B) Foundations
RSE is to certify the following during the plan submission :-
(i) the foundation plans showing the foundation system, allowable bearing
pressure, type, layout and details are the same as the approved plans
dated _____________ under the reference of BD _____________.
(ii) the structural calculations for the foundation details including the method
of analysis, loadings and material design stresses and the relevant
standards submitted for the approved plan mentioned above have been
reviewed in conjunction with the site investigation report for the CBP
now proposed, and are found to be equally applicable to the new CBP
now proposed.
(C) Referrals of Supertructure and Foundation Plans
The RSE is to certify that the new CBP proposal does not involve or affect the
followings and hence referral to each of the organisation is not required.
Does proposal involve or affect the Referral to each of the relevant

following? organisation
Schedule Area No. 1, 2 or 4 Geotechnical Engineering Office
Schedule Area No. 3 or MTR Mass Transit Railway Corporation
Protection Area
/Schedule …..
-1-
Schedule Area No. 5 (a) Geotechnical Engineering Office;
and
(b) Drainage Services Department
Slopes/Retaining Structures/Deep Geotechnical Engineering Office
excavation/disused tunnel
Culvert, nullah, stream course Drainage Services Department or
Project Manager, Territory
Development Department for New
Territory area
Kowloon Canton Railway route Railway Division, Highways
protection area or proposed rail Department
routes
Light Rail Transit Light Rail Division, Kowloon Canton
Railway Corporation
Structures to be erected in, over, (a) Lands Department; and
under or upon street (b) Highways Department
Highway Structures Highways Department
Sea walls, adjacent to sea front Technical Services Division,
Civil Engineering Department
Reclamation, piers (a) Marine Department; and
(b) Technical Services Division,
Civil Engineering Department
Public drainage Drainage Services Department
Water mains Water Supplies Department
(3/2002)
-2-

Amendment to Code of Practice

for Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996
(MOE Code)
Paragraph 14.5(e) of MOE Code stipulates that a vision panel is

required in a room, other than a toilet, from which the only exit route is through
another room.
2. To provide greater flexibility in design, the requirement for a vision

panel may be substituted by alternative provisions, such as a fire alarm system audible
in the room, which may serve to alert persons in the inner room of any danger from
fire or smoke.
3. For avoidance of doubt, paragraph 14(5) does not apply to habitable

room with means of escape through living/dinning room or kitchen in domestic flats.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/6/A (VII)
First issue June 2001 (AD/NB1)
Index under : Inner Room

MOE Code
Vision Panel

Provision of Sky Garden in Refuge Floor
Introduction
Further to the promulgation of incentives in Joint Practice Note No. 1

to promote the provision of communal sky gardens for environmental enhancement,
Buildings Department has examined, in consultation with Fire Services Department
(FSD), the possibility of incorporating such gardens in refuge floors.
Requirements
2. Having examined all relevant matters, the Building Authority (BA) is

prepared to accept the incorporation of communal sky gardens in refuge floors subject
to compliance with all the following conditions:
(a) Requirements on refuge floors specified in paragraph 21 of the

Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case
of Fire and paragraph 18 of the Code of Practice for Fire
Resisting Construction, except those special provisions
mentioned below, are complied with. In assessing the net area
for refuge and the minimum dimension of the area for refuge,
no account should be taken of the space occupied by any
planters, equipment and furniture in the refuge floor;
(b) All garden furniture and equipment in the refuge floor are firmly
fixed;
(c) All furniture, equipment and rubbish bins are made of non-
combustible materials, and are so sited that they will not
obstruct the exit routes and lift openings. Rubbish bins, where
provided, are fitted with self-closing lids;
(d) The garden is not to be used for activities involving the use of
naked fire e.g. barbecuing. A notice to this effect should be
posted at prominent locations at the garden; and
(e) Other criteria applicable to communal sky gardens specified in

the Joint Practice Note No. 1 are complied with.
Lift Access
3. Where sky gardens are incorporated in refuge floors, relaxation on the

restriction to provide lift door openings onto such floors may be granted subject to the
following:
/(a) …..
-2-
(a) The lift landing doors should open onto a protected lobby with
doors having an FRP of not less than 1 hour and walls having an
FRP of not less than 2 hours; and
(b) The lift operation is arranged in such a manner that the landing
doors at the refuge floor, other than those for fireman’s lifts,
will be automatically locked when the fire alarm is on.
Drencher System
4. Where a drencher system is required at external wall openings, FSD

may waive such requirement if the circumstances so justified on the merits of
individual cases. FSD welcomes any enquiries on this prior to formal submission of
plans.
Plants
5. While live plants are unlikely to pose undue fire risk, the use of
artificial plants/soil should be avoided where possible. Where in use, the authorized
person should advise the management to ensure that such artificial plants/soil are non-
combustible and do not emit toxic gases in case of fire.
6. A maintenance and management manual for the landscape works should

be made available for end-users to safeguard public hygiene and safety of the sky
garden.
Early Consultation
7. The BA may impose additional requirements depending on the special

circumstances of individual cases. Authorized persons proposing sky gardens in
refuge floors with very special design are advised to make early enquiries.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/LEG/6(II)
First issued December 2001 (AD/NB1)
Index under : Communal Sky Garden

Refuge Floor

Alternative Designs – Paragraph 12.3 of the

Code of Practice for Fire Resistance Construction 1996
(FRC Code)
Paragraph 12.3 of the FRC Code stipulates that the external wall of a
building at any floor should be separated from the external wall at the floor next
below by a spandrel not less than 900 mm in height.
2. Where a 900 mm vertical separation cannot be provided due to design

constraints, a horizontal apron having a projected width of 900 mm would be accepted
as an alternative option.
3. In view of the relatively low fire risk associated with ventilated balconies,
the Building Authority is prepared to waive the requirements in para 12.3(a) of the
FRC Code for balconies which are open on at least two sides. For avoidance of doubt,
the remainder of the unit has to comply with the full requirements in the paragraph for
fire separation.
( C M LEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VII)
First issue October 2001 (AD/NB1)
Index under: Spandrel

Fire Separation for balcony
Balcony – fire separation

Streets for Site Classification
The permitted site coverage and plot ratio for a building to be erected on a
site is determined according to the class of the site, which in turn depends on the
number of streets not less than 4.5m wide that the site abuts.
2. The following guidelines provide assistance in determining what constitutes

a street for the purpose of site classification:
(a) For a piece of land to be considered as a street, it must have the

characteristics of a street. Apart from being a passageway,
provision of access as a street, other relevant factors such as the
presence of any street lighting, paving and drainage would also be
taken into consideration.
(b) Land designated as public amenity areas such as open car parks,
public open spaces, and topographical features such as nullahs, sea,
and the like is not considered as a street for the purpose of site
classification.
(c) Where there is a physical separation of a site from a street by an

intervening strip of land, whether the site can be considered as
abutting on that street for the purpose of site classification will
depend upon the function, status and ownership of the intervening
land.
3. Apart from constituting a street itself, a street has to meet certain criteria
before it can be regarded as a street for the purpose of site classification. The
Building (Planning) (Amendment) Regulation 2005 (the “Amendment Regulation”),
which will come into operation on 31 December 2005, introduces a new regulation
18A setting out such criteria. A “class A site”, “class B site” or “class C site” is
defined under B(P)R 18A(1) according to the number of “specified street” not less
than 4.5m wide that the site abuts. A street is to be regarded as a “specified street”
if any of the following circumstances exists with respect to the street:
(a) The street is vested in Government and maintained by the Highways

Department (regulation 18A(3)(a)(i)). This refers to public streets
like Nathan Road or Kings Road. If an authorized person has doubt
on whether a street is maintained by the Highways Department or
not, he may consult the Highways Department directly.
/(b)……
-2-
(b) The street is on land held under the same Government lease as the
site, and under the terms of the lease, the lessee has to surrender
(when required to do so) the land on which the street is situated to
the Government (regulation 18A(3)(a)(ii)). This refers to private
streets required to be formed within a lot under lease. The
developer or the authorized person shall submit a copy of the land
grant or lease documents to substantiate compliance with the
requirement for including the subject private street for site
classification.
(c) The street is required to be constructed on unleased Government

land by the lessee of the Government lease under which the site is
held pursuant to the terms of that lease (regulation 18A(3)(a)(iii)).
The developer or the authorized person shall submit a copy of the
land grant or lease documents to substantiate compliance with the
requirement for including the subject street for site classification.
(d) The street is on land over which the owner of the site is expressly
granted, by or by virtue of an instrument, a right of way exercisable
at all times (regulation 18A(3)(a)(iv)). A private street not
belonging to the owner of the site under consideration will be
accepted for site classification only if a right of way over the street
is expressly granted to the owner. A public passage not falling
within (a) or (c) above will not be accepted for site classification
unless the developer is expressly granted with a right of way over
the passage. The developer or the authorized person shall submit a
copy of the instrument or deed of right of way to substantiate
compliance with the requirement for including the subject street for
site classification.
(e) The street is on land held by the owner of the site under a
Government lease (regulation 18A(3)(a)(v)). This refers to a
private street which is owned by the owner of the site, irrespective
of the site and the street being held under the same lease or not.
The developer or the authorized person shall submit evidence
indicating that the street will remain as a street for the lifetime of
the development. This could take the form of an undertaking
registered in the Land Registry to the effect that such street will be
assigned as common area for all owners of the development.
/(f)……
-3-
(f) If one or more of the circumstances mentioned in (a) to (e) above

exist with respect to different parts of the street, and these parts
together constitute the street, such street will also be considered as
specified street (regulation 18A(3)(b)). If these parts are separated
by intervening strips of land that do not meet any of the above
circumstances, each of these parts will be considered as a separate
specified street.
4. If a “specified street” for site classification is not an existing one and has to
be constructed, it should be completed before the occupation permit for the building
on the site is issued. If such street has not been completed by the time an occupation
permit is applied for, the Building Authority would refuse to issue the occupation
permit under section 21(6)(a) of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). In addition, the
“specified street” so created should remain as a street insofar as the buildings relying
on it for attaining the site coverage and plot ratio exist. Any subsequent proposal to
build over or extinguish such street would result in contravention of the provisions of
the BO and such proposal would be disapproved under section 16(1)(d) of the BO.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/BORD/80 (VI)
First issue October 2001 (AD/NB1)

This revision November 2005 (AD/Support, AD/NB1) – totally revamped
Index under: Street

Private street
Site classification
Specified street

Level Difference for

Floor Adjoining External Ground Level or Flat Roof
Regulations 35 and 49(1) of the Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)Rs)

require that the level of an internal floor shall not be less than 150 mm above the level of
the external ground or adjoining flat roof. The objective of these requirements is to
prevent the ingress of rainwater.
2. These requirements can generally be catered for at the design stage by

allowing sufficient difference in level between the internal floor and the external ground
or adjoining flat roof. However, there could be cases where authorized persons wish to
depart from the prescribed requirements due to special circumstances of their cases or as
a result of the unique nature of their designs. In such circumstances, the Building
Authority (BA) is prepared to consider granting exemption from the above regulations to
allow flexibility in design if means to guard against the ingress of water to the inside of
the building are provided to the satisfaction of the BA.
3. Each application for exemption or modification of Regulations 35 or 49(1)

of the B(C)Rs will be considered on its own merits. The BA, however, will give
favourable consideration to the following design criteria:
(a) Provision of additional drainage channels, each with at least 2 no. of

drainage outlets; and
(b) Provision of a fall, not less than 1:80, on the flat roof or external
ground sloping away from the adjoining internal/usable floor area.
4. In the event that the above measures cannot be implemented for whatever
reason, the provision of a kerb, with water proofing construction, at the access point
having a total height of 150mm above the adjoining roof or external ground may also
be considered.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/23 (VII)

This revision January 2005 – paras 1 and 2 amended and paras 3 and 4 added
Index under : External ground

Flat Roof
Roof
B(C)R 35
B(C)R 49(1)
APP-126

Plans for Signboards
Introduction
Erection of signboards, inclusive of display surfaces and fixings thereof,

which are solely for the purpose of displaying any advertisement, making any
announcement or notification, or displaying any visual image or other information, are
“building works” subject to the control of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). To curb
the proliferation of large unauthorized signboards, the Building Authority (BA) takes
prompt enforcement action to effect removal of unauthorized signboards in accordance
with the enforcement policy against unauthorized building works. At the same time,
to facilitate the erection of signboards legally to comply with the required safety and
health standards, the BA has introduced a fast-track processing service for applications
to erect signboards. This practice note provides details of such service and
requirements for the erection of signboards.
Fast-track Processing
2. The fast-track processing system is applicable to alteration and addition

(A&A) plans for signboards. Signboard proposals associated with new developments
will be processed in the usual manner. Under this system, the authorized person (AP)
and the registered structural engineer (RSE) are required to ensure and certify that the
provisions of the BO and the requirements of the relevant government departments for
the erection of signboards are complied with. The AP should submit a minimum of 9
sets of plans with a certificate (Appendix A) and a checklist (Appendix B) to the
Buildings Department (BD) for centralized processing. BD will refer the plans to the
relevant government departments as follows :-
(a) For all cases, to the relevant District Lands Officer, Lands
Department;
(b) For proposed signboards erected on rooftop subject to height

restriction under the Outline Zoning Plan (OZP) or facing the
harbour, to the relevant District Planning Officer, Planning
Department;
(c) For proposed signboards projecting over a public street, to :-

(i) Transport Department
Regional Chief Traffic Engineer,
Traffic Engineering Division
(ii) Highways Department
(1) Chief Highway Engineer of the relevant
Regional Office;
(2) Senior Landscape Architect/Landscape Unit;
-2-
(3) Chief Highway Engineer/Bridges & Structures

and
(4) Chief Engineer/Lighting.
(d) For proposed signboards which do not project over a public

street but facing on-coming traffic, to Regional Chief Traffic
Engineer, Traffic Engineering Division, Transport
Department.
3. In addition, for proposed illuminated signboards facing the harbour or

illuminated signboards adjacent to the Hong Kong International Airport or signboards
in the proximity of MTR/railway protection areas, the AP shall submit additional sets
of plans as required in Part 2 of Appendix B to facilitate referral.
4. Signboards should be structurally adequate and securely fixed to the

parent building. It is therefore desirable for building professionals to provide where
appropriate anchorages for signboards at the design and construction stages of new
buildings. Such anchorages, if proposed, should be shown on plans for approval.
5. Provided that sufficient information as specified in the following

paragraphs have been submitted, the building and structural A&A plans will be
processed within 30 days of the date of submission to BD. However, cases involving
unconventional signboards, which may require consideration by the Building
Committee of BD, or submissions not conforming to the relevant requirements as
specified in this practice note will not be included in the fast-track processing system.
In the case of the latter, the AP will be advised of the position within 14 days of
receipt of the submission.
6. To further streamline the vetting process, application for consent to the

commencement of the works may also be submitted together with the plan submission
for concurrent processing. In this connection, the relevant criteria and procedures
for concurrent applications for approval and consent stipulated in PNAP 272 shall
apply.
7. Taking into account the nature of the works, a site safety supervision
plan is not required. However, the AP, RSE and registered general building
contractor (RGBC) should ensure that sufficient measures to protect public safety are
provided during the course of works.
Building Plans Submission
8. Under the fast-track processing system for A&A plans, the following
details, information and supporting documents should be provided in the building plan
submission where applicable:
(a) Details of the proposed signboard including materials of the

supporting framework and the display surface thereof, showing
full dimensions, height, projection from lot boundary and over
street, horizontal and vertical clearances from ground or street
-3-
and relative positions of adjacent signboards within 5 metres;
(b) Plans, sections and elevations of the parent building and the
proposed signboard 1 ;
(c) Proposed ties including guy wires and struts;
(d) Widths of the carriageway and pavement;
(e) Position of any adjacent highway structure, tramway cable,

street lighting, street furniture, existing tree, traffic signal,
traffic sign, traffic surveillance camera and traffic management
facilities;
(f) An assessment demonstrating that the parent and adjoining

buildings will not be adversely affected with regard to the
following aspects:
(i) provision of lighting and ventilation and open space;
(ii) fire-resisting construction;
(iii) means of escape; and
(iv) means of access for fire-fighting and rescue;
(g) Sequence and procedures for carrying out the works (for
concurrent application of consent);
(h) Precautionary measures for the protection of the public (for

concurrent application of consent);
(i) Details of proposed illumination and lighting (for road, marine

or aviation safety consideration); and
(j) Photographs showing clearly the building façade, the condition

of supporting structural elements, the abutting street and
signboards in the vicinity.
Structural Plans and Calculations
9. The following plans and supporting documents/information are required

to be submitted under the fast-track processing system for A&A plans:
(a) Structural plan containing :

(i) layout of the signboard supporting frame and its fixings;
(ii) layout of the structural frame of the part of the parent
building where the signboard is affixed to;
1
Contents of advertisement need not be shown.
-4-
(iii) typical connections and supporting fixing details,

including details of fixing of the display surface to the
signboard supporting frame and fixing of supporting
frame to the parent building; and
(iv) design standard(s), material and workmanship
specification adopted for the proposed signboard
structural works and the display surfaces.
(b) Supporting calculations for structural works in item (a) above.
(c) In addition to the above, depending on the type, size and

location of the signboard, the following additional
information/assessments may be required to be submitted : -
(i) Signboards Projecting from External Wall (Projecting

Signboards)
Additional information/assessments that are required to

be submitted are indicated in the table below:-
Area of signboard(2)
<10 m2
Information/Assessment Required ≥10 m 2
Case A Case B
Checking of the adequacy of the

structural elements of the parent
Yes Yes NR
building affected by the proposed
work
Relevant structural information of

the part of the parent building Yes Yes NR
supporting the signboard
Assessment of the effect of the When the area of the new

proposed work on the overall signboard(s) ≥ 10% of the
stability of the building wind exposure area of a
building, normal to the
wind direction that is
under consideration
NR – Not required to be submitted. However, for buildings with any
visible dilapidation or defect, an assessment of the structural integrity of
supporting members of the existing parent building including insitu
verification of structural strength and site photographs should be submitted
to BA for reference and record purpose.
In the table above: -
Case A refers to a signboard that is not affixed to the

parent building at floor slab levels or when any of the
floor slabs to which the signboard is affixed is of pure
cantilevered slab construction.
-5-
Case B refers to a signboard that is affixed to the parent

building at floor slab levels only and where the floors are
not of pure cantilevered slab construction.
(2)
Area of signboard has the same meaning as that depicted in Annexes 1 & 2 of
Appendix G.
(ii) Signboards cladded in parallel to the external wall

(Wall Signboards)
Wall signboards are signboards that project not more

than 600 mm from and with no part extending laterally
beyond the external wall. For signboards that fall into
this category, irrespective of their frontal surface area,
additional information/assessments that are required to
be submitted are shown in the table below:-
Information/Assessment Required Case C Case D
Checking of the adequacy of the

structural elements of the parent
NR Yes
building affected by the proposed
work
Relevant structural information

of the part of the parent building NR Yes
supporting the signboard
Assessment of the effect of the

proposed work on the overall NR NR
stability of the building
NR – Not required to be submitted. However, for buildings with any
visible dilapidation or defect, an assessment of the structural integrity of
supporting members of the existing parent building including insitu
verification of structural strength and site photographs should be submitted
to BA for reference and record purpose.
In the table above: -
Case C refers to the part of wall signboard that is

affixed to load-bearing walls or columns.
Case D refers to the part of wall signboard that is
affixed to edge beams or pure cantilevered slabs.
(iii) Other Types of Signboards
For signboards other than the above two categories and

for those erected at other locations including roof top or
standing alone, structural assessments that are required
-6-
to be submitted should be in accordance with PNAP

249.
Detailed construction requirements are set out in Appendix C.
Exemption under Section 31(1) of the Buildings Ordinance
10. Where the proposed building works project over a street, an exemption
of section 31(1) of the BO may be granted upon application provided that:
(a) the BA is satisfied that the works are to be constructed in a

suitable location and at an appropriate height; and
(b) the design is acceptable to the relevant departments, other than

Lands Department which will consider the plan submission
separately.
Approval of Plans
11. Under the fast-track processing system for A&A plans, the BA will
place emphasis on the AP’s certification as mentioned in paragraph 2 above and take
into account any advice given by the Commissioner for Transport, the Director of
Highways and the Director of Planning. The AP should certify compliance with the
requirements of the Fire Services Department, the Transport Department and the
Highways Department as set out in Appendices D to F respectively. The positional
and dimensional requirements for the signboards are specified in Appendix G.
12. For submissions not adopting the fast-track processing system,

paragraph 10 on exemption under section 31(1) of the Buildings Ordinance, Appendix
C on construction requirements and Appendix G on positional and dimensional
requirements are equally applicable. APs and RSEs are also advised to make
reference to other Appendices on the requirements of other government departments
as appropriate.
Accountability for Gross Floor Area/Site Coverage
13. Signboards situating within lot boundaries will generally not be

accountable for gross floor area, but will be accounted for site coverage unless its
dimensions and extent of projection comply with the requirements laid down in
Appendix G. Furthermore, the thickness of wall sign will always be measured from
the external façade.
Compliance with Lease Conditions and other Enactment
14. The approval given by the BA should not be deemed to confer any
title to land or to act as a waiver of any term in any lease or licence pursuant to
section 14(2) of the BO. It is therefore necessary to seek separately the consent of
the relevant building owners or Owners’ Corporation, as the case may be, for the
erection of signboards. It may also be necessary to seek the permission of the
-7-
District Lands Officer, Lands Department under the lease conditions, particularly for
projection over government land. In this connection, the requirements of the Lands
Department at Appendix H should be observed. The AP should consult other
relevant authorities and ensure compliance with their requirements. In this regard, a
list of other legislation relating to signboard is attached at Appendix I for general
reference.
Sanctions
15. APs and RSEs wishing to take advantage of the fast-track processing
procedures should ensure that the above submission requirements are fully met. The
BA will take a serious view on any misrepresentation in the plan submissions or
misconduct in the carrying out of the works. APs and RSEs are strongly reminded of
their statutory duties under section 4 of the BO and the sanctions under sections 7 and
40 thereof.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BOP/39 (IV)

This revision Apr 2009 (AD/NB1 & AD/NB2) - Paras 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 12 & 13 and
Appendices A, B, C, D, E, F, G & I amended
Index under : Fast track processing

Signboards
Signs
Signboard anchorage
Appendix A
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Request for
Fast-track Processing of Alteration and Addition Plans for Signboard and
Self-certification by Authorized Person and Registered Structural Engineer

In accordance with PNAP 269, I hereby request for fast-track processing of the plans
(drwg no. _________________ to __________________) submitted for the proposed
signboard to be erected at _______________________________________________________.
2. I undertake to comply with the provisions of the BO and I certify that the proposed
building works do not adversely affect the parent and adjoining buildings with regard to the
following aspects:
Fire safety – means of access for fire fighting and rescue, means of escape in case of
fire, fire resisting construction
Health and environment – lighting, ventilation, open space
3. I also certify that the following requirements are fully complied with :
Requirements of the Fire Services Department as specified in Appendix D to PNAP
269
Requirements of the Transport Department as specified in Appendix E to PNAP 269
Requirements of the Highways Department as specified in Appendix F to PNAP 269
Requirements on the projection, clearance and location as specified in Appendix G to
PNAP 269
The height restriction controlled under the Hong Kong Airport (Control of
Obstructions) Ordinance
The height restriction under the Outline Zoning Plan
Requirements of the other relevant authorities i.e. MTRC Ltd., Marine Department,
Civil Aviation Department
Date_________________
(Name in full)
-1-
Part B (to be certified by RSE)
4. I certify that the structural requirements as specified in Appendix C to PNAP 269 are
fully complied with.
Date_________________
Signature of RSE
(Name in full)
5*. A Form BA 8A applying for your consent to the commencement and carrying out of
the works mentioned in paragraph 1 above is enclosed.

(Rev. 4/2009)
-2-
Appendix B
(PNAP 269)
Check List on Documents to be (APP-126)
Included in A&A Plan Submission for Signboard
PART 1 – DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED

Yes No/NA
2 sets of signed and coloured plans, calculations and supporting documents to BD
1 set of plans with development schedule to DLO, Lands Department
1 set of plans to DPO, Planning Department for signboard erected on rooftop subject to
height restriction under the OZP or signboard facing the harbour
1 set of plans to the Chief Traffic Engineer, Transport Department for signboard
projecting over a public street or for signboard facing on-coming traffic
4 sets of plans to the Highways Department for signboard projecting over a public street
(i) Chief Highway Engineer;
(ii) Senior Landscape Architect/Landscape Unit;
(iii) Chief Highway Engineer/Bridges & Structures and
(iv) Chief Engineer/Lighting
Request Form for Fast-Track Processing and Self-Certification
Form BA 4 (Appointment of AP/RSE)
Form BA 5 (Application for approval)
Form BA 6 (Stability Certificate of AP/RSE)
Form BA8 (Application for consent to the commencement and carrying out of building
works)
Form BA 16 (Application for modification/exemption) (e.g. BO s.31(1))
Site photographs showing the building facades and the vicinity
Name and address of the Owners’ Corporation and/or the management company
PART 2 – ADDITIONAL SETS OF PLANS FOR REFERRAL TO RELEVANT AUTHORITIES
Does proposal involve or affect the following? Relevant Authorities Yes No
Scheduled Area No. 3, MTR Protection Area & Mass Transit Railway Corporation Ltd
Work Sites (PNAP 77) or KCR Protection Area &
Work Sites (PNAP 279)
Proposed rail routes Railway Division, Highways Department
Light Rail Transit Railway route or reserves Light Rail Division, Mass Transit
Railway Corporation Ltd
Illuminated signboards facing the harbour Marine Department
Civil Aviation Department
Illuminated signboards near Hong Kong Civil Aviation Department
International Airport
Others (e.g. Monuments or Graded Buildings) (e.g. Antiquities and Monuments Office,
Leisure & Cultural Services Department)
(Rev. 4/2009)
Appendix C
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Construction Requirements for Signboards
Structural Requirements
A. Design
General
1. The signboard display surface and its fixing shall form part of the signboard
structure.
2. All signboards should, except as stated in paragraphs 3 and 4 below, be fixed

to approved structural members of building and should in no case be fixed to
or supported by unauthorized structures. No signboard should be affixed to
or take support from another signboard.
3. Regardless of the size of signboards, canopy shall not be used as structural

supporting members for any part of the signboard or its supporting frame.
4. Subject to paragraph 9(c) of this practice note, projecting structures/balconies

shall not be used as structural supporting members for any part of the
signboard or its supporting frame.
5. The structural adequacy of the signboard inclusive of its supporting frame,

display surface and its fixings should be justified with structural calculations.
6. The determination of dead loads, wind loads and imposed loads should be in
accordance with the Building (Construction) Regulations. Full design wind
pressure should be adopted for the design of signboard supporting frame.
The signboard and parts thereof should be capable of sustaining the most
adverse combination of dead, wind and imposed loads. A structural
assessment should also be made to ensure that there are no adverse effects to
the overall stability of the parent building for those projecting signboards with
an area equal to or greater than 10% of the wind exposure area of the building,
normal to the wind direction that is under consideration.
7. Reference should be made to the current edition of the Code of Practice on

Wind Effects in Hong Kong for the effect of the wind load on the structural
analysis of the supporting frame, display surface and fixing of signboards.
8. The allowable permissible stresses of materials to be used for the design of the
supporting frame and display surface materials may be increased by 25% due
solely to wind loading.
-1-
Supporting frames
9. Supporting frames of the signboard shall be fixed to structural elements of

building in such a way that it will not impair the structural integrity or
behaviour of the supporting structural members. The fixing so provided
should not overstress the signboard and should be able to safely sustain and
transmit all loading including wind load acting upon the signboard.
10. The supporting structural members of building to which the signboard is to be

fixed should be structurally sound. The assessment of the structural integrity
of such members including insitu verification of structural strength and site
photographs should be submitted for reference and record purposes except for
those smaller signboards as stated in paragraph 9(c) of this practice note.
11. The supporting frames of the signboard should be structurally tied to provide
for adequate lateral stability. Guy wires should not be treated as structural
members of the supporting frame.
12. Through bolts should be used in place of anchor bolts whenever practical for
fixing of signboards.
Display surfaces and their fixings
13. The display surface of the signboard shall be fixed to the supporting frame in
such a way that it will not impair its structural integrity or behaviour. The
fixing so provided should not overstress both the display surface materials and
the supporting frame. The fixings should be able to safely sustain and
transmit all loading including wind load acting on the display surface.
14. Vinyl is a commonly used material for display surfaces of signbaords. The
design information for the vinyl display surface materials should comprise the
dimensions of the display surface; the elongation properties, the breaking
strength, the adhesive strength and unit weight of the vinyl materials; the
tensile capacity and spacing of the ties respectively. With respect to the
allowable tensile resistances of these vinyl materials and ties, which are solely
used for display purpose, a factor of safety of 2 is considered sufficient.
15. A wind load of 70% of the design wind pressure as given in the Code of
Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 could be adopted for checking
the structural adequacy of the vinyl display surface material as well as its
fixings, whereas full design wind pressure should be adopted for the design of
other display surfaces including Light Emitting Diode (LED) display board.
-2-
B. Materials & Workmanship
General
16. Materials used for the construction of signboards shall be of such quality and
grade as specified for building works in the Building (Construction)
Regulations.
17. Bi-metallic corrosion should be avoided at any time during the service life.
18. The following minimum corrosion protection to structural steelwork should be

provided:-
(a) Blast cleaning or wire-brushing should be used to ensure that the

surface is free of rust, mill scales and harmful materials such as oil and
paint; and
(b) Protective coating of primers, undercoat and finish coat of paint should
be applied to the cleaned surface immediately in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Supporting frames
19. All structural steel used should have a minimum yield strength 250 MPa and
possess such chemical compositions and mechanical properties as specified in
recognized standards.
20. All connections by welding should be carried out by qualified welders. All
welded connections and electrodes should comply with recognized standards.
21. Anchor bolts, if used, should be preferably of stainless steel and mechanical
types. Installation of anchor bolts shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. At least one of each type of anchor bolts being
used should be tested on site by pull-out test up to 1.5 times the safe tensile
capacity of the bolts. The tested anchor bolts should not show any signs of
separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effects. The records of pull-out
test should be submitted upon completion of works.
22. Structural steelwork to be covered up with external cladding shall be clean,

free from grease, loose rust and scale. They should be corrosion protected
before being cladded.
Display surfaces and their fixings
23. All materials of the display surface and its fixings should have adequate
mechanical strength. For vinyl display surface material, it should also be
verified with valid manufacturer’s certificate.
-3-
24. Vinyl display surface materials are usually joined together with adhesives to
form a large surface area for display purpose. The adhesion should be carried
out in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
25. All design material properties should be verified with design specifications as
recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Erection
26. Precautionary measures should be taken during the erection of the signboards
and the display surfaces by the provision of adequate temporary shoring,
platform or otherwise, to prevent, so far as is practicable, the accidental
collapse or falling down of any part of the signboard and its supporting frame,
which may endanger any person and traffic or cause any hindrance or
disturbance to the pedestrian and/or vehicular traffic flow underneath.
27. The erection of the signboard including the fabrication and installation of the
fixing, supporting frame and display surface of the signboard should be carried
out by Registered General Building Contractor. A typical elevation showing
the fixing of the vinyl display surface is given in Annex 1 and 2 to this
Appendix.
D. Maintenance (for advice only)
28. All signboards should be properly maintained at all times. After completion of
erection, maintenance manuals should be issued to owners of signboards to
undertake the maintenance inspections of signboards after typhoon and
annually. The following should be included in the manuals:
(a) Maintenance inspections should be carried out by skilled and experienced

persons on the supporting members of parent building and every
component of signboard including its supporting frame, display surface
and fixing;
(b) Worn and torn characters forming the inscription should be replaced;
(c) Broken and/or detached parts of display surfaces should be repaired or

replaced;
(d) Dangling and loose fluorescent tubes or other lighting installations should
be taken down and replaced with new ones securely plugged in;
(e) Loose electrical wires/installations should be re-connected to the circuit;
(f) Heavily corroded steel sections should be replaced;
(g) Slightly corroded steel sections should be cleaned before re-painting, all
damaged paint surfaces after erection should be repaired in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations;
-4-
(h) Fractured, buckled or missing members of the steel frames shall be
replaced;
(i) Dislocated, detached or heavily corroded fixing bolts should be replaced;
(j) Slightly corroded fixing bolts should be thoroughly cleaned and

re-painted with anti-corrosion paint, e.g. zinc-rich primer; and
(k) The signboard and its associated structures should be removed when it is
no longer required. The removal should be carried out by a competent
and experienced contractor and adequate precautionary measures should
be taken to prevent accidental collapse or falling down of any part of
signboard and its associated structures.
Fire Safety Requirements
29 The supporting frame of the signboard should be made of non-combustible

material.
30 The display surface of the signboard and its fixings should be made of metal,
aluminium, non-breakable glass or any other materials that are
non-combustible and non-brittle materials. Where they are not made of
non-combustible materials, the requirements specified in the following
paragraphs should be complied with.
31 Plastics (including vinyl) and LED display boards should have a surface spread
of flame characteristic of not worse than Class 2 determined in accordance
with BS 476 : Part 7 : 1997.
32 Wood, wood laminates and fibreboard should have a surface spread of flame
characteristic of not worse than Class 3 determined in accordance with BS 476 :
Part 7 : 1997 and be protected in accordance with BS 5268.
33 For display surface or fixing materials which are not non-combustible and not
covered in paragraphs 31 and 32 above, the acceptability of such materials for
the display and fixing purposes would be considered on the merit of each case
upon submission of their material specifications and test reports relating to the
reactions of the materials to fire, such as flame spread characteristics.
34 Where paints and inks are applied to the surfaces of materials which are not
non-combustible, e.g. acrylics, the resulting surface should have a spread of
flame characteristic of not worse than that of the underlying substrate.
35 Without prejudice to any requirement on provision of natural lighting or

ventilation, where the display surface or its fixings of a wall signboard is not
made of non-combustible material, any external wall opening behind the
signboard should be protected by fixed light or blocked up by material having
a fire resistance period of not less than that required for the elements of
-5-
construction of the floor where the external wall opening is located. In this
situation, the non-combustible infill required under paragraph 12.2 of the Code
of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 can be dispensed with.
36 Materials tested or conforming to other standards or criteria may be accepted if

they can be shown to achieve the performance requirements set out in Building
(Rev. 4/2009)
-6-
Annex 1 to Appendix C
(PNAP 269) (APP-126)
(Page 1 of 2)
(PNAP 269) (APP-126)
(Page 2 of 2)
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Appendix D
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Fire Services Department’s Requirement
1. A signboard if projecting over a street shall have a minimum horizontal

clearance of not less than 4.5m from central divider, adjacent highway
structures or pavement curb at the opposite side whichever is nearer to the
signboard.
2. A signboard shall have a minimum headroom clearance of 5.8m if projecting

over a carriageway and shall have a minimum vertical clearance of 5m above
the elevated road level of any adjacent highway structure.
3. Two adjacent projecting signboards shall have a minimum lateral clearance of

2.4m. No signboard shall be allowed within this lateral clearance at a level
higher or lower than the two signboards.
4. Signboards erected from the opposite sides of a street shall not project within
1.5m from the geometrical centerline of the street.
5. Guy wires tied to secure signboards shall not run laterally or diagonally on
either side of signboards to minimize the possible obstruction to access to
upper floors by fire services ladders.
6. No neon light tubing, electrical circuits or lamps shall be installed on

woodwork or other combustible material.
7. The transformer, neon light tubing and other parts of high voltage circuit shall
be located out of reach of the public.
8. No roof exit shall be obstructed by the signboard or any of the steelwork used
in the construction of the signboard.
9. A signboard shall not cause any obstruction to openable windows. If

obstruction to such windows is unavoidable, then approval has to be sought
from the Building Authority.
10. The Fireman’s Switch of an approved type shall be situated in a conspicuous

position, not more than 3m but not less than 2.5m from ground level. It shall
either be as nearly as possible vertically below the sign or near the main
entrance to the building, where appropriate. Notwithstanding this, it shall be
positioned at a point out of reach of the general public. Where more than
one Fireman’s Switch is installed on any one building, such switches shall be
clearly marked to distinguish one from another.
11. The ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ position of the Fireman’s Switch shall be conventional
(i.e. push upward – ‘OFF’; push downward – ‘ON’).
12. The switch is to be affixed on a board approximately 300mm long by 250mm
wide, which is painted white and edged with a 50mm red border. The
inscription ‘NEON SIGN-FIREMAN’S SWITCH’ in English is to be painted
on the top and ‘霓虹招牌 - 消防掣’ in Chinese at the bottom of the board in
black. The switch is to be positioned in the middle of the board.
13. Precautionary measures should be taken to prevent the sparks generated from
electric welding in the process of erecting signboards from igniting nearby
combustibles.
(Rev. 4/2009)
- 2 -
Appendix E
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Transport Department’s Requirement
1. Signboards shall not be erected on or above expressways except with the

written permission of the Commissioner for Transport under Regulation 15 of
the Road Traffic (Expressways) Regulations.
2. Signboards, in general, should not be erected over roads with speed limit 70
km/h or above.
3. The illumination, colours and shape of signboards shall not be such that they
could be confused with traffic signs including all traffic management facilities,
such as traffic lights, direction signs, variable message signs, etc. Signboards
shall not be located too close to traffic signs so as to avoid causing confusion.
4. Signboards shall not obstruct traffic signs, traffic lights, traffic surveillance
cameras and transport information systems/ variable message signs or affect
the operation and safety of transport facilities. If necessary, relevant parties
should be consulted, for example, if CCTVs are likely to be
affected/obstructed, Transport Department should be consulted.
5. TV screens and any signboards or lighting that change or show moving images
shall not be located such that they may cause distraction to drivers. The
Transport Department should be consulted regarding installation, erection or
alteration of any such signboards that will be visible to drivers of motor
vehicles.
6. Signboards shall not be erected at locations which require road users' full
concentration such as junctions, roundabouts and pedestrian crossing points or
at locations where the signs may impede already restricted visibility such as at
horizontal and vertical curves.
(Rev. 4/2009)
Appendix F
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Highways Department’s Requirements
1. Signboards and its associated supports and guy wires shall not be fixed to or
cause obstruction to street lighting, traffic signs/signals, highway structures,
trees, street furniture etc. and shall not obstruct the maintenance operations of
the same. In case of doubt, Highways Department must be consulted.
2. No signboard shall be erected above expressway and trunk roads. A

minimum clearance of 2m to highway structures and 3m to street lighting
should be maintained in order to avoid obstruction to maintenance access.
3. In order not to affect the illumination of the street lights, any proposed
signboard should not encroach into the space bounded by the main beams from
the lantern of an adjacent street light which are about 72o from the vertical, i.e.
an angle of cone of 144o. The AP is required to carry out a site visit/survey
to ascertain the as-surveyed location of any lamp post which is required for
verification of vertical clearance provided and its compliance with the above
requirement.
(Rev. 4/2009)
Appendix G
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Positional and Dimensional Requirements for Signboards
1. No part of a signboard shall obstruct or reduce the width of the means of

escape of a building.
2. No part of a signboard shall obstruct or reduce the required natural lighting

and ventilation or open space provided to a building.
3. No part of a signboard shall project more than 4.2m from an external wall of a
building or within 1.5m from the centre line of a street, whichever is the less.
In this connection, the outer wall of a projecting structure from the building
shall not be regarded as an external wall. The thickness of a projecting
signboard shall not be more than 600mm.
4. For a wall signboard with the display surface parallel to the external wall, it
shall not project more than 600mm from the building façade or 600 mm from
the lot boundary whichever is the less.
5. All parts of a projecting signboard (including its supporting structure but

excluding structural members solely for preventing lateral movement of the
signboard) shall be contained within a prescribed prism. Prescribed prism
means a virtual rectangular prism of which the area of the largest planar
surface is 40m2 and the smallest dimension is 600mm. Some illustrations of
calculating the rectangular planar area of the prescribed prism are shown in
Annex 1.
6. Projecting signboards within the same projecting vertical plane from a building
shall have an aggregate rectangular planar area of not more than 40 m2.
Where one or more signboards are erected in the same vertical plane of a
building, the aggregate of the vertical height of the signboards shall not be
more than 20m (Annex 2).
7. No signboard shall rest on or attach to a canopy.
8. The minimum vertical clearances above ground are :
Position Minimum Clearance

Over pavement 3.5 m with minimum 1 m clear distance from the curb
or the carriageway
Over carriageway 5.8 m
Over pedestrian 5.8 m
streets
Over tramway 7m
-1-
9. Any part of a projecting signboard including supporting frames and lateral
struts shall have a minimum distance of 2.4m, measured laterally and throughout the
height of the building, from any other projecting signboard.
10. Two signboards erected from the opposite side of a street shall have a
horizontal minimum clear distance of 3m.
11. No signboard shall obstruct or affect any trees.
The above requirements are diagrammatically shown in Annex 3.
(Rev. 4/2009)
-2-
Annex 1 to Appendix G
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Signboard contained within

the prescribed prism:-
Rectangular planar area =

40m2 (MAX)
(Area shown dotted)
Thickness = 600mm (MAX)
Signboard contained within

the prescribed prism:-
Rectangular planar area =

40m2 (MAX)
(Area shown dotted)
Thickness = 600mm (MAX)

(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Area 1 a
(Rectangular planar area)
Area 2 b
Area 3 c
4.2m (MAX)
Area 1 + Area 2 + Area 3 ≤ 40m2

a + b + c ≤ 20m
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
(MAX 最多)
40m 平方米
2
Appendix H
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Lands Department’s Requirement
1. A development schedule under the lease conditions should be accompanied

with the building plans submission.
2. The building plan should clearly show the lot boundary and whether the
proposed signboard would protrude over the Government land.
3. The AP should indicate in the submission the name of the signboard owner and
the name of the property owner in which the signboard is to be erected.
4. Further information such as photographs showing the proposed location of

signboards and the Deed of Mutual Covenant of the property concerned may
be required depending on individual cases.
(5/2003)
Appendix I
(PNAP 269)
(APP-126)
Other Legislation Affecting Erection of Signboards
1. Building Management Ordinance, Cap 344
2. Control of Obscene and Indecent Article Ordinance, Cap 390
3. Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208 and Special Areas Regulations
4. Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance, Cap 28
5. Electricity Ordinance, Cap 406
6. Fire Services Ordinance, Cap 95
7. Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap 301
8. Public Health & Municipal Services Ordinance, Cap 132
9. Public Lighting Ordinance, Cap 105
10. Road Traffic Ordinance, Cap 374
11. Shipping and Port Control Ordinance, Cap 313
12. Smoking (Public Health) Ordinance, Cap 371
13. Summary Offences Ordinance, Cap 228
14. Undesirable Medical Advertisements Ordinance, Cap 231
15. Air Navigation (Hong Kong) Order 1995, Cap 448C
(Rev. 4/2009)

Contractor’s Sheds
Introduction
Contractor’s sheds are often required by site personnel in building sites

for use as site office, storage room, staff room or canteen. In accordance with Building
(Planning) Regulation 53, permits from the Building Authority (BA) are required for the
erection of such sheds.
2. The need for professional input for the design and construction of the
sheds depends on the size and scale of such sheds.
Self Regulation
3. To promote self-discipline and to facilitate the development process, the

BA is prepared to issue a permit for the erection of a contractor’s shed within a building
site based on the certification, by a registered general building contractor (RGBC), a
registered specialist contractor (RSC) or by an authorized person (AP) and registered
structural engineer (RSE), as to compliance with the requirements of the Buildings
Ordinance, according to the circumstances of the case.
Self Regulation by Contractor
4. For contractor’s sheds complying with the criteria set out in Appendix A,
such sheds may be certified by a RGBC or RSC. Contractors adopting this option should
complete Parts I and II of Form BA18 and submit to the BA the same together with details
of the proposed contractor's sheds.
Self Regulation by AP/RSE
5. For contractor’s sheds within the cartilage of the building site which do
not meet the criteria set out in Appendix A, they may be certified by an AP and a RSE,
who may or may not be the AP or RSE appointed for the building site. Applicants should
arrange to complete Parts I and III of Form BA18 and submit the same together with
supporting structural documents comparable to those specified in Building
(Administration) Regulations (B(A)R) 8(1)(d) and (i). Where the contractor’s shed is
sited at a location with geotechnical concern (Item (c) of Appendix A is relevant),
geotechnical documents prepared by a registered geotechnical engineer to a standard
comparable to the requirements set out in B(A)R 8(1)(bb) should also be submitted to
demonstrate that the shed will not affect or be affected by the nearby slope or retaining
structures.
/Issue …..
-2-
Issue of Permit
6. The BA will issue a permit upon receipt of an application incorporating

the required information and documents. While the BA will carry out audit checks by
examining in details some applications selected at random, the RGBC, RSC, AP or RSE
should ensure that the sheds, when constructed, are structurally stable and safe for use.
7. When renewal of a contractor’s shed(s) permit is required, an application

in writing should be made to the BA with the following documents :
(a) the original Form BD 108; and
(b) a written confirmation from the RGBC/RSC/AP/RSE that the

previous certification on Form BA18 remains valid for the
extended period under application.
General Advice on Contractor’s Sheds
8. For a contractor’s shed sited over a hoarding or covered walkway, a

permit will not be issued if the support of the shed is dependent on the structure of the
hoarding/covered walkway or if any of its support obstructs the clear width of the
hoarding/covered walkway.
9. If a contractor’s shed is constructed of combustible material, it should be

located at least 3m from any other adjoining buildings or site boundary and such space
should be kept clear.
10. All contractor’s sheds should be provided with adequate fire safety
provisions in accordance with the requirements set out in Appendix B.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BREG/P/16 (IV)

This revision October 2007 (AD/NB1) – para 5 and Form BA18 revised
Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation Part VII

Building (Planning) Regulation Part IX
Contractor’s Shed
Hoardings, Covered walkways and Gantries
Appendix A
(PNAP 273)
(APP-127)
Criteria for Contractor’s Sheds that could be certified by RGBC/RSC
a) The contractor’s shed is of single storey with storey height less than 3m and with
floor area less than 230 m2;
b) The base of the contractor’s shed from the ground level, if stilted above ground,
does not exceed 1.5m;
c) The proposed shed does not pose any geotechnical concern in that
(i) The maximum gradient across the site for erection of shed is not
more than 15º.
(ii) The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the
footprint of the shed in any direction is less than 15º.
(iii) There is no slope within the area 10m outside the footprint of the
shed steeper than 30º or higher than 1.5m.
(iv) There is no retaining wall or terrace wall higher than 1.5 m either
within the site for erection of shed or within the area 10m outside the
footprint of the shed.
d) The contractor’s shed is not sited
(i) on a cantilevered structure; or
(ii) above a hoarding or covered walkway; and
e) The contractor’s shed is located within the boundaries of the building site and is not
readily accessible to the general public.
(11/2002)
Appendix B
(PNAP 273)
(APP-127)
Fire Safety Requirements for Contractor’s Sheds
Shed Design Fire Safety Requirements
Shed(s) to be certified by registered contractors
Single-storey less than 230 m2 One 4.5 kg CO2 or 9-litre water type fire
extinguisher at each entrance.
Shed(s) to be certified by AP/RSE
Structure exceeding one storey and less (i) One 4.5 kg CO2 or 9-litre water type
than 230 m2 fire extinguisher at each entrance.
(ii) At least one open staircase to be

provided.
Single-storey in excess of 230 m2 (iii) One 4.5 kg CO2 or 9-litre water type
fire extinguisher at each entrance.
(iv) Access for fire engine to be provided

to reach 30m travel distance from
the shed.
Other designs; or non-compliance with Fire Services Department to formulate

Fire Safety Requirements in this table for requirements on a case-by-case basis.
the above structures
Note : Travel distance within the shed should comply with the Code of Practice for the
Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996.
(11/2002)
Form BA 18
BUILDINGS ORDINANCE
(Chapter 123)
BUILDING (PLANNING) REGULATIONS
Regulation 53
__________
Application for permit to erect a contractor’s shed
Part I
Date__________________
In accordance with the provisions of regulation 53 of the Building (Planning) Regulation, *I/we (name in full)
______________________________________________ (Chinese) _____________________________, *registered
general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the ** ________________________ category of (address)
________________________________________________________________________________________________
hereby apply for a permit to erect contractor’s shed(s) as shown in the accompanying plans, in connection with building
works to be carried out at (address of site) _____________________________________________________________
(Lot No.) _________________________________ (your Ref. No. _______________________________).
2. *I/we hereby supply the following information for your consideration :

(a) The situation, dimensions layout and construction of the shed are as shown on the
accompanying plans.
(b) The estimated time for which the shed is required is ________________________
year(s)/month(s).
(c) The intended use of the shed is _________________________________________.
(d) The number of persons to be accommodated for habitation is _________________.
(e) Provision of “latrine/*water-closet/*kitchen accommodation is as follows :
__________________________________________________________________
Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works : ________________________
Signature : ________________________
Certificate of Registration No. : ________________________
Date of expiry of registration : ________________________

** Enter the name of the sub-register for the category of specialized work
/Part II …..
-2-
Part II
Date ____________________
*I/we (name in full) _____________________________________________________________________

(Chinese) ___________________________________, *registered general building contractor/registered specialist
contractor of (address) _____________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
hereby confirm that the contractor’s shed(s), complying with the criteria set out in Appendix A of PNAP 273, at the
captioned construction site will be constructed under *my/our supervision in accordance with the plan(s) prepared by
me/us ___________________________________________________________________________________________
or under my supervision or direction and will be maintained by me/us.
2. *I/we confirm in my/our opinion that the shed(s), when built, *is/are structurally safe and fit for use until
_______________________________.
Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works : ________________________
Signature : ________________________
Certificate of Registration No. : ________________________
Date of expiry of registration : ________________________
/*Part III(a) …..

-3-
*Part III(a)
Date ______________________
I (name in full) ________________________________________________________________________,

(Chinese) _____________________________________, authorized person, hereby CERTIFY that (i) the structural
details and calculations as defined under Building (Administration) regulation 12 (3) & (4) and (ii) the fire safety
provisions* for the contractor’s shed(s) at the captioned construction site are prepared by me or under my supervision
or direction.
*2. I also CERTIFY that the geotechnical documents accompanied with this submission is prepared by a
registered geotechnical engineer and the proposed contractor’s shed(s) will not affect or be affected by the nearby slopes
or retaining structures.
3. I also confirm that in my opinion the shed(s), when built in accordance with the submitted plans, *is/are
structurally safe and fit for use until _______________________________.
Signature : ___________________________
Certificate of Registration No. : ___________________________
Date of expiry of registration : ___________________________
/*Part III(b) …..

-4-
*Part III(b)
Date ______________________
I (name in full) _________________________________________________________________________

(Chinese) _____________________________, registered structural engineer, hereby CERTIFY that the structural
details and calculations for the contractor’s shed(s) at the captioned construction site are prepared by me.
2. I also CERTIFY that in my opinion the shed(s) when built in accordance with the submitted plans are
structurally safe and fit for use until __________________________.
Signature : __________________________
Certificate of Registration No. : __________________________
Date of expiry of registration : __________________________
Part III(c)
4. *I/we (name in full) _____________________________________________________________________

(Chinese) ______________________________, *registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor
of (address) ______________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
hereby confirm that the contractor’s shed(s) at the captioned construction site will be constructed under *my/our
supervision in accordance with the plan(s).
Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works : __________________________
Signature : __________________________
Certificate of Registration No. : __________________________
Date of expiry of registration : __________________________
(Rev. 10/2007)

Geotechnical Design Information
Geotechnical design submissions involve the preparation of geotechnical

plans and geotechnical reports. The submissions are ever increasing in complexity
and volume. The employment of sophisticated geotechnical computer programs for
design is common. To facilitate expeditious processing of submissions, it is
important to maintain focus on the key issues throughout the design process and to
organize the geotechnical plans, design reports and calculations clearly and
systematically.
Preparing for a Geotechnical Design
2. Intensive developments in the urban areas and on hillsides have brought

about various geotechnical stability issues with public safety concerns. To
satisfactorily address these concerns, geotechnical designs should be carried out
through a careful process with due attention given to every aspect of the design
elements and the uncertainties involved. Standards and recommended good practice
should be followed to ensure compliance with the current safety requirements.
Reference can be made to Technical Guidance Note (TGN) No. 1 which contains a list
of guidance documents being used by the Geotechnical Engineering Office as de facto
geotechnical standards. The TGN can be found at the Civil Engineering and
Development Department website http://www.cedd.gov.hk/.
3. The geotechnical feasibility of a development project should be examined at

the general building plan stage and should be addressed if the site meets one or more
of the criteria for submission of a geotechnical assessment for compliance with
Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R) 8(1)(ba). The purpose of a
geotechnical assessment is to identify at an early stage any fundamental geotechnical
constraints that could affect the development and to adequately assess the geotechnical
feasibility of the project. The criteria for submission and the essential contents of a
geotechnical assessment are given in PNAP 78.
4. The importance of ground investigation for a geotechnical design cannot be

overstressed. It is always a good practice to first formulate a preliminary geological
model based on existing information obtained from a thorough desk study. The ground
investigation fieldwork should then be planned with the objective of refining and
confirming the geological model and the parameters to be used in the design, and
identifying the various uncertainties involved as far as possible. Guidance on the
execution of ground investigations is given in PNAP 132.
/5. …..
-2-
Geotechnical Design, Reports and Plans
5. Design plans are intended to define the scope of proposed works and to
demonstrate their feasibility and adequacy. The proposed works shall be designed
and constructed so that during construction and thereafter there is an adequate margin
of safety of the works and the remainder of the site. Furthermore, the carrying out
of such works shall not render inadequate the margin of safety of, or impair the
stability of, or cause damage to adjacent ground and facilities.
6. All accompanying geotechnical design reports should contain an executive

summary to highlight the key elements of the design and the key issues addressed,
which serves as an explanatory guide to the submission. The report must, inter alia,
contain a schedule of geotechnical design assumptions and parameters adopted.
Clear justifications with relevant supporting documents (e.g. ground investigation
reports, laboratory testing results, groundwater monitoring data, etc.) should be
provided in the report regarding the choice of parameters and design assumptions.
7. It is a good practice to incorporate provisions for design reviews during

construction such that the key design assumptions can be validated or design
modifications can be made if changes in design parameters are found necessary. This
is particularly important for sites with complex subsurface conditions, or involving
unconventional engineering schemes. Guidance on this aspect is given in PNAP 246.
8. It is often noted that many of the plans submitted do not comply with the
requirements stipulated in the related B(A)R and Building (Construction) Regulations
(B(C)R), thus resulting in delay in subsequent processing. The proposed works shall
be clearly differentiated from existing works (B(A)R 14 refers). The plans shall be
prepared to clearly show the mutual effects between the proposed works and the
existing conditions of the site. Attention should also be given in the preparation of
plans to avoid some common deficiencies such as inaccurate site survey data,
insufficient safety precautions (e.g. temporary support to adjacent ground or
precautionary measures for heavy rainfall), unclear construction sequence,
discrepancies between plans and design reports and insufficient detailing.
Geotechnical Requirements for Site Formation Plans and Other Types of Plans
9. The preparation of site formation plans and associated designs and reports
shall adhere closely to the requirements as specified in B(A)R 8(1)(bb). Guidance on
site formation filling work is provided in PNAP 55.
10. Excavation and lateral support plans often contain significant geotechnical
contents. The requirements for preparing the design, reports and plan are clearly
spelt out in B(A)R 8(1)(bc) and PNAP 148. Guidance on information to be
submitted with the excavation and lateral support plans relating to dewatering in
basement excavations is provided in PNAP 74.
/11. …..
-3-
11. Developments in Scheduled Area No. 1 (Mid-levels Scheduled Area) and

foundation works in Scheduled Area Nos. 2 and 4 (North West New Territories and
Ma On Shan Scheduled Areas) are subject to additional geotechnical control. The
geotechnical requirements and information to be submitted for such developments are
given in PNAP 85 and PNAP 161 respectively. Furthermore, the administrative
procedures and general guidance for developments in the Designated Area of
Northshore Lantau are given in PNAP 283.
12. The design and construction of foundations in the vicinity of geotechnical

features or on sloping ground requires careful geotechnical consideration to ensure
that the works will not induce adverse effects (e.g. damming effects on the
groundwater regime, additional loading or vibration effects onto the ground, etc.) to
the adjacent ground so as to be in compliance with B(C)R 23. B(A)R 8(1)(d) spells
out what needs to be included in a foundation plan.
13. Where an existing building which provides support to the adjacent ground
is to be demolished, due consideration should be given to ensure that the stability of
the adjacent ground is not adversely affected. Demolition debris shall not be
stockpiled in the vicinity of any geotechnical features. The requirements for
preparing the plans in respect of the demolition works of such structure are provided
in B(A)R 8(3)& (4) and PNAP 71.
Use of Geotechnical Computer Programs in Submissions to BA
14. All calculations contained in geotechnical design reports for submission to

BA should be properly indexed and arranged in a logical sequence. The calculations
should show clearly the sections analysed, the geological and hydrogeological model
and soil parameters used. In the case that the calculations are performed by a
pre-accepted geotechnical computer program (PNAP 79), the following essential
information should be included.
(i) The name, version, developer’s name/identification, BD

reference number and validity period of the computer
program used;
(ii) The scope of application of the program which is accepted by

BD and a list of the limitations in application;
(iii) The justifications on the simulation of the problems by the

mathematical models used in the computer program;
(iv) Assumptions made and justifications on parameters used in

the computer model e.g. material properties, boundary
conditions etc;
(v) The preparation of the input data from the ground conditions;
/(vi)…..
-4-
(vi) Summary of salient output results e.g. factors of safety of

slopes and retaining walls under critical ground conditions,
design envelopes of moment, shear, displacement of lateral
support systems for excavations, ground displacement; and
(vii) The interpretation and application of the computer output in

the design.
15. The Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE) is required to complete the

standard proforma in Appendix A and include it in the submission.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/OA/71/1
BD GP/BORD/75

This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras. 2, 11, 15 &
Appendix A amended)
Index under : Geotechnical Design Information

Getotechnical Computer Programs
Appendix A
(PNAP 274)
(APP-128)
Geotechnical Computer Program Statement
BD file ref. no. : ………………………………………………………………………
Address of site : ………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………
Registered Geotechnical Engineer : …………………..……………………………...
Geotechnical computer programs used :-
Program Name BD Ref. No.
(1)†………………………………………………………………….G………………..
(2)†………………………………………………………………….G………………..
(3)†………………………………………………………………….G………………..
Above programs were used to analyse the following designs († insert the appropriate
number from table in brackets) :-
( ) Earth-retaining Structures
( ) Excavation and Lateral Support Works
( ) Slope Works
( ) Others (please specify) .........................……………………...……………….…
I confirm that I am responsible for executing the geotechnical computer programs in

respect of the above designs.
The information about the geotechnical computer programs is also enclosed in

pursuance of paragraph 14 of PNAP 274.
Signature of RGE : …………………………………… Date : ………………..………
& Full name (in block letters) : …………………………………………………...…….
Certificate of Registration No. : ……………………… Expiry date : ...……….………
(Rev. 12/2005)

Use of Recycled Aggregates in Concrete
Introduction
To reduce the pressure on the demand of public filling and landfill capacity,
one of the means of resource conservation and waste minimization is to recycle hard
and inert construction and demolition (C&D) materials, such as broken rock and
concrete, into aggregates and put them into good use. This PNAP sets out the
technical guidelines for using recycled aggregates in prescribed mix concrete of
specified grade strength of 20P and designed mix concrete of specified grade strengths
of 25D to 35D.
Technical Guidelines
2. The technical guidelines for prescribed mix concrete (20P) with 100%
recycled aggregate is given in Appendix A, and that for designed mix concrete (25D to
35D) with 20% recycled aggregate is given in Appendix B to this PNAP.
3. The above technical guidelines have made reference to the technical

specifications developed by the Standing Committee on Concrete Technology (SCCT)
and Highways Department which were based on internationally recognized standards
and results of laboratory tests done locally. They have been promulgated amongst
works departments under Works Bureau Technical Circular No. 12/2002.
4. Concrete producers in Hong Kong are also well aware of the Technical
Circular through their Concrete Producers Association’s meetings with SCCT during
the whole process of specifications development.
Applications
5. Prescribed mix concrete of specified grade strength of 20P with 100%

recycled aggregate should only be used for minor structural or non-structural works in
accordance with Building (Construction) Regulation 60(1). They may include, for
examples, on-grade slabs, blinding layer, U-channels/stepped channels, bedding and
haunching for pipe works, concrete footings for posts and fences, and mass concrete fill
which does not sustain appreciable loading.
/6. …..
-2-
6. Designed mix concrete of specified grade strengths of 25D to 35D with a

maximum of 20% recycled aggregates may be used for the following applications that
do not have major structural concern:
(a) concrete or reinforced concrete landscape features such as

planters and planter walls, fence walls, mass concrete walls
and footings for supporting landscape features;
(b) manholes and sand traps except manholes for foul water,
grease traps and petrol interceptors where leakage of
contaminated liquid to surrounding soil is undesirable; and
(c) carriageway pavement or overlay, reinforced concrete infill

walls and mass concrete under footings or rafts.
7. Concrete with recycled aggregates must not be used in liquid-retaining

structures, pre-stressed concrete structures, transfer structures or hanger structures.
Exemption
8. The use of recycled aggregates in concrete and the technical guidelines given
in Appendices A and B would deviate from the relevant provisions of Building
(Construction) Regulation 51 on the structural use of concrete. However, applications
for modifications or exemptions under section 42 of the Buildings Ordinance would
normally be given provided that:
(a) the proposed applications fall in with those given under

paragraphs 5 and/or 6 above; and
(b) corresponding technical guidelines given in Appendices A

and/or B are strictly complied with.
9. Where an Authorized Person or Registered Structural Engineer intends to use

concrete with recycled aggregates in building works, he/she should state it clearly on
the plan that contains general structural specifications and in the Part I structural
calculations. Reference should be made to PNAP 121 in this respect. The Authorized
Person or Registered Structural Engineer should also make a statement on the plan that
/the …..
-3-
the proposed use of concrete with recycled aggregates shall strictly comply with the
technical guidelines given in Appendices A and/or B to this PNAP. The scope of the
works involving the use of recycled aggregates should also be indicated on the relevant
structural layout and detail plans.
10. Other requirements governing the use of concrete in structures shall also be
applied in concrete with recycled aggregates.
Implementation
11. The use of recycled aggregates in concrete is at its initial stage of

implementation. Civil Engineering Department is commissioning a pilot recycling
plant at Tuen Mun Area 38 with a view to supplying recycled aggregates to a number of
public works projects earmarked for such purpose. The plant has been in operation
since July 2002.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref: BD GP/BREG/RC/4 III
First Issue February 2003 (AD/NB2)
Index under: Recycled aggregates

C and D Waste Reduction
Appendix A
(PNAP 275)
Technical Guidelines for Prescribed Mix Concrete (APP-129)
with 100% Recycled Coarse Aggregates
Scope This technical guidelines is only applicable to

prescribed mix concrete of specified grade
strength of 20P.
Applications Concrete with 100% recycled coarse

aggregates shall only be used for minor
structural or non- structural works in
accordance with Building (Construction)
Regulation 60(1).
General Concrete shall comply with the relevant

Requirements provisions of Building (Construction)
Regulations on prescribed mix concrete.
Recycled Coarse Recycled Coarse Aggregates shall be

Aggregates produced by crushing old concrete and shall
meet the requirements in Table 1.
Fine Aggregates Fine aggregates shall be within the limits of

grading M in BS 882.
Fine aggregate derived from recycled

concrete shall not be used.
Grading The grading of the coarse aggregates shall

comply with the limits of Table 3 of BS
882:1992 for single-sized 20 mm and 10 mm
aggregates.
Mix Proportions Concrete shall be mixed in the following

proportions:
Ordinary Portland Cement : 100 kg

Fine Aggregates : 180 kg
20 mm Coarse Aggregates : 180 kg
10 mm Coarse Aggregates : 90 kg
Workability Recycled coarse aggregates have to be

thoroughly wetted before being used.
The concrete shall have a slump of 75 mm

when it is ready to be compacted to its final
position.
-1-
Test Cubes The sampling rate, making, curing and
testing of concrete shall comply with Building
(Construction) Regulations requirements.
Minimum Strength The minimum concrete cube strength shall be

14 MPa and 20 MPa at 7 and 28 days
respectively.
Trials Laboratory trials shall be conducted to

confirm that the strength requirement can be
met before the prescribed mix is used in the
works. The 28-day strength of each of the 3
cubes in the trial shall not be less than 26
MPa.
Table 1
Mandatory Requirements Limits Testing Method

Minimum dry particle density 2000 BS 812: Part 2
(kg/m3)
Maximum water absorption 10% BS 812: Part 2
Maximum content of wood 0.5% Manual sorting in
and other material less dense accordance with
than water BRE Digest 433
Maximum content of other 1%
foreign materials (e.g. metals,
plastics, clay lumps, asphalt
and tar, glass etc)
Maximum fines 4% BS 812: Section 103.1
Maximum content of sand 5% BS 812: Section 103.1
(<4mm) (% m/m)
Maximum content of sulphate 1% BS 812: Part 118
(% m/m)
Flakiness index 40% BS 812: Section 105.1
10% fines test 100 kN BS 812: Part 111
Grading Table 3 of BS 882: 1992
Maximum Chloride content Table 7 of BS 882 – 0.05%
by mass of chloride ion of
combined aggregate
(2/2003)
-2-
Appendix B
(PNAP 275)
(APP-129)
Technical Guidelines for Designed Mix Concrete
Scope This technical guidelines is only applicable to

designed mix concrete of specified grade
strength of 25D to 35D.
Applications Concrete with 20% recycled coarse aggregates

may be used for applications specified in this
PNAP. This type of concrete must not be used
in liquid-retaining structures or pre-stressed
concrete.
General Concrete shall comply with the relevant

Requirements provisions of Building (Construction)
Regulations on designed mix concrete.
Cementitious Only ordinary Portland cement to BS 12 shall

Material be used.
Coarse Aggregates Coarse aggregates shall consist of 80% natural

mineral aggregates as defined in the Building
Recycled Coarse Aggregates shall be produced

by crushing old concrete and shall meet the
requirements in Table 1.
Tests on recycled aggregates from a particular

source shall be carried out at weekly intervals
to check compliance with Table 1.
Fine Aggregates Fine aggregate shall comply with the Building

Fine aggregate recycled from old concrete shall

not be used.
Grading The grading of the coarse aggregates shall

comply with the limits of Table 3 of BS
882:1992 for single-sized 20 mm and 10 mm
aggregates.
-1-
Workability Recycled coarse aggregates have to be
thoroughly wetted before being used.
The concrete shall have a minimum slump of

75 mm when it is ready to be compacted to its
final position.
Laboratory Mix Before any concrete is produced for use in the

Trials and Plant works, laboratory trials and plant trials must be
Trials
performed in accordance with Appendix C.
Compliance Criteria Compliance criteria shall be those given in

(laboratory trials & Appendix C.
plant trials)
Concrete Batching Recycled coarse aggregates have to be stored in

separate stockpiles or silos to prevent
inadvertent mixing with natural aggregates.
A separate compartment must be provided for

recycled coarse aggregates in the batching
plant.
Acceptance Criteria Concrete shall be tested in accordance with

for Compressive Building (Construction) Regulation 58 for
Strength
compliance with the specified grade strength
set out in Building (Construction) Regulation
59.
-2-
Table 1
Mandatory Requirements Limits Testing Method

Minimum dry particle 2000 BS 812: Part 2
3
density (kg/m )
Maximum water absorption 10% BS 812: Part 2
Maximum content of wood 0.5% Manual sorting in
and other material less dense accordance with
than water BRE Digest 433
Maximum content of other 1%
foreign materials (e.g.
metals, plastics, clay lumps,
asphalt and tar, glass etc)
Maximum fines 4% BS 812: Section 103.1
Maximum content of sand 5% BS 812: Section 103.1
(<4mm) (% m/m)
Maximum content of 1% BS 812: Part 118
sulphate (% m/m)
Flakiness index 40% BS 812: Section 105.1
10% fines test 100 kN BS 812: Part 111
Grading Table 3 of BS 882: 1992
Maximum Chloride Content Table 7 of BS 882 –
0.05% by mass of
chloride ion of combined
aggregate
(2/2003)
-3-
Appendix C
(PNAP 275)
(APP-129)
Laboratory Mix Trials and Plant Trials for Designed Mix Concrete
Laboratory Mix 1. Laboratory Mix Trials shall be made in the laboratory using the
Trials mix designs and constituents proposed to be used.
2. Laboratory Mix Trials shall be carried out in accordance with
Section 11 of CS1. Three separate batches shall be made, each of
sufficient size to provide samples for two slump tests and to make
six 150mm test cubes.
3. Two slump tests in accordance with CS1 shall be performed on
separate specimens from each batch of Laboratory Trial Mix
concrete.
4. Six 150mm test cubes shall be made from each batch of
Laboratory Trial Mix concrete, stored, cured and tested for
compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with CS1.
Plant Trials 1. Plant Trials shall be made using the plant or plants proposed and
the mix designs and constituents proposed to be used.
2. One batch of concrete of a proposed designed mix shall be made
on each of three days in each plant proposed to be used. The
batch shall be at least 60% of the mixer’s nominal capacity. If
the concrete is batched in a central plant and mixed in a truck
mixer, three different truck mixers shall be used.
3. Three samples of concrete shall be provided from each batch at
approximately 1/6, 1/2 and 5/6 of the discharge from the mixer.
Each sample shall be of sufficient size to perform a slump test and
make two 150mm test cubes. The method of sampling shall be as
stated as in CS1.
4. Each sample taken in accordance with item (3) above shall be
tested to determine its slump value in accordance with CS1.
5. Two 150mm test cubes shall be made from each sample taken in
accordance item (3) above and stored, cured and tested to
determine the compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with
CS1.
-1-
Compliance 1. When test data relating to the proposed plant or plants show that
Criteria: the plant standard deviation exceeds 5MPa, or in the absence of
Laboratory Mix acceptable data, the results of tests on Laboratory Mix Trial
Trials concrete shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) The average of the six slump values shall be within 20mm or
25%, whichever is the greater, of the design slump value.
(b) The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test
cubes shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 12MPa and
the compressive strength of each individual test cube shall
exceed the Grade strength by at least 6MPa.
2. When test data relating to the proposed plant or plants show that
the plant standard deviation does not exceed 5MPa and the data are
considered acceptable, the results of tests on Laboratory Mix Trial
concrete shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) The average of the six slump values shall be within 20mm
or 25%, whichever is the greater, of the design slump value.
(b) The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18
test cubes shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 8MPa
and the compressive strength of each individual test cube shall
exceed the Grade strength by at least 2MPa.
Compliance The results of tests on concrete taken from Plant Trials shall comply
Criteria: with the following requirements:
Plant Trials
(a) The average of the nine slump values shall be within 20mm or
25%, whichever is the greater, of the designed slump value.
(b) The range of the three slump values for each batch of concrete
shall not exceed 20% of the average of the three slump values
for that batch.
(c) The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test cubes
shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 10MPa and the
compressive strength of each individual test cube shall exceed
the Grade strength by at least 4MPa.
(d) The range of the compressive strength of the six test cubes from
each batch of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the average
compressive strength of the six test cubes from that batch.
(2/2003)
-2-

Lighting and Ventilation Requirements – Performance-based Approach
The Buildings Department has commissioned a consultancy study to review

the standards of the lighting and ventilation requirements in buildings. Based on the
findings of the consultancy study, the Building Authority (BA) is prepared to accept
the following alternative performance standards on the provision of natural lighting
and ventilation in habitable rooms and domestic kitchens for the purpose of Building
(Planning) Regulations (B(P)Reg.) 30, 31 and 32:
a) Natural Lighting
Room of Vertical Daylight Factor (VDF) 1 (measurement

domestic building taken on the centre of the window pane)
Habitable Room 8%
Kitchen 4%
b) Natural Ventilation
Room of Air Change per Hour (ACH)

domestic building
Habitable Room 1.5 (natural means)
Kitchen 1.5 (natural means) plus 5 (mechanical means)
2. The BA would accept proposals based on the above standards on a trial

basis for 2 years. With immediate effect, applications to modify the prescriptive
requirements set out in B(P)Reg. 30, 31 & 32 will be accepted if the above
performance standards are met. The Authorized Persons (APs) may demonstrate
compliance using any suitably verified and scientifically validated methods. To assist
APs in adopting the above performance-based approach in design, guidelines for a
simplified assessment method and guidance notes on validation of lighting simulation
are given in Appendices A and B respectively.
/3. …..
1
"Vertical Daylight Factor" means the ratio in percentage of the total amount of illuminance
falling onto a vertical surface of a building to the instantaneous horizontal illuminance from
a complete hemisphere of sky excluding direct sunlight. It takes into account light coming
from the sky directly and from reflected light of surrounding buildings and the ground both
above and below the horizon.
-2-
3. The BA has no objection to accepting the design of a project partly based

on the prescriptive requirements and partly based on the performance standards set out
in paragraph 1. For the purpose of B(P) Reg 31(2), the base may be measured at an
angle not more than 15o from the external wall.
4. A review on the application of the new alternative performance standards

will be conducted at the end of the trial period at which time the need for any
refinement to the standards and replacement of the current prescriptive regulations
would be considered.
5. Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

No. 241 will not be applied to new building proposals or major revision proposals
submitted after 15 March 2004.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
BD GP/BREG/P/18/1(E) (IV)
BD GP/BREG/P/18/1(G) (II)

This revision June 2005 (AD/NB1) – para. 2 amended, para 2.3, window position
at Diagram D and Tables 1 & 2 of Appendix
A amended, Appendix B added
Index under : Lighting and ventilation

Ventilation and lighting
Appendix A
(PNAP 278)
(APP-130)
GUIDE ON THE ADOPTION OF PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
PART I
1. Introduction
1.1 This guide gives guidance on how the performance requirements on natural
lighting and ventilation in buildings may be met.
2. Performance Requirements
2.1 The BA recognizes that a performance-based approach to the provision of natural

lighting and ventilation in buildings is an acceptable alternative option in
satisfying the health and safety requirements. The BA will accept a proposal
meeting the following performance standards as an acceptable practice in
fulfilling the requirements of B(P)Reg. 30, 31 & 32:
a) Natural Lighting
Room of Vertical Daylight Factor (VDF) (measurement taken

domestic building on the centre of the window pane)
Habitable Room 8%
Kitchen 4%
b) Natural Ventilation
Room of Air Change per Hour (ACH)

domestic building
Habitable Room 1.5 (natural means )
Kitchen 1.5 (natural means ) plus 5 (mechanical means)
2.2 The performance standards are deemed to be met if it can be proved that the
provision of window(s) meets the simplified test on natural lighting requirements
stipulated in Part II and the ventilation requirements stipulated in Part III.
2.3 There are a number of assessment tools available in the market for assessment of
the performance of lighting in buildings. Consideration for acceptance will be
given if the validity and appropriateness of the tools are substantiated to the
satisfaction of the BA. In this respect, guidance notes on validation are at
Appendix B.
3. Interpretation
“Centre line of street” is half distance of the 2 opposite lot boundaries with a
street in between.
-1-
“Cross ventilation” means the situation in which outdoor air can flow from the
window opening(s) in the front half of the room (the primary opening),
through the room, and out via the other window opening(s) located in the
rear half of the room (the secondary opening) which is not located on the
same plane of the primary opening(s).
"Height of facade", when used in relation to the natural lighting and ventilation
requirements, means the height of a building measured from the top of the
window head at the lowermost storey in which the window is provided to the
top of the parapet of the main roof of the building.
"Illuminance" means the amount of light falling on a surface.
"Open air" has the same meaning as defined in Regulation 2 of the B(P)Reg.
“Primary opening” means any window opening which is located in or within

1.5 m from end of the external wall where the window locates and satisfying
the natural lighting requirements stipulated under the B(P)Reg or in
Paragraph 2.1(a).
“Secondary opening” means any window opening which is located at an

external wall, other than that defined for the primary opening, in the rear
half of the room and facing open air.
"Vertical Daylight Factor" means the ratio in percentage of the total amount of
illuminance falling onto a vertical surface of a building to the instantaneous
horizontal illuminance from a complete hemisphere of sky excluding direct
sunlight. It takes into account light coming from the sky directly and from
reflected light of surrounding buildings and the ground both above and below
the horizon.
"Window sill", when used in relation to the window for achieving natural
lighting and ventilation, means the lowermost level of the glazing in the
room for which the window is provided.
PART II
4. Provision of Natural Lighting
Whilst there are a number of assessment tools available in the market for
assessment of the performance of lighting in buildings, the BA will accept the
"Unobstructed Vision Area" method as a reliable way to demonstrate
compliance with the performance requirements. For other assessment tools
such as computer simulation software, consideration for acceptance will also be
given if the validity and appropriateness of the tools proposed are substantiated
to the satisfaction of the BA.
-2-
The Unobstructed Vision Area Method
4.2 The Unobstructed Vision Area (UVA) method is scientifically developed with
respect to the following:
Daylight in Hong Kong
a) The amount of light receivable at the surface of a building facade is

related to the extent of its exposure to the natural environment. Most of
the natural light for windows of lower floors in the dense, high-rise
development comes from reflected light of the surrounding surfaces.
The amount of this reflected light is dependent on how well these
surrounding surfaces are illuminated (which are in turn dependent on
both site and building layouts) and the reflectance of these surfaces.
b) Moreover, most useful light entering the glazing into building interiors
comes from a cone of light 100 degrees centered to the normal of the
glazing.
Simplified, Performance-based Method
c) The above physical phenomena could be simplified and two-

dimensionally proportioned to an aggregated horizontal open area (UVA)
in front of the window that effectively contributes to the daylight
performance. The higher the height of facade is, the larger the UVA is
required.
d) Larger glazing area could also be accounted for scientifically in the

calculation of UVA requirement to allow further design flexibility.
4.3 The principles of the Unobstructed Vision Area Method are as follows:
a) the unobstructed vision area of a window is the unobstructed area

bounded by a cone with the horizontal angle measuring 100 degree up to
both edges of the window glazing pane, symmetrical and perpendicular to
the window plane (see Diagram A). For the purpose of measurement of
the unobstructed vision area, the currently accepted amenity features
including drying racks, small projecting air-conditioner platforms or
hoods and window eaves protruding onto the unobstructed vision area
may be disregarded if the size of these features is not excessive;
b) the maximum length of the cone of the unobstructed vision area is equal
to the height of facade in which the window is provided (see Diagram B);
-3-
Diagram A : Measurement of the cone of UVA from both edges of window
pane
C
L C
L
Figure 1 Figure 2
UVA UVA
θ L = 50o θ R = 50o θ L = 50o θ R = 50o

(max) (max) (max) (max)
h h
width of effective window glazing pane width of effective window glazing pane
UVA = unobstructed vision area

h = maximum length of the
cone
= height of facade
θ = θ L +θ R = 100o
C
L C
Figure 3 Figure 4
L
UVA UVA
θ L = 50o θ R = 50o θ L = 50o θ R= 50o

(max) (max) (max) (max)
h h
width of effective window glazing pane width of effective window glazing pane
Figure 3 & 4 help to explain how the UVA is drawn when there is an obstruction
-4-
Diagram B : Measurement of height of facade and unobstructed vision area
Top of parapet wall on main roof of the

building
;h
w = window
h = height of facade
window head :h 1 = maximum length of the cone
w
Remarks :
Using h1 is not right for the
example above. Typically it
cross section should go to the top of the
parapet of the main roof of
the building
-5-
c) the unobstructed vision area bounded by the cone shall be measured up to
the lot boundary only unless such boundary adjoins a street in which case
the full width of the street bounded by the cone may also be counted for the
calculation of the unobstructed vision area.
d) where the unobstructed vision area bounded by the cone protrudes beyond
the common lot boundary or the centre line of the street as shown in
Diagram C, a multiplying factor of 4 can be applied to this sector (i.e. C1)
of cone but the resultant unobstructed vision area should not in any case
exceed the unobstructed vision area of this sector of the cone that can be
measured up to the height of the façade (i.e. C1 + C2).
Diagram C : Measurement of unobstructed vision area with the cone protruding

beyond the site boundary
C
L
Height of Facade B.
C2
(within Adjoining Lot
or Street)
C1
A.
UVA facing building

UVA facing lot boundary
50o 50o
Common Lot Boundary or
Center Line of Street
WINDOW ‘1’
UVA of WINDOW ‘1’ = A + B + ( C1 x 4 ) or A + B + C1 + C2 whichever is the less
-6-
e) where the highest point of the adjacent structure within the same site
fronting the window does not sustain a vertical obstruction of more than
30 degree, the area on top of that structure within the cone may be
counted for the calculation of the unobstructed vision area (see Diagram
D); and
Diagram D : Measurement of unobstructed vision area on top of building obstructing

the cone
w = window
If θ ≦ 30o space over building obstructing the
cone can be counted for the unobstructed vision
area calculation
area on top of podium structure

within the cone can be counted
for UVA calculation
w Adjacent building within

cross section θ < 30o the same site
f) for a room requiring more than one window to comply with the minimum
day-lighting requirement, the total room area can be considered as an
amalgamation of subdivision rooms separated by notional partitions and
each of which is provided with a window that satisfies the respective
minimum day-lighting requirement corresponding to the area of each
subdivision (see Diagram E).
-7-
Diagram E : Measurement of unobstructed vision area for a room requiring more than
one window
adjoining wall of the same building
overlapping area can be included in the
calculation of UVA1 and UVA2 respectively
C
L C
L
UVA1 UVA2
θ = 100o θ = 100o
h h
W1 W2
Notional partition wall
area 'A1' area 'A2'
area of W1 ≥ 10% of area ‘A1’

area of W2 ≥ 10% of area ‘A2’
UVA1 and UVA2 ≥ Respective minimum UVA
requirement in table 1 & 2
h = Height of facade
4.4 No window in the building shall, for the purpose of paragraph 4.1, be counted
for the calculation of unobstructed vision area unless-
a) it faces into a space which is uncovered and not bounded on the side
opposite the window by any obstruction of the building;
b) the top of the window is at least 2m above the floor level; and
c) the superficial area of glass in the window or the aggregate superficial

area of glass in the windows (calculated from width of effective window
glazing pane), as the case may be, shall not be less than 10% of the
-8-
usable floor area of the room in which the window or windows are
located.
4.5 Where the aggregate superficial area of glass in the window or windows (i.e.
actual glazing area excluding window frames) is equal to 10%, 15% or 20% of
the usable floor area of the room, the total unobstructed vision area shall not be
less than the corresponding area shown in Table 1 and Table 2 according to
respective use and the height of façade in which the window or windows is
provided.
Table 1 Unobstructed Vision Area Requirement for Habitable Room (8% VDF)
Minimum UVA (s.m.)
Height of façade (m) Glazing Area: 10% of UFA Glazing Area: 15% of UFA Glazing Area: 20% of UFA
10 or below 50 30 20
20 100 100 60
30 250 200 150
40 400 300 200
50 600 500 400
60 900 700 500
70 1,200 900 700
80 1,600 1,200 900
90 2,000 1,500 1,100
100 2,400 1,800 1,300
110 2,900 2,200 1,600
120 3,500 2,600 1,900
130 4,100 3,100 2,200
140 4,800 3,600 2,600
150 5,400 4,100 3,000
160 6,200 4,600 3,400
170 7,000 5,200 3,800
180 7,800 5,900 4,300
190 8,700 6,500 4,700
200 or above 9,600 7,200 5,200
Table 2 Unobstructed Vision Area Requirement for Domestic Kitchen (4% VDF)
Minimum UVA (s.m.)
Height of façade (m) Glazing Area: 10% of UFA Glazing Area: 15% of UFA Glazing Area: 20% of UFA
10 or below 20 15 10
20 60 40 30
30 150 100 70
40 200 200 100
50 400 300 200
60 500 400 300
70 700 500 400
80 900 700 500
90 1,100 900 700
100 1,300 1,000 800
110 1,600 1,300 1,000
120 1,900 1,500 1,200
130 2,200 1,700 1,400
140 2,600 2,000 1,600
150 3,000 2,300 1,800
160 3,400 2,600 2,000
170 3,800 2,900 2,300
180 4,300 3,300 2,600
190 4,700 3,700 2,900
200 or above 5,200 4,000 3,200
Notes:
(i) In the case of the height of façade lies within the ranges shown in the table, the
unobstructed vision area should be derived from interpolation method.
-9-
4.6 Where the aggregate superficial area of glass in the window or windows lies
within the range between 10% to 15% or 15% to 20% of the usable floor area
of the room, the Building Authority would accept interpolation of the area fallen
within the range shown in Table 1 and Table 2 according to respective use. For
the window area greater than 20% of the usable floor area of the room, the total
unobstructed vision area shall not be less than the area required for 20% of the
usable floor area of the room shown in Table 1 and Table 2, as the case may be.
PART III
5. Ventilation
5.1 The BA would accept a room used for habitation or as a kitchen to have met the
performance standard of ventilation if the following conditions are satisfied:-
a) The area of the primary opening(s) provided in the room is not less than one
sixteenth of the usable floor area of the room;
b) The primary opening(s) face into a clear and unobstructed area complying
with at least the open air requirement; and
c) in the case of kitchen, 5 ACH mechanical ventilation is provided in addition

to the requirements in (a) and (b) above.
There are a number of assessment tools available in the market for assessment
of the performance of ventilation in buildings such as Computational Fluid
Dynamic (CFD) tools. Consideration for acceptance will be given if the validity
and appropriateness of the tools are substantiated to the satisfaction of the BA.
5.2 For the purpose of assessing the sizes of the primary and secondary openings
for ventilation, the effective area of the primary and secondary openings,
irrespective of the height of the window head and window sill is counted.
- 10 -
5.3 The arrangement of window openings is illustrated in Diagram F
Diagram F : Openable window for ventilation
C
L C
L
Unobstructed Vision Area Unobstructed Vision Area
100o B:minimum 100o

1.5m
A: minimum 1.5m A: minimum 1.5m
C:maximum 1.5m
; ; ; ;
; ; Height of
Façade
; = accountable as primary opening(s)

- aggregate size shall not be less than one-sixteenth of the usable floor area of the room
A : Minimum distance of a corner window from the external wall should be 1.5m
B : Minimum distance of a window from opposite external wall should be 1.5m
C : Maximum distance of any part of window should not be larger than 1.5m from end of the external wall
6. Cross Ventilation
6.1 Where cross ventilation is provided, the requirements on the openable area of the
window and the restriction as set out in B(P)Reg. 32 on the depth of the room
are relaxed as follows (see Diagram G):-
a) the aggregate size of the primary opening(s) shall not be less than 2% of
the usable floor area of the room;
b) the aggregate size of the secondary opening(s) shall not be less than 2%
of the usable floor area of the room; and
c) the depth of the room from the primary opening may be extended to a
maximum of 12 m.
- 11 -
Diagram G : Openable window for ventilation when cross-ventilation is provided
C
L C
L
Unobstructed Vision Area Unobstructed Vision Area
100o 100o
minimum 1.5m
minimum 1.5m
maximum 1.5m
; P2
; ;P2 ;
P1
:
P3
:
P3
P1 Height of
Façade
minimum 1.5m
S1 S1
∗; ;∗
; = accountable as primary or secondary opening

: = not accountable as primary opening for the purpose of cross ventilation.
＊ = secondary opening(s) in rear half of the room accepted for the purpose of cross
ventilation only when the primary opening(s) is not located on the same plane of the
secondary opening(s).
- the respective aggregate sizes of the primary and secondary openings shall not be less
than 2% of the usable floor area of the room.
(Rev. 6/2005)
- 12 -
Appendix B
(PNAP 278)
(APP-130)
GUIDANCE NOTES ON VALIDATION OF LIGHTING SIMULATION
SOFTWARE
1. Introduction
These notes give guidance on the validation of lighting simulation software for
assessing the performance of natural lighting in buildings. As computational
lighting simulation is a complicated science, APs may wish to consult a specialist
in lighting design.
2. Computational Lighting Simulation
2.1 The BA accepts computational lighting simulation for the assessment of the
performance of natural lighting in buildings. The BA will accept such a proposal
provided that the software is validated and the simulation is properly conducted.
For avoidance of doubt, the currently accepted amenity features including drying
racks, small projecting air-conditioner platforms or hoods and window eaves
protruding onto the unobstructed vision area may be disregarded if the size of
these features is not excessive.
2.2 APs should attend to the following 4 important criteria in carrying out a lighting
simulation test:
(i) The accuracy of the Global Illumination Model of the software, which
determines how well the software cater for the characteristics of the sky.
(ii) The accuracy of the Local Illumination Model of the software, which
determines how well the software cater for inter-reflections between
objects in the model.
(iii) The accuracy of the Geometric description of the simulated scenes, which
requires the geometric input to the simulation software, is representative of
the scenes to be test.
(iv) The accuracy of the Material description of the simulated scenes, which
requires the material reflectance of the surfaces of the geometry, is
appropriately set.
-1-
3. Approach of Validation – Standard 3D Model and Datum
3.1 For the purpose of validating the software, a Standard 3D model is built as the
geometrical input of the test and 62 selected points are defined on the model,
which together form the Datum of the validation test. Details of the assembly are
provided at Annex 1. An overview of the Standard 3D model and the distribution
of Datum points on the Standard 3D model are at Figure 1 and Figure 2 of Annex
1 respectively.
3.2 Up to 2 different materials reflectance may be set, one for ALL vertical surfaces
and another for ALL horizontal surfaces. Alternatively, a single setting of
reflectance may be used for all surfaces. As part of the submission, the material
reflectance(s) set should be reported.
3.3 There are total 62 points (23 on horizontal surfaces and 39 on vertical surfaces)
where the simulated results of the Standard 3D model should be reported and
compared with the Datum. Using the software to be validated with particular
settings, the results of all the 62 points on the Standard 3D model must not be more
than the Datum. Simulated results of the Daylight Factor (DF) and Vertical
Daylight Factor (VDF) of say 12.459% could be rounded off to whole number
(i.e.12%). Likewise, 12.501% should be rounded off to 13%. Details of the
Datum values are provided at Annex 2.
4. Validation Test
To demonstrate that the software is validated for use, the APs should submit the
following document to BA for approval:
(i) The name and version of the software to be validated. The name, country of
origin and contact details of the vendor including mail address, telephone
number, fax number, email and website address must be attached.
(ii) A folder containing the generic simulation file(s) with the 3D model, and all
files and detail settings necessary to reproduce the simulation results
independently and without making reference to the APs.
(iii) A note stating the Material Reflectance of the Standard 3D model used.
Only up to 2 material reflectance settings may be used: one for the ground
horizontal surface, the other for all vertical surfaces.
-2-
(iv) A print out of DF and VDF of ALL 62 points as defined in The Datum that
are generated by the software to be validated. And a statement that the 62
values obtained with the software to be validated, using the settings and
geometry as defined, is UNDER the respective values of the Datum.
5.0 Guide on creating an Accurate Geometric Model
5.1 Once the software is validated for use, the AP should ensure the accurate building
of the geometry file of the design. An example is shown in Annex 3. Apart
from the building to be tested, the surrounding wall should be constructed
according to the following guidelines (refer to Annex 3 for reference):-
(i) The building to be tested and all buildings within the same site must be
accurately modeled.
(ii) A “closed” surrounding wall is to be built surrounding the site, in such a way
that no gap is possible. This surrounding wall should be made up of two
parts: from ground to height W and from height W to height H. This wall is
to represent reasonably the surrounding conditions of the test site.
(iii) Height W is the equivalent height of the façade area of all immediate
buildings when compressed to fill the entire length of the site boundary. The
surrounding wall up to this height W is solid. This portion of the wall
represents the main bulk of the buildings on the test site.
(iv) Height H will be the average height of buildings used to work out height W.
The wall between W and H should be perforated with slots. Vertical slots
equal to 1/5 (or 20%) the area of the surrounding wall W to H may be
inserted. The void portions of the slots are to be between 10 to 15 meters
wide – exact dimension to be worked out evenly across the boundary. The
slotted wall represents closely the cityscape immediately in front and beyond
the test site. This portion of the wall captures the gaps of tower buildings
around the site.
(v) The minimum perpendicular dimension from own site boundary to the edge
of all the ‘immediate tower blocks’ facing the same boundary on its own site
should be defined. Assume the average dimension be A meter. For
example, if there are 3 immediate tower blocks, A will be the average of their
minimum distance from the boundary. The minimum distance should be
taken from the walls of the buildings.
-3-
(vi) The surrounding wall towards that boundary could be positioned A into the
neighbour’s boundary. This literally assumes that if the test building is set
back from its own site boundary, a mutually respected situation could be
established from the surrounding buildings on the other side of the boundary.
(vii) The design could also take advantage of ‘long and straight’ roads leading out
of the test site. The open end of roads leading out could be capped (closed)
reasonably at a distance 5 times the height of the surrounding walls.
5.2 The surrounding walls proposed here is a simplified method to re-create

reasonable surroundings for the test site. The heights and positions of the
surrounding wall facing various orientations of the test site are to be determined
independently.
6.0 Guide on Material Description
The AP should use the reflectance they had set when the software was originally
validated for the scene they are going to test. Only 2 reflectance should be used,
one for all ground horizontal surfaces and another for all building vertical
surfaces including the top horizontal surfaces of any podium.
7.0 Performance Standard for Natural Lighting
7.1 No window in a building shall be take into account unless:
(a) it faces into a space which is uncovered and not bounded on the side opposite
the window by any obstruction of the building; and
(b) the top of the window is at least 2m above the floor level.
7.2 Under PNAP 278, 8% VDF and 4% VDF should be made available on the vertical
surface of the windows of habitable room and kitchen respectively when the
aggregate superficial area of glass in a window (i.e. actual glazing area excluding
window frames) is 10% of the usable floor area of the room. If larger window
size is used, the following table could be used for the purpose of simulation:
-4-
Required VDF 8% VDF 6% VDF 5% VDF 4% VDF 3%
VDF or more or more or more or more or more
Glazing area
(% of UFA)
Habitable room 10% 15% 20%
Kitchen 10% 15%
7.3 The maximum glazing area is limited to 20% and 15% for habitable room and
kitchen respectively. Therefore, for example, VDF of habitable room cannot be
less than 5%. Extrapolation beyond the limit (VDF 5% for habitable room or
VDF 3% for kitchen) is not possible.
7.4 The required glazing area could be interpolated from the table. For example, the
simulation results show that the window is receiving 7.5% VDF. The glazing
area needed is therefore 11.25% or larger.
8.0 Daylight Software
Some software are currently available in the market for daylight studies. Details
are provided at Annex 4 for reference.
-5-
Annex 1
(PNAP 278)
(APP-130)
The Standard 3D Model
1. The Standard 3D model is assembled with 1 unit by 1 unit cube. It is therefore

34 units wide, 44 units high and 8 units deep.
Figure 1: An overview of the Standard 3D model
-6-
Figure 2: Distribution of Datum points on the Standard 3D model
2. Figure 2 shows distribution of datum points on the Standard 3D model:
(i) Datum points 1-16: Within it there are 16 slots at the bottom (Front Elevation
in Figure 2). They are 1 unit wide, 2, 4, 6 and 8 units high, and 2, 4, 6 and
8 units deep. -The 4 deepest slots (8 unit deep) puncture the base of the
overall model and thus could be seen from below.
-7-
Holes of the Standard 3D model
Figure 3
(ii) Datum points 17-36: On top of the slots, there are 20 holes (Figure 3 refers).
The holes on the right are 3 units deep, whilst the ones on the left are 6 units
deep. The largest hole is 4x4 unit in size, whilst the smallest hole is 1x1 unit
in size. The rest of the holes follow the logic ranging from 1x1 to 1x4, and
1x4 to 4x4.
Streets and Buildings of the Standard 3D model

Figure 4
-8-
(iii) Datum points 37-42: There are three horizontal slots on top of the holes
(Figure 4 refers). They represent street conditions. They are all 1 unit high,
and 2, 4 and 6 unit deep respectively.
(iv) Datum points 43-58: On top of the slots are 2 housing layouts (Figure 4
refers). The one on the right is 3 units deep, and the one on the left is 6
units deep. The cruciform blocks are all 1+1+1 unit in plan.
(v) Datum points 59-62: The four vertical external surfaces of the model (Plan
and Side Elevation in Figure 2).
3. The Standard 3D should ideally have all the surfaces join perfectly (that is to say,
there is no gap between the surfaces used to build the model). Typically the use
of solid model is the best way to guarantee that. If surface CAD modeler is used
(e.g. AutoCAD), the operator must exercise extra care in building the model.
The reason for perfectly aligned model is to prevent light leak through the gaps.
Moreover, some software is known to behave strangely when surfaces intercept
each other.
4. The plan, sections and elevations of the Standard 3D model is shown in Figure 5.
-9-
Plan and Sections and elevation of the Standard 3D model
Figure 5
- 10 -
Annex 2
(PNAP 278)
The Datum (APP-130)
The Datum values are shown in the following table:
Datum Key description Detail description DF or VDF Datum (%)

point
1 Slot 1x1x 2 deep VDF 22
2 1x1x 4 deep VDF 21
17 Hole 1x1x3 deep DF 6
18 1x2x3 deep DF 10
19 1x3x3 deep DF 13
20 1x4x3 deep DF 15
21 2x2x3 deep DF 18
22 2x3x3 deep DF 24
23 2x4x3 deep DF 28
24 3x3x3 deep DF 32
25 3x4x3 deep DF 38
26 4x4x3 deep DF 45
27 Hole 1x1x6 deep DF 2
28 1x2x6 deep DF 4
29 1x3x6 deep DF 5
30 1x4x6 deep DF 6
31 2x2x6 deep DF 7
- 11 -
32 2x3x6 deep DF 8
33 2x4x6 deep DF 10
34 3x3x6 deep DF 11
35 3x4x6 deep DF 14
36 4x4x6 deep DF 18
37 Middle of Street 1x2 deep DF 30
38 1x4 deep DF 16
39 1x6 deep DF 11
40 1x2 deep VDF 10
41 1x4 deep VDF 4
42 1x6 deep VDF 2
43 Building Surface 1 x 3 deep VDF 13
(H facing 3 blks)
44 (anti- clockwise) Surface 2 x 3 deep VDF 13
(V facing 3 blks)
45 Surface 3 x 3 deep VDF 22
51 Building Surface 1 x 6 deep VDF 5
(H facing 3 blks)
52 (anti-clockwise) Surface 2 x 6 deep VDF 5
(V facing 3 blks)
59 External surfaces Surface 1 VDF 40
60 Surface 2 VDF 40
61 Surface 3 VDF 40
62 Surface 4 VDF 40
Note : DF – Daylight Factor

VDF – Vertical Daylight Factor
- 12 -
Annex 3
(PNAP 278)
(APP-130)
Geometric Model – Example to illustrate the construction of surrounding walls
To determine the position of the surrounding walls of the test site
Setback of surrounding wall (example for elevation A)

- Factor A1 = setback of tower block 1
- Factor A2 = setback of tower block 2
- Setback A = average of A1 + A2
Extent of surrounding wall to close the street (example for elevation A)

- Factor H1 = height of tower block 1 from street level
- Factor H2 = height of tower block 2 from street level
- Factor H = average of H1 & H2
- Factor L1 = actual distance from site to cross road
- Extent L = L1 + setback A, or H x 5, whichever the less
Figure 1: The Setting Out of Surrounding Walls
- 13 -
To determine the heights of the surrounding walls facing the boundary of the test site
Base of surrounding wall (example for elevation A)

- Height of Podium W = sum of area of elevation of Block 1 and Block 2
divided by width of site
- Height of perforated wall H = average of H1 & H2
Figure 2: The Height of surrounding walls (Elevation A)
(Left) Looking at the test site from a certain direction parallel to the boundary, two
immediate buildings (including their podiums) are to be taken into account.
(Middle) The elevation areas of the buildings (area of Block 1 and area of Block 2),
calculated parallel to the boundary, will be summed. This total area will from the
height (W) of an equivalent sized rectangle occupying the whole length of the test site
facing that boundary. This represents the ‘solid’ base of the surrounding walls facing
that directing of the boundary. Height W1, W2, W3 and so on for walls facing other
directions of the test boundary could be similarly worked out.
(Right) On top of this solid wall should be placed a “slotted wall”. This represents
possible light from gaps between tower buildings. The slot wall has a rhythm of
1:4:1:4 and so on. When scaled to real dimension, the void portion of the wall should
be between 10 to 15 meters. The exact dimension will be worked out evenly across
that portion of the boundary. The total height of this wall (W+H) is equal to the
average height of the two immediate buildings used to work out H just now.
- 14 -
Annex 4
(PNAP 278)
Daylight Software (APP-130)
Some of the currently available software in the market for daylight studies are listed
below for reference. For avoidance of doubt, their accuracy should be verified and
the software should be validated before adapted for simulation.
ADELINE
Daylighting, lighting, commercial buildings
AG123
Lighting, daylighting, rendering, roadway
BSim2002
Building simulation, energy, daylight, thermal analysis, indoor climate
Building Design Advisor
Design, daylighting, energy performance, prototypes, case studies, commercial
buildings
DAYSIM
Annual daylight simulations, electric lighting energy use, lighting controls
Ecotect
Environmental design, environmental analysis, conceptual design, validation; solar
control, overshadowing, thermal design and analysis, heating and cooling loads,
prevailing winds, natural and artificial lighting, life cycle assessment, life cycle
costing, scheduling, geometric and statistical acoustic analysis
FLUCS
Illumination, daylighting
LESODIAL
Daylighting, early design stage, user-friendliness
Lightscape
Daylighting, luminance
LumenMicro
Daylighting, lighting, solar design, luminaries
RADIANCE
Lighting, daylighting, rendering
SKYVISION
Skylight, light well, fenestration, glazing, optical characteristics, daylighting.
SuperLite
Daylighting, lighting, residential and commercial buildings
The Lightswitch Wizard
Annual daylight simulations, electric lighting energy use, lighting controls
(6/2005)
- 15 -

Site Coverage and Open Space Provision
This practice note describes the factors that the Building Authority (BA)
may take into account in considering applications for flexibility in determining site
coverage and open space provision to facilitate innovative design.
2. From time to time, the Buildings Department (BD) has received

enquiries from the building industry regarding the application of the site coverage and
open space provisions under the Building (Planning) Regulations [B(P)R] to allow for
greater flexibility in the design of buildings. To facilitate innovative building designs,
the BA is in principle prepared to consider applications for more flexible application of
the requirements under B(P)R 20 & 25 and modify the provisions thereof, on a case by
case basis.
3. In considering such applications on the ground of setting back a building

for its full height from a site boundary abutting on a street, the BA will take into
account the following factors -
(a) whether the setback of the building is of an area not less than
8% of the site area for non-domestic buildings and not less
than 18% of the site area for domestic buildings. For a
composite building, the non-domestic and domestic portion of
the building should illustrate the required setback of 8% and
18% respectively;
(b) whether the building is set back at a length of not less than half
of the frontage and not less than 10m long or the full frontage
for site with frontage less than 10m in length;
(c) whether there will be satisfactory arrangements for the control

and maintenance of the setback area and any resultant flat roofs
and covered areas;
(d) whether the setback area, properly landscaped and/or paved, is

open, uncovered and without any permanent building
structures other than the landscaped features and perforated
boundary walls;
(e) whether the setback will contribute to improving the street

environment; and
(f) whether the setback area excludes areas dedicated or

surrendered for public passage under B(P)R 22.
/4. …..
-2-
4. If the answers to the questions in paragraph 3(a) to (f) are all positive,
the BA is prepared to consider allowing the site coverage of a building at different
levels to vary according to the height of the level within the percentages at
Appendices A (for domestic buildings 1 ) and B (for non-domestic buildings 2 ). For this
purpose, provided that the total covered area 3 of the building(s) on the site does not
exceed 63% of the site area (for a domestic building1) and 80% of the site area or the
percentage shown at Appendix B whichever is the greater (for a non-domestic
building2), the following areas may be excluded from the assessment:
(a) unexcavated or backfilled area at a particular level

underneath the footprint of a non-domestic or domestic
building on a sloping site (example at Appendix C);
(b) open-sided covered areas of non-domestic buildings

qualified as green features under Joint Practice Notes 1
and 2, designated as common areas accessible by all
occupants of the building(s) and without any commercial
activities.
5. Notwithstanding the above, the specific site coverage control as

specified in the statutory town plans, if any, must be observed in the design of building
development. Where lease modification is required for the implementation of any
approved building design in pursuance of the flexibility provided above, premium may
be payable upon the granting of such modification. In this regard, the Practice Note
being separately issued on this subject by the Lands Department is relevant and the
procedures set out therein should be followed.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/BREG/P/2
BD GR/CONS/25
First issue January 2004 (AD/NB1)
Index under : Site coverage

Open space
1
Domestic building includes the domestic part of a composite building.
2
Non-domestic building includes the non-domestic part of a composite building.
3
‘total covered area’ is the portion of the site covered by building(s) or in simple terms, the footprint of
the shadow cast vertically down onto a site. It shall include the features exempted from site coverage
calculation under Joint Practice Notes 1 & 2 but exclude the projections under Practice Note for
Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 68.
Appendix A
(PNAP 280)
(APP-132)
Permitted site coverage for domestic buildings at specific height
Height of a level of a building in metres

Percentage site coverage
from street level
Not exceeding 24 63
25 62
26 60
27 59
28 58
29 56
30 55
31 54
32 53
33 53
34 52
35 51
36 50
37 50
38 49
39 49
40 48
41 48
42 48
43 47
44 47
45 46
46 46
47 45
48 45
49 44
50 44
51 43
52 43
53 43
54 42
55 42
56 42
57 42
58 42
59 41
60 41
61 41
over 61 40
(1/2004)
Appendix B
(PNAP 280)
(APP-132)
Permitted site coverage for non-domestic buildings at specific height
Height of a level of a building in metres Percentage site coverage

from street level
Not exceeding 24 92
25 91
26 91
27 90
28 90
29 89
30 88
31 88
32 87
33 86
34 86
35 85
36 85
37 84
38 83
39 83
40 82
41 81
42 80
43 80
44 79
45 78
46 77
47 77
48 76
49 75
50 74
51 73
52 73
53 72
54 71
55 70
56 69
57 68
58 68
59 67
60 66
61 65
over 61 65
(1/2004)
Appendix C
(PNAP 280)
(APP-132)
Example illustrating assessment of site coverage at a particular level of a building

on a sloping site
FLAT ROOF OTHER

THAN MAIN ROOF
FOR ENJOYMENT OF
THE RESIDENTS
Unexcavated or backfilled area at a particular

level excluded from site coverage assessment
Total covered area not to exceed :

− domestic building : 63% of site area; or
− non-domestic building : 80% of the site
area or the percentage shown at Appendix
B whichever is the greater
(1/2004)

Cast Iron Pipes for Drainage Works
Cast iron (C.I.) pipes in some existing buildings have presented premature
rusting, leakage and corroded metal fixing supports. This is unsatisfactory from
public safety, health and environmental hygiene point of view. The following
guidelines are provided for authorised persons in specifying the quality and choice of
C.I. pipes in their projects:
(a) All pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant British
Standards Specifications or other equivalent standards. (For example, BS
416:Part 1 or BS EN877 for C.I. pipes for above-ground drains; BS 437 or
BS 4622 for underground system and above-ground drains larger than
150mm diameter.)
(b) The pipes and fittings should be suitably coated internally and externally to
prevent corrosion. When cold applied bitumen-based coating is proposed,
the coating material should comply with BS 3416 or other equivalent
international standards. External coating should contain anti-corrosion
inhibitors, normally used on metallic structures;
(c) The C.I. pipes should be in a state to permit the application of additional
external finishing coatings; and
(d) Corrosion-resistant fixings such as stainless steel brackets and connections

or similar corrosion-resistant fixing supports should be used. The fixings
should be properly anchored into solid wall.
2. For approval of drainage plans after 1 November 2004, the Building

Authority will require, under section 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance, C.I. pipes to
comply with the above requirements. Such pipes will also need to be included in the
Schedule of Building Materials and Products under Practice Note to Authorized
Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 53 when applying for occupation permit.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BREG/SF/1 (III)
First issue November 2003 (AD/NB1)
Index under : Cast iron drainage pipes

Drainage works – cast iron pipes

Development in the Designated Area of Northshore Lantau
Background
Hong Kong Geological Survey Sheet Report No. 6, published by the

Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) of the then Civil Engineering Department in
July 2002, provides information on the geology of Tung Chung and Northshore
Lantau Island. Other information on the geology of the area, including previous
geological studies as well as relevant onshore and marine ground investigation data, is
available for inspection in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering
Library.
2. The Northshore Lantau area is underlain mainly by medium-grained

granite, intruded by numerous rhyolite dykes. However, the following complex
geological conditions are known to exist within the area:
(i) metasedimentary rocks (comprising marble,

metasandstone and metasiltstone) that are subject to
dissolution and give rise to cavities, cavity-fill deposits
and residual soils (these geological terms are described in
detail in the appendix to Hong Kong Geological Survey
Sheet Report No. 6);
(ii) soft or loose or weakly lithified superficial deposits that

occupy depressions in the subcrop surface, most of which
lie directly above or adjacent to metasedimentary rocks;
and
(iii) anomalously deep, or steeply inclined, rockhead in

igneous rocks.
3. The complex geology can have significant effects on foundation design

and construction in terms of both development costs and construction programme,
owing to the practical difficulties associated with the installation of long piles through
the difficult ground conditions. In two extreme cases, this has led to the
abandonment of planned residential tower blocks at the Tung Chung New Town
reclamation at sites where the existence of cavity-fill deposits and a deep, and locally
steeply dipping, rockhead rendered the foundation works too costly, time consuming
and difficult to build.
/4. …..
-2-
4. The nature of the problem suggests that there is scope for optimization of
foundation design, given adequate ground investigation. In some cases, foundations
might prove to be so costly that adjustment of the layout of the development or site
abandonment is warranted. It is therefore considered necessary to adopt special
measures for developments within the Designated Area in order to ensure that deep
foundations in the area are properly designed and constructed.
Boundary of Designated Area
5. The affected area is referred to as “the Designated Area of Northshore

Lantau”. The plan illustrating the extent of the Designated Area is available for
inspection in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library. A
small-scale location plan of the Designated Area is shown in Appendix A.
Administrative Procedures and General Guidance

Ground Investigation (GI)
6. Authorized Persons (APs) / Registered Geotechnical Engineers (RGEs)

should follow the administrative procedures including supervision requirements for the
GI works in accordance with the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. In addition,
the GEO will provide useful advice/information on geological conditions in the
Designated Area to facilitate development. APs/RGEs are strongly encouraged to
seek advice/comments from the Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Mainland West of the
GEO on their GI proposals within the Designated Area before commencement of the
GI works.
7. GI for a site within the Designated Area is best carried out in stages and
must be adequate to allow an assessment of whether the ground conditions will effect
the proposed development. Some deep drillholes will be required for this purpose.
It is also advisable to carry out the initial stages of the GI prior to the finalization of
general building plans for the site because, in certain circumstances, adjustments to
the locations of certain structures may be the most economical means of dealing with
serious geotechnical problems posed by difficult ground conditions.
Design and Construction of Deep Foundations
8. The following documents shall be submitted with the foundation plans for
buildings works in the Designated Area:
(i) an explanatory guide to the submission;
(ii) a report containing the results of ground investigation

including details of the equipment and procedures used;
/(iii)
-3-
(iii) a report containing critical examination and interpretation

of (ii) above, a schedule of the geotechnical design
assumptions, discussion of anticipated geotechnical
problems and containing geotechnical requirements for the
design and construction of the foundation works including
testing, inspecting and maintenance requirements; and
(iv) design calculations for foundation works.
9. General guidance on the design and construction of piled foundation

works is given in PNAP 66 and the Code of Practice for Foundations.
10. The AP/RSE/RGE shall arrange for supervision of the foundation works
in the Designated Area as specified in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision.
Geotechnical Information
11. Technical guidance on foundation works in the Designated Area of

Northshore Lantau is given in GEO Technical Guidance Note No. 12, which is
available on the Civil Engineering and Development Department website
(www.cedd.gov.hk). Ground investigation works shall be carried out in accordance
with the standards and provisions set down in the latest editions of “Guide to Site
Investigation” and other GEO technical guidance documents as may become available
from time to time. Furthermore, a review of the principles and practice related to
the design and construction of piles in Hong Kong is provided in GEO Publication No.
1/96.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/A/15 (IV)

(Paras 6 & 10 amended to include ‘RGE’)
Index under : Designated Area

Appendix A
(PNAP 283)
(APP-134)
THE DESIGNATED AREA OF NORTHSHORE LANTAU
(1/2004)

Quality Supervision of Soil Nailing Works
Introduction
The use of soil nails for upgrading existing slopes and in forming new
slopes is becoming very common in Hong Kong. Close supervision and timely design
review during construction are essential to ensure the quality of the soil nailing works.
2. A soil nail, when constructed, is buried in the ground, and its built
quality is not readily visible. There is a need to put in place reliable procedures for
the supervision, testing and certification for acceptance of the soil nailing works
during construction to ensure the quality of the works. This practice note promulgates
the supervision, testing and certification requirements at various stages of soil nailing
works and specifies the criteria for acceptance of the works.
3. Reference may be made to the Particular Specifications and standard

drawings for soil nailing works as well as guidance notes and checklists for their
supervision that are used by the Civil Engineering and Development Department
(CEDD) of the HKSAR Government under the LPM Programme which can be found
on the CEDD website <http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/>. GEO (2003) # ,
which can also be downloaded from the CEDD website, gives guidance on non-
destructive testing of soil nail length. These documents may be used as a guide for
private development projects.
Buildability of Soil Nails
4. In designing soil nails, the designer should give due consideration to the
buildability of the soil nails to ensure that the designs are practical and could be built.
For long nails, say with length exceeding 20m, there is a higher chance of
encountering loose or permeable ground, or buried stream course, leading to
difficulties in construction. Examples include collapses of soil or rock along the
drillhole (which may obstruct the insertion of the nail reinforcement assembly), and
high grout loss. Grout quality may also be difficult to ensure as the length of nail
increases. For cases where long nails are proposed or where the ground or
groundwater conditions are likely to be adverse to soil nail construction, the
Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE) may be required to undertake an assessment
of buildability and the effects of soil nail installation on the existing ground and
groundwater conditions, based on a site trial, prior to carrying out the soil nailing
works. The site trial may be incorporated in and should include the pull-out tests of
soil nails where possible. Soil nails for site trials and pull-out tests should be installed
and tested prior to the installation of working soil nails.
/5. …..
#
GEO (2003). Non-destructive Tests for Determining the Lengths of Installed Steel Soil Nails. GEO
Report No. 133, Geotechnical Engineering Office, Civil Engineering and Development
Department, the Government of the HKSAR, 54p. (This can be downloaded from the CEDD
website <http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/geo_reports/geo_rpt133.htm>.)
-2-
5. Examples of ground conditions that may present difficulties for soil nail
construction include loose fill or colluvium, rockfill, presence of soil pipes, buried
stream courses, rock mass with open discontinuities and fractures, alternating zones of
soil and rock. The installation of soil nails in areas with groundwater flow will pose
particular difficulties. The hole drilled may be more susceptible to collapse than dry
ground and the quality of the grout may also be in doubt. Suitable measures, e.g.
groundwater drainage, may have to be incorporated to facilitate installation of soil
nails.
Particular Requirements for Approval of Plans
6. The RGE is required to include the following particulars in the site

formation submission for approval by the Building Authority:
(i) Details of the site trial, if required, to confirm the

buildability of the soil nails, including its locations.
(ii) Procedure adopted for the pull-out tests.
(iii) Methodology and details of the proposed non-

destructive test (NDT) for verifying the length of
installed soil nails, with suitable provisions
incorporated to allow the test to be carried out.
Quality Supervision Requirements for Soil Nailing Works
7. The details of the quality supervision requirements for soil nailing

works, the minimum qualification and experience required for site supervisors for soil
nailing works and the details of non-destructive testing of installed soil nails are
provided in the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans and the Code of
Practice for Site Supervision.
( H W CHUENG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-150/33

(Paragraphs 4 & 6 amended to include ‘RGE’, paragraph 6(iii) revised, original
paragraphs 7 to 18 and App A & B deleted, new paragraph 7 added.)
Index under : Soil Nails

Soil Nailing Works

Building (Planning) Regulation 41D

Emergency Vehicular Access
Application
With the coming into operation of the Buildings (Amendment)

Ordinance 2004 on 31 December 2004, the new Regulation 41D of the Building
(Planning) Regulations (B(P)R) requires the provision of emergency vehicular access
(EVA) to all new buildings.
2. By virtue of section 39(2) of the Buildings Ordinance, Regulation 41D

does not apply to building works which are being carried out or consent to the
commencement of which has been given as at 31 December 2004. In general, building
works may refer to foundation works of the proposal.
Code of Practice
3. Pursuant to B(P)R 41D(2), the design and construction of an EVA shall be

in accordance with such requirements as may be specified by the Building Authority from
time to time. Such requirements are currently specified in Part VI of the Code of Practice
for Means of Access for Fire-fighting and Rescue (the “MOA Code”). Any proposed
EVA that meets the requirements in the MOA Code will be accepted as complying with
the provisions of B(P)R 41D.
EVA Plan
4. On general building plan submissions, it is necessary to demonstrate

compliance of the EVA requirements. The EVA should be clearly designated by
including a separate EVA plan with relevant notes. The EVA plan should be provided
with the following information: -
(a) Extent and alignment of EVA (to be clearly marked as
EVA on plan and be so coloured to clearly
differentiate the EVA from other building works).
(b) Width, inner/outer turning radii, loading capacity and
gradient for the entire EVA.
(c) Location of all types of EVA signage and crash gate.
(d) If there is overhead structure encroaching onto the
EVA, a separate sectional drawing showing the clear
headroom of the structure to be incorporated into the
EVA plan.
(e) A block plan showing the major façade of the building
served by the EVA (to be so coloured for easy
identification).
/(f) …..
-2-
(f) Calculation on the total length of the façade of the

building to be served by the EVA and the percentage
of such length over the total length of all the perimeter
walls of the building. For the avoidance of doubt,
projections accepted by the Building Authority
(excluding balconies and utility platforms under JPN 1
and 2) shall be disregarded for the purpose of the
calculation.
(g) Use of paving materials other than hard paving for the
EVA (e.g. grass paving materials).
5. Where the EVA is a public street, the information required for the EVA
plan may be confined to the information in paragraph 4(a), (b), (e) and (f) above. For
paragraph 4(b), the information required may be confined to the portion of the EVA
serving the major façade of the building and the information of loading capacity of the
EVA would not be required.
Measurement of Major Façade of a Building
6. Paragraph 24.2(e) of the MOA Code stipulates the requirements in the

provision of major façade of the building to be served by the EVA. In the
measurement of one-fourth of the length of the perimeter wall as the major façade, the
actual total length of the perimeter walls shall be used for the calculation of the major
façade for buildings with simple contour design (e.g. in the shape of square,
rectangle, circle, triangle, L-shaped, cruciform etc.). For buildings with complicated
contour design, in lieu of the actual total length of the perimeter walls, the total length
of the notional building contour line, as illustrated in Appendix A, may be used for
the measurement of one-fourth of the length of the perimeter wall as the major façade.
Exemption and Modification
7. As stipulated in B(P)R 41D(3), the Building Authority may exempt a

building from complying with any or all of the EVA standards specified in the MOA
Code if the Building Authority is satisfied that compliance with the requirements is: -
(a) impracticable having regard to the topographical
features of the area on which the building is situated;
or
(b) unwarranted on the ground that the purpose for which
the building is to be used constitutes a low fire risk.
8. When the circumstances arise that an EVA will not be provided or when
the EVA provided cannot meet the standards as stipulated in the MOA Code, an
application for exemption from B(P)R 41D(1) or (2) should be made on Form BA16
with full justification and, where appropriate, substantiated by a fire-safety report as
required by paragraph 27.2 of the MOA Code. The Building Authority in consultation
with the Director of Fire Services will consider such an application on the merits and
the special circumstances of the case.
/9. …..
-3-
9. AP/RSEs may make reference to the guidance notes at Appendix B for

information on exemption/modification in special circumstances. In general,
applications for relaxation of the items of requirement listed in Appendix B do not
require the submission of a fire-safety report, although enhanced fire safety measures
may be required on a case-by-case basis.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/BREG/P/46(II)
First issue May 2005 (AD/NB1)

This revision July 2006 (AD/NB1) (Para. 1, 2, 3, 5 & 8 revised, paras. 6, 9,
Appendices A & B added)
Index under : Emergency vehicular access

EVA
EVA plan
B(P)R 41D
MOA Code
(APP-136)
Appendix B
(PNAP 288)
(APP-136)
Guidance Notes on Exemption / Modification
Consideration of Part VI of the MOA Code where Special Circumstances warranted
MOA
Situation Code Para. Relaxation
1 Dead-end EVA 24.2(d) Non-provision of turning space at dead-end EVA is
25.2 acceptable should the F.S. appliances need not to
reverse more than 30m for turning space.
2 Run-in/run-out 24.2(a) The width of EVA may be relaxed to not less than
point 25.3(c) 4.5m.
3 Domestic 24.2(a) The width of EVA may be relaxed to not less than
building(s) of 3- 25.3(c) 4.5m depending on the topographical constraints.
4 storey or below, 24.2(e) The horizontal distance between the EVA and the
including single 25.3(c) building façade exceeds 10m but within 30m is
family building(s) to acceptable subject to the provision of FSI
which MOE Code enhancement which may include a hose reel
paragraph 5 applies system.
5 The horizontal distance between the EVA and the
building façade exceeds 30m is acceptable subject
to the provision of FSI enhancement which may
include a sprinkler system and/or other
enhancements depending on the scope of
development, distance from the main road and
source of water supply.
6 A building re- 25.3(c) The width of the existing road(s)/street(s) serving
development in an as EVA may be relaxed to not less than 4.5m.
original site such as
Class A, B or C site The requirement on the EVA serving at least one
(other than major façade having not less than one-fourth of the
industrial, cinema total perimeter walls may be relaxed when the
or theatre) topographical features of the site make the
compliance impracticable. Notwithstanding the
above, the major façade of Class A site being
served by EVA shall not be less than the minimum
distance between the two opposite side boundaries
within 10m from the EVA.; whilst for Class B and
C sites, paragraph 24.2(e) should follow.
(7/2006)
Buildings Department Practice Note for Authorized Persons 289
Ground-borne Vibrations Arising from Pile Driving

and Similar Operations
Pile driving (including pile withdrawal) operations and the like generate
vibrations which, if not properly controlled, may have adverse effects on, or cause
damage to, adjacent buildings and structures, in particular, non-structural elements
therein. For the purpose of this PNAP, such operations are termed as “pile driving
operations”.
2. This practice note aims to provide guidelines on the control of

ground-borne vibrations generated from pile driving or similar operations with a view
to minimizing possible damage to adjacent properties and streets. Authorized Persons
(AP)/Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) are reminded that under the Buildings
Ordinance, it is their responsibility to ensure that the building works carried out will not
impair the stability of, or cause damage to any building, structure, land, street or
services. They should also exercise their professional judgment in choosing suitable
and safe construction methods and provide vigilant supervision over the works
throughout the construction period.
Piling Plan Submission
3. Piling plans submitted for approval should, in general, follow the

requirements laid down in PNAP 66. AP/RSE’s particular attention should be paid to
the monitoring requirements and the required appraisal report at items 4(k) and 4(o)
therein respectively for adjacent buildings/structures. Depending on the structural
condition of the adjoining buildings/structures, the Building Authority (BA) may
require the following details to be included in the appraisal report :
(a) Pre-construction condition survey with a full set of photographic record

of the external and common areas of the buildings/structures that are
vulnerable to vibration damage. If access to some internal areas can be
gained, the condition therein should also be recorded.
(b) Recommended vibration control limits (with due consideration of the

recommendations given in Appendix A of this practice note) and
vibration monitoring proposal. Critical locations for vibration
monitoring should be identified by the RSE and included in the
monitoring proposal.
(c) Preliminary appraisal of the stability of the structural and non-structural

elements of adjacent buildings/structures under the expected
ground-borne vibrations.
-2-
(d) If vibration control limits greater than those given in Appendix A are to
be adopted, a detailed assessment of the magnitude of the ground-borne
vibrations generated by the piling operations should be made. Under
such circumstances, reference could be made to Technical Note 142
published by CIRIA of the UK for such assessment or to any other
relevant references acceptable to the BA. Consideration should also be
given to the cumulative effects from the driving of all piles at the site.
The structural stability of all adjoining buildings/structures due to the
effects of ground-borne vibrations in item (c) above should also be
appraised by detailed engineering analyses.
(e) A monitoring proposal to monitor the movements of adjoining grounds

and buildings/structures.
(f) If the site is situated close to buildings/structures that are vulnerable to

damage caused by the piling operations, a trial pile proposal to confirm
the accuracy of the vibration assessments and the effects of the piling
works on adjacent buildings/structures (see paragraphs 6 to 8 below).
Required actions from the RSE prior to consent application for piling works
4. Prior to consent application, the RSE is required to confirm with the

Registered Specialist Contractor the method of construction including the maximum
number of piles to be driven concurrently and the relevant details of the construction
plants. In case there are changes from the approved details, the RSE should submit an
amendment plan together with a re-assessment of the ground-borne vibrations and, if
necessary, revise the appraisal report for item 3(c) above. Final reports for items 3(b)
& (c) above shall be submitted together with the amendment submission.
5. It should be noted that certain types of piles installed by vibratory

equipment may cause significant damage to vibration sensitive buildings/structures such
as those mentioned in paragraph 7 below. Such method will not normally be accepted
by the BA unless it can be satisfactorily demonstrated to him by means of trial piling as
described below. Prior to the installation of the trial piles, precautionary measures
such as the provision of shoring for temporary support to cracked structural members of
adjacent buildings may need to be provided.
Test/Trial Pile(s) for Vibration Control
6. If the adjoining buildings/structures are not vulnerable to the effects of

vibration from the piling works, the magnitude of ground-borne vibrations as assessed
at item 3(b) or the re-assessed values at paragraph 4 above, as appropriate, can be
verified during the driving test of piles. Ground-borne vibrations should be measured
during the driving of the test pile(s) as detailed in paragraph 8 below. The RSE will
be required, under BO section 17 and in conjunction with PNAP 242, to supervise
personally the driving of at least the first test pile to ensure that the upper limits of the
ground-borne vibration will not be exceeded. The effects of the piling works on the
adjoining buildings/structures should also be assessed by the RSE during the driving of
the test pile(s).
-3-
7. In cases where buildings or structures that are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of vibration, such as masonry buildings, are in the proximity of the piling
site, the AP/RSE should submit for approval a trial pile proposal to confirm the
magnitude of ground-borne vibrations assessed at item 3(b) or the re-assessed values at
paragraph 4 above, as appropriate, at each critical ground condition where generation
of maximum ground-borne vibrations will be expected (usually at the highest founding
level or at location of obstruction at shallow depth). The number of such trial pile(s)
would depend on the actual site condition. The RSE will be required, under BO
Section 17 and in accordance with PNAP 242, to supervise personally the driving of the
trial pile(s) to ensure the upper limits of the ground-borne vibration will not be
exceeded.
8. For the vibration monitoring of trial/test pile(s), the maximum

ground-borne vibrations, measured in terms of peak particle velocity (ppv), should be
recorded at every meter length of penetration of pile, at final set and at levels where
obstructions are encountered. The monitoring work should be carried out using a
properly calibrated device under the direction of the RSE. If the measured
ground-borne vibrations have been found to exceed the allowable values or if damage to
either the structural or non-structural elements of the adjacent buildings/structures has
been observed, all piling works should be stopped and the agreed precautionary
measures referred to at item 4(o) of PNAP 66 should be reviewed and revised as
necessary, and submitted by the RSE to the BA for agreement. The suspended piling
works should not be resumed without the prior agreement of the BA.
9. A condition survey of all adjacent buildings/structures should be carried

out after the completion of the trial piles for confirmation of the effects of the piling
works. Two sets of trial piling report on ground-borne vibrations and their effects on
adjacent buildings/structures should be submitted to the BA for consideration/record
prior to the commencement of the driving of the working piles.
Required actions from the RSE during the driving of working piles
10. The vibration monitoring work should be under the supervision of the
RSE or his representatives throughout the piling process. The RSE should review the
site situation from time to time and if found necessary, suspend the piling works, revise
the precautionary measures and/or vibration monitoring proposal and submit them to
the BA for agreement prior to the resumption of the piling works.
Requirements for controlling vibrations arising from site formation and excavation
and lateral support works
11. The installation of temporary pile walls such as steel sheet piles, pipe
piles or steel channel plankings are often included in site formation and excavation and
lateral support works. Such temporary pile walls, if installed by percussive or
vibratory methods, are likely to generate vibrations that may cause damage to adjoining
buildings/structures, particularly those that are vulnerable to vibrations. Excessive
vibrations are also likely to be experienced during the removal of underground
obstructions. Due consideration should thus be given to the recommendations in
Appendix A for the vibration control limits to various types of
structures. A detailed vibration and settlement monitoring proposal on all adjoining
-4-
buildings, structures, land, streets or services should be included in the site formation
or excavation and lateral supports plans to be submitted to the BA for
approval/acceptance. If there are vibration sensitive buildings in the proximity of the
site, the AP/RSE should exercise vigilance during the driving of the first few piles and
closely monitor the effects of such driving on all adjoining grounds and properties. If
the measured ground-borne vibrations have been found to exceed the allowable values
or if damage to either structural or non-structural elements of the adjacent
buildings/structures has been observed, the driving of elements of the temporary pile
walls should be stopped and the agreed/approved installation method and precautionary
measures should be reviewed and submitted by the RSE to the BA for
agreement/approval. The suspended temporary pile wall works should not be
resumed without the prior agreement from the BA. Vibration monitoring should be
carried out during the installation of the remaining elements of the temporary pile walls.
Likewise, vibration monitoring should be carried out during the removal of the
temporary pile walls.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD/GP/BREG/C/36
First issued May 2004 (AD/NB2)
Index under : Ground-borne vibration
Vibration
Peak Particle Velocity
Appendix A
(PNAP 289)
(APP-137)
Vibration Measurement and Recommended Ground-borne Vibration Limits
Resulting from Piling and Similar Works
Vibration measurement
The effect of ground-borne vibration from piling works on adjacent

structures should be assessed by the maximum peak particle velocity (ppv). The
maximum ppv should be evaluated from the peak particle velocities at three orthogonal
axes measured at ground levels of the structures in question. All such measurements
should be made by properly calibrated device and under the supervision of the RSE or
his representatives.
Recommended Ground-borne vibration limits
2. For the detailed assessment of the effects of ground-borne vibrations on

adjacent buildings/structures, an engineering analysis should be carried out.
Reference could be made to BS 7385 Part 1 : 1990 or similar references.
3. In the absence of an engineering analysis, the following empirical

guidelines may be used for reference :
Upper limit on maximum ppv

Targeted Results
(mm/sec)
To avoid damage to buildings, sewerage
tunnel structure and major public utilities in 15
general
To avoid damage to MTR & KCR Refer to PNAP 77 and
structures PNAP 279
To avoid damage to water retaining
structure/water tunnels/masonry retaining 7.5
wall and dilapidated buildings
4. The above upper limits of maximum ppv are suggested to give minimal
risks of vibration-induced damage. Due attention should also be paid to sensitive
buildings close to the piling site such as hospitals, academic institutes, buildings
installed with sensitive equipment etc. A lower value of the upper limit of ppv for
these buildings may have to be specified based on site and building conditions.
5. The AP/RSE is also required to fulfill the requirements imposed by other

government departments.
First issued May 2004 (AD/NB2)
-1-

Appointment of Authorised Signatory to Act for Registered Contractor

and Temporary absence of Authorised Signatories
Every registered contractor (RC) should appoint at least one person to act
for it for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). This appointed person is
commonly known as the “authorised signatory” (AS) of the RC. Under section 9(5)
and (6) of the BO, a registered general building contractor (RGBC) or a registered
specialist contractor (RSC) should provide continuous supervision to the carrying out
of the building works or street works in accordance with the supervision plan and to
comply with the BO generally. Such duties of the RC are more specifically stipulated
under Part V of the Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R), the Technical
Memorandum for Supervision Plans and the Code of Practice for Site Safety
Supervision.
AS on the specified forms and supervision plans
2. The AS who signs the Form BA 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 14A, 18 and 20 in
respect of building works or street works should be the person who is responsible for
the carrying out of the duties of the RC under the BO for the works. The Building
Authority (BA) only accepts one AS to act for the RC for each project and the AS
who signs the Form BA 10 is deemed to be such person.
3. The name of the AS appointed for a project should be clearly indicated on

all specified forms relating to the project. With effect from 1 July, 2004, if the name
of the AS is not shown on a specified form, the BA would consider the form as
incomplete and unacceptable. Moreover, if the name of the AS indicated on the
supervision plan is different from that on any specified forms such as Form BA 10,
13 or 14 of the project, the BA would reject the supervision plan or the specified
forms, as the case may be, unless the BA has approved or has been notified of the
change of AS as stipulated in paragraph 4 below.
4. For an RC, other than a sole proprietorship, who has only one AS, any
proposal to change the AS of a project will not be accepted unless an application for
addition of the new AS in the contractor’s registration has been made in accordance
with the procedures set out in PNRC 38 and approved by the BA. For an RC having
more than one AS in its registration who intends to change the AS of a particular
project to another AS of the RC, the RC should notify the BA in the standard form at
Appendix A to PNRC 59, countersigned by the authorized person (AP) of the project,
not less than 7 days prior to such change. Otherwise, the original AS would still be
regarded as responsible for the project.
/Nomination …..
-2-
Nomination of another AS to act in case of temporary absence
5. The absence of the AS of an RC may cause the RC unable to act. Under

B(A)R 22(2), if the RGBC or RSC becomes unable to act, it should immediately cease
the building works or street works under its purview until another RGBC or RSC is
appointed.
6. In the case of temporary absence of the AS of a project due to various

reasons such as illness, the RC may still wish to continue with the carrying out of the
works. In such circumstances, the BA would accept the RC nominating another AS to
act temporarily for the purpose of supervising the carrying out of the building works
or street works under its purview, subject to the following conditions :
(a) Notification of such nomination should be made to the BA in the

standard form at Appendix B to PNRC 59 and countersigned by
the AP of the project;
(b) The notification should be submitted at least 7 days prior to the

absence of the AS except in case of sudden illness or accident. In
the latter case, the RC or the AS should provide documentary
proof within 3 days showing that the AS is unable to act due to
illness or accident;
(c) The person nominated to act temporarily should fulfill one of the
(i) He is another AS of the same RC on the same register or

sub-register; or
(ii) He is an AS currently acting for another RC on the same

register or sub-register. In case that another RC is a
partnership or a corporation, an authorization letter from that
another RC signed by the rest of the partners or the required
quorum of directors, as the case may be, should be
submitted with the notification; and
(d) The maximum period of temporary acting by the nominated AS is

14 days. Further extension of this acting period would only be
considered upon submission of documentary proof of special
circumstances, such as illness. The total temporary acting period
permitted is subject to a maximum of 30 days.
7. If the nominated temporary AS does not meet the criteria stipulated in

paragraph 6(c) above, the BA would not accept the nomination and would inform the
RC/AS and the AP accordingly. In such cases the building works or street works
under the purview of the RC may have to be ceased if there is no AS acting for it
(see paragraph 5 above).
/8. …..
-3-
8. If the absence of the AS for a project exceeds 30 days, the RC should

arrange to change to another AS of the same company to be responsible for the
project or apply for addition of a new AS in its registration, in accordance with
paragraph 4 above.
The role of the nominated temporary AS
9. The nominated temporary AS would only act for a short period of time
for the purpose of supervision of the carrying out of building works or street works.
During the period of acting, he is required to fulfill the duties of site supervision and
sign on the inspection records on site in accordance with the accepted supervision
plans. However, the nominated temporary AS, being not the AS appointed to act for
the RC for the project as stipulated in paragraph 2 above, is not permitted to sign on
any supervision plans or specified forms for the project for which he is only acting
temporarily for the purpose of paragraph 6 above.
(Marco M H WU)
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/9 (V)
First issue May 2004 (AD/Support)
Index under : Authorised Signatory of Registered Contractor

Temporary absence of Authorised Signatory
Appendix A
(PNRC 59)
Notification of Change of Authorised Signatory
Date ___________
We __________________________ (Chinese) _________________ the registered

general building contractor/registered specialist contractor ＊ , of registration no.
________ and date of expiry of registration __________, hereby notify that the
person (name in full) _____________________ (Chinese) __________________ (the
‘original authorised signatory’) acting for us for the purposes of the Buildings
Ordinance in respect of the building works/street works detailed below, will be
changed to (name in full) ____________________ (Chinese) _________________
(the ‘new authorised signatory’) with effect from (date) ___________.
Address of site Lot No. BA’s Ref. No.
___________________________ ___________________________
Signature Signature
(original authorised signatory) (new authorised signatory)
___________________________
Full name and signature of
authorized person
Certificate of Registration No. : ____________
Date of expiry of registration : ____________
＊
Delete whichever is inapplicable
(5/2004)
Appendix B
(PNRC 59)
Notification of Nomination of Temporary Authorised Signatory
Date____________
We __________________________ (Chinese) __________________ the registered

general building contractor/registered specialist contractor ＊ of registration no.
________ and date of expiry of registration __________, hereby notify that we have
nominated (name in full) ____________________ (Chinese) _________________ (the
‘nominated authorised signatory’), in stead of (name in full) ____________________
(Chinese) _________________ (the ‘original authorised signatory’) to act for us for
the purpose of supervision under the Buildings Ordinance during the period of the
latter’s illness/temporary absence＊ from (date) ___________ to (date) ____________
in respect of the building works/street works detailed below.
Address of site Lot No. BA’s Ref. No.
_________________________ ___________________________
Full name and signature of Signature of original authorised
authorized person signatory
I (name in full) ___________________ (Chinese) _____________________,

HKID/Passport ＊ No.____________, Telephone No. __________, Fax No.
____________ confirm my acceptance of the above nomination and that I will act in
stead of (name in full) _________________(Chinese) __________________, in
respect of the above building works/street works from (date) ___________ to (date)
____________.
＊I am currently *one of/the AS acting for (name of the registered general building
contractor/registered specialist contractor＊) __________________________ (Chinese)
__________________ of registration no. ________ and date of expiry of registration
__________, for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance. *A letter of authorisation
for me to act as the nominated authorised signatory is enclosed.
___________________________________
Signature of nominated authorised signatory
＊
Delete whichever is inapplicable
(5/2004)

Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004
Main Features of the Code
The Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 (The 2004
Code) replaces the existing 1983 wind code by taking into account additional wind data
collected in Hong Kong and enriched knowledge of structural response under wind effects.
It introduces several changes to the wind design which include the adoption of a single
terrain wind velocity profile, a new approach to address the site topographic effects, the
assessment of resonant dynamic response effects for slender and/or dynamic significant
buildings under wind load, and necessary provisions for wind tunnel testing.
Explanatory Materials
2. As the 2004 Code aims to retain the essence of simple format for ease of
application, a supplementary technical document – ‘Explanatory Materials to the Code of
Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004’ will be issued in parallel to give a summary
of background information and considerations that were reviewed during the preparation
of the Code. The document also addresses special situations where the application of the
Code might require special attention. Nevertheless, the document should NOT be
construed as a part of the Code.
Transitional Period for the Application of the Code
3. To allow sufficient time for the building industry to migrate to the 2004
Code, a one-year transition period starting from 15 December 2004 would be
implemented. During the transitional period, all first structural submissions and their
subsequent re-submissions, if applicable, including those for alterations and additions
works, received by the Buildings Department may be designed to either the 2004 Code or
the 1983 Code. After the transitional period, i.e. starting from 15 December 2005, all
structural submissions for new building development proposals received by the Buildings
Department should be designed in accordance with the 2004 Code.
4. Building development proposals for which the superstructure or

foundation plan submissions have been received by the Buildings Department during
the transitional period and structural plans which have been designed according to the
1983 Code and submitted/approved before the transitional period may continue to be
designed using the 1983 Code for both the foundations and superstructures including its
subsequent amendments until the Occupation Permit has been granted.
/5. …..
-2-
5. For foundation works for which plans have been submitted and approved
using the 1983 Code, the RSE may choose to design the superstructure works to the 2004
Code provided he has checked and satisfied the Buildings Authority that the foundation
works already approved are structurally adequate to resist the wind loads and the
combinations with other loads transmitted from the superstructure.
6. For new alteration and addition works to be submitted after the

transitional period, the design of new structural elements and/or checking of structural
adequacy of the existing structure should follow the guidance given in PNAP 249.
7. Notwithstanding the aforesaid administration arrangements, you are

required to advise the owners that the Building Authority may under BO section 16(3)(d)
refuse to give his consent to the commencement of any building works when a period
exceeding 2 years has elapsed since the approval of the prescribed plans in respect of
the building works.
Design of External Building Elements
8. External building elements, e.g. canopies, cladding to building façade,

curtain walls and architectural features etc. are subject to wind channel down effect the
design requirements of which are described in Clause 6.2 of the 2004 Code. Such
design requirement is not postulated in the 1983 Code. However, RSEs are strongly
advised to consider such effect in the design of external building elements even though
the building has been designed to the 1983 Code.
Access for the Code
9. Both the Code and the Explanatory Materials are available for viewing in
the Buildings Department website <http://www.info.gov.hk/bd> under the "Codes of
Practice and Design Manuals" page of the "Publications" section. The documents may
be downloaded subject to terms and conditions stipulated in the website.
( Marco M H WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-50/59/0
Index under : Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004

Channel down effect, of wind

Registration of Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers as

Introduction
Many developments in Hong Kong stand on steep hillsides and man-made

slopes. In such cases, geotechnical works are usually involved which call for
geotechnical expertise. In the past, the Buildings Ordinance (BO) only required the
appointment of an authorized person (AP) as the coordinator of building works and a
registered structural engineer (RSE) for the structural elements of the building works.
As such, the AP had to be held statutorily responsible for geotechnical works
although geotechnical engineers were usually engaged as sub-consultant to the AP for
the design and supervision of the geotechnical works.
2. The Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004 establishes a register of

geotechnical engineers and introduces the requirement for the appointment of a
registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) for the geotechnical elements of building
works. The RGE so appointed will undertake the investigation, design and
supervision of geotechnical works and will be statutorily responsible for such works.
AP/RSE applying for registration as RGE
3. The basic qualification for registration as RGE is a registered professional

engineer in the geotechnical engineering discipline. The Building Authority (BA),
however, also recognizes the experience and competence of those AP and RSE who
have actually been engaged in geotechnical works in the past. Upon commencement
of the registration system for RGE on 31 December 2004, an AP in the list of
engineers or RSE may apply, within 12 months, i.e. on or before 30 December 2005,
for registration as RGE under section 53I of the BO (added by clause 43 of the
Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004). He is qualified for registration if he
satisfies the following conditions:
(a) During the period of 7 years immediately preceding the date of his
application, he has been engaged in or has taken part in site
formation works carried out and completed in accordance with the
BO.
(b) He was the AP or RSE appointed in respect of the building works or

street works in relation to which the site formation works were
carried out.
(c) He satisfies the BA that he has the appropriate geotechnical

experience and competence in relation to the site formation works.
4. In relation to condition (c) stipulated in paragraph 3 above, the BA will
be satisfied with the geotechnical experience and competence of the applicant if,
within the period of 7 years immediately preceding the date of his application:
(a) He has been engaged in the following projects of site formation

works from preparation of plans for submission to the BA for
approval, obtaining approval of such plans from the BA and
supervision of the carrying out of the works through to satisfactory
completion of the works:
z 5 projects requiring Category I qualified supervision, or
z 2 projects requiring Category II qualified supervision, or
z 3 projects requiring Category I qualified supervision and 1

project requiring Category II qualified supervision.
For the above purpose:
z preparation of plans includes the supervision of his employees

to prepare the plans but excludes the preparation of plans by a
geotechnical engineering sub-consultant;
z Category I and Category II qualified supervision are as defined

in PNAP 83;
z the projects must not be one which has been claimed to support
an application under section 53I(2)(a) by other applicants;
(b) For an AP in the list of engineers, he has certified completion of the

site formation works under the BO. For an RSE, being not in a
position to certify completion under the BO, he has reported to the
certifying AP of the site formation works that he is satisfied that the
works have been completed in accordance with the approved plans
and in compliance with the BO; and
(c) The site formation works were completed with no record of

contravention of the BO.
5. The BA may require the applicant to furnish such information or

documents as may be required to justify his application. Upon registration as RGE,
the registration will be valid for 5 years which is renewable as long as his name
remains in the register of AP/RSE.
6. This practice note should be read in conjunction with PNAP 43,
particularly paragraphs 7 and 11 to 14 thereof.
( Marco MH WU )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/75(VIII)
First issue December 2004 (AD/Sup)
Index under : AP registering as RGE
Registered geotechnical engineer
RSE registering as RGE

Division of Responsibilities between Authorized Person,

Registered Structural Engineer and Registered Geotechnical Engineer
Introduction
The Buildings Ordinance (BO) requires the appointment of an authorized

person (AP) as coordinator of building works and a registered structural engineer
(RSE) for the structural elements of the building works. In the past where there were
geotechnical matters and/or geotechnical elements involved, the AP and/or the RSE
would take up the responsibility. In many cases, geotechnical engineers were
engaged as sub-consultant for the design and supervision of the geotechnical works
but the AP still had to be held statutorily responsible for the works.
2. The Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004 established a register of

geotechnical engineers and introduced the requirement for the appointment of a
registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) for the geotechnical elements of building
works. This will enhance the public safety since only suitably qualified and
experienced geotechnical engineers may undertake the design and supervision of
geotechnical works and they will be held statutorily responsible for the quality of their
work.
Duties and functions of the RGE
3. The duties and functions of a RGE under the BO are classified into
“executive role” and “advisory role” as appropriate in respect of the geotechnical
elements of building works as outlined at Appendix A.
Division of responsibilities between AP, RSE and RGE
4. With effect from 31 December 2005, an RGE is required to be appointed

for the geotechnical elements of building works as stipulated in section 4(1)(c) of the
BO. The RGE will take up the statutory responsibility for the geotechnical elements.
The respective responsibilities of AP, RSE and RGE in building works under the BO
are mainly specified in Building (Administration) Regulation 12 with reference to the
prescribed plans and documents they are required to prepare and sign. While the AP
is the co-ordinator of all building works, this practice note gives detailed guidelines
on the division of responsibilities in building works involving geotechnical elements
as described at Appendix B. This practice note should be read in conjunction with all
the PNAPs relevant to building works involving geotechnical elements, particularly
PNAP 50, 75, 77, 83, 85, 132, 148, 161, 200, 283 & 284.
/5. …..
-2-
5. The RGE would take up an “executive role” for tasks 2A, 2B, 4, 7A, 7B,
10 and 11. For these executive tasks, the RGE shall prepare and sign the prescribed
geotechnical plans and reports. For example in task 11, the submission of monitoring
reports, justifying the proper functioning of permanent anchors and horizontal drains,
should be prepared and signed by the RGE. For the geotechnical works for which the
RGE takes up an executive role, the RGE shall also be required to certify that the
works have been carried out in accordance with the approved plans and that the works
completed are geotechnically safe.
6. Tasks 1, 3, 5A, 5B, 6, 8 and 12 are duties and functions of the RGE in an
“advisory role” in geotechnical related matters. In all these advisory tasks, the
geotechnical report/supporting documentation should be prepared and signed by the
RGE. The signature is deemed to indicate the RGE’s acceptance of responsibility for
the geotechnical report/supporting documentation. The AP or RSE should be
responsible to prepare and sign as appropriate the plans concerned and the associated
reports and documentations relating to non-geotechnical matters.
Sanctions
7. Similar to AP and RSE, the RGE will also be subject to prosecution or

disciplinary action where an offence is committed or when matters justifying the
taking of disciplinary action arise, as stipulated under section 40 and 7 respectively of
the BO.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref : BD GP/BORD/75(X)
BD GP/BREG/P/16 (Pt V)

This revision February 2009 (AD/NB1) (paras. 4 & 6 and Appendix A amended and
Task 12 added to Appendix B)
Index under : AP’s responsibilities

Division of responsibilities between AP, RSE and RGE
RGE’s responsibilities
RSE’s responsibilities
Appendix A
(PNAP 294)
(APP-141)
Geotechnical Tasks Under the Buildings Ordinance and
Regulations to be undertaken by the RGE
Role Geotechnical Task
Executive Ground Investigation in Scheduled Areas (Task 2A in Appendix B)
Ground Investigation in Non-scheduled Areas (Task 2B in Appendix

B)
Site Formation (Task 4 in Appendix B)
Groundwater Drainage Works in Scheduled Area 1 (Task 7A in

Appendix B)
Water Supply and Wells (Task 7B in Appendix B)
Remedial Works to Dangerous Hillsides (Task 10 in Appendix B)
Long Term Monitoring (Post Occupation Permit) (Task 11 in

Appendix B)
Advisory Demolition Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls (Task 1 in

Appendix B)
Geotechnical Assessment for General Building Plan where required

(Task 3 in Appendix B)
Foundation in Scheduled Areas Nos. 1, 2 & 4 and Designated Area

of Northshore Lantau (Task 5A in Appendix B)
Foundation Affecting Slope and Retaining Wall (Task 5B in

Appendix B)
Excavation and Lateral Support (Task 6 in Appendix B)
Superstructure (Report on geotechnical design parameters) (Task 8

in Appendix B)
Hoardings, Covered Walkways and Gantries Affecting the Stability

of Any Nearby Slope or Retaining Walls
(Task 12 in Appendix B)
(Rev. 2/2009)
Appendix B
(PNAP 294)
(APP-141)
Division of Responsibilities between AP, RSE and RGE
1. Demolition Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls
Buildings Brief Description of the Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Supervision of Works Certification of
Ordinance & Requirement Documents Completion
Regulations
BO s16(3)bb BA may refuse consent AP and RSE to prepare and RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE – Qualified To be certified
when precautionary and sign demolition plans. Reports and supporting supervision on by AP & RSE
other protective measures documentations geotechnical aspects
are not adequately RSE should ensure all the imposed under
provided. relevant recommendations RSE to sign Structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a
by the RGE are incorporated calculations for structural condition of approval
B(A)R 8(3) Demolition plans as in the plans. Any difference supports and structural
prescribed plans in opinion should be assessment report relating RSE – All supervision of
resolved between the RSE to the demolition structural works apart
B(C)R 7 Building works not to and RGE before submission from the above
adversely affect adjoining to BD.
buildings etc.
-1-
2A. Ground Investigation in Scheduled Areas
Buildings Brief Description of the Signing of Plans Signing of Supervision of Works Certification of
Ordinance & Requirement Supporting Completion
Regulations Documents
B(A)R 8(1)(l) Ground investigation plan RGE – Ground RGE to sign The RGE appointed shall give such RGE – ground
in the scheduled areas are investigation plans in Geotechnical periodic supervision and make such investigation in
prescribed plans Scheduled Areas Reports and inspection as may be necessary to ensure Scheduled
supporting that the geotechnical works are being Areas
B(C)R9 Site investigation to be documentations carried out in general accordance with the
carried out to recognized where submitted. provisions of the Ordinance and
standards as to provide regulations and with the plans approved by
adequate geotechnical data the BA, and the supervision plan prepared
in compliance with the technical
B(C)R24 Site investigation to be memorandum issued under section 39A of
carried out to provide BO.
necessary information for and
design and construction of Qualified supervision imposed under
foundations BOs.17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE as
set out in PNAP 132.
-2-
2B. Ground Investigation in Non-scheduled Areas
Buildings Brief Description of the Signing of Plans Signing of Supervision of Works Certification of
Ordinance & Requirement Supporting Completion
B(C)R9 Site investigation to be Submission of plans RGE to sign The RGE appointed shall give such RGE – ground
carried out to recognized to BA for approval is Geotechnical periodic supervision and make such investigation
standards as to provide not a statutory Reports and inspection as may be necessary to ensure
adequate geotechnical data requirement under supporting that the geotechnical works are being
BO. documentations carried out in general accordance with the
B(C)R24 Site investigation to be where submitted* Ordinance and regulations. Details are set
carried out to provide out in PNAP 132.
necessary information for
design and construction of
foundations
* The relevant foundation, site formation, excavation or other plans may be disapproved if the ground investigation report-
- is found not acceptable;
- does not include the required certificate from Registered Specialist Contractor (Ground Investigation Field Works) or RGE; or
- does not include a proper surveyed record of the boreholes.
-3-
3. Geotechnical Assessment for General Building Plan when required
Regulations
B(A)R 8(1)(ba) BA may require N/A RGE to sign Geotechnical N/A N/A
geotechnical assessment of Assessment Reports and
adequacy of the site for supporting documentations
the proposed building where submitted
works
-4-
4. Site Formation
Buildings Brief Description of Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Supervision of Works Certification of
Ordinance & the Requirement Documents Completion
Regulations
B(A)R Site formation plans AP* - General layout RGE to sign The RGE appointed shall give such AP* to certify
8(1)(bb) are prescribed plans plan showing location Geotechnical Reports periodic supervision and make such completion of site
of site and extent of and supporting inspections as may be necessary to formation works
works, and connection documentations ensure that the geotechncial works are
B(A)R 11A In area number 1 of of proposed surface being carried out in general accordance RGE to certify
the scheduled areas, drainage to public RGE to sign with the provisions of the Ordinance completion of
foundation plan to be drains Performance Review and regulations and with the plans geotechnical
submitted with site Reports and supporting approved by the BA, and the aspects of site
formation plan RGE – All site documentations on the supervision plan prepared in formation works
formation plan except completed site compliance with the technical
B(C)R 20 Site formation works general layout plan and formation works as memorandum issued under section 39A If structural works
to be designed and plans involving required under of BO, are involved, RSE
constructed to have structural details only BOs.17(1)(6)(g). and to certify the
adequate margin of Qualified Supervision imposed under structural works.
safety and would not RSE – plans showing RSE to sign structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as set out in PNAP 83
adversely affect any structural details calculations and
structure, etc. structural assessment RSE- supervision of structural works
reports
* If the proposed works encroaches on Government land, AP shall arrange for permission from Lands Department.
-5-
5A. Foundation in Scheduled Areas Nos. 1, 2 & 4 and Designated Area of Northshore Lantau
Buildings Brief Description of the Requirement Signing of Signing of Supporting Supervision of Works Certification of
Ordinance & Plans Documents Completion
Regulations
B(A)R 8(1)(d)(i) Foundation plan to show size & To be signed RGE to sign RGE – Qualified AP & RSE to
B(A)R11A position of foundation together with by RSE Geotechnical Reports supervision on the certify
site investigation work undertaken and and supporting geotechnical aspects completion of
grouting works to be carried out documentations imposed under foundation
BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a works
In Designated Area of Northshore condition of approval
Lantau, the submission of foundation as set out in PNAP 83
plan to follow the conditions set out in
PNAP 283
B(A)R 8(1)(d)(ii) Foundation plan in scheduled areas 2 & RGE to sign RSE – All supervision
4 to be accompanied by supporting Performance Review of structural works
documentation including schedule of reports on the completed apart from the above
geotechnical design assumptions and foundation in Scheduled
discussion of anticipated geotechnical Areas Nos.1, 2 & 4
problems etc
B(C)R23 Foundation works not to adversely RSE to sign structural

affect any building etc design calculations of
foundations and
structural assessment
reports
-6-
5B. Foundation Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls
Regulations
B(C)R 23 Foundation works not to To be signed by RSE RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE – Qualified AP & RSE to
adversely affect any Reports and supporting supervision in the certify
building, structure, land, documentations geotechnical aspects completion of
street or services imposed under foundation
RSE to sign structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a works
design calculations of condition of approval as
foundations and structural set out in PNAP 83
assessment reports
RSE – All supervision of
structural works apart
from the above
-7-
6. Excavation and Lateral Support
Regulations
B(A)R 8(1)(bc) Excavation and lateral RSE to sign plans RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE – Qualified To be certified
support plans required to Reports and supporting supervision on the by AP & RSE
be submitted for approval RSE shall ensure that all the documentations geotechnical aspects
as stipulated in PNAP 148 relevant recommendations imposed under
shall include a schedule of by the RGE are incorporated RSE to sign structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a
geotechnical design in the plans. Any difference design of shoring and condition of approval as
assumptions, and a report in opinion should be structural assessment set out in PNAP 83
to include discussion of resolved between the RSE report of the effects of the
anticipated geotechnical and RGE before submission excavation and dewatering RSE – All supervision of
problems to BD. on adjoining structures structural works apart
from the above
B(C)R7 Building works not to
adversely affect adjoining
building etc
B(C)R 20& 23 Site formation and

foundation works shall not
render inadequate margin
of safety of adjoining
building etc
-8-
7A. Groundwater Drainage Works in Scheduled Area 1
Regulations
BO s28A BA may require plans RGE RGE to sign The RGE appointed shall give such To be certified
prescribed by regulations Geotechnical reports periodic supervision and make such by AP* & RGE
to show groundwater AP* to prepare and supporting inspections as may be necessary to
drainage works whether or and sign general documentations ensure that the geotechnical works are
not extending beyond the layout plan if being carried out in general accordance
site boundary in Schedule proposed works RGE to sign with the provisions of the Ordinance and
Area No. 1 extend beyond Performance Review regulations and with the plans approved
the site boundary reports on the by the BA, and the supervision plan
completion of the prepared in compliance with the technical
groundwater drainage memorandum issued under section 39A
works in Scheduled of BO, and
Area No.1 Qualified supervision imposed under
BOs17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE
* If the proposed works encroaches on Government land or adjoining private lots, AP shall arrange for permission from Lands Department or
adjoining lot owners, and certify completion of works.
-9-
7B. Water Supply and Wells
Buildings Brief Description Signing of Plans Signing of Supervision of Works Certification of

Ordinance & of the Requirement Supporting Completion
B(C)R 85-89 Wells to be AP – General layout plan RGE to sign The RGE appointed shall give such AP & RGE to
designed, showing location of well, Geotechnical periodic supervision and make such certify
constructed and proposed rate and duration assessment supported inspections as may be necessary to completion of
operated so as not of water extraction per day by calculation, of the ensure that the geotechnical works are proposed well
to impair the effect of proposed being carried out in general accordance
stability of, or RGE – plans showing details water extraction with the provisions of the Ordinance
cause damage to of proposed well, services in and regulations and with the plans
any building etc. the vicinity, and the approved by the BA, and the
proposal for well yield test supervision plan prepared in
compliance with the technical
memorandum issued under section 39A
of BO
Qualified supervision imposed under

BOs.17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE
- 10 -
8. Superstructure
Regulations
B(A)R 8(1)(i) Prescribed plan to show RSE RGE to sign Report on RGE’s input as necessary. To be certified
structural details geotechnical design by AP & RSE
parameters for the
superstructure
RSE to sign structural

design calculations of the
superstructure
9. Qualified Supervision (Already included in other items)
- 11 -
10. Remedial Works to Dangerous Hillside
Buildings Brief Description of Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Supervision of Works Certification of
Ordinance & the Requirement Documents Completion
Regulations
BOs.27A BA may order AP* – General RGE to sign The RGE appointed shall give such AP* & RGE to
owners of natural, layout plan showing Geotechnical reports and periodic supervision and make such certify
formed or man-made location and extent supporting inspections as may be necessary to completion of
land, or earth- of works, and documentations ensure that the geotechnical works are investigation/
retaining structure connection of being carried out in general accordance slope
considered to be proposed surface RSE to sign structural with the provisions of Ordinance and stabilization
dangerous or liable drainage to public calculations and regulations and with the plans approved works
to become drains structural assessment by the BA, and the supervisions plan
dangerous, to do report prepared in compliance with the technical If structural
works or to carry out RGE – remedial memorandum issued under section 39A works are
investigation and works plan except of BO involved, RSE
remedial measures as plans involving to certify the
specified structural details Qualified supervision imposed under structural works
only BOs.17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE
RSE – plans showing RSE – supervision of structural works

structural details
* . AP is required for the following circumstances–

(1) if the proposed works encroaches on Government land or adjoining private lots, or
(2) if the works involve not only geotechnical works and structural works.
In respect of (1) above, AP shall arrange for permission from Lands Department or adjoining lot owners.
- 12 -
11. Long Term Monitoring (Post Occupation Permit)
Regulations
No statutory PNAP 50 – Monitoring of Submission of such RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE to supervise the N/A
requirement but pre-stressed ground monitoring report is not a reports, including monitoring works
Practice Note for anchors statutory requirement, interpretation of the
AP&RSE except when a Dangerous monitoring data, and
PNAP 137- Monitoring of Hillside Order under periodic monitoring
horizontal drains BOs.27A is issued records
- 13 -
12. Hoardings, Covered Walkways and Gantries Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls
Regulations
B(P)R 64(1) Plans of hoardings, AP/RSE to prepare and sign RGE to sign Geotechnical AP and RSE – All N/A
covered walkways and the plans Reports and supporting supervision of
gantries to be submitted documentations erection/demolition of
with application for RSE should ensure all the hoardings, covered
hoarding permit relevant recommendations RSE to sign structural walkways and gantries
by the RGE are incorporated calculations for structural
PNAP 75 - hoardings, in the plans. Any difference supports and structural
covered walkways and in opinion should be assessment report relating
gantries not to adversely resolved between the RSE to the hoardings, covered
affect the stability of any and RGE before submission walkways and gantries
nearby slopes or retaining to BD
walls RGE to certify the stability
of any nearby slope or
retaining wall not being
adversely affected, in the
streamlined processing
under Appendix D of
PNAP 75 and renewal of
hoarding permit and minor
amendment under
Appendix E of PNAP 75
(Rev. 2/2009)
- 14 -

Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004
The Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004 (the Code) was
published in December 2004. Subject to the Code being used in its entirety,
compliance with the requirements of the Code will be considered as complying with
the provisions of the Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)R) relating to concrete
design. The concrete design for any new building development or alteration and
addition works shall be based on the Code if the application for approval of the
structural plans or foundation plans of which is submitted after 15 December 2006.
2. The Code specifies alternative requirements to some particular

regulations of the B(C)R. The Building Authority is prepared to grant modifications
of the relevant regulations of the B(C)R upon application in the specified form to
permit adoption of these alternative requirements. Appendix A contains a list of the
relevant B(C)R that may require such modifications.
3. From experience in the application of the Code since its publication in

December 2004, some amendments and refinements to the Code for improvement
have been identified. The amendments to the Code are set out in Appendix B. Major
changes pertinent to the amendments are as follows:
(a) The grouping of concrete has been changed to (i) grades below
and up to C45 (previously, grade below and up to C40), (ii)
grades higher than C45 and up to C70 (previously, grades
higher than C40 and up to C70), and (iii) grades higher than
C70 and up to C100. This allows many existing design tools
and computer programs continue to be used without modifying
the design equations for concrete grade up to C45 which is a
grade commonly used by the building industry.
(b) The simplified stress block for concrete at ultimate limit state
as given in Figure 6.1 of the Code has been amended to
provide a more accurate stress block for the three different
groups of concrete as given in (a) above.
(c) The other amendments are generally consequential to the

amendments mentioned above, corrections of printing errors,
or illustrative figures.
/4. …..
-2-
4. The above amendments would be incorporated in the next reprint of the

Code. The updated version of the Code is now available for viewing in the Buildings
Department website http://www.bd.gov.hk/ under the “Codes of Practice and Design
Manuals” page of the “Publications” section. The document may be downloaded
subject to the terms and conditions stipulated in the website.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-125/58
First issue June 2007 (AD/NB2)
Index under : Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete

Concrete, Code of Practice for Structural Use of
Appendix A
(PNAP 296)
(APP-142)
List of Building (Construction) Regulations that may require modifications
Relevant
Item B(C)R Subject Clause/Table in Remarks
the Code
1 56(2) Cement content is Clause 4.2.6 Where the cement content

3
limited to 550 kg/m . exceeds 550 kg/m3,
modification of the B(C)R
will be required.
2 57 The minimum Table 4.2 and Where the cement content is

& cement content is Clause 4.2.5.4 less than the minimum
Table 6 specified. specified, modification of
the B(C)R will be required.
3 58 Concrete cubes to be Clause Where 100 mm concrete

150 mm. 10.3.4.2 cubes are used, modification
of the B(C)R will be
required.
4 59 Acceptance criteria Table 10.2 Where the C2 Criteria in

& for concrete cubes. Table 10.2 of the Code are
Table 8 used, modification of the
B(C)R will be required.
(6/2007)
Appendix B
(PNAP 296)
(APP-142)
Amendments to Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004
Revised text
AMD 1 Clause 1.2 (page 1)

Jun 2007
Delete ‘Hong Kong Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed Loads for Buildings’
AMD 1 Clause 2.3.1.1 (page 8)

Jun 2007
Replace the first and second bullet points with the following:
z characteristic dead load, Gk, which shall be taken as the dead loads
calculated in accordance with Building (Construction) Regulation 16;
z characteristic imposed load, Qk, which shall be taken as the imposed loads
stipulated in Building (Construction) Regulation 17; and
AMD 1 Clause 2.3.1.4 (d) (page 9)

Jun 2007
Replace the clause with the following:
(d) Vehicular impact
Where vertical elements are to be designed for vehicular impact the nominal
design load shall be as specified in Building (Construction) Regulation 17.
AMD 1 Figure 3.3 (page 17)

Jun 2007
At the Y-axis,
replace : Shrinkage Kc
with : Creep/shrinkage Kc

Jun 2007
At the Y-axis,
replace : Shrinkage Kj
with : Creep/shrinkage Kj
-1-
Revised text
AMD 1 Clause 3.1.8 (page 18)

Jun 2007
In the definition of cs,
replace : 4.0
with : 3.0

Jun 2007
Replace : See table 3.2
f cu
with : 3.46 + 3.21 kN/mm2
γm
f cu
Replace : 2.4 × 10 − 4
γm
1.34( f cu / γ m )
with :
Ec

Jun 2007
Replace : section 10
with : Table 4.5
AMD 1 Clause 5.2.1.1 (e) (page 33)

Jun 2007
Delete “and the height is at least 3 times the section depth”.
AMD 1 Clause 5.2.1.2 (b) (page 36)

Jun 2007
In the pen-ultimate paragraph:
replace : taken as the elastic or redistributed values

with : taken as the greater of the elastic or redistributed values

Jun 2007
Replace : 0.9x
with : 0.9x for fcu ≤45 N/mm2, 0.8x for 45< fcu ≤70 N/mm2, or 0.72x for 70< fcu
≤100 N/mm2.
-2-
Revised text
AMD 1 Equation 6.1 (page 41)

Jun 2007
Replace the existing equation with the following :
x ≤ 0.5d for fcu ≤ 45 N/mm2 ;

Jun 2007
x ≤ 0.4d for 45 < fcu ≤ 70 N/mm2 ; or

Jun 2007
x ≤ (βb - 0.4)d for fcu ≤ 45 N/mm2 ; or

Jun 2007
x ≤ (βb - 0.5)d for 45 < fcu ≤ 70 N/mm2

Jun 2007
K’ = 0.156 for fcu ≤45 N/mm2 ; or

0.120 for 45< fcu ≤70 N/mm2 ; or
0.094 for 70< fcu ≤100N/mm2 and no moment redistribution.

Jun 2007
K’ = 0.402(βb-0.4) - 0.18(βb-0.4)2 , for fcu ≤45 N/mm2 ; or

0.357(βb-0.5) - 0.143(βb-0.5)2 , for 45< fcu ≤70 N/mm2.
-3-
Revised text
AMD 1 Equations 6.11 and 6.14 (page 42)

Jun 2007
Replace the existing equations with the following :
x = (d - z)/0.45 , for fcu ≤45 N/mm2 ; or

(d - z)/0.40 , for 45< fcu ≤70 N/mm2 ; or
(d - z)/0.36 , for 70< fcu ≤100 N/mm2.

Jun 2007
M + k1 f cu bw d (k 2 d − h f )
As =
0.87 f y ( d − 0.5h f )
where k1 = 0.1 for fcu ≤45 N/mm2, 0.072 for 45< fcu ≤70 N/mm2 and 0.054 for 70<fcu
≤100 N/mm2; and
k2 = 0.45 for fcu ≤45 N/mm2, 0.32 for 45< fcu ≤70 N/mm2 and 0.24 for 70<fcu
≤100 N/mm2.

Jun 2007
Replace the existing equation with the following:
hf ⎛ bw ⎞⎛ hf ⎞ b
β f = 0.45 ⎜1 − ⎟⎜⎜1 − ⎟⎟ + K ' w
d ⎝ b ⎠⎝ 2d ⎠ b
AMD 1 Table 6.3 (page 44)

Jun 2007
In the last column,
replace : ≥400
with : 400

Jun 2007
In line 9 under item (e):
replace : αand βare both greater than 45º

with : α and β are both equal to or greater than 45º.
-4-
Revised text

Jun 2007
In third column,
replace : Asb >

with : Asb ≥

Jun 2007
Replace : 1.4νt (see clause 6.1.5.6(b)
with : 1.4νt (see clause 6.1.5.6(c))
AMD 1 Clause 6.1.5.7(e) (page 69)

Jun 2007
In the last sentence:
Replace : 0.4ud/087fyv.
with : vrud/087fyv, where νr is defined in Table 6.2.

Jun 2007
In line 3 under item (c),
replace : 6.49
with : 6.48

Jun 2007
Interchange all ‘k1’ and ‘k2’.
Interchange all ‘M1’ and ‘M2’.

Jun 2007
In the second paragraph,
replace : St. Venant torsional stiffness

with : torsional constant
-5-
Revised text

Jun 2007
1 3
C= βhmin hmax .
2

Jun 2007
In the last line,
replace : N/mm3
with : N/mm2

Jun 2007
Replacing the existing Table 6.18 with the following:
vt ≤ vt min vt > vt min

v ≤ vc + vr Minimum shear reinforcement; Designed torsion reinforcement
no torsion reinforcement but not less than the minimum
shear reinforcement
v > vc + vr Designed shear reinforcement; Designed shear and torsion
no torsion reinforcement reinforcement
Notes: vr is defined in Table 6.2.
Table 6.18 - Reinforcement for shear and torsion

Jun 2007
In line 7,
replace : Lc
with : lc
-6-
Revised text

Jun 2007
Replace the existing Figure 6.19 with the following new Figure 6.19.
Figure 6.19 – Critical section for shear check in a pile cap

Jun 2007
In line 6,
replace : at the ends of the ranges

with : in table 3.2

Jun 2007
Before the definition of a’ under equation 7.2, add:
ε1 is the strain at the level considered, calculated ignoring the stiffening effect
of the concrete in the tension zone,
-7-
Revised text

Jun 2007
In the paragraph after equation 7.2,
replace : In this 7.2

with : In equation 7.2

Jun 2007
In Notes 2,
replace : clause 6.1.2.4(c)

with : clause 6.1.2.4(b)

Jun 2007
In Notes 2,
replace : A
with : A’s,prov
AMD 1 Clause 7.3.6(a) (page 105)

Jun 2007
Under the third bullet point,
replace : 1/(1+φ) times the short-term modulus where φ

with : 1/(1+φc) times the short-term modulus where φ c
AMD 1 Figure 7.1a) (page 106)

Jun 2007
In the strain diagram,
replace : fs / E
with : fs / Es

Jun 2007
In the paragraph after the definitions of notations for equation 8.7,
replace : equation 8.5

with : equation 8.7
-8-
Revised text

Jun 2007
≥ ≥
<s ≥s ≥s ≥s
<s ≥s ≥s ≥
φ = diameter of the lapped reinforcement

s = 75 mm or 6φ, whichever is the greater
Note : For laps in bottom of section as cast minimum
* cover criteria applies to corner bars only
Figure 8.5 – Factors for lapping bars

Jun 2007
Figure 8.6 – Transverse reinforcement for lapped splices
-9-
Revised text
AMD 1 Clause 8.8 (pages 118-119)

Jun 2007
In the line preceding Figure 8.7,
replace : In figure 8.7a, n1=1, n2=1

with : In figure 8.7a, n1=1, n2=2
In the second and last paragraphs, delete ‘(see clause 9.2.4)’.
At the end of the last paragraph, insert the following:
Act,ext denotes the area of the tensile concrete external to the links, defined by
Figure 8.7c.

Jun 2007
Figure 8.7 – Additional reinforcement for large diameter bars
- 10 -
Revised text

Jun 2007
Add the following paragraphs at the end of the clause 9.1:
Detailing of members should normally comply with both the general detailing rules
given in clauses 9.2 to 9.8 and the particular rules for ductility given in clause 9.9.
However, members not contributing in the lateral load resisting system do not need to
conform to the requirements of clause 9.9.

Jun 2007
Replacing the existing equation 9.4 with the following:
Asv ≥ vrbvsv/(0.87fyv) 9.4
where vr is defined in Table 6.2.

Jun 2007
Replace : A full anchorage length beyond the centreline of the supporting member
should be provided for top tension reinforcement of a cantilevered
projecting structure.
with : A full anchorage length should be provided for the top tension
reinforcement of a cantilevered projecting structure. Where full rotational
restraint is provided at the near face of the supporting member, i.e. the
face at which the bar enters the supporting member, the anchorage shall
be deemed to commence at 1/2 the width of the supporting member or
1/2 the effective depth of the cantilevered projecting structure whichever
is the less, from the near face of the supporting member. Where the
cantilevered projecting structure is a continuous slab or beam and the
support is not designed to provide rotational restraint in the analysis of
the continuous structure, the anchorage shall be deemed to commence
at the far face of the supporting member.
AMD 1 Clause 9.9.1.1(d) (page 138)

Jun 2007
Before the definition for fyt, add:
n number of bars uniformly spaced around circular sections, or the number

of longitudinal bars in the layer through which a potential plane of splitting
would pass,
- 11 -
Revised text
AMD 1 Clause 9.9.2.1(a) (page 139)

Jun 2007
Replace : The area of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be greater than 4% of
the gross concrete area except that at laps the area may increase to
5.2%.
with : The area of longitudinal reinforcement for strength design shall not be
greater than 4% of the gross concrete area except that at laps the area
may increase to 5.2%.

Jun 2007
In the first bullet point in paragraph 2,
replace : clause 13.1.8.1

with : clause 12.1.8.1

Jun 2007
In line 4 of the last paragraph,
replace : all concrete mixes of grade C60 or above

with : all concrete mixes of grade greater than C60

Jun 2007
In the second column,
replace : C30
with : C35

Jun 2007
In line 5 of the second paragraph,
replace : class 1 and class 2

with : groups a) and b)
In line 6 of the second paragraph,
replace : class 3
with : group c)
- 12 -
Revised text

Jun 2007
In the third column,
replace : C30
with : C35

Jun 2007
Replace the second bullet point (including the Note) with the following :
z the design stresses in the concrete in compression are derived either from the
stress-strain curve given in figure 3.8 or from the simplified stress block given in
figure 6.1, with γm = 1.5 in both cases;
AMD 1 Equations 12.2 and 12.3 (page 168)

Jun 2007
Replace the existing equations with the following:
70000λ1 ⎛ f A ⎞
f pb = f pe + ⎜⎜1 − 0.7λ2 pu ps ⎟⎟ 12.2
l
d ⎝
f cu bd ⎠
⎡⎛ f pu Aps ⎞⎛ f pb ⎞ ⎤
x = λ2 ⎢⎜⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟d ⎥ 12.3
⎣⎢⎝ f cubd ⎟⎠⎜⎝ f pu ⎟⎠ ⎦⎥
where λ1 = 1 for fcu ≤60 N/mm2, or 1 − 0.017 f cu − 60 for fcu >60N/mm2, and
λ2 = 2.58 for fcu ≤45 N/mm2, 2.78 for 45 < fcu ≤ 70 N/mm2, or 3.09 for 70 < fcu ≤
100 N/mm2’.

Jun 2007
In the second column,
replace : 30 N/mm2
with : 35 N/mm2

Jun 2007
In the caption,
replace : where Vr = 0.4fcubvd for fcu≤40N/mm2 or 0.4(fcu/40)2/3bvd for fcu>40N/mm2.

with : where Vr = vr bvd and vr is as defined in Table 6.2.
- 13 -
Revised text

Jun 2007
Asv Vr
= 12.7
sv 0.87 f yv d
AMD 1 ANNEX A
Jun 2007
In the first paragraph,
replace : the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete (Limit State
Approach)
with : this Code of Practice
AMD 1 ANNEX A
Jun 2007
Delete the second bullet point, i.e. ‘․Hong Kong Code of Practice for Dead and
Imposed Loads for Buildings’
(6/2007)
- 14 -
Quality Control and Supervision of Precast Concrete Construction
Introduction
In recent years, the use of precast concrete in private building developments

in Hong Kong has increased. To ensure that the precast concrete elements are of good
quality, proper supervision and adequate quality control are necessary during the
production, erection and inspection processes of the concrete elements. This practice
note sets out the requirements for the quality control and supervision of key precast
concrete elements not fabricated on the building site. The requirements stipulated in this
practice note do not apply to minor elements such as non-structural precast concrete
block work, architectural features and planters.
Duties of the Authorized Person, Registered Structural Engineer and Registered

Contractor
2. The Authorized Person (AP), Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) and

Registered Contractor (RC) have the responsibilities under the Buildings Ordinance
(BO) to ensure that the precast concrete works comply with the provisions and standards
of the BO and the approved plans. In accordance with Section 4(3)(a) of the BO and
Regulation 37 of the Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R), adequate
supervision has to be provided by the AP and RSE for the carrying out of the precast
concrete works, whereas the RC has to provide continuous supervision, as required under
Section 9(5)(a) and 9(6)(a) of the BO and Regulation 41 of the B(A)R, for the carrying
out of such works.
Quality Assurance
3. Under item 6 in Section 17(1) of the BO, I shall impose the condition, when
giving approval of plans, that precast concrete elements should be manufactured by a
factory with ISO 9000 quality assurance certification.
4. Under Regulation 10 of the B(A)R, I shall require a copy of the Quality

Assurance Scheme of the manufacturer to be submitted prior to the application for
consent to the commencement of the works. Such submission should be appended with a
statement signed by the RSE to confirm that the scheme has adequate provisions in
ensuring the quality of production complying with the provisions of the BO and the
approved plans.
5. The Quality Assurance Scheme should cover the following items:
(a) Quality control tests of materials;
(b) Calibration of laboratory equipment for quality control

tests;
/(c) …..
-2-
(c) Efficiency and proper operation of equipment at the casting

yard;
(d) Production process;
(e) Testing procedures and requirements;
(f) Frequency and extent of inspection by in-house staff and

independent parties; and
(g) Frequency and extent of audit by in-house staff and

independent parties.
Qualified Supervision
6. Under item 6 in Section 17(1) of the BO, I shall also impose the condition,
when giving approval of plans, that qualified supervision should be provided by the RSE
and the RC for the fabrication, erection and examination of precast concrete elements.
7. The RSE should assign a structural quality control supervisor to supervise

the precast concrete production works. The RSE should determine the necessary
frequency of supervision, which should be no less than once a week. The minimum
qualifications and experience of the quality control supervisor are to be the same as grade
T3 technically competent person (TCP) under the RSE’s stream, as stipulated in the
Code of Practice for Site Supervision.
8. The RC should assign a quality control co-ordinator to provide continuous

supervision of the precast concrete production works in the factory. The minimum
qualifications and experience of the quality control co-ordinator are to be the same as
grade T3 TCP under the RC’s stream, as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Site
Supervision.
9. The names and qualifications of the supervisory personnel assigned by the

RSE and RC respectively should be recorded in an inspection log book. The details of
precast concrete production, inspection, auditing and testing should be recorded in the
log book by the supervisory personnel. The log book should be kept in the factory and a
copy of it should be kept at the building site office and, when required, produced to
officers of the Buildings Department for inspection.
10. In addition, the RSE and the Authorized Signatory (AS) of the RC should
inspect and carry out audit checks to the factory at least once every month. The AS
should submit the audit report to the RSE for endorsement and onward submission to the
Buildings Department together with his/her own audit report for record purpose.
11. For good practices in the design, construction and quality control of precast
concrete works, reference should be made to the recommendations and guidelines given
in the Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction issued by the Buildings
Department.
/Separate …..
-3-
12. For precast concrete elements not affecting the stability of the parent
structure, such as the precast concrete façade or staircase, a separate RSE may be
appointed to prepare the design and to supervise the production and erection of such
precast concrete elements. In such situation, the specified Forms BA4 and BA5 notifying
the appointment of a separate RSE and the scope of works for which he/she is
responsible are required to be submitted together with the plans for approval. The project
RSE shall also notify the Building Authority in writing that he/she is fully aware of the
appointment of a separate RSE and the demarcation of responsibilities. Upon completion
of the precast concrete construction works, the separate RSE so appointed is required to
certify the satisfactory completion of the works in accordance with Regulation 25(3) of
the B(A)R.
13. The separate RSE’s submission should be accompanied by an assessment

report prepared by him/her giving an account of the effect of the proposed precast
concrete works on the parent structure. The assessment report shall be appended with a
statement of the project RSE to confirm that he/she is fully aware of the connection
details and their effects on the parent structure.
14. The separate RSE shall be responsible for the supervision of the production
and erection of the precast concrete elements, including the connection between the
precast concrete elements and the parent structure, i.e. ties, anchor plates, cast-in embeds
etc., except in the event where such associated works have been installed in the parent
structure prior to his/her appointment. For such cases, the structural details and layout of
the pre-installed parts should be given in the superstructure plans submitted for approval
by the project RSE who shall then be responsible for the supervision of the installation of
such parts. The separate RSE should refer to the pre-installed connection details when
designing the precast concrete elements and should co-ordinate with the project RSE for
any necessary amendment if different connection details are to be used.
15. The separate RSE shall ensure that the conditions and requirements of the
quality assurance and qualified supervision as stipulated in paragraphs 3 to 5 and 6 to 10
above respectively are complied with. He/she shall also be responsible for the
submission of the documents required in paragraph 4 above.
16. A similar practice note is issued to registered contractors.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-125/54

First issue August 2006 (AD/NB2)
This revision April 2010 (AD/NB2) (Paragraphs. 2, 4 & 11 amended & 12 to 15 added)

Design and Construction of Run-in and Run-out on Public Road
Where vehicular ingress and egress points are allowed under the lease,
the developer is normally required to construct the run-in and run-out in accordance
with the lease conditions. As part of the effort to simplify the lease conditions for
new leases, it is proposed to replace the special condition on the construction of run-in
and run-out by a self-certification system.
2. This practice note provides guidelines on the design and construction

standards for run-in and run-out and advice on the proposed self-certification system.
3. Where the adjoining footpath is constructed of concrete, the run-in and

run-out should also be constructed with concrete.
4. If the adjoining footpath is constructed with paver blocks, then paver

blocks should be used for the construction of the run-in and run-out. In such cases, a
visual contrast and/or a change in pattern between the paver blocks of the run-in and
run-out and the adjoining footpath should be established. Care should be taken to
ensure that the design and construction are appropriate in terms of safety and
convenience to vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
5. The standard of design and construction of run-in and run-out shall

comply with the specifications and standards set out in Appendix A. Updates of these
standard drawings will be posted in the home page of the Highways Department (HyD).
(http://www.hyd.gov.hk) Upon completion of construction of the run-in and run-out,
the authorized person (AP) should ensure that the adjoining footpath or pavement is
made good accordingly.
Damage to Pavement
6. Saw-cut method shall be used for the construction of run-in and run-out
in order to avoid damage to adjoining pavements.
7. Any damage to pavement by the construction activities outside the area

of run-in and run-out shall be re-instated and made good after obtaining a separate
Excavation Permit from the HyD.
/Procedures …..
-2-
Procedures for Construction of Run-in and Run-out
8. The AP should check with the relevant authorities for the utility
services underneath the proposed run-in and run-out to ensure that the construction
work will not cause any adverse impact on the underground services. In this regard,
the AP should co-ordinate with the utilities undertakings for the diversion of utilities
as necessary. The design details of the run-in and run-out should be incorporated in
the general building plans for circulation to the HyD for comment. APs are reminded
to make early arrangement for any necessary utilities diversion and the acquisition of
the necessary Excavation Permit from the HyD for the required works. Where the
construction of the run-in and run-out is completed prior to the submission of an
application for an occupation permit, a Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in
and Run-out as shown in Appendix B should be submitted to the Buildings Department
(BD). APs are encouraged to complete and certify the run-in and run-out well in
advance of the application for an occupation permit.
Certification of Completion of Run-in and Run-out supervised by AP
9. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and

Run-out or upon the submission of an application for occupation permit, BD will
notify the HyD who will then arrange for inspection and taking-over of the run-in and
run-out. Any defects identified by the HyD will be brought to the attention of BD
who will inform the AP for rectification accordingly. In the event that the HyD raises
objection to accept the works on the grounds of defects identified, this may constitute
a ground for refusal of the application for an occupation permit under section 21(6)(a)
of the Buildings Ordinance.
Works Undertaken by Highways Department
10. In cases where the HyD has agreed to construct the run-in and run-out
on behalf of the owner, the AP should submit to BD the entrustment letter together
with a copy of the demand note receipt in respect of the payment of the required fees.
Upon receipt of the information and provided that a temporary run-in and run-out is
constructed to a manner that it does not pose any danger to the public or any
inconvenience to vehicular or pedestrian traffic using the run-in and run-out, BD may
process an application for an occupation permit before the construction of the
permanent run-in and run-out is completed.
11. Under the Helping Business Scheme, all APs are encouraged to
construct the permanent run-in and run-out with their own resources to suit their tight
programme. HyD has expressed that their resources are fully stretched and may not
be able to undertake any such works for the APs.
12. This practice note will come into operation on 1 January 2007.
/13. …..
-3-
13. A similar practice note has been issued to the Registered Contractors.
( CHEUNG Hau-wai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-55/3/0
First issue September 2006 (AD/NB1)
Index under : Vehicular Run-in and Run-out

Run-in
Run-out
Appendix A
PNAP 300
APP-144
Standard of Design and Construction of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out
1. The following design and construction standard requirements are acceptable

to the Highways Department (HyD).
2. General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS) published by the

Government of the HKSAR, in particular Section 9 on carriageways: sub-base
material and bituminous materials, Section 10 on concrete carriageways, and Section
11, Parts 5 to 7 on construction of footways and paved areas; and any relevant
corrigendum as may be issued from time to time.
Concrete Run-in and Run-out
3. The latest version of HyD’s Standard Drawings, in particular drawing nos.

H1113, H1114, H1115 and H1116 (Annex 1).
4. Specification Clauses 6.68, 9.44 and 16.58-16.62 of GS.
Paver Blocks Run-in and Run-out
5. The latest version of HyD’s Standard Drawings, in particular drawing nos.

H1103, H5101, H5102, H5114, H5115 and H5116 (Annex 2).
6. An authorized person (AP) should obtain such laboratory test certificates or

such information from the registered contractors.
7. The colour of pavers shall be as specified by the AP to achieve a visual

contrast and/or a change in pattern between the paver blocks and the adjoining
footpath.
8. The design and construction of paver blocks shall be in accordance with the
latest requirements of the HyD. The AP shall obtain information about these
requirements from the Publications and Press Release Section of HyD’s homepage
(http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/index.htm) and incorporate them onto the general
building plans at building plan submission stage.
Protection of Underground Utilities
9. Please refer to HyD Technical Circular No. 3/90 or any updated version
regarding the minimum ground cover requirement to facilitate protection of
underground facilities.
(9/2006)
Appendix B
PNAP 300
APP-144
Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out
BD Ref.: Date : ________________
Re:___________________________________________
(Address of Development Site)
To Building Authority,
Part A (to be certified by Authorized Person)
I (name in full) _______________________, authorized person,

confirm that the vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) as indicated on the attached Block
Plan showing its/their location at the captioned development site has/have been
completed in accordance with the approved plans and complies/comply with the
requirements stipulated in PNAP 300.
2.* The above vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) are ready for handing-over
to the Highways Department.
_________________________
Certificate of Registration No.: ___________________________
Date of expiry of registration : ___________________________
* Delete if not applicable
-1-
Part B (to be certified by Registered Contractor)
3. *I/We (name in full) ________________________________________,

* registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the **
________________________ category, hereby confirm that the vehicular run-in(s)
and run-out(s) as indicated on the attached Block Plan showing its/their location at the
captioned development site has/have been completed in accordance with the approved
plans and complies/comply with the requirements stipulated in PNRC 65.
Name of the person

appointed to act for the
Registered Contractor for
the above works
Signature
* Delete if not applicable

** Enter the name of the sub register for the category of specialized works
c.c. Highways Department (Ref.: ) with a copy of Block Plan
(9/2006)
-2-
APP-144
APP-144

Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance, Cap. 572
Introduction
The Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance (the “FS(B)O”) came into

operation on 1 July 2007. The purpose of the FS(B)O is to provide better protection
from the risk of fire for occupants and users of, and visitors to, certain kinds of
composite buildings and domestic buildings (target buildings) by upgrading the
buildings to current fire safety standards. Owners/occupiers of such buildings are
required to improve the fire safety measures which include fire service installations
and equipment as well as fire safety construction of the building.
Application
2. The FS(B)O applies to a composite building or domestic building if:
(a) it was constructed, or intended to be used

(i) partly for domestic purposes and partly for
non-domestic purposes; or
(ii) for domestic purposes with more than 3 storeys;
AND
(b) the plans of its building works was first submitted to the
Building Authority for his approval on or before 1 March 1987;
or
(c) constructed on or before 1 March 1987 where no plans of its

building works were submitted on or before that date to the
Building Authority for approval.
3. A “Domestic building” includes ancillary club house, carpark and

recreation facilities that are provided for the exclusive use of residents of the building
and persons invited to use them by such residents.
4. “Domestic purposes” in respect of a composite building or domestic

building means use for human habitation, but does not include a building or part of a
building that is used for a hotel, guesthouse, home for the elderly, child care centre or
nursery.
5. “Composite building” means a building that is constructed, or intended

to be used, partly for domestic purposes and partly for non-domestic purposes but
excludes a building where the part intended for non-domestic purposes consists wholly
of a factory or industrial undertaking, godown, warehouse or place of bulk storage.
/6. ..…
-2-
6. The Ordinance does not apply to buildings constructed in accordance

with the Buildings Ordinance (Application to the New Territories) Ordinance (Cap.
121).
Fire Safety Measures
7. Depending on the use of a target building or part of the building,

owners/occupiers may need to provide all or any of the following fire safety measures
to current standards:
(a) Fire safety construction requirements for the provision of:
(i) adequate means of escape for the building in the event of

fire;
(ii) adequate means of access to the building to facilitate
access for firefighting and rescue;
(iii) measures to inhibit the spread of fire and to ensure the
integrity of the structure of the building.
(b) Fire service installations and equipment requirements for the

provision of:
(i) automatic sprinkler system;

(ii) automatic cut-off devices for a mechanical ventilating
system;
(iii) emergency lighting;
(iv) manual fire alarms;
(v) fire hydrant and hose reel system;
(vi) the requirements specified in the Code of Practice for
Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment 1994.
Fire Safety Construction
8. In relation to fire safety construction requirements mentioned in

paragraph 7(a) above, the scope of requirements is listed in Schedule 1 of the FS(B)O
for the non-domestic parts of a target composite building and Schedule 2 therein for a
target domestic building or the domestic parts of a target composite building. The
corresponding detailed requirements are set out in the following codes of practice:
• the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape

in Case of Fire 1996.
• the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996;
and
• the Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting
and Rescue 1995.
/Enforcement …..
-3-
Enforcement Authority
9. For the purpose of the FS(B)O:
(a) the Director of Buildings is the enforcement authority for the

provision of fire safety measures in the planning, design and
construction of the building; and
(b) the Director of Fire Services is the enforcement authority for

the provision of fire service installations or equipment in the
building.
Fire Safety Section
10. The Fire Safety Section headed by the Chief Building Surveyor/Fire
Safety is set up in the Buildings Department to administer the FS(B)O in respect of the
fire safety construction requirements.
Directions and Orders
11. Under section 5(1) or 5(2) of the FS(B)O, the Director of Buildings
may serve on the owner of a target building or part of a target building a fire safety
direction (FSDn) directing him to comply with all or any of the requirements in
respect of fire safety construction specified in Schedule 1 or 2 of the FS(B)O.
12. Upon conviction of the offence of failure to comply with a FSDn, the
Director of Buildings may, under section 6(1) of the FS(B)O, apply to a magistrate to
make a fire safety compliance order directing the owner to comply with all or any of
the requirements specified in the FSDn to which the offence is related.
Difficulties in Complying with Fire Safety Construction Requirements
13. Under section 5(1) and 5(2) of the FS(B)O, if the relevant enforcement
authority considers that it would not be reasonable for the owner to comply with a
particular fire safety requirement as specified under paragraph 8 above, having regard
to the structural integrity of building and the technology available to comply with such
requirement, he may direct the compliance of other alternative requirements as
appropriate. In cases of genuine difficulties, the Director of Buildings is prepared to
consider owners’ alternative improvement measures based on fire safety engineering
principles, which will equally achieve the primary objectives of the FS(B)O.
Submission of Plans for Approval
14. Where non-exempted building works are proposed either to voluntarily

comply with the FS(B)O or to satisfy the requirements of a FSDn, an application for
approval under the Buildings Ordinance should be made in the usual manner.
/However, …..
-4-
However, for such applications, three instead of two sets of plans showing fire
service installations and equipment are required by the Fire Services Department for
processing.
15. No fee will be charged under the Building (Administration) Regulation

42 if the proposals are entirely for improving the fire safety measures of the existing
building pursuant to the requirements of a FSDn.
( H W CHEUNG )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD FS/OA/165
First issue October 2007 (AD/EB2)
Index under : Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance

Target Composite Building
Fire Safety Direction

Large Metal Gates
The installation of metal gates in buildings is primarily for security

purpose. Recent incidents of collapse of large metal gates have aroused serious safety
concern. Not only proper design can ensure the safety of large metal gates, correct
installation, proper use and regular maintenance are also important. This practice note
provides guidelines on design and installation of large metal gates at fence walls or
entrance of building.
2. Metal gates are building works as defined under the Buildings

Ordinance, whether they be manually or electrically operated. For new buildings,
metal gates should be shown on the building plans submitted for prior approval and
consent by the Building Authority. For large metal gates with a height exceeding 2.2m
and the weight of any gate leaf exceeding 300 Kg, plans showing structural details of
the metal gates including design calculations are also required to be submitted for
approval. For the installation of new metal gates in existing buildings, if the height of
the metal gate exceeds 2.2m and the weight of any gate leaf exceeds 300 Kg, both
building and structural plans are required to be submitted for approval prior to
installation.
Design and Installation Requirements
3. In general, all metal gates should be constructed of suitable materials

and satisfy the performance requirements stipulated in the Building (Construction)
Regulation 3. They should be properly designed and constructed in accordance with
recognized standards to ensure their satisfactory and safe operation under the expected
conditions of use. All parts of the metal gate installations, whether fixed or movable,
including the fixings, should in all respects be of sound construction, adequate
strength and free from obvious defects for their intended working life.
4. The installation of large metal gates should be under the qualified

supervision of a registered general building contractor to ensure that the works are
carried out in accordance with the approved plans and the required standards are
complied with. Upon completion of installation, the metal gate should be inspected
and trial operated to ensure that it has been properly installed.
/5. …..
-2-
5. Where submission of structural details of metal gate is required, special

attention should be paid to the following:
(a) design wind load should be in accordance with the appropriate

provisions in the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong
2004;
(b) details and design for the elements of the gate framework, post
support and foundation should be given to demonstrate the stability
of the metal gate during operation;
(c) design of connection to fix the gate framework to the surrounding

structure and the design check on the supporting structure should
be provided;
(d) for swing-type metal gate, details of hinge pin fittings to permit
pivotal movement should be given;
(e) for sliding metal gate, details of end stoppers to prevent the metal
gate from over-travel at both ends should be shown; similar
provisions should be made for multi-passing metal gate which also
serve as connection between gate leaves;
(f) additional measures should be provided to stop the metal gate from
being lifted off or derailment during operation; and
(g) details of decorative parts of the metal gate need not be submitted.
Additional Measures and Reference Standards
6. Recommendations on additional measures and design considerations for

enhancing the safety of metal gates are given in Appendix A. Some relevant
standards/specifications for the design and installation of metal gates are given in
Appendix B. Authorized Person (AP) and Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) may
also make reference to other international or national standards and specifications if
equivalent performance can be demonstrated.
Tests on Anchors
7. Where drilled-in anchors are proposed to secure the stability of metal

gate, at least 5 numbers of each type and size of the anchors installed should be tested
by pull-out test to demonstrate that its pull-out capacity is not less than 1.5 times the
recommended tensile load as specified by the anchor manufacturer. The tested anchor
should be considered satisfactory if it does not show any signs of separation, plastic
deformation or deleterious effect during the test. Such tests should be carried out
under the direction of the AP/RSE.
/Electrically…..
-3-
Electrically Operated Metal Gates
8. For electrically operated metal gates, reference should also be made to

the "Code of Practice for Installation of Electrically Operated Sliding Gates, Sliding
Glass Doors and Rolling Shutters" published by the Director of Electrical and
Mechanical Services.
Guidelines for Registered Contractors
9. A similar practice note is issued to Registered Contractors.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref.: BD GP/BORD/108 (II)
First issue: December 2008 (AD/NB1 & AD/NB2)
Index under: Large Metal Gates

Appendix A
(PNAP 304)
(APP-146)
Recommendations for Enhancing the Safety of Metal Gates
Swing-Type Metal Gate
1. All hinge fittings of a swing-type metal gate should be welded all round
to the gate framework and should be able to withstand the dead weight of the metal
gate and wind loads during normal operation.
2. A minimum of 3 hinges should be provided for the connection between

the metal gate and each supporting post. To prevent the metal gate being lifted off
from its hinges after installation, measures such as installing one of the hinge fittings
with the hinge pin pointing in a reverse direction should be incorporated for providing
restraint against vertical movement.
Sliding Metal Gate
3. The gate leaf as well as any other moving parts of a sliding metal gate
should be designed and constructed in such a way as to prevent them from falling
down, collapsing or derailment during normal operation or in case of contact with
stationary obstacles. Proper design and provisions of guide and metal gate stopper of
adequate size and strength are required to maintain lateral stability of the metal gate
and to resist the imposed loads and impact force.
Folding Metal Gate
4. Paragraphs 1 to 3 above are applicable to a folding metal gate with two

or more hinged leaves, guided and/or supported at the top or at the bottom. Similar
provisions for preventing the gate leaf from being lifted off should be made for the
hanging fittings connecting the hinged leaves.
Installation and Use
5. Before installation, all members and components of the metal gate

should be visually inspected to ensure that they are free from visual defects and
comply with the approved structural details.
/Maintenance…..
-1-
Maintenance and Repair
6. All parts of the metal gate providing mechanical resistance and

connection, whether fixed or movable, are subject to normal deterioration of wear and
tear. Regular inspection and maintenance should be provided to safeguard the metal
gate from disengagement or derailment.
7. The AP should coordinate with the Registered Contractor to prepare

documentation on the safe operation and maintenance of the metal gate installed, for
regular maintenance and repair to be arranged by the Incorporated
Owners/management company. Routine inspection and maintenance work such as
cleaning of dirt and obstacles from the track and guide rail, and application of
lubrication to enable smooth movement of the metal gate should be carried out every
three months.
(12/2008)
-2-
Appendix B
(PNAP 304)
(APP-146)
Relevant Standards and Specifications for Metal Gates
The various standards, specifications for the design and installation of

metal gates as listed below are intended to provide reference information and the lists
are not exhaustive. Other international or national standards and specifications may
also be referred to if equivalent performance can be demonstrated.
BS 4092:Part 1:1996 : Domestic front entrance gates –

Specification for metal gates
BS EN 12433-1:2000 : Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates –
Terminology – Part 1: Types of doors
Terminology – Part 2: Parts of doors
BS EN 12604:2000 : Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates –
Mechanical aspects – Requirements
Mechanical aspects - Test methods
Installation and use
Product Standard – Part 1: Products without fire
resistance or smoke control characteristics
BS EN 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles - Specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 12944 -1 to Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel
8:1998 structures by protective paint systems
BS EN ISO 14713: 1999 Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures
- Zinc and aluminium coatings - Guidelines
BS EN 1176-1:1998 Playground equipment- Part 1: General safety
requirements and test methods
(12/2008)
Minor Works Control System
Implementation
The Buildings Ordinance (“BO”) has been amended by the Buildings

(Amendment) Ordinance 2008 and a set of new regulations, the Building (Minor Works)
Regulation [“B(MW)R”] has been made to introduce a new system, the Minor Works
Control System (“MWCS”) to control the carrying out of minor works. Apart from the
old system under which prior approval and consent of the Building Authority (“BA”)
have to be sought for carrying out building works, a set of prescribed requirements that
are simpler than the old system has been added to the BO by the above Amendment
Ordinance and new regulations. The MWCS comes into operation on 31 December 2010.
Classification of Minor Works
2. A new category of building works, namely “minor works”, and a new

register of “registered minor works contractors” (“RMWCs”) for carrying out such
minor works, have been introduced under the BO. In respect of minor works, the
requirement to seek BA’s prior approval for building plans and consent to commence
the works can be dispensed with. Minor works are classified into three classes
according to their nature, scale and complexity as well as the risk to safety they pose:
(a) Class I minor works are relatively more complicated minor works,
e.g. installation of internal staircases connecting two floors;
(b) Class II minor works are comparatively less complex works, e.g.
repair of external walls; and
(c) Class III minor works cover small-scale minor works, mostly carried
out in household settings, e.g. erection of supporting frames for air-
conditioners.
3. The various items of minor works are described in Schedule 1 of the

B(MW)R.
/The …..
-2-
The Simplified Requirements
4. As an alternative to obtaining prior approval and consent from the BA, minor
works can be carried out under the simplified requirements of the MWCS, the
requirements of which are tabulated as follows for reference:
Minor works
involved Class I Class II Class III
Requirements
Appointment  PBP to design and
(of the Appointed supervise the  PRC to prepare and submit the plans
Person) works; and and documents, to supervise and carry
 PRC to carry out out the works
the works
Submission AP PRC PRC
 Notice and
 Notice of Commencement of Works; and Certificate of
 Certificate of Completion of Works Completion of
Works
PBP : Prescribed Building Professionals – an Authorized Person (AP), [if necessary, and a
Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) and/or a Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE)]
PRC : Prescribed Registered Contractor – Registered General Building Contractor (RGBC),
Registered Specialist Contractor (RSC) or Registered Minor Works Contractor (RMWC)
5. The workflow of the simplified requirements and the documents required to

______ be submitted are summarized in Appendix A.
6. Some requirements and general guidance to streamline and expedite the

______ processing of submissions are provided in Appendix B. The specified forms and
______
standard forms for use under the simplified requirements are listed in Appendix C.
General Reminders
7. Under section 55 of the B(MW)R, the AP appointed in respect of any Class I

minor works is required to provide a copy of the prescribed plans, details of the works and
supervision plan (as required) submitted under the simplified requirements to the PRC for
their keeping on site. The AP shall also remind the PRC to keep a copy of the Buildings
Department’s acknowledgement letter for the “Notice of Commencement of Works” on
site for inspection by officers of the Buildings Department (BD).
8. If the minor works involve common parts of a building, the AP should

remind “the person who arranged for the works to be carried out” to pay attention to the
civil liabilities under the deed of mutual covenant of the building. The AP should also
notify the management office concerned, the Incorporated Owners or the related owner(s)
about the minor works to be carried out.
/9. …..
-3-
9. The AP should remind the PRC to take appropriate measures to ensure the
proper disposal of construction waste.
10. Where a supervision plan is required, the PBP and PRC are reminded to
comply with the requirements under the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans
(TM) and the Code of Practice for Site Supervision.
11. When the AP, RSE or RGE ceases to be appointed or nominated as the PBP
in respect of any Class I minor works, he should submit the standard form to notify the BA
within 7 days after the date of the cessation. When the PRC ceases to be appointed in
respect of any Class I minor works, he should deliver the specified form to the AP within
7 days after the date of the cessation. The AP should submit the form to the BA within 7
days after the date of receipt of such form.
Minor Works Relating to Signboards
12. In order to facilitate the distinction of the signboards erected or altered under
the simplified requirements from those unauthorized signboards, it is recommended that
the minor works submission numbers be displayed on the signboards erected or altered
under the simplified requirements. Standards and guidelines on display of these numbers
______
are provided in Appendix D. Similar arrangement is also recommended for those
signboards which have been erected or altered with prior approval and consent from the
BA as set out in PNAP APP-126.
Minor Works Relating to Radio Base Station, Antenna or Transceiver on Roof
13. For minor works relating to radio base station, antenna or transceiver on
______
roof, the AP and RSE should make reference to Appendix E for more details.
Inspection and Certification of Prescribed Building or Building Works (commonly

known as “Household Minor Works Validation Scheme”)
14. It is recognized that some unauthorized minor amenity structures may have
been erected to meet practical household needs before the full implementation of the
MWCS on 31 December 2010. They include metal supporting frames for air-conditioning
units or water cooling towers, drying racks and small canopies. They are known as the
prescribed building or building works (PB/BW), which are described in Schedule 3 of the
B(MW)R. Under the new section 39C of the BO and section 62 of the B(MW)R, an AP,
RSE, RGBC or RMWC1 can be appointed to inspect and certify that the PB/BW are
structurally safe and comply with the BO2. Upon certification, no enforcement action will
be taken against the three types of minor unauthorized structures unless their safety
conditions change. Alteration and/or strengthening works may be carried out before such
minor structures can be certified.
/15. …..
_________________________________
Note 1 RMWCs who are registered for type A minor works, type E minor works or item 3.25,
3.27, 3.28, 3.29, 3.34, 3.35, 3.36, 3.37 or 3.38 of Class III minor works
Note 2 Except BO section 14(1) and Building (Administration) Regulation 25
-4-
15. A flow chart showing the steps of processing the submissions and the
documents required to be submitted under the “Household Minor Works Validation
______
Scheme” are provided in Appendix A.
No Referral of Plans
16. Unlike the “centralized processing of building plans”, the documents

submitted to the BD for the carrying out of minor works under the simplified requirements
and for the inspection and certification of PB/BW will not be referred to other government
departments. If the proposed minor works involves the jurisdictions of other government
departments, the AP or PRC should consult and obtain necessary approval or consent from
the relevant government departments accordingly.
No Submission Fee Required
17. All submissions under the simplified requirements and for the inspection and
certification of PB/BW are free of charge.
Technical Guidelines on Minor Works Control System
18. The “Technical Guidelines on Minor Works Control System” has been
published by the BD, providing detailed guidance on compliance with the simplified
requirements to the registered contractors and practitioners in the building industry. These
Guidelines are available at the BD’s website (http://www.bd.gov.hk) under the “Codes of
Practice and Design Manuals” page of the “Publication” section.
19. A similar practice note is issued to all Registered Contractors.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
First issue December 2010 (AD/Sup)

Appendix A
(PNAP APP-147)
Administrative Procedures for Processing Minor Works Submissions and the

Inspection and Certification of Prescribed Building or Building Works
Processing of Minor Works Submissions
1. General steps of processing the minor works submissions are as follows:
Appointed person Submit required Submit supplementary

documents information
Building Authority Check the proposed No Require supplementary No

works are all minor
information?
works?
Yes Yes
Sufficient time for the

appointed person to No
provide supplementary
information?
Yes
Advise / Issue a letter to

Issue an Advise / Issue a letter
the appointed person to
acknowledgement to the appointed person
advise that the
letter to the to request for further
submission was not
appointed person information
processed with reasons
Copy the letter to the person who arranged for the works to be carried out
Notes:
(i) A unique submission number, for example, MW101200001, will be issued with the
acknowledgement letter mentioned above. The submission number assigned is the
identification for the whole submission, which should be used in all future
correspondence; and
(ii) The PBP is required to keep all relevant documents, such as records of site
supervision, structural calculations, test reports and certificates, etc. and provide to
the BA when required. Section 56 of the B(MW)R refers.
/Documents…..
-1-
Documents Required to be Submitted
Notice of Commencement of Works

(a) specified form* ;
(b) photographs;
(c) coloured prescribed plans and details of the works;
(d) supervision plan as required by the TM (for Class I only); and
Classes I & (e) other relevant documents1 (if any)
II Certificate of Completion of Works
(b) photographs;
(c) revised coloured prescribed plans and details of the works showing
the minor deviations (if any, refer to paragraph 2 for details); and
(d) other relevant documents2 (if any)
Notice and Certificate of Completion of Works
Class III (b) photographs;
(c) coloured plans or description of works; and
(d) other relevant documents2 (if any)
* The specified forms are listed in both Appendix A to PNAP APP-60 and Appendix C to
this PNAP.
Note 1 e.g. geotechnical assessment, ground investigation report, structural calculations, test
reports and certificates, etc.
Note 2 e.g. schedule of building materials and products, test reports and certificates, etc.
Minor Deviations of Completed Minor Works and Additional Minor Works Items
2. After receiving the BD’s acknowledgement letter for the “Notice of

Commencement of Works”, there may be a need for the appointed person to slightly
amend his proposal to suit the actual site situation. If the minor deviations from the
submitted prescribed plans and details of the works do not affect the original design
assumptions and still tally with the descriptions (including reduction in quantity) of the
submitted minor works items, the appointed person may submit the revised plans and
details with the “Certificate of Completion of Works” after completion of the works.
3. However, if the change affects the original design assumptions; or does not tally
with the descriptions (including increase in quantity) of the submitted minor works items;
or involves additional minor works items, a new “Notice of Commencement of Works”
should be submitted to the BA not less than 7 days before commencement of the works.
To simplify the submission, the specified form for additional minor works items can be
used to incorporate the additional items into the same submission. Other than the
specified form, the documents required to be submitted are similar to those submitted with
the “Notice of Commencement of Works”, and all the proposed minor works (including
the additional minor works items) should be coloured on the revised prescribed plans and
details, with those additional items delineated for easy identification.
/Processsing…..
-2-
Processing of the Inspection and Certification of Prescribed Building or Building
Works (PB/BW)
4. The following flow chart shows the steps of processing the submissions for the
inspection and certification of PB/BW and the documents required to be submitted:
Person who arranged for Appoint building professional / Appoint PRC to carry out alteration /
the inspection to be registered contractor to inspect strengthening works to the structures
carried out the minor structures under the simplified requirements
Appointed person Advise “the person who arranged for

the inspection to be carried out” that
the scheme is not applicable
Carry out inspection to confirm
if the structures are PB/BW
No If the structures are non-concrete No
canopies projecting ≤ 750mm
Yes Yes
The PB/BW inspected are No Alteration / strengthening works to No

structurally safe the structures are feasible
Yes Yes
Within 14 days after completion of

the inspection (if alteration / Advise “the person who arranged for
strengthening works are involved, the inspection to be carried out”
within 14 days after completion of to arrange alteration / strengthening
such minor works), works to the structures by PRC
under the simplified requirements,
submit the specified form before re-inspection
(Form MW06) to the BA,
with photographs and description

showing the physical condition of the
PB/BW as inspected, and colour plans
or description of minor works (if any),
to certify that the PB/BW are

structurally safe & comply with the BO3
Building Authority After verification of the

key information provided, issue an
acknowledgement letter
Note 3 Except BO section 14(1) and Building (Administration) Regulation 25
Minor Amendments to the Submitted Specified Forms, Plans and Documents
5. The administrative procedures mentioned in PNAP ADM-14 are not applicable to

the submissions of minor works and the inspection and certification of PB/BW. However,
minor amendments by the PBP or PRC on the submitted specified forms, plans and other
documents may be arranged at the BD depending on the circumstances of individual cases.
(12/2010)
-3-
Appendix B
(PNAP APP-147)
Requirements and Guidelines for Plans and Documents

Submitted under the Minor Works Control System
To facilitate the processing of plans and documents submitted, the

following requirements and guidelines should be met:
1. Every plan and section of minor works must be drawn to a ratio of not less than
1:100. Every block plan must be drawn to a ratio of not less than 1:500, B(MW)R
section 38 refers.
2. Photographs to be submitted should clearly show the physical conditions of the

premises immediately before the commencement and after the completion of minor
works, B(MW)R sections 30(b), 31(b), 32(b), 33(b), 34(b), 35(b) and 36(c) refer.
These photographs should be taken from the same angle to facilitate the processing
of the submission. A mark should be indicated on plans showing the angle of
photo-taking with photo numbers.
3. The AP should provide clearly the location and address of the minor works or the
prescribed building or building works on plans and documents. The address of the
premises shown on the “Demand for Rates and/or Government Rent” issued by the
Rating and Valuation Department is recommended.
4. All supplementary documents should be submitted with the standard form MW33.
5. Coloured plan with size of not larger than A3 size is recommended.
6. The PBP shall refer to paragraphs (1) – (3) in Appendix A of PNAP ADM-10 for
general guidelines on drawing standards, except that paragraph 3(i) is only
applicable to plan with size larger than A3 size.
* For effective communication, the PBP and PRC should ensure that their contact
information as recorded in the Registration Unit of the BD is correct and updated.
(12/2010)
Appendix C
(PNAP APP-147)
List of Specified Forms and Standard Forms under the

Minor Works Control System
The specified forms and standard forms for use under the Minor Works Control
System are listed in the following table. They can be downloaded from the website of
the Buildings Department (www.bd.gov.hk) or obtained from the Receipt and Despatch
Section of the Buildings Department’s headquarters at 12/F, Pioneer Centre, 750 Nathan
Road, Kowloon during office hours.
Specified Forms:
Issue/Revision
Form No. Title
Date
Notice of Commencement of Minor Works under the

MW01 Simplified Requirements (with Prescribed Building 12/2010
Professionals Appointed)
Certificate of Completion of Minor Works under the

MW02 Simplified Requirements (with Prescribed Building 12/2010
Professionals Appointed)
Notice of Commencement of Minor Works under the

MW03 Simplified Requirements (without Prescribed Building 12/2010
Professional Appointed)
Certificate of Completion of Minor Works under the

MW04 Simplified Requirements (without Prescribed Building 12/2010
Professional Appointed)
Notice and Certificate of Completion of Class III

MW05 12/2010
Minor Works under the Simplified Requirements
Notice of Inspection and Certification of Prescribed

MW06 12/2010
Building or Building Works
Notice of Change in Appointment of Prescribed

Building Professional other than Authorized Person or
MW07 12/2010
Prescribed Registered Contractor under the Simplified
Requirements
Notice of Change in Appointment of Authorized

MW08 12/2010
Person under the Simplified Requirements
/Specified…..
-1-
Specified Forms (cont’d):
Issue/Revision
Form No. Title
Date
Notice of Nomination by Prescribed Building

Professional Appointed of Another Prescribed
MW09 Building Professional to Act in His Place for the 12/2010
Period of Temporary Inability to Act under the
Simplified Requirements
Notice of Prescribed Registered Contractor on Ceasing

MW10 12/2010
to be Appointed under the Simplified Requirements
Notice of Commencement of Additional Minor Works

MW11 under the Simplified Requirements (with Prescribed 12/2010
Building Professionals Appointed)
Notice of Commencement of Additional Minor Works

MW12 under the Simplified Requirements (without Prescribed 12/2010
Building Professional Appointed)
Standard Forms:
Issue/Revision
Form No. Title
Date
Notice of Prescribed Building Professional on

MW31 Ceasing to be Appointed or Nominated under the 12/2010
Request for Submission Number for Class III Minor

MW32 Works Relating to the Erection or Alteration of 12/2010
Signboard under the Simplified Requirements
Submission of Supplementary Documents or

MW33 12/2010
Information under the Simplified Requirements
(12/2010)
-2-
Appendix D
(PNAP APP-147)
Standards and Guidelines on

Display of Minor Works Submission Number or
BD Reference Number on Signboards
Registered Minor Works Contractors and Registered General Building

Contractors are strongly recommended to display minor works submission numbers and
BD reference numbers on signboards erected or altered under the simplified requirements
and signboards erected or altered with prior approval and consent from the BA
respectively so as to distinguish them from unauthorized signboards. The standards and
guidelines for displaying such numbers are as follows:
1. The letters and digits should be in black colour with a white background in the
following cases:
(i) in case of a signboard erected under the simplified requirements, the minor
works submission number should be displayed, e.g. MW101212345;
(ii) in case of a signboard erected or altered with prior approval and consent
from the BA, the BD reference number should be displayed, e.g. BD
2/9876/10 or BD 2-3/9876/10(6); and
(iii) in case of any new works being carried out for alteration of the signboards
mentioned in (i) or (ii) above (excluding solely replacement of display
surfaces), the new number should be displayed. Any existing number
shown should be removed to avoid unnecessary confusion.
2. The letters and digits of minor works submission number should be in black colour
with a yellow background in case any minor works being carried out for alteration
or replacement of display surfaces of those existing signboards without authorization
or not being erected under the simplified requirements.
3. All letters should be in block capitals. All letters and digits should be minimum
35mm high and in the font style of “Arial” as shown below.
MW101212345 BD 2/9876/10
Min.
35mm
MW101254321 BD 2-3/9876/10(6)
Min.
35mm
/4. …..
-1-
4. The above number should be displayed on durable material securely affixed at a
conspicuous position on the signboard, in order to be seen at the following
suggested locations:
(i) the nearest pavement or pedestrian way, in case of a projecting signboard, a

signboard erected on/hung underneath the soffit of a balcony/canopy or a
signboard fixed on-grade;
(ii) the nearest or the opposite pavement or pedestrian way, in case of a wall
signboard; and
(iii) the main roof of the building, in case the signboard has been erected on the
roof of a building.
(12/2010)
-2-
Appendix E
(PNAP APP-147)
Minor Works Relating to Radio Base Station, Antenna or Transceiver on Roof
Items of minor works relating to radio base station (solely for

telecommunication services in the form of an equipment cabinet), antenna or transceiver
on roof include items 1.13, 1.14, 2.12, 3.8, 3.9 and 3.10, which may be carried out under
the simplified requirements. For detailed descriptions of the items, please refer to
Schedule 1 of the Building (Minor Works) Regulation.
2. The attention of AP and RSE is drawn to that the public

telecommunication operators have to ensure their radio base stations meet the
requirements of all relevant government departments and obtain approvals from the
Office of the Telecommunications Authority (OFTA), Town Planning Board, Buildings
Department and Lands Department, where necessary, before they would be allowed to
install radio base stations on rooftops and/or mount the antennas on external walls of
buildings.
3. For erection or alteration of supporting structures of radio base station,

antenna or transceiver on roof, the AP appointed is required to submit to the OFTA a
declaration stating that the proposed radio base station is in compliance with the BD’s
requirements. The AP and RSE shall make reference to “Guidance Note for Submission
of Applications by Public Telecommunications Operators for the Installation of Radio
Base Stations for Public Telecommunications Services in Buildings and on Rooftops”
issued by the OFTA for details.
4. The AP and RSE should remind the owner of the premises that works for
removing supporting structures of radio base station, antenna or transceiver and
equipment cabinet of radio base station on roof may also be minor works under the
simplified requirements.
(12/2010)
Minor Works Contractors Registration
Under Schedule 1 of the Building (Minor Works) Regulation (B(MW)R),

a total of 118 minor works items are specified therein amongst which 38 of them are
class III minor works items. In order to ensure that only contractors who are able to
perform their duties and responsibilities in a competent manner are allowed to carry
out the respective items of minor works, they are required to be registered under the
Buildings Ordinance (BO).
Register of Minor Works Contractors
2. Under s.8A(1)(c) of the BO, the Building Authority (BA) is to keep a

register and a provisional register of minor works contractors who are qualified to
carry out such minor works belonging to the class, type and item specified in the
register for which they are registered.
3. For ease of identification, those minor works contractors who are

registered under s.10(1)(a) of the B(MW)R in the name of an individual self-employed
worker for carrying out various items of class III minor works are to be referred to as
Registered Minor Works Contractors (Individual) (RMWCs (Ind)). On the other
hand, those minor works contractors who are registered under s.10(1)(b) of the
B(MW)R in the name of a company (including corporations, sole proprietorship and
partnership) for carrying out various types and classes of minor works are to be
referred to as Registered Minor Works Contractors (Company) (RMWCs (Co)).
4. The names of the RMWCs (Ind) and RMWCs (Co), together with the
items, types and classes of minor works that they are qualified to carry out, the expiry
date of their registration and their registration number will be published annually in
the Gazette. Similar information including Authorized Signatory (AS) as referred to in
paragraph 16(a) below will also be posted on the Buildings Department website.
Items, Types and Classes of Minor Works
5. Any reference to items, types and classes of minor works in this practice
note should be construed in accordance with the provisions in Schedule 1 of the
B(MW)R.
/6. …
-2-
6. An applicant for registration as an RMWC (Ind) should specify in the

application the items of minor works that he intends to apply for registration. An
applicant for registration as an RMWC (Co) should specify in the application the types
and classes of minor works that he intends to apply for registration.
7. Where an applicant is found qualified to carry out certain items, types and
classes of minor works, the BA will specify in the register such items, types and
classes of minor works only for which the applicant is registered.
Requirements for Registration as RMWC (Ind)
8. Under s.11(2) of the B(MW)R , the person who intends to register himself
as an RMWC (Ind) must satisfy the BA on the following aspects:
(a) the appropriate qualifications and experience;
(b) the ability and skills to personally carry out the item or items
of
class III minor works for which registration relates;
(c) completion of a recognized training course on class III minor works;

and
(d) the applicant is suitable for registration in the register.
9. A person who has been registered as an RMWC (Ind) may be employed by

a contractor firm to act as the AS for it but he should not be the sole proprietor,
partner or technical director of the firm simultaneously.
Requirements for Registration as RMWC (Co)
10. Under s.12(5) of the B(MW)R, an applicant for registration as an

RMWC(Co) must satisfy the BA on the following aspects:
(a) the appropriate qualifications and experience of its key

personnel;
(b) it has access to plants and resources;
(c) if it is a corporation, its management structure is adequate;
(d) the ability of the persons appointed to act for the applicant
for the purposes of the BO to understand the minor works
under application through relevant experience and a
general knowledge of the basic statutory requirements; and
(e) the applicant is suitable for registration in the register.
/Authorized……
-3-
Authorized Signatory and Technical Director of RMWC (Co)
11. In considering each application for registration as an RMWC (Co), the BA

is to have regard to the qualifications, experience and suitability of the following key
personnel of the applicant:
(a) a minimum of one person appointed by the applicant to act

for the applicant for the purposes of the BO hereinafter
referred to as the Authorized Signatory (AS); and
(b) for a corporation – a minimum of one director from the

board of directors of the applicant, hereinafter referred to as
the Technical Director (TD), who is authorized by the board
to:
(i) have access to plants and resources;
(ii) provide technical and financial support for the

execution of minor works; and
(iii) make decisions for the company and supervise

the AS and other personnel
for the purpose of ensuring that the works are carried out in
accordance with the BO.
Persons Eligible to be the AS or TD of RMWC (Co)
12. The following persons are eligible to become the AS and the TD of the
applicant:
(a) if the applicant is a sole proprietorship, the sole proprietor is

the only person eligible to act as the AS.
(b) if the applicant is a partnership, any partner appointed by all

the other partners is eligible to act as the AS.
(c) if the applicant is a corporation, a suitable person appointed

by the board of directors is eligible to act as the AS, whereas
the TD must be a director appointed under the Companies
Ordinance and appointed by the board of directors to
perform the role of TD.
13. A person is allowed to take up the role of the AS as well as the role of the
TD of a corporation at the same time provided that he meets the requirements of both
AS and TD.
/Appointment…..
-4-
Appointment of AS / TD of RMWC (Co)
14. To ensure that adequate supervision and proper management are provided
for the carrying out of minor works and to avoid possible situations of conflict of
interest, persons who have been accepted as the AS / TD for an RMWC (Co) cannot
act as a key personnel for another contractor firm simultaneously. Key personnel
herein refer to an AS / TD or an Other Officer as described in Practice Note for
Registered Contractors 38.
Refusal of Incomplete Submission
15. The BA may refuse an application if the information or documentary

proof that the BA considers necessary for determining the application is not submitted.
Minor Works Contractors Registration Committee
16. Minor Works Contractors Registration Committee (MWCRC) is an

independent body appointed by the BA under s.6 of the B(MW)R. The function of the
MWCRC is to assist the BA in considering applications relating to registration matters
of minor works contractors under the B(MW)R by:
(a) examining the qualifications of applicants;
(b) inquiring as the MWCRC considers necessary to ascertain

whether an applicant has the relevant experience;
(c) conducting interviews with applicants and their key personnel;
(d) advising the BA to allow, defer or refuse either in whole or in

part the applications; and
(e) reviewing the decisions of the BA or the recommendations of

another MWCRC.
Composition of an MWCRC
17. Under s.7(1) of the B(MW)R, a MWCRC shall consist of:
(a) one person nominated by the BA, who in the opinion of the
Authority, has knowledge and experience in minor works;
(b) one authorized person (AP) or registered structural engineer

(RSE) selected by the BA from nominations by the Architects
Registration Board (ARB), the Engineers Registration Board
(ERB) and the Surveyors Registration Board (SRB); and
/(c)……..
-5-
(c) one person selected by the BA from among persons nominated

by such bodies as the BA thinks fit.
18. Under s.7(3) of the B(MW)R, the members of the committee will elect the
Chairman among themselves.
Requirements and Scope of Interview
19. For application involving class I minor works, including registration as

RMWC (Co), addition of minor works and addition of AS / TD, the BA will refer it
to the MWCRC for consideration.
20. When an application is referred to the MWCRC for consideration, the AS

nominated by the applicant in the application, or where necessary, the TD, will
represent the applicant to attend an interview with the MWCRC. Application not
involving class I minor works in general will not be referred to the MWCRC except
there are special circumstances rendering the need for referral.
21. In processing applications for renewal of registration and restoration of

name to the register, the BA may seek advice from the MWCRC under s.15(1) and
s.19(1) of the B(MW)R.
Discretion of the BA and the MWCRC Regarding Requirements for and Scope of
Interviews
22. It is emphasized that whether a particular applicant and his AS / TD is

required to attend an interview or not and the scope of any such interview are
dependent on the circumstances of each case and are solely at the discretion of the BA
and the MWCRC for the purpose of ensuring the required standard of the contractor.
Performance of the applicant during the interview, the track records of the applicant,
etc, will be taken into consideration in this regard.
Recommendations of MWCRC
23. For any application for registration, additional minor works and additional
AS / TD that has been referred to the MWCRC, the BA must not allow, in whole or
in part (as the case may be), such an application unless the MWCRC so recommends.
Transitional Arrangement
24. Within 2 years upon commencement of the registration for minor works
contractors, current practitioners who do not possess the requisite academic
qualifications for registration as RMWC (Co) but possess adequate working
experience may submit their applications for registration as a Registered Minor Works
Contractor (Provisional) ((RMWC(P)).
/25……..
-6-
25. An RMWC(P) can apply for full registration as an RMWC (Co) when its
AS has completed a recognized top-up course in minor works. The registration of an
RMWC(P) will expire when the RMWC(P) has obtained full registration as an
RMWC (Co) or upon the expiry of two years after the commencement of the minor
works control system; whichever is earlier.
Review of Decisions of BA or Recommendations of MWCRC
26. An applicant who is aggrieved by a decision of the BA or a

recommendation of a MWCRC in respect of matters arising from application for
registration, renewal of registration, restoration of registration, addition of items /
types / classes of minor works and addition of AS / TD may request a MWCRC to
review the decision or recommendation under s.26 of the B(MW)R by submitting the
request in a specified form to the BA. Upon payment of the prescribed fees, a request
for review will be presented to a MWCRC for consideration. Where required, the
person making the request may have to attend an interview with the MWCRC. If the
BA subsequently substitutes the original decision with another decision, the review fee
paid by the applicant will be refunded.
27. The MWCRC directed to review shall not consist of a member who has
considered the original application on which the decision or recommendation under
review relates.
Application Procedures and Requirements
28. Details of the application procedures and requirements for inclusion of

names in the minor works contractor registers, renewal and restoration of registration
are provided in Practice Note for Registered Contractors 69.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD REG/RC/13/3
First issue December 2010 (AD/Support)

Appointment of Authorized Signatory to Act for Prescribed Registered Contractor

and Temporary absence of Authorized Signatories
in respect of Minor Works commenced under the Simplified Requirements
For the purposes of section 9AA of the Buildings Ordinance (BO), a

prescribed registered contractor (PRC) is required to be appointed under section 28 of
the Building (Minor Works) Regulations (B(MW)R) in respect of minor works. Apart
from a registered minor works contractor (Individual), every PRC should appoint at
least one person to act for it for the purposes of the BO. This appointed person is
commonly known as the “authorized signatory” (AS) of the PRC. Under section
9AA(6) of the BO, a PRC should provide continuous supervision to the carrying out of
the minor works and to comply with the BO generally. Such duties of the PRC are
more specifically stipulated under Part 7 of the B(MW)R, the Technical Memorandum
for Supervision Plans and the Code of Practice for Site Supervision.
AS on the specified forms and supervision plans
2. The AS who signs the Form MW01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 10, 11 and 12
in respect of minor works commenced under the simplified requirements should be the
person who is responsible for the carrying out of the duties of the PRC under the BO
for the works. The Building Authority (BA) only accepts one AS to act for the PRC
for minor works under each minor works submission (the submission) and the AS who
signs the Form MW01 or 03 is deemed to be such person.
3. The name of the AS appointed for the submission should be clearly

indicated on all specified forms relating to the submission. If the name of the AS is not
shown on a specified form, the BA would consider the form as incomplete and
unacceptable. Moreover, if the name of the AS indicated on the supervision plan is
different from that on the specified form, Form MW01 of the submission, the BA
would reject the supervision plan or the specified forms, as the case may be, unless the
BA has approved or has been notified of the change of AS as stipulated in paragraph 4
below.
4. For a PRC, other than a sole proprietorship, who has only one AS, any
proposal to change the AS of the submission will not be accepted unless an application
for addition of the new AS in the contractor’s registration has been made in accordance
with the procedures set out in PNRC 38 or 69 and approved by the BA. For a PRC
having more than one AS in its registration who intends to change the AS of the
submission to another AS of the PRC, the PRC should notify the BA in the standard
form at Appendix A to PNRC 72, countersigned by the authorized person (AP) of the
submission if the works involve Class I minor works, not less than 7 days prior to such
change. Otherwise, the original AS would still be regarded as responsible for the
submission.
/Nomination …..
-2-
Nomination of another AS to act in case of temporary absence
5. The absence of the AS of a PRC may cause the PRC unable to act. If the
PRC becomes unable to act, it should immediately cease the minor works under its
purview.
6. In the case of temporary absence of the AS of the submission due to

various reasons such as illness, the PRC may still wish to continue with the carrying out
of the works. In such circumstances, the BA would accept the PRC nominating another
AS to act temporarily for the purpose of supervising the carrying out of the minor works
under its purview, subject to the following conditions :
(a) Notification of such nomination should be made to the BA in the

standard form at Appendix B to PNRC 72 and, if the works involve
Class I minor works, countersigned by the AP of the submission;
(b) The notification should be submitted at least 7 days prior to the

absence of the AS except in case of sudden illness or accident. In
the latter case, the PRC or the AS should provide documentary
proof within 3 days showing that the AS is unable to act due to
illness or accident;
(c) The person nominated to act temporarily should fulfill one of the
(i) He is another AS of the same PRC and he is currently

accepted by BA to act for the PRC for the classes and types of
minor works under the submission; or
(ii) He is an AS of another PRC and he is currently accepted by

BA to act for the PRC for the classes and types of minor
works under the submission. In case that another PRC is a
partnership or a corporation, an authorization letter from that
another PRC signed by the rest of the partners or the required
quorum of directors, as the case may be, should be submitted
with the notification; and
(d) The maximum period of temporary acting by the nominated AS is

14 days. Further extension of this acting period would only be
considered upon submission of documentary proof of special
circumstances, such as illness. The total temporary acting period
permitted is subject to a maximum of 30 days.
7. If the nominated temporary AS does not meet the criteria stipulated in

paragraph 6(c) above, the BA would not accept the nomination and would inform the
PRC/AS and, if the works involve Class I minor works, the AP of the submission
accordingly. In such cases the minor works under the purview of the PRC may have to
be ceased if there is no AS acting for it (see paragraph 5 above).
/8. …..
-3-
8. If the absence of the AS for the submission exceeds 30 days, the PRC
should arrange to change to another AS of the same company to be responsible for the
submission or apply for addition of a new AS in its registration, in accordance with
paragraph 4 above.
The role of the nominated temporary AS
9. The nominated temporary AS would only act for a short period of time for
the purpose of supervision of the carrying out of minor works. During the period of
acting, he is required to fulfill the duties of site supervision and sign on the inspection
records on site in accordance with the accepted supervision plans, if any. However, the
nominated temporary AS, being not the AS appointed to act for the PRC for the
submission as stipulated in paragraph 2 above, is not permitted to sign on any
supervision plans or specified forms for the submission for which he is only acting
temporarily for the purpose of paragraph 6 above.
(AU Choi-kai)
Building Authority
First issue December 2010 (AD/Support)

Appendix A
(PNRC 72)
Notification of Change of Authorized Signatory of the Prescribed Registered

Contractor in respect of the Minor Works commenced under the Simplified
Requirements
Date ___________
We _____________________________ (Chinese) _________________ the prescribed

registered contractor (registered general building contractor/registered specialist
contractor/registered minor works contractor*), of registration no. ________ and date of
expiry of registration _____________, hereby notify that the person (name in full)
________________________ (Chinese) __________________ (the ‘original authorized
signatory’) acting for us for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance in respect of the
minor works detailed in the minor works submission no(s). below#, will be changed to
(name in full) _________________________ (Chinese) _________________ (the ‘new
authorized signatory’) with effect from (date) ___________.
MW MW MW
MW MW MW
___________________________ ___________________________
Signature Signature
(original authorized signatory) (new authorized signatory)
___________________________
Full name and signature of
authorized person
(for Class I minor works)
Date of expiry of registration : _____________

#
If space is insufficient, please attach additional sheet(s) which must be signed, dated and
write down the Certificate of Registration No. by the person concerned.
(12/2010)
Appendix B
(PNRC 72)
Notification of Nomination of Temporary Authorized Signatory of the Prescribed
Registered Contractor in respect of the Minor Works commenced under the
Date____________
We _____________________________ (Chinese) __________________ the prescribed

registered contractor (registered general building contractor/registered specialist
contractor/registered minor works contractor*), of registration no. ________ and date of
expiry of registration __________, hereby notify that we have nominated (name in full)
______________________ (Chinese) _________________ (the ‘nominated authorized
signatory’), in stead of (name in full) ________________________________ (Chinese)
_________________ (the ‘original authorized signatory’) to act for us for the purpose
of supervision under the Buildings Ordinance during the period of the latter’s
illness/temporary absence* from (date) ___________ to (date) ____________ in respect
of the minor works detailed in the minor works submission no(s). below#.
MW MW MW
MW MW MW
____________________________________ ____________________________
Full name and signature of authorized person Signature of original authorized
(for Class I minor works) signatory
I (name in full) ___________________ (Chinese) _____________________,

*HKID/Passport No.____________, Telephone No. __________, Fax No.
____________ confirm my acceptance of the above nomination and that I will act in
stead of (name in full) ________________ (Chinese) __________________, in respect
of the above minor works from (date) ___________ to (date) ____________. *I am
currently *one of/the AS acting for (name of the prescribed registered contractor)
__________________________ (Chinese) __________________ of registration no.
________ and date of expiry of registration __________, for the purposes of the
Buildings Ordinance. *A letter of authorization for me to act as the nominated
authorized signatory is enclosed.
____________________________________
Signature of nominated authorized signatory

#
If space is insufficient, please attach additional sheet(s) which must be signed, dated and
write down the Certificate of Registration No. by the person concerned.
(12/2010)
Wholesale Conversion of Industrial Buildings
The Government has implemented a package of measures to encourage

the revitalisation of existing industrial buildings through wholesale conversion of
vacant or under-utilised industrial buildings. Details of the measures are promulgated
in the Practice Note Issue No.1/2010 issued by the Lands Administration Office of the
Lands Department. The measures are only valid for three years from 1 April 2010, and
the conversion works related to revitalisation are to be completed within three years
after issue of the waivers by the Lands Department.
Green Building Designs in Wholesale Conversion of Industrial Buildings
2. Compared with building redevelopment, wholesale conversion of vacant

or under-utilised industrial buildings is in itself a sustainable way to reduce waste and
conserve natural resources. Greater environmental benefits can be obtained if the
owners adopt green building designs and practices when carrying out the conversion
works.
3. In handling alteration and addition (A&A) proposals for the wholesale

conversion of existing industrial buildings, the Building Authority would adopt a
pragmatic approach when considering applications for modification of or exemption
from various building regulations in view of the constraints posed by the original
design of the existing building. To encourage green building designs and practices,
provision of green and/or energy efficient features to revitalised industrial buildings
will be a relevant factor in support of the granting of modification of or exemption from
certain specific regulations. Examples relating to applications for such modification /
exemption are as follows:
(i) If a refuge floor is required to be provided in accordance with
the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in
Case of Fire (MOE Code) for the proposed conversion but there
is difficulty or site constraint to comply with the technical
requirements of the MOE Code, proposal for the provision of a
refuge floor with greenery design and enhanced fire service
installations will be favourably considered subject to no adverse
comments from the Director of Fire Services. PNAP APP-122
is relevant.
(ii) In the case of conversion to office use, if there are difficulties in
providing the required natural lighting and ventilation due to
constraints posed by the original design as industrial building,
application for modification of Regulations 30 and 31 of the
Building (Planning) Regulations will be favourably considered
if adequate artificial lighting and mechanical ventilation and
energy efficient design that could achieve 40% in the categories
of Energy Use (EU) and Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ)
under the BEAM Plus certification with provisional assessment
reports conferred by the Hong Kong Green Building Council
are incorporated in the proposal. PNAP APP-130 is relevant.
/reports …..
-2-
(iii) For individual air-conditioning boxes/platforms attached to the

external walls with projection larger than the usually accepted
size and/or projection over street, application for modification /
exemption will be favourably considered if the proposal is
incorporated with the use of energy efficient/environmentally
friendly air-conditioning units. PNAP APP-19 is relevant.
(iv) For the provision of curtain walls to existing building facades,
exemption from section 31(1) of the Buildings Ordinance to
allow the curtain walls to project over streets will be favourably
considered if low-energy absorbent type glazing/energy
efficient materials with energy efficient design of the curtain
walls that could achieve 40% in the categories of EU and IEQ
under the BEAM Plus certification with provisional assessment
reports conferred by the Hong Kong Green Building Council
are incorporated in the proposal. PNAP APP-2 is relevant.
Other Measures to Facilitate the Wholesale Conversion of Industrial Buildings
4. To dovetail with the new policy measures, the Buildings Department has
reviewed the relevant requirements under the Building (Planning) Regulations for
setting up places of public entertainment (PPE) in non-domestic buildings, and PNAP
APP-14 has been revised as follows:-
(i) Provided that the safety requirements are met, each wholly
converted building can accommodate PPE with a total capacity
of not more than 500 persons, and the site of such PPE premises
may be permitted to abut on one thoroughfare only, if the said
thoroughfare is an acceptable Emergency Vehicular Access and
the Director of Fire Services does not have any adverse
comment on the arrangement.
(ii) If the total capacity for all PPE premises in each wholly
converted building does not exceed 150 persons with each
premises having a capacity not exceeding 50 persons, the
requirements stipulated in PNAP APP-14 and Part III of the
MOE code would not be applicable to such premises, provided
that the conditions stipulated in paragraph 18 of the said PNAP
are complied with.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GP/BORD/19/1(III)
First issue September 2010 (AD/NB1)

Building Design to Foster a Quality and Sustainable Built Environment
There has been rising public concern over the quality and sustainability of
the built environment, including issues regarding building bulk and height, air
ventilation, greening and energy efficiency in buildings. In 2009, the Council for
Sustainable Development (SDC) launched a public engagement process entitled
“Building Design to Foster a Quality and Sustainable Built Environment” in
collaboration with the Government. The exercise has pointed to a need for putting in
place a package of new measures to foster a quality and sustainable built environment.
This practice note sets out a package of measures, covering the following major
elements, to promote a quality and sustainable built environment:
(a) sustainable building design guidelines (SBD Guidelines) on building

separation, building set back and site coverage of greenery,
(b) gross floor area (GFA) concessions, and
(c) energy efficiency of buildings.
Sustainable Building Design Guidelines
2. The Buildings Department (BD) has commissioned a consultancy study on

“Building Design that Supports Sustainable Urban Living Space in Hong Kong”.
Based on the study, a set of SBD Guidelines has been developed to promote building
separation, building set back and site coverage of greenery as promulgated in the
Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers (PNAP) APP-152.
3. To enhance the quality and sustainability of the built environment, the

Building Authority (BA) will take account of the compliance with the SBD Guidelines
as promulgated in the PNAP APP-152, where applicable, as a pre-requisite in
exempting or disregarding green / amenity features and non-mandatory / non-essential
plant rooms and services from GFA and/or site coverage calculations (GFA
concessions) in new building developments. Such green / amenity features and non-
mandatory / non-essential plant rooms and services and the relevant practice notes
promulgating the criteria and requirements for granting GFA concessions are
summarized in Appendix A.
/Overall…
-2-
Overall Cap on GFA Concessions
4. To contain the effect on the building bulk while allowing flexibility in the
design for incorporating desirable green / amenity features and non-mandatory / non-
essential plant rooms and services, an overall cap will be imposed on the total amount
of GFA concessions for these features, except those features described in paragraph 5
below. This cap is set at 10 % of the total GFA of the development. If a development
comprises both domestic and non-domestic buildings or in the case of a composite
building, GFA concessions for features serving the domestic part or the non-domestic
part of the development will be calculated separately such that GFA concessions for
each part will be capped at 10%, based on the total GFA of the respective part of the
development. Features that are subject to this overall cap of GFA concessions are listed
in the table at Appendix A.
5. GFA concessions for the following features, which may have to satisfy
their own individual acceptance criteria, will not be subject to the overall cap:
(a) Mandatory features and essential plant rooms such as refuse storage
chamber, telecommunications and broadcasting rooms;
(b) Communal podium gardens and sky gardens that improve permeability of a
development to its neighbourhood;
(c) Floor space used solely for parking motor vehicles and loading and
unloading of motor vehicles which is separately controlled given its
significant impact on building bulk and height and the relevant transport,
planning and environmental policies;
(d) Voids in front of cinemas or in shopping arcades, etc. with operational

needs in non-domestic developments;
(e) Bonus GFA and / or GFA exemptions relating to dedication for public
passage or surrender for road widening and building set back in accordance
with the SBD Guidelines; and
(f) Hotel concessions granted under Regulation 23A of the Building

(Planning) Regulations.
Pre-requisites for Granting GFA Concessions
6. To promote sustainable building designs and energy efficient features in

new developments, compliance with the following requirements will be pre-requisites
for the granting of GFA concessions for all green / amenity features and non-mandatory
/ non-essential plant rooms and services provided in a proposed development as
described in Appendix A:-
/(a)…
-3-
(a) The subject development complies with the SBD Guidelines on building
separation, building set back and site coverage of greenery, where
applicable. PNAP APP 152 is relevant;
(b) Submission of the official letter issued by the Hong Kong Green Building
Council (HKGBC) acknowledging the satisfactory completion of project
registration application for BEAM Plus certification;
(c) Submission of a letter by the developer or owner undertaking to submit to

the BD the following documents:
(i) Result of the Provisional Assessment under the BEAM Plus

certification conferred / issued by the Hong Kong Green Building
Council to be submitted prior to the application for consent to
commence the building works shown on the approved plans;
(ii) Information on the estimated energy performance / consumption for
the common parts (for domestic developments) or for the entire
building (for non-domestic developments) to be submitted in the
standard form (Appendix B) prior to the application for consent to
commence the building works shown on the approved plans;
(iii) Information specified in item (ii) above to be updated and submitted
at the time of submitting application for occupation permit; and
(iv) Result of the Final Assessment under the BEAM Plus certification
conferred / issued by the Hong Kong Green Building Council, within
6 months of the date of issuance of the occupation permit by the BA;
(d) Compliance with the overall cap on GFA concessions as described in

paragraph 4 above, where applicable; and
(e) Compliance with the relevant acceptance criteria for the individual green
and amenity features.
Conditions for Granting GFA Concessions
7. In addition to the acceptance criteria and conditions that may be imposed

for granting GFA concessions as detailed in the relevant practice notes for the green /
amenity features and non-mandatory / non-essential plant rooms and services described
in paragraph 6 above, the following conditions may be imposed:
(a) The modification is given in recognition of the undertaking submitted by

the developer or owner as described in paragraph 6(c) above;
(b) Information described in paragraph 6(c)(i) and (ii) above shall be

submitted to the BD prior to the application for consent to commence the
building works shown on the approved plans;
(c) Information described in paragraph 6(c)(iii) above shall be submitted to the

BD at the time of submitting application for occupation permit;
/(d)…
-4-
(d) Information described in paragraph 6(c)(iv) above shall be submitted to the

BD within 6 months of the date of the occupation permit; and
(e) The modification will be revoked if the application for consent to

commence the building works is submitted prior to the submission of
information specified in item (b) above.
8. The Authorized Person should consult a Registered Professional Engineer

under the Engineers Registration Ordinance of the relevant discipline in assessing the
energy efficiency of the building and in completing the standard form at Appendix B;
Disclosure for Public Information
9. To increase the transparency of information to the public, the following

information will be uploaded onto the BD website after the issuance of the occupation
permit:
(a) The estimated energy performance / consumption information as described

in paragraph 6(c)(iii) above; and
(b) The results of the Provisional Assessment under the BEAM Plus
certification as described in paragraph 6(c)(i) above, which will be replaced
by the results of the Final Assessment described in paragraph 6(c)(iv)
above, upon receipt.
Implementation
10. This practice note is applicable to all new building plans or major revision
of building plans for development proposals submitted to the BA for approval on or
after 1 April 2011. Subject to paragraph 11 below, this practice note is also applicable
to building plans which have been previously disapproved and are resubmitted for
approval on or after 1 April 2011.
/11. …
-5-
11. For building plans which have been firstly submitted on or before 31 March
2011 and subsequently disapproved by the BA but not on ground relating to proof of
ownership or realistic prospect of control of the land forming the site, the first
resubmission of such plans to the BA on or after 1 April 2011, which is submitted
within 6 months from the date of disapproval of the firstly submitted plans would not be
subject to the requirements of this practice note. For the avoidance of doubt, if such
first resubmission of plans eventually has been disapproved by the BA, any further
resubmission of the plans would be subject to the requirements of this practice note.
( AU Choi-Kai )
Building Authority

Appendix A
(PNAP APP- 151)
List of GFA Concessions
Practice Notes Features Features

subject to Subject
complianc to the
e with the Overall
pre- Cap of
requisites 10% in
in para. 6 para.4 of
& 7 of PNAP
PNAP APP-151
APP-151
Disregarded GFA under Building (Planning)
Regulations 23(3)(b)
1. Carpark and loading/unloading area PNAP APP-2 and
excluding public transport terminus APP-111
2. Plant rooms and similar services
2.1 Mandatory feature or essential plant room, PNAP APP-35 &
area of which is limited by respective PNAP APP-84
or regulation, such as lift machine room,TBE
room, refuse storage chamber, etc. 1
2.2 Mandatory feature or essential plant room, PNAP APP-2 and
areas of which is NOT limited by any PNAP APP-42
or regulation, such as room occupied soley
by FSI and equipment, meter room,
transformer room, potable and flushing water
tank, etc. 2
2.3 Non-mandatory or non-essential plant room, PNAP APP-2 and ✓ ✓
such as A/C plant room, AHU room, etc. 3 APP-42
Disregarded GFA under Building (Planning)
Regulations 23A(3)
3. Area for picking up and setting down PNAP APP-40
persons departing from or arriving at the
hotel by vehicle
4. Supporting facilities for a hotel PNAP APP-40
Green Features under JPNs
5. Balcony for residential buildings JPN1 ✓ ✓
6. Wider common corridor and lift lobby JPN1 ✓ ✓
7. Communal sky garden JPN1 & 2 ✓
PNAP APP-122
8. Communal podium garden for non- JPN1 ✓
residential buildings
9. Acoustic fin JPN1 ✓
10. Wing wall, wind catcher and funnel JPN1 ✓
11. Non-structural prefabricated external wall JPN2 ✓ ✓
12. Utility platform JPN2 ✓ ✓
13. Noise barrier JPN2 ✓
Amenity Features
14. Counter, office, store, guard room and PNAP APP-42 ✓ ✓
lavatory for watchman and management
staff, Owners’ Corporation Office
15. Residential recreational facilities including PNAP APP-2, ✓ ✓
void, plant room, swimming pool filtration APP-42 and
plant room, covered walkway etc serving APP-104
solely the recreational facilities
-1-
16. Covered landscaped and play area PNAP APP-42 ✓
17. Horizontal screen/covered walkway, trellis PNAP APP-42 ✓ ✓9
18. Larger lift shaft PNAP APP-89 ✓ ✓
19. Chimney shaft PNAP APP-2 ✓ ✓
20. Other non-mandatory or non-essential plant PNAP APP-2 ✓ ✓
room, such as boiler room, SMATV room 4
21. Pipe duct, air duct for mandatory feature or PNAP APP-2
essential plant room5 & APP-93
22. Pipe duct, air duct for non-mandatory or PNAP APP-2 ✓ ✓
non-essential plant room6
23. Plant room, pipe duct, air duct for PNAP APP-2 ✓
environmentally friendly system and feature7
24. High headroom and void in front of cinema, PNAP APP-2 ✓
shopping arcade etc. in non-domestic
development8
25. Void over main common entrance (prestige PNAP APP-2 & ✓ ✓
entrance) in non-domestic development APP-42
26. Void in duplex domestic flat and house PNAP APP-2 ✓ ✓
27. Sunshade and reflector PNAP APP-19 &
APP-67
28. Minor projection such as AC box, window PNAP APP-19 &
cill, projecting window APP-42
29. Other projection such as air-conditioning PNAP APP-19 ✓ ✓
box and platform with a projection of more
than 750mm from the external wall
Other Items
30. Refuge floor including refuge floor cum sky PNAP APP-2
garden & APP-122
31. Covered area under large PNAP APP-19
projecting/overhanging feature
32. Public transport terminus (PTT) PNAP APP-2
33. Party structure and common staircase PNAP ADM-2
34. Horizontal area of staircase, lift shaft and PNAP APP-2
vertical duct solely serving floor accepted as
not being accountable for GFA
35. Public passage PNAP APP-108
36. Covered set back area PNAP APP-152
Bonus GFA
37. Bonus GFA PNAP APP-108
Notes:
1 Mandatory feature or essential plant room, area of which is limited by respective PNAP or
regulation, include duct for basement smoke extraction system, lift machine room,
telecommunications and broadcasting room, refuse storage chamber, refuse storage and material
recovery chamber, material recovery chamber, refuse storage and material recovery room, or
similar feature / plant room, and pipe and air ducts which are part of the distribution network for
such mandatory feature or essential plant and contained within such room.
2 Mandatory feature or essential plant room, area of which is NOT limited by any PNAP or
regulation*, include electrical switch room, meter room, transformer room, generator room,
potable and flushing water tank and pump room, sewage treatment plant room, refuse chute,
refuse hopper room, room occupied solely by fire service installations and equipment such as
fire service / sprinkler water tank and pump room, fire control centre, CO2 room, fan for smoke
extraction system / staircase pressurization system, hose reel closet, sump pump room/ pump
room for rainwater, soil and waste disposal, or similar feature / plant room and pipe and air
ducts which are part of the distribution network for such mandatory feature or essential plant
and contained within such room.
-2-
3 Non-mandatory feature or non-essential plant room, area of which may be disregarded under
B(P)R23(3)(b), include plant room occupied solely by machinery or equipment for air-
conditioning or heating system such as AC plant room, air handling unit room, or similar plant
room, and pipe and air ducts which are part of the distribution network for such feature or plant
and contained within such room.
4 Other non-mandatory feature or non-essential plant room, area of which may be exempted
under B(P)R23(3)(a), include hot water boiler room, filtration plant room for swimming pool in
a hotel or for a water feature in a communal garden/landscape area, SMATV room, or similar
plant room, and pipe and air ducts which are part of the distribution network for such feature or
plant and contained within such room.
5 Pipe duct, air duct for mandatory feature or essential plant room, include pipe duct for
rainwater, soil and waste disposal and individual pipe and air ducts which are part of the
distribution network for such mandatory feature or essential plant as described in notes 1 and 2
above, and located outside such plant room.
6 Pipe duct, air duct for non-mandatory feature or non-essential plant room, include individual
pipe and air ducts which are part of the distribution network for such non-mandatory feature or
non-essential plant as described in notes 3 and 4 above and located outside such plant room.
7 Plant room for environmentally friendly system and feature, area of which may be exempted
under B(P)R23(3)(a), include plant room for rainwater harvesting / grey water recycling system,
battery room for solar panels, or similar system / feature, and pipe and air ducts which are part
of the distribution network for such system and feature.
8 High headroom and void in front of cinema, shopping arcade etc. in non-domestic development
include void in front of cinema, theatre balcony, banking hall, shopping arcade, cockloft floor
for storage within the ground storey in single-staircase building, auditorium, sporting hall,
school hall and religious institution that have operational justifications.
9 Horizontal screen / covered walkway / trellis may be excluded from the overall cap on GFA
concessions subject to provision of greenery to BA’s satisfaction as stipulated under PNAP
APP-42.
* Although the feature or plant room, area of which is not limited by any PNAP or regulation,
only the minimum amount of GFA necessary for accommodating and maintaining the services
and commensurate with the the development would be allowed to be disregarded as stated in
PNAP APP-2.
-3-
Appendix B
(PNAP APP- 151)
Declaration on Annual Energy Use of a Building Development
Part I: Building Particulars
(a) Building name (if known): _________________________________________________
(b) Address of site : _________________________________________________________
(c) Lot number : ____________________________________________________________
(d) Type of building * Domestic Building / Non – Domestic Building / Composite Building
(e) Provision of Central Air Conditioning *YES / NO
(f) Provision of Energy Efficient Features *YES / NO
(g) Please list the proposed/installed* Energy Efficient Features (add separate sheet if necessary):-
1.
2.
3.
Part II:
The predicted annual energy use† of the proposed / completed* building/part of building*:-
Internal Floor Annual Energy Use of
Type of Annual Energy Use of
Location Area Served Proposed/Completed*
Development Baseline Building‡
(m2) Building
Town Gas/ Town Gas/
Electricity Electricity
LPG LPG
kWh/m2/ unit/m2/ kWh/m2/ unit/m2/
annum annum annum annum
Domestic Central building services
Development installation§
Podium(s)
(central building services installation)
Podium(s)
(non - central building services
Non-domestic installation)
Development** Tower(s)
(central building services installation)
Tower(s)
(non - central building services
installation)
†
The predicted annual energy use, in term of electricity consumption (kWh/m2/annum) and town gas/LPG consumption (unit/m2/
annum), of the development by the internal floor area served, where:-
(a) “total annual energy use” has the same meaning of “annual energy use” under Section 4 and Appendix 8 of the BEAM Plus for
New Building (current version); and
(b) “internal floor area”, in relation a building, a space or a unit means the floor area of all enclosed space measured to the internal
faces of enclosing external and/or party walls.
‡
“Baseline Building” has the same meaning as “Baseline Building Model (zero-credit benchmark)” under Section 4 and Appendix 8
of the BEAM Plus for New Building (current version).
§
‘Central Building Services Installation’ has the same meaning as that in the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building
Services Installations in Buildings (February 2010 edition)(Draft)
**
Podium(s) normally means the lowest part of the development (usually the 1owerest 15m of the development and its basement, if
any) carrying different use(s) from that of the tower(s) above. For development without clear demarcation between podium(s) and
tower(s), the development, as a whole, should be considered as tower(s).
-1-
Part III
The following installation(s) is / are* designed / completed in accordance with the relevant Codes of Practices
published by the Electrical & Mechanical Services Department (EMSD):-
Type of Installations YES NO N/A
Lighting Installations
Air Conditioning Installations
Electrical Installations
Lift & Escalator Installations
Performance-based Approach
Please (x) where appropriate
____________________________________ ____________________________________
Signature Signature
(Registered Professional Engineer / Registered Energy Assessor) (Authorized Person)
Certificate of Registration No.:___________________ Certificate of Registration No.:___________________
Date of expiry of registration: ____________________ Date of expiry of registration: ____________________
______________________________________
Company Chop / Signature of applicant
Date: ________________________________
*Delete whichever is inapplicable
-2-
Buildings Department APP - 152
Registered Structural Engineers and
Sustainable Building Design Guidelines
This practice note promulgates guidelines on building design which will

enhance the quality and sustainability of the built environment in Hong Kong. These
guidelines are the Sustainable Building Design Guidelines (SBD Guidelines) referred to
in Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers (PNAP) APP-151, the compliance with which the Building
Authority (BA) will take into account, where applicable, as a pre-requisite in exempting
or disregarding green and amenity features and non-mandatory / non-essential plant
rooms and services from gross floor area and/or site coverage calculations (GFA
concessions) for new building developments. Terminology and definitions of terms used
in the SBD Guidelines are listed in Appendix A.
Objectives
2. In the SBD Guidelines, 3 key building design elements to enhance the

environmental sustainability of our living space are identified. They are building
separation, building set back and site coverage of greenery. The objectives are to
achieve better air ventilation, enhance the environmental quality of our living space,
particularly at pedestrian level, provide more greenery and mitigate the heat island effect.
Application of the SBD Guidelines
3. It is recognized that compliance with the SBD Guidelines on building

separation, building set back and site coverage of greenery may have been imposed in the
lease conditions of new land sale sites or lease modifications or land exchanges or
private treaty grants, or incorporated in some planning proposals submitted to the Town
Planning Board or imposed as conditions in the planning approvals. During building
plan submission stage, the BA will take into account the compliance with the SBD
Guidelines, where applicable, when granting GFA concessions in new building
developments. Further details on the prerequisites for granting GFA concessions are set
out in PNAP APP-151.
Building Separation
4. In order to improve air ventilation, enhance the environmental quality at

pedestrian level and mitigate heat island effect arising from the undesirable walling
effect of “long buildings”, buildings in large development sites should be separated by
intervening spaces.
/5. …
-2-
5. Subject to paragraphs 8 to 11 below and the detailed requirements in

Appendix B, for sites that are two hectares or above, or for sites that are less than two
hectares and proposed with any building or any group of buildings having a continuous
projected façade length1 (Lp) of 60m or above, buildings thereon shall comply with the
building separation requirement such that:
(a) the individual Lp of any building or any group of buildings that abuts a
street2 shall not exceed the maximum permissible Lp;
(b) when projected onto the chosen projection planes, the separating distance
between the projected façade(s) of the building(s) and the site boundaries
or the centreline of adjoining streets shall not be less than 7.5m; and the
permeability3 (P) of the buildings on one projection plane shall not be less
than 20% and onto the other projection plane shall not be less than 20%,
25% or 33.3%4, depending on the site area and the height of the tallest
building, in accordance with Table 1.
Permeability (P) of Buildings

Height5 (H) of Site area < 20,000 m2 and with Site area ≥ 20,000 m2
the tallest building(s) of Lp ≥ 60m long (regardless of the length of
building buildings)
H ≤ 60m 20%; 20% 20%; 25%

H > 60m 20%; 20% 20%; 33.3%
Table 1 - Minimum permeability (P) of buildings.
6. Detailed requirements and method of measurement are given in Appendix

B. A sample case is given in Appendix C. Any covered areas providing permeability of
the buildings will be accountable for GFA and/or site coverage, except where exempted
or disregarded if they satisfy the requirements stipulated in the relevant PNAP or Joint
Practice Notes (JPN).
7. Subject to paragraphs 8 to 11 below, the building separation requirement

shall be met in each of the following assessment zones:
Vertical division Height5
• Low Zone 0 – 20m

• Middle Zone 20 – 60m
• High Zone Above 60m
/8 …
1
See Appendix A for definition and Figures 2 and 3 of Appendix B for illustration
2
Street has the same meaning as that given in Regulation 18A(3)(a)(i) & (ii) of the Building (Planning)
Regulations (B(P)R)
3
See Appendix A for definition.
4
The plane with the higher permeability should preferably be set perpendicular to the summer prevailing
wind direction with plus or minus 30 degree flexibility or existing street pattern. At the present stage,
characteristic natural wind availability data of the site may be simulated using wind tunnel and
topographical models and/or computer simulations as appropriate.
5
Height of a building has the same meaning as that given in B(P)R23(1).
-3-
8. The building separation requirement at the low zone may be waived if:
(a) the site coverage for the building(s) including any podium above ground
level does not exceed 60%, 62.5% or 65% of the area of the site for a
Class A, Class B or Class C site6 respectively; and
(b) the full height of the building(s) is set back from the site boundary
abutting on a street; the total frontage of such set back is not less than
50% of the length of the site boundary that abuts on a street and not less
than 10m long or the full frontage for site with frontage less than 10m in
length; and the total area of such set back(s) is not less than 15% of the
area of the site.
9. For buildings that are served by surrounding pedestrian networks at an

elevated level rather than at grade, justification may be made to demonstrate that the air
ventilation performance for the building portion below such raised pedestrian level will
not cause any material concerns to any sensitive users in general. Subject to the special
circumstances of each case, the BA may exempt the portion of building below such
raised pedestrian level from the building separation requirement.
10. The building separation requirement is not applicable to domestic

developments comprising buildings of height not exceeding 15 meters or not more than
four storeys. For sites comprising buildings with mixed uses and/or varying building
heights, domestic buildings of height not exceeding 15 meters or not more than four
storeys can be disregarded in the building separation assessment, provided that these
domestic buildings are not connected to the other buildings.
11. It is recognized that certain buildings with special functional requirements

in building length and/or bulk e.g. infrastructural facilities, transport terminus, sports and
civic facilities, may not be able to comply with the building separation requirements.
The BA may consider exempting such special facilities from the building separation
requirement if the following compensatory measures are provided:
(a) According to the methodology and requirements as stipulated under the

category of Microclimate Around Buildings (SA8) of the BEAM Plus 7
certification, an Air Ventilation Assessment (AVA) by wind tunnel or
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) has been conducted to demonstrate
that the optimal design option has been selected in comparing with
different design options; and either one of the following three
requirements under the aforesaid category of the BEAM Plus certification
has also been complied with and all results of which are considered
acceptable by the BA;
(i) On wind amplification / stagnant air – demonstrating that no

pedestrian areas will be subject to excessive wind speeds and there
are no stagnant areas not flushed by breezes;
/(ii) …
6
Site classification has the same meaning as that given in B(P)R18A
7
HKGBC and BEAM Society. BEAM Plus for New Buildings.
http://hkgbc.org.hk/upload/beamdocuments/beamplusdoc/BEAM-Plus-1-1-NB.pdf
-4-
(ii) On elevated temperatures – providing shade; or

(iii) On elevated temperatures – providing high emissivity roofing
material or vegetation roof.
(b) Building features such as additional building set back, stepped profile of
the podium from the adjoining streets and communal podium garden to
separate the podium from the tower above and to promote air flow at
pedestrian level, etc. have been considered in the assessment described in
item (a) above and incorporated in the optimal option, where appropriate;
and
(c) Building separation requirement is fully complied with for other buildings
on the same site or other parts of the building that are located above such
special facilities, where applicable.
Building Set Back
12 In order to improve air ventilation, enhance the environmental quality at

pedestrian level and mitigate deep street canyon effect, buildings abutting a narrow street
less than 15m wide shall be set back.
13 Building set back should allow the flow of air volume with a minimum
sectional area of 15m x 15m along the street. Where the level of the street varies, the
minimum sectional area of set back shall follow the profile of the street. Subject to
paragraphs 15 and 16 below, a building abutting on any narrow street less than 15m wide
should be set back to comply with one of the following requirements: -
(a) No part of the building, up to a level of 15m above the street level, shall be
within 7.5m from the centreline of the street as shown in figure 1 of Appendix
D; or
(b) Where a communal podium garden is provided, the building abutting on the
street shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) no part of the building, upto a level of 15m above the street level, shall
protrude above the 45 degrees inclined plane, the base of which is
placed at street level at the boundary line of the lot on the opposite side
of the street as shown in figures 2 and 3 of Appendix D; and
(ii) such communal podium garden shall comply with the height, openness,
size and greenery area requirements as stipulated in paragraph 1(d) of
Appendix A to JPN1, to enhance air flow to reach the street.
14. In determining the compliance with the set back requirement, the BA may
take into account the following factors where applicable: -
/(a) …
-5-
(a) Structures at levels higher than 15m above the street level may be allowed to
project over the set back area. The set back area at ground level under the
footprint of such structures may be exempted from GFA calculation if it is
designated as common areas accessible by all occupants of the building and
without any commercial activities. Where the covered area is not designated
as common areas but complies with the height and width requirements as
stipulated in paragraph 6 of PNAP APP-19, the covered area may not be
accountable for GFA;
(b) Minor projecting features as described in paragraph 3(a) and (d) to (g) of
PNAP APP-19; signboards projecting not more than 600mm from the
external walls and at a clear height of not less than 2.5m above the street
level; and single storey footbridges that are open on both sides and provided
with perforated railing, may be permitted within the set back area. If the set
back area is uncovered, a canopy that complies with the projection and height
limits stipulated in Regulation 10 of the B(P)R may also be permitted. For
the covered areas under the canopy, the criteria for exemption from GFA or
not being accountable for GFA as stipulated in item (a) above are also
applicable;
(c) Structural columns supporting the tower above may be permitted within the
set back area provided that any resultant clear space between the columns
and/or between the column and other parts of the building is not less than 3m
and, where the building is set back in accordance with paragraph 13(a) above,
the minimum sectional area for building set back shall not be less than 112.5
m2 (i.e. the same as the required building set back sectional area of 7.5m x
15m);
(d) Subject to item (f) below, the set back area should be properly landscaped
and/or paved, and be open and without any permanent building structures
other than landscaped features, perforated balustrades, perforated boundary
walls8 and/or structural columns as described in item (c) above;
(e) There will be satisfactory arrangements for the management and maintenance
of the set back area and any resultant flat roofs and covered areas; and
(f) The part of the set back area that forms the means of escape from or access to
the building shall be properly paved, unobstructed and lead directly to a
street.
15. Where the set back of the building in accordance with paragraph 13(a) above
will result in a set back area of more than 15% of the area of the site, requirement for
building set back may be relaxed if the following compensatory measures are provided :-
(a) Full height and full frontage set back of the building from the site boundary
abutting on the narrow street(s) by an area which is not less than 15% of the
area of the site; and
/(b) …
8
The set back area shall be so designed to provide high degree of visual connectivity and openness
fronting the street
-6-
(b) For small sites not exceeding 1,000 m2 , greenery should be provided at the
pedestrian zone such that the greenery area is not less than 50% of the set
back area. For other sites, site coverage of greenery to be provided at the
pedestrian zone should be increased by 5 % of the area of the site in addition
to the respective requirements as stated in paragraph 18 below. For the
avoidance of doubt, the required total greenery areas as stated in paragraph
18 below remains the same and all greenery areas shall comply with the
requirements in paragraph 19 below.
16. Taking into account the genuine need to improve air ventilation at pedestrian
level, development sites meeting the following criteria may be exempted from whole or
parts of the building set back requirement: -
(a) Where the height of the building9 is less than 2 times the mean width of the
street; or
(b) Where there are special constraint rendering the building set back
requirement undesirable and that other parts of the proposed building not
affected by the special constraints will comply with the building set back
requirements.
17. For the avoidance of doubt, non-building area and set back area required under
the OZP or lease conditions, area dedicated for public passage or surrendered for street
widening at street level under B(P)R 22 and set back area provided under PNAP APP-
132 facing the subject narrow street may form part or whole of the set back area required
under this PNAP provided that the criteria as stated in paragraphs 13 to 15 above are
complied with where applicable.
Site Coverage of Greenery
18. In order to improve the environmental quality of the urban space, particularly
at the pedestrian level and to mitigate the heat island effect, new building developments
with site areas of 1,000 m2 or more, shall be provided with greenery areas 10 at the
pedestrian zone, communal podium roof / flat roof / main roof, slope and retaining
structure, where appropriate, to meet the minimum site coverage of greenery as specified
in Table 2 below.
Site Area (A) Minimum Site Coverage of Greenery

(i.e. percentage of greenery area over site area)
Pedestrian zone Other locations Total greenery areas
1,000 m2 ≤A< 20,000 m2 10% no limit 20%
A ≥ 20,000 m2 15% no limit 30%
Table 2 Site coverage of greenery requirement
19. In determining the compliance with the greenery requirement, the BA may
take into account the following factors where applicable :-
/(a) …
9
Under this criterion, height of the building is measured from the mean level of the street on which
the building abuts to the mean height of the roof over the highest usable floor space in the building.
10
See Appendix A for definitions.
-7-
(a) Greenery areas shall be uncovered11 except at the pedestrian zone where they
may be covered under projecting features, provided that the clear height of the
projecting features above the covered area is not less than 8 times the
horizontal width of the covered area as shown in Appendix E;
(b) While trees, larger size vegetation and horizontal greenery are preferred,
features that may improve the micro-climate such as water features12, grass
paver, vertical greening and landscape-treated slopes / retaining structures may
also be accepted for computing not more than 30% of the total required
greenery areas, as detailed in Appendix F;
(c) Subject to paragraph 20 below, all greenery areas are designated as common
areas accessible by all occupants of the building except vertical greening and
greenery on slopes and retaining structures need not be accessible by all
occupants;
(d) Where greenery is provided on the roof, the roof shall be of impervious
construction and the calculation of the minimum imposed load on the roof shall
also take into account the anticipated loads of the soil, plants, trees, etc. in the
design; and
(e) Irrigation point(s) and drainage provision shall be provided to facilitate future
maintenance13.
20. For a development that comprises a single family house only, the restriction on
the location of greenery as given in Table 2 and paragraph 19(c) above will not be
applicable.
21. There are different types of green roof systems and reference can be made to
the “Study on Green Roof Application in Hong Kong Final Report” accessible from the
website of the Development Bureau at http://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/
content_29/Green%20roof%20study_final%20report.pdf.
Approval Conditions
22. PNAP APP-151 specifies the compliance with the SBD guidelines as one of
the pre-requisites for granting GFA concessions. When granting such modifications
under section 42 of the Buildings Ordinance, the BA may impose the following
conditions: -
/(a) …
11
For the avoidance of doubt, covered greenery above the pedestrian zone such as in covered
communal podium garden or sky garden shall be excluded from the greenery area calculation.
12
Water filtration plant room for water feature if so provided, may be exempted from GFA subject to
compliance with the pre-requisites and the overall GFA cap on GFA concessions stipulated in PNAP
APP-151.
13
A maintenance and management manual for the greenery to be made available for the end-users can
help safeguard public hygiene and safety of the greenery areas.
-8-
(a) The greenery areas shall not be used for any other purpose without the prior
consent of the Building Authority.
(b) The restriction on the use as stated in item (a) above and the greenery areas to
be designated as common areas shall be incorporated into the Deed of Mutual
Covenant (DMC) with details of their size (in area), locations and the common
access thereto clearly indicated on a plan(s). Where no DMC is to be in force,
such restriction and designation shall be incorporated into the Sales and
Purchase Agreement, Assignment or Tenancy Agreement.
(c) The letter of undertaking for complying with the requirements as stated in
items (a) and (b) above, submitted by the developer or owner in support of the
application for GFA concessions shall be registered in the Land Registry
before applying for the occupation permit.
Information and Documents to be Submitted
23. To demonstrate compliance with the building separation, building set back and
site coverage of greenery requirements, information as detailed in Appendix G and such
other information as may be required by the BA should be provided.
24. If a performance-based design alternative is proposed for demonstrating

compliance with the building separation requirements, additional information as detailed
in Appendix B should be provided for consideration. Any alternative design proposals
and applications for exemption or modification of the building separation, building set
back and site coverage of greenery requirements shall be supported by justifications.
Such proposals and applications may be examined by the expanded Building Committee
(BC) composing of external experts in the relevant fields. The BA may take into account
recommendations from the BC and any other relevant considerations in determining
acceptance of the proposal.
Disclosure for Public Information
25. To increase the transparency of information to the public, the following

information may be uploaded onto the BD website after the issuance of the occupation
permit : -
(a) Building plans showing the greenery areas together with the access thereto
which shall be designated as common areas, and a schedule of such areas.
/ 26. …
-9-
26. For ease of reference and to facilitate review of the AVA requirements, AVA
submitted to BD as part of the above submission will be included in the AVA Register
maintained by the Planning Department (PlanD) (format of the AVA register is attached
in Appendix H) 14 . AP is requested to seek consent from the owners to release the
information contained in the AVA proforma and /or the AVA reports for public
inspection. For projects which cannot be disclosed to the public due to confidentiality or
consent from owners has not been given, the information would be kept solely for the
government’s internal reference.
Implementation
27. This practice note is applicable to all new building plans or major revision of
building plans for development proposals submitted to the BA for approval on or after 1
April 2011. For the avoidance of doubt, subject to paragraph 28 below, this practice note
is also applicable to building plans which have been previously disapproved and are
resubmitted for approval on or after 1 April 2011.
28. For building plans which have been firstly submitted on or before 31 March
2011 and subsequently disapproved by the BA but not on ground relating to proof of
ownership or realistic prospect of control of the land forming the site, the first
resubmission of such plans to the BA on or after 1 April 2011, which is submitted within
6 months from the date of disapproval of the firstly submitted plans, would not be subject
to the requirements of this practice note. For the avoidance of doubt, if such first
resubmission of plans eventually has been disapproved by the BA, any further
resubmission of the plans would be subject to the requirements of this practice note.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/1-55/187/1
BD GP/BREG/P/49
14
HPLB TECHNICAL CIRCULAR NO. 1/06, Air Ventilation Assessments at
http://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_679/hplb-etwb-tc-01-06.pdf
Appendix A
(PNAP APP-152)
SBD Guidelines Terminology and Definitions
Air Ventilation Assessment Pursuant to the Team Clean's recommendation in August 2003, Planning
(AVA) Department was requested to promote better layout of building blocks in the city
through examination of stipulation of air ventilation assessment as one of the
considerations for all major development or redevelopment proposals and in
future planning. Accordingly, the "Feasibility Study for Establishment of Air
Ventilation Assessment System" (the AVA Study) was conducted and completed
in 2005. Air ventilation assessment becomes a protocol to objectively measure
the effects of planning and development proposals on external air movement for
achieving an acceptable macro wind environment.
A technical guide on the performance-based AVA methodology and a set of

qualitative guidelines to achieve better air ventilation objectives recommended in
the AVA Study was promulgated in 2006. The HKPSG has also been revised to
incorporate the guidelines on air ventilation since 2006.
Computational Fluid Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) is a branch of fluid mechanics using
Dynamics (CFD) numerical methods and algorithms to solve and analyze problems that involve
fluid flows. Computers are used to perform the millions of calculations required
to simulate the interaction of fluids and gases with the complex surfaces used in
engineering.
Continuous projected The total projected length of facade of a building or a group of buildings if any
facade length (Lp) separation in-between is less than 15m. (See Figures 2 & 3 of Appendix B)
Grass paver Paving block having not less than 50% of floor area for the growth of grass.
Greenery area Area planted with trees, shrubs, annuals, groundcovers, climbers, grasses and
other types of living plants. Other greening features including water features,
grass paver, vertical greening and landscape-treated slopes/retaining structures
with gradient steeper than 45 degree may be accepted as described in Appendix
F.
Pedestrian zone/Greenery To enhance in particular the environmental quality at pedestrian level, greenery
area at pedestrian zone area that:
i. abuts or has visual connection with a street or public pedestrian way/public
open space accessible from a street, and the top soil level, or the top level
of the frame or stack in the case of vertical greening, is within a level upto
15m above such street (see Figure 1 of Appendix E), and/or
ii. is provided at ground level or levels easily accessible to pedestrians which
includes greenery areas at street level and at level above street if such level
is accessible to pedestrians directly from a street.
Permeability (P) of The percentage area ratio obtained by dividing the sum of the elevational areas of
buildings all accountable intervening space between buildings, intervening space between
buildings and boundary lines, intervening space between buildings and centre
line of adjoining streets and permeable elements within, above, below or between
buildings by the sum of the elevational areas of the buildings and the aforesaid
intervening spaces and permeable elements, when projected onto a chosen
projection plane. (See Figures 9 to 14 of Appendix B)
Site Coverage of Greenery The percentage of total greenery area divided by the area of the site.
Site permeability For better urban air ventilation in a dense, hot-humid city, breezeways and air
paths should be provided in order to allow effective air movements into the urban
area to remove heat, gases and particulates and to improve the micro-climate of
urban environment. Within individual development sites, higher permeability will
-1-
help improve air ventilation. The provision for higher permeability of building
masses can be achieved by creating gaps between building blocks, between the
podium and the building blocks built atop (i.e., a void podium deck), set back
from street, and within building blocks at various levels, etc.
Street Street means a street vested in the Government and maintained by the Highways
Department or a private street on land held under the same Government lease as
the site and under the terms of the lease, the lessee has to surrender (when
required to do so) the land on which the street is situated to the Government, as
described under B(P)R18A(3)(a)(i) & (ii).
Street canyon A street canyon is a canyon (a deep narrow valley) formed in a street between
tall buildings on both sides. The important geometrical feature of a street canyon,
aspect ratio (H/W), is the major parameter influencing air ventilation between the
buildings, where H and W are the height of buildings and the width of a street
respectively. For canyons aspect ratio higher than 2, the air flow above building
height will become highly difficult to reach the pedestrian level where the
buildings are tightly packed to form a narrow street, especially when the flow is
perpendicular to the axis of the canyon. (See method of measurement of width of
street canyon (U) Figures 4-7 of Appendix B)
Vertical greening Greenery that grows on a vertical surface abutting a street or public pedestrian
way/public open space accessible from a street, and the top level of the frame or
stack is within a level upto 15m above such street (See Figure 1 of Appendix E).
Climbing and/or weeping plants along a frame mounted on the external walls of a
building, or other suitable plants on a stack of modular planters or panels that are
firmly fixed on permanent structures, or a combination of both are considered as
vertical greening for the purpose of compliance with the site coverage of
greenery requirements.
-2-
Appendix D
(PNAP APP-152)
Measures for Compliance with the Building Set Back Requirement
C/
L
street
≥ Min. 7.5m (w) x 15m (H) sectional area

15m
Min. 7.5m set back Min. 7.5m set back
Site Site
B.L. B.L.
Fig. 1 Building set back as detailed in paragraph 13(a)
Building structure above
street
*Communal podium garden
Greenery on communal
podium garden
15m
Inclined plane = 1/1
Width
(a) of street (a)
B.L. B.L. of opposite site
Fig. 2 Stepped building profile with communal podium garden as detailed in paragraph
13(b)
Note: * Communal podium garden shall comply with height, openness, size and greenery area requirements
stipulated in paragraph 1(d) of Appendix A of JPN1
/Measures …
-1-
Measures for Compliance with the Building Set Back Requirement (contd.)
Building structure above street
* Communal podium garden
15m Inclined plane = 1/1

Width
Podium (a) of street (a)
B.L. B.L. of opposite site
Fig. 3 Stepped building profile with communal podium garden as detailed in

paragraph 13(b)
Note: * Communal podium garden shall comply with height, openness, size and greenery area requirements
stipulated in paragraph 1(d) of Appendix A of JPN1
-2-
Appendix E
(PNAP APP-152)
Greenery Area at Pedestrian Zone
Width of
planter (w)
≥ 8w
≤15m
Planter
Street or public
pedestrian way/ public
open space connecting to
a street
Fig. 1 Greenery at pedestrian zone may be covered as detailed in paragraph 19(a)
-1-
Appendix F
(PNAP APP-152)
Method of Measurement for Compliance with Site Coverage of Greenery
1.1 All greenery areas shall be measured horizontally based on the soil1 areas as shown
on the plan, except as described in paragraph 1.2 below.
1.2 Other greening features may be accepted to contribute not more than 30% of the
total required greenery areas, subject to its location and application of a reduction
factor where applicable, as detailed below: -
Greening Features Location Reduction Site coverage

Factor in of greenery
Computing
the Greenery
Areas
2
Water features Pedestrian zone; 50%
uncovered communal
podium roof Not more than
Grass paver No restriction 50% 30% of the
3
Vertical greening Pedestrian zone Not applicable total greenery
4
Landscape-treated No restriction Not applicable areas specified
slopes/retaining in Table 2
structures with gradient
steeper than 45o
1.3 Greenery in removable pots/planters that are not permanently fixed or built into the
development is not accountable.
Notes
1. For reference, the recommended minimum soil depths for trees, shrubs, grass/ground
covers are 1.2m, 0.6m and 0.3m respectively.
2. Water features shall be measured by the horizontal water surface area. Swimming
pool and jacuzzi are not considered as water features.
3. Vertical greening shall be measured by the elevational area of the vertical frame (for
climbing and/or weeping plants) or the elevational area of the modular planter or
panel where the greenery will grow. For the avoidance of doubt, the horizontal area
of soil in planters under the vertical frame/modular planter/panel already counted for
vertical greening as aforesaid shall be excluded from the greenery area calculation.
Self-clinging climbing plants on hard surfaced walls shall be measured horizontally
based on the soil areas as shown on the plan (not counted as vertical greening and
therefore not subject to the restriction in paragraph 1.2 above).
4. Landscape-treated slopes/retaining structures shall be measured by the elevational

area of the soil where the greenery will grow, and where the gradient of the slope
varies, an averaged gradient may be accepted. For the avoidance of doubt, landscape-
treated slopes/retaining structures with gradient equal or less than 45 degrees is not
subject to the above restriction and will be measured horizontally based on the soil
area as shown on the plan.
-1-
Appendix G
(PNAP APP-152)
Information and Documents to be Submitted
To demonstrate compliance with the building separation, building set back and
site coverage of greenery requirements, the following information shall be provided for
consideration: -
Building Separation
(a) 1:1000 layout plans each showing the site in relation to its adjoining streets
and surrounding buildings and features. The footprint (external walls) of the
proposed buildings within the site, the provided intervening spaces, permeable
elements, the selected orthogonal projection planes, air corridors and air paths
are to be clearly shown to demonstrate compliance with the building
separation requirements for each low, middle and high zones.
(b) 1:500 plans, elevations, sections and calculations showing the street canyon(s)
(U), the maximum continuous projected façade length (Lp) of building(s) and
group(s) of buildings in comparison to the permissible Lp; the separating
distance (S) provided in comparison to the required S; and the permeability (P)
of buildings achieved at each low, middle and high zone, in comparison to the
minimum P.
Building Set Back
(c) A block plan showing the location of the subject site and the width of all
adjoining streets;
(d) Where the width of any street is less than 15m, further details such as level(s)
of the street for computing the amount of required set back.
(e) 1:200 plan(s) and section(s) with calculations demonstrating compliance with
the building set back requirements.
(f) Information showing the compliance of greenery areas requirement under

paragraph 15(b) of this PNAP is detailed in items (g) to (i) below.
Site Coverage of Greenery
(g) 1:500 plan(s) showing the locations of the proposed greenery areas, the
common access thereto and details of relevant street, public pedestrian way,
public open space for compliance with the requirement of greenery areas at
pedestrian zone(s).
(h) A schedule with calculations and illustrated diagrams showing the area of
proposed greenery at each location for compliance with the requirements in
Table 2.
(i) Location of irrigation point(s) and drainage provision.
-1-
Appendix H
(PNAP APP-152)
Format of the AVA Register for Private/Quasi-Government Projects

(Extracted from Annex C of HPLB Technical Circular No. 1/06, Air Ventilation
Assessment)
AVA Register for

Private/Quasi-Government Projects
Project Description
1. Project Title
2. Project Reference
3. Project Proponent
4. Outline of Project
Details
(attach location plan)
Page 1 of Appendix H
-1-
5. Select the following category(ries) which would be applicable to the project :
Comprehensive land use restructuring schemes, including schemes that

involve agglomeration of sites together with closure and building over of
existing streets.
Area-wide plot ratio and height control reviews.
Developments on sites over 2 hectares and with an overall plot ratio of 5 or
above.
Development proposals with total Gross Floor Area exceeding 100,000
square metres.
Developments with podium coverage extending over one hectare.
Development above public transport terminus.
Buildings with height exceeding 15 metres within a public space or
breezeway designated on layout plans / outline zoning plans or proposed by
planning studies.
Undeveloped waterfront sites with lot frontage exceeding 100 metres in
length.
Extensive elevated structures of at least 3.5 metres wide, which abut or
partially cover a pedestrian corridor along the entire length of a street block
that has / allows development at plot ratio 5 or above on both sides; or
which covers 30% of a public open space.
Others, please specify
_____________________________________________
-2-
6. Details of the AVA conducted for the project
(The AVA report, 3 hard copies and an electronic copy in Acrobat
format, is to be attached for record)
(a) AVA Consultants (if any)
(b) Time (start / finish)
(c) Assessment tool used (CFD or wind

tunnel)
(d) What were the major changes to the

design of the project resulting from the
AVA?
7. Disclosure of information to the public
Does the project proponent consent to Yes

release the AVA report for public No
inspection?
Does the project proponent consent to Yes

release information in this AVA proforma No
for public inspection?
8. Contact
(a) Name
(b) Designation
(c) Tel.
(d) E-mail
-3-
Appendix B
(PNAP APP-152)
Building Separation Requirement
1. Assessment and Method of Measurement
1.1 The design of building(s) above Level Zero (the mean street level on which the
site abuts or where the site abuts on streets having different levels, the mean level of the
lower or lowest street) of the site shall comply with the Design Requirements (1) and (2)
below. They shall be assessed separately for each of the three assessment zones i.e. the
low, middle and high zones as described in paragraph 7 of this PNAP.
1.2 All measurements are taken from the external walls of the building. Building
features that will not materially affect air ventilation around buildings, including single
storey bridges that are open on both sides and provided with perforated railings, signboards,
minor projecting features, open sided features such as balconies, utility platforms, covered
walkways and trellises and other highly permeable features such as railing (with free area ≥
2/3 or equivalent) may be disregarded in the building separation assessment. Individual
noise barriers that are not extensive in height and designed to permit air flow through or
over the barriers may also be disregarded subject to the provision of appropriate building
features or permeable elements such as communal podium gardens to compensate for the
barrier’s obstruction to free air flow to the satisfaction of the BA. For the avoidance of
doubt, buildings acting as noise barriers cannot be disregarded in the building separation
assessment.
1.3 Effect on air ventilation around buildings due to topographical features within a
site including any slope features and retaining walls may be disregarded. Any parts of a
building that are below the site topography may therefore be disregarded (see Figure 1).
Design Requirement (1) - Continuous Projected Façade Length (Lp) of building(s)

abutting a street
2.1 This requirement controls the maximum (Lp) of a building or a group of

buildings if any part of the building is within 30m from the centreline of the street on
which the building(s) abuts.
2.2 Subject to paragraphs 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5 below, the (Lp) of a building or a
group of buildings along its long side shall not exceed the maximum permissible Lp which
is obtained by multiplying 5 and the mean width of the street canyon(U) on which the
building(s) abuts. The width of such a street canyon is measured perpendicular to the
centreline of the street from the external wall of the building, that is vertically unobstructed
within the assessment zone and within 30m from the centreline of the street, to the lot
boundary of the other site on the opposite side of the street (see Figures 2 to 6). If the
building or group of buildings abuts two or more streets having different (U), the least (U)
shall be adopted.
/2.3 …
-1-
2.3 If the width of a street canyon varies (on plan), (U) is the width obtained by
dividing the area of such a street canyon by its length as measured along the centreline of
the street. If only a part of the building is within 30m from the centreline of the street, (U)
is the mean width of the street canyon that abuts such part of the building. If there is more
than one such street canyon along the same street, (U) is the width obtained by dividing
the sum of the areas of such street canyons by the sum of the lengths, as measured along
the centreline of the street, of such street canyons. (see Figure 7)
2.4 For the purpose of measuring individual Lp of a building or a group of

buildings along its long side, the part of the building(s) that is within the low zone and of a
height of not more than 6.67m (1/3 of 20m which is the height of the low zone) may be
disregarded.
2.5 This Design Requirement on the maximum permissible Lp may not be

applicable under the following circumstances:
(a) If the site does not abut a street;

(b) If no building is within 30m from the centreline of any streets on which the site
abuts;
(c) If no parts of the building within an assessment zone is within 30m from the
centreline of any streets on which the site abuts, this Design Requirement may
not be applicable to such parts of the building within the assessment zone only;
or
(d) If there are such other special circumstances rendering the control on the
maximum permissible Lp undesirable or unnecessary, as may be accepted by
the BA.
For the avoidance of doubt, compliance with the following Design

Requirement (2) is still required unless otherwise exempted.
Design Requirement (2) - Separating Distance (S) & Permeability (P) of Buildings
3. Projection Planes for Assessment
3.1 Subject to paragraph 3.3 below, assessment on compliance with the Design
Requirement (2) shall be made through a pair of vertical projection planes (x, y) at an
orthogonal relationship to each other. (see Figure 8) At least one of the projection planes
for the low zone shall be set parallel to a street on which the site abuts. For a site that abuts
on a curvilinear street, the projection plane for the low zone shall be set along any tangent
of the street. For the middle/high zones, such pair of projection planes may be set to suit
the building disposition or the site wind environment.
3.2 To allow more flexibility in building design, the angle between each pair of
projection planes may vary from 75 to 105 degrees.
3.3 For a site that is less than 2 hectares, assessment on compliance with the Design
Requirement (2) may only be required on one projection plane (instead of a pair), if the
total width of all projected building facades as projected onto the other projection plane is
less than 60m.
/4. …
-2-
4. Separating Distance (S) & Permeability (P) of Buildings
4.1 Subject to paragraphs 4.6 and 4.7 below, elevation of all buildings within the
site shall be projected onto the chosen projection planes. On each projection plane, the
required permeability (P) of buildings as stipulated in Table 1 of this PNAP shall be
achieved (see Figure 9).
4.2 Not less than 2/3 of the required (P) shall be provided by intervening spaces.
All intervening spaces shall be open to above or of a clear height of not less than 2/3 of the
assessment zone. There shall be intervening space(s) between the ends of the projected
building facades and the adjacent site boundaries or where the site abuts a street or a lane1,
the centreline of such adjoining street or lane. Such intervening space(s) as projected onto
the chosen projection plane shall have a separating distance (S) of not less than 7.5m wide.
If the distance between the end of a projected building facade and the boundary line or the
centreline of the adjoining street / lane varies on plan, the mean (S) shall not be less than
7.5m subject to no part of the building be within 3m from the boundary line. (See Figures
10 to 12) If such intervening spaces are not sufficient to meet 2/3 of the required (P),
buildings shall also be separated by intervening spaces. Intervening space(s) between 2
projected building facades shall have an (S) of not less than 15m wide.
4.3 Not more than 1/3 of the required (P) may be provided by permeable elements.
Permeable elements may be provided within, above, below or between buildings e.g.
refuge floors, communal sky gardens etc. (see Figures 13 & 14)
4.4 The minimum clear width / height of all permeable elements as projected onto
the chosen projection plane is 3m.
4.5 To allow more design flexibility, the projected façade of the intervening space
between buildings and between buildings and the boundary lines within an assessment
zone may follow the path of a notional air corridor that starts at 90 degrees from the
projection plane (on plan). The air corridor may flow between buildings and may change
direction without changing its width, when it meets the boundary line or anywhere within
the site, by not more than 15 degrees provided the direction of the air corridor after the
change of course is always within 15 degrees from its original path before it enters the site.
The minimum width of the air corridor along its path between buildings shall not be less
than 15m. (See Figures 15 to 18).
4.6 When the site is large and / or of irregular shape, the site may be subdivided
into two or more notional sites provided that the line of the sub-divisioning is located along
the centreline of a notional wind path that complies with the following requirements:
(a) the wind path is open to above from the lowest level of the subject assessment
zone;
(b) it is of a width of not less than 15m;
/(c) …
1
Open space outside the site boundary is not accountable for (P). However, where an area is zoned as open
space on the Outline Zoning Plan / Development Permission Area Plan and provided such area is
designated as promenade or non-building area on the relevant town plan, such area may be treated as a
lane for the purpose of assessing (S) and (P).
-3-
(c) it is continuous across the site in one direction or it may change in direction by
not more than 15 degrees provided its direction after the change of course is
always within 15 degrees from its original path2;
(d) where it meets the site boundaries, there is a street or lane with a mean width of
not less than 7.5m.
4.7 After subdividing the site, the (P) may be assessed separately for each
subdivided site using the same or a different pair of orthogonal projection planes. (see
Figures 19 & 20)
4.8 A sample case on assessment of building separation provisions is given in

Appendix C.
5. Performance-based Design Alternative on the Provision of (P)
5.1 Subject to compliance with the minimum permeability (P) of buildings as

specified in Table 1 and paragraph 7 of this PNAP and satisfactory demonstration by
applying air ventilation assessment (AVA) that the buildings’ potential impact on the local
wind environment has been duly considered and that by comparing with a baseline case
which complies with the above Design Requirements, the proposed design is equivalent or
better in external air ventilation terms, the BA is prepared to accept alternative designs that
do not comply with the prescriptive requirements specified in Design Requirement (1) and
paragraphs 4.2 and 4.3 of Design Requirement (2) above.
5.2 The air ventilation assessment shall be properly done by referring to the latest
methodology and requirements of Technical Circular No. 1/06 on Air Ventilation
Assessments3 using wind tunnel modelling or digital representation of the physical and
wind environment using CFD simulations.
5.3 For projects adopting a performance-based design alternative, the following

information with full justifications for deviation from the prescribed requirements shall be
submitted in two stages:
Stage 1 Submission
(a) An expert evaluation on whether the tools and methodologies for AVA
employed are fit for the purpose and are suitably verified and scientifically
validated with practical merits shall be carried out. In this connection,
submission for prior acceptance of all information listed below covering factors
like site configuration, local topography, wind characteristic and sensitive
receivers in the surrounding areas, relevant urban climatic considerations, etc. is
required:
/(i) …
2
The wind path should preferably align with the summer prevailing wind direction or existing street pattern.
3
The Technical Circular No 1/06 issued by the Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau is available from the
website at http://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_679/hplb-etwb-tc-01-06.pdf
-4-
(i) a baseline case that fully complies with all the prescriptive Design
Requirements (1) and (2);
(ii) details of scientific bases to assess performance;
(iii) analysis tools and/or design procedures;
(iv) modeling input, settings and parameters for the analysis and/or design;
(v) limitation and applicability of the proposal in context;
(vi) interpretation of results;
(vii) method of verification;
(viii) similar established standard and implementation in other places; and
(ix) documented references of the scientific bases.
Stage 2 Submission
(b) A study report on whether the proposed scheme will be in line with urban
climatic considerations and such similar requirements as imposed through the
town planning approval process or in Government lease; and
(c) An AVA report on whether the proposed scheme will perform better in external
air ventilation terms, demonstrated by the simulation results of the proposed
scheme as compared to the simulation results of the baseline case.
5.4 Upon approval of the proposal, additional three hard copies and an electronic
copy in Acrobat format for each AVA report shall be submitted together with a copy of the
completed AVA register (Appendix G) for uploading to the AVA register as detailed in
paragraph 26 of the PNAP.
-5-
Appendix B
Site Topography & Sunken Buildings (PNAP APP-152)
• Site “Level Zero” is the mean level of the lower or lowest street(s)
• The height of a building shall be measured to the mean height of the roof over the highest usable floor space
• Disregard any building below Level Zero or any sunken part of a building
• Disregard the effect on air ventilation around buildings due to topographical features of the site
CL of adjoining Common
street/ lane B.L.
Max.
Bldg Ht Tower 1 Tower 2 Tower 3 & 4 Tower 5
High Zone
60m(H)
Middle Zone
20m(H)
Low Zone
Level 0
B.L.
Elevational Projection (across the entire site)

Fig. 1
Individual "Continuous Projected Façade Length (Lp)"
The total projected length of façade of a building or a group of buildings if any separation in-between
is <15m (as projected to the long side of a notional rectangle for measurement)
• Building portions at low zone of height ≤6.67m (1/3H of low zone) may be disregarded in (Lp)
measurement (see Fig.11)
A notional rectangle for measuring (Lp) of a building or a group of buildings along its long side
Fig. 2
Individual (Lp) of a building or group of buildings along its long side
20m 30m 10m

m
= 60
)
(Lp
50m
(Lp)=70m ≥15m
≥15m
20m 10m 30m

(Lp)=60m (Lp)=50m
L2
20m
(Lp) = 80m
20m 30m 10m
20m <15m
<15m L1
50m 10m
20m
20m 10m 30m 10m As L2> L1, (Lp) = L1

70m
• A notional rectangle for measuring (Lp) of a building or a group of buildings along its long side.
• Where the building or group of buildings is irregular in shape, the notional rectangle may be the Fig. 3
smallest rectangle that contains the building or group of buildings
Width of Adjoining Street Canyon (U)
Distance from the external wall of a proposed building to the B.L. of the opposite site(s)
across the street
• street canyon shall be vertically unobstructed. Signboards, minor projecting features,
open sided features e.g. balconies, utility platforms, covered walkways and trellises
may be disregarded.
Opposite Lot B.L.
Fig. 4
Adjoining Street Canyon
Buildings subject to control on

individual (Lp)
• buildings/groups of buildings wholly or
partly within 30m from the centreline
of an adjoining street.
Fig. 5
Mean Width of Adjoining Street Canyon (U) & Max.
Individual (Lp)
Max. (Lp) = 5 x (U)

• If the building abuts two or more
streets, the lesser or least (U)
• Building A
U3A<<U1
U3 U1A; ;max.
max.(Lp)(A)
(Lp)A ==55xxU3
U3AA
A A
• Building B
U1B < U2B ; max (Lp)B = 5 x U1B
Fig. 6
Mean Width of Street Canyon (U)
Building A Building B
When width of the adjoining street canyon No part of the building is closer than 30m to the
varies, the mean width of (U) shall be street centrelines. Building B is not subject to the
determined as: Design Requirement on (Lp).
Street Canyon Area (A1)
UA1 = ------------------------------------------ Building C
Length (A1) (Lp) is determined by the width of (U) at Street 2:
• When UA1 < UA2, max. (Lp)A = 5 x UA1 • (Lp)C = 5 x UC2
CL
A1 30m
1
EET
R S ≥15m Building S ≥15m
ST Building A B
Building C
30m
30m
Adjoining Lot B.L.
A2(a) A2(b) C2
STREET 2 CL
Opposite Lot B.L.

Street Canyon Area [A2(a) + A2(b)] Street Canyon Area (C2)
UA2 = ---------------------------------------------------- UC2 = -------------------------------
Length [A2(a) + A2(b)] Length (C2) Fig. 7
A pair of Projection Planes for (P) assessment
Low Zone Middle/Upper Zone
Adj. Adj.
Lot Lot
o 75
75-105 -10
5o
• Low Zone
- one of the planes parallel to an adjoining street
• Middle/High Zone
- any pair chosen to suit the building disposition or environmental context e.g. prevailing wind direction
• (P) assessment on one plane only if:
(a) site < 2ha, and
(b) the total width of all projected building facades as projected onto the other plane <60m
Fig. 8
Permeability (P) of Buildings
(P) is the percentage area ratio of the sum of projected intervening spaces & permeable elements
over individual assessment zone on a projection plane
Sum of areas of intervening spaces & permeable elements

(P) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X 100%
Area of the assessment zone
Max. street/lane B.L.
Building
Tower 1 Tower 2 Tower 3 & 4 Tower 5
Height
High Zone
60m(H)
Middle Zone
20m(H)
Low Zone
Level 0
Low Zone
B.L.
Common B.L.
Fig. 9
Permeability (P) of Buildings – Intervening Spaces
Intervening spaces shall account for min. 2/3 of the required (P)
Sum of areas of intervening spaces

-------------------------------------------------- x 100% ≥ 2/3 x (P)
Building
Tower 1 Tower 2 Tower 3 & 4 Tower 5
Height
<15m
High Zone
60m(H)
Middle Zone HM
≥ 2/3HM
20m(H)
≥ 2/3HL
Level 0 Low Zone ≥ 2/3HL
HL
B.L.
Common B.L.
Fig. 10
Intervening Space
Provision of intervening spaces with separating distance (S) between projected facades ≥ 15m, and
between end of a projected façade and adjacent common B.L. or centreline of adj. street/lane ≥ 7.5m
• Height of such intervening space ≥ 2/3H of the Assessment Zone, or
• It is open to above
Centreline of adjoining Common

street/lane B.L.
≥ 7.5m ≥ 15m ≥ 7.5m
I.S./
<2/3(H)
P.E.
I.S. I.S. I.S. 2/3(H)
Projected Projected
Building Building
Façade (A) Façade (B)
Assessment
Zone (H)
B.L.
Assessment Zone (W) Elevational Projection
(across the entire site)
Building portions at low zone of height Intervening space (I.S.) if open to above
≤1/3H of the zone may be disregarded Permeable elements (P.E.) if covered
in (Lp) measurement (see Fig.2) Fig. 11
Mean Width of Separating Distance
Mean width between projection line at building ends to common B.L. or centreline of street/lane
Area (D)
S3 = ------------------ (≥ 7.5m)
Length (D)
Projection Plane X
Assessment Zone (W)

S1 S2 S3
(Lp)AG (Lp)B
m
CL STREET 1 ≥3
Building Group Building

AG B
D
≥7.5m ≥15m
Area (D)
CL
STREET 2
Plan
Fig. 12
Permeability (P) of Buildings – Permeable Elements
Permeable elements may contribute to maximum 1/3 of the required (P)
Sum of areas of permeable elements

------------------------------------------------------- x 100% ≤ 1/3 x (P)
Building
Height Tower 1 Tower 2 Towers 3 & 4 Tower 5
High Zone
60m(H)
Middle Zone
20m(H)
Level 0 Low Zone
B.L.
B.L.
Common B.L.
Fig. 13
Permeable Elements
Provision of permeable elements within, above, below or between buildings
• clear opening size of such a permeable element is not less than 3m
Centreline of adjoining Common

street/lane B.L.
≥7.5m <15m ≥7.5m
≥2/3(H)
P.E. P.E. P.E.
Assessment
Zone (H)
Projected Building Facade

P.E.
B.L.
Assessment Zone (W) P.E. Permeable elements

Fig. 14
Design Flexibility notional air corridor / wind path
• Change in direction ≤ 15º when it meets the boundary line or anywhere within the site
• Direction deviate ≤ 15º from the original path
• Width of the intervening space / notional air corridor / wind path remains unchanged after
such change in directions
Fig. 15
Notional Air Corridor Separating distance (S) between buildings & at façade ends
• When projection plane X is placed on either side of the site, length of a building façade so projected on the planes may vary.
• (P) assessment may be based on the projection on either one of the planes X(1) or X(2) as chosen.
• separating distance (S) between buildings ≥15m.
• mean separating distance between the facade end and adjacent common B.L. or centreline of adj. street/lane ≥7.5m subject
to the condition that no part of the building be closer than 3m from the common B.L. with adjoining lot.
Projection Plane X(1)
Assessment Zone (W)1

S1 S2 S3
(Lp)A1 (Lp)B1 Area (D)
S3 = ----------------
Opposite Lot B.L. Length (D)
CL STREET 1
≥ 3m
Common B.L.
Co
mm
on
B.
o
≤15 D
L.
o
≤15 o
≤15
≥ 7.5m
≥15m .
B.L
Site
CL ite Area (D)
STREET 2 ppos
O
S1 (Lp)A2 S2 (Lp)B2 S3
Assessment Zone (W)2 Plan Fig. 16
Projection Plane X(2)
Notional Air Corridor Separating distance at façade ends
• When projection plane Y is placed on either side of the site, length of a building façade so projected on the planes may vary.
• (P) assessment may be based on the projection on either one of the planes Y(1) or Y(2) as chosen.
• mean separating distance between the facade end and centreline of the adjoining street/lane ≥ 7.5m subject to the condition
that no part of the building be closer than 3m from the common B.L. with adjoining lot.
Area (D)
S = ---------------- (≥ 7.5m)
Length (D)
Projection Plane Y(1)
D2
Projection Plane Y(2)

Opposite Lot B.L.
STREET 1
S2
S2
o
≤15
Assessment
Co
o
≤15
Assessment Zone (W)L
Zone (W)R
mm
(Lp)R
on
Common B.L.
B.
(Lp)L
L.
≤15m ≤15
o
S1
S1
STREET 2
Opposite Lot B.L.

D1
Plan Area (D)
Fig. 17
Notional Air Corridor Separating distance at façade ends
• Mean separating distance (S) between the facade end and common B.L. or centreline of the
adjoining street/lane ≥ 7.5m subject to the condition that no part of the building shall be closer
than 3m from the common B.L. with adjoining lot.
• When the site abuts two adjoining streets • When the site abuts a street and an adjoining lot
Fig. 18
Wind Path passing through the site
Dividing the site into TWO or more notional sites for (P) assessment
• vertically uncovered and unobstructed above the lowest level of the assessment zone
• width ≥ 15m
• leading to a street or to a lane of mean width ≥ 7.5m at either ends
“A” “B”
Co
mm
on
B.L
Common B.L.
.
Fig. 19
Sub-divided Notional Sites for (P) Assessment
• Separating distance (S) at the projected facade end shall be measured to the notional B.L.
at centreline of the wind path.
• Individual pair of projection planes may be chosen for each of the TWO sub-divided sites
for (P) assessment.
• Site "Level Zero" of the original undivided site shall be used for all notional sites.
Notional Site “A” Notional Site “B”

Projection Plane Y("A")
")
( "B
Y e
Plan
on
cti
oje ≥ 7.5m
Pr ")
≥ 7.5m ("B
X
la ne
nP
ctio
oje
Pr Plan
Projection Plane X ("A")
Fig. 20
Appendix C
(PNAP APP-152)
Building Separation Assessment
Sample Case Projection Plane X
2 2
• Site area =1,920m (< 20,000 m )
Street (15m) UT UP
• Proposed building: one tower above a podium of 15m(H)
• Max. building height = 78m (> 60m)
4m Adjoining
• The site abuts a street of 15m wide Site
Tower
• (Lp) of a podium with full site coverage = 80m( ≥60m, assessment required) 24m
Podium
78m(H)
80m
PLAN
High Zone
60m(H) Design Requirement (1)

Max. (Lp) = 5 x U
Tower Building at Low Zone

Middle Zone • UP = 15m, max. (Lp)P = UP x 5 = 75m
• (Lp) of proposed podium = 80 m (> 75m )
18 m 32 m 30 m
(i.e. NOT OK)
20m(H)
Building at Middle/High Zone
• UT = 19m, max. (Lp)T = UT x 5 = 95m
Low Zone • (Lp) of proposed tower = 32m (< 95m )
15m Podium (i.e. OK)
Level 0
Common B.L. 80m Common B.L.
Projected Facade Through Projection Plane X Fig. 1

Building Separation Assessment Projection Plane X
Design Requirement (2) - Low Zone Street (15m)

7.5m 7.5m
• Minimum (P) = 20% (from Table 1)
• Set Projection Plane X parallel to the Street
4m Adjoining Site
24m Tower
Podium
80m
Intervening Space & Separating Distance

• min. 7.5m to common B.L.
• open to above, or of height ≥ 2/3 of the Assessment Zone
• (Lp)P = 80m – (7.5m x 2) = 65m (< 75m, i.e. OK)
Total facade area of the intervening spaces

= (7.5x13.4)m2 + (7.5x13.4 + 22.5x5)m2 = 313.5m2
7.5m 22.5m 7.5m
29.5m 13m
(P) achieved by the intervening spaces
= 313.5m2 / (20x80)m2 x 100%
Podium Garden/Roof = 19% (< 20%, but not less than (2/3) x 20% = 13.33%)
13.4m
20m Podium Facade area of the permeable element
= 13m x 5m = 65m2
(P) achieved by the permeable element

80m = 65m2 / (20x80)m2 x 100%
Projected Facade Through Projection Plane X = 4% (< (1/3) x 20% = 6.66%, i.e. all accountable)
Overall (P) achieved at low zone

Intervening space Permeable element = 19% +4% = 23% (> 20%, i.e. OK) Fig. 2
Building Separation Assessment
Design Requirement (2) - Middle/High Zone
78m(H) Projection Plane X
Street (15m)
7.5m 7.5m
High Zone
4m Adjoining Site
60m(H)
24m Tower
Podium
Tower
80m
Middle Zone
Intervening Space & Separating Distance

18m
18m 32m 30m
• min. 7.5m to common B.L.
20m(H) • open to above or of height ≥ 2/3 of the Assessment Zone
Podium Garden/Roof • (Lp)T = 32m(< 95m, i.e. OK)
Total facade area of the intervening spaces

Level 0
= (18x58)m2 + (30x58)m2 = 2784m2
80m
Overall (P) achieved
Projected Facade Through Projection Plane X = 2784m2 / (80x58)m2 x 100%
= 60% (> 20%, i.e. OK)
Intervening space
Fig. 3
Buildings Department APP-153
Registered Structural Engineers and
Code of Practice for Fire Safety in Buildings 2011
Following the completion of a review on the current Code of Practice for

the Provision of Means of Escape 1996 (the “MOE Code”), Code of Practice for Fire
Resisting Construction 1996 (the “FRC Code”) and Code of Practice for Means of
Access for Firefighting and Rescue 2004 (the “MOA Code”), a new Code of Practice for
Fire Safety in Buildings 2011 (the “FS Code”) is promulgated to provide guidance on
compliance with the requirements for the provision of means of escape, means of access
for firefighting and rescue and fire resisting construction as laid down in Regulations
41(1), 41A, 41B, 41C and 41D of the Building (Planning) Regulations and Regulation 90
of the Building (Construction) Regulations. The FS Code substitutes the MOE Code, the
FRC Code and the MOA Code. It comprises seven parts with one annex as follows:-
Part A Introduction
Part B Means of Escape
Part C Fire Resisting Construction
Part D Means of Access
Part E Fire Properties of Building Elements and Components
Part F Fire Safety Management
Part G Guidelines on Fire Engineering
Annex A List of Codes of Practice and Guides issued by Licensing

Authorities for Licensed Premises
Application
2. The FS Code shall come into operation on 1.4.2012 except for the
following:-
(i) For buildings or building works which are being carried out or consent to
the commencement of which has been given on or before 1.4.2012, the
MOE Code, the FRC Code and the MOA Code may continue to be used as
the basis for the design of such buildings or building works. For avoidance
of doubt, in respect of new buildings, the relevant consent refers to the
consent to the commencement of foundation works for such buildings.
/2(ii)…..
-2-
(ii) The FS Code may be used for plans submitted before 1.4.2012 upon issue
of this practice note provided that the FS Code is used in its entirety for
the design and construction of the entire building or building works
concerned. Partial application will not be accepted.
(iii) The FS Code is not applicable to fire safety measures improvement

required under the Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance Cap. 502
or the Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance Cap. 572. Practice Notes for
Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers APP-94 and APP-145 should be referred to.
3. The FS Code shall apply to the following situations, which are not
explicitly provided for in the relevant Ordinances or Regulations, in the manner as
described below:-
(i) Alteration and addition works in existing buildings
Generally only the areas affected by the proposed alteration and addition
(“A&A”) works (including the affected exit routes) will need to comply
with the requirements of the FS Code. The remaining parts of the building
not affected by the proposed A&A works need not follow the FS Code.
(ii) Licensed premises
Similar to (i) above, only the areas in a building subject to a new licence
application or A&A licence application (including the affected exit routes)
will need to comply with the requirements of the FS Code.
(iii) Consent for works shown on plans approved prior to effective date of the
FS Code
There is generally no objection to issuing consent to the commencement of

building works shown on plans approved prior to 1.4.2012 which follow
the MOE Code, the FRC Code and the MOA Code, provided that the
consent application is made within two years of the date of the first
approval and the application is in order in all other aspects. In such cases,
the authorized person/registered structural engineer should submit
amended plans to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the FS
Code for approval as necessary, before application for an occupation
permit. If the building works carried out do not comply with the
requirements of the FS Code, the application for occupation permit may be
refused under section 21(6) of the Buildings Ordinance (“BO”). The BA
may also invoke section 16(3)(d) of the BO to refuse consent if the first
approval of the plans described above has been given more than two years.
4. The FS Code is now available for reference or download at the BD’s

website – www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/code/fs_code2011.pdf. It will be available
for sale at the Online Government Bookstore from April 2012 onwards.
/5…..
-3-
Withdrawal of Practice Notes
5. With the coming into operation of the FS Code, the following practice notes
will be withdrawn with effect from 1.4.2012:-
PNAP APP–14 Cinemas and Other Places of Public Entertainment

(PNAP 54) in Non-domestic Buildings or Composite Buildings
PNAP APP–75 Building (Planning) Regulations 41A, 41B and

(PNAP 182) 41C – Means of Access for Firefighting and
Rescue in Buildings
PNAP APP–80 Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction

(PNAP 192) 1996
PNAP APP–81 Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment)

(PNAP 194) Regulation 1996 and Associated Legislative
Amendments
PNAP APP–82 Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of

(PNAP 195) Escape in Case of Fire 1996
PNAP APP–83 Amendments and Clarification to Code of Practice

(PNAP 199) for Fire Resisting Construction 1996
PNAP APP–85 Application of the Revised Fire Safety Codes

(PNAP 202)
PNAP APP–87 Guide to Fire Engineering Approach

(PNAP 204)
PNAP APP–91 Maintenance and Replacement Works of Lift

(PNAP 209) Installations
PNAP APP–92 Amendments and Clarification to Code of Practice

(PNAP 210) for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of
Fire 1996
PNAP APP–106 Fire Resisting Construction – Kitchens in

(PNAP 231) Restaurants
PNAP APP–121 Amendment to Code of Practice for Provision of

(PNAP 257) Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996
PNAP APP–123 Alternative Designs – Paragraph 12.3 of the Code

(PNAP 260) of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996
/6…..
-4-
6. For avoidance of doubt, the practice notes listed above will continue to
apply to buildings and building works designed and constructed in accordance with the
MOE Code, FRC Code and MOA Code.
( AU Choi-kai )
Building Authority
Ref. : BD GR/CONS/14/E
First issue : September 2011 (AD/CS)

Combined PNAP Ordiance PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Combined PNAP Ordiance PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized

Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-1

Practice Note for Authorized Persons

Landlord and Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance, Cap. 7

Validity of Approved Plans

2. For a project affected by an Exclusion Order, amendments as follows to the

(a) a reduction in floor space of more than 10%; or

(b) a change in use of any part of the proposed building; or

4. In case of delays to commencement of building works by the date laid down in an

/5. Examples ....

5. Examples of circumstances which may justify penalty-free extensions are :

(a) inability to obtain vacant possession, subject to the applicant

(b) inability to obtain entry to adjacent property to construct adequate

(c) inability to obtain consent to commence demolition works for

(Helen C P Lai YU)

First issued December 1974

Index under : BO s16(3A) - Approved Plans

Practice Note for Authorized Persons

Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable Gross Floor Area

Calculation of Gross Floor Area

2. However where large voids occur, a modification of B(P)R 23(3)(a) may be

(a) in front of cinema and theatre balconies;

(b) in banking halls and shopping arcades;

(c) in single-staircase buildings in which cockloft floors are provided in

(e) in main common entrance lobbies.

(d) swimming pool filtration plant rooms; and

6. Cladding may take a variety of forms and as a general rule, should be

7. External wall finishes may be disregarded for the purpose of measurement of

Non-accountable Gross Floor Area

10. Air-conditioning plant rooms to be excluded from GFA calculation should as a

(c) The open side should face into open air.

Where an air-conditioning plant room is not proposed, air-conditioning platforms,

Carparking and Loading and Unloading Areas

(a) Carparking spaces

(i) When a lot is subject to lease/grant conditions requiring the provision

• Where private and public carparking spaces are provided on

(b) Public Transport Terminus (PTT)

(c) Loading and Unloading Areas

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/9 (VII)

First issue December 1974

EXTERNAL WALL OF THE EXTERNAL WALL OF THE

Practice Note for Authorised Persons

Nomination of an Authorized Person,

When an authorized person (AP), registered structural engineer (RSE) or

(b) in the case of a RSE or a RGE appointed in respect of more than

(c) advise the nominee that if it is necessary for him to communicate

(d) advise the nominee that he cannot further nominate another

(e) advise BD by letter within 7 days that the arrangements covered

3. Under section 4(2) of the Buildings Ordinance, an AP/RSE/RGE may

(i) the period must be temporary; AND

(ii) he is unable to act by reason of his illness or absence from

4. To avoid ambiguity and abuse of the Buildings Ordinance, Building

5. Upon receipt of an application, Buildings Department will formally

First issue December 1974

Index under : AP, RSE or RGE - Nomination thereof to act instead

Water Supply and Wells

Where a development depends on a source of water supply other than

User Unit Average

Restaurants per seat per day 13.5 litres

Cinemas per seat per day 4.5 litres

Schools per head per day 18 litres

Hotels and boarding houses per room per day 90 litres

5. In view of the diversity and degree of fluctuation in demand, potable

BD Ref. : _________ Date :

Certificate of Registration No. __ Expiry date _

BD Ref. : ___________ Date :

Certificate of Registration No. __ Expiry date _